Radcare R Package

RADCARE - SPECIALZED RADIOLOGY CENTRE
B01- King Fahd Road
RIYADH - KINGDOM SAUDI ARABIA

DETAIL DESIGN
ARCHITECTURAL AND INTERIOR DESIGN
LIST OF DELIVERABLES
NOVEMBER 2023_rev.00
ARCHITECTURAL AND INTERIOR DESIGN LIST OF DELIVERABLES

RADCARE - Specialzed Radiology Centre - B01- King Fahd Road
Architectural and Interior Design List of Deliverables

# DOCUMENT CODE REV TITLE SCALE N.PAGES FORMAT
DISCIPLINE
DOC TYPE
NUMBER
PHASE
PROJECT CODE
1 2 0 2 3 0 3 6DDAR 0 0 0 0 0 0 Architectural and Interior Design List of Deliverables - 3 A4

2 2 0 2 3 0 3 6DDAR 0 0 0 1 0 0 Architectural Technical Description - 15 A4
3 2 0 2 3 0 3 6DDAR 0 0 0 2 0 0 Interior Design Renders - 13 A3
4 2 0 2 3 0 3 6DDAR 0 0 0 3 0 0 Signage - 10 A4
5 2 0 2 3 0 3 6DDAR 0 0 0 4 0 0 Lighting Fixtures Book - 14 A4
6 2 0 2 3 0 3 6DDAR 0 0 0 5 0 0 Selected Materials - Door Hardware & Vendor list - 44 A4
7 2 0 2 3 0 3 6DDAR 0 0 0 6 0 0 Toilet Cut Sheet - 13 A4
8 2 0 2 3 0 3 6DDAR 0 0 0 7 0 0 Toilet Cut Sheet Summary - 2 A3
9 2 0 2 3 0 3 6DDAR 0 0 0 8 0 0 Furniture Cut Sheet - 42 A4
10 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A R 0 0 0 9 0 0 Architectural RDS & Finishing Table - 6 A3
11 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A R 0 0 1 0 0 0 Door Schedule - 3 A3
12 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A R 0 0 1 1 0 0 Equipment List per room - 9 A4
13 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A R 0 0 1 2 0 0 Bill of Quantities for Architectural and Interior Design - 66 A4
14 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A R 0 0 1 3 0 0 FF&E BoQ details (only for coordination) - 4 A4
15 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A R 0 0 1 4 0 0 Technical Specifications - 490 A4
16 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 0 1 0 0 0 0 Floor Layout Ground Floor 1:100 1 A1

17 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 0 1 0 1 0 0 Floor Layout Ground Floor 1/4 1:50 1 A1
21 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 0 1 0 5 0 0 Floor Layout First Floor 1:100 1 A1
22 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 0 1 0 6 0 0 Floor Layout First Floor 1/4 1:50 1 A1
23 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 0 1 0 7 0 0 Floor Layout First Floor 2/4 1:50 1 A1
24 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 0 1 1 0 0 0 Sections 1:100 1 A1
25 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 0 1 1 1 0 0 Sections 1:100 1 A1
26 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 0 1 2 0 0 0 Elevations & Façade 1:100 1 A1
27 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 0 1 3 0 0 0 Flooring Plan Ground Floor 1:100 1 A1
28 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 0 1 3 1 0 0 Flooring Plan First Floor 1:100 1 A1
29 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 0 1 4 0 0 0 False Ceiling Plan Ground Floor 1:100 1 A1
30 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 0 1 4 1 0 0 False Ceiling Plan First Floor 1:100 1 A1
31 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 0 0 0 0 0 Furniture Plan Ground Floor 1:100 1 A1
32 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 0 0 1 0 0 Furniture Plan First Floor 1:100 1 A1
33 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 0 5 0 0 0 Ground Floor Millworks, Typical Toilet and Room Design Tagging 1:100 1 A1
34 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 0 5 1 0 0 First Floor Millworks, Typical Toilet and Room Design Tagging 1:100 1 A1
35 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 1 0 0 0 0 Millworks Reception Desk - MI1010 - 06200 Architectural Woodwork 1:50_1:20 4 A1

36 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 1 0 1 0 0 Millworks Reception Desk - Radiotherapy Entrance & Reception 1F - MI1011 - 06200 Architectural Woodwork
1:50_1:20 1 A1
37 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 1 0 2 0 0 Millworks Reception Desk - Laboratory Entrance - MI1012 - 06200 Architectural Woodwork 1:50_1:20 1 A1
38 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 1 0 3 0 0 Millworks DSK 1010 - 06200 Architectural Woodwork 1:50_1:20 1 A1
45 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 1 1 0 0 0 Millworks FC 2002 - 06200 Architectural Woodwork 1:50_1:20 1 A1
46 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 1 1 1 0 0 Millworks FC 2002 - 06200 Architectural Woodwork - Blow-Up Details 1:50_1:20 1 A1
47 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 1 1 2 0 0 Architecture Details - Lift Cladding -14200 Elevators 1:50_1:20 1 A1
48 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 1 1 3 0 0 Architecture Details - Lift Cladding -14200 Elevators 1:50_1:20 1 A1
49 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 1 1 4 0 0 Architecture Details - Dry Garden Details - 06200 Architectural Woodwork 1:50_1:20 1 A1
50 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 1 1 5 0 0 Architecture Details - Dry Garden Details - 06200 Architectural Woodwork 1:50_1:20 1 A1
51 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 2 0 0 0 0 Typical Toilet 1_4 - Public&Internal Ground Floor 1:50_1:20 1 A1

52 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 2 0 1 0 0 Typical Toilet 1_4 - Public&Internal Ground Floor 1:50_1:20 2 A1
53 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 2 0 2 0 0 Typical Toilet 7 - Radioactive Pet CT Ground Floor 1:50_1:20 1 A1
54 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 2 0 3 0 0 Typical Toilet 8 - CEO First Floor 1:50_1:20 1 A1
55 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 2 0 4 0 0 Typical Toilet 9_10 - Public First Floor 1:50_1:20 2 A1
56 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 3 0 0 0 0 Room Design - 01 - MRI & Control Room 1:50_1:20 2 A1
57 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 3 0 1 0 0 Room Design - 02 - CT & Control Room 1:50_1:20 2 A1
58 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 3 0 2 0 0 Room Design - 03 - Fluoroscopy & Control Room 1:50_1:20 3 A1
59 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 3 0 3 0 0 Room Design - 04 - PETCT & Control Room 1:50_1:20 3 A1
60 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 3 0 4 0 0 Room Design - 05 - Mammography 1:50_1:20 3 A1
61 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 3 0 5 0 0 Room Design - 06 - Dexa 1:50_1:20 2 A1
62 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 3 0 6 0 0 Room Design - 07 - Doppler 1:50_1:20 2 A1
63 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 3 0 7 0 0 Room Design - 08 - Echo 1:50_1:20 2 A1
64 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 3 0 8 0 0 Room Design - 09 - Panorama & Cone Beam 1:50_1:20 2 A1
65 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 3 0 9 0 0 Room Design - 10 - Stress Exercise 1:50_1:20 2 A1
66 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 3 1 0 0 0 Room Design - 11 - U/S 1:50_1:20 2 A1
67 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 3 1 1 0 0 Room Design - 12 - Bunker & Control 1:50_1:20 3 A1
68 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 3 1 2 0 0 Room Design - 13 - U/S 1:50_1:20 2 A1
69 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 3 1 3 0 0 Room Design - 14 - Clinic 1:50_1:20 2 A1
70 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 3 1 4 0 0 Room Design - 15 - Office CEO & Secretary 1:50_1:20 1 A1
71 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 3 1 5 0 0 Room Design - 16 - Meeting Room 1:50_1:20 1 A1
72 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A R 1 4 0 0 0 0 Door&Windows Schedule 1:30 1 A1

75 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A R 1 4 0 3 0 0 Door&Windows Details 1:5 1 A1
79 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A R 1 4 0 7 0 0 Door&Windows Details 1:5_1:2 1 A1
81 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 9 0 0 0 0 Ground Floor Arch. Detail Tagging 1:100 1 A1

82 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 9 0 1 0 0 First Floor Arch. Detail Tagging 1:100 1 A1
83 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 2 0 0 0 0 0 Arch. Details - 01 - Corridor Handrail - Corner Guard Details 1:2_1:5 1 A1
84 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 2 0 0 1 0 0 Arch. Details - 02 - Finish to correspond to sink- Fire Prevention Panel Detail 1:5 1 A1
85 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 2 0 0 2 0 0 Arch. Details - 03 - Flush Floor Duct - Wall to Floor Details - Connecting Details 1:2 1 A1
86 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 2 0 0 3 0 0 Arch. Details - 04 - Detail Glazed Internal Parapet and Stairs 1:5 1 A1
87 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 2 0 0 4 0 0 Arch. Details - 05 - Ceilings Details 1:5 1 A1
88 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 2 0 0 5 0 0 Arch. Details - 06 - Joint Details - Light Details 1:5 1 A1
89 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 2 0 0 6 0 0 Arch. Details - 07 - Light Details 1:5 1 A1
90 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 2 0 0 7 0 0 Arch. Details - 08 - Gypsum Partition Details 1:5 1 A1
91 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 2 0 0 8 0 0 Arch. Details - 09 - Gypsum Partition & Flooring Details 1:5 1 A1
92 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 2 0 0 9 0 0 Arch. Details - 10 - Sanitary Support 1:5 1 A1
93 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 2 0 1 0 0 0 Arch. Details - 11 - Stairs Details 1:5 1 A1
94 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 2 0 1 1 0 0 Arch. Details - 12 - Ablution Details 1:15 3 A1
95 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 2 0 1 2 0 0 Arch. Details - 13 - VIP Room Details MI1001-MI1002 - 06200 Architectural Woodwork 1:2_1:5 3 A1
96 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 2 0 1 3 0 0 Arch. Details - 14 - Corridor Backlit Wall Details 1:2_1:5 1 A1
97 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 2 0 1 4 0 0 Arch. Details - 15 - Water Wall Details 1:5_1:20 1 A1
98 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 2 0 1 5 0 0 Arch. Details - 16 - Wall Protection Detail 1:20 1 A1
99 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 2 0 1 6 0 0 Arch. Details - 17 - Air Lock Detail VARIOUS 1 A1
100 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 2 0 1 7 0 0 Arch. Details - 18 - Arch Skirting & Architectural frame 1:5_1:20 1 A1
101 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 2 0 1 8 0 0 Arch. Details - 19 - Wall Finishes GF 1:100 1 A1
102 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 2 0 1 9 0 0 Arch. Details - 20 - Wall Finishes 1F 1:100 1 A1
103 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 3 0 0 0 0 0 Material Specifications - 1 A1
RADCARE - SPECIALIZED RADIOLOGY CENTRE
B01- King Fahd Road

DETAIL DESIGN
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2023036DD AR0001_00_Technical Description Pag. 1

CONTENTS
CONTENTS ......................................................................................................................................................... 2
1. INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................... 3
1.1. LAY OUT and INTERNAL FLOWS......................................................................................................... 3
1.2. Radiology ........................................................................................................................................... 6
1.1. Radiotherapy ..................................................................................................................................... 7
1.2. Laboratory ......................................................................................................................................... 8
1.3. Administration area ........................................................................................................................... 9
1.4. Staff area ........................................................................................................................................... 9
2. INTERIOR DESIGN ...................................................................................................................................... 9

1. INTRODUCTION
This document outlines the strategy and guiding principles that have been followed in the interior
design of the RAD CARE Specialized Radiology Center.
Starting from the concepts expressed in the preliminary design report, the character of the various
spaces has been developed.
Finish materials for walls, floors and ceilings, as well as color palettes are illustrated in the
following pages.
The area dedicated to the Radiology measure 2,064.00 square meters,
1.1. LAY OUT and INTERNAL FLOWS
The space is allocated on the ground and mezzanine floor of the building situated on the corner
between King Fahd Road and Prince Saad Bin Abdul Aziz Road

The building borders only on one side with another building, while the other three sides are free and allow
the presence of separate accesses for user flows
GROUND Floor
Access from King Fahd Road is the one that allows the arrival of the outpatients and the doctors
from the outside: it’s connected directly to the Main Atrium and it’s referred to Radiology and
Radiotherapy clusters. At the end of the Atrium find space the elevator and the staircase
connecting to the mezzanine floor.
The entrance to Laboratory comes from Prince Saad Bin Abdul Azziz Rd, it is a separate flow that
allows patient to get in and out without any kind of interferences with the Radiology’s flow.
The access for staff and administration are from the back of the building, the two are separated
from each other’s. Administration has its own access that communicate directly with a staircase
that allows to get the mezzanine floor where the offices are located.
The other entrance is located not far away from it and is dedicated to Staff/ Nurses and
Maintenance flow. Changing rooms and lockers are located positioned corresponding to it.

MEZZANINE Floor
Just the configuration of this separation between the access has made it possible to organize the
internal spaces according to the following scheme as showed by the chart below:
At the GROUND floor we can find:
The pink color identifies the Radiology area and their related spaces such sub waiting and support
areas. The Radiology cluster includes the specialized services such as MRI and CT, the PET SCAN,
and the Fluoroscopy.

The “Radiotherapy” is identified by the light green color. This cluster contains two bunkers with all
the dedicated support areas.
The yellow color includes Lab’s functions and Sample area.
The green color shows all area for radiology Staff department.
At the MEZZANINE Floor we can find:
the Doppler, the Ultrasound and Stress-Test which spaces are in orange while the pink colored
spaces are the Female’s services such as Mammography, Dexa and U/S.
The green color includes Staff and medical spaces.
In the end, the blue color shows Administration’s area.
1.2. Radiology
Thanks to this configuration, coming from the main entrance the first space is the reception desk
and waiting area: a large and luxury space holds general and VIP waiting area where the
Outpatients will be welcomed.
Here a big round reception desk is provided, for 4 operators that allows the recording activities
quickly, while on the other side of the atrium a second reception desk is dedicated to the
Radiotherapy’s cluster.
Once accepted, patients can reach their required clinic or specific room without any kind of
further assistance from the staff.

Ones entered inside the Radiology department, along the corridor it will be possible to find three
entrances doors: the first one is the one dedicated to MRI, CT SCAN, the second one for PET CT,
the third and last one, located at the end of the corridor, is the one that serves the Fluoroscopy.
The three entrances are well marked by large illuminated panels showing the names of the specific
services.
As already mentioned, on the mezzanine floor there are radiology services specifically dedicated
to women and the more general service dedicated to the “heart” which includes Doppler,
ultrasound, stress exercise and the Cone panorama Beam.
The two services are independent between them and they are served each one by their own
support areas and sub waiting areas.
MEZZANINE Floor
1.1. Radiotherapy
Radiotherapy is located once you enter the building immediately after the entrance door on the left.
One of the first arches, marked by a luminous sign, constitutes the entrance "portal". A reception point
allows the registration of the patient who can wait their turn in the dedicated waiting areas located in the
large atrium.

Patient can enter inside the medical department passing one area constitute by the changing rooms and
one toilet, after that a large corridor leads to the two bunkers.
To avoid the claustrophobic feeling that these spaces can give, particular attention was paid to the interior
design:
The idea is to create a room that is bright and decorated with pleasant images: one of the four walls is
designed with a wallpaper covering that displays pleasant images and decorations, which is in turn covered
with grained glass. LED light is included between the two elements to make the entire wall lively and bright.
1.2. Laboratory
The access from Prince Saad Bin Abdul Aziz Road allows the entrance to the Sample area.
This dedicated entrance introduces a separated flow and leaves the building free from the crowd.
The service is equipped of a reception desk and a waiting area serving two cubicles. Each of them
is supported by a toilet and support area such as clean and dirty storages.
The blood samples are stored here and then sent to the centralized analysis laboratory.

1.3. Administration area
The administration comprehends a secretary desk directly connected to the CEO Office, a large
open space that allow the presence of 4 workstations we can find also the meeting room, and the
command center that hosts 8 people, in the end a storage that can be used as archive.
The offices don’t face to external areas so they don’t have natural light, but they can receive it
from the big double height atrium, for this reason the partitions are in transparent glass, and they
face to the pleasant view of the inner garden.
1.4. Staff area
As mentioned before, staff has his own access that is located on the back of the building, from
here can enter Staff, Nurses and maintenance operators. They can find, very close to the entrance
door, the male /female lockers and reach directly the medical areas. Since this entrance is on the
opposite side to that of the patient entrance, there is no possible flow interference, to facilitate
the medical performances.
2. INTERIOR DESIGN
This paragraph outlines the strategy and guiding principles that have been followed in the interior
design of the Radcare Specialized Radiology Center. Starting from the concepts expressed in the
preliminary design, the character of the various spaces has been developed.
Finish materials for walls, floors and ceilings, as well as color palettes and furniture types are
illustrated on the below.
As stated in the preliminary design, the overriding principle is that of the humanization of the
interiors, creating a positive atmosphere that promotes well-being and improves the physical and
psychological health of all the different types of users. In order to achieve this goal, particular
attention has been given to lighting, color, finishes and suggestions that the internal space can
give to the end user.
The first impression of a place is the one you receive upon entering, this impression must be of
immediate comfort and understanding of the space you are about to face.

Here the atrium is a large, double-height space, simple to ensure that the visitor, once entered,
immediately understands where he is and where the functions and activities to reach are.
At the entrance there is however a large semi-circular reception and an information point to
support users.
The atrium is defined on the sides by a system of arches that lead towards the staircase and
the lift that lead to the first floor. Waiting seats and sofas are organized according to a free system
to guarantee moments of meeting and relaxation.
The psychological power of color and the control of lighting can influence the mood of people who
may be anxious, disoriented or under emotional stress. Thus, when talking about the “medical
environment”, how much more important lighting and color becomes.
For this reason, for patients and visitors, color and lighting design can bring a welcome distraction
from the problems that have resulted from fear of diagnosis or even disease.
This can be accomplished with a careful selection of details such as décor, finishing and designs for
the glass surfaces.
Atrium_ view from the entrance

The public spaces and waiting areas are colored in variations of the beige tones, while the internal
of the health care areas are colored.
The design of the interior’s public spaces, and the used material for the ceiling and walls define
the character of the space:
A backlighted metal ceiling characterizes the whole atrium and gives a diffused and soft light to
the ambient, while vertical linear led lights, recessed on the column between the arches, define
the space giving a bright rhythm to it. This combination of lights produces to the internal space a
soft and dynamic perception instead of a flat and boring sensation.
Walls are treated with the same dynamism: wooden acoustic surfaces, decorated frosted glass and
a bright, reflective enamel plaster are the selected materials for the two side of the main atrium.
Combined together, they give the environment a sense of pleasantness and care.
To emphasize this sense of pleasantness, some decorative elements such as water have been
inserted: a fountain, or rather a display box which take place inside one of the entrance arches
contains moving water.
Water Wall
water is synonymous of life and can improve the physical condition of people as well as a beautiful
music, a positive thought, edifying speeches and prayers.

Natural light is very important for patients but it is not always possible to have it. A good electric
lighting system serves a number of needs; some are obvious, such as being able to see to move
around safely or to carry out tasks which might be easy or complex.
Lighting has a considerable effect on the appearance of a space. The visual appearance of the lit
space also applies to the way lighting equipment integrates with the architectural design and the
physical elements of the building.
The integration between light and furniture, or between light and wall finishes is in fact a recurring
theme in the interior design of Radcare: in detail the patients corridors express the care and
attention to these elements.
Corridor_ Ground Floor
Here the first objective we want to achieve is to not use direct light but as much indirect light as
possible to avoid glare effects which cause annoying effects.
Direct light will be used to underline some special places as entrances or exit point which have to
be visible and recognizable from far away.
The corridors inside the departments are normally devoid of natural light and are often long to
walk, these conditions make users uncomfortable. To avoid this, the design introduces large

backlit panels that contain images of natural elements such as greenery, air, water... elements that
recall nature and give the patient a sense of peace.
The creation of visual effects such as high contrast and accent lighting, rather than the use of
uniform lighting and flat forms, helps the visually impaired and the elderly, which are a high
percentage of hospital users.
The same intent is expressed inside the radiology exam rooms: this kind of exams are
characterized by the slowness of time, using changing colors Led light and panels whit projected
changing images we can bring a welcome distraction from the problem and create a positive
atmosphere.
Radilolgy_exam room
Colour characterizes the different functions in relation to the type of user. At the same time, color
can be introduced into environments characterized by materials and finishes aligned in light
shades. In this way some special places are highlighted and characterized, such as the small
waiting areas found inside the departments.

With a view to the humanization of healthcare environments we wanted to introduce the theme of the
garden.
The double height of the building gave the chance of treating the roof of a portion of ground floor rooms,
which are large surfaces, as gardens.
The theme of internal gardens is a very dear theme in interior design because it gives beauty and quality to
the spaces. However, the garden is difficult to maintain and the plants need water, both things do not align
with these spaces which have other functional and safety priorities, for example over time the water could
interfere with the underlying systems.
In order to avoid this type of problem we decided to use a combination of different colored gravels and
create pleasant lighting effects through the use of spotlights.

A few potted plants can give a finishing touch to the design and perfume the room.
In order to the spaces Humanisation one other attention can be give to the selection of the materials, we
would like to propose 3 d material instead of flat surfaces, always keeping hygiene and cleanliness criteria
in mind. In this way the different surfaces are are well understood as tactile and visual surfaces to
promote the all-round experience the space available to the user.

B01- King Fahd Road

DETAIL DESIGN
INTERIOR DESIGN RENDERS
INTERIOR DESIGN RENDERS

MAIN LOBBY _View 1 to the main entrance TITOLO
MAIN LOBBY _View from the top TITOLO
3
1 2
MAIN LOBBY _View 2 from the entrance TITOLO
MAIN LOBBY MEZZANINE_View 3 from the mezzanine to the Lobby TITOLO
WAITING AREA RADIOLOGY MEZZANINE TITOLO
WAITING AREA RADIOLOGY MEZZANINE_View from the top
TITOLO
MAMMOGRAPHY TITOLO
MAMMOGRAPHY_View from the top TITOLO
GROUND FLOOR RADIOLOGY CORRIDOR TITOLO
GROUND FLOOR CORRIDOR _View from the top TITOLO
MAIN PATIEN’S CORRIDOR LAYOUT

MRI TITOLO
MRI_ View from the top TITOLO
B01- King Fahd Road

DETAIL DESIGN
SIGNAGE:
-10436 EXTERIOR CLINIC SIGNS &
-104446 INTERIOR CLINIC SIGNS
SIGNAGE
1.1 INTRODUCTION
An environment that communicates effectively and efficiently sees the central role of signage within
it, which must be designed with the aim of "reducing stress in the process of understanding the space
and identifying, memorizing and achieving the localization of the functions in disbursed”.
Orientation signs inside a sanitary building should make it possible to distinguish and identify the
organization of spaces and the way forward in a simple and immediate way, providing answers to
users' questions before they are asked to hospital staff.
1.2 SIGNAGE
the way to communicate takes place through 5 types of different signals illustrated as below:
TYPE 1 N.10
BIG LED WRITING
Option 1
ARTEMIDE : ALPHABET OF LIGHT _H40 cm
2023036DD AR0003_00_Signage Pag. 1

Option2
CUSTOMIZED BACKLIGTED LETTERS H 40 cm
TYPE 2 N.12
SMALL LED WRITING
Same selected typology as Type 1 _H 20 cm.

TYPE 3 N.3
TOTEM- FREE STANDING
SIGNAGE

TYPE 4 N.3
CUSTOMISED
BAKLIGHTED PANEL
PANEL DIMENSION: 200 x 200 x 10

TYPE 5 N.59
WALL SIGNAGE
FLEX_ SIGN LINE PANEL
Dimensions 21 x 21 cm.
Dimensions: A5 format.

The two images below show how the 5 types of signage will be arranged in the two building plans.
Detailed development of the dimensions and locations will be shown in dedicated drawings during the
construction phase of the project.

TYPE 6 N.7
EXTERNAL SIGNAGE
TAILORED Led box backlighted, made by CNC cutting and welded.
MATERIAL : COPPER
Refer to the selected examples:
Ex.1
EX.2
SIGN

DIMENSIONS
POSITION ON FAÇADE:

B01- King Fahd Road

DETAIL DESIGN
LIGHTING FIXTURES BOOK
LIGHTING FIXTURES BOOK

CONTENTS
CONTENTS ................................................................................................................................................... 1
1 Preamble ............................................................................................................................................. 2
2 Lighting Fictures ................................................................................................................................... 3
2.1 ARKURA Vapor Sky Ceiling Panel................................................................................................... 3
2.2 Recessed Spot light....................................................................................................................... 5
2.3 Recessed Spot led light ................................................................................................................ 8
2.4 Linear led light ...........................................................................................................................10
2.5 IGUZZINI Underscore 18 ..............................................................................................................11
2.6 IGUZZINI Superrail .......................................................................................................................13
2023036DD AR0004_00_Lighting Fixtures Book Pag. 1

1 Preamble
The aim of the present document is the definition of the Lighting Cut Sheet that shows the main suggested
choices of the lamps.
The Lighting Cut Sheet will concern the lamps definition, in all the spaces of the project.

2 Lighting Fictures
2.1 ARKURA Vapor Sky Ceiling Panel

Sky powder-coated aluminum torsion spring panels offer a tileable, cloud-like pattern, helping you bring
the sky indoors. With no fading of the pattern, the cloud design can continue for as long as your hallway or
space allows, without sacrificing acoustical comfort if you add our Soft Sound® backer. Or you can add our
integrated lighting backer for a sky that glows

2.2 Recessed Spot light
Sistema Easy_iGuzzini

2.3 Recessed Spot led light
Laser iGuzzini

2.4 Linear led light
PRODUCT DETAILS
Product for linear lighting - with white monochromatic LED with
high color rendering -made on a white flexible circuit: the close
distance between the LEDs along the circuit determines a very
homogeneous and diffused linear light emission
._ External protection in transparent PVC sheath with end

caps_IP65 degree of protection for the strip with integral length
(not sectioned)
_ The ends of the circuits are equipped with connectors with IP20
degree of protection, therefore the operations to adjust the
insulation of the connectors are the responsibility of the installer._
Supplied in reels of 5 meters wrapped in special supports; a
connection kit for in-line or power supply connections is included in
the package.
_ The strip can be sectioned at a prearranged center; in case of

intermediate cuts, use the caps included and be sure to carefully
seal the cut ends to restore the protection conditions.266
LEDs/m._Operating voltage 24V
_For correct dissipation, it is recommended to use the strip in

combination with the available profiles.

2.5 IGUZZINI Underscore 18

2.6 IGUZZINI Superrail
IGUZZINI Superrail Sospend

PRODUCT DETAILS
Version with double 48V track designed to house
various lighting elements.
For some of the light elements a new adapter

(PB60 - PB61) must be ordered separately.
48V low voltage track system designed for

suspended applications
Made of painted extruded aluminium. Mechanical

reliability: secure connection between projectors
and track.
To obtain continuous rows, specific direct and

angular joints (ceiling-ceiling) are available.
A closing sheath is available to be positioned flush

with the opening of the track.
Complete system with control gear to be ordered

separately

B01- King Fahd Road

DETAIL DESIGN
SELECTED MATERIALS – DOOR HARDWARE & VENDOR LIST
SELECTED MATERIALS – DOOR HARDWARE & VENDOR LIST

CONTENTS
CONTENTS ................................................................................................................................................... 2
INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................... 1
SELECTED MATERIALS .............................................................................................................................. 2
1. FLOORING ........................................................................................................................................ 2
1.1. 09310 TILES - FINE PORCELAIN STONEWARE................................................................................. 2
1.2. 09310 TILES - FINE CERAMIC FLOORING........................................................................................ 3
1.3. 09310 TILES - FLOOR THRESHOLDS SOLID STONE (TILES TO VINYL - CARPET TO TILES) .................. 3
1.4. 09632 STONE (INTERIOR).............................................................................................................. 4
1.5. 09680 CARPET (INTERIOR) ............................................................................................................ 4
1.6. 09650 RESILIENT PVC (VINYL) ....................................................................................................... 5
1.7. 12482 ENTRANCE MATS ............................................................................................................... 8
1.8. DRY LANDSCAPING – GRAVEL – (PART OF 06200 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK) ......................... 9
2. DOORS - 08110 INTERNAL HINGED DOOR .......................................................................................10
3. WALL CLADDING .............................................................................................................................12
3.1. 09310 TILES - FINE CERAMIC ........................................................................................................12
3.2. 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING ........................................................................................................14
10615 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS IN PANEL .........................................................................................14
3.3. 10265 WALL GUARD – ACROVYN .................................................................................................15
3.4. 09900 PAINTING FOR INTERIOR ...................................................................................................15
3.5. 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING - WALL PAPER + GLASS - BACKLIT - BACKLIGTHED GLASS IMAGES ....17
4. WALL CLADDING AND FALSE CEILING .............................................................................................18
4.1. 06200 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK ..........................................................................................18
4.2. LINEAR AIR DIFFUSER (for reference only) ...................................................................................18
4.3. AIR DIFFUSER (for reference only) ...............................................................................................19
5. 13510 PROJECTION SYSTEM MRI COMPATIBLE ................................................................................20
6. 13500 WATER FALLING FOUNTAIN ..................................................................................................21
7. 12494 ROLLER SHADES ....................................................................................................................22
8. 14200 ELEVATORS ...........................................................................................................................23
DOOR HARDWARE (08710) ....................................................................................................................27
1. HANDLES.............................................................................................................................................27
1.1. LEVER HANDEL ............................................................................................................................27
1.2. LEVER HANDEL ............................................................................................................................28
1.3. FREE/OCCUPIED LATCH (Code: H 1001) .......................................................................................28
1.4. SINGLE PULL HANDLE ..................................................................................................................29
2. DOOR CLOSER .....................................................................................................................................29
3. PUSH BAR ...........................................................................................................................................31
4. DOUBLE DOOR CLOSER COORDINATOR WITH CLOSER INTEGRATED ....................................................32
5. SICURE LOCK .......................................................................................................................................33
6. RADAR OPENING MOTORISED .............................................................................................................34
7. SMART CARD READER .........................................................................................................................35
8. RELEASE TO EXIT PUSH BOUTTON .......................................................................................................36
9. FLOOR DOOR STOP .............................................................................................................................36
10. MAGNETIC LOCK .............................................................................................................................36
11. DOOR VENTILATION GRILLE .............................................................................................................37
12. DOOR PROTECTION .........................................................................................................................38
VENDOR LIST ..........................................................................................................................................40
INTRODUCTION
This document outlines the selection of materials and door hardware that have been followed in
the interior design of the RAD CARE Specialized Radiology Center.
2023036DD AR0005_00_Selected Materials&Vendor List_AGA_01

Pag. 1
SELECTED MATERIALS
1. FLOORING
1.1. 09310 TILES - FINE PORCELAIN STONEWARE
FLOOR PUBLIC AREAS
BRAND NAME DIMENSIONS DESCRIPTION

MARAZZI MARBLEPLAY_TRAVERTINO 600x600 Gres Fine Porcelain, full
Thick 9,5mm body coloured, matt
finish, anti slip.

Pag. 2
1.2. 09310 TILES - FINE CERAMIC FLOORING
FLOOR STORAGE-JANITOR-TOILETS-DISPOSAL-CLEAN UP-DIRTY UTILITY-BLOOD COLLECTION-CHANGING
ROOMS-WET AREAS

CLEOPATRA PINO GRAVITO 300 x 600 Floor CERAMIC TILES , full body coloured, matt
x10mm finish, anti slip.
1.3. 09310 TILES - FLOOR THRESHOLDS SOLID STONE (TILES TO VINYL - CARPET TO TILES)
--- GRAY GRANITE 50x20mm Natural stone

Pag. 3
1.4. 09632 STONE (INTERIOR)
TARVERTINO STONE Refer to DWG Natutal Stone
Step tread:
1500x300x20
Step riser:
1500x80x30
1.5. 09680 CARPET (INTERIOR)

PRAYER ROOMS

LIUNI MODULE LITHO GRADIENT 50x50 Description:
398 (Female) Carpet in 1/12" tufted bouclè tiles.
591 (Male)
Traffic: Intense.
Composition
100% Econyl® yarn; 100% Solution
Dyed Regenerated Nylon. EcoBack
secondary substrate: fully
recyclable polyolefin-based tile
substrate with a minimum of 70%
post-industrial recycled content.

Pag. 4
Female Male
1.6. 09650 RESILIENT PVC (VINYL)
FLOOR NORMAL IN WAITING AREAS AND GENERAL MEDICAL AREAS
FLOOR ANTISTATIC IN ELECTRICAL ROOM - SERVER ROOM – MEDICAL ROOMS WITH

EQUIPMENTS

GERFLOR MIPOLAM SYMBIOZ 20 ml x 2 m ROOLS VINIYL 2 mm
6001 Cotton VELDED SEAM
FLOORING

Pag. 5
GERFLOR MIPOLAM SYMBIOZ 20 ml x 2 m ROOLS VINIYL 2 mm
6065 SEGESTA VELDED SEAM
FLOORING

GERFLOR MIPOLAM SYMBIOZ_ 20 ml x 2 m ROOLS VINIYL 2 mm
6057 MUSK VELDED SEAM
FLOORING

Pag. 6
GERFLOR MIPOLAM AFFINITY 20 ml x 2 m ROOLS VINIYL 2 mm
_ 4408 CRISTAL ICE VELDED SEAM
FLOORING

GERFLOR MIPOLAM AFFINITY_4409 20 ml x 2 m ROOLS VINIYL 2 mm
MATTE GRAY VELDED SEAM

Pag. 7
FLOORING
1.7. 12482 ENTRANCE MATS

AIR LOCK ENTRANCE

--- ENTRANCE MAT AS PER Dimensions
(CARPET DRAWING Depth of Mat: 18mm
INSERT) Aluminium Extrusion Width: 35mm
Aluminium Extrusion Thickness: 2mm
Rolling Load: 1,000lbs/wheel
Features
 Scrape dirt and absorb moisture off shoes

when people walk through entrance areas
 Open construction: rubber hinge with drain
holes allow debris and moisture to flow
through the mat
 Allows for easy cleaning with rollable rubber
hinges
 Adhere to vertical surfaces without sagging
 Rubber end filler can be easily trimmed to
ensure carpet inserts fits well into its recess
Installation
Recommended for recess installation – recess depth
18 mm (±2mm)

Pag. 8
1.8. DRY LANDSCAPING – GRAVEL – (PART OF 06200 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK)

ISOPLAM Pebbles 20-30mm Tailor-made solutions with an
(Dry garden) elegant and natural appearance,
made by a wide range of top quality
materials (granules, pebbles, and
ornamental stones).
The selected stone will be in white,
20-30 mm
red and green colors .
The gravel layer is fixed with a
second resin layer which guarantees
durability and cleanliness.
20-30mm Isoplam® cements, dyes, waxes, and

primers make it possible to obtain
decorative surfaces in different
styles. Furthermore, they allow you
to create floors with our pebbles
and to paint surfaces (using
Oxydecor® metallic powder colors)
for interior and exterior projects of
any kind.

Pag. 9
2. DOORS - 08110 INTERNAL HINGED DOOR

ABET WHITE PORCELAINE 405 --- HPL LAMINATE
LAMINATI

GERFLOOR DECOCHOC --- Door protection panel dimensions: 3
OR ACROVYN 0044 SAGE OR m x 1.30 m Thickness: 2 mm Material:
ACROVYN Bs2d0 class PVC

Pag. 10
GERFLOOR DECOCHOC --- Door protection panel
OR ACROVYN ROSE OR dimensions: 3 m x 1.30 m
ACROVYN Thickness: 2 mm Material:
Bs2d0 class PVC

Pag. 11
3. WALL CLADDING
3.1. 09310 TILES - FINE CERAMIC

WALL - VISITORS & CEO TOILETS

FIORANESE FORMELLE 20 20 X 20 x 1.3cm GRES FINE PORCELAIN Body color
WALL TOILETS- STORAGE-JANITOR-TOILETS-WET AREAS

CLEOPATRA ELEGANZA 30 X 60 x 1cm CERAMIC TILES Wall cladding
WHITE

Pag. 12
WALL STORAGE-JANITOR-TOILETS-DISPOSAL-CLEAN UP-DIRTY UTILITY-BLOOD COLLECTION-CHANGING
ROOMS-WET AREAS

CLEOPATRA PINO GRAVITO 30 x 60 x1 Floor CERAMIC
WALL ABLUTION ROOMS

BISAZZA SOLID COLORS MOSAIC Glass Tiles for Ablution
element’s claddind

Pag. 13
3.2. 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING (GLASS PROTECTIONS - GLASS ELEVATOR UNIFORM
DECORATION)
10615 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS IN PANEL (GLASS DEMOUNTABLE PARTITION FROSTED

GRADUALLY FADED: FROM BOTTOM TO TOP 100% 0-100MM - 50% 100MM-150MM - =5
TO TOP)
BRAND DIMENSIONS DESCRIPTION BRAND DIMENSIONS DESCRIPTION

DECORATED VARIABLE 08800 GLASS DECORATED VARIABLE 10615
FROSTED AND FROSTED DEMOUNTABLE
GLASS GLAZING GLASS PARTITION
1,50mt
1MT

Pag. 14
3.3. 10265 WALL GUARD – ACROVYN

GERFLOOR DECOCHOC 110 H Wall protection panel dimensions: 3 m x 1.30
ALUM OR (corridors) m Thickness: 2 mm Material: Bs2d0 class PVC
ACROVYN
3.4. 09900 PAINTING FOR INTERIOR

ICA GROUP METAL BRASS PAINT_04 --- ---

Pag. 15
BRAND NAME DIMENSION DESCRIPTION
S
ICA GROUP MARMORINO finish --- Paint white marble powder

Pag. 16
3.5. 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING - WALL PAPER + GLASS - BACKLIT GLASS - BACKLIGTHED GLASS
IMAGES
SIEGER FLUTED GLASS To be defined decorative glass crafted with smooth vertical
ARKITECTURE with the patterns providing an elegant combination of
SYSTEM contractor visibility .
NAME DIMENSIONS DESCRIPTION

BRAND
PHOTOWALL WALLPAPER Printed Wallpaper cladding
(Combination behind the fluted glass)

Pag. 17
4. WALL CLADDING AND FALSE CEILING
4.1. 06200 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

WALL VIP ROOM-CEO-ENTRANCES-RECEPTIONS-ARCHES

FANTONI 4Akustik --- The slats that make up the
system are made of MDF
with low E1 formaldehyde
emission, ennobled using
decorative papers
impregnated with
melamine resins.
COLOR: American Walnut
4.2. LINEAR AIR DIFFUSER (for reference only and to be read in conjunction with MEP package)

BROFER DLDT To be defined CHARACTERISTICS:
based on Linear slot diffusers with
plans profile deflector adjustable.
CONSTRUCTION:
Anodized extruded
aluminium
UTILIZATION:
For ceiling installation and
for air intake and delivery.
Installation height: 2,5-3,1 m.
FIXING:
By inner mounting mobile
bracket.
ACCESSORIES:
Galvanized steel connecting
plenum with insulation.

Pag. 18
4.3. AIR DIFFUSER (for reference only and to be read in conjunction with MEP package)

BROFER DIC2 CHARACTERISTICS:
Panel diffuser pulse
type with high
inductive capacity.
CONSTRUCTION:
RAL 9010 white
painted steel.
UTILIZATION:
For ceiling installation
DIMENSION 595X595 MM supply operation.
Installation height 2,7
PULSE TYPE DIFFUSER IN RAL 9010 - 4,1 m.
GALVANISED STEEL WITH HIGH FIXING:
INDUCTIVE CAPACITY.EXTERNAL Fixing by using lateral
screws or central
screw on mounting
bridge.
ACCESSORIES:
• Standard or
insulated galvanised
steel plenum, with or
without equalising
grid, control damper
and mounting bridge.
MODEL: DIC2***
SIZES:595 x 595 mm.

Pag. 19
5. 13510 PROJECTION SYSTEM MRI COMPATIBLE

TELEMED MR PROJECTOR
MRI PROJECTOR
AMBIANCE The MR room projector is the main unit, it
SOLUTIONS projects video/animation content onto the
MR scanner surface or side walls.
Full HD resolution 1920-1080

Fiber optic connection
Integrated 40W speaker
Projectible screen size 30-300”.
Maximum brightness 5000 lumens

Pag. 20
6. 13500 WATER FALLING FOUNTAIN

TCA Air BUBBLE WATERWALL See dimensions in Plexiglass box with water
drawings inside.
a programmed aeration
system produces oxygen
bubbles that create water
movements

Pag. 21
7. 12494 ROLLER SHADES

SOMFY AMMAR DECOR To be defined Manual blinds offer many benefits over
(Riyadh Saudi with the traditional blinds including ease of use and
Arabia) contractor convenience, as well as energy efficiency.
Manual blinds can be operated using also a
remote control or by an automated sensor that
detects changes in the natural light and adjusts
the blinds accordingly. This type of control
allows you to change the light in the room
simply at the touch of a button, making it much
more convenient than the traditional method
of opening and closing manually.
Fabric: "Smart view". It's a synthetic fabric that
allows you to see the outside from the inside
but not vice-versa.

Pag. 22
8. 14200 ELEVATORS
ELEVATOR FINISHES: OPTION 1_FUJI - FUJI ELEVATOR
BRAND WAFA _FUJI ART

Pag. 23
CABIN F-K-45-A
HANDRAIL ART: F-F01-A
FLOOR Opt1:
See picture
Opt2: F-FL07-A
EXTERNAL
BUTTON
ELEVATOR FINISHES: OPTION 2_SHTEGIN
BRAND ART

Pag. 24
INTERNAL WALLS
FINISHES CABIN
DOOR STAINLESS
STEEL

Pag. 25
INTERNAL ART: AV8172
BUTTON
EXTERNAL ART: RC4030

ADVISOR
ART: RC1031
CEILING ART: AFT-008
FLOORING PORTCELAIN
MARAZZI
TRAVERTINO

Pag. 26
DOOR HARDWARE (08710)
1. HANDLES
1.1. LEVER HANDEL

INTERNAL DOORS – D1-D2 – FM200 – GD1

STERIALL RAMBOUILLET ESSENTIELLE antibacterial, antimicrobial
Patented copper alloy efficient

against coronarivuses and
bacteria.
DESCRIPTION
• Material and finishing of the
handle and of the lock:
brushed ST-E alloy
• Material and finishing of the
rosettes: brushed 304 stainless
steel
• Spring integrated
• Door thickness: 31 to 75mm
• Also included: one 7mm
square, locking signal, screws.
Technical data
Material and finish of handle
and locking latch: Brushed ST-
F antimicrobial alloy
Material and finish of the plates
and rosettes: Brushed 304
stainless steel
Return spring: yes
Supplied accessories: 1 square
of 6 mm and clairvoyant
(condemnation), screwing
For door thickness: 31 to 75
mm

Pag. 27
1.2. LEVER HANDEL
EXTERNAL DOORS – ED1 - ED2 – W1 – W2

YALE U-DESIGN LEVER ON ROSETTE
Specifications:
Tubular stainless steel AISI 304
Rosette Ø54x8mm
Sprung lever Ø19mm
Spindle 8x8mm
Tested to Grade 4 EN1906:2012
Matching escutcheons for euro
cylinder
1.3. FREE/OCCUPIED LATCH (Code: H 1001)

TOILET

FIMET
Free/occupied WC
latch in steel with
round rosette
measuring 52 mm
diameter with 6/8 mm
square.

Pag. 28
1.4. SINGLE PULL HANDLE
SLIDING DOOR – D3 – GD3

STERIALL HESDIN Handle in Steriall® copper alloy. Fitted
for sliding doors, swing doors or fixed
Pull Handle or on a wall. Offers a good grip for
Grab persons with reduced mobility.
Material and finishing of the handle:

brushed ST-E alloy
Material and finishing of the rosettes:
brushed 304 stainless steel
Technical data
Material and finish of the handle :
Antimicrobial alloy Steriall® ST-F
brushed
Material and finish of the
roses:Brushed stainless steel 304
Delivered with 2 mounting roses and
screws.
Fixation by wood screws
2. DOOR CLOSER
INTERNAL DOORS – D1 - D2 - GD1 / EXTERNAL DOOR – ED1

CISA D6200 DOOR CLOSER FINISHES Easy to open.
Cam technology and the sliding arm make
Standard this an extremely efficient door closer,
Fin. 97 especially in the initial pushing stage when
Aluminium more strength is needed to open the door.
Compared to traditional door closers using
rack and pinion technology, the D6200
On request makes opening doors a lot easier. The
Fin. 87 body is very compact, for a stylish
Champagne aesthetic design.
TECHNICAL FEATURES
One-piece body with sliding cover
Steel sliding arm with or without hold open
device
Cam operation reduces the force needed
when opening the door.
The CE version (EN3) can be installed on
fire doors up to 950 mm and weighing up to
60 Kg.
Adjustment valves with thermostatic device

Pag. 29
Pag. 30
3. PUSH BAR
INTERNAL DOOR – GD1 / EXTERNAL DOOR – ED1 - ED2

CISA FAST PUSH TECHNICAL FEATURES
 Painted
aluminium/aluminium
alloy cover
 Internal parts in
galvanised steel, suitable
for fire doors
SUPPLIED AS STANDARD
 Fixing screws
 ICIM and CE certificates
 Installation and
maintenance instructions
ON REQUEST
 Internal and external

plates
 Version with micro switch
 Version for fire doors
FINISHES
On reques
 PVD coated satin-

finished stainless steel

Pag. 31
4. DOUBLE DOOR CLOSER COORDINATOR WITH CLOSER INTEGRATED
INTERNAL DOOR D2/028 / EXTERNAL DOOR ED2/032 - ED2/016 - ED2/064

CISA Coordinator for CISA D5200 The CISA
door closers coordinator
ensures double
doors always shut
in the right
sequence and that
fire doors in
particular close
correctly and
securely. The
coordinator can be
installed with CISA
D5200 door closers
and is suitable for
all applications.
The range includes
one version for pull
doors and another
for push doors,
offering maximum
versatility and a
safe and reliable
solution for end
users. The
accessories
supplied with the
coordinator cover
all kinds of
installations, so
locksmiths have
everything they
need to mount the
device.

Pag. 32
5. SICURE LOCK
EXTERNAL DOORS – ED1 - ED2

CISA SICURE LOCK CISA Sicur locks deliver Fire resistance.
high performance both in Steel latch bolt.
terms of fire Square spindle 9 mm
resistance and protection CE marking on faceplate.
against forced entry.
Protection against forced entry.
The locks have a separate
deadbolt and steel latch bolt and
an anti-picking device which
provides excellent protection if
the door is locked with the latch
bolt only.
TECHNICAL FEATURES:
 Zinc-plated steel
faceplate
 Zinc-plated steel case
 Nickel-plated steel
reversible latch bolt with
anti-picking device
 Single-throw (15 mm)
nickel-plated deadbolt
 Square spindle 9 mm

Pag. 33
6. RADAR OPENING MOTORISED
AIR LOCK - ED4/045 & ED4A/045

DORMA ELECTRONIC SAFETY Robust framing for high traffic,
SENSOR high usage environments
ES 200 automatic sliding door

operator tested to 1 million
cycles
Automatic door systems.
Aluminium sliding door operator

installed and commissioned by
dormakaba’s highly skilled
technicians to meet the
requirements of EN
16005 “Power operated
pedestrian doorsets. Safety in
use. Requirements and test
methods”
Entrance systems suitable for

use on emergency escape
routes
Integrated Solutions

Pag. 34
7. SMART CARD READER
INTERNAL DOOR – D1-D2-D3-GD1 / EXTERNAL DOOR ED1-ED2

CISA WALL READERS 2.0 CISA wall readers are designed
to manage access using
contactless credentials and
smartphones.

Pag. 35
8. RELEASE TO EXIT PUSH BOUTTON

---- TO BE APPROVED BY LOCAL
AUTHORITIES
 CM6050
 LOCKING RED PUSH
BUTTON
 CM-6000 SERIES
 PUSH TO LOCK
 KEY TO RELEASE
 NO
 NC
 10 AMP
 12-24 VDC
 BRUSHED ALUMINUM
9. FLOOR DOOR STOP

INTERNAL DOOR – D1-D2- GD1 / EXTERNAL DOOR ED1-ED2

HSMAG DOOR STOPPER Solid metal door stop catch door
MDS 17 holder magnet features:
Mounting type floor, wall

Material: alloy steel, stainless steel
Color brushed finish
10.MAGNETIC LOCK

Pag. 36
POLARIS/YALE POLARIS 2XT AGB Polaris 2XT magnetic
lock, Yale cylinder hole,
center distance 85 mm, front
18x196 mm.
11.DOOR VENTILATION GRILLE

INTERNAL DOOR – D1-D2

RENSON 468AK/1 MATERIAL
DIMENSIONS Made from aluminum profiles:
∫ Minimum dimensions: 200 x 180 mm AlMgSi 0.5 (in accordance with
∫ Maximum dimensions: 800 x 775 EN 12020-2)
mm Finish: anodized in satin color
∫ Height in steps of 85 mm (slat pitch) (20 micron) or powder coated in
∫ Mounting depth: 48mm any
∫ Flange size: 30 mm RAL or Syntha Pulvin color (40
micron)
Sound-absorbing material:
synthetic foam
Labyrinth-type slats

Pag. 37
12.DOOR PROTECTION

GERFLOR DECOCHOC OR ACROVYN
Total Thickness EN ISO Door protection panel
OR 24346 mm 2.00 +/- 0.15
ACROVIN Panels width EN ISO
dimensions: 3 m x 1.30 m
24341 mm 1300 Thickness: 2 mm Material:
Bs2d0 class PVC
Stabilization
CaZn
Density
g/cm3
1.40
Hardness
EN ISO 868
ShD
75
Weight
EN ISO 23997
g/m²
2800 +/-200
Panels width
EN ISO 24341
mm
1300
Panels lengths
EN ISO 24341
mm
3000
Surface textured with Optimixt
embossment

Pag. 38
Pag. 39
VENDOR LIST
FLOORING
BRAND MATERIAL CODE LINK

GERFLOR PVC Mipolam  https://www.gerflor.it/prodotti/mipolam-
Affinity- affinity#design
Mipolam
Symbioz
MARAZZI FINE PORCELAIN Travertino  https://www.gerflor.it/prodotti/mipolam-
affinity#design
LIUNI CARPET  https://www.liuni.com/
WALLS FINISHES:

GERFLOR  ACROVYN  Decochoc  https://www.gerflor.it/decochoc
 PVC  Decofresh  https://www.gerflor.com/professionals
-products/flooring/decofresc.html
FIORANESE GRES PORCELAIN Formelle 20  www.fioranese.it/pavimenti-e-
BODY COLOR rivestimenti/formelle20-it/
CLEOPATRA CERAMIC Eleganza White  https://www.cleopatraceramics.store/
product/eleganza-white/
ICA GROUP PAINTING Brass Painting  https://www.icaspa.com/it/it/scegli-il-
colore
SIKKENS PAINTING  Silicate  https://www.sikkens.it/it/prodotti/mar
Marmorino morino-ai-silicati
painting
 Alpha air  https://www.sikkens.it/it/prodotti/alph
clean a-air-clean
FANTONI WOODDEN  wooden  https://www.fantoni.it/sistemi-

ACOUSTIC PANEL acoustic fonoassorbenti/4-akustik/
panel
ABET HPL LAMINATE  Print HPL  https://abetlaminati.com/en/applicatio
LAMINATI (Doors) ns/health/
BISAZZA MOSAIC  Solid Color  https://www.bisazza.com/en-
(Ablution) global/Products/Mosaico/Solid-colors/
PHOTOWALL WALLPAPER  Mountains  https://www.photowall.com/
(Bunker)
GLASS CLADDING  Fluted Glass  https://www.siegersystems.co.uk/inter
(Bunker) nal-glazing-systems/

Pag. 40
CEILING:

ARKTURA BACKLITED METAL Vapor sky https://arktura.com/_
CEILING Contact: Mazhar Khan
971 50 482 91 60
mazhar.Khan@gfiuae.com
KNAUFF GYPSUM BOARD https://Knauff.com/_
GYPSUM TILES
(120x60cm)
FURNITURE:

ESTEL GROUP LOOSE FURNITURE Offices_https://www.estel.com/
ARES LINE CHAIRS https://www.aresline.com/
LEYFORM CHAIRS https://www.leyform.com/
MEDISPO LOOSE MEDICAL https://www.medispo.com/
FURNITURE
LOTUS KITCHINETTE https://www.lotus.com/
IDEALSTANDARD ACCESSORIES https://www.idealstandard.com/
RELAXING WATER FEATURES

TCA WATER WALL http://www.tci-
TCIT CO.,LTD tca.com/Product/Detail/6
LIGHTIN SISTEMS

IGUZZINI https://www.iguzzini.com/

Pag. 41
B01- King Fahd Road

DETAIL DESIGN
TOILET CUT SHEET
CONTENTS
CONTENTS ......................................................................................................................................................... 1
1 Preamble.................................................................................................................................................... 2
2 Toilet accessories Cut Sheet ...................................................................................................................... 3
2.1 Public Toilets...................................................................................................................................... 3
1.1.1. WASHBASIN (Cod.SA01) ............................................................................................................ 3
1.1.2. DISABLE WASHBASIN (Cod. SA02) ............................................................................................ 4
1.1.3. WASHBASIN (with column) (Cod.SA03) ..................................................................................... 4
1.1.4. WASHBASIN (with column) (Cod.SA04) ..................................................................................... 5
1.1.5. MIXER ELECTRONIC (Cod.SA05)................................................................................................. 5
1.1.6. MIXER (Cod.SA06)...................................................................................................................... 6
1.1.7. DISABLE CLOSET (CodeSA07) ..................................................................................................... 6
1.1.8. CLOSET (Code SA08) .................................................................................................................. 7
1.1.9. MIRROR (Code SA09) ................................................................................................................. 8
1.1.10. SHOWER COLUMN WITH EXTERNAL THERMOSTATIC (Code SA10) .......................................... 8
1.1.11. SHOWER TRAY (Code SA11)....................................................................................................... 9
1.1.12. SHOWER DOOR (Code SA12) .................................................................................................... 9
1.1.13. SOAP DISPENSER (Code AR 1355).............................................................................................. 9
1.1.14. GRAB BAR (Code: AR 9045) ..................................................................................................... 10
1.1.15. CONTROL PLATE (Code SA13) .................................................................................................. 10
1.1.16. DUSTBIN (Code FF1590) .......................................................................................................... 11
1.1.17. TOILET BRUSH (Code SA14) ..................................................................................................... 11
1.1.18. ROL HOLDER(Code SA15)......................................................................................................... 12
1.1.19. HAND SHOWER (Code SA16) ................................................................................................... 12
1.1.20. PAPER TOWEL (Code SA17) ..................................................................................................... 12
2023036DD AR0011_00_Toilets Cut Sheet Pag. 1

1 Preamble
The aim of the present document is the definition of the Sanitari Cut Sheet that shows the main suggested
choices of the furniture.

2 Toilet accessories Cut Sheet
2.1 Public Toilets
1.1.1. WASHBASIN (Cod.SA01)

IDEAL Conca 600x 450 600 mm rectangular
STANDARD Cod: washbasin for countertop
T382501 installation. Available with
and without overflow hole.
For the version without
overflow hole, we
recommend combining it
with the Ideal Flow
N8326AA system and the
free-drain waste with
ceramic cover E211401,
both to be purchased
separately. Template
supplied. Bottom side
rectified.
Color: 01 - White
Features: Ideal Flow siphon
Find out more details:
Type: Washbasin
Recognitions: DIN EN
14688 CL 00¦DIN EN 31
Tap holes: 0
Net weight (kg): 17
Material: Finefireclay
Designer: Palomba Serafini
Associati
Height (mm): 165
Width (mm): 600
Depth (mm): 450
Shape: Rectangular

1.1.2. DISABLE WASHBASIN (Cod. SA02)
IDEAL Conca 600x 450 600 mm rectangular
STANDARD Cod: washbasin suspended.
T382501 Available with and without
overflow hole. For the
version without overflow
hole, we recommend
combining it with the Ideal
Flow N8326AA system and
the free-drain waste with
ceramic cover E211401, both
to be purchased separately.
Template supplied. Bottom
side rectified.
Color: 01 - White
Features: Ideal Flow siphon
Type: Washbasin
Recognitions: DIN EN 14688
CL 00¦DIN EN 31
Tap holes: 0
Net weight (kg): 17
Material: Finefireclay
Designer: Palomba Serafini
Associati
Height (mm): 165
Width (mm): 600
Depth (mm): 450
Shape: Rectangular
1.1.3. WASHBASIN (with column) (Cod.SA03)

IDEAL Conca 690x 570 Washbasin with large
STANDARD Code rectangular basin
TO980 Conca series
ART. :T0980
Size: 690×570
Material:Ceramic
White color
Column installation

1.1.4. WASHBASIN (with column) (Cod.SA04)
HEVHOC Lumium 540x440 Washbasin with
S stainless steel
rectangular basin
1.1.5. MIXER ELECTRONIC (Cod.SA05)

IDEAL Sensorflow 220x 71mm Built-in electronic basin
STANDARD Cod.: mixer
A7564AA Built-in electronic basin
mixer and lamellar flow
aerator M24x1 with flow
rate 5 l/min. The spout
projection is 170 mm, body
diameter 49 mm. Anti-
vandal system
Color: AA - Chrome
Mounting: Recessed
Working pressure: 3
Flow rate (litres): 5
Net weight (kg): 1.95
Material: Chromed brass
Height (mm): 49
Width (mm): 72
Depth (mm): 220
Shape:
Round170220Ø49min.

1.1.6. MIXER (Cod.SA06)
IDEAL Ceraline 147x 141mm Single lever basin mixer -
STANDARD Code Product information
BC193AA Characteristics
Values
Ceraline collection
Round shape
Countertop mounting
Operating type Single lever
Classification DIN EN 817, DIN
EN 200, DIN 4109 Group 1
Operating pressure 3 bar
Flow rate 5 liters per minute
Tap holes 1 Holes
Net weight 1.13 kg
Material Chromed brass
Easy Fix, Temperature limiter,
Eco Flow spout
Height 147 mm
Width 50mm
Depth 141 mm
1.1.7. DISABLE CLOSET (CodeSA07)

IDEAL Contour 355x700x440h Suspended mounting
STANDARD 21 Height 415 mm
Code: Vitreous China
S310701 material
Flow rate 6 litres
Reduced flow rate 3
litres
Width 360 mm
Depth 750 mm
750
Net weight 33.5 kg

1.1.8. CLOSET (Code SA08)
IDEAL DEA 365x550x410h AquaBlade® wall-hung toilet
STANDARD Code complete with slim quick-
T348701 release seat. AquaBlade®
technology creates a blade of
water that cleans a 90% larger
surface area than a toilet with a
rim. Thanks to the innovative
design, it also eliminates hidden
corners, making the entire
surface of the pot easily
accessible for more effective
cleaning. For suspended
installation with completely
hidden fixings supplied and
complete with seat. Certified
for 4.5/3 liter waste.
Color: 01 - White
Technology: AquaBlade
Features: .Slim seat .Quick
release .Hidden fixings .Water
saving
Mounting: Suspended
Net weight (kg): 22
Material: Vitreous China
Height (mm): 355
Width (mm): 365
Depth (mm): 550
Hinge mechanism: Normal
closure
Packing elements: Vase+Seat
Flow rate (litres): 4.5

1.1.9. MIRROR (Code SA09)
IDEAL Conca 800x800 Square mirror
STANDARD Mirror with external
black aluminum
frame
(19.5x19.5x37.7
mm) "Squared".
Double
perimeter LED
light (front
towards the
user and rear
towards the
wall). Without
switch. Without
switch. Fixing kit
included 230 V,
50 Hz, IP44,
Class II, 4000K
1.1.10.
SHOWER COLUMN WITH EXTERNAL THERMOSTATIC (Code SA10)
IDEALSTANDARD 315 W Characteristics
Ceratherm 519 D Values
T25 Width 315 mm
Depth 519 mm
Operating type
Cod.: Thermostatic
A7629AA 519
Flow rate 8 liters
per minute
Net weight 4.01 kg

1.1.11.
SHOWER TRAY (Code SA11)
IDEALSTANDARD 900x1000mm Rectangular resin shower
ULTRA tray. matte stone effect
FLAT finish. hidden exhaust.
O90 siphoned waste to be
S I.LIFE ordered separately.
Rectangular shape
Width 1000 mm
Code Length 900 mm
Resin material
T5231FR
Ultra Flat S i.life collection
Height 30 mm
Net weight 31.6 kg
1.1.12.
SHOWER DOOR (Code SA12)
IDEALSTANDARD 1270mm L Shower door with side
1950H sliding opening -
CONNECT 2
Product information
Code Characteristics
K9279EO Values
Connect 2 collection
Type Shower door
Length 1270 mm
Height 1950 mm
Thickness 6 mm,
Extensibility 25 mm,
Ideal Clean, Click &
Clean
Depth 6 mm
6
Material Tempered
safety glass
Net weight 43 kg
1.1.13. SOAP DISPENSER (Code AR 1355)

MEDISPO Soap
Dispenser Height 210 mm For medical offices or
Width 125 mm healthcare
Depth 120 mm environments
Weight 900 grams Made entirely of satin
stainless steel
Dispensing via button
Internal capacity 1000
ml
Easy refilling via top

cap
Complete with wall
mounting accessories
Structural description
Made of satin stainless

steel
1.1.14. GRAB BAR (Code: AR 9045)

MEDISPO Grab Bar Safety grip for the
30 cm code bathroom
AB4000 Available in five
40 cm code different sizes
AB4001 Complete with wall
45 cm code fixing set
AB4002 White color
60 cm code
AB4003 Structural description
80 cm code Structure in sturdy
AB4004 painted steel tube of Ø
25 mm
Complete with wall
Referr to fixing plates
DWG Can be used both
horizontally and
vertically
1.1.15.
CONTROL PLATE (Code SA13)
IDEALSTANDARD OLEAS 150x230mm Control plate for
P1 Prosys™ cistern
rinsing. Pneumatic
drive
Double exhaust,
pneumatically
operated
Oleas collection

Height 150 mm
Width 230 mm
Depth 6 mm
6
Dump Control Press
the button
ABS material
Net weight 1 kg
Operating type
Pneumatic
1.1.16. DUSTBIN (Code FF1590)

MEDISPO Waste
Container External Description
diameter 260 Stainless steel waste
mm container for medical
Height 400 practices
mm Pedal operated
Internal part easily bucket-
like with removable handle
to facilitate cleaning
Internal capacity of 11
litres
Stainless steel structure
Pedal opening
Internal plastic bucket with
steel handle
1.1.17.
TOILET BRUSH (Code SA14)
IDEALSTANDARD IOM 90x 402mm Type Toilet brush holder
Cod.: Material Mixed materials
A9108MY Contemporary style
Net weight 0.75 kg
IOM collection
Height 402 mm
Width 90 mm
Depth 90 mm
90

Round shape
1.1.18.
ROL HOLDER(Code SA15)
IDEALSTANDARD IOM Roll holder with cover
Cod.: for wall installation.
A9127AA Maximum capacity: 5 kg.
Roll holder type
Material Chromed metal
Contemporary style
Net weight 0.42 kg
IOM collection
Height 94 mm
Width 122 mm
Depth 63 mm
1.1.19.
HAND SHOWER (Code SA16)
IDEALSTANDARD CERAFLEX 76x153mm. Single function
Cod.: On/Off hand
B0924AA shower, double
interlock flexible
hose and fixed wall
support
1.1.20.
PAPER TOWEL (Code SA17)
NAME DIMENSIONS DESCRIPTION
IDEALSTANDARD IOM 157x 297 mm. Tissue holder
Cod.: Material stainless
A9133MY Still
Style
Contemporary
Net Weight 0.87
Kg
Collection IOM
Height 157 mm
Width 297 mm
Depth 58mm

B01- King Fahd Road

DETAIL DESIGN
TOILET CUT SHEET SUMMARY
TOILET CUT SHEET SUMMARY

TAB
TOILET
(photocell/electri TAB (basin DISABLED BIDET
CLOSET WASHBASIN WASHBASIN WASHBASIN DISABLED CLOSET CONTROL PANEL DISABLED WASHBASIN SHOWER BASIN SHOWER DOOR Shower Mixer mirror SOAP DISH PAPER TOWEL PAPER DUSTBIN TOILET BRUSH
c/double water mixer) HANDLE SHOWER
HOLDER
inlet)
SA08 SA01 SA03 SA04 SA07 SA13 SA02 SA11 SA12 SA05 SA06 SA10 SA09 AR 1355 A500:L 800 mm SA17 SA15 SA16 FF1590 SA14
AREA NAME ROOM NUMBER

LABORATORY WC_ PUBLIC F/H 49 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
LABORATORY WC _PUBLIC MALE 59 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
HALL WC_ STAFF MALE 52 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
HALL WC_ STAFF FEMALE 47 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
HALL WC_ PUBLIC F/H 50 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
HALL WC_ PUBLIC MALE 51 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
FLUOROSCOPY_PATIENT 57 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
JANITOR 25 1 1 1 1 1
STAFF LOCKERS WC 53 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
STAFF LOCKERS WC 48 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
STAFF LOCKERS WC 66 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
STAFF LOCKERS WC 99 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
RADIOTHERAPY WC _PATIENT 58 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CT SCAN WC_PATIENT FEMALE 46 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CT SCAN WC_PATIENT FEMALE 68 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
RAD. 1floor_PATIENT FEMALE 98 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
RAD. 1floor_PATIENT MALE 103 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
STAFF 1 floor_F/H 100 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 1
STAFF 1 floor_MALE 104 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
U/S_ M/F PATIENT 74 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
PUBLIC TOILET F/H_1 floor 102 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
ABLUTION MALE 71 2 1 2 2 2 2 1
ABLUTION FEMALE 70 2 1 2 2 2 2 1
MANAGER OFFICE WC 97 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
OFFICE ADMIN ANTE 124 2 1 2 2 2 2 1
OFFICES ADMIN MALE 107 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
MANAGER OFFICE ANTE WC 59 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
TOTAL 15 18 7 1 8 25 6 2 2 9 11 2 30 30 7 30 23 23 27 23
B01- King Fahd Road

DETAIL DESIGN
FURNITURE CUT SHEET
FURNITURE CUT SHEET

CONTENTS
CONTENTS ................................................................................................................................................... 1
1 Preamble ............................................................................................................................................. 3
2 Furniture Cut Sheet .............................................................................................................................. 4
2.1 OFFICES AREA - TABLES................................................................................................................ 4
1.1.1. Directional desk (Code: SD 1001) .......................................................................................... 4
1.1.2. Meeting Table (Code: SD 1005) ............................................................................................. 6
1.1.3. Executive desk (Code: SD 1002- 1003-1004) ......................................................................... 8
1.1.4. DIVIDER (Code: SE 1001) ...........................................................................................................10
1.1.5.Coffee Table (Code: TAB 001) ....................................................................................................11
1.1.6.Round Table (Code: TAB 002) ....................................................................................................12
2.2 CABINETS ....................................................................................................................................12
1.1.1 .Executive Cabinet (Code: FC 1490) ............................................................................................12
1.1.2. .Executive Cabinet (Code: FC 1475) ...........................................................................................14
1.1.1. WOODEN CABINET (Code: C-1/ C-2/ C-3/ C-4/ C-5/ C-6/ C-7/ C-8/ C-9/ C-10/ C-11/) ...........15
2.3 CHAIRS ........................................................................................................................................20
1.1.2. GENERAL MANAGER CHAIRS (Code: FF 1215) .......................................................................20
1.1.3. OFFICES AREA - CHAIRS (Code: FF 1210) ..............................................................................21
1.1.4. WAITING AREA - CHAIRS (Code: CH 01) ................................................................................22
1.1.5. ALTERNATIVE WAITING AREA CHAIRS (Code: CH 01) ............................................................23
1.1.6. DESIGN ARMCHAIRS FOR VIP LOUNGE AREAS (Code: SI 1001) ..............................................24
1.1.7. DESIGN ARMCHAIRS FOR VIP LOUNGE AREAS (Code: SI 1003) ..............................................25
1.1.8. PATIENT EXAM ROOM CHAIR (Code: FF 1145) ......................................................................26
1.1.9. SWIVEL STOOL (Code: FF1260) .............................................................................................27
2.4 ACCESSORIES ...............................................................................................................................28
1.1.1. SINK for Clinics (Code: PB 1085) ...........................................................................................28
1.1.1. SINK for Clinics (Code: FC1150+FC1440+FC1385) .................................................................29
1.1.2. WASTE CONTAINER (Code FF1590) ......................................................................................30
1.1.3. GRAB BAR (Code: AR 9045) ..................................................................................................30
2023036DD AR0008_00_Furniture Cut Sheet Pag. 1

1.1.4. SOAP DISPENSER (Code AR 1355) .........................................................................................31
1.1.5. PAPER TOWEL (Code AR 1360) .............................................................................................32
1.1.6. CLOCK (Code FF1840)...........................................................................................................32
1.1.7. MIRROR CHANGING ROOM (Code: AR 1190) ........................................................................33
1.1.8. CABINET LOCKERS (Code: AR 1170) ......................................................................................33
1.1.9. BENCH _ LOCKERS (Code: AR 1330) ......................................................................................34
1.1.10. BOX _ LOCKERS (Code: AR 9040) ..........................................................................................34
1.1.11. CURTAIN_ CHANGING (Code: AR 1460) ................................................................................35
1.1.12. CURTAIN_ CHANGING (Code: AR 1420) ................................................................................35
2.5 KITCHINETTE................................................................................................................................36
1.1.13. CABINET Kitchinette _ STEEL (Code: FC 1180 FC 1430) ........................................................36
1.1.14. REFRIGERATOR _ STEEL (Code: RF 1235) .............................................................................41

1 Preamble
The aim of the present document is the definition of the Furniture Cut Sheet that shows the main
suggested choices of the loose furniture.
The Concept Furniture Cut Sheet will concern the main loose furniture definition, in particular what is
related to all the Administrative areas, Offices, Medical Ambulatory, Waiting areas, Meeting rooms, etc.

2 Furniture Cut Sheet
2.1 OFFICES AREA - TABLES

1.1.1. Directional desk (Code: SD 1001)

ESTEL OFFICE San Polo desk 200 x 90 cm Top Top in Veneer or Veneer and Eco- Leather
sp. 40 mm (1"5/8) for operator side. Top in
Veneer or Veneer and Eco-Leather sp. 15-40
mm (5/8"-1"5/8) for visitor side. Return top in
finishing with the desk on the operator side.
Legs Tops made of wood particles 40 mm
(1"5/8) thick, veneer coated. Modesty Panel
Structure made of wood particles, EcoLeather
coated.

1.1.2. Meeting Table (Code: SD 1005)

ESTEL OFFICE GRAND MORE 240 x 100 cm Tops 22 mm (7/8") thick, flush with structure, in
table Veneer finish, ceramic, back-lacquered etched
extra light glass finish or clear glass. Rounded
corners with R35. The tops of the desks in clear
glass, back-lacquered etched glass and ceramic
can not be electrified either with top access or
with cable outlet. Top profiles The perimeter
profiles are in epoxy powder coated Aluminum,
or in Luxury Metal, and are solidly connected to
the legs creating a load-bearing structure
independent of the top. Legs Metal legs are
epoxy powders coated or in Luxury Metal.

1.1.3. Executive desk (Code: SD 1002- 1003-1004)

ESTEL MORE SD1002: Countertop: available in melamine finish, Fenix
120x80x75 laminate, Wood veneer, glass and ceramic.
Thickness: 22 mm. Countertop Profiles:
SD1003: perimetral profiles are in extruded aluminum,
200x80x74 painted with epoxy powder coating or in Luxury
metal; they are solidly connected to the legs and
SD1004: create a independent supporting structure .
360x160x74 Legs: metal legs painted with epoxy powder
coating or in Luxury metal, with adjustment
foot. Top Access «Cornice»: available for single
desk; Equipped bar with pair of flips : It is
available as standard equipment for the
benches. Double-sided Top Access : standard for
meeting tables. Screen panels: available in fabric
and/or with integrated accessories bar in
aluminum. Modesty Panel: available for single
desk , in melamine, ecofriendly leather «Time»
or wood veneer. Return Desk: available for
single desk; Return Desk bases: available in
Melamine or Sablè Lacquered finish.

1.1.4. DIVIDER (Code: SE 1001)

_ DIVIDER L90 H 48 Light gray desk divider kit
feet, Total width: 900 mm, Special
Covid-19: yes, Partition type: Screen
acoustic separation, Ergonomic: no,
Panel color: Light grey, Total height:
480 mm, Mounting: To be assembled,

Thickness: 24 mm,
Fixing type: Free-standing, Product
recycled: 40%, Eco-sensitive approach: yes

1.1.5.Coffee Table (Code: TAB 001)

ESTEL DOLLY Diam. 60 H 45 Free standing Dolly coffee tables that
complete the family of sofas and
benches.
Top in lacquered mdf and chromed or

matt White Snow powder coated
structure.

1.1.6.Round Table (Code: TAB 002)

CALISTA D90 Diam. 90 H 74 Technical aspect
Total dimensions: L90 x W90 x H73.5 cm
Base diameter: 60 cm
top material: matt black/white painted wood
fiber panels
foot material: black metal
Maximum weight supported: 40 kg
Package 1 dimensions: L94 x D8 x H96 cm
Package 2 dimensions: L68 x D18 x H19 cm
Package 3 dimensions: W62 x D13 x H64 cm
Package weight: 18.5 kg
2.2 CABINETS
1.1.1 .Executive Cabinet (Code: FC 1490)

ESTEL TIN WOOD 90 X 40 x 180 Tin Wood is a family of storage units
cabinets cm that combines the design and lightness

of the 45° perimeter structure with the
versatility of office storage.
Available as open cabinets, with solid or

glass hinged doors, or sliding doors.
They can be equipped with planters and
finishing backs to be used also as room
center dividers

1.1.2. .Executive Cabinet (Code: FC 1475)

--- CABINET 90 X 40 x 200 Closing with cylinder lock.
cabinets cm
N.5 movable shelves
Aluminum handles.
Structure: plywood panels covered in HPL white

laminate
Feet with black rubber pads.

1.1.1. WOODEN CABINET (Code: C-1/ C-2/ C-3/ C-4/ C-5/ C-6/ C-7/ C-8/ C-9/ C-10/ C-11/)

--- --- N.14 VAR Description
Wooden cabinet that is 18
mm thick and glued with
arrow veneer. It is an
industrial-grade cabinet
that meets all the
requirements of the
approved code. It comes
with all the necessary
accessories as details.
Wooden cabinet that is 18
mm thick and glued with
arrow veneer. It is an
industrial-grade cabinet
that meets all the
requirements of the
approved code. It comes
with all the necessary
accessories as details.
Wooden desk that is 18
mm thick and covered with
a layer of 8 mm thick
Corinne White Korean
industry or similar. The
dimensions are based on
the drawings that are
included in the details of
control medical rooms.
Wooden desk that is 18

mm thick and covered with
a layer of 8 mm thick
Corinne White Korean
industry or similar. The
dimensions are based on
the drawings that are
included in the details of
control medical rooms.

2.3 CHAIRS
1.1.2. GENERAL MANAGER CHAIRS (Code: FF 1215)
LEYFORM Origami In Tilt mechanisms in different options with
individual tension control. Chromed metal
sideframes. Padding of expanded urethane
foam. Chromed aluminium armrests. Elegant
backrest support bar of chromed metal.
Polished aluminium base with nylon self-braking
castors. Visitor chairs mith chromed cantilever
frame.

1.1.3. OFFICES AREA - CHAIRS (Code: FF 1210)
LEYFORM Origami RX Tilting mechanism.tubular frame of chromed
Chair steel. Chromed backrest bar. Chromed
aluminium armrests. Heat-welded mesh cover in
4 different colours: blak, light gray, anthracite
and white ,upholstered seat cushion. Polished
aluminium base.Tipe H castors (nylon/ self-
brakin).Low back.

–
1.1.4. WAITING AREA - CHAIRS (Code: CH 01)

LEYFORM CLAIRE Polypropylene shell, flame-retardant cold-
foamed polyurethane padding. Available with or
without padded seat panel. Available in 5 colors.

1.1.5. ALTERNATIVE WAITING AREA CHAIRS (Code: CH 01)
ESTEL SHELL LOUNGE Structure One-piece chair in class 1 flame-
retardant cold molded polyurethane with metal
insert. Upholstery Fabric cat. B-F-G-L, leather,
extra leather. Base Swivel base in powder
coated metal or in polishe aluminium.

1.1.6. DESIGN ARMCHAIRS FOR VIP LOUNGE AREAS (Code: SI 1001)
ESTEL DOLLY BENCH TWO SEATS Dolly is a family of sofas, armchairs and
benches for public spaces. Dolly bench
is a modular system of soft seats,
enhanced by lacquered tops and
functional support and connecting
elements. The removable backrest-

armrest allows changing the bench
configuration with ease.: a seat array
with several possibilities of
configuration, that can be obtained by
combining 2 and 3 seats benches, joined
by linear 60° or 90° coffee tables
connections.
The benches can be equipped with

backrest and armrests, according to the
requirements. Fabric and leather covers
are not removable.
The feet are in Chromed or matt White
Snow powder coated metal
1.1.7. DESIGN ARMCHAIRS FOR VIP LOUNGE AREAS (Code: SI 1003)

ESTEL DOLLY BENCH THREE SEATS Dolly is a family of sofas, armchairs and
benches for public spaces. Dolly bench
is a modular system of soft seats,
enhanced by lacquered tops and
functional support and connecting
elements. The removable backrest-

armrest allows changing the bench
configuration with ease.: a seat array
with several possibilities of
configuration, that can be obtained by
combining 2 and 3 seats benches, joined
by linear 60° or 90° coffee tables
connections.
The benches can be equipped with

backrest and armrests, according to the
requirements. Fabric and leather covers
are not removable.
The feet are in Chromed or matt White
Snow powder coated metal
1.1.8. PATIENT EXAM ROOM CHAIR (Code: FF 1145)

LEYFORM Cosmo Chair With/without armrests, 4-leg frame or double
slide, in chromed or painted steel. PP shell. Seat
padding in expanded polyurethane. 4 leg
version available with armrests. Feet in PP with
optional felt pad for 4-star base. Available with
or without PP counter-seat.

1.1.9. SWIVEL STOOL (Code: FF1260)
swivel stool Total HxD: 101- Technical stool with padded and upholstered
127x63 cm; seat and backrest, equipped with footrest and
Seat WxD: gas lift
48x45 cm; Backrest adjustable in height and depth
Backrest LxH: Armrests: optional.

39x34 cm. Fireproof coating
2 colors available: blue and black
2.4 ACCESSORIES
1.1.1. SINK for Clinics (Code: PB 1085)


MEDISPO SINK Width 350 mm Specially designed to avoid
Depth 300 mm contact and contamination of
Height 215 mm hands, as per current
Sink: legislation, The new regulations
280 mm bowl provide that the handwashing
diameter machine must be equipped
Depth 130 mm with a water dispensing system
that can be activated without
direct contact with the hands,
to avoid possible
contamination.
Available in two versions with

and without 1.2 liter stainless
steel soap dispenser
.Description
Stainless steel sinks
Round internal tub to facilitate
cleaning
Upper wall-mounted splash-
proof stainless steel panel
Suspended wall mounting
Timed knee control, positioned
on the right of the sink
Complete with:
internal mixer to be pre-set to
obtain the desired temperature
Stainless steel splash guard
upper panel to protect the wall
Cap for closing the tub
Drain siphon
Overflow system
Optional 1.2 liter soap
dispenser (model VT1660)
Made entirely of stainless steel
with satin finish
Timed knee control that
guarantees the ideal time for
correct quick washing
1.1.1. SINK for Clinics (Code: FC1150+FC1440+FC1385)

MEDISPO SINK Dimensional Sink for medical clinic
data Foot button operation
Width 450 mm Cabinet with built-in paper waste on the

Depth 450 mm front via swing door
Washbasin top Made entirely of stainless steel
height 850 mm Round internal tub to facilitate cleaning
Total with rear Rear splash-proof stainless steel wall
panel 1250 mm panel
Easy to install
Complete with:
1.2 liter refillable stainless steel soap
dispenser
Stainless steel container for glove box or
wipe box
Rear splash guard
Internal waste paper bin with swing door
Stop for wall fixing
Sink made entirely of stainless steel
Rounded edges
1.1.2. WASTE CONTAINER (Code FF1590)

MEDISPO Waste
Container External Description
diameter 260 Stainless steel waste
mm container for medical
Height 400 practices
mm Pedal operated
Internal part easily bucket-
like with removable handle
to facilitate cleaning
Internal capacity of 11
litres
Stainless steel structure
Pedal opening
Internal plastic bucket with
steel handle
1.1.3. GRAB BAR (Code: AR 9045)


MEDISPO Grab Bar 60 cm code Safety grip for the
AB4003 bathroom
Available in five
different sizes
Complete with wall
fixing set
White color
Structure in sturdy
painted steel tube of Ø
25 mm
Complete with wall
fixing plates
Can be used both
horizontally and
vertically
1.1.4. SOAP DISPENSER (Code AR 1355)

MEDISPO Soap
Dispenser Height 210 mm For medical offices or
Width 125 mm healthcare
Depth 120 mm environments
Weight 900 grams Made entirely of satin
stainless steel
Dispensing via button
Internal capacity 1000
ml
Easy refilling via top
cap
Complete with wall
mounting accessories
Made of satin stainless

steel

1.1.5.
PAPER TOWEL (Code AR 1360)
IDEALSTANDARD IOM 157x 297 mm. Tissue holder
Cod.: Material
A9133MY stainless Still
Style
Contemporary
Net Weight 0.87
Kg
Collection IOM
Height 157 mm
Width 297 mm
Depth 58mm
1.1.6. CLOCK (Code FF1840)

MEDISPO Operating Dimensional data
Room Clock Width 592 mm Mark time
Height 315 mm Timer with red hand and
Weight 12 kg separate dial
Reset Timer (via wall
button)
Operation via 220 Volt
mains power supply
Steel case treated with
epoxy resins
Frame made of 18/10
stainless steel
Dial in white painted
anticorodal
Digits silk-screened in
black
Aluminum hands painted
black for the hours and
minutes and red for the
seconds hand
Tempered glass dial
protection
Possibility of wall or
recessed mounting
Independent 220 Volt
quartz movement

1.1.7. MIRROR CHANGING ROOM (Code: AR 1190)
------ Dim: 37x 120
cm.
hanging mirror.
Strong and durable
aluminum alloy thickened
frame with a delicate
border and careful
polishing. Available in
multiple colors from
gold/black/silver,
The mirror surface is clear
and bright, giving distinct,
lifelike images and well-lit
reflections, It adopts
explosion-proof silver
glass when the glass is
accidentally hit the
protective film will
prevent slashing .
1.1.8. CABINET LOCKERS (Code: AR 1170)

------ Cabinet 4 Depth: 47 cm locker room wardrobe with
seats Frame padlock or key in ennobled
thickness: 19 wood. 4 seats. 19mm backrest
mm structure. Various colours.
Door High resistence. High density
thickness: 19 melamine wood.Standard:
mm
Self - – 1 thermoplastic coat hanger
supporting for each door
back: 19 mm
4 Doors: – 1 ventilation grill for each
90×35 cm door
– 1 lock with double key for

each door (alternatively,
padlockable device)
– 1 knob for each door– 4

adjustable feet in
thermoplastic material, height
30mm

1.1.9. BENCH _ LOCKERS (Code: AR 1330)
------------- Bench Height: 46cm Changing room bench with seat only,
Width: 100cm 4cm structure, resistant and solid, with
Depth: 40cm floor adjustment feet and shoe rest in
Stainless steel polished stainless steel with a diameter
tubes: 20mm of 20mm
Frame
thickness:
38mm
1.1.10. BOX _ LOCKERS (Code: AR 9040)

------------- Box locker 1 Box width (mm) 250 mm. Rectangular cabinet
compartment Structure color Light grey with compartment -
Anthracite colored door To be assembled -
Useful compartment No. of compartments
width (mm) 230 mm 1
Width (mm) 250 mm Closing type With key
7/10 thick sheet metal
Material Steel
RAL epoxy finish
9002, 7035, 5022,
7016

1.1.11. CURTAIN_ CHANGING (Code: AR 1460)
Curtain Dimensions L x W x H: 135 x Curtain support in
2 x 200 cm polished steel tube
Main material: Polyester diameter cm. 2
Main color: Ivory wall fixing with screws.
fireproof: Yes tent description:
1.1.12. CURTAIN_ CHANGING (Code: AR 1420)

INDA Hook 4 Dimensions (cm): Width: 42 / Color: Polished Steel
Collection: hanging Height: 4 / Depth: 4 Material: Metal
One Style: Design,
Designers: Contemporary Classic
Matteo Shape: Round
Thun & Installation: Wall fixing
Antonio with screws and plugs
Rodriguez and CLICK snap system
Packaging: Box complete
with screws and plugs
for wall fixing

2.5 KITCHINETTE
1.1.13. CABINET Kitchinette _ STEEL (Code: FC 1180 FC 1430)

LOTUS LA 50 N.1 Dimensions cm 60x50 Stainless steel
Art: SNAK SINK (Internal:34x40x17h) element
SNAK 50 unit - Bowl

LOTUS PL 2 _50 N.1 Dimensions Stainless steel
SNAK WORK cm 60x50x29h element
TOP

LOTUS M 12 _50 N.1 Dimensions Stainless steel
SNAK STAND cm element
120x40x60h

LOTUS P 61 _50 N.4 Dimensions Stainless steel
SNAK cm element
ACCESSORIES 29.5x2.5x47h
DOOR

1.1.14. REFRIGERATOR _ STEEL (Code: RF 1235)

LOTUS ARTIC N.1 60x60 Description
Construction -Fabricated using
CrNi 18/10 AISI 304 grade
Stainless Steel Scotch-Brite
Satin polish Finish. Maxi
Insulation 90 mm. Refrigerant
gas R290.
Model - Professional
refrigerated cabinet ventilated.
Internal space for GN-2/1, with
inox doors. Evaporator fan
with low energy consumption.
Automatic defrosting and
water evaporation system.
Stopping of the fans when the
doors are open.
Maintenance - Immediate
access to the electrical
components above the door.
Fitting - 3 plastic coated
shelves GN2/1 for door, lock
and adjustable s/s feet.

B01- King Fahd Road

DETAIL DESIGN
ARCHITECTURAL RDS&FINISHING TABLE
ARCHITECTURAL RDS&FINISHING TABLE

Architectural RDS & Finishing Table
Unbounded Height
Wall Protection
Room Number
Skirting Finish
Ceiling Height
Ceiling Finish
Room Name
Floor Finish
Wall Finish
Perimeter
Wet Area
Level
Area
001 R-Ground Floor Billing 9 m² 11.907 5 810 3.160 Gypsum Board Paint Porcelain Tiles Porcelain Tiles '--
002 R-Ground Floor Clean / Storage 8 m² 12.200 2 700 3.160 l Gypsum Tiles Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
003 R-Ground Floor Clinic 14 16 060 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Board Paint Vinyl Vinyl '--
004 R-Ground Floor Cold waiting 4 m² 8.674 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Board Paint Vinyl Vinyl Acrovyn
005 R-Ground Floor Control - PETCT 9 m² 11.920 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl Radiation Shielding
006 R-Ground Floor Control - CT 6 m² 10 316 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Board Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl '--
007 R-Ground Floor Control - FLU 5 m² 8 884 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Board Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl '--
008 R-Ground Floor Control - BU 15 m² 21 059 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Board Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl '--
009 R-Ground Floor Dress - FLU 2 m² 6.089 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Board Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl '--
010 R-Ground Floor Dress - MRI 2 m² 5.032 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Vinyl '--
011 R-Ground Floor Dress - MRI 2 m² 5.048 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Vinyl '--
012 R-Ground Floor Dress - CT 2 m² 5.900 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Board Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl '--
013 R-Ground Floor Dress - BU 01 3 m² 6 789 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Board Paint Vinyl Vinyl '--
014 R-Ground Floor Dress - BU 02 3 m² 6 720 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Board Paint Vinyl Vinyl '--
015 R-Ground Floor Storage GF 4 m² 9 231 2 700 3.160 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
016 R-Ground Floor Entrance Laboratory 33 m² 34 461 2.700/2.850 3.160 Gypsum Board / Gypsum Tiles Paint Porcelain Tiles Porcelain Tiles '--
017 R-Ground Floor Entrance Radiotherapy 15 m² 21 261 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Board / Gypsum Tiles Paint & Acoustic Wood Porcelain Tiles Porcelain Tiles '--
018 R-Ground Floor Equipment - PETCT 7 m² 11.166 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl '--
019 R-Ground Floor Equipment - MRI 7 m² 12.925 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl '--
020 R-Ground Floor Filter 2 m² 5 918 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Vinyl Radiation Shielding
021 R-Ground Floor Hot Lab. 8 m² 12 349 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Vinyl Radiation Shielding
022 R-Ground Floor Corridor - PETCT 14 m² 19 680 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl Radiation Shielding / Acrovyn
023 R-Ground Floor Uptake/Induction Room 01 7 m² 12 635 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Board Paint Vinyl Vinyl Radiation Shielding
024 R-Ground Floor IT Closet GF 2 m² 4.800 2 400 2.630 Gypsum Board Paint Vinyl Vinyl '--
025 R-Ground Floor Janitor GF 5 m² 9 193 2 200 3.160 l Gypsum Tiles Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
026 R-Ground Floor Laser Imager 4 m² 8.229 5 810 3.160 Gypsum Board Paint Porcelain Tiles Porcelain Tiles '--
027 R-Ground Floor Lobby - Entrance 158 m² 86 676 5 810 3.160 Gypsum Board / Gypsum Tiles Paint & Acoustic Wood Porcelain Tiles Porcelain Tiles '--
028 R-Ground Floor Lobby - Entrance Radiology 22 m² 20.169 5 810 3.160 Gypsum Board / Gypsum Tiles Paint & Acoustic Wood Porcelain Tiles Porcelain Tiles '--
029 R-Ground Floor Disposal Room 4 m² 8 688 2 700 3.160 l Gypsum Tiles Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
030 R-Ground Floor Mould Room Fitting 9 m² 12 030 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Board Paint Vinyl Vinyl '--
031 R-Ground Floor Mould Room Workshop 11 m² 13.340 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Board Paint Vinyl Vinyl '--
032 R-Ground Floor Blood Collection 16 m² 16.720 2 700 3.160 l Gypsum Tiles Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
033 R-Ground Floor Planning & Dosimetry 12 m² 14.098 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Board Paint Vinyl Vinyl '--
034 R-Ground Floor Patient Bay Holding 27 m² 28 970 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Board / Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Vinyl Acrovyn
035 R-Ground Floor Printing 3 m² 7.032 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Vinyl '--
036 R-Ground Floor Radioactive Waste Material 4 m² 10 092 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Tiles Vinyl Vinyl '-- Radiation Shielding
037 R-Ground Floor Reception GF 11 m² 15.593 5 810 3.160 Gypsum Board Paint & Acoustic Wood Porcelain Tiles Porcelain Tiles '--
038 R-Ground Floor Reporting (diagn.&radio.) 11 m² 14.783 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Vinyl '--
039 R-Ground Floor Sampling Room F 9 m² 7.988 2 400 3.160 Gypsum Board Paint Vinyl Vinyl '--
040 R-Ground Floor Sampling Room M 8 m² 7.988 2 400 3.160 Gypsum Board Paint Vinyl Vinyl '--
041 R-Ground Floor Secretarial pool 6 m² 10.450 5 810 3.160 Gypsum Board Paint Porcelain Tiles Porcelain Tiles '--
042 R-Ground Floor Security room 13 m² 15.588 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Board Paint Porcelain Tiles Porcelain Tiles '--
043 R-Ground Floor Staff changing M Technicians/Chemists 6 m² 9.872 2 700 3.160 l Gypsum Tiles Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
044 R-Ground Floor Staff changing M Nurses 6 m² 9.544 2 700 3.160 l Gypsum Tiles Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
045 R-Ground Floor Air Lock 8 m² 11 700 2 850 3.160 l Acoustic Wood Paint Porcelain Tiles & Carpet '-- '--
046 R-Ground Floor Toilet (radioactive) M/F/H 3 m² 7.389 2 400 3.160 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- Radiation Shielding
047 R-Ground Floor Toilet F - Int 3 m² 7.722 2 400 3.160 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Porcelain Tiles '-- '--
048 R-Ground Floor Toilet M Technicians/Chemists 3 m² 6.660 2 400 3.160 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
049 R-Ground Floor Toilet F/H - Lab 4 m² 7.704 2 400 3.160 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
050 R-Ground Floor Toilet F/H - Pub 4 m² 8.202 2 400 3.160 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Porcelain Tiles '-- '--
051 R-Ground Floor Toilet M - Pub 3 m² 7.722 2 400 3.160 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Porcelain Tiles '-- '--
052 R-Ground Floor Toilet M - Int 3 m² 7.722 2 400 3.160 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Porcelain Tiles '-- '--
053 R-Ground Floor Toilet M - Nurses 2 m² 6.548 2 400 3.160 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
054 R-Ground Floor Toilet M/F - PETCT 3 m² 7.458 2 400 3.160 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
055 R-Ground Floor Toilet M/F - MRI 3 m² 7 835 2 400 3.160 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
056 R-Ground Floor Toilet M/F - Rep 3 m² 6.692 2 400 3.160 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
057 R-Ground Floor Toilet M/F - Fluo 2 m² 4.972 2 400 3.160 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
058 R-Ground Floor Toilet M/F/H - Bu 4 m² 7.600 2 400 3.160 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
059 R-Ground Floor Toilet M/H - Lab 3 m² 7.700 2 400 3.160 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
060 R-Ground Floor VIP room 7 m² 10.308 2 700 3.160 Acoustic Wood Paint & Acoustic Wood Porcelain Tiles Porcelain Tiles '--
061 R-Ground Floor Waiting/ Screening 10 m² 15 105 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Board / Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Vinyl Acrovyn
Unbounded Height
Wall Protection
Room Number
Skirting Finish
Ceiling Height
Ceiling Finish
Room Name
Floor Finish
Wall Finish
Perimeter
Wet Area
Level
Area
062 R-Ground Floor Waste / Storage 10 m² 14.057 2 700 3.160 l Gypsum Tiles Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
063 R-Ground Floor Wheelchair storage 6 m² 9.432 2 500 3.160 Gypsum Board Vinyl Vinyl '-- '--
064 R-Ground Floor Corridor-Security 152 m² 163 116 2.631
2.400/2.500/2700 Gypsum Board / Gypsum Tiles Paint Porcelain Tiles Porcelain Tiles Acrovyn
065 R-Ground Floor Dirty Utility 4 m² 8 382 2 700 2.632 l Gypsum Tiles Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
066 R-Ground Floor Clean-up Room 5 m² 8 382 2 700 2.632 l Gypsum Tiles Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
067 R-Ground Floor Patient Bay 8 m² 8 382 2 700 2.632 Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl Acrovyn
068 R-Ground Floor Toilet (radioactive) M/F/H 3 m² 7.389 2 400 3.160 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- Radiation Shielding
069 R-Ground Floor Uptake/Induction Room 02 8 m² 12 340 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Board Paint Vinyl Vinyl Radiation Shielding
070 1-Floor Ablution F 4 m² 8.482 2 550 2.630 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
071 1-Floor Ablution M 5 m² 8.847 2 550 2.630 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
072 1-Floor Changing Staff F Dr 2 m² 6.210 2 400 2.630 l Gypsum Board Paint Vinyl Vinyl '--
073 1-Floor Changing Staff F 19 m² 21.751 2 550 2.630 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
074 1-Floor Changing Staff M 5 m² 8.850 2 550 2.630 l Gypsum Board Paint Vinyl Vinyl '--
075 1-Floor Command Centre 35 m² 24 500 2 550 2.630 Gypsum Board Paint Vinyl Vinyl '--
076 1-Floor Dress - Mammo 2 m² 5.028 2 550 2.630 Gypsum Board Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl Lead Wall
077 1-Floor Dress - DEXA 2 m² 4 990 2 550 2.630 Gypsum Board Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl Lead Wall
078 1-Floor Dress - U/S 2 m² 5.786 2 550 2.630 Gypsum Board Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl '--
079 1-Floor Dress - Doppler 2 m² 5.590 2 200 2.630 Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl '--
080 1-Floor Dress - Stress Exercise 1 m² 4 638 2 200 2.630 Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl '--
081 1-Floor Electrical Room 13 m² 18.368 2 200 2.630 Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl '--
082 1-Floor IT Closet 1F 1 m² 4.800 2 200 2.630 Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl '--
083 1-Floor Janitor 1F 3 m² 8.369 2 550 2.630 l Gypsum Tiles Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
084 1-Floor Lounge Doctor 9 m² 12.360 2 550 2.630 Gypsum Board Paint Vinyl Vinyl '--
085 1-Floor Meeting Room 14 m² 20 006 2 550 2.630 Gypsum Board Glass Partition / Paint Porcelain Tiles Porcelain Tiles '--
086 1-Floor Office 39 m² 43 229 2.200/2.550 2.630 Gypsum Board / Gypsum Tiles Paint Porcelain Tiles Porcelain Tiles '--
087 1-Floor Office CEO 12 m² 13.766 2 550 2.630 Gypsum Board Paint & Acoustic Wood Porcelain Tiles Porcelain Tiles '--
088 1-Floor Pantry 7 m² 10.988 2 400 2.630 l Gypsum Board Paint Vinyl Vinyl '--
089 1-Floor Prayer Room F 6 m² 10.129 2 400 2.630 l Gypsum Board Paint Carpet Wood '--
090 1-Floor Prayer Room M 9 m² 12.699 2 400 2.630 l Gypsum Board Paint Carpet Wood '--
091 1-Floor Reception 1F 3 m² 8.030 2 550 2.630 Gypsum Board / Gypsum Tiles Paint Porcelain Tiles Porcelain Tiles '--
092 1-Floor Repair/Storage Room 8 m² 13.332 2 200 2.630 l Gypsum Tiles Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
093 1-Floor Secretary 5 m² 9.270 2 550 2.630 Gypsum Board Paint Porcelain Tiles Porcelain Tiles '--
094 1-Floor Server Room 18 m² 18.920 2 200 2.630 Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl '--
095 1-Floor Storage 1F 7 m² 12 275 2 400 2.630 l Gypsum Tiles Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
096 1-Floor Subwaiting - Mammo 4 m² 10 008 2 350 2.630 Gypsum Board Paint Vinyl Vinyl '--
097 1-Floor Toilet CEO 4 m² 8.320 2 400 2.630 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Porcelain Tiles '-- '--
098 1-Floor Toilet F - Hearth 3 m² 8.664 2 400 2.630 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
099 1-Floor Toilet F - Staff 3 m² 6.590 2 400 2.630 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
100 1-Floor Toilet F/H - Int 4 m² 8.097 2 400 2.630 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
101 1-Floor Toilet F/H - Adm 4 m² 7 464 2 300 2.630 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Porcelain Tiles '-- '--
102 1-Floor Toilet F/H - Pub 7 m² 10 983 2 400 2.630 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Porcelain Tiles '-- '--
103 1-Floor Toilet M - Hearth 4 m² 8.172 2 400 2.630 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
104 1-Floor Toilet M - Int 4 m² 8.550 2 400 2.630 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
105 1-Floor Toilet M/F - U/S 3 m² 6.264 2 400 2.630 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Ceramic Tiles '-- '--
106 1-Floor Subwating - Hearth 9 m² 15 980 2 400 2.630 Gypsum Board Paint Vinyl Vinyl '--
107 1-Floor Toilet M - Adm 2 m² 6 612 2 300 2.630 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Porcelain Tiles '-- '--
108 1-Floor Waiting Radiology 26 m² 27.735 2 550 2.630 Gypsum Board / Gypsum Tiles Paint & Acoustic Wood Porcelain Tiles Porcelain Tiles '--
109 R-Ground Floor Bunker 1 56 m² 51.176 2.700/2.900 3.160 Gypsum Board / Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl '--
110 R-Ground Floor Bunker 2 56 m² 51.130 2.700/2.900 3.160 Gypsum Board / Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl '--
111 R-Ground Floor CT 24 m² 21 337 2.500/2.800 3.160 Gypsum Board / Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl Lead Wall
112 R-Ground Floor Fluoroscopy 22 m² 18.940 2.700/2.900 3.160 Gypsum Board / Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl Lead Wall
113 R-Ground Floor Corridor Radiology GF 36 m² 44 966 2 700 2.632 Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Vinyl Acrovyn
114 R-Ground Floor MRI 32 m² 23 664 2.400/2.500 3.160 Gypsum Board / Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl Faraday Cage
115 R-Ground Floor PET/CT 41 m² 26.212 2.700/3.000 3.160 Gypsum Board / Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl Radiation Shielding
116 1-Floor Dexa 20 m² 19.923 2.200/2.550 2.630 Gypsum Board / Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl Lead Wall
117 1-Floor Doppler 13 m² 15.775 2.200/2.550 2.630 Gypsum Board / Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl '--
118 1-Floor Echo 15 m² 15 795 2.200/2.550 2.630 Gypsum Board / Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl '--
119 1-Floor Mammography 18 m² 17.082 2.200/2.550 2.630 Gypsum Board / Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl Lead Wall
120 1-Floor Panorama & Cone Beam 15 m² 15 977 2.200/2.550 2.630 Gypsum Board / Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl Lead Wall
121 1-Floor Stress Exercise 18 m² 19 449 2.200/2.550 2.630 Gypsum Board / Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl '--
122 1-Floor U/S 01 16 m² 16 064 2.200/2.550 2.630 Gypsum Board / Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl '--
123 1-Floor U/S 02 14 m² 15 750 2.200/2.550 2.630 Gypsum Board / Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl '--
124 1-Floor Anti-Toilet Adm 5 m² 8 697 2 400 2.630 l Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiles Porcelain Tiles '-- '--
125 1-Floor Storage 1FT 5 m² 8 521 2 700 3.160 Gypsum Board Paint Vinyl Vinyl '--
126 1-Floor Corridor Radiology - Mammo 21 m² 28 382 2 700 2.632 Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Vinyl Acrovyn
Unbounded Height
Wall Protection
Room Number
Skirting Finish
Ceiling Height
Ceiling Finish
Room Name
Floor Finish
Wall Finish
Perimeter
Wet Area
Level
Area
127 1-Floor Corridor Radiology - Hearth 25 m² 31 692 2 700 2.632 Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Vinyl Acrovyn
128 1-Floor Corridor - Int. 77 m² 96 561 2 700 2.632 Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Vinyl
129 R-Ground Floor Control MRI 6 m² 10 382 2 700 2.632 Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Antistatic Vinyl '--
130 R-Ground Floor Corridor Radiotherapy 50 m² 56 382 2 700 2.632 Gypsum Tiles Paint Vinyl Vinyl Acrovyn
Architectural RDS & Finishing Table
PW-UPS double socket - wall mounted

HVAC-Room Relative Humidity S/W%
PW-UPS single socket - wall mounted
CO-Tel/Data Outlet wall mounted

HVAC-Immission Air Flow (vol/h)
HVAC-Extraction Air Flow (vol/h)
PW-Isolating Transformer(kVA)-
CO-Nurse Call System PENDANT

PW-Electrical Equipment 1 Ph.
CO-Tel/Data Outlet PENDANT
CO-TV Outlet wall mounted

PW-Normal double socket -
PW-Normal single socket -
HVAC-Room Temperature
WA-Shower Tray Accesr.
FP-Fire Detectors (type)

Dedicated powersupply
PW-Voltage Supply (V)
HVAC-Room Pressure
HVAC-Filtration Class
FP-Sprinkler System
FP-Fire Estinguisher
HVAC-System Type
Power Supply Type
CO-Access Control
MG-Oxygen - qty
WA-Hand Wash
DR-Radioactive
Room Number
wall mounted
wall mounted
LI-Emergency
DR-Standard
Room Name
WA-Cold W
WA-Hot W
LI-Normal
CO-CCTV
WA-Sink
WA-WC
Level
001 R-Ground Floor Billing  neutral 22 > 30% 0 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-04 NORMAL 230 V    Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  4
002 R-Ground Floor Clean / Storage      positive 22 > 30% 60 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-04 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0
003 R-Ground Floor Clinic 1      positive 22 > 30% 20 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-04 NORMAL,UPS 230 V    Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  4 1 - Outdoor
004 R-Ground Floor Cold waiting  neutral 22 > 30% 0 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  2
005 R-Ground Floor Control - PETCT  positive 22 > 30% 25 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL,UPS 230 V     Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  4
006 R-Ground Floor Control - CT  positive 22 > 30% 15 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL,UPS 230 V    Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  4
007 R-Ground Floor Control - FLU  positive 22 > 30% 20 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL,UPS 230 V     Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  4
008 R-Ground Floor Control - BU  positive 22 > 30% 25 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-04 NORMAL,UPS 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  8 1
009 R-Ground Floor Dress - FLU  negative ventilated > 30% 0 15 ventilation system MERV-04 NORMAL 230 V  Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0
010 R-Ground Floor Dress - MRI  negative ventilated > 30% 0 15 ventilation system MERV-04 NORMAL 230 V  Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0
011 R-Ground Floor Dress - MRI  negative ventilated > 30% 0 15 ventilation system MERV-04 NORMAL 230 V  Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0
012 R-Ground Floor Dress - CT  negative ventilated > 30% 0 15 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V  Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0
013 R-Ground Floor Dress - BU 01  negative ventilated > 30% 0 15 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V  Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0
014 R-Ground Floor Dress - BU 02  negative ventilated > 30% 0 15 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V  Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0
015 R-Ground Floor Storage GF  negative ventilated > 30% 65 75 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V  Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0
016 R-Ground Floor Entrance Laboratory  positive 22 > 30% 170 190 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL,UPS 230 V     Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  3 1 - corridor 1 2 1 + 1 - Outdoor
017 R-Ground Floor Entrance Radiotherapy  neutral 22 > 30% 0 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-04 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0
018 R-Ground Floor Equipment - PETCT  positive 22 > 30% 20 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V    Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0 1 - Outdoor
019 R-Ground Floor Equipment - MRI  positive 22 > 30% 30 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0
020 R-Ground Floor Filter  negative ventilated > 30% 0 25 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V  Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0
021 R-Ground Floor Hot Lab.      negative 22 > 30% 550 660 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL,UPS 230 V     Addressable Intelligent Heat Detector  2
022 R-Ground Floor Corridor - PETCT 1   positive 22 > 30% 25 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  2 1
023 R-Ground Floor Uptake/Induction Room 01      negative 22 > 30% 30 35 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0
024 R-Ground Floor IT Closet GF  neutral 22 > 30% 0 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-04 NORMAL,UPS 230 V     0 1 entrance
025 R-Ground Floor Janitor GF      negative ventilated > 30% 0 50 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0
026 R-Ground Floor Laser Imager  neutral 22 > 30% 0 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-04 NORMAL,UPS 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 4
027 R-Ground Floor Lobby - Entrance  positive 22 > 30% 900 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-04 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 4 1 2 6 1 + 1 - Outdoor 1
028 R-Ground Floor Lobby - Entrance Radiology  positive 22 > 30% 0 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-04 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 0 1 1
029 R-Ground Floor Disposal Room      negative 22 > 30% 0 65 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL,UPS 230 V     Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  3
030 R-Ground Floor Mould Room Fitting      negative ventilated > 30% 85 95 ventilation system MERV-04 NORMAL 230 V  Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0 1
031 R-Ground Floor Mould Room Workshop 1      negative ventilated > 30% 110 125 ventilation system MERV-04 NORMAL,UPS 230 V    Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  4
032 R-Ground Floor Blood Collection      negative 22 > 30% 50 55 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL,UPS 230 V      Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  3 3 corridor + 1 - Outdoor
033 R-Ground Floor Planning & Dosimetry      positive 22 > 30% 20 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-04 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  4
034 R-Ground Floor Patient Bay Holding 1      positive 22 > 30% 100 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0 1
035 R-Ground Floor Printing  negative 22 > 30% 40 50 variable refrigerant flow MERV-04 NORMAL 230 V    Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  4
036 R-Ground Floor Radioactive Waste Material  negative ventilated > 30% 0 130 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL,UPS 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0 1 corridor + 1 - Outdoor 1 + 1 other entrance
037 R-Ground Floor Reception GF  positive 22 > 30% 0 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-04 NORMAL,UPS 230 V    Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 4 1 1
038 R-Ground Floor Reporting (diagn.&radio.)  positive 22 > 30% 15 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-04 NORMAL,UPS 230 V     Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  3 2 corridor
039 R-Ground Floor Sampling Room F  positive 22 > 30% 40 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0 2 - Outdoor - building corner
040 R-Ground Floor Sampling Room M  positive 22 > 30% 40 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL,UPS 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0
041 R-Ground Floor Secretarial pool  neutral 22 > 30% 0 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-04 NORMAL 230 V    Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 6
042 R-Ground Floor Security room  positive 22 > 30% 25 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL,UPS 230 V      Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  12 1 - corridor 4 corridor 2 corridor + 1 - Outdoor 1
043 R-Ground Floor Staff changing M Technicians/Chemists  positive 22 > 30% 50 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-04 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  1
044 R-Ground Floor Staff changing M Nurses  positive 22 > 30% 50 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-04 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  1 1 - corridor 1 corridor
045 R-Ground Floor Air Lock  positive 22 > 30% 15 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0
046 R-Ground Floor Toilet (radioactive) M/F/H       negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V    0
047 R-Ground Floor Toilet F - Int       negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   0
048 R-Ground Floor Toilet M Technicians/Chemists       negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-04 NORMAL 230 V   0
049 R-Ground Floor Toilet F/H - Lab       negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   0
050 R-Ground Floor Toilet F/H - Pub       negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   0
051 R-Ground Floor Toilet M - Pub       negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V    0
052 R-Ground Floor Toilet M - Int       negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V    0
053 R-Ground Floor Toilet M - Nurses       negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-04 NORMAL 230 V   0
054 R-Ground Floor Toilet M/F - PETCT       negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-04 NORMAL 230 V    0
055 R-Ground Floor Toilet M/F - MRI       negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   0
056 R-Ground Floor Toilet M/F - Rep       negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   0
057 R-Ground Floor Toilet M/F - Fluo       negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   0
058 R-Ground Floor Toilet M/F/H - Bu       negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-04 NORMAL 230 V    0
059 R-Ground Floor Toilet M/H - Lab       negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   0
060 R-Ground Floor VIP room  positive 22 > 30% 15 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  2 1 1
061 R-Ground Floor Waiting/ Screening  positive 22 > 30% 20 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-04 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  2 1 - corridor 1
062 R-Ground Floor Waste / Storage      negative ventilated > 30% 150 160 ventilation system MERV-04 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0 1 - Outdoor
063 R-Ground Floor Wheelchair storage  neutral 22 > 30% 0 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V  Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0
064 R-Ground Floor Corridor-Security 0 positive 22 > 30% 60 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 230 V  Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 
065 R-Ground Floor Dirty Utility 0    negative ventilated > 30% 0 65 ventilation system MERV-14 230 V  Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 
066 R-Ground Floor Clean-up Room 0    negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-14 230 V  Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 
067 R-Ground Floor Patient Bay 0 positive 22 > 30% 0 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 230 V  Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 
068 R-Ground Floor Toilet (radioactive) M/F/H 0    negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-14 230 V 
069 R-Ground Floor Uptake/Induction Room 02 0    negative 22 > 30% 40 45 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 230 V  Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 
070 1-Floor Ablution F      negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0
071 1-Floor Ablution M      negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0 1 corridor
072 1-Floor Changing Staff F Dr  negative ventilated > 30% 0 20 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V  Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  2 1 - corridor 4 corridor
073 1-Floor Changing Staff F  positive 22 > 30% 60 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V  Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0
074 1-Floor Changing Staff M  negative ventilated > 30% 0 50 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0
075 1-Floor Command Centre  positive 22 > 30% 50 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL,UPS 230 V     Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 30 1 1
076 1-Floor Dress - Mammo  negative ventilated > 30% 0 25 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V  Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 0
077 1-Floor Dress - DEXA  negative ventilated > 30% 0 25 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V  Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 0
078 1-Floor Dress - U/S  positive 22 > 30% 0 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V  Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 0
079 1-Floor Dress - Doppler  positive 22 > 30% 0 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V  Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 0
080 1-Floor Dress - Stress Exercise  positive 22 > 30% 0 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V  Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 0
081 1-Floor Electrical Room  positive 22 > 30% 20 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-04 NORMAL 230 V    Addressable Intelligent Multi Sensor Detector  2 1 + 1 FM200
082 1-Floor IT Closet 1F  neutral 22 > 30% 0 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL,UPS 230 V    0
083 1-Floor Janitor 1F       negative ventilated > 30% 0 50 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0
084 1-Floor Lounge Doctor  positive 22 > 30% 25 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  2
085 1-Floor Meeting Room  positive 22 > 30% 50 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-04 NORMAL,UPS 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  3 1
086 1-Floor Office  positive 22 > 30% 85 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-04 NORMAL,UPS 230 V     Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  6 1 1 1
087 1-Floor Office CEO  positive 22 > 30% 20 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-04 NORMAL,UPS 230 V     Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  4 1
088 1-Floor Pantry      negative ventilated > 30% 0 100 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V    Addressable Intelligent Heat Detector  0 2 corridor 1 corridor
089 1-Floor Prayer Room F  positive 22 > 30% 55 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0
090 1-Floor Prayer Room M  positive 22 > 30% 65 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0 1
PW-UPS double socket - wall mounted
HVAC-Room Relative Humidity S/W%
PW-UPS single socket - wall mounted
CO-Tel/Data Outlet wall mounted

HVAC-Immission Air Flow (vol/h)
HVAC-Extraction Air Flow (vol/h)
PW-Isolating Transformer(kVA)-
CO-Nurse Call System PENDANT

CO-Tel/Data Outlet PENDANT
CO-TV Outlet wall mounted

PW-Normal double socket -
PW-Normal single socket -
HVAC-Room Temperature
WA-Shower Tray Accesr.
FP-Fire Detectors (type)

PW-Voltage Supply (V)
HVAC-Room Pressure
HVAC-Filtration Class
FP-Sprinkler System
FP-Fire Estinguisher
HVAC-System Type
Power Supply Type
CO-Access Control
MG-Oxygen - qty
WA-Hand Wash
DR-Radioactive
Room Number
wall mounted
wall mounted
LI-Emergency
DR-Standard
Room Name
WA-Cold W
WA-Hot W
LI-Normal
CO-CCTV
WA-Sink
WA-WC
Level
091 1-Floor Reception 1F  neutral 22 > 30% 0 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector
092 1-Floor Repair/Storage Room  negative ventilated > 30% 0 120 ventilation system MERV-04 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  2
093 1-Floor Secretary  neutral 22 > 30% 0 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-04 NORMAL,UPS 230 V     Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  3
094 1-Floor Server Room  positive 22 > 30% 25 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-04 NORMAL,UPS 230 V      Addressable Intelligent Multi Sensor Detector  2 1
095 1-Floor Storage 1F  positive 22 > 30% 100 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0 1
096 1-Floor Subwaiting - Mammo  positive 22 > 30% 25 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0
097 1-Floor Toilet CEO        negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   0
098 1-Floor Toilet F - Hearth       negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V    0
099 1-Floor Toilet F - Staff       negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   0
100 1-Floor Toilet F/H - Int       negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   0
101 1-Floor Toilet F/H - Adm       negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   0
102 1-Floor Toilet F/H - Pub       negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V    0
103 1-Floor Toilet M - Hearth       negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V    0
104 1-Floor Toilet M - Int       negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V    0
105 1-Floor Toilet M/F - U/S       negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   0
106 1-Floor Subwating - Hearth       negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V    0
107 1-Floor Toilet M - Adm       negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   0
108 1-Floor Waiting Radiology  neutral 22 > 30% 0 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL,UPS 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  4 1 1 4 2
109 R-Ground Floor Bunker 1  neutral 22 > 30% 2500 2500 air handling unit MERV-14 NORMAL,UPS 400 V     Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 0 3 corridor 1 corridor
110 R-Ground Floor Bunker 2  neutral 22 > 30% 2500 2500 air handling unit MERV-14 NORMAL,UPS 400 V     Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 0 1 - Outdoor
111 R-Ground Floor CT 1      positive 22 > 30% 80 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL,UPS 400 V     Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 0
112 R-Ground Floor Fluoroscopy 1      positive 22 > 30% 100 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL,UPS 400 V    Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 0 1 - corridor 3 corridor
113 R-Ground Floor Corridor Radiology GF 0 positive 22 > 30% 60 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 230 V Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 
114 R-Ground Floor MRI 1  negative 22 > 30% 120 700 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL,UPS 400 V    Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 0
115 R-Ground Floor PET/CT 1  positive 22 > 30% 170 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL,UPS 400 V     Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 0 1 - corridor 4 corridor 2 corridor
116 1-Floor Dexa 1      positive 22 > 30% 70 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL,UPS 230 V     Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 4 1 corridor
117 1-Floor Doppler 1      positive 22 > 30% 40 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL,UPS 230 V     Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 4 1 corridor
118 1-Floor Echo 1      positive 22 > 30% 50 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL,UPS 230 V     Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 4 4 corridor
119 1-Floor Mammography 1      positive 22 > 30% 60 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL,UPS 230 V      Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 4 1 - corridor 3 corridor
120 1-Floor Panorama & Cone Beam 1      positive 22 > 30% 60 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL,UPS 230 V     Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 4 1 - corridor 1 corridor
121 1-Floor Stress Exercise 1      positive 22 > 30% 55 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL,UPS 230 V     Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 4
122 1-Floor U/S 01 1      positive 22 > 30% 55 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL,UPS 230 V     Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 4 2 corridor
123 1-Floor U/S 02 1      positive 22 > 30% 55 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL,UPS 230 V     Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 4
124 1-Floor Anti-Toilet Adm       negative ventilated > 30% 0 70 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 0
125 1-Floor Storage 1FT  negative ventilated > 30% 0 15 ventilation system MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V  Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector  0
126 1-Floor Corridor Radiology - Mammo 0  positive 22 > 30% 60 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V  Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 
127 1-Floor Corridor Radiology - Hearth 0  positive 22 > 30% 60 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V  Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 
128 1-Floor Corridor - Int. 0  positive 22 > 30% 60 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V  Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 
129 R-Ground Floor Control MRI 0  positive 22 > 30% 60 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V   Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 
130 R-Ground Floor Corridor Radiotherapy 0  positive 22 > 30% 60 0 variable refrigerant flow MERV-14 NORMAL 230 V  Addressable Intelligent Smoke Detector 
B01- King Fahd Road

DETAIL DESIGN
DOOR SCHEDULE
DOOR SCHEDULE
DOORS SCHEDULE -
NOTE: Contractor to coordinate Hardware and Accessories for Access Control and Safety with specialists.
DOOR TYPE ARCHITECTURAL FEATURES HARDWARE ACCESSORIES

FloorRoom Number Room Name Type ID Description W (cm) H (cm) Internal Demoutable External External Laminated Glazed door Metal door Fire Lead Lining & Number of Door Frame Frame Door Finishes Vision Panel Ventilation Door Lock Free/Occupie Secure Lever Handle Single Pull Push Magnetic Release to Smart Card Door Closer Door Closer Floor Door Radar
door partition door window door (with or without rated Radiation Leaf Finishes Grille protection d Lock lock Handle bar lock exit Push Reader Coordinator Stop Opening
door serigraphy) with Self Shelding - Acrovyn botton with door Motorized
(leaf&sliding) Closing Latch mm (the push bar closer intergated
(minutes) works only in integrated with Sliding
case of
System
emergency)
D I P E E D G F X K K K S PU ML Rex CR M K R
GF 057 _Toilet M/F Fluo D1 D1/057-LEAD Door 1 leaf 80x215cm 80 215 1 l l 3 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
GF 111 _CT D1 D1/111-LEAD Door 1 leaf 80x215cm 80 215 1 l l 3 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
GF 023 _Uptake/Induction 01 D1 D1/023-RADS Door 1 leaf 80x215cm 80 215 1 l l 4 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
GF 069 _Uptake/Induction 02 D1 D1/069-RADS Door 1 leaf 80x215cm 80 215 1 l l 4 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
GF 012 _Dress CT D1 D1/012 Door 1 leaf 80x215cm 80 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
GF 020 _Filter D1 D1/020 Door 1 leaf 80x215cm 80 215 1 l l 20 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l
GF 047 _Toilet F Int D1 D1/047 Door 1 leaf 80x215cm 80 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l l
GF 008 _Control Room Bunker D1 D1A/008 Door 1 leaf 80x215cm 80 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
GF 008 _Control Room Bunker D1 D1B/008 Door 1 leaf 80x215cm 80 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
GF 006 _Control CT D1 D1/006-LEAD Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 3 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
GF 112 _Fluoroscopy D1 D1/112-LEAD Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 3 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
GF 021 _Hot Lab. D1 D1/021-RADS Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 4 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
GF 005 _Control PetCT D1 D1A/005-RADS Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 4 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
GF 005 _Control PetCT D1 D1/005-RADS Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 8 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
GF 013 _Dress Bun. 01 D1 D1/013 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
GF 014 _Dress Bun. 02 D1 D1/014 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
GF 015 _Storage GF D1 D1/015 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l l
GF 024 _IT Closet GF D1 D1/024 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 20 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l
GF 025 _Janitor GF D1 D1/025 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 20 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
GF 029 _Disposal Room D1 D1/029 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l
GF 030 _Mould Room Fitting D1 D1/030 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
GF 031 _Mould Room Workshop D1 D1/031 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
GF 032 _Blood Collection D1 D1/032 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l
GF 033 _Planning & Dosimetry D1 D1/033 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
GF 038 _Reporting (diagn.&radio.) D1 D1/038 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
GF 039 _Sampling Room F D1 D1/039 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l
GF 040 _Sampling Room M D1 D1/040 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l
GF 043 D1
_Staff changing M Technicians/Chemists D1/043 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 20 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l
GF 044 _Staff changing M Nurses D1 D1/044 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 20 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l
GF 048 _Toilet M Technicians/Chemists D1 D1/048 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l l
GF 051 _Toilet M Pub D1 D1/051 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l
GF 052 _Toilet M Int D1 D1/052 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l l
GF 053 _Toilet M Nurses D1 D1/053 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l l
GF 054 _Toilet M/F PETCT D1 D1/054 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l l
GF 055 _Toilet M/F MRI D1 D1/055 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l l
GF 060 _VIP room D1 D1/060 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l l l l
GF 066 _Clean Up Room D1 D1/066 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l l
GF 130 _Corridor Radiotherapy D1 D1/130 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
GF 051 _Toilet M Pub D1 D1A/051 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l l
GF 008 _Control Room Bunker D1 D1C/008 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l
GF 008 _Control Room Bunker D1 D1D/008 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l
1F 083 _Janitor 1F D1 D1/083 Door 1 leaf 80x215cm 80 215 1 l l 20 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l l
1F 097 _Toilet CEO D1 D1/097 Door 1 leaf 80x215cm 80 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l l
1F 098 _Toilet F Hearth D1 D1/098 Door 1 leaf 80x215cm 80 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l
1F 103 _Toilet M Hearth D1 D1/103 Door 1 leaf 80x215cm 80 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l
1F 116 _Dexa D1 D1/116 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
1F 119 _Mammography D1 D1/119 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
1F 120 _Panorama & Cone Beam D1 D1/120 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
1F 116 _Dexa D1 D1A/116 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
1F 070 _Ablution F D1 D1/070 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 20 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l l
1F 071 _Ablution M D1 D1/071 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 20 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l l
1F 072 _Changing Staff F D1 D1/072 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 20 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
1F 073 _Changing Staff F D1 D1/073 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 20 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l
1F 075 _Command Centre D1 D1/075 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l l l l
1F 089 _Prayer Room F D1 D1/089 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
1F 090 _Prayer Room M D1 D1/090 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
1F 092 _Repair/Storage Room D1 D1/092 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l l
1F 095 _Storage 1F D1 D1/095 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 20 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l l
1F 099 _Toilet F Staff D1 D1/099 Door 1 leaf 80x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l l
1F 102 _Toilet F/H Pub D1 D1/102 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 20 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l l
1F 104 _Toilet M Int D1 D1/104 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 20 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l
1F 106 _Subwating Hearth D1 D1/106 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 20 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l
1F 117 _Doppler D1 D1/117 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
1F 118 _Echo D1 D1/118 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
1F 121 _Stress Exercise D1 D1/121 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
1F 122 _U/S 01 D1 D1/122 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
1F 123 _U/S 02 D1 D1/123 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
1F 124 _Anti-Toilet Adm D1 D1/124 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
1F 128 _Corridor - Int. D1 D1/128 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 20 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l
1F 102 _Toilet F/H Pub D1 D1A/102 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l
1F 081 _Electrical Room D1 D1/081 Door 1 leaf 100x215cm 100 215 1 l l 45 1 Steel Paint Paint l l l l l l l
1F 094 _Server Room D1 D1/094 Door 1 leaf 100x215cm 100 215 1 l l 45 1 Steel Paint Paint l l l l l l l
GF 112 _Fluoroscopy D2 D2/112-LEAD Door 2 leaf (90+30)x215cm 120 215 1 l l 3 2 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
GF 018 _Equipment PetCT D2 D2/018-RADS Door 2 leaf (90+30)x215cm 120 215 1 l l 8 2 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
GF 002 _Clean / Storage D2 D2/002 Door 2 leaf (90+30)x215cm 120 215 1 l l 20 2 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l
GF 003 _Clinic D2 D2/003 Door 2 leaf (90+30)x215cm 120 215 1 l l 20 2 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l
GF 019 _Equipment MRI D2 D2/019 Door 2 leaf (90+30)x215cm 120 215 1 l l 20 2 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l
GF 062 _Waste / Storage D2 D2/062 Door 2 leaf (90+30)x215cm 120 215 1 l l 20 2 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l
GF 022 _Corridor PETCT D2 D2/022-RADS Door 2 leaf (90+40)x215cm 130 215 1 l l 20 4 2 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l
GF 022 _Corridor PETCT D2 D2A/022-RADS Door 2 leaf (90+40)x215cm 130 215 1 l l 20 4 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
GF 115 _PET/CT D2 D2/115-RADS Door 2 leaf (90+40)x215cm 130 215 1 l l 8 2 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
GF 008 _Control Room Bunker D2 D2/008 Door 2 leaf (90+40)x215cm 130 215 1 l l 2 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l
GF 017 _Entrance Radiotherapy D2 D2/017 Door 2 leaf (90+40)x215cm 130 215 1 l l 45 2 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l
GF 027 _Lobby - Entrance D2 D2/027 Door 2 leaf (90+40)x215cm 130 215 1 l l 45 2 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l
GF 064 _Security-corridor D2 D2/064 Door 2 leaf (90+40)x215cm 130 215 1 l l 20 2 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l
GF 130 _Corridor Radiotherapy D2 D2/130 Door 2 leaf (90+40)x215cm 130 215 1 l l 20 2 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l l
GF 017 _Entrance Radiotherapy D2 D2A/017 Door 2 leaf (90+40)x215cm 130 215 1 l l 45 2 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l
GF 028 _Lobby - Entrance Radiology D2 D2/028 Door 2 leaf (95+95)x215cm 190 215 1 l l 45 2 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l l l
1F 086 _Office D2 D2/086 Door 2 leaf (90+30)x215cm 120 215 1 l l 2 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l l l l
1F 096 _Subwating Mammo D2 D2/096 Door 2 leaf (90+30)x215cm 120 215 1 l l 20 2 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l l
1F 106 _Subwating Hearth D2 D2/106 Door 2 leaf (90+30)x215cm 120 215 1 l l 20 2 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l l
1F 128 _Corridor - Int. D2 D2/128 Door 2 leaf (90+30)x215cm 120 215 1 l l 20 2 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l l
GF 023 _Uptake/Induction 01 D3 D3/023-RADS Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 4 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
GF 036 _Radioactive Waste Material D3 D3/036-RADS Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 4 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
GF 046 _Toilet (radioactive) M/F/H D3 D3/046-RADS Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 4 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
GF 068 _Toilet (radioactive) M/F/H D3 D3/068-RADS Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 4 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
GF 069 _Uptake/Induction 02 D3 D3/069-RADS Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 4 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
GF 006 _Control CT D3 D3/006 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
GF 007 _Control Flu. D3 D3/007 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
GF 010 _Dress MRI D3 D3/010 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
GF 011 _Dress MRI D3 D3/011 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
GF 038 _Reporting (diagn.&radio.) D3 D3/038 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
GF 041 _Secretarial pool D3 D3/041 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
GF 042 _Security room D3 D3/042 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l l l
GF 047 _Toilet F Int D3 D3/047 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
GF 052 _Toilet M Int D3 D3/052 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
GF 056 _Toilet M/F Rep D3 D3/056 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
GF 059 _Toilet M/H Lab D3 D3/059 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
GF 065 _Dirty Utility D3 D3/065 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
DOOR TYPE ARCHITECTURAL FEATURES HARDWARE ACCESSORIES
FloorRoom Number Room Name Type ID Description W (cm) H (cm) Internal Demoutable External External Laminated Glazed door Metal door Fire Lead Lining & Number of Door Frame Frame Door Finishes Vision Panel Ventilation Door Lock Free/Occupie Secure Lever Handle Single Pull Push Magnetic Release to Smart Card Door Closer Door Closer Floor Door Radar
door partition door window door (with or without rated Radiation Leaf Finishes Grille protection d Lock lock Handle bar lock exit Push Reader Coordinator Stop Opening
door serigraphy) with Self Shelding - Acrovyn botton with door Motorized
(leaf&sliding) Closing Latch mm (the push bar closer intergated
(minutes) works only in integrated with Sliding
case of
emergency)
System
D I P E E D G F X K K K S PU ML Rex CR M K R
GF 113 _Corridor Radiology GF D3 D3/113 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
GF 129 _Control-MRI D3 D3/129 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
GF 049 _Toilet F/H Lab D3 D3/049 Door 1 leaf 100x215cm 100 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
GF 050 _Toilet F/H Pub D3 D3/050 Door 1 leaf 100x215cm 100 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
GF 058 _Toilet M/F/H Bu D3 D3/058 Door 1 leaf 100x215cm 100 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
GF 009 _Dress Flu. D3 D3/009 Door 1 leaf 110x215cm 110 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
GF 111 _CT D3 D3/111-LEAD Door 1 leaf 130x215cm 130 215 1 l l 3 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
GF 016 _Entrance Laboratory D3 D3/016 Door 1 leaf 130x215cm 130 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
GF 034 _Patient Bay Holding D3 D3/034 Door 1 leaf 130x215cm 130 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
GF 061 _Waiting/ Screening D3 D3/061 Door 1 leaf 130x215cm 130 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
GF 064 _Security-corridor D3 D3/064 Door 1 leaf 130x215cm 130 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l l
1F 125 _Storage 1F D3 D3/125 Door 1 leaf 70x215cm 70 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
1F 104 _Toilet M Int D3 D3/104 Door 1 leaf 80x215cm 80 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
1F 076 _Dress Mammo D3 D3/076 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
1F 119 _Mammography D3 D3/119 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
1F 074 _Changing Staff M D3 D3/074 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
1F 084 _Lounge Doctor D3 D3/084 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
1F 088 _Pantry D3 D3/088 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
1F 098 _Toilet F Hearth D3 D3/098 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
1F 100 _Toilet F/H Int D3 D3/100 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 20 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
1F 101 _Toilet F/H Adm D3 D3/101 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
1F 103 _Toilet M Hearth D3 D3/103 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
1F 105 _Toilet M/F U/S D3 D3/105 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
1F 107 _Toilet M Adm D3 D3/107 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
1F 121 _Stress Exercise D3 D3/121 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l l
_Radioactive Waste Material Aluminum Powder Aluminum
GF 036 ED1 ED1/036-RADS Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l 45 4 1 l l l
Coated
_Lobby - Entrance Aluminum Powder Glazed
GF 027 ED1 ED1/027 Door 1 leaf 120x215cm 120 215 1 l l 1 l l l l l l l l
Coated
_Security-corridor Aluminum Powder Glazed
GF 064 ED1 ED1/064 Door 1 leaf 120x215cm 120 215 1 l l 45 1 l l l l l l l l
Coated
GF 064 ED1 ED1A/064 Door 1 leaf 120x215cm 120 215 1 l l 45 1 l l l l l l l l
Coated
_Corridor - Int. Aluminum Powder Glazed
1F 128 ED1 ED1/128 Door 1 leaf 120x215cm 120 215 1 l l 45 1 l l l l l
Coated
_Entrance Laboratory Aluminum Powder Glazed
GF 016 ED2 ED2/016 Door 2 leaf (95+95)x215cm 190 215 1 l l 2 l l l l l l l l
Coated
_Corridor Radiology GF Aluminum Powder Glazed
GF 113 ED2 ED2/032 Door 2 leaf (95+95)x215cm 190 215 1 l l 45 2 l l l l l l l l
Coated
GF 064 ED2 ED2/064 Door 2 leaf (95+95)x215cm 190 215 1 l l 2 l l l l l l l l
Coated
_Air Lock Aluminum Powder Glazed
GF 045 ED4 ED4/045 Door 2 leaf (75+75)x215cm 150 215 1 l l 2 l l
Coated
_Air Lock Aluminum Powder Glazed
GF 045 ED4 ED4A/045 Door 2 leaf (75+75)x215cm 150 215 1 l l 2 l
Coated
GF 064 _Security-corridor FM200 FM200/064 Door 1 leaf 80x215cm 80 215 1 l 20 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l
GF 113 _Corridor Radiology GF FM200 FM200/113 Door 1 leaf 80x215cm 80 215 1 l 20 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l
1F 128 _Corridor - Int. FM200 FM200/128 Door 1 leaf 80x215cm 80 215 1 l 20 1 Wood Paint Laminated l l
1F 094 _Server Room FM200 FM200/094 Door 2 leaf (55+55)x215cm 110 215 1 l 20 2 Wood Paint Laminated l l
_Meeting Room Aluminum Powder Glazed
1F 085 GD1 GD1/085 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l l 1 l l l
Coated
_Office CEO Aluminum Powder Glazed
Coated
_Secretary Aluminum Powder Glazed
Coated
_Waiting Radiology Aluminum Powder Glazed
1F 108 GD1 GD1/108 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l l 20 1 l l l l l l l l
Coated
_Office CEO Aluminum Powder Glazed
1F 087 GD3 GD3/087 Door 1 leaf 90x215cm 90 215 1 l l l 1 l l
Coated
_Equipment MRI Aluminum Powder Glazed
GF 019 W1 W1/019 Window 1 leaf 100x130cm 100 130 1 l 1 l l
Coated
_Toilet M/F MRI Aluminum Powder Glazed
Coated
_Waste / Storage Aluminum Powder Glazed
Coated
_Electrical Room Aluminum Powder Glazed
1F 081 W1 W1/081 Window 1 leaf 100x130cm 100 130 1 l 1 l l
Coated
Coated
1F 128 W1 W1A/128 Window 1 leaf 100x130cm 100 130 1 l 1 l l
Coated
1F 128 W1 W1B/128 Window 1 leaf 100x130cm 100 130 1 l 1 l l
Coated
1F 128 W1 W1C/128 Window 1 leaf 100x130cm 100 130 1 l 1 l l
Coated
_Janitor 1F Aluminum Powder Glazed
Coated
162 143 5 10 9 132 15 2 11 23 132 120 33 8 116 44 8 13 13 13 4 51 103 2

B01- King Fahd Road

DETAIL DESIGN
EQUIPMENT LIST PER ROOM
EQUIPMENT LIST PER ROOM

Equipment List per room
Floor Room Number Room Name Item Nb Item Description Qty
GF 001 _Billing
GF 001 Printing/ Back Office CH01 CHAIR, easy, low back, upholstered 2,00
GF 001 Printing/ Back Office FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 2,00
GF 001 Printing/ Back Office FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 2,00
GF 001 Printing/ Back Office SD1002 Counter Cashier - 120x80 2,00
GF 002 _Clean / Storage
GF 002 Clean / Storage AR1355 Dispenser, Soap, Disposable 1,00
GF 002 Clean / Storage AR1360 Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
GF 002 Clean / Storage AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 002 Clean / Storage FC1475 Cabinet, Floor Standing, 90W 40D 200H 4,00
GF 002 Clean / Storage FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
GF 002 Clean / Storage PB1085 Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type 1,00
GF 003 _Clinic
GF 003 Clinic AR1260 Rail, Accessory Mounting, Length as Required 1,00
GF 003 Clinic AR1355 Dispenser, Soap, Disposable 1,00
GF 003 Clinic AR1360 Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
GF 003 Clinic AR1375 Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps, w/Glove Dispenser 1,00
GF 003 Clinic AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 003 Clinic FC1475 Cabinet, Floor Standing, 90W 40D 200H 1,00
GF 003 Clinic FC2002 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section) Desk, 940W 550D 1,00
GF 003 Clinic FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 1,00
GF 003 Clinic FF1260 Stool, Self Adjusting 1,00
GF 003 Clinic FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
GF 003 Clinic FF1840 Clock, 15"-16" Diameter 1,00
GF 003 Clinic MS1470 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor 1,00
GF 003 Clinic MS1900 Height Measuring Scale, Floor model with digital weighing scale 1,00
GF 003 Clinic MS1911 Monitor, Vital Signs, Mobile 1,00
GF 003 Clinic MS2655 Light Examination, mobile 1,00
GF 003 Clinic PB1085 Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type 1,00
GF 003 Clinic PT1510 Table, Examination Treatment, Hi/Lo 1,00
GF 004 _Cold waiting PET CT
GF 004 Cold Waiting CH01 CHAIR, easy, low back, upholstered 3,00
GF 005 _Control PetCT PET CT
GF 005 Control PetCT AR1115 Telephone, Wall Mounted, 1 Line 1,00
GF 005 Control PetCT AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 005 Control PetCT DSK1010 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section) Desk, 650D U-Shape 1,00
GF 005 Control PetCT FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 4,00
GF 005 Control PetCT FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
GF 005 Control PetCT PET-SI03 1.03 Control unit with 2x 19“ LCD monitor, control box, keyboard 1,00
GF 005 Control PetCT PET-SI08 1.08 syngo MultiModality Workplace with monitor 1,00
GF 005 Control PetCT PET-SI10 1.10 MEDTRON Touchscreen remote control 1,00
GF 005 Control PetCT PET-SI11 1.11 VARIAN RGSC cabinet, monitor, keyboard and mouse 1,00
GF 005 Control PetCT PET-SI14 1.14 GAMMEX LASERS for PET-CT RT-Simulation with workstation 1,00
GF 005 Control PetCT PET-SI15 1.15 GAMMEX Tablet PC 1,00
GF 006 _Control CT CT
GF 006 Control CT AR1115 Telephone, Wall Mounted, 1 Line 1,00
GF 006 Control CT AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 006 Control CT CT-SI07 1.07 Control unit with TFT monitor, control box, keyboard 1,00
GF 006 Control CT CT-SI09 1.09 MEDTRON Touchscreen remote control 1,00
GF 006 Control CT DSK1011 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section) Desk, 2200W 700D 1,00
GF 006 Control CT FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 2,00
GF 006 Control CT FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
GF 007 _Control Flu. FLUOR
GF 007 Control Flu. AR1115 Telephone, Wall Mounted, 1 Line 1,00
GF 007 Control Flu. AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 007 Control Flu. DSK1012 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section) Desk, 1400W 550D 1,00
GF 007 Control Flu. FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 1,00
GF 007 Control Flu. FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
GF 007 Control Flu. FL-SI02 1.02 Control console for unit, generator and image system 1,00
GF 007 Control Flu. FL-SI05 1.05 FLUOROSPOT Compact Container, Keyboard and Monitor 50 430 1,00
GF 008 _Control Room Bunker VARIAN TO PROVIDE
GF 008 Control Room Bunker AR1115 Telephone, Wall Mounted, 1 Line 1,00
GF 008 Control Room Bunker AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 008 Control Room Bunker BU-VAT16 System Monitors (2x) incl. Keyboard & Mouse 1,00
GF 008 Control Room Bunker BU-VAT17 Dedicated Console Keyboard 1,00
GF 008 Control Room Bunker BU-VAT18 CCTV Control & Monitors 1,00
GF 008 Control Room Bunker BU-VAT19 Printer 1,00
GF 008 Control Room Bunker DSK1013 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section) Desk, 5940W 850D 1,00
GF 008 Control Room Bunker FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 4,00
GF 008 Control Room Bunker FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 2,00
GF 008 Control Room Bunker FF1840 Clock, 15"-16" Diameter 1,00
GF 009 _Dress Flu. FLUORO
GF 009 Dress Flu. AR1190 Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 009 Dress Flu. AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 009 Dress Flu. AR9040 Locker, One person 1,00
GF 009 Dress Flu. AR9045 Grab bar, 1-1/4" Dia., SS, 24", W/C Accessible 1,00
GF 009 Dress Flu. FF1145 Chair, side, without arms 1,00
GF 010 _Dress MRI MRI
GF 010 Dress MRI AR1190 Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 010 Dress MRI AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 010 Dress MRI AR9040 Locker, One person 1,00
GF 010 Dress MRI AR9045 Grab bar, 1-1/4" Dia., SS, 24", W/C Accessible 1,00
GF 010 Dress MRI C-5 Wooden cabinet 1,00
GF 010 Dress MRI FF1145 Chair, side, without arms 1,00
GF 011 Dress MRI AR1190 Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 011 Dress MRI AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 011 Dress MRI AR9040 Locker, One person 1,00
GF 011 Dress MRI AR9045 Grab bar, 1-1/4" Dia., SS, 24", W/C Accessible 1,00
GF 011 Dress MRI C-5 Wooden cabinet 1,00
GF 011 Dress MRI FF1145 Chair, side, without arms 1,00
GF 012 _Dress CT CT
GF 012 Dress CT AR1190 Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 012 Dress CT AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 012 Dress CT AR9040 Locker, One person 1,00
GF 012 Dress CT AR9045 Grab Bar, 1-1/4" Dia., SS, 24", W/C Accessible 1,00
GF 012 Dress CT C-5 Wooden cabinet 1,00
GF 012 Dress CT FF1145 Chair, Side, Without Arms 1,00
GF 013 _Dress Bun. 01 BUNKER
GF 013 Dress Bun. 01 AR1190 Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 013 Dress Bun. 01 AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 013 Dress Bun. 01 AR9040 Locker, One person 1,00
GF 013 Dress Bun. 01 AR9045 Grab bar, 1-1/4" Dia., SS, 24", W/C Accessible 1,00
GF 013 Dress Bun. 01 FF1145 Chair, side, without arms 1,00
GF 014 _Dress Bun. 02 BUNKER
GF 014 Dress Bun. 02 AR1190 Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 014 Dress Bun. 02 AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 014 Dress Bun. 02 AR9040 Locker, One person 1,00
GF 014 Dress Bun. 02 AR9045 Grab bar, 1-1/4" Dia., SS, 24", W/C Accessible 1,00
GF 014 Dress Bun. 02 FF1145 Chair, side, without arms 1,00
GF 015 _Storage GF
GF 015 Storage GF FC1475 Cabinet, Floor Standing, 90W 40D 200H 3,00
GF 016 _Entrance Laboratory
GF 016 Entrance Laboratory AR1110 Telephone, Desk, 1 Line 1,00
GF 016 Entrance Laboratory CH01 CHAIR, easy, low back, upholstered 4,00
GF 016 Entrance Laboratory FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 1,00
GF 016 Entrance Laboratory FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
GF 016 Entrance Laboratory MI1012 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section) Counter Reception - see detail drawings 1,00
GF 016 Entrance Laboratory MS1470 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor 1,00
GF 016 Entrance Laboratory TAB001 Reception Table, round, D600 1,00
GF 017 _Entrance Radiotherapy
GF 017 Entrance Radiotherapy AR1110 Telephone, Desk, 1 Line 1,00
GF 017 Entrance Radiotherapy FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 1,00
GF 017 Entrance Radiotherapy FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
GF 017 Entrance Radiotherapy MI1011 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section) Counter Reception - see detail drawings 1,00
GF 017 Entrance Radiotherapy MS1470 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor 1,00
GF 018 _Equipment PetCT PET CT
GF 018 Equipment PetCT PET-SI05 1.05 Line connection box LCB 1,00
GF 018 Equipment PetCT PET-SI06 1.06 Power Distribution Computer Cabinet PDCC 1,00
GF 018 Equipment PetCT PET-SI07 1.07 Uniform source shield 1,00
GF 018 Equipment PetCT PET-SI13 1.13 6kVA UPS with 15 mins back up 1,00
GF 019 _Equipment MRI
GF 019 Equipment MRI MRI-SI06 1.06 RF-System filter plate 1,00
GF 019 Equipment MRI MRI-SI09 1.09 Electronics cabinet GPA / EPC 1,00
GF 019 Equipment MRI MRI-SI10 1.10 Transfer station IFP 1,00
GF 019 Equipment MRI MRI-SI10a 1.10a Helium compressor 1,00
GF 019 Equipment MRI MRI-SI21 1.21 UPS Liebert GXT4 1,00
GF 020 _Filter
GF 021 _Hot Lab. PET CT
GF 021 Hot Lab AR1115 Telephone, Wall Mounted, 1 Line 1,00
GF 021 Hot Lab AR1355 Dispenser, Soap, Disposable 1,00
GF 021 Hot Lab AR1360 Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
GF 021 Hot Lab AR1375 Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps, w/Glove Dispenser 1,00
GF 021 Hot Lab AR1380 Waste receptacle, Radioactive 1,00
GF 021 Hot Lab AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 021 Hot Lab FC1445 Countertop, Stainless Steel 220X75X60 1,00
GF 021 Hot Lab FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 1,00
GF 021 Hot Lab FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
GF 021 Hot Lab FF1840 Clock, 15"-16" Diameter 1,00
GF 021 Hot Lab LB1520 Calibrator, Radioisotope 1,00
GF 021 Hot Lab MS1470 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor 1,00
GF 021 Hot Lab MS9000 L-Block Shield 1,00
GF 021 Hot Lab MS9060 Dosimeters, Radiation 1,00
GF 021 Hot Lab MS9075 Hoods, Chemical Fume 1,00
GF 021 Hot Lab PB1085 Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type 1,00
GF 022 _Corridor PETCT PET CT
GF 022 Corridor PETCT CH01 CHAIR, easy, low back, upholstered 2,00
GF 023 _Uptake/Induction 01 PET CT
GF 023 Uptake/Induction 01 AR1355 Dispenser, Soap, Disposable 1,00
GF 023 Uptake/Induction 01 AR1360 Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
GF 023 Uptake/Induction 01 AR1375 Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps, w/Glove Dispenser 1,00
GF 023 Uptake/Induction 01 AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 023 Uptake/Induction 01 AR1460 Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain 1,00
GF 023 Uptake/Induction 01 CH01 CHAIR, easy, low back, upholstered 1,00
GF 023 Uptake/Induction 01 CHA391 CHAIR, easy, reclining, wipeable 1,00
GF 023 Uptake/Induction 01 FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
GF 023 Uptake/Induction 01 FF1840 Clock, 15"-16" diameter 1,00
GF 023 Uptake/Induction 01 PB1085 Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type 1,00
GF 024 _IT Closet GF
GF 025 _Janitor GF
GF 025 Janitor GF AR1355 Dispenser, Soap, Disposable 1,00
GF 025 Janitor GF AR1360 Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
GF 025 Janitor GF AR1410 Shelf, Utility w/Mop/Broom Holders, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
GF 025 Janitor GF FF1345 Cart, Janitor's 2,00
GF 025 Janitor GF FF1350 Bucket, Mop, With Wringer, 26 Quart 1,00
GF 025 Janitor GF PB1100 Sink, Mop, Molded Stone, 10x36x24 1,00
GF 026 _Laser Imager
GF 026 Printing/ Back Office FC1475 Cabinet, Floor Standing, 90W 40D 200H 1,00
GF 026 Printing/ Back Office PH2001 Photocopier 1,00
GF 027 _Lobby - Entrance
GF 027 Lobby - Entrance FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 1,00
GF 027 Lobby - Entrance MS1470 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor 1,00
GF 027 Lobby - Entrance SD1002 Desk, with drawer unit, 80W 120H 1,00
GF 027 Waiting SI1001 Couch, 2 seater, easy, with arms, fully upholstered 5,00
GF 028 _Lobby - Entrance Radiology
GF 029 _Disposal Room
GF 029 Disposal Room AR1355 Dispenser, Soap, Disposable 1,00
GF 029 Disposal Room AR1360 Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
GF 029 Disposal Room AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 029 Disposal Room FF1345 Cart, Janitor's 1,00
GF 029 Disposal Room FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
GF 029 Disposal Room PB1085 Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type 1,00
GF 030 _Mould Room Fitting
GF 030 Mould Room Fitting AR1115 Telephone, Wall Mounted, 1 Line 1,00
GF 030 Mould Room Fitting AR1355 Dispenser, Soap, Disposable 1,00
GF 030 Mould Room Fitting AR1360 Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
GF 030 Mould Room Fitting AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 030 Mould Room Fitting FC1445 Countertop, Stainless Steel 220X75X60 1,00
GF 030 Mould Room Fitting FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 1,00
GF 030 Mould Room Fitting FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
GF 030 Mould Room Fitting FF1840 Clock, 15"-16" Diameter 1,00
GF 030 Mould Room Fitting MS1470 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor 1,00
GF 030 Mould Room Fitting PB1085 Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type 1,00
GF 030 Mould Room Fitting PT1510 Table, Examination Treatment, Hi/Lo 1,00
GF 031 _Mould Room Workshop
GF 031 Mould Room Workshop AR1115 Telephone, Wall Mounted, 1 Line 1,00
GF 031 Mould Room Workshop AR1260 Rail, Accessory Mounting, Length as Required 1,00
GF 031 Mould Room Workshop AR1355 Dispenser, Soap, Disposable 1,00
GF 031 Mould Room Workshop AR1360 Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
GF 031 Mould Room Workshop AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 031 Mould Room Workshop AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 031 Mould Room Workshop FC1445 Countertop, Stainless Steel 220X75X60 2,00
GF 031 Mould Room Workshop FC1475 Cabinet, Floor Standing, 90W 40D 200H 2,00
GF 031 Mould Room Workshop FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 2,00
GF 031 Mould Room Workshop FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
GF 031 Mould Room Workshop FF1840 Clock, 15"-16" Diameter 1,00
GF 031 Mould Room Workshop PB1085 Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type 1,00
GF 032 _Blood Collection
GF 032 Blood Collection AR1355 Dispenser, Soap, Disposable 1,00
GF 032 Blood Collection AR1360 Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
GF 032 Blood Collection AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 032 Blood Collection FC1150 Cabinet, Sink SS 1,00
GF 032 Blood Collection FC1385 Sink, SS 1,00
GF 032 Blood Collection FC1440 Countertop, Stainless Steel 1,00
GF 032 Blood Collection FC1475 Cabinet, Floor Standing, 90W 40D 200H 1,00
GF 032 Blood Collection FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
GF 032 Blood Collection RF1195 Refrigerator, Lab, SS, 2 Door, 6 Shelves 1,00
GF 033 _Planning & Dosimetry
GF 033 Planning & Dosimetry AR1110 Telephone, Desk, 1 Line 1,00
GF 033 Planning & Dosimetry AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 033 Planning & Dosimetry FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 4,00
GF 033 Planning & Dosimetry MS1470 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor 4,00
GF 033 Planning & Dosimetry PD-VA01 Varian Planning Workstation (Eclipse) 2,00
GF 033 Planning & Dosimetry PD-VA02 Varian OIS (Aria) 1,00
GF 033 Planning & Dosimetry SD1002 Desk, with drawer unit - 120x80 4,00
GF 034 _Patient Bay Holding MRI-CT
GF 034 Patient Bay Holding MRI-SI11 1.11 Patient transport trolley, nonmagnetic 1,00
GF 034 Patient Bay Holding MRI-SI24 1.24 MRI Compatible Wheelchair 1,00
GF 035 _Printing
GF 035 Printing/ Back Office FC1475 Cabinet, Floor Standing, 90W 40D 200H 1,00
GF 035 Printing/ Back Office PH2001 Photocopier 1,00
GF 036 _Radioactive Waste Material PET CT
GF 036 Radioactive Waste Material AR1375 Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps, w/Glove Dispenser 1,00
GF 036 Radioactive Waste Material FC1475 Cabinet, Floor Standing, 90W 40D 200H 2,00
GF 036 Radioactive Waste Material MS9090 Lead Brick Cave 1,00
GF 036 Radioactive Waste Material RD1625 Cart, Transport, Radium 1,00
GF 037 _Reception GF
037 Reception GF C-1 Wooden cabinet 1,00
GF 037 Reception GF FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 4,00
GF 037 Reception GF FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 2,00
GF 037 Reception GF MI1010 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section) Counter Reception, Waiting Area - see detail drawings 1,00
GF 038 _Reporting (diagn.&radio.) MRI-CT
GF 038 Reporting C-07 Wooden cabinet 1,00
GF 038 Reporting DSK1014 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section) Desk, 2800 W900D 1,00
GF 038 Reporting FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 2,00
GF 038 Reporting MS1470 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor 2,00
GF 039 _Sampling Room F
GF 039 Samples AR1355 Dispenser, Soap, Disposable 1,00
GF 039 Samples AR1360 Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
GF 039 Samples AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 039 Samples CHA391 CHAIR, easy, reclining, wipeable 1,00
GF 039 Samples FC1150 Cabinet, Sink SS 1,00
GF 039 Samples FC1385 Sink, SS 1,00
GF 039 Samples FC1440 Countertop, Stainless Steel 1,00
GF 039 Samples FC1475 Cabinet, Floor Standing, 90W 40D 200H 1,00
GF 039 Samples FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
GF 040 _Sampling Room M
GF 040 Samples AR1355 Dispenser, Soap, Disposable 1,00
GF 040 Samples AR1360 Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
GF 040 Samples CHA391 CHAIR, easy, reclining, wipeable 1,00
GF 040 Samples FC1150 Cabinet, Sink SS 1,00
GF 040 Samples FC1385 Sink, SS 1,00
GF 040 Samples FC1440 Countertop, Stainless Steel 1,00
GF 040 Samples FC1475 Cabinet, Floor Standing, 90W 40D 200H 1,00
GF 040 Samples FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
GF 041 _Secretarial pool
GF 041 Secretary AR1110 Telephone, Desk, 1 Line 2,00
GF 041 Secretary DSK1015 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section) Desk, courved to be measured at site. 1,00
GF 041 Secretary FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 2,00
GF 041 Secretary MS1470 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor 2,00
GF 042 _Security room
GF 042 Security FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 3,00
GF 042 Security MS1470 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor 3,00
GF 042 Security SD1002 Desk, with drawer unit, 80W 120H 3,00
GF 043 _Staff changing M Technicians/Chemists
GF 043 Staff changing M Technicians/Chemists AR1170 Locker, 2 Person, Side by Side, 72x15x18 6,00
GF 043 Staff changing M Technicians/Chemists AR1190 Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 043 Staff changing M Technicians/Chemists AR1330 Bench, Locker Room, Portable 2,00
GF 043 Staff changing M Technicians/Chemists AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 2,00
GF 043 Staff changing M Technicians/Chemists AR1460 Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain 1,00
GF 043 Staff changing M Technicians/Chemists FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
GF 044 _Staff changing M Nurses
GF 044 Staff changing M Nurses AR1170 Locker, 2 Person, Side by Side, 72x15x18 6,00
GF 044 Staff changing M Nurses AR1190 Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 044 Staff changing M Nurses AR1330 Bench, Locker Room, Portable 2,00
GF 044 Staff changing M Nurses AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 2,00
GF 044 Staff changing M Nurses AR1460 Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain 1,00
GF 044 Staff changing M Nurses FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
GF 045 _Air Lock
GF 046 _Toilet (radioactive) M/F/H
GF 047 _Toilet F Int
GF 048 _Toilet M Technicians/Chemists
GF 049 _Toilet F/H Lab
GF 050 _Toilet F/H Pub
GF 051 _Toilet M Pub
GF 052 _Toilet M Int
GF 053 _Toilet M Nurses
GF 054 _Toilet M/F PETCT
GF 055 _Toilet M/F MRI
GF 056 _Toilet M/F Rep
GF 057 _Toilet M/F Fluo
GF 058 _Toilet M/F/H Bu
GF 059 _Toilet M/H Lab
GF 060 _VIP room
GF 060 VIP room MI1001 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section) Couch, 2 seater, easy, with arms, fully upholstered 1,00
GF 060 VIP room MI1002 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section) CHAIR, VIP 3,00
GF 060 VIP room TAB001 Reception Table, round, D600 1,00
GF 061 _Waiting/ Screening
GF 061 Sub Waiting CH01 CHAIR, easy, low back, upholstered 3,00
GF 062 _Waste / Storage
GF 062 Waste / Storage AR1355 Dispenser, Soap, Disposable 1,00
GF 062 Waste / Storage AR1360 Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
GF 062 Waste / Storage AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 062 Waste / Storage FC1475 Cabinet, Floor Standing, 90W 40D 200H 2,00
GF 062 Waste / Storage FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
GF 062 Waste / Storage PB1085 Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type 1,00
GF 063 _Wheelchair storage
GF 063 Wheelchair storage MS2000 Stretcher, Mobile, CRS, 9 Position 1,00
GF 064 _Security-corridor
GF 065 _Dirty Utility
GF 065 Dirty Utility AR1355 Dispenser, Soap, Disposable 1,00
GF 065 Dirty Utility AR1360 Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
GF 065 Dirty Utility AR1410 Shelf, Utility w/Mop/Broom Holders, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
GF 065 Dirty Utility AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 065 Dirty Utility FC1475 Cabinet, Floor Standing, 90W 40D 200H 1,00
GF 065 Dirty Utility FF1345 Cart, Janitor's 1,00
GF 065 Dirty Utility FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
GF 065 Dirty Utility PB1085 Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type 1,00
GF 066 _Clean Up Room
GF 066 Clean Up Room AR1355 Dispenser, Soap, Disposable 1,00
GF 066 Clean Up Room AR1360 Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
GF 066 Clean Up Room AR1410 Shelf, Utility w/Mop/Broom Holders, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
GF 066 Clean Up Room AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 066 Clean Up Room FC1475 Cabinet, Floor Standing, 90W 40D 200H 2,00
GF 066 Clean Up Room FF1345 Cart, Janitor's 1,00
GF 066 Clean Up Room FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
GF 066 Clean Up Room PB1085 Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type 1,00
GF 067 _Patient Bay
GF 067 Patient Bay MS2000 Stretcher, Mobile, CRS, 9 Position 1,00
GF 068 _Toilet (radioactive) M/F/H
GF 069 _Uptake/Induction 02 PET CT
GF 069 Uptake/Induction 02 AR1355 Dispenser, Soap, Disposable 1,00
GF 069 Uptake/Induction 02 AR1360 Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
GF 069 Uptake/Induction 02 AR1375 Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps, w/Glove Dispenser 1,00
GF 069 Uptake/Induction 02 AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 069 Uptake/Induction 02 AR1460 Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain 1,00
GF 069 Uptake/Induction 02 CH01 CHAIR, easy, low back, upholstered 1,00
GF 069 Uptake/Induction 02 CHA391 CHAIR, easy, reclining, wipeable 1,00
GF 069 Uptake/Induction 02 FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
GF 069 Uptake/Induction 02 FF1840 Clock, 15"-16" diameter 1,00
GF 069 Uptake/Induction 02 PB1085 Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type 1,00
1F 070 _Ablution F
1F 071 _Ablution M
1F 072 _Changing Staff F
1F 072 Changing Staff F AR1170 Locker, 2 Person, Side by Side, 72x15x18 3,00
1F 072 Changing Staff F AR1190 Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 072 Changing Staff F AR1330 Bench, Locker Room, Portable 1,00
1F 072 Changing Staff F AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 072 Changing Staff F AR1460 Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain 1,00
1F 072 Changing Staff F FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
1F 073 _Changing Staff F
1F 073 Changing Staff F AR1170 Locker, 2 Person, Side by Side, 72x15x18 14,00
1F 073 Changing Staff F AR1190 Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted 2,00
1F 073 Changing Staff F AR1330 Bench, Locker Room, Portable 7,00
1F 073 Changing Staff F AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 2,00
1F 073 Changing Staff F AR1460 Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain 1,00
1F 073 Changing Staff F FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 2,00
1F 074 _Changing Staff M
1F 074 Changing Staff M AR1170 Locker, 2 Person, Side by Side, 72x15x18 5,00
1F 074 Changing Staff M AR1190 Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 074 Changing Staff M AR1330 Bench, Locker Room, Portable 1,00
1F 074 Changing Staff M AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 074 Changing Staff M AR1460 Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain 1,00
1F 074 Changing Staff M FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
1F 075 _Command Centre
1F 075 Command Centre AR1110 Telephone, Desk, 1 Line 3,00

1F 075 Command Centre AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 075 Command Centre FC1490 Cabinet, Floor Standing, 90W 40D 180H 4,00
1F 075 Command Centre FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 8,00
1F 075 Command Centre FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
1F 075 Command Centre MS1470 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor 8,00
1F 075 Command Centre SD1004 Desk, with drawer unit, 3600L 1600D 1,00
1F 076 _Dress Mammo
1F 076 Dress Mammo AR1190 Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 076 Dress Mammo AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 076 Dress Mammo AR9040 Locker, One person 1,00
1F 076 Dress Mammo AR9045 Grab bar, 1-1/4" Dia., SS, 24", W/C Accessible 1,00
1F 076 Dress Mammo FF1145 Chair, side, without arms 1,00
1F 077 _Dress DEXA
1F 077 Dress DEXA AR1190 Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 077 Dress DEXA AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 077 Dress DEXA AR9040 Locker, One person 1,00
1F 077 Dress DEXA AR9045 Grab bar, 1-1/4" Dia., SS, 24", W/C Accessible 1,00
1F 077 Dress DEXA FF1145 Chair, side, without arms 1,00
1F 078 _Dress U/S
1F 078 Dress U/S AR1190 Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 078 Dress U/S AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 078 Dress U/S AR9040 Locker, One person 1,00
1F 078 Dress U/S AR9045 Grab bar, 1-1/4" Dia., SS, 24", W/C Accessible 1,00
1F 078 Dress U/S FF1145 Chair, side, without arms 1,00
1F 079 _Dress Doppler
1F 079 Dress Doppler AR1190 Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 079 Dress Doppler AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 079 Dress Doppler AR9040 Locker, One person 1,00
1F 079 Dress Doppler AR9045 Grab bar, 1-1/4" Dia., SS, 24", W/C Accessible 1,00
1F 079 Dress Doppler FF1145 Chair, side, without arms 1,00
1F 080 _Dress Stress Exercise
1F 080 Dress Stress Exercise AR1190 Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 080 Dress Stress Exercise AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 080 Dress Stress Exercise AR9040 Locker, One person 1,00
1F 080 Dress Stress Exercise AR9045 Grab bar, 1-1/4" Dia., SS, 24", W/C Accessible 1,00
1F 080 Dress Stress Exercise FF1145 Chair, side, without arms 1,00
1F 081 _Electrical Room
1F 082 _IT Closet 1F
1F 083 _Janitor 1F
1F 083 Janitor 1F AR1355 Dispenser, Soap, Disposable 1,00
1F 083 Janitor 1F AR1360 Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
1F 083 Janitor 1F AR1410 Shelf, Utility w/Mop/Broom Holders, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
1F 083 Janitor 1F FF1345 Cart, Janitor's 1,00
1F 083 Janitor 1F FF1350 Bucket, Mop, With Wringer, 26 Quart 1,00
1F 083 Janitor 1F PB1100 Sink, Mop, Molded Stone, 10x36x24 1,00
1F 084 _Lounge Doctor
1F 084 Doctors FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 2,00
1F 084 Doctors SI1001 Couch, 2 seater, easy, with arms, fully upholstered 1,00
1F 084 Doctors TAB002 Table, round, D900 1,00
1F 085 _Meeting Room
1F 085 Meeting Room FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 6,00
1F 085 Meeting Room SD1005 Meeting table 1000x2400 1,00
1F 086 _Office
1F 086 Office AR1110 Telephone, Desk, 1 Line 1,00
1F 086 Office AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 3,00
1F 086 Office FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 4,00
1F 086 Office FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 3,00
1F 086 Office MS1470 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor 4,00
1F 086 Office MS1470 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor 1,00
1F 086 Office SD1003 Desk, with drawer unit, 2000L 800D 2,00
1F 086 Office SE1001 Separation Desk 4,00
1F 087 _Office CEO
1F 087 CEO Office AR1110 Telephone, Desk, 1 Line 1,00
1F 087 CEO Office AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 087 CEO Office C-06 Wooden cabinet 1,00
1F 087 CEO Office FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 2,00
1F 087 CEO Office FF1215 Chair, Swivel, High Back 1,00
1F 087 CEO Office MS1470 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor 1,00
1F 087 CEO Office SD1001 Desk, with drawer unit, 2000L 900D 1,00
1F 088 _Pantry
1F 088 Pantry AR1115 Telephone, Wall Mounted, 1 Line 1,00
1F 088 Pantry AR1355 Dispenser, Soap, Disposable 1,00
1F 088 Pantry AR1360 Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
1F 088 Pantry FC1180 Cabinet, Half Drawer, 120x90x60 1,00
1F 088 Pantry FC1430 Sink, Epoxy Resin, 11x18x15 ID 1,00
1F 088 Pantry FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 3,00
1F 088 Pantry FF1625 Can, Trash, 44 Gallon 1,00
1F 088 Pantry FS1135 Brewer, Coffee, Auto, Elect, 3 Burner, Front/Back 1,00
1F 088 Pantry FS1700 Oven, Microwave, Consumer 1,00
1F 088 Pantry RF1235 Refrigerator/Freezer, 20 Cubic Feet 1,00
1F 088 Pantry TAB002 Table, round, D900 1,00
1F 089 _Prayer Room F
1F 090 _Prayer Room M
1F 091 _Reception 1F
1F 091 Reception 1F AR1110 Telephone, Desk, 1 Line 1,00
1F 091 Reception 1F FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 1,00
1F 091 Reception 1F FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
1F 091 Reception 1F MI1011 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section) Counter Reception - see detail drawings 1,00
1F 091 Reception 1F MS1470 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor 1,00
1F 092 _Repair/Storage Room
1F 092 Store FC1475 Cabinet, Floor Standing, 90W 40D 200H 3,00
1F 093 _Secretary
1F 093 Secretary AR1110 Telephone, Desk, 1 Line 1,00
1F 093 Secretary FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 1,00
1F 093 Secretary MS1470 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor 1,00
1F 093 Secretary SD1002 Desk, with drawer unit, 80W 120H 1,00
1F 094 _Server Room
1F 095 _Storage 1F
1F 095 Storage 1F FC1475 Cabinet, Floor Standing, 90W 40D 200H 4,00
1F 096 _Subwating Mammo
1F 096 Sub Waiting Mammo CH01 CHAIR, easy, low back, upholstered 10,00
1F 096 Sub Waiting Mammo SI1001 Couch, 2 seater, easy, with arms, fully upholstered 1,00
1F 096 Sub Waiting Mammo TAB001 Reception Table, round, D600 1,00
1F 096 Sub Waiting Mammo TAB001 Reception Table, round, D600 3,00
1F 097 _Toilet CEO
1F 098 _Toilet F Hearth
1F 099 _Toilet F Staff
1F 100 _Toilet F/H Int
1F 101 _Toilet F/H Adm
1F 102 _Toilet F/H Pub
1F 103 _Toilet M Hearth
1F 104 _Toilet M Int
1F 105 _Toilet M/F U/S
1F 106 _Subwating Hearth
1F 106 Sub Waiting Hearth CH01 CHAIR, easy, low back, upholstered 8,00
1F 106 Sub Waiting Hearth TAB001 Reception Table, round, D600 4,00
1F 107 _Toilet M Adm
1F 108 _Waiting Radiology
GF 109 _Bunker 1 Refer to Varian Drawings
GF 109 Bunker 1 C-09 Wooden cabinet 2,00
GF 110 _Bunker 2 Refer to Varian Drawings
GF 111 _CT
GF 111 CT AR1375 Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps, w/Glove Dispenser 1,00
GF 111 CT CT-SI01 1.01 - Gantry (air cooled) 1,00
GF 111 CT CT-SI02 1.02 307 kg Patient table Vario 2 (2000 mm scannable range) 1,00
GF 111 CT CT-SI03 1.03 IRSxp1 Tower PC 1,00
GF 111 CT CT-SI04 1.04 UPS 1,00
GF 111 CT CT-SI05 1.05 Rack for IRS and UPS 1,00
GF 111 CT CT-SI06 1.06 Wireless Access Point 1,00
GF 111 CT CT-SI08 1.08 Single Monitor Cart 1,00
GF 111 CT CT-SI10 1.10 MEDTRON Accutron CT-D, pedestal 1,00
GF 111 CT FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
GF 111 CT FF1840 Clock, 15"-16" Diameter 1,00
GF 111 CT RD1235 Rack, Apron/Gloves, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 112 _Fluoroscopy FLUOR
GF 112 Fluoroscopy AR1355 Dispenser, Soap, Disposable 1,00
GF 112 Fluoroscopy AR1360 Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
GF 112 Fluoroscopy AR1375 Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps, w/Glove Dispenser 1,00
GF 112 Fluoroscopy C-2 Wooden cabinet 1,00
GF 112 Fluoroscopy FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
GF 112 Fluoroscopy FF1840 Clock, 15"-16" Diameter 1,00
GF 112 Fluoroscopy FL-SI01 1.01 LUMINOS Lotus Max 1,00
GF 112 Fluoroscopy FL-SI03 1.03 Generator Polydoros F80-2 (80 kW) 1,00
GF 112 Fluoroscopy FL-SI04 1.04 Monitor cart with 2. Display 1,00
GF 112 Fluoroscopy FL-SI06 1.06 MEDTRON Accutron CT-D, pedestal 1,00
GF 112 Fluoroscopy FL-SI07 1.07 Apron with hanger 1,00
GF 112 Fluoroscopy PB1085 Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type 1,00
GF 113 Corridor Radiology GF
GF 114 _MRI
GF 114 MRI C-8 Wooden cabinet 1,00
GF 114 MRI MRI-SI01 1.01 Magnet XK-Gradient 1,00
GF 114 MRI MRI-SI02 1.02 Fixed patient table, whole body 1,00
GF 114 MRI MRI-SI03 1.03 RF-Cabin 1,00
GF 114 MRI MRI-SI04 1.04 RF-Door 1,00
GF 114 MRI MRI-SI05 1.05 RF-Window 1,00
GF 114 MRI MRI-SI06 1.06 RF-System filter plate 1,00
GF 114 MRI MRI-SI07 1.07 Magnet stop 1,00
GF 114 MRI MRI-SI17 1.17 HAMACO (Coil shelf) L=2.00 x W=2.10 x D=0.50m 1,00
GF 114 MRI MRI-SI19 1.19 MEDTRON Accutron MR 1,00
GF 114 MRI MRI-SI22 1.22 MRI Compatible Patient monitor 1,00
GF 114 MRI MRI-SI23 1.23 MRI CompatibleAnesthesia machine 1,00
GF 114 MRI RD1785 Anesthesia Machine, MRI Compatible 1,00
GF 115 _PET/CT
GF 115 PET Scan AR1115 Telephone, Wall Mounted, 1 Line 1,00
GF 115 PET Scan AR1360 Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
GF 115 PET Scan AR1375 Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps, w/Glove Dispenser 1,00
GF 115 PET Scan AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 115 PET Scan C-3 Wooden cabinet 1,00
GF 115 PET Scan FF1840 Clock, 15"-16" diameter 1,00
GF 115 PET Scan MS1760 Hamper, Linen, Mobile, w/Lid 1,00
GF 115 PET Scan MS1765 Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid 1,00
PET Scan PET-SI01 1.01 Biograph Horizon
GF 115 - PET Gantry 1,00
- CT Gantry SOMATOM Perspective 16
GF 115 PET Scan PET-SI02 1.02 Patient bed 1,00
GF 115 PET Scan PET-SI09 1.09 MEDTRON Accutron CT-D, pedestal 1,00
GF 115 PET Scan PET-SI12 1.12 RGSC camera (with wall mount bracket) 1,00
GF 115 PET Scan PET-SI14 1.14 GAMMEX LASERS for PET-CT RT-Simulation with workstation
1F 116 _Dexa
1F 116 DEXA AR1115 Telephone, Wall Mounted, 1 Line 1,00
1F 116 DEXA AR1355 Dispenser, Soap, Disposable 1,00
1F 116 DEXA AR1360 Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
1F 116 DEXA AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 116 DEXA AR1460 Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain 1,00
1F 116 DEXA FC1475 Cabinet, Floor Standing, 90W 40D 200H 2,00
1F 116 DEXA FC2002 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section) Desk, 940W 550D 1,00
1F 116 DEXA FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 1,00
1F 116 DEXA FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
1F 116 DEXA FF1840 Clock, 15"-16" Diameter 1,00
1F 116 DEXA MS1900 Height Measuring Scale, Floor model with digital weighing scale 1,00
1F 116 DEXA PB1085 Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type 1,00
1F 116 DEXA RD1205 Scanner, Bone Density, Full Body 1,00
1F 116 DEXA RD1206 Bone Densitometer Control Station 1,00

1F 116 DEXA RD1207 Mobile X-Ray Barrier 1,00
1F 116 DEXA RD1235 Rack, Apron/Gloves, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 117 _Doppler
1F 117 Doppler AR1115 Telephone, Wall Mounted, 1 Line 1,00
1F 117 Doppler AR1260 Rail, Accessory Mounting, Length as Required 1,00
1F 117 Doppler AR1355 Dispenser, Soap, Disposable 1,00
1F 117 Doppler AR1360 Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
1F 117 Doppler AR1375 Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps, w/Glove Dispenser 1,00
1F 117 Doppler AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 117 Doppler AR1460 Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain 1,00
1F 117 Doppler C-4 Wooden cabinet 1,00
1F 117 Doppler FC1475 Cabinet, Floor Standing, 90W 40D 200H 1,00
1F 117 Doppler FC2002 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section) Desk, 940W 550D 1,00
1F 117 Doppler FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 1,00
1F 117 Doppler FF1260 Stool, Self Adjusting 1,00
1F 117 Doppler FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
1F 117 Doppler FF1840 Clock, 15"-16" Diameter 1,00
1F 117 Doppler MS1470 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor 1,00
1F 117 Doppler MS2620 Light, Exam, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 117 Doppler PB1085 Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type 1,00
1F 117 Doppler PT1510 Table, Examination Treatment, Hi/Lo 1,00
1F 117 Doppler RD1175 Scanner, Ultrasound, Bladder 1,00
1F 118 _Echo
1F 118 Echo Test AR1115 Telephone, Wall Mounted, 1 Line 1,00
1F 118 Echo Test AR1355 Dispenser, Soap, Disposable 1,00
1F 118 Echo Test AR1360 Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
1F 118 Echo Test AR1375 Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps, w/Glove Dispenser 1,00
1F 118 Echo Test AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 118 Echo Test AR1460 Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain 1,00
1F 118 Echo Test FC2002 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section) Desk, 940W 550D 1,00
1F 118 Echo Test FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 2,00
1F 118 Echo Test FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
1F 118 Echo Test FF1840 Clock, 15"-16" Diameter 1,00
1F 118 Echo Test MS1470 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor 1,00
1F 118 Echo Test MS1510 Printer, Computer 1,00
1F 118 Echo Test MS1765 Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid 1,00
1F 118 Echo Test PB1085 Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type 1,00
1F 118 Echo Test PT1510 Table, Examination Treatment, Hi/Lo 1,00
1F 118 Echo Test RD1170 Scanner, Ultrasound, Cardiac (Echo) 1,00
1F 119 _Mammography
1F 119 Mammography AR1115 Telephone, Wall Mounted, 1 Line 1,00
1F 119 Mammography AR1355 Dispenser, Soap, Disposable 1,00
1F 119 Mammography AR1360 Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
1F 119 Mammography AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 119 Mammography AR1460 Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain 1,00
1F 119 Mammography FC1475 Cabinet, Floor Standing, 90W 40D 200H 2,00
1F 119 Mammography FC2002 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section) Desk, 940W 550D 1,00
1F 119 Mammography FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 1,00
1F 119 Mammography FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
1F 119 Mammography FF1840 Clock, 15"-16" Diameter 1,00
1F 119 Mammography MA-SI01 1.01 MAMMOMAT stand Revelation, Inspiration, Fusion 1,00
1F 119 Mammography MA-SI02 1.02a Control console table with radiation shield 1,00
1F 119 Mammography MA-SI02a 1.02 WH AWS Workstation, control box, monitor 1,00
1F 119 Mammography MS1470 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor 1,00
1F 119 Mammography PB1085 Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type 1,00
1F 119 Mammography RD1235 Rack, Apron/Gloves, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 120 _Panorama & Cone Beam
1F 120 Panorama AR1115 Telephone, Wall Mounted, 1 Line 1,00
1F 120 Panorama AR1355 Dispenser, Soap, Disposable 1,00
1F 120 Panorama AR1360 Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
1F 120 Panorama AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 120 Panorama AR1460 Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain
1F 120 Panorama CHA391 CHAIR, easy, reclining, wipeable 1,00
1F 120 Panorama FC1475 Cabinet, Floor Standing, 90W 40D 200H 2,00
1F 120 Panorama FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
1F 120 Panorama FF1840 Clock, 15"-16" Diameter 1,00
1F 120 Panorama HOL006 HOLDER, sack, with lid foot operated, medium, freestanding, 875H 430W 385D 1,00
1F 120 Panorama HOL020 HOLDER, sharps box, up to 7 litre capacity, rail/trolley hang or wall mounted, 170H
1,00 125W 100D
1F 120 Panorama PA0001 Cone Beam CT Machine 1,00
1F 120 Panorama PB1085 Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type 1,00
1F 120 Panorama SMT002 TROLLEY, modular storage, single open frame, including handle and worktop, 1,00with up to 5 sets of runners for 600 fa
1F 120 Panorama STO004 STOOL, height adjustable, swivel, mobile 1,00
1F 121 _Stress Exercise
1F 121 Stress Test AR1115 Telephone, Wall Mounted, 1 Line 1,00
1F 121 Stress Test AR1355 Dispenser, Soap, Disposable 1,00
1F 121 Stress Test AR1360 Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
1F 121 Stress Test AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 121 Stress Test AR1460 Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain 1,00
1F 121 Stress Test FC2002 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section) Desk, 940W 550D 1,00
1F 121 Stress Test FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 1,00
1F 121 Stress Test FF1260 Stool, Self Adjusting 1,00
1F 121 Stress Test FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
1F 121 Stress Test FF1840 Clock, 15"-16" Diameter 1,00
1F 121 Stress Test MS1470 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor 1,00
1F 121 Stress Test MS2915 System, Stress Exercise, w/Treadmill 1,00
1F 121 Stress Test MS2916 Computer, w/ Flat Panel Monitor and Trolley 1,00
1F 121 Stress Test PB1085 Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type 1,00
1F 122 _U/S 01
1F 122 Ultrasound 01 AR1115 Telephone, Wall Mounted, 1 Line 1,00
1F 122 Ultrasound 01 AR1355 Dispenser, Soap, Disposable 1,00
1F 122 Ultrasound 01 AR1360 Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
1F 122 Ultrasound 01 AR1375 Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps, w/Glove Dispenser 1,00
1F 122 Ultrasound 01 AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 122 Ultrasound 01 AR1460 Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain 1,00
1F 122 Ultrasound 01 C-4 Wooden cabinet 1,00
1F 122 Ultrasound 01 FC1475 Cabinet, Floor Standing, 90W 40D 200H 2,00
1F 122 Ultrasound 01 FC2002 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section) Desk, 940W 550D 1,00
1F 122 Ultrasound 01 FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 1,00
1F 122 Ultrasound 01 FF1260 Stool, Self Adjusting 1,00

1F 122 Ultrasound 01 FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
1F 122 Ultrasound 01 FF1840 Clock, 15"-16" Diameter 1,00
1F 122 Ultrasound 01 MS1470 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor 1,00
1F 122 Ultrasound 01 MS1911 Monitor, Vital Signs, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 122 Ultrasound 01 MS2620 Light, Exam, Mobile 1,00
1F 122 Ultrasound 01 PB1085 Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type 1,00
1F 122 Ultrasound 01 PT1510 Table, Examination Treatment, Hi/Lo 1,00
1F 122 Ultrasound 01 RD1175 Scanner, Ultrasound, General Purpose 1,00
1F 123 _U/S 02
1F 123 Ultrasound 02 AR1115 Telephone, Wall Mounted, 1 Line 1,00
1F 123 Ultrasound 02 AR1260 Rail, Accessory Mounting, Length as Required 1,00
1F 123 Ultrasound 02 AR1355 Dispenser, Soap, Disposable 1,00
1F 123 Ultrasound 02 AR1360 Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted 1,00
1F 123 Ultrasound 02 AR1375 Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps, w/Glove Dispenser 1,00
1F 123 Ultrasound 02 AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 123 Ultrasound 02 C-4 Wooden cabinet 1,00
1F 123 Ultrasound 02 FC1475 Cabinet, Floor Standing, 90W 40D 200H 2,00
1F 123 Ultrasound 02 FC2002 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section) Desk, 940W 550D 1,00
1F 123 Ultrasound 02 FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 1,00
1F 123 Ultrasound 02 FF1260 Stool, Self Adjusting 1,00
1F 123 Ultrasound 02 FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
1F 123 Ultrasound 02 FF1840 Clock, 15"-16" Diameter 1,00
1F 123 Ultrasound 02 MS1470 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor 1,00
1F 123 Ultrasound 02 MS1911 Monitor, Vital Signs, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 123 Ultrasound 02 MS2620 Light, Exam, Wall Mounted 1,00
1F 123 Ultrasound 02 PB1085 Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type 1,00
1F 123 Ultrasound 02 PT1510 Table, Examination Treatment, Hi/Lo 1,00
1F 123 Ultrasound 02 RD1175 Scanner, Ultrasound, General Purpose 1,00
1F 124 _Anti-Toilet Adm
1F 125 _Storage 1F
1F 126 _Corridor Radiology Mammo
1F 127 _Corridor Radiology Hearth
1F 128 _Corridor - Int.
GF 129 _Control-MRI
GF 129 Control AR1115 Telephone, Wall Mounted, 1 Line 1,00
GF 129 Control AR1420 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 1,00
GF 129 Control DSK1016 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section) Desk, 2700W 700D 1,00
GF 129 Control FF1210 Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 2,00
GF 129 Control FF1590 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 1,00
GF 129 Control MRI-SI12 1.12 Control unit MR AWP 1,00
GF 129 Control MRI-SI13 1.13 Host PC MR AWP 1,00
GF 129 Control MRI-SI14 1.14 Intercom System 1,00
GF 129 Control MRI-SI15 1.15 Alarmbox 1,00
GF 129 Control MRI-SI16 1.16 LCD monitor and camera for patient monitoring 1,00
GF 129 Control MRI-SI18 1.18 MEDRAD MR control unit 1,00
GF 129 Control MRI-SI20 1.20 syngo MR Workplace 1,00
GF 130 _Corridor Radiotherapy
B01- King Fahd Road

DETAIL DESIGN
BOQ FOR ARCHITECTURAL AND
INTERIOR DESIGN
BOQ FOR ARCHITECTURAL AND INTERIOR DESIGN

RADCARE - SPECIALZED RADIOLOGY CENTRE - B01- King Fahd Road
Architecture and Finishing Works
Issue date
SCOPE, TABLE OF CONTENTS & TOTAL
Nov-23
TABLE OF CONTENTS
NOTE:
The Contractor must check the quantities and consistency in the drawings
and technical specifications. In the event of discrepancies, the Contractor
shall immediately notify the Client or its Representative.

Issue date
Nov-23
Table of Contents And Collection
Division 02 : Site Construction

SAR -
Division 03 : Concrete
SAR -
Division 04 : Masonry
SAR -
Division 05 : Metals
SAR -
Division 06 : Wood and Plastics
SAR -
Division 07 : Thermal and Moisture Protection
SAR -
Division 08 : Doors and Windows
SAR -
Division 09 : Finishes
SAR -
Division 10 : Specialties
SAR -
Division 12 : Furnishings
SAR -
Division 13 : Special Construction
SAR -
Division 14 : Conveying Equipment
SAR -
Grand Total
- SAR
Issue date
Nov-23
DIVISION 02
SITE CONSTRUCTION
Division 02 : Site Construction page 1 of 3

Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
S Description Unit Quantity
SAR SAR
02110 SITE CLEARING
Execution of all the necessary site preparation and clearing procedure to allow the project
execution. This includes site preparation, site protections and safety measures, clearing of
areas for access and works of all the contractors and subcontractors, removal and disposal
of debris and waste with specialized procedures and all the associated authority permits.
A ls 1 -
02225 DEMOLITIONS
Execution of the dismantling of internal and external technical installations (not limited to fire
protection systems, electrical installations, ventilation, external doors,...).
Demolition of concrete block walls and concrete portions where required.
Demolition with care of areas near drains and electrical systems.
This includes proper restoration and protection of cut parts, safety procedures, permits from
B the authorities and disposal of materials and associated costs. ls 1 -
Carried to collection -
Issue date
Nov-23
Description Total
Collection
Total of page 2 SAR -
Total of Division 03 - Carried to summary - SAR

Issue date
Nov-23
DIVISION 03
CONCRETE
Division 03 : Concrete page 1 of 4

Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
03335 ARCHITECTURAL SCREED

Supply concrete screed thick 80mm and installing reinforced (20x20cm 5 mm diameter steel
mesh), include construction and contraction joints, finishing and edging, required cutouts
and protection of finished work.
Price to include supply and install polyethilene sheet 0,3 mm thck, 100 mm coils
overlapping, tape joining and folding upwards for the total thickness of the floor
underlayment against structural walls, columns and partitions. Including cost of required
cutouts and protection of finished work.
Price to include impact (footfall) noise insulation coating with adhesive selvage, made up of
8 mm closed cell physically reticulated polyethylene.
Price to include adaptation and coordination with building systems including Lighting, HVAC,
A Electrical, Special,Mechanical, Access Control Fire Protection. m2 525 -
Supply concrete screed thick 130 mm and installing reinforced (20x20cm 5 mm diameter
steel mesh), include construction and contraction joints, finishing and edging, required
B Electrical, Special,Mechanical, Access Control Fire Protection. m2 1 235 -
03521 LIGHT WEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE (FOAM CONCRETE)

Supply light weight concrete screed in wet areas thick 80 mm, include construction and
contraction joints, finishing and edging, required cutouts and protection of finished work and
slope as required.
C Electrical, Special,Mechanical, Access Control Fire Protection. m2 120 -
Supply light weight concrete screed in wet areas thick 130 mm, include construction and
contraction joints, finishing and edging, required cutouts and protection of finished work and
slope as required.
D Electrical, Special,Mechanical, Access Control Fire Protection. m2 125 -
03543 SELF LEVELLING UNDERLAYMENT

Self levelling underlayment over architectural screed sub bases thick 1 - 30 mm, include
construction and contraction joints, finishing and edging, required cutouts and protection of
finished work and slope as required. Price to include adaptation and coordination with
building systems including Lighting, HVAC, Electrical, Special,Mechanical, Access Control
E Fire Protection. m2 1 750 -
03 CONCRETE SUBSTRUCTURE
Cast in place concrete for foundation, reinforcement and formwork for equipments on
medical rooms and bunkers based on structural report.
This inclides site preparation, demolishing, safety protections, coordiantions with the other
specialized suppliers and subcontractors.
F This includes final calculations and reporting and any aithority approval associated. ls 1 -
Issue date
Nov-23
Description Total
03 CONCRETE SUPERSTRUCTURE
Cast in place concrete for retaining walls, slabs, beams, reinforcement and formwork for
bunkers based on structural report.
This inclides site preparation, demolishing, safety protections, coordiantions with the other
specialized suppliers and subcontractors.
G This includes final calculations and reporting and any aithority approval associated. ls 1 -
Issue date
Nov-23
Description Total
Collection

Issue date
Nov-23
DIVISION 04
MASONRY
Division 04 : Masonry page 1 of 3

Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
04200 BARITE MASONRY BLOCK cm 10 - G5(4)X+MC15F (alternative option)

Provide, supplying and laying in position of high density barite masonry block (density >3300
kg/mc). Concrete block shall be shaped in order to provide a continuous layer of concrete
protection. Masonry block fixed with barite mortar (dry density 4100 kg/mc). Provide barite
reinforced concrete curb on top of wall (20cm height). Include all accessories, brackets and
reinforcement for door installation. As per manufacturer’s instructions and complete in all
aspects.
A (Refer Drawing: Gypsum Partition Detalis 2007). m2 90 -
04200 BARITE MASONRY BLOCK cm 20 - G5(4)X+MC15F (alternative option)

Provide, supplying and laying in position of high density barite masonry block (density >3300
kg/mc). Concrete block shall be shaped in order to provide a continuous layer of concrete
protection. Masonry block fixed with barite mortar (dry density 4100 kg/mc). Provide barite
reinforced concrete curb on top of wall (20cm height). Include all accessories, brackets and
reinforcement for door installation. As per manufacturer’s instructions and complete in all
aspects.
B (Refer Drawing: Gypsum Partition Detalis 2007). m2 90 -
Issue date
Nov-23
Description Total
Collection

Issue date
Nov-23
DIVISION 05
METALS
Division 05 : Metals page 1 of 3

Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
05500 Metal Fabrications

External metal stair.
Supply and installation of external metal stair. Design and design structure calculation to be
provided by contractor to the approval of the employer's representative.
Price to include required cutouts, adaptation and coordination with building systems (not
limited to Lighting, HVAC, Electrical, Special, Mechanical, Access Control Fire Protection,
Finishes). Price to include all the supporting and fixing materials.
Finishes to be approved by the client's representative.
A Price to include all the supporting and fixing materials. (Refer Drawing nb. 0100). n 1 -
Internal metal stairs.

Supply and installation of internal metal stair. Design and design structure calculation to be
provided by contractor to the approval of the employer's representative.
Price to include all the supporting and fixing materials. (Refer Drawing nb. 0100-0105-detial
B 2010). n 2
Mezzanine on light steel structure.

Supply and installation of mezzanine on light steel structure. Design and design structure
calculation to be provided by contractor to the approval of the employer's representative.
Price to include all the supporting and fixing materials. (Refer Drawing nb. 0105-0111).
C mq 230
05500 Balustrade (located around two internal stairs and void on main atrium)
Supply and install internal Glazed Balustrade composed by tempered glass 4+4mm thick
(height 1,55mt), stainless steel supporting/fixing system, handrail in stainless steel, stainless
steel profile for the protection of edges, anchoring and integrated LED lighting.
Price to include required cutouts, adaptation, coordination with systems and connections to
building systems (not limited to Lighting, HVAC, Electrical, Special, Mechanical, Access
Control Fire Protection, finishes).
Price to include all the supporting and fixing materials. Price to include all elements and
metal flashing and trims to create adequate sealant and connection in conjunction of
different materials and building elements including but not limited to joining, fitting, sealing,
trims, flashing, trims and finishing.
Price to include lighting fixtures.
System integrated with Specs 08800 Glass and Glazing.
(Refer Drawing nb. 2003 - Detail glazed internal parapets & stairs).
D m 30 -
05800 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies

Supplying, providing and laying in position of expansion joint cover as per architectrual
design. Price to include construction and contraction joints, finishing, edging, sheet metal
flashings and trims. Including cost of required cutouts and protection of finished work. Price
to include adaptation and coordination with building systems including Lighting,
HVAC,Electrical, Special,Mechanical, Access Control,Fire Protection. As per design
documents and manufacturer's instructions and complete in all aspects.
(Refer Drawing nb. 2005 - Joint details & Light details). -
E Flooring Joint ml 60
F Wall Joint ml 75
G Ceiling Joint ml 60
Issue date
Nov-23
Description Total
Collection
Total of page 2 - SAR

Issue date
Nov-23
DIVISION 06
WOOD AND PLASTICS
Division 06 : Wood and Plastics page 1 of 5

Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
06200 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
A DSK1010 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section)

Desk, 650D U-Shape (Refer Drawing nb. 1103)
Finishes to be approved by the client's representative. n 1 -
B DSK1011 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section)

Desk, 2200W 700D (Refer Drawing nb. 1104)
C DSK1012 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section)

D DSK1013 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section)

E DSK1014 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section)

Desk, 2800 W900D (Refer Drawing nb. 1107)
F DSK1015 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section)

Desk, courved to be measured at site. (Refer Drawing nb. 1108)
G DSK1016 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section)

H FC2002 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section)

I MI1001 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section)

Couch, 2 seater, easy, with arms, fully upholstered (Refer Drawing nb. 2012-2012.1)
J MI1002 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section)

CHAIR, VIP (Refer Drawing nb. 2012.2)
K MI1010 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section)

Counter Reception, Waiting Area (Refer Drawing nb. 1100-1100.1-1100.2-1100.3)
L MI1011 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section)

Counter Reception - see detail drawings (Refer Drawing nb. 1101)
M MI1012 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section)

Counter Reception - see detail drawings (Refer Drawing nb. 1102)
Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
Cladding wooden panels

Supplying, providing and laying in position of hollow core MDF laminated panels wall
panelling thickness 18mm. Complete of supporting structure, reinforcement, fixing,
connection to the main structure, joint finishing, special pieces, corner finishing, transition
profile, sealing, coordination for handrail installation. As per design documents and
manufacturer's instructions and complete in all aspects.
(Refer Drawing: Arch. Det. Tagging 1900-1901 / Arch Det. 13 VIP Room 2012-2012.1-
2012.2 / Air Lock 2016 / Wall Finishes 2018-2019
Refer Material: 2023036DD AR0005_00_Selected Materials&Vendor List).
Ground Floor: Cladding wooden panels installed on wall and ceiling position in VIP Room
N Finishes to be approved by the client's representative. mq 20 -
Ground Floor: Cladding wooden panels installed on wall and ceiling position in Entrance
Radiotherapy.
O Finishes to be approved by the client's representative. mq 45 -
Ground Floor: Cladding wooden panels installed on arches of Lobby.
P Finishes to be approved by the client's representative. mq 36 -
Ground Floor: Cladding wooden panels installed on wall position in reception/toilet area.
Q Finishes to be approved by the client's representative. mq 23 -
First Floor: Cladding wooden panels installed on wall position in reception area.
Q Finishes to be approved by the client's representative. mq 23 -
First Floor: Cladding wooden panels installed on wall position in CEO Office.
R Finishes to be approved by the client's representative. mq 20 -
S Ground Floor Air Lock 09510 Laminated Wood Ceiling mq 8 -
Skirting wood (on payer rooms)

Supplying, providing and laying wood skirting 10cm height, hollow core MDF laminated
panels wall panelling thickness 18mm. Complete of supporting structure, reinforcement,
fixing, connection to the main structure, joint finishing, special pieces, corner finishing,
transition profile, sealing, coordination with other parties. As per design documents and
T manufacturer's instructions and complete in all aspects. m 25 -
Internal Arches
Supplying, providing and laying of Internal Arches in Wood frame brass painted length 8,5mt.
Price to include supply and apply of the special decorative Brass Painted finishes (Pure
acrylic Anti fungal & anti Bacterial paints) include substrate and preparation.
Price to include all the supporting and fixing materials. Price to include all the supporting and
fixing materials. Price to include all elements of joining, fitting, sealing, trims, flashing and
finishing.
(Refer Drawing: Arch.Det.Tagging 1900-1901 / Arch.Det.15 - Water Wall Details / Arch.Det.
16 - Wall Protection Detail / Arch Det.18 - Arch Skirting & Architectural frame 2017 / Wall
Finishes 2018-2019.
U n 15 -
Issue date
Nov-23
Description Total
Dry Landscaping above Mezzanine on light steel structure

Internal Wood support and frame 20mm thick.
Price to include: Gravel layer compose by pebbles of natural coloured stone (white, red and
green), Screed, Polyethylene membrane, Resin layers and Lighting.
(Refer Drawing: Architecture Details - Dry Garden Details - 06200 Architectural Woodwork
1114-1115.
V Refer Material: 2023036DD AR0005_00_Selected Materials&Vendor List). mq 220 -
Issue date
Nov-23
Description Total
Collection

Issue date
Nov-23
DIVISION 07
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Division 07 : Thermal and Moisture Protection page 1 of 3

Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
07140 FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING

Supply and apply fluid applied waterproofing to wet areas floor including toilets,
kitchens, pantries, fountains etc.
A (Refer Drawing: Arch. Details - 09 - Gypsum Partition & Flooring Details 2008). m2 245 -
Supply and apply fluid applied waterproofing to wall on shower area up to 1,5 mt height.
(Refer Drawing: Arch. Details - 09 - Gypsum Partition & Flooring Details 2008).
B m2 5 -
07620 SHEET METAL FLASHINGS AND TRIMS

Supply and installation of all elements and metal flashing and trims to create adequate
sealant and connection in conjunction of different materials and building elements including
but not limited to joining, fitting, sealing, trims, flashing, trims and finishing.
Material and Technical solutions to be proposed by the Contractor, part of Contractor
responsability and subject to approval by the Client's representative.
C ls Included
07840 FIRE STOPPING

Supply and installation of fire stopping system(s) including but not limited to penetration
areas, around opening, point of connections wall and slab and corner. Fire stopping
system(s) of sufficient thickness, width and density to provide and maintain all
required fire resistance rating, in accordance with local Fire Department and
jurisdictional authorities. Price to include joint sealers (section 07900), adaptation and
coordination with building systems including Lighting, HVAC, Electrical, Special,Mechanical,
Access Control Fire Protection and obtaining related authorities certifications and
D attestations. ls Included
Issue date
Nov-23
Description Total
Collection

Issue date
Nov-23
DIVISION 08
DOORS AND WINDOWS
Division 08 : Doors and Windows page 1 of 6

Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
NOTE: door details and information must be read in conjunction with the door
schedule and detail drawings and specifications.
(Refer Drawing: Wood Door & Hardware & Schedule 1400-1401-1402-1403-1404-1405-
1406-1407-1408.
Refer Schedule: 2023036DD AR0010_00_Door Schedule
Refer Material: 2023036DD AR0005_00_Selected Materials-DoorHardware&Vendor
List).
08212 INTERNAL HINGED DOOR - type D1 single leaf 80x215

Supply and install internal hinged melamine laminated door panel and wood frame, including
lever handle, cylinder and keys, lockset, hinges, door stops, heavy duty door stopper,
silencers, stainless steel profile for the protection of edges, joint sealers, anchoring,
acrovynil protection and coordination with electrical and special systems, required cutouts,
Master Key System. Vision panel and ventilation grill where indicated. Price to include
hardware as per door schedule details and cut sheet. Finishes to be approved by the client's
A representative. n 7 -
08212 INTERNAL HINGED DOOR - type D1 single leaf 80x215 - Fire Rated 20' with self
closing latch
Master Key System. Vision panel and ventilation grill where indicated.
Price to include hardware as per door schedule details and cut sheet. Finishes to be
approved by the client's representative.
Fire Rated 20 minutes with self closing latch.
B n 2 -
08212 INTERNAL HINGED DOOR - type D1 single leaf 90x215

C n 35 -
08212 INTERNAL HINGED DOOR - type D1 single leaf 90x215 - Fire Rated 20' with self
closing latch
D n 13 -
08110 INTERNAL HINGED DOOR - type D1 single leaf 100x215 - Fire Rated 45' with
self closing latch
Supply and install internal hinged metal door panel and metal frame, including lever handle,
cylinder and keys, lockset, hinges, door stops, heavy duty door stopper, silencers, stainless
steel profile for the protection of edges, joint sealers, anchoring, acrovynil protection and
coordination with electrical and special systems, required cutouts, Master Key System.
Vision panel and ventilation grill where indicated. Price to include hardware as per door
schedule details and cut sheet. Finishes to be approved by the client's representative.
E n 2 -
08212 INTERNAL HINGED DOOR - type D2 double leaf (90+30)x215

Master Key System. Vision panel where indicated. Price to include hardware as per door
F n 1 -
Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
08212 INTERNAL HINGED DOOR - type D2 double leaf (90+30)x215 - Fire Rated 20'
with self closing latch
G n 7 -
08212 INTERNAL HINGED DOOR - type D2 double leaf (90+40)x215

H n 1 -
I n 2 -
J n 3 -
K n 1 -
08212 INTERNAL SLIDING DOOR - type D3 single leaf 70x215

Supply and install internal sliding melamine laminated door panel and wood frame and upper
box, including single pull handle, cylinder and keys, lockset, hinges, door stops, heavy duty
door stopper, silencers, stainless steel profile for the protection of edges, joint sealers,
anchoring, acrovynil protection and coordination with electrical and special systems,
required cutouts, Master Key System. Vision panel where indicated.
L approved by the client's representative. n 1 -

M approved by the client's representative. n 1 -
Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR

N approved by the client's representative. n 23 -
08212 INTERNAL SLIDING DOOR - type D3 single leaf 90x215 - Fire Rated 20' with self
closing latch
O Fire Rated 20 minutes with self closing latch. n 1 -

P approved by the client's representative. n 3 -

Q approved by the client's representative. n 1 -

R approved by the client's representative. n 4 -
08212 INTERNAL HINGED DOOR - type FM200 single leaf 80x215 - Fire Rated 20' with
self closing latch
Supply and install internal hinged melamine laminated door panel and wood frame,
including lever handle, cylinder and keys, lockset, hinges, door stops, heavy duty door
stopper, silencers, stainless steel profile for the protection of edges, joint sealers, anchoring,
Master Key System. Price to include hardware as per door schedule details and cut sheet.
Door integration with FM200 systems and in compliance with related Fire Local regulations.
S n 3 -
08212 INTERNAL HINGED DOOR - type FM200 double leaf (55+55)x215 - Fire Rated
20' with self closing latch
Supply and install internal hinged melamine laminated door panel and wood frame,
including lever handle, cylinder and keys, lockset, hinges, door stops, heavy duty door
stopper, silencers, stainless steel profile for the protection of edges, joint sealers, anchoring,
Master Key System. Price to include hardware as per door schedule details and cut sheet.
Door integration with FM200 systems and in compliance with related Fire Local regulations.
T n 1 -
Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
08450 EXTERNAL HINGED DOOR - type ED1 single leaf 120x215

Supply and install external hinged glass door panel and aluminium frame, including lever
handle, cylinder and keys, lockset, hinges, door stops, heavy duty door stopper, silencers,
stainless steel profile for the protection of edges, anchoring and coordination with electrical
and special systems, required cutouts, Master Key System.
U approved by the client's representative. n 1 -
08450 EXTERNAL HINGED DOOR - type ED1 single leaf 120x215 - Fire Rated 45' with
self closing latch
Supply and install external hinged glass door panel and aluminium frame, including lever
handle, cylinder and keys, lockset, hinges, door stops, heavy duty door stopper, silencers,
stainless steel profile for the protection of edges, joint sealers, anchoring and coordination
with electrical and special systems, required cutouts, Master Key System.
V n 3 -
08450 EXTERNAL HINGED DOOR - type ED2 double leaf (95+95)x215

Supply and install external hinged glass double door panel and aluminium frame, including
silencers, stainless steel profile for the protection of edges, joint sealers, anchoring and
W n 2 -
08450 EXTERNAL HINGED DOOR - type ED2 double leaf (95+95)x215 - Fire Rated 45'
Supply and install external hinged glass double door panel and aluminium frame, including
X n 1 -
08461 EXTERNAL HINGED DOOR - type ED4 double sliding (75+75)x215

Supply and install external sliding double glass door panel and aluminium frame, including
Y n 2 -
08520 EXTERNAL GLAZED WINDOW - type W1 single leaf 100x130
Supply and install external glazed window and aluminium frame, including lever handle,
steel profile for the protection of edges, joint sealers, anchoring and coordination with
electrical and special systems, required cutouts, Master Key System.
Z n 8 -
08520 EXTERNAL GLAZED WINDOW - type W2 single leaf 60x130
Supply and install external glazed window and aluminium frame, including lever handle,
electrical and special systems, required cutouts, Master Key System.
AA n 1 -
08710 DOOR HARDWARE
Supply and install all required door hardware (door protection, locks, handles, push button,
card reader, door closer, door coordinator, floor door stop, radar opening,…) where idicated.
AB ls Included
08900 GLAZED ALUMINIUM CURTAIN WALL
Supply and install external glazed aluminium curtain wall. Fire requirements as required by
Specialist Consultant or Local Authorities. Price to include hardware as per door schedule
AC details and cut sheet. Finishes to be approved by the client's representative. n By Others
Issue date
Nov-23
Description Total
Collection

Issue date
Nov-23
DIVISION 09
FINISHES
Division 09 : Finishes page 1 of 14

Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS - BOARD PARTITIONS
NOTE: General indications applicable to all below items.
Note:
Price to include Fire Rating Wall 1 Hour where indicated.
Price to include replacement of last wall board (internal room board) with one moisture
resistant cement board manufactured by ""Knauf"" Aquapanel or similar, for board partitions,
wall lining and cladding, instead of one normal gypsum board to wet areas or in
correspondance of any interference with wet areas not limited to toilet and changing area.
Price to include internal batt insulation (mineral wool 60 mm 70 kg/m3), resilient acoustic
layer in contact with main structures, reinforcement for wall mountend appliances,
equipment and doors installation, adaptation and coordination with building systems
including Lighting, HVAC, Electrical, Special,Mechanical, Access Control,Fire Protection.
Price to include all supporting installations and reinforcements, included but not limited to
nogging, steel support and other support required for tv or audio visual systems, handrails,
bed head, rails, curtain trunking, wc and toilet fixed equipment.
Price to include fire stopping system(s) including but not limited to penetration areas, around
opening, point of connections wall and slab and corner. Fire stopping system(s) of sufficient
thickness, width and density to provide and maintain all required fire resistance
rating, in accordance with local Fire Department and jurisdictional authorities.
Price to include joint sealers (section 07900), adaptation and coordination with building
systems including Lighting, HVAC, Electrical, Special,Mechanical, Access Control Fire
Protection and obtaining related authorities certifications and attestations.
Price to include all the supporting and fixing materials.
Price to include all elements and metal flashing and trims to create adequate sealant and
connection in conjunction of different materials and building elements including but not
limited to joining, fitting, sealing, trims, flashing, trims and finishing.
Lead Sheet (Section 13090): In compliance with Federal Specification QQ-L-201f, Grade C,
99.9% pure, and ASTM B749, Type L51121. Thickness as indicated on drawings, comply
with lead shielding equivalents as specified by the qualified health radiation physicist report
for this particular project. Note: 2ms is minimum lead height per national standard unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Lead Backed Gypsum Board: As manufactured by RAY-BAR ENGINEERING
CORPORATION, as type “RB-LBG” available 1.20 x 3m or SIMILAR
2. Sheet Size: Width and length as required for support spacing to prevent cracking during
handling. Not to exceed 1.2X3m
3. Drywall Thickness: Not less than 16mm – unless otherwise indicated.
4. Lead Thickness: Comply with lead shielding equivalents as specified by the qualified
health radiation physicist report familiar with local standards and regulations for this
particular project.
(Refer Drawing: KeyPlan 0100-0105 / Ground Floor Plan 0101-0102-0103-0104 / First Floor
Plan 0106-0107 / Section 0110-0111 / Toilet 1200-1201-1202-1203-1204 / Detail Key PLan
1900-1901 / Arch. Details - 01 - Corridor Handrail - Corner Guard Details 2000 / Arch.
Details - 02 - Finish to correspond to sink- Fire Prevention Panel Detail 2001 / Gypsum
Partition Details 2007-2008-2009 / Details 2013-2014-2015-2016-2017.
Fire Consultant Specialist Drawings.
Refer Schedule: 2023036DD AR0009_00_Architectural RDS&Finishing Table
Refer Material: 2023036DD AR0005_00_Selected Materials-DoorHardware&Vendor List).
Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS - BOARD PARTITIONS - G7(4) 330mm (Arches)

Supply and install gypsum Curved partitions manufacturered by ""KNAUF"" or similar,
330mm thickness composed by a bearing structures 75-100-150 mm wide every 60 cm
(reinforced systems) or as per structural calculations and n.4 layers of gypsum 12,5 mm
A thick. m2 135 -
09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS - BOARD PARTITIONS - G7(4) 125mm

Supply and install gypsum partitions manufacturered by ""KNAUF"" or similar,125mm
thickness composed by a bearing structure 75 mm wide every 60 cm or as per structural
B calculations and n.4 layers of gypsum 12,5 mm thick. m2 850 -
09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS - BOARD PARTITIONS - G7(4)F 125mm - Fire

Resistant
Supplying, providing and laying in position of 60' fire proof gypsum partitions with 125
mm total thickness composed by a bearing structure 75 mm wide, spacing 60 cm and n.4
layers of gypsum 12.5 mm thck. Price to include internal insulation (mineral wool 60 mm
80 kg/m3), resilient acoustic layer in contact with main structures, reinforcement for
all wall mountend appliances and equipment and doors installation. Complete of
reinforcement, fixing, connection to the main structure, joint finishing and corner
finishing. Corner finihsing when required as per detail on drawings. Price to include
adaptation and coordination with building systems including Lighting, HVAC, Electrical,
Special,Mechanical, Access Control,Fire Protection. Including cost of required cutouts
and scaffolding . As per design documents and manufacturer's instructions and complete in
all aspects.
C 740 -
09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS - BOARD PARTITIONS - G7(4)X 125mm - WITH

LEAD SHIELDING
First Floor (U/S - Mammography - Dexa)
thickness composed by double bearing structure 50 mm wide every 60 cm or as per
structural calculations and n.5 layers of gypsum 12,5 mm thick and 1mm Lead Shielding.
D m2 105
Ground Floor (Floroscopy - CT)
E m2 50
Ground Floor (Pet-CT) - Optional
F m2
Ground Floor (Pet-CT)
G m2 90
09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS - BOARD PARTITIONS - G7(4)XF 125mm - WITH

LEAD SHIELDING - Fire Resistant
H m2 25
I m2 65
Ground Floor (Pet-CT) - Optional
J m2
K m2 100
Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS - WALL LINING - G7(2) 100mm

Supply and install gypsum wall lining with 100 mm total thickness composed by a bearing
structure 75 mm wide every 60 cm and n.2 layers of gypsum 12,5 mm thck manufactured by
L "KNAUF", "LAFARGE" or similar. m2 230 -
09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS - WALL LINING - G7(2)X 100mm - WITH LEAD
SHIELDING
M structural calculations and n.3 layers of gypsum 12,5 mm thick and 1mm Lead Shielding. m2 5
N structural calculations and n.3 layers of gypsum 12,5 mm thick and 4mm Lead Shielding. m2 15
O structural calculations and n.3 layers of gypsum 12,5 mm thick and 8mm Lead Shielding. m2 55
09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS - WALL CLADDING - 25mm

Supply and install single gypsum board wall cladding, with 25 mm total thickness composed
by n.2 layers of gypsum 12,5 mm manufacturered by "KNAUF", "LAFARGE" or similar, as
P per architectural detailing. m2 410 -
09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS - WALL CLADDING - 25mm - WITH LEAD
Q
SHIELDING
R per architectural detailing and 1mm Lead Shielding. 4
S per architectural detailing and 3mm Lead Shielding. 9
T per architectural detailing and 4mm Lead Shielding. 25
09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS - LIGHT GYPSUM TILES CEILING
Supply and install light gypsum tiles ceiling prepainted. Ensure highest standard of fire
reaction performances. Suspension system including runners, hanger, ceiling profiles and
furring channels. All parts shall be resistant to atmospheric corrosion. The system shall also
be adequate to safely resist acting loads.
rating, in accordance with local Fire Department and jurisdictional authorities. Price to
include joint sealers (section 07900), adaptation and coordination with building systems
including Lighting, HVAC, Electrical, Special,Mechanical, Access Control Fire Protection and
obtaining related authorities certifications and attestations.
Price to include supply and installation of all access panel, based on client's representative
request and authority regulations, for systems inspection on any type of ceiling
manufactured by KNAUF, LAFARGE or equal, size 60x60cm or different.
(Refer Drawing: Section 0110-0111 / Ceiling Plan 0140-0141 / Toilet 1200-1201-1202-1203-
1204 / Detail Key Plan 1900-1901 / Ceiling Details 2004-2005-2006-2008
U m2 770 -
Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS - MOISTURE RESISTANT LIGHT GYPSUM TILES

CEILING
Supply and install moisture resistant light gypsum tiles ceiling prepainted. Ensure highest
standard of fire reaction performances. Suspension system including runners, hanger,
ceiling profiles and furring channels. All parts shall be resistant to atmospheric corrosion.
The system shall also be adequate to safely resist acting loads.
V m2 85 -
09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS - GYPSUM BOARD CEILING
Supply and install gypsum board ceiling, boards shall be 12.5 mm thick minimum.
Suspension system including runners, hanger, ceiling profiles and furring channels. All parts
shall be resistant to atmospheric corrosion. The system shall also be adequate to safely
resist acting loads.
W m2 1 280 -
Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS - MOISTURE RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD
CEILING
Supply and install moisture resistant gypsum board ceiling, boards shall be 12.5 mm thick
minimum. Suspension system including runners, hanger, ceiling profiles and furring
channels. All parts shall be resistant to atmospheric corrosion. The system shall also be
adequate to safely resist acting loads.
X m2 155 -
09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS - CEILING FOR ATRIUM

Supply and install Vapor Sky Ceiling Panel integrated system with lighting and prefinished .
Decorative system ceiling composed by Vapor Panel, torsion Spring, Acoustic Backer,
inLine LED, structure, Torsion Grid, LED Backlight. All compensation areas, bands and
strips for installation of other building systems are included not limited to fire prevention
system, lights, sensors.
Maintenance and cleaning procedures and any necessary equipment to be provided.
Ensure highest standard of fire reaction performances. Suspension system including
runners, hanger, ceiling profiles and furring channels. All parts shall be resistant to
atmospheric corrosion. The system shall also be adequate to safely resist acting loads.
manufactured by ARKURA, KNAUF, LAFARGE or equal, size 120x60cm or different.
Y m2 200 -
Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS - GYPSUM BULKHEADS
Supply and install gypsum ceiling bulkheads to compensate any variation in internal height
of ceiling. Bulkheads height are variable.
Z m 160 -
09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS - GLAZED BULKHEADS
Provide, supplying and laying in position of glazed bulkheads, 300mm height, 8mm thick,
satin finishing, complete of concealed steel frame as per details. Include all accessories,
special part, corner finishing as per details. As per manufacturer’s instructions and complete
in all aspects.
AA m 195 -
Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
09310 TILES - FINE PORCELAIN STONEWARE FLOORING
Supply and install fine porcelain stoneware tiles, 600x600mm Thick 9,5mm, first quality,
thickness 9,5mm, full body coloured, matt finish. Price to include support surface
preparation, primer, adhesives, mold resistant epoxy grouting with colour to the approval of
the employer representative. Include special coved pieces where required or epoxy
treatement for hygienic reasons. Include also sloped installation for showers and areas with
water. Including cost of required cutouts.
Price to include Access floor system required as per medical equipment installation
specification.
(Refer Drawing: Section 0110-0111 / Flooring Plan 0130-0131 / Toilet 1200-1201-1202-1203-
1204 / Detail Key Plan 1900-1901 / Floor Details 2000-2001-2002-2003-2008-2010-2016
AB m2 605 -
09310 TILES - FINE PORCELAIN STONEWARE SKIRTING
Supply and install 10 cm high Thick 9,5mm stoneware baseboard, first quality, full
homogeneous body coloured. Elements shall be coved in medical areas with specific
requirements of hygene if available, or special epoxy joints shall be provided. Provide all
primers, adhesives and grouting material and install according to manufacturer’s
prescriptions. Joints and grouting colour to client selection and approval. Include all
necessary special parts as available.
AC m 635 -
09310 TILES - FLOOR TRANSITION STRIPS METAL (BETWEEN SAME MATERIALS)
Supply and install metal linear threshold as transition between different floor finishing
materials at doors.
AD ls included
Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
09310 TILES - FLOOR THRESHOLDS SOLID STONE (TILES TO VINYL - CARPET TO

TILES)
Supply and install threshold in solid stone linear as transition between different floor finishing
materials at doors.
AF ls included
09310 TILES - FINE CERAMIC FLOORING
Supply and install fine ceramic tiles, 300x600mm Thick 10mm,, first quality, thickness as per
brand and model, full body coloured. Price to include support surface preparation, primer,
adhesives, mold resistant epoxy grouting with colour to the approval of the employer
representative. Include special coved pieces where required or epoxy treatement for
hygienic reasons. Include also sloped installation for showers and areas with water.
Including cost of required cutouts.
specification.
AG m 180 -
09310 TILES - FINE CERAMIC WALL TILING
Supply and install fine ceramic tiles, first quality, full body coloured, 300x600mm Thick
10mm. Include support surface preparation, primer, adhesives, mold resistant epoxy
grouting with colour to the approval of the employer representative, edging profiles as
available. Include also sloped installation for showers and areas with water. Including
required cutouts and protection of finished work.
specification.
AH Finishes to be approved by the client's representative. m2 1 025 -
Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
09632 STONE (INTERIOR)
Supply and install stone tiles for internal stairs, size as specified, first quality, thickness as
per brand and model, full body coloured. Price to include support surface preparation,
primer, adhesives, mold resistant epoxy grouting with colour to the approval of the employer
representative. Include special coved pieces where required or epoxy treatement for
hygienic reasons. Include also special trimming and finishing for stairs. Including cost of
required cutouts.
AI Refer Material: 2023036DD AR0005_00_Selected Materials-DoorHardware&Vendor List). m2 35 -
09650 RESILIENT PVC (VINYL) FLOORING 2 mm thick
Supply and install resilient PVC vinyl flooring minimum thickness 2 mm. Price to include
support surface preparation, primer adhesives and joints welding. Including cost of required
specification.
AJ m2 475 -
09650 RESILIENT PVC (VINYL) FLOORING 2 mm thick Antistatic
Supply and install resilient PVC vinyl flooring Antistatic (in electrical room - server room-
medical room with equipments) minimum thickness 2 mm. Price to include support surface
preparation, primer adhesives and joints welding. Including cost of required cutouts and
protection of finished work.
specification. Price to include required cutouts, adaptation, coordination with systems and
connections to building systems (not limited to Lighting, HVAC, Electrical, Special,
Mechanical, Access Control Fire Protection, finishes).
AK m2 510 -
Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
09650 RESILIENT PVC (VINYL) COVED BASE
Supply and install resilient PVC vinyl coved base to match resilient vinyl flooring color and
pattern, 10 cm high, coving with a minimum radius of 20 mm. Include support surface
preparation, primer adhesives and joints welding required cutouts and protection of finished
work. Colour to the approval of the Employer Representative.
AL m 1 175 -
09680 CARPETING
Supply and install carpeting minimum thickness 15mm. Price to include support surface
preparation, primer adhesives, joints welding, required cutouts and protection of finished
work. Colour to the approval of the Employer Representative.
specification.
AM m 16 -
09720 WALL COVERING - RESILIENT PVC (VINYL) WALL LINING
Resilient pvc (vinyl) wall lining same material floor finishing.

AN Refer Material: 2023036DD AR0005_00_Selected Materials-DoorHardware&Vendor List). m2 55 -
Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
09900 PAINTING FOR INTERIOR
Supply and apply internal Pure acrylic Anti fungal & anti Bacterial paints and special
decorative paints for ceiling and walls to all interior surfaces include substrate preparation.
AO Finishes to be approved by the client's representative. m2 5 845 -
08800 GLASS AND GLAZING - GLASS PROTECTIONS

Supply and install internal glazed tempered 4+4 mm thick with integrated frosted printing on
the glazing as per special design pattern requirements). Finishes to be approved by the
client's representative.
(Refer Drawing: Arch. Details - 16 - Wall Protection Detail 2015 / Wall Finish 2018-2019.
AP n 6 -
08800 GLASS AND GLAZING - WALL PAPER + GLASS

Supply and install internal fluted glazed tempered 4+4 mm thick walll with integrated Wall
paper (ref. 09720) as per special design pattern requirements.
Supplying, providing and laying wall paper in position of glazed wall cladding, satin finishing
or trasparent. Complete of supporting structure, reinforcement, fixing, connection to the main
structure, coordination with handrail supporting structure, joint finishing, special pieces,
corner finishing, transition profile, sealing, back wallpaper decorative and lightining. As per
design documents and manufacturer's instructions and complete in all aspects.
(Refer Drawing: Arch. Details - 14 - Corridor Backlit Wall Details 2013 / Room 04 - Pet Ct -
1303 / Room 12- Bunker - 1311 / Wall Finish 2018-2019.
AQ m2 78 -
08800 GLASS AND GLAZING - BACKLIT GLASS

Supply and install internal fluted glazed tempered 4+4 mm thick wall with integrated LED
lighting systems as per special design pattern requirements.
Complete of supporting structure, reinforcement, fixing, connection to the main structure,
coordination with handrail supporting structure, joint finishing, special pieces, corner
finishing, transition profile, sealing, back wallpaper decorative and lightining. As per design
(Refer Drawing: Arch. Details - 14 - Corridor Backlit Wall Details 2013 / Room 12- Bunker -
1311 / Wall Finish 2018-2019.
AR Refer Material: 2023036DD AR0005_00_Selected Materials&Vendor List). m2 34 -
Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
08800 GLASS AND GLAZING - BACKLIGTHED GLASS IMAGES
Supply and install internal glazed tempered 4+4 mm thick wall with printed decorative
images and integrated LED lighting as per special design pattern requirements.
Complete of supporting structure, reinforcement, fixing, connection to the main structure,
coordination with handrail supporting structure, joint finishing, special pieces, corner
finishing, transition profile, sealing, back wallpaper decorative and lightining. As per design
(Refer Drawing: Sections 0111 / Arch. Details - 14 - Corridor Backlit Wall Details 2013 /
Wall Finish 2018-2019.
AS m2 26 -
08800 GLASS AND GLAZING - GLASS ELEVATOR

Supply and install internal glazed tempered elevator shaft cladding (decorative safety
tempered glass 8mm thick) with printing on glazing as per special design pattern
requirements. Glass panes fixing using special fittings, such as spiders, rotules, clamps,
tension rods and other supporting parts connected to the supporting structure. Price to
include hardware as per door schedule details and cut sheet. Finishes to be approved by the
AT client's representative. n By other
Supply and install Decorative Printing Theme on Tempered Glass.
(Refer Drawing: Architecture Details - Lift Cladding -14200 Elevators 1112 - 1113 / Arch.
Details - 16 - Wall Protection Detail 2015 (for design pattern).
AU Refer Material: 2023036DD AR0005_00_Selected Materials&Vendor List). m2 48 -
Issue date
Nov-23
Description Total
Collection

Issue date
Nov-23
DIVISION 10
SPECIALTIES
Division 10 : Specialties page 1 of 7

Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
10100 LIGHTING FIXTURES

Supplying and install all lighting fixtures including but not limited to spotlights, led lights,
linear lights, vertical atrium strips, forniture and millworks integrated lighting, signage lighted,
metal ceiling interated light system.
Finishes and models to be approved by the client's representative.
(Refer Drawing: Sections 0110 / False Ceiling Plan 0140-0141 / Millwors 1101-1102 / Dry
Garden Details 1114-1115 / Toilets 1200-1201-1202-1203-1204 / Balustrade Parapet 2003
/Light Details 2005 / Bulkhead 2006 / Arch. Details - 11 - Stairs Details 2010 / Arch. Details -
14 - Corridor Backlit Wall Details 2013 / Arch. Details - 16 - Wall Protection Detail 2015 /
Arch. Details - 17 - Air Lock Detail 2016.
Refer Material: 2023036DD AR0004_00_Lighting Fixtures Book / 2023036DD
A AR0005_00_Selected Materials&Vendor List). ls Included
10260 CORNER GUARD ACROVINYL

Supplying and install acrovinyl corner guards with all required cutouts, from brands
ACROVYN or NYSTROM or equivalent. Full height installation.
(Refer Drawing: Arch.Det.Tagging 1900-1901 / Arch. Details - 01 - Corridor Handrail -
B Corner Guard Details 2000 / Wall Finish 2018-2019). n 30 -
10265 WALL GUARD - ACROVYN

Supply and install acrovinyl wall protection and required special parts, rounded borders,
components, inner and outer corners,required cutouts and protection of finished work.
Colour to the approval of Employer's Repr., from brands ACROVYN or NYSTROM or
equivalent. Height 650mm.
C Corner Guard Details 2000 / Wall Finish 2018-2019). m 250 -
10268 PROTECTIVE CORRIDOR HANDRAIL - STAINLESS STEEL

Supply and install stainless steel (SS 304) handrail 3mm thick and all required back support,
special parts, corners, components, anchoring on any type of wall and finishing. Including
cost of required cutouts and protection of finished work.
D Corner Guard Details 2000 / Wall Finish 2018-2019). m 165 -
10436 EXTERIOR CLINIC SIGNS

Supply and install Exterior Clinic Signs. Including cost of required cutouts and protection of
finished work and coordiantion with other systems.
E (Refer Material: 2023036DD AR0003_00_Signage). -
TYPE 7- EXTERNAL SIGNAGE n 7
Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
10446 INTERIOR CLINIC SIGNS

Supply and install Interior Clinic Signs. Including cost of required cutouts and protection of
finished work and coordiantion with other systems.
(Refer Material: 2023036DD AR0003_00_Signage). -
F TYPE 1- BIG LED WRITING n 10
G TYPE 2- SMALL LED WRITING n 12
H TYPE 3- TOTEM- FREE STANDING SIGNAGE n 3
I TYPE 4- CUSTOMISED BAKLIGHTED PANEL n 3
J TYPE 5- WALL SIGNAGE n 59
10615 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS IN PANEL

Supply and install fixed internal glazed partition as per specifications. Include stainless steel
frame AISI 304, thickness 12/10, noise insulation foam filling between supporting wall and
frame, laminated glass 12 mm thick, gaskets and all accessories. Include horizontal blinds
(as per "Section 12492 Horizontal blinds") where indicated.
(Refer Drawing: ArcPlan 0106-0107 / Section 0110-0111 / Dem.Part. Schedule 1402 /
Dem.Part.Det. 1405-1406-1407 / / Arch. Details - 16 - Wall Protection Detail 2015 (for
design pattern).
Refer Schedule: 2023036DD AR0010_00_Door Schedule.
K Refer Material: 2023036DD AR0005_00_Selected Materials&Vendor List). m2 39 -
10615 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS IN PANEL (with frosted printing on the glazing)

2 Demountable partitions facing the atrium void (Office and Echo room)
Supply and install fixed internal glazed partition as per specifications. Include stainless steel
frame AISI 304, thickness 12/10, with integrated frosted printing on the glazing as per
special design pattern requirements, noise insulation foam filling between supporting wall
and frame, laminated glass 12 mm thick, gaskets and all accessories. Include horizontal
blinds (as per "Section 12492 Horizontal blinds") where indicated.
design pattern).
L Refer Material: 2023036DD AR0005_00_Selected Materials&Vendor List). m2 15 -
Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
10615 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS IN PANEL - Fire Rated 20'
Demountable partition located between Secretary room and Office Room.

Demountable partition located between Office CEO and Office Room.
Demountable partition located between Office Room and Entrance Radiology.
Supply and install fixed internal glazed partition Fire Rated 20' as per specifications.
Include stainless steel frame AISI 304, thickness 12/10, noise insulation foam filling between
supporting wall and frame, laminated glass 12 mm thick, gaskets and all accessories.
Include horizontal blinds (as per "Section 12492 Horizontal blinds") where indicated.
design pattern).
M Refer Material: 2023036DD AR0005_00_Selected Materials&Vendor List). m2 21 -
10615 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS - INTERNAL GLAZING HINGED DOOR - type GD1
single leaf 90x215
Supply and install internal hinged glass door and stainless steel frame, including lever
handle, cilynder and keys, lockset, hinges, door stops, heavy duty door stopper, silencers,
and special systems, required cutouts, Master Key System. Include horizontal blinds (as
per "Section 12492 Horizontal blinds") where indicated. Finishes to be approved by the
design pattern).
N Refer Material: 2023036DD AR0005_00_Selected Materials&Vendor List). n 3 -
10615 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS - INTERNAL GLAZING HINGED DOOR - type GD1
single leaf 90x215 - Fire Rated 20' with self closing latch
and special systems, required cutouts, Master Key System. Include horizontal blinds (as
per "Section 12492 Horizontal blinds") where indicated. Finishes to be approved by the
client's representative. Fire Rated 20 minutes with self closing latch.
design pattern).
O n 1 -
Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
10615 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS - INTERNAL GLAZING SLIDING DOOR - type GD3

single leaf 90x215
and special systems, required cutouts, Master Key System. Finishes to be approved by the
design pattern).
P Refer Material: 2023036DD AR0005_00_Selected Materials&Vendor List). n 1 -
10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

(Refer Drawing: KeyPlan 1000-1001 / Key Plan Toilet 1050-1051 / Toilet Det. 1200-1201-
1202-1203-1204).
Refer Schedule: 2023036DD AR0007_00_Toilet Cut Sheet Summary.
Q Refer Material: 2023036DD AR0006_00_Toilet Cut Sheet).
CLOSET
a SA08 n 15 -
WASHBASIN
b SA01 n 18 -
WASHBASIN
c SA03 n 7 -
WASHBASIN
d SA04 n 2 -
DISABLED CLOSET
e SA07 n 8 -
CONTROL PANEL
f SA13 n 25 -
DISABLED WASHBASIN
g SA02 n 6 -
SHOWER BASIN
h SA11 n 2 -
SHOWER ENCLOSURE
i SA12 n 2 -
TAB (photocell/electric/double water inlet)
j SA05 n 9 -
TAB (basin mixer)
k SA06 n 11 -
Shower Mixer
l SA10 n 2 -
mirror
m SA09 n 30 -
SOAP DISH
n AR 1355 n 30 -
Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
DISABLED HANDLE
o A500:L 800 mm n 7 -
PAPER TOWEL
p SA17 n 30 -
TOILET PAPER HOLDER
q SA15 n 23 -
BIDET SHOWER
r SA16 n 23 -
DUSTBIN
s FF1590 n 27 -
TOILET BRUSH
t SA14 n 23 -
Issue date
Nov-23
Description Total
Collection

Issue date
Nov-23
DIVISION 12
FURNISHINGS
Division 12 : Furnishings page 1 of 4

Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
12350 KITCHEN CASEWORK
Modulable Kitchen, 120x90x60

FC1180&FC1430
A (Refer Material: 2023036DD AR0008_00_Furniture Cut Sheett). n 1
12482 ENTRANCE MATS

Supply and install internal entrance mats on air lock. Finishes to be approved by the client's
representative.
B (Refer Material: 2023036DD AR0005_00_Selected Materials&Vendor List). n 1
12494 ROLLER SHADES
Supply and install internal manual roller shades on aluminium curtain wall.
Finishes to be approved by the client's representative. 230
C (Refer Material: 2023036DD AR0005_00_Selected Materials&Vendor List). m2 -
12500 LOOSE FURNITURE

Supply and install all loose fornitures. Including cost of required adaptations and protection
of finished work and coordiantion with other systems.
D (Refer Material: 2023036DD AR0008_00_Furniture Cut Sheett).
CH01 -
a CHAIR, easy, low back, upholstered n 34
FF1145
b Chair, side, without arms n 11 -
FF1210
c Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms n 74 -
FF1215
d Chair, Swivel, High Back n 1 -
FF1260
e Stool, Self Adjusting n 5 -
SD1001
f Desk, with drawer unit, 2000L 900D n 1 -
SD1002
g Counter Cashier - 120x80 n 2 -
h Desk, with drawer unit - 120x80 4 -
i Desk, with drawer unit, 80W 120H n 5 -
SD1003
j Desk, with drawer unit, 2000L 800D n 2 -
SD1004
k Desk, with drawer unit, 3600L 1600D n 1 -
SD1005
l Meeting table 1000x2400 n 1 -
SE1001
m Separation Desk n 4 -
SI1001
n Couch, 2 seater, easy, with arms, fully upholstered n 9 -
SI1002
o Couch, 3 seater, easy, with arms, fully upholstered n 3 -
TAB001
p Reception Table, round, D600 n 10 -
TAB002
q Table, round, D900 n 2 -
Issue date
Nov-23
Description Total
WOODEN CABINETS
Wooden cabinet that is 18 mm thick and glued with arrow veneer. It is an industrial-grade
cabinet that meets all the requirements of the approved code. It comes with all the
necessary accessories as detailed in the attachment.
C-1
Reception n 1
C-2
X-RAY n 1
C-3
CT n 1
C-4
Doppler & U/S n 3
C-5
Changing Room n 3
C-6
Manger n 1
C-7
Reporting n 1
C-8
MRI install it with a copper or stainless nail as instructed for proper installation n 1
C-9
Bunker n 4
C-10
Bunker n 2
C-11
Bunker n 2
Supply and install wooden desk that is 18 mm thick and covered with a layer of 8 mm thick
Corinne White Korean industry or something similar.The dimensions are based on the
drawings that are included in the details of the control medical rooms. M.L 12
12530 MANUFACTURED CASEWORK

Supply and install all fixed furniture. Including cost of required adaptations and protection of
F finished work and coordiantion with other systems
AR1170 -
a Locker, 2 Person, Side by Side, 72x15x18 n 34
AR1190 -
b Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted n 17
AR1355 -
c Dispenser, Soap, Disposable n 26
AR1360 -
d Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted n 27
AR1420 -
e Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted n 56
AR1460 -
f Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain n 13
AR9040 -
g Locker, One person n 11
AR9045 -
h Grab bar, 1-1/4" Dia., SS, 24", W/C Accessible n 11
AR1330 -
i Bench, Locker Room, Portable n 13
FC1150 -
j Cabinet, Sink, U/C/B, 2 Door, 30" W n 3
FC1385 -
k Sink, SS, Single Compartment, 10x14x16 ID n 3
FC1440 -
l Countertop, High Pressure Laminate n 3
FC1445 -
m Countertop, Stainless Steel 220X75X60 n 4
FC1475 -
n Cabinet, Floor Standing, 90W 40D 200H n 40
FC1490
o Cabinet, Floor Standing, 90W 40D 180H n 4 -
PB1085
p Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type n 20 -
PB1100
q Sink, Mop, Molded Stone, 10x36x24 n 2 -
Issue date
Nov-23
Description Total
Collection

Issue date
Nov-23
DIVISION 13
SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Division 13 : Special Construction page 1 of 8

Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
NOTE: door details and information must be read in conjunction with the door
schedule and detail drawings and specifications.
(Refer Drawing: Wood Door & Hardware & Schedule 1400-1401-1402-1403-1404-1405-
1406-1407-1408.
Refer Schedule: 2023036DD AR0010_00_Door Schedule
Refer Material: 2023036DD AR0005_00_Selected Materials-DoorHardware&Vendor
List).
08212 INTERNAL HINGED DOOR - type D1 single leaf 80x215 &

13090 DOOR PANEL LEAD LINING AND LEAD LINED STEEL FRAME mm 3
Supply and install any type of internal hinged melamine laminated door panel and wood or
steel frame with lead sheet 3 mm thck for protection from x-rays as per specifications.
Price to include lever handle, cylinder and keys, lockset, hinges, door stops, heavy duty
required cutouts, Master Key System. Vision panel and ventilation grill where indicated.
Price to include hardware as per door schedule details and cut sheet.
Price to include all work and material to make door frame proof to radiations in continuity
with the given x-ray resistant partition (protection of door separately) and required cutouts.
As per design documents, radiation specialist recommendations and manufacturer's
instructions and complete in all aspects.
A Finishes to be approved by the client's representative. n 2 -

B Finishes to be approved by the client's representative. n 2 -

C Finishes to be approved by the client's representative. n 4 -
Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR

D Finishes to be approved by the client's representative. n 2 -

E Finishes to be approved by the client's representative. n 2 -

F Finishes to be approved by the client's representative. n 1 -
Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
08212 INTERNAL HINGED DOOR - type D2 (90+30)x215 &

G Finishes to be approved by the client's representative. n 1 -

H Finishes to be approved by the client's representative. n 1 -

- Fire Rated 20' with self closing latch
I Fire Rated 20 minutes with self closing latch. n 2 -
Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR

J Finishes to be approved by the client's representative. n 1 -
08212 INTERNAL SLIDING DOOR - type D3 single leaf 90x215 &

Supply and install any type of internal sliding melamine laminated door panel and wood or
K Finishes to be approved by the client's representative. n 2 -

L Finishes to be approved by the client's representative. n 5 -
Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR

M Finishes to be approved by the client's representative. n 1 -
08450 EXTERNAL HINGED DOOR - type ED1 single leaf 90x215 - Fire Rated 45' with
self closing latch &
Supply and install external hinged door panel and aluminium frame, including lever handle,
electrical and special systems, required cutouts, Master Key System, with lead sheet 4 mm
thck for protection from x-rays as per specifications.
N Fire Rated 45 minutes with self closing latch. n 1 -
08212 INTERNAL HINGED DOOR - type D4 130x215
Doors to be provided by nominated specialist supplier as per attached quotation (which will
be provided to Conrtactor). All doors details to be provided by nominated specialist vendor
and to be coordinated by the contractor.
O Finishes to be approved by the client's representative. ps 2
13090 X-RAY RESISTANT VISION GLAZING PANEL 120X100cm 9 mm lead
Supply and install fixed internal X-ray resistant glazed window as per specifications. Include
stainless steel frame AISI 304, thickness 12/10, noise insulation foam filling between
supporting wall and frame, glass for protection from x-rays as per specifications and 9 mm
lead thick, gaskets and all accessories. Finishes to be approved by the client's
representative. Include anchoring and coordination with electrical and special systems and
required cutouts.
Price to include all work and material to make the vision glazing panel proof to radiations in
continuity with the given x-ray resistant partition. Including cost of required cutouts. As per
P design documents and manufacturer's instructions and complete in all aspects. n 1 -
13090 X-RAY RESISTANT VISION GLAZING PANEL 120X100cm 3 mm lead
Supply and install fixed internal X-ray resistant glazed window as per specifications. Include
stainless steel frame AISI 304, thickness 12/10, noise insulation foam filling between
supporting wall and frame, glass for protection from x-rays as per specifications and 3 mm
lead thick, gaskets and all accessories. Finishes to be approved by the client's
representative. Include anchoring and coordination with electrical and special systems and
required cutouts.
Price to include all work and material to make the vision glazing panel proof to radiations in
continuity with the given x-ray resistant partition. Including cost of required cutouts. As per
Q design documents and manufacturer's instructions and complete in all aspects. n 2 -
Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
13500 WATER FALLING FOUNTAIN -

Supply and install of Plexiglass box of minimum 2 cm with with internal water. Equipped with
motor, filters and connection wiring.
Finishes to be approved by the client's representative.(Refer Drawing: Arch. Details - 15 -
Water Wall Details 2014
R Refer Material: 2023036DD AR0005_00_Selected Materials&Vendor List). n 1
13510 PROJECTION SYSTEM MRI -

Supply and install of Video Projection system integrated with MRI installations for projection
of images and decorating views.
(Refer Drawing: Room 01 - MRI - 1300.
S Refer Material: 2023036DD AR0005_00_Selected Materials&Vendor List). n 1
Issue date
Nov-23
Description Total
Collection

Issue date
Nov-23
Division 14 : CONVEYING EQUPMENT
Division 14 : Conveying Equipment page 1 of 3

Issue date
Nov-23
Rate Amount
SAR SAR
14200 ELEVATORS
Design, Manufacture, Supply & installation, Ready for operation, a complete electric elevator
including operating mechanisms, cabins, mirror, kickplates, winch rails, entrances, rails,
guide rollers, guards, passenger Room interior finish and the control panel in the elevator
unit and connection to the operating switch and the required spare parts as shown and
according to the technical specifications.
A n By Others
1 elevator with 1150 Kg of capacity (15 passengers), 2 stops, 2 opposite openings, Room
less Machine ,serving the floors GF,1ST, 1.0 m/s of speed, operation control, operation
methodology SIMPLEX COLLECTIVE DOWN , Machin operation on (VVVF ) System ,
Controller :Microprocessor Electronic Control ,Power supply 3 phase/220 V, Lighting 1
phase /110 v
Cabinet Dimension ( 1600 mm W X 2400 mm D X 2100 mm H ) or as per
manufacture standard dimension to maintain the capacity
Car door opining 900 mm X 2100 mm
Shaft dimension 2450 W X 3000 D mm
Available Pit Depth 2450 W X 3000 D X 1100 mm
Travel height 6240 mm
Over Head 2630 mm
Price to include supply and installation of the required structure and coordination with all the
related disciplines.
Price to include minimum 3 years of maintenance and 2 years of warranty.
Issue date
Nov-23
Description Total
Collection

B01- King Fahd Road

DETAIL DESIGN
FF&E BOQ DETAILS (ONLY FOR COORDINATION)
FF&E BOQ DETAILS (ONLY FOR COORDINATION)

BoQ of FF&Equipment (only for coordination)
Row Labels Sum of Qty

AR1110 12 NOT PART OF THIS TENDER
Telephone, Desk, 1 Line 12
Telephone, Wall Mounted, 1 Line 18
AR1170 34 INCLUDED 12530 MANUFACTURED CASEWORK
Locker, 2 Person, Side by Side, 72x15x18 34
Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted 17
Rail, Accessory Mounting, Length as Required 4
Bench, Locker Room, Portable 13
Dispenser, Soap, Disposable 26
Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted 27
Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps, w/Glove Dispenser 12
Waste receptacle, Radioactive 1
Shelf, Utility w/Mop/Broom Holders, SS, Surface Mounted 4
Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Wall Mounted 56
Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain 13
Locker, One person 11
Grab bar, 1-1/4" Dia., SS, 24", W/C Accessible 11
BU-VAT16 1 NOT PART OF THIS TENDER
System Monitors (2x) incl. Keyboard & Mouse 1
Dedicated Console Keyboard 1
CCTV Control & Monitors 1
Printer 1
CH01 34 INCLUDED 12500 LOOSE FURNITURE
CHAIR, easy, low back, upholstered 34
CHA391 5 NOT PART OF THIS TENDER
CHAIR, easy, reclining, wipeable 5
CT-SI01 1 NOT PART OF THIS TENDER
1.01 - Gantry (air cooled) 1
1.02 307 kg Patient table Vario 2 (2000 mm scannable range) 1
1.03 IRSxp1 Tower PC 1
1.04 UPS 1
1.05 Rack for IRS and UPS 1
1.06 Wireless Access Point 1
1.07 Control unit with TFT monitor, control box, keyboard 1
1.08 Single Monitor Cart 1
1.09 MEDTRON Touchscreen remote control 1
1.10 MEDTRON Accutron CT-D, pedestal 1
DSK1010 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section) 1 INCLUDED 06200 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Desk, 650D U-Shape 1
Desk, 2200W 700D 1
Desk, 1400W 550D 1
Desk, 5940W 850D 1
Desk, 2800 W900D 1
Desk, courved to be measured at site. 1
Desk, 2700W 700D 1
FC1150 3 INCLUDED 12530 MANUFACTURED CASEWORK
Cabinet, Sink SS 3
FC1180 1 INCLUDED 12350 KITCHEN CASEWORK
Cabinet, Half Drawer, 120x90x60 1
Sink, SS 3
FC1430 1 INCLUDED 12350 KITCHEN CASEWORK
Sink, Epoxy Resin, 11x18x15 ID 1
Countertop, Stainless Steel 3
Countertop, Stainless Steel 220X75X60 4
Cabinet, Floor Standing, 90W 40D 200H 40
Cabinet, Floor Standing, 90W 40D 180H 4
FC2002 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section) 8 INCLUDED 06200 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Desk, 940W 550D 8
FF1145 11 INCLUDED 12500 LOOSE FURNITURE
Chair, side, without arms 11
Chair, Swivel, Low Back, Side With Arms 74
Chair, Swivel, High Back 1
Stool, Self Adjusting 5
FF1345 6 NOT PART OF THIS TENDER
Cart, Janitor's 6
Bucket, Mop, With Wringer, 26 Quart 2
Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal 49
Can, Trash, 44 Gallon 1
Clock, 15"-16" Diameter 18
FL-SI01 1 NOT PART OF THIS TENDER
1.01 LUMINOS Lotus Max 1
1.02 Control console for unit, generator and image system 1
1.03 Generator Polydoros F80-2 (80 kW) 1
1.04 Monitor cart with 2. Display 1
1.05 FLUOROSPOT Compact Container, Keyboard and Monitor 50 430 1
1.07 Apron with hanger 1
FS1135 1 NOT PART OF THIS TENDER
Brewer, Coffee, Auto, Elect, 3 Burner, Front/Back 1
FS1700 1 NOT PART OF THIS TENDER
Oven, Microwave, Consumer 1
HOL006 1 NOT PART OF THIS TENDER
HOLDER, sack, with lid foot operated, medium, freestanding, 875H 430W 385D 1
HOL020 1 NOT PART OF THIS TENDER
HOLDER, sharps box, up to 7 litre capacity, rail/trolley hang or wall mounted, 170H 125W 100D 1
LB1520 1 NOT PART OF THIS TENDER
Calibrator, Radioisotope 1
MA-SI01 1 NOT PART OF THIS TENDER
1.01 MAMMOMAT stand Revelation, Inspiration, Fusion 1
MA-SI02 1 NOT PART OF THIS TENDER
1.02a Control console table with radiation shield 1
MA-SI02a 1 NOT PART OF THIS TENDER
1.02 WH AWS Workstation, control box, monitor 1
MI1001 (Millwork-ref.to Millworks Section) 1 INCLUDED 06200 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Couch, 2 seater, easy, with arms, fully upholstered 1
CHAIR, VIP 3
Counter Reception, Waiting Area - see detail drawings 1
Counter Reception - see detail drawings 1
Counter Reception - see detail drawings 2
MRI-SI01 1 NOT PART OF THIS TENDER
1.01 Magnet XK-Gradient 1
1.02 Fixed patient table, whole body 1
1.03 RF-Cabin 1
1.04 RF-Door 1
1.05 RF-Window 1
1.06 RF-System filter plate 2
1.07 Magnet stop 1
1.09 Electronics cabinet GPA / EPC 1
1.10 Transfer station IFP 1
MRI-SI10a 1 NOT PART OF THIS TENDER
1.10a Helium compressor 1
1.11 Patient transport trolley, nonmagnetic 2
1.12 Control unit MR AWP 1
1.13 Host PC MR AWP 1
1.14 Intercom System 1
1.15 Alarmbox 1
1.16 LCD monitor and camera for patient monitoring 1
1.17 HAMACO (Coil shelf) L=2.00 x W=2.10 x D=0.50m 1
1.18 MEDRAD MR control unit 1
1.19 MEDTRON Accutron MR 1
1.20 syngo MR Workplace 1
1.21 UPS Liebert GXT4 1
1.22 MRI Compatible Patient monitor 1
1.23 MRI CompatibleAnesthesia machine 1
1.24 MRI Compatible Wheelchair 2
MS1470 39 NOT PART OF THIS TENDER
Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor 39
Printer, Computer 1
Hamper, Linen, Mobile, w/Lid 1
Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid 2
Height Measuring Scale, Floor model with digital weighing scale 1
Monitor, Vital Signs, Wall Mounted 4
Stretcher, Mobile, CRS, 9 Position 3
Light, Exam, Wall Mounted 4
Light, Surgical, Ceiling, Single, Small 1
System, Stress Exercise, w/Treadmill 1
Computer, w/ Flat Panel Monitor and Trolley 1
L-Block Shield 1
Dosimeters, Radiation 1
MS9075 1 INCLUDED - MEP
Hoods, Chemical Fume 1
Lead Brick Cave 2
PB1085 20 INCLUDED 12530 MANUFACTURED CASEWORK
Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type 20
PB1100 2 INCLUDED 12530 MANUFACTURED CASEWORK
Sink, Mop, Molded Stone, 10x36x24 2
PET-SI01 1 NOT PART OF THIS TENDER
1.01 Biograph Horizon- PET Gantry- CT Gantry SOMATOM PerspecHve 16 1
1.02 Patient bed 1
1.03 Control unit with 2x 19“ LCD monitor, control box, keyboard 1
1.05 Line connection box LCB 1
1.06 Power Distribution Computer Cabinet PDCC 1
1.07 Uniform source shield 1
1.08 syngo MultiModality Workplace with monitor 1
1.10 MEDTRON Touchscreen remote control 1
1.11 VARIAN RGSC cabinet, monitor, keyboard and mouse 1
1.12 RGSC camera (with wall mount bracket) 1
1.13 6kVA UPS with 15 mins back up 1
1.14 GAMMEX LASERS for PET-CT RT-Simulation with workstation 1
1.15 GAMMEX Tablet PC 1
PH2001 2 NOT PART OF THIS TENDER
Photocopier 2
PT1510 5 NOT PART OF THIS TENDER
Table, Treatment, Hi/Lo 5
RD1170 1 NOT PART OF THIS TENDER
Scanner, Ultrasound, Cardiac (Echo) 1
Scanner, Ultrasound, Bladder 3
Scanner, Bone Density, Full Body 1
Bone Densitometer Control Station 1
Mobile X-Ray Barrier 1
Rack, Apron/Gloves, Wall Mounted 3
Cart, Transport, Radium 1
Anesthesia Machine, MRI Compatible 1
RF1195 1 NOT PART OF THIS TENDER
Refrigerator, Lab, SS, 2 Door, 6 Shelves 1
RF1235 1 NOT PART OF THIS TENDER
Refrigerator/Freezer, 20 Cubic Feet 1
SD1001 1 INCLUDED 12500 LOOSE FURNITURE
Desk, with drawer unit, 2000L 900D 1
Counter Cashier - 120x80 2 INCLUDED 12501 LOOSE FURNITURE
Desk, with drawer unit - 120x80 4 INCLUDED 12502 LOOSE FURNITURE
Desk, with drawer unit, 80W 120H 5
Meeting table 1000x2400 1
SE1001 4 INCLUDED 12500 LOOSE FURNITURE
Separation Desk 4
SI1001 9 INCLUDED 12500 LOOSE FURNITURE
SI1002 3 INCLUDED 12500 LOOSE FURNITURE
SMT002 1 NOT PART OF THIS TENDER
TROLLEY, modular storage, single open frame, including handle and worktop, with up to 5 sets of runners for 600 facing inserts, 850H 730W 450D 1
STO004 1 NOT PART OF THIS TENDER
STOOL, height adjustable, swivel, mobile 1
TAB001 10 INCLUDED 12500 LOOSE FURNITURE
Reception Table, round, D600 10
TAB002 2 INCLUDED 12500 LOOSE FURNITURE
Table, round, D900 2
(blank)
(blank)
Grand Total 769
B01- King Fahd Road

DETAIL DESIGN
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
RADCARE TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF
CONTENTS
INDEX No. of Pages
DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION
Section 02110 Site Clearing 2
02225 Demolitions 4
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
Section 03335 Architectural Screed 4

03521 Light Weight Insulating Concrete (Foam 6
Concrete)
03543 Self Leveling Underlayment 6
DIVISION 5 – METALS
Section 05500 Metal Fabrications 18
05700 Ornamental Metal Works 10
05800 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies 9
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

Section 06200 Architectural Woodwork 14
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07140 Fluid Applied Waterproofing 8

07213 Batt Insulation 5
07420 Composite Metal Panels 11
07620 Sheet Metal Flashings and Trims 4
07840 Fire Stopping 10
07900 Joint Sealers 15
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 10

08212 Wood Doors 10
08310 Access Doors And Panels 6
08450 All-Glass Entrances and Storefronts 11
08461 Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors 7
08520 Aluminium Windows 12
08525 Aluminium Framed Entrances 12
08710 Door Hardware 11
08800 Glass and Glazing 17
08900 Glazed Aluminium Curtain Wall 15
RADCARE TECHNICAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INDEX No. of Pages
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
Section 09100 Metal Support Assemblies 6

09260 Gypsum Board Systems 11
09310 Tiles 16
09510 Acoustic Ceiling 11
09632 Stone (Interior) 15
09650 Resilient Flooring 8
09680 Carpeting 7
09720 Wall Coverings 6
09900 Painting 16
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
Section 10260 Corner Guard 5

10265 Wall Guard 5
10268 Protective Corridor Handrails 6
10270 Access Flooring 6
10436 Exterior Clinic Signs 7
10446 Interior Clinic Signs 7
10615 Demountable Partitions 9
10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories 8
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENTS
Section 11010 Facade Maintenance System 8

11132 Projection Screen 4
RADCARE TECHNICAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INDEX No. of Pages
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
Section 12350 Kitchen Casework 4

12482 Entrance Mats 5
12492 Horizontal Blinds 5
12494 Roller Shades 8
12500 Loose Furniture - General Specifications 12
12530 Manufactured Casework 28
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Section 13090 Lead Shielding 5

13095 RF Shielding 13
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

Section 14200 Elevators 49
Contents
SECTION 02110 ......................................................................................................................... 7
SECTION 02225 ......................................................................................................................... 9
SECTION 03335 ....................................................................................................................... 13
SECTION 03521....................................................................................................................... 17
SECTION 03543 ....................................................................................................................... 23
SECTION 05500 ....................................................................................................................... 29
SECTION 05700....................................................................................................................... 10
SECTION 05800....................................................................................................................... 20
SECTION 06200....................................................................................................................... 28
SECTION 07140....................................................................................................................... 42
SECTION 07213....................................................................................................................... 50
SECTION 07420 ....................................................................................................................... 55
SECTION 07620 ....................................................................................................................... 65
SECTION 07840 ....................................................................................................................... 10
SECTION 07900....................................................................................................................... 19
SECTION 08110....................................................................................................................... 10
SECTION 08212....................................................................................................................... 20
SECTION 08310 ....................................................................................................................... 30
SECTION 08450....................................................................................................................... 35
SECTION 08461....................................................................................................................... 46
SECTION 08520....................................................................................................................... 53
SECTION 08525....................................................................................................................... 64
SECTION 08710 ....................................................................................................................... 75
SECTION 08800....................................................................................................................... 85
SECTION 08900..................................................................................................................... 101
SECTION 09100..................................................................................................................... 115
SECTION 09260..................................................................................................................... 120
SECTION 09310..................................................................................................................... 131
SECTION 09510..................................................................................................................... 146
SECTION 09632..................................................................................................................... 156
SECTION 09650 ..................................................................................................................... 171
RADCARE - B01- King Fahd Road III-2/02110/2 Site Clearing

SECTION 09680..................................................................................................................... 179
SECTION 09720..................................................................................................................... 185
SECTION 09900..................................................................................................................... 191
SECTION 10260..................................................................................................................... 206
SECTION 10265 .................................................................................................................... 211
SECTION 10268..................................................................................................................... 216
SECTION 10270..................................................................................................................... 222
SECTION 10436..................................................................................................................... 227
SECTION 10446..................................................................................................................... 233
SECTION 10615 ..................................................................................................................... 239
SECTION 10800..................................................................................................................... 247
SECTION 12350..................................................................................................................... 254
SECTION 12482 ..................................................................................................................... 258
SECTION 12492..................................................................................................................... 263
SECTION 12494 ..................................................................................................................... 268
SECTION 12500..................................................................................................................... 276
SECTION 12530..................................................................................................................... 287
SECTION 13090..................................................................................................................... 314
SECTION 13095..................................................................................................................... 318
SECTION 14200 ......................................................................................................................... 6

SECTION 02110
SITE CLEARING
PART 1 GENERAL
To be read with Division 1 - General Requirements, Conditions of Contract, all

related Technical Specifications and associated drawings of this Contract.
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Site clearing may include the removal of the following:
1. Removal of Surface debris.
2. Removal of paving, kerbs, services, concrete, fence.
3. Removal of trees, shrubs and plants.
4. Removal of underground tanks, abundant services and

structural concrete elements.
5. Etc.,
B. Provide all labour, material, plant, equipment and appliances and

perform all necessary operations to execute the work of the section.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. This schedule is intended to be used as a helpful indication of the

related sections within the project specifications. It is not necessarily
comprehensive or complete and it is the Contractor’s responsibility to
ascertain all applicable sections required to understand the full scope
of works intended.
1. Section 02222 : Excavation
1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to Local Municipality codes for all applicable environmental

requirements, disposal of debris, burning debris on site, use of
herbicides, etc.
B. Burning of debris is not permitted on site unless specifically approved

by the Engineer.
C. Coordinate Clearing Work with utility companies.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
(NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from
disturbance during construction.
B. Verify plant life designated to remain is tagged or identified.
C. Identify an area for placing removed waste materials until such rubbish
is removed from site to a Municipality tip. No temporary rubbish heaps
are allowed.
D. Identify an area for placing salvaged materials (if any).
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Locate, identify and protect services that remain.
B. Protect trees and other plants and features to remain.
C. Protect bench marks, survey control points and existing structures from
damage and displacement.
3.3 CLEARING
A. Clear areas required for access to site and execution of work.
B. Remove trees and shrubs not designated to remain. Remove stumps,
main root system, surface rock, etc.
C. Clear undergrowth and dead wood, without disturbing top soil.
D. Apply herbicide to remaining stumps to inhibit growth.
E. Protect existing pavements, fences and adjacent land or property from
undue damage.
3.4 REMOVAL
A. Remove debris, rock, extracted plant life, unwanted materials from site.
B. Remove paving, kerbs, services, etc and other item as directed by the
Engineer.
C. Excavate and remove any underground tanks, retaining straps,
associated piping, foundation pad etc as directed by the Engineer and
as found on site.
3.5 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove surplus soil materials, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions,
demolished materials and waste materials including trash and debris,
and legally dispose them off in the manner and to the location as
directed and approved by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 02225
DEMOLITIONS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTIONS
A. The Contractor shall demolish/dismantle/disassemble all portions of

works marked on drawings and/or as noted on other Contract
Documents and remove/salvage all debris and materials from the site
as required and dump at locations approved by the Engineer.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Demolish/dismantle/disassemble portions of work marked on drawings

and/or as noted on other Documents.
B. Remove/Salvage all demolished materials as required.
C. Relocate live utilities where needed after obtaining approval from

statutory authorities.
D. Salvage and store material (if any) as agreed with the Engineer and as
approved in the Method Statement.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. The minimum standards for products specified in this section shall be

including as under but not limited to the following. Except as otherwise
specified herein, perform work in accordance with specifications, codes
and standards cited therein, and their latest editions, revisions,
applicable addenda and supplements. Where there is conflict between
the referenced standards the most stringent of the conditions/requirements
shall be applicable.
1. ANSI/ ASSE A10.6 - Safety Requirements for Demolition

Operations – American National Standard for Construction and
Demolition Operations.
2. NFPA 241: Standard for Safeguarding Construction, alteration
and Demolition Operations.
3. BS 5228, Part 1- Code of practice for basic information and
procedures for noise control.
4. BS 5228, Part 2- Guide to noise control legislation for
construction and demolition, including road construction and
maintenance.
5. BS 6187- Code of practice for demolition.
RADCARE - B01- King Fahd Road III-2/02225/9 Demolitions
B. All applicable local codes, regulations, etc of Authorities
having
Jurisdiction.
Note: Contractor shall note that he shall keep copies of all of the
referenced standards on the site and shall provide the Engineer
copy of the requested referenced standards as and when
requested.
1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A. Method Statement: Method statement for demolition and removal

including the sequence. Location of salvageable items. Relocation and
rerouting of existing services. Location and construction of barricades,
fences and temporary work. Safety procedures to be adopted,
checking and monitoring of procedures.
1.5 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform work in accordance with ANSI/ASSE A 10.6, NFPA 241, BS

6187 and BS 5228: Parts 1 and 2.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Demolition firm: Company specialising in performing this work with

minimum 10 years documented experience.
A. Conform to Local Municipality and Environmental Protection Agency

(EPA) codes and regulations of demolition of structures, safety of
adjacent structures, dust control, run off control, disposal of excess soil
at dump yards and burning of materials. The Contractor must refer to
Municipality Safety Department before commencement of any work.
B. Obtain required permits from authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures when discovering

hazardous or contaminated materials and dispose at approved waste
disposal areas and allow for all levelling at tip.
D. Give Employer three days or a period as agreed with Engineer for

written notice before disabling or disrupting building systems (fire, etc.)
(if any).
1.8 SCHEDULING
A. Produce a programme scheduling the start and finish date of the works
and the sequence of operations.
B. Schedule work to coincide with removal of unwanted materials form
site.
RADCARE - B01- King Fahd Road III-2/02225/ Demolitions

10
C. Describe demolition removal procedures and schedule.
D. Agree schedules with the Engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
(NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Provide, erect and maintain temporary barriers and security devices at

locations directed by the Engineer.
B. Locate, identify and protect services to remain.
C. Provide appropriate temporary signage, including exit signs.
D. Confirm prior to the demolition or removal of any items that all services
crossing the proposed Works and within the site are closed and
disconnected.
3.2 DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS
A. The use of explosives to break up structures is not permitted.
B. Conduct demolition in an orderly and careful manner to minimize

interference with adjacent occupancies and ensure a safe working
environment in and around the site.
C. Conduct operation with minimum interference to public or private

access. Maintain and protect egress and access into and around the
site at all times.
D. Obtain approval for executing work other than by hand from the
Engineer.
E. Obtain written permission from adjacent property owners and

regulatory authorities when demolition equipment traverse, infringe
upon or limit access to their property.
F. Sprinkle work with water to minimize dust. Provide hoses and water
connections for this purpose.
G. Take care not to over-water.
H. Disconnect and grub out all associated services, drains, ducts and the
like.
11
I. Cease operations immediately if adjacent structure(s), element(s)
appear to be in danger. Notify the Engineer and the authority having
jurisdiction. Do not resume operations until directed.
J. No accumulation of debris/ rubbish from demolitions will be permitted

either within or outside the project site.
K. Remove all unwanted debris /rubbish from site and dump at locations
approved by Local Municipality and include all cost of levelling.
L. Maintain adequate number of trucks/skips available.
M. Stock piled excavated material not to exceed 2.5 metres in height.
3.3 DEMOLITION
A. Disconnect, remove and cap and identify designated services within

demolition areas.
B. Carefully remove materials to be reinstalled or retained to prevent

damage. Store and protect.
C. Provide suitable and adequate support as approved by the Engineer

before demolition/dismantling or disassembling any portion of work.
D. Remove all debris to approved dumps.
E. Backfill areas excavated, open pits and holes caused as a result of

demolition, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
F. Rough grade and compact areas affected by demolition to maintain site

grades and contours as noted on the drawings.
G. Do not burn or bury materials on site. Leave site in clean condition.
H. Remove all temporary work as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION

12
SECTION 03335
ARCHITECTURAL SCREED
PART 1 GENERAL

Comply with all applicable requirements, standards and codes specified in FGI 2018
- Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care Facilities.
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies Architectural screed casted as floor finish or

substrate to other floor finishes.

related sections within the Project Specifications. It is not necessarily
comprehensive or complete and it is the contractor's responsibility to
ascertain all applicable sections required to understand the full Scope
of Works intended.
1. Section 03300 : Cast in Place Concrete
1.3 REFERENCES

1. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete.

2. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced
Concrete.
3. ACI 347 - Recommended Practice for Concrete
formwork.
4. ASTM C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete.
5. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement.
6. ASTMC-190 - Test Method for Tensile strength of
Hydraulic Cement Mortars.
7. ASTM C 256 - Test Method for Flexural strength of
RADCARE - B01- King Fahd Road III-2/03335/ Architectural Screed

13
8. ASTM C 1439 - Test Method for Compressive strength of
9. DIN 18353 - Contract Procedures for Building Works –
Part C: General Technical Specifications for
Building Works – Floor Screed Works.
10. DIN 18560 - Floor Screeds in Building Construction.
11. CP 202 - Code of Practice for Tile Flooring and Slab
Flooring.
12. CP 203 - Code of Practice for Sheet and Tile
Flooring.
13. CP 204 - Code of Practice for Insitu Floor Finishes.
14. BS EN 206-1 - Concrete, specification, performance,
production and conformity.
15. BS 8204 - Code of Practice for Screeds, Bases and In-
Situ Floorings.
16. BS EN 13318 - Screed material and floor screeds,
definitions.
B. All applicable local codes, regulations, etc of Authorities having

Jurisdiction.
requested.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data for the materials and products used in this section
for approval by the Engineer.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with Referenced Standards.
B. Acquire cement and aggregate from same source for all work.
C. Use only 1 brand of cement and admixtures unless otherwise approved

in writing by the Engineer.
D. Provide the Engineer with delivery ticket for each load of screed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cement
1. Type I Portland Cement: ASTM C150 unless noted otherwise.

14
B. Aggregate
1. ASTM C33, “Specifications for Concrete Aggregate”.
C. Reinforcement
1. 8mm thick welded wire mesh.
D. Water
1. Clear, clean, potable water complying with BS EN 1008.
2.2 CONCRETE MIX
A. Screed Type.
1. Screed as substrate for other floor finishes:

a. Lean concrete screed of atleast 25Mpa with a minimum
thickness of 50mm.
2. Screed as floor finish or with fluid applied coating as floor finish:
a. Bonded Lean concrete screed, crack free and shrink free
with strength of atleast 35Mpa with a minimum thickness
of 50mm.
2.3 REINFORCEMENT
A. Where shown on drawings.
B. Shall be atleast 8mm thick welded wire mesh unless noted otherwise
on drawings.
2.4 JOINT FILLERS
A. Refer Sections 03300 and Section 07900.
2.5 CURING MATERIALS
A. Curing material shall be fresh potable water as supplied by MOE-EW.

Fresh water shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 1008.
2.6 VAPOUR BARRIER/SEPARATION LAYER
Polyethilene sheet 0,3 mm thck, 100 mm coils overlapping, tape joining

and folding upwards for the total thickness of the floor underlayment
against structural walls, columns and partitions conforming to BS 6515
lapped 100mm on sides and ends.
2.7 NOISE INSULATION

Impact (footfall) noise insulation coating with adhesive selvage, made up of
PART 3 EXECUTION

15
3.1 MIXING
A. Plant batched and transit mixed.
1. Batch at a central plant in compliance with ASTM C94.
B. Hand Mixed
1. Hand mixing on site is not permitted.
3.2 SCREED PLACEMENT
A. Notify Engineer a minimum of 24 hours prior to placement.
B. Convey screed from a mixer to the forms as near final position as

practical in a manner which will prevent segregation or loss of
materials.
C. Place screed in bays of 3m to 4m width.
D. Immediately after placing, thoroughly compact and level screed.
E. Do not drop screed freely from higher than 4 feet above the surface of
being poured.
3.3 CURING
A. Commence curing and protection of screed immediately after placing,

as instructed by the Engineer. Curing shall be done by potable water
only.
3.4 CONCRETE REPAIR
A. For any repair of concrete, use products complying with BS EN 1504

(1-9) as applicable.
3.5 SCHEDULING/SEQUENCING
B. Coordinate with Engineers approved Construction Schedule.
END OF SECTION

16
SECTION 03521
LIGHT WEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE
(FOAM CONCRETE)
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES
A. Furnish all labour, materials, tools and equipment, and perform areas
not previously installed all services and operations necessary for the
complete supply and installation of light weight insulating concrete or
foam concrete as detailed and scheduled.
1. Roof Areas: Install light weight insulating concrete and provide

positive slope to roof drains to areas to receive roofing
membranes as specified.
2. Wet areas: For wet areas like Toilets, etc install light weight
insulating concrete and provide slope as required.
3. Thickness will be as shown on drawings and/or as required and
approved by the Engineer.

comprehensive or complete and it is the Contractor's responsibility to
of Works intended.
1. Division 7 : Thermal and Moisture Protection (as

applicable).
1.3 REFERENCES

1. ASTM E 119 - Standard test methods for Fire Tests of

RADCARE - B01- King Fahd Road III-2/03521/ Light Weight Insulating Concrete
17
Building Construction and Materials.
2. ASTM E 329 - Standard specification for Agencies
Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or
Testing.
3. ASTM C 1077 - Standard practice for Laboratories Testing
Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for use
in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory
Evaluation.
4. ASTM C 869 - Standard specification for Foaming Agents
used in making preformed foam for cellular
concrete.
5. ASTM C 332 - Standard specification for light weight
aggregates for insulating concrete.
6. ASTM C 150 - Standard specification for Portland cement.
7. ASTM C 138 - Standard test method for Density (unit
weight), yield and air content (Gravimetric)
of concrete.
8. ASTM C 495 - Standard test method for compressive
strength of light weight insulating concrete.
9. ASTM C 796 - Foaming Agents for use in producing
cellular concrete using preformed foam.

Jurisdiction.
Note: Contractor shall note that he shall keep copies of all of the referenced
standards on the site and shall provide the Engineer copy of the
requested referenced standards as and when requested.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, and details showing roof

slopes, lightweight concrete thicknesses, roof penetrations, roof
perimeter terminations and curbs, control and expansion joints, roof
drains and layout of roof top equipment.
C. Design Mixes: For each lightweight insulating concrete mix.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and

interpreting test results of the following for compliance with
requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current
materials.
E. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of
the following materials complies with requirements:
1. Cement
18
2. Aggregates
3. Foaming agents
4. Admixtures
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A. Light weight insulating concrete or foam concrete is formed by

entrapping air into prepared cement, sand (if required) slurry in the
shape of discontinued air bubbles to form a cellular structure
throughout the mass. The cellular structure significantly reduces the
thermal conductivity and density of insulating concrete resulting in a
lower dead load imposed on the structure.
1.6 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Light weight insulating concrete or foam concrete with required foaming

agents to provide a density of 600-800kg/m3 and compressive strength
of 2-4 N/mm2.
1.7 PRE INSTALLATION MEETING
A. Convene a pre installation meeting one (1) week prior to

commencement of this work to review the material selections,
installation procedures and co-ordination of the work with other trades.
The meeting shall be attended by the Contractor, Engineer and any
other Contractor or trade requiring co-ordination with this work.
1.8 MOCK-UP
A. Lay light weight insulating concrete or foam concrete for an area of 5

square metres along with control joints at places as directed by
Engineer. Co-ordinate work along with other disciplines, to have a final
finish. Approved mockup may remain as part of the final work subject
to acceptance by the Engineer.
1.9 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Co-ordinate and verify at the site all conditions affecting the work of this
section. Submit written notification to the Engineer documenting any
and all conditions which are at variance with those on the approved
shop drawings and the Contract Documents and which are detrimental
to the proper and timely installation of the concrete. The decision regarding
corrective measures shall be obtained from and approved by the Engineer.
Ensure the compatibility of existing and adjacent items in relationship to
this work.
B. Starting of work shall imply acceptance of existing conditions and
surfaces.
1.10 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Deliver all packaged materials to the site in original unopened

containers, clearly indicating manufacturer’s name, brand name and
19
other identifying information.
B. Store materials in a dry, well-ventilated location, off the ground and in

such a manner so as to prevent damage or intrusion of foreign matter.
All materials which, in the opinion of the Engineer, have become
damaged or otherwise unfit for use during delivery or storage shall be
replaced.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: Use only one brand of cement from one mill
throughout the work, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, as
per BS 12.
B. Fine Aggregate: Washed and cleaned natural sand.
C. Foaming agent: As recommended by the manufacturer.
D. Water: Clean, fresh and free of harmful matter such as oil, salts, acids
alkali, sewage, deleterious minerals or organic matter. Water shall be
tested in accordance with BS relevant standards.
E. Mixes:
1. Beds: 1 part cement to 3 parts sand (if required). The amount of

water shall not exceed 19 litres per 50kg bag of cement.
2. Air Entraining Agent: Shall be as per the recommendations of
manufacturer of lightweight aggregate.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 LIGHT WEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE
A. Mixing Concrete: Insulating concrete is mixed in the same equipment

and by similar methods to assure correct properties and adequate
yield.
B. Transit Mixing: When transit mixing, follow manufacturer’s instruction.
C. Air Entraining Agent: The use of the correct amount of air entraining
agent and the proper concentration will be as per manufacturer’s
instruction. The air entraining agent produces countless tiny air bubbles
in the concrete which reduces the density, increases the yield and
contributes to the insulation factor of the dry concrete. Air entrained
concrete is also more resistant to water absorption.
20
3.2 METHOD OF MIXING SUMMARY
A. Determine load of mixer.
B. Add correct quantity of water.
C. Add Air entraining agent plus cement and mix until slurry.
D. Mix for 2 - 5 mins.
E. Check for slump about 7” (18 cm) for mixes. If less, mix for a further 2
minutes and repeat check. Do not add extra water.
F. Discharge the mix.
3.3 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A. Generally:
1. Thoroughly clean and ensure that surfaces are dry and

structurally sound.
2. Mechanically hack surface to create bond if necessary.
3. Ensure if insulation and any other surface are fixed as per
manufacturer’s instruction.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Light Weight Insulating Concrete or Foam Concrete
1. To be laid in bays to thickness as shown on the drawings in one

layer and shall be trowelled finished.
2. Minimum thickness over insulation to be 50mm, with tolerance
of ±3.5mm, as measured with a 3m, straight placed at any
locations.
B. Joints:
1. Joints in structural floor should be continued through full depth

of concrete at same centres.
2. Control and construction joints at floor concrete to be in
accordance with Code of Practice.
C. Protection:
1. Allow no traffic or excessive vibration on concrete until; 4 days

after completion of laying and then only light traffic for a further
10 days.
2. Lay suitable protection in areas where other trades are working.
3. Work must be cured by applying curing compound in
accordance with manufacturer’s instruction and all precautions
must be taken for shrinkage.
21
3.5 CLEAN UP
A. Upon completion of insulating concrete, leave work in perfect condition.

As the work proceeds remove daily from the site all debris resulting
from the work of this section.
B. Protect adjacent surfaces from any damage or plugging of drains

caused by the work of this section.
C. The applicator shall remove all masking, protection, equipment,

materials and debris from the work area and storage areas and leave
those areas in clean, undamaged and acceptable condition.
END OF SECTION
22
SECTION 03543
SELF LEVELLING UNDERLAYMENT
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES
A. Furnish all labour, materials, plant, tools and equipment, and perform
all operations and services necessary for the complete installation of
the self levelling underlayment as detailed and scheduled (finishes
schedule) to areas as indicated on the drawings.
B. The work shall include but is not limited to:
1. Application of self levelling underlayment over screed sub bases

even if not shown on drawings to have a proper seamless level
flooring underneath floor finishes such as carpet, resilient/rubber,
and any other floor finish whose manufacturer recommends
application of self levelling underlayment.

of Works intended.
1. Section 03335 : Architectural Screed
1.3 REFERENCES

1. ASTM C109 Standard Test Method for Compressive

Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars
(Using 2-in. or [50-mm] Cube Specimens)
RADCARE - B01- King Fahd Road Self Levelling Underlayment

III-2/03543/
23
2. ASTM C580 Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength
and Modulus of Elasticity of Chemical-
Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic
Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes
3. ASTM C531 Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage
and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of
Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts,
Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer
Concretes
4. ASTM D 3931 Standard Test Method for Determining
Strength of Gap-Filling Adhesive Bonds in
Shear by Compression Loading
5. ASTM F1869 Standard Test Method for Measuring
Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete
Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride
6. ASTM F 2170 Standard Test Method for Determining
Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs
Using in situ Probes
7. BS EN 196-1 - Methods of testing Cement Determination of
strength.
8. BS EN 196-3 - Methods of testing Cement Determination of
setting time and soundness.
9. BS EN 196-6 - Methods of testing cement. Determination
of Fineness.
10. BS 8000-9 - Workmanship on Building Sites.
cementitious levelling screeds and wearing
screeds. Code of Practice.

Jurisdiction.
copy of the requested referenced standard as and when
requested.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals for Review.
1. Samples: Submit cured samples of specified system showing

final applied thickness, colour and texture.
2. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product literature and
specifications for all accessory items and any other data to verify
compliance with contract documents.
3. Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturers installations
instructions for all accessories including handling, storage,
priming, curing and environmental limitations and confirm that
III-2/03543/
24
copies have been issued to installer.
4. Manufacturers Certificates:
a. Verification: Submit certification in data sheet or letter
form that all the materials and accessories comply to
specifications and are recommended for the applications
shown.
b. Supplier: Provide written certification that all materials
and accessories of the system are from a single source
supplier.
A. Manufacturer: The product under this section shall be executed by a

firm that has specialised in the manufacture and having a minimum
experience of ten (10) years of this type of work.
B. Installers: The work of these sections shall be installed and finished by

experienced workmen with a minimum of ten (10) years of documented
experience.
C. The Contractor shall submit evidence of compliance with the above

requirements to the Engineer for approval.
D. Manufacturers Representative:
1. The materials manufacturer shall delegate a representative to

visit the work site at commencement of work.
1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A. Convene a pre-installation meeting two (2) weeks prior to the

commencement of this work to review the material selections,
installation procedures and co-ordination of the work with other trades.
The meeting shall be attended by the Contractor, the Engineer, and
any other Contractors whose work requires co-ordination with this
work.
1.7 MOCK-UP
A. Provide a mock-up to floor area for 10 square metre or a room, under

conditions similar to those during the actual placing, when self levelling
underlayment is applied. Approved mock-up may remain as part of the
work.
1.8 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Co-ordinate and verify at the site all factors affecting the work of this
section. Submit written notification to the Engineer documenting any
and all conditions which are at variance with those on the reviewed
shop drawings and the Contract Documents and which are detrimental
to the proper and timely installation of the system. The decision
regarding corrective measures shall be obtained from and approved by
the Engineer. Ensure the compatibility of existing and adjacent items in
relationship to this work.
III-2/03543/
25
B. Starting of work shall imply acceptance of existing conditions and
surfaces.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Be responsible for the proper scheduling of delivery and

installation of components all in accordance with the construction schedule
in ample time to avoid delay in job progress and for proper co-
ordination.
B. Deliver materials to Project site in original, factory-sealed, unopened

containers bearing manufacturer’s name and label intact and legible
with following information.
1. Name of material.
2. Manufacturer’s stock number and date of manufacture.
3. Material safety data sheet.
4. All other qualifying information.
C. Deliver bulk materials with a certification from the manufacturer stating

the name, type and grade of each product used. Furnish certificate
accompanying each load for each bulk product used in the Work.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide a warranty of five years, effective from the date of substantial

completion, against any defect or failure in the material or the
installation of the product of this section.
1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL
A. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for application and

curing under specific climate conditions.
B. Co-ordinate work with other trades to ensure adequate illumination,

ventilation, and dust-free environment during application and curing.
C. Protect adjoining surfaces not to be coated against damage or soiling.
D. Maintain work area in a neat and orderly condition, removing empty

containers, rags, and rubbish daily from the site.
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable codes, regulations,

ordinances, and laws.
PART 2 PRODUCTS

III-2/03543/
26
2.1 PRODUCTS
(NOT USED)
2.2 UNDERLAYMENTS
A. Hydraulic – Cement based, polymer-modified, self levelling product that

can be applied in minimum uniform thickness of 1/8 inch (3mm) and
that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
B. Cement Binder: ASTM C150, Portland cement, or hydraulic or blended

hydraulic cement as defined by ASTM C219.
C. Compressive Strength: Not less than 28 MPa at 28 days when tested

according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.
D. Underlayment Additive: Resilient-emulsion product of underlayment

manufacturer formulated for use with underlayment when applied to
substrate and conditions indicated.
E. Aggregate: Well graded, washed gravel, 3 to 6mm or coarse sand as

recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
F. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 21 oC.
G. Reinforcement: For underlayment applied to wood substrates, provide

galvanized metal lath or other corrosion-resistant reinforcement
recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer.
H. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing

for substrate conditions, and application indicated.
I. Corrosion: Resistant Coating recommended in writing by underlayment

manufacturer for metal substrates.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Thoroughly clean and ensure that surfaces are dry and structurally
sound.
B. If necessary mechanically hack surface to create bond if necessary.
C. The surface to receive the underlayment must be free from all traces of
loose material, laitance, oil, grease, etc. Surface must be dry saturated.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install underlayment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

III-2/03543/
27
B. Thickness shall be atleast 5mm and/or as dictated by the site
conditions and manufacturers recommendations.
C. Install as and upon the instruction of the Engineer.
3.3 APPLICATION – QUALITY CONTROL
A. At the start of the installation and periodically as work progresses,

provide the services of the manufacturer’s technical representative at
the job site as often as deemed necessary by the manufacturer to
advise on all phases of this work.
3.4 CLEAN UP
A. Upon completion of all self levelling underlayment leave work in perfect

condition. As the work proceeds remove from the site daily all debris
resulting from the work of this section.
B. The applicator shall remove all masking, protection, equipment,

materials and debris from the work area and storage areas and leave
those areas in clean, undamaged and acceptable condition.
END OF SECTION

III-2/03543/
28
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL

A. The Contractor shall become familiar with other sections of the

Specifications affecting work of this trade.
B. Furnish all labours, materials, plant, equipment and appliances and

perform all necessary operations required to execute the work of this
section.
C. Metal Fabrication work is defined as including any items shown on the

drawings and specified herein, fabricated from steel and iron shapes, plates,
bars pipes, tubes, casting and roll-framed shaped which are not a part of an
overall system specified in any other section of these Specifications.
D. This section also establishes requirements for metal fabrications,

including for cat ladders, non-ornamental handrails and balustrades for
escape staircase, chequered plate, gratings, etc.
E. Engineering design complete with calculations, preparation of shop

drawings, fabrication, erection of the item etc. as a stand alone or as an
integral member of another item.
F. Priming, painting, touchup and galvanizing, etc.
G. The Contractor shall provide all light metal or miscellaneous metal, shown
or implied by the drawings and required for the work, whether described
in this section or not.
A. This schedule is intended to be used as a helpful indication of the related

sections within the Project Specifications. It is not necessarily
comprehensive or complete and it is the contractor's responsibility to
ascertain all applicable sections required to understand the full Scope of
Works intended.
1. Section 03300 : Cast-in-place Concrete

2. Section 07900 : Joint Sealers
3. Section 09900 : Painting
RADCARE - B01- King Fahd Road III-2/05500/29 Metal Fabrications
1.3 REFERENCES

American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM A36 : Standard Specification for Carbon Structural

Steel.
2. ASTM A53 : Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black
and Hot-dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and
Seamless.
3. ASTM A123 : Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip
Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products.
4. ASTM A153 : Standard Specification for Zinc Coating
(Hot:Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
5. ASTM A283 : Standard Specification for Low and
Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel
Plates.
6. ASTM A307 : Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts
and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength.
7. ASTM A325 : Standard Specification for Structural Bolts,
Steel, Heat Treated 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile
Strength.
8. ASTM A27 : Standard Specification for Steel Castings,
Carbon for General Application.
9. ASTM A325 : Standard Specification for High-Strength Bolts
for Structural Steel Joints.
10. ASTM A500 : Standard Specification for Cold-Formed
Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural
Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
11. ASTM A501 : Standard specification for Hot-Formed Welded
and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
12. ASTM A653 : Standard Specification for steel Sheet, Zinc
Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc iron Alloy coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip process.
13. ASTM A801 : Standard Specification for Wrought iron cobalt
high magnetic saturation alloys.
14. ASTM B26 : Standard specification for Aluminium and
Aluminium-Alloy Sand Castings.

15. ASTM B85 : Standard Specification for Aluminium- All oy Die
Castings.
16. ASTM B177 : Standard Guide for Chromium Electrop lating
on Steel for Engineering Use.
Aluminium-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
18. ASTM B210 : Standard Specification for Aluminium and
Aluminium-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes.
Aluminium-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,
Profiles, and Tubes.
20. ASTM A666 : Stainless steel sheet, strip, plate and flat bar for
structural and architectural applications.
21. ASTM A167 : Specification for Stainless Steel and Heat-
Resisting Chromium – Nickel Steel plate Sheet
and strip.
22. ASTM A176 : Specification for Stainless Steel and Heat
Resisting Chromium Steel Plate, Sheet and
strip.
23. ASTM A264 : Specification for Stainless Steel Chromium
Nickel Steel clad plate Sheet and strip.
24. ASTM F593 : Standard Specification for Stainless Steel
Bolts, Hexcap Screws and Studs.
25. ASTM F594 : Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts.
American Welding Society:
1. AWS A2.4 : Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and

Nondestructive Examination.
2. AWS D1.1 : Structural Welding Code – Steel.
3. AWS D1.2 : Structural welding code – Aluminium.
4. AWS D1.3 : Structural welding code – Sheet Steel.
5. AWS D1.4 : Structural welding code – Reinforcing Steel.
6. AWS D1.6 : Structural welding code – Stainless Steel.
SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings:
1. SSPC – Steel Structures Painting Manual.

2. SSPC SP1 – Solvent Cleaning.
3. SSPC SP10 – Near-White Blast Cleaning.
4. SSPC Paint 15 – Steel Joist Shop Paint.
5. SSPC Paint 20 – Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I – Inorganic and Type
II- Organic).
6. SSPC Paint 25 – Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed Oil Primer for use
over Hand Cleaned Steel Type I and Type II.
NAAMM: National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.
a. Metal Finishes Manual.

b. Metal Stairs Manual.
c. Pipe Railing Manual.
d. Code of Standard Practice for the Architectural Metal Industry
(including Miscellaneous Iron).
e. Metal bar Grating Manual.
f. Heavy duty Metal Bar Grating Manual.
g. Welding Specifications for Fabrication of Steel, Aluminium and
Stainless Steel Bar Grating.
h. Metal Bar Grating Engineering Design Manual.
i. EN 1991 Code of practice for wind loads.
BS STANDARDS:
a. BS 5606 : Guide to accuracy in building.
b. BS 4190 : Specification for bolts, nuts and screws.
c. BS 3692 : Specifications for ISO Metric precision hexagon
bolt, nuts, screws.
d. BS 4183 : Machine Screws.
e. BS 4320 : Specification for metal washers for general
engineering purposes.
f. BS 4345 : Specification for Slotted Angles.
g. BS 4360 : Specification for weldable Structural Steel.

Jurisdiction.
referenced standards on the site and shall provide the Engineer copy
of the requested referenced standard as and when requested.
A. Produce fully detailed shop drawings, specifications, engineering

calculations, description of the system and installation method in accordance
with the contract documents. Submission shall indicate all dimensions,
details of construction, details of installation, relation and connections with
adjoining work, welds, reinforcement, fastenings, anchorages and shop and
site finishes.
B. Submit copies of calculations carried out and signed by a currently
registered, professional structural Engineer experienced (atleast 10years)
in design of similar works and licensed locally.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design, fabricate and install metal fabrications including all fixings and
accessories in accordance with the specifications and the design intent
indicated on the drawings.
B. Design metal fabrications to carry all dead loads including self weight
indicated and live loads in accordance with EN 1991. Design calculations
shall include all necessary factors of safety.
C. Design bar gratings in accordance with ANSI / NAAMM MBG 531 or

MBG 532.
D. Design ladders to withstand the effects of loads and stresses within the
limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3
E. Deflection criteria shall be L/360. The deflection due to live load of

structural members supporting floors shall not exceed 1/360 of the span.
F. Drift (lateral deflection) shall be limited to that allowable by the IBC

(International Building Code).
G. The Contractor shall prepare a fully coordinated design for the works and
ensure that all elements therein are mutually compatible. All work will not
be susceptible to vibration, fatigue, excessive deflection or instability.
H. The Contractor shall be responsible for all the design performance of

specialist supplied items for these fabrications.
I. All metal fabrications unless noted otherwise shall be of hot dip

galvanized steel as per ASTM A123.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, “Structural Welding Code-Steel”.

2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, “Structural Welding Code-Aluminium”
3. AWS D1.6, “Structural Welding Code-Stainless Steel”.
B. Prepare Shop Drawings under direct supervision of a Professional

Structural Engineer licenced locally and experienced in design of similar
work. The said Engineer shall be experienced in designing similar
items for atleast ten (10) years.
C. Manufacturer: Company specialising in metal sections and sheet
profiles and is to have a minimum of 5 years proven and continuous
experience.
D. Installer: Company specialising in fixing metal sections and sheet

profiles and is to have a minimum of 5 years proven and continuous
experience.
E. Welders Certificates: Submit Documents, certifying welders employed

on the work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Components and installation are to be in accordance with local

authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Components and installation are to follow current ADA and
ICC/ANSI A117.1 guidelines.
B. Certifications:
1. Furnish certification that all components and fittings are

furnished by the same manufacturer or approved by the primary
component manufacturer.
2. Furnish certification that components were installed in
accordance to the manufacturer’s engineering data to meet the
designed loads.
C. Pre-Installation Meeting:
1. Prior to the beginning of work, conduct a pre-job conference at

the job site.
2. Provide seven calendar days advance written notice ensuring
the attendance by competent authorized representatives of the
fabricator, building owner’s representative, Engineer and
subcontractors whose work interfaces with the work of this
section.
3. Review the specifications to determine any potential problems,
changes, scheduling, unique job site conditions, installation
requirements and procedures and any other information
pertinent to the installation.
4. Record the results of the conference and furnish copies to all
participants.
D. Include all inspections and non destructive testing necessary to verify

materials and workmanship. As a minimum this shall include:
1. Paint Finishes: Industry standard testing to samples selected in

accordance with BS 6001: Part 1 General Inspection Level 2.
2. Metal Materials: Visual inspections of all edges of plate, rolled or
folded shapes for material defects.
3. Visual inspection on all bolted connections after assembly.
4. Check for fit and tightness on 5% connections, generally.
5. Check for tightness/torque on 100% of structural bolted
connections.
6. Visual inspection of all welds to BS 5289.

7. Magnetic particle testing to BS 6072, with final pass only for a
minimum of:
a. 100% of full penetration welds.
b. 100% of fillet welds in tension.
c. 20% of partial penetration welds.
d. 10% of miscellaneous fillet welds
A. Deliver materials to the job site in good condition and properly

protected against damage to finished surfaces.
B. Storage on Site:
1. Store material in a location and in a manner to avoid damage.

Stacking shall be done in a way, which will prevent bending.
2. Store material in a clean, dry location away from uncured

concrete and masonry. Cover with waterproof paper, tarpaulin,
or polyethylene sheeting in a manner that will permit circulation
of air inside the covering.
3. Keep handling on site to a minimum. Exercise particular care to

avoid damage to finishes of material.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall provide a warranty of five (5) years against any defects
in materials and workmanship of the products of this section.
B. Ten (10) years warranty on coatings all types of coatings except High
performance powder coating. For High performance powder coating provide
twenty five (25) years warranty.
C. All warranties shall be effective from the date of substantial completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS – METAL

A. Structural Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36.
B. Steel Plate for Cold-Forming: ASTM A283 Grade C.
C. Hot-Rolled Steel Bars (including bar-size shapes): ASTM A575 (Merchant

Quality) or ASTM A 576 (Special Quality), Quality and Grade as selected
by fabricator, and ASTM A29.
D. Structural Steel Tubing, square and rectangular shapes ASTM A500

Grade B.

E. Cold-Finished Steel bars: ASTM A108, and ASTM A29.
F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E, F or S at fabricator’s option, Grade A,

black finish unless shown or specified as galvanized, standard weight
(Schedule 40) unless otherwise shown or specified.
G. Hot-Formed Rectangular Steel Tubing: ASTM A501, butt welded, cold-

finished and stress relieved.
H. Cold-Drawn Steel Tubing: ASTM A512, sunk drawn, butt welded, cold-
finished and stress relieved.
I. Steel bars and bar size shapes: ASTM A306, grade 65 or ASTM A36.
J. Grey Iron Castings: ASTM A48, Class 30B.
K. Cold rolled Carbon Steel Sheets ASTM A336
L. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A47, Grade as selected.
M. Galvanized Carbon Steel Sheets: ASTM A653.
N. Steel Sheet for Cold-Forming: ASTM A569 and ASTM A568.
O. Aluminium Alloy 6063-T6 confirming to ASTM B221 for extrusions and

alloy 6061-T6 confirming to ASTM B209 for sheets.
P. Wrought Iron: ASTM A 801.
Q. Stainless steel marine Grade 316 conforming to all relevant codes.
R. Stainless Steel plate, Sheet and strip :ASTM A167, Type 304.
S. Stainless steel Bars and shapes : ASTM A276, Type 304.
T. Galvanization – ASTM A123, ASTM A153, ASTM A653.
U. Steel Structures painting – SSPC manual
V. Zinc rich primers – SSPC paint 20.
W. Welding for all the above as per AWS Standards.
2.2 FASTENERS AND ANCHORAGE MATERIALS
A. General: Fasteners provided for exterior use, or where embedded in

exterior walls, floors or roofs shall be zinc coated complying with ASTM
A153.
B. Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws: ASTM F593, Type 304.
C. Stainless Steel Nuts: ASTM F594, Type 304.
D. Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 307, Grade A or ASTM A325.

E. Machine Screws: ASTM A545.
F. Expansion bolts: Toothed steel or lead shield expansion devices of the

type and size shown, with galvanized bolts, except do not use lead shield
bolts for overhead anchorage.
G. Lag Bolts: FS FF-B-561, type and grade as required.
H. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, type and class as required.
I. Washers: Carbon Steel; plain, round complying with FS FF-W-92; locking,

helical spring complying with FS FF-W-84.
J. Power Driven Anchors: Type and size as shown or, if not shown, comply
with manufacturer's standards. Use only devices and tools which comply
with ANSI A10.3. Do not use as suspension member anchor.
K. All fixings to concrete or masonry shall be of expanding anchor or cast-

in/built-in devices of approved type.
L. Manufacturer's details and references for expanding bolts shall be

submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer for review.
M. All fixings to metal stud partitions shall be as recommended by metal stud

manufacturer.
N. All screws and other fastenings shall be selected to prevent galvanic

action with the components fastened. Where possible, fixings shall be
concealed. However, where exposed in finished surfaces, they shall be
flush with adjacent surfaces. Use flat-head countersunk unless otherwise
shown.
O. Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint or preformed dielectric

separators to prevent galvanic action.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Grout: Ready mixed, non-metallic high strength controlled expansion

grout of flowable consistency, conforming to ASTM C1107 with minimum
compressive strength of 8,000 pounds per square inch (55.2MPa) at 28
days.
B. Metal paste filler: 2 component epoxy, high strength, structural adhesive

putty.
C. Liquid zinc coating, for touch-up of welds, scratches, and abrasions in

galvanized steel: Galvanic Zinc-rich coating containing 95 percent metallic
zinc, by weight in the dried film; recognized under the Component
Program of Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc as an equivalent to hot-dip
galvanizing; conforming to FS DOD-P-22035A (formally MIL-P-21035A)
for repair of hot-dip galvanizing and meeting the requirements of MIL-P-
26915A USAF specification for Zinc-rich Paints.
2.4 FABRICATION – GENERAL
A. Sizes of supporting steelwork shall be as required.
B. Include supplementary parts necessary to complete metal fabrication not

specifically shown or specified.
C. Verify measurements and dimensions at site and co-operate in the co-

ordination and programming of the work of this section with the work of
other related trades so as not to delay the progress.
D. Metals shall be free from warps, buckles, creases, holes and other
defects that would impair strength, durability or appearance and shall be
of best commercial quality for the purpose required. All items shall be true
to details, clean, straight, with sharply defined profiles and smooth finish
surfaces.
E. Fabricate metalwork units to sizes, shapes and profiles required. Cut, drill
and tap as required for fixing to supports or structure.
F. Hotdip galvanize metal work only after they are cut to required sizes. Do
not cut metal work once it is galvanized.
G. Metalwork shall be formed plumb, true and level for anchorage, and be
provided with suitable anchors, expansion bolts, or other anchoring
devices shown or required to provide support for intended use. Furnish
such metalwork in ample time for setting and securing in place.
H. Fabricate the work as necessary for performance requirements, and for

support to the structure. Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint
or preformed dielectric separators which will prevent corrosion.
I. Make threaded connections up tight.
J. Carefully fit and match all work with continuity of line and design, using
rigidly secured tight and even joints unless otherwise shown.
K. Weld with electrodes and by methods recommended by manufacturer of

material being welded, and in accordance with appropriate British
Standards. Use only methods which will avoid distortion of exposed
faces. Make joints as strong and rigid as adjoining sections. Joints shall
be milled to a close fit. Corner joints shall be coped or mitered, well
formed and in true alignment. Joints exposed to the weather shall be
formed and fabricated to exclude water. Make welds continuous along entire
line of contact. Grind exposed welds flush and smooth to match and
blend with adjoining surfaces. Grind using clean wheels and compounds
which are free of iron and iron compounds.
L. Castings shall be sound and free from warp or defects that impair
strength and appearance. Exposed surfaces shall have a smooth finish
and sharp well defined lines and arises. Joints shall be milled to a close
fit.
2.5 FABRICATION-SPECIFIC ITEMS

A. Steel Pipe Railings, Handrails and Guardrails: Fabricate pipe railings,
handrails and guardrails to comply with requirements indicated for design,
dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of
pipe, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that required to
support structural loads.
1. Interconnect railing, handrails and guardrails members by butt-
welding or welding with internal connectors, at fabricator's option,
unless otherwise indicated. At tee and cross intersections, notch
ends of intersecting members to fit contour of pipe to which end is
joined and weld all around.
2. Form changes in direction of railing members by bending. Form
simple and compound curves by bending pipe in jigs to produce
uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required;
maintain cylindrical cross-section of pipe throughout the entire
bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming
exposed surfaces of pipe.
3. The Contractor shall provide expansion joints at intervals not to
exceed 12m unless otherwise shown on the drawings. The
Contractor shall provide slip joints with internal sleeves extending
50mm minimum beyond joint each side. Fasten internal sleeve
securely to one side without exposed fasteners. Locate joints
within 150mm of posts as shown on the drawings. If required to
accommodate expansion and contraction, provide pressure relief
holes at bottom ends of pipe in concealed locations.
4. The Contractor shall provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted
handrails, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Close exposed ends of pipe by welding 5 mm thick steel plate in
place or by use of prefabricated fittings, except where clearance of
end of pipe and adjoining wall surface is 6 mm or less.
6. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: The Contractor shall
provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous
fittings, and anchors for interconnections of pipe and attachment of
railings and handrails to other work. Furnish inserts and other
anchorage devices for connecting railings and handrails to
concrete or masonry work.
7. For railing posts set in concrete fabricate sleeves from steel pipe
not less than 150 mm long and with an inside diameter not less
than 13 mm greater than the outside diameter of post, with steel
plate closure welded to bottom of sleeve. The Contractor shall
provide friction fit, removable covers designed to keep sleeves
clean and hold top edge of sleeve 13 mm below finished surface of
concrete.
8. Fillers: The Contractor shall provide steel sheet or plate fillers of
thickness and size indicated or required to support structural loads
of handrails where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through
wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish
thicknesses. Size fillers to produce adequate bearing to prevent
bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate.
B. Cat Ladders: The Contractor shall fabricate ladders for the locations
shown on the drawings, with dimensions, spacings, details and
anchorages as indicated. The Contractor shall provide hot dipped
galvanized steel ladders and/or stainless steel type 316L/316M and/or
aluminium ladders all as shown on the drawings and as specified,
complete with supporting brackets, stringers, rungs and cage where
shown on the drawings or in any case if the ladder is more than 3000mm
high.
1. Extend side rails above top rung and return rails to wall or
structure unless other secure handholds are provided. If the
adjacent structure does not extend above the top rung, goose-
neck the extended rails back to the structure to provide secure ladder
access.
2. The Contractor shall provide non-slip surface on top of each rung,
either by coating the rung with aluminum oxide granules set in
epoxy resin adhesive, or by using a type of manufactured rung
which is filled with aluminum oxide grout.
3. Cat ladders shown as retractable on drawings shall be fabricated
accordingly with heavy duty corrosion resistant (for external
applications) sliding mechanism to enable smooth sliding and
retraction and with pad lock facility to prevent unauthorized use, all
as approved on shop drawings.
Cat ladder for all water borne structures to be submerged in water shall
be stainless steel type 316M only.
C. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: The Contractor shall provide steel

framing and supports for applications indicated or which are not a part of
structural steel framework, as required to complete work. Fabricate units
to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive adjacent
other construction retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from
structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded construction
using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive
hardware, hangers, and similar items. Equip units with integrally welded
anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry. Furnish
inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed.
Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors 600 mm on center and the

Contractor shall provide minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps
32mm wide x 6mm thick x 200mm long. Galvanize miscellaneous framing
and supports in exterior locations.
D. Lintels:
1. Provide lintels 300 mm (12 inches) longer than masonry openings.

Where lintel abuts column, provide structural clip connection.
2. Lintels occurring in exterior walls shall be galvanized in
conformance with the requirements of ASTM A 123.
E. Trench Cover: Provide trench cover in 6mm thick Aluminium or

galvanized chequered plate all as noted on drawings. Cut steel
chequered plates to required sizes before galvanization. Do not cut any
galvanized chequered plates. Provide frames and sub frames as required
fabricated in hot dip galvanized steel angles and channels etc. Submit
structural calculations for the adequacy of framing and sub framing for
approval of Engineer prior to fabrication and erection.
F. Miscellaneous Steel Trim: The Contractor shall provide shapes and sizes
indicated for profiles shown on the drawings. Unless otherwise indicated,
fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars, with
continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed
field splices wherever possible. The Contractor shall provide cutouts, fittings,
and anchorages as required for coordination of assembly and installation
with other work. Metal trims shall be stainless steel (type
316L), galvanized, mill finished aluminium, etc as noted on drawings.
G. Access Panels/Hatches: Access panels/hatches shall be atleast 2mm

thick made from galvanized steel/stainless steel type 316L and designed
to support light duty loads (15 KN/m2) unless noted otherwise or required
more by the referenced standards and shall have the following features:
1. Cover tops shall be hinged

2. spring assisted lift
3. “hold-open” stay to prevent accidental closing
4. Slam Latch
5. Sealing Gaskets
All access hatches to water tanks or any other water borne enclosures
shall be stainless steel type 316L only.
H. Edge Angles: The Contractor shall provide hot dip galvanized steel and/or
stainless steel edge angles as shown on the drawings, with welded-on
strap anchors 600 mm on centers. The Contractor shall provide angles in
as long lengths as possible. Miter and weld corners and provide splice
plates for alignment between sections.
I. Gratings: The Contractor shall provide gratings, including supporting

framing and supports. The Contractor shall provide gratings of electro-
pressure welded type construction with all welds, cuts & bends pickled
and pacified, rectangular pattern accurately fabricated free from warps,
twists or other defects affecting their serviceability or appearance.
Fabricate gratings from metal bars and frames with material indicated on the
Contract Drawings as per NAAMM’s metal bar grating manual.
Material shall comply with reference standards. The Contractor shall
provide saddle clip fasteners as required to fasten gratings to each steel
support. Gratings for any water borne enclosure shall be stainless steel
type 316L only.
J. Edge Protectors, Transition and divider Strips: Provide edge protectors,

transition and divider strips as required on the project. Provide stainless

steel (type 316L) transition and divider strips of a thickness of atleast
3mm unless noted more on drawings at all transitions of floor finishes and
at all locations indicated for dividers strips.
(NOT USED)
K. Framed Aluminium Metal Screen: Fabricate structurally framed aluminium

metal screen with densely perforated panel sheet to the dimensions and
pattern shown on drawings. Fabricate frame with joints tightly fit and
secured. The perforated metal panel sheet shall be attached to the frame
as per the method approved by the Engineer. When installed on external
façade the framed metal screen shall comply with all requirements of BS
EN 1991-1-4, shall withstand a wind speed of 45 m/sec and shall be free
from any uplift. Submit design calculations for approval. The finish shall
be high performance powder coating complying with AAMA 2604 and
2.6 FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A. Squareness: 3mm maximum difference in diagonal measurements.

B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1.5mm.
C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1.5mm.
D. Maximum Bow: 3mm in 1.2m.
E. Maximum Deviation from Plane: 1.5mm in 1.2m.
2.7 SHOP PAINTING, GENERAL
A. Clean, treat and paint metal fabrications work in the shop prior to delivery
to the project site, except for work which has been hot-dip galvanized
after fabrication. Include all surfaces, inside and out, whether exposed or
concealed in the construction.
A. Clean by “Solvent Cleaning” method specified in SSPC-SP 1-63, followed

by “Hand Tool Cleaning” by method specified in SPC-SP 2-63 or “Power
Tool Cleaning” by method specified in SSPC-SP 8-63 to remove loose
mill scale and rust. “Pickle” by methods specified in SSPC-SP 8-63 to
remove all remaining mill scale and rust. Grind rough surfaces as may be
necessary to provide smooth metal surfaces. Tool cleaning and pickling
may be omitted for work fabricated from cold-rolled or old-finished stock
and from castings, provided the surfaces are not heavily rusted.
B. Apply pre-treatment to inhibit corrosion and improved paint adhesion, by

methods specified in SSPC-PT 2-64 for “Cold Phosphate” treatment.
2.9 FINISHES (MILD STEEL AND GALVANIZED STEEL)

A. Application shall be in strict conformance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Substrate preparation requirements as per
manufacturer’s instructions shall be fully complied.
B. Finish Systems:
Paint System (For Mild Steel)

Description: Epoxy - Polyurethane System
Type : Epoxy primer/ Polyurethane topcoat
Surface(s) : Mild Steel
Preparation : Blast cleaning to Sa 2.5 for Mild Steel
Initial Coats : Stripe coating and, One full coat of two pack epoxy
primer @ 100 microns as a primer ( Solids % by
volume : >48, Mixing ratio: 4 : 1)
Intermediate One full coat of two pack epoxy primer @125
microns as an intermediate coat.
(Solids % by volume >48 Mixing ratio 4:1)
Finishing Coats: Two coats of polyurethane topcoat each @50
microns (Solids % by volume: >48, Mixing ratio 4:1)
Paint Systems (G.I Surfaces)
Description: Epoxy – Polyurethane System
Type Epoxy primer / Polyurethane topcoat
Surface(s): Galvanized Steel
Preparation: Blast cleaning to Sa 2.5
Initial Coats: Stripe coating and, one full coat of two pack epoxy
primer @125 microns as a primer (Solids % by
volume: >48, Mixing ratio 4:1)
Finishing Coats: Two coats of polyurethane topcoat each @50
microns (Solids % by volume: >48, Mixing ratio 4:1)
C. Time between coatings shall be as per manufacturers instructions.
D. Use spray application for painting. The minimum thickness shall be

maintained on all corners, edges and ends of pieces. Do not paint
outdoors in rainy and dusty weather.
E. Where powder coating is noted as finish on drawings, provide high

performance powder coating as per AAMA 2604.
F. For materials/items to receive high performance powder coating as per

AAMA 2604 and galvanization. Contractor shall coordinate with both the
applicators of powder coating and galvanization to ensure that the
galvanized surface is prepared for compatibility to receive powder
coating.

2.10 FINISHES (OTHER MATERIALS – UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE
ELSEWHERE IN THE DOCUMENTS)
A. Stainless Steel : Brushed Satin
B. Aluminium : High performance powder coating as per

AAMA 2604.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected and are acceptable.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Set metal fabrication work accurately in location, alignment and elevation,

plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and
levels.
B. Anchor securely as shown or as required for the intended use, using

concealed anchors wherever possible. Fastenings to wooden plugs will
not be permitted. Drill holes for bolts to the exact diameter of the bolts,
using a rotary drill for concrete and a percussion drill for masonry.
C. Provide for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until

completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.
D. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.
E. Fastenings should be tightened to ensure that even pressure is applied to

the sealing washers and that the washers are not damaged. Sealing
washers should neither distort nor spread and should be soft enough to
seal without application of high pressure and thick enough to
accommodate misalignment. Sealing washers to fit tight to the shaft of the
fastener to prevent water penetration.
F. Take all measurements required on site. Check measurements, compare

dimensions and other data with various trades installing adjoining work to
assure proper co-ordination.
G. Where pipe sleeves are used to support miscellaneous iron work, anchor
sleeve securely to supporting concrete or structure to provide rigid
support. Pipe sleeves shall be of galvanized steel of size shown and
adequate to meet the requirements.
H. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints.

Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot
be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind joints smooth
and touch up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of
exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and
are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.
I. Deliver items which are to be built into the work of other sections in time
so as not to delay the progress of work.
J. Leave work exposed to view clean, smooth and neatly finished.
K. All members shall be fitted to provide neat, tight and secure joints.
3.3 HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Deliver fabricated units and component parts to site, completely identified

in accordance with assembly diagrams prepared for this work. Store in
accordance with manufacturers instructions, above ground, properly
protected from the weather and construction activities.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Leave all work clean following installation. The Contractor shall be

responsible for protecting the completed work from excessive dirt, misuse
and damage during other construction activity. Final cleaning of the metal
fabrications shall be by the Contractor.
B. Any damage shall be repaired and parts replaced, including repairs to

adjacent work damaged in connection with work of this section.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 05700
ORNAMENTAL METAL WORKS
PART 1 GENERAL

A. This section includes Design, fabrication and Installation of all

ornamental metal works including Railing systems for ornamental
staircases, stainless steel divider strips, skirting, etc.

of Works intended.
1. Section 05500 : Metal Fabrications

2. Section 08800 : Glass and Glazing
1.3 REFERENCES

1. ASTM A167 - Specification for stainless steel and Heat

Resisting Chromium, Nickel Steel plate, Sheet
Strip.
2. ASTM A240 - Standard specification for chromium nickel
stainless steel plate, steel and strip for
pressure vessels and for General
Applications.
3. ASTM A 269 - Specification for Seamless and Welded
Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General
Service.
III-2/05800/ Expansion Joint Cover

RADCARE - B01- King Fahd Road 10 Assemblies
4. ASTM A 276 - Specification for Stainless Steel and Heat
resisting steel bars and shapes.
5. ASTM A312 - Specification for seamless, welded and
heavily cold worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
pipes.
6. ASTM A666 - Specification for Annealed or Cold Worked
Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, plate and
flat bar.
7. ASTM A790 - Specification for seamless and welded
Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel pipe.
8. ASTM A743 - Standard Specification for Corrosion resistant
Iron Chromium, Iron Chromium Nickel, and
Nickel base Alloy Castings for General
Application.
9. ASTM A801 - Standard specification for wrought iron cobalt
high magnetic saturation alloys.
10. ASTM B 36 - Standard Specification for Brass Plate Sheet,
Strip and Rolled Bar.
11. ASTM B43 - Standard Specification for Standard sizes of
Seamless Red Brass Pipe.
12. ASTM B135 - Standard Specification for Seamless Brass
Tube.
13. ASTM B587 - Standard Specification for Welded Brass
Tube.
14. ASTM B455 - Standard Specification for Copper-Zinc lead
alloy (leaded brass) extruded shapes.
15. ASTM B584 - Specification for Copper Alloy Sand castings
for General Applications.
16. ASTM A 801 - Standard Specification for wrought Iron –
cobalt high magnetic saturation alloys.
17. ASTM G 157 - Standard Guide for evaluating the corrosion
properties of wrought iron and nickel based
corrosion resistant alloys for the chemical
process industries.
18. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat treated Flat
Glass.
19. ASTM E894 - Standard Test Methods for Anchorage of
Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails
for Building.
20. ASTM E935 - Standard Test Methods for performance of
Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails
for Buildings.

21. ASTM E985 - Specification for Permanent Metal Railing
Systems and Rails for Buildings.
22. BS 5395-1 - Stairs, ladders and walkways. Code of
practice for the design, construction and
maintenance of straight stairs and winders.
23. BS 3828 - Specification for crystal glass.
24. BS 2649-3 - Methods for analysis of glass. Glasses of the
potassium oxide – lead oxide – silica type.
25. BS 5395-2 - Stairs, ladders and walkways. Code of
practice for the design of helical and spiral
stairs.
26. BS EN 1991-1-1 Eurocode 1. Actions on structures. General
actions. Densities, self-weight, imposed
loads for buildings
27. BS EN 1991-1-7 Eurocode 1. Actions on structures. General
actions. Accidental actions
28. MIL-P-1144 - Pipe, Corrosion Resistant, Stainless Steel,
Seamless or Welded.
29. NAAMM - Metal Finishes Manual.
30. NAAMM - Metal Stairs Manual.
31. NAAMM - Pipe Railing Manual.
32. NAAMM - Code of Standard Practice for the
Architectural Metal Industry (Including
Miscellaneous Iron).
33. NAAMM - Metal Bar Grating Manual.
34. NAAMM - Heavy duty Metal bar Grating Manual.
35. NAAMM - Welding Specifications for Fabrication of
Steel, Aluminium and Stainless Steel Bar
Grating.
36. NAAMM - Metal Bar Grating Engineering Design
Manual.
37. CPSC16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing
Material.
38. National Ornamental and Miscellaneous Metals Association
(NOMMA) – Metal Rail Manual and Metal Finishes Manual.
39. Natural Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 101 Life Safety
Code.
40. Copper, Brass and Bronze Design handbook for Architectural
Applications (Copper Development Association).
41. Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines
(ADAAG).
Jurisdiction.
Note: Contractor shall note that he shall keep copies of all the
copy of the requested standard immediately upon request.
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design, fabricate and install all works of this section in accordance with
the specifications and the design intent indicated on the drawings and as
per applicable parts of the most stringent of the referenced standards.
B. Design railing systems to carry all dead loads including self weight
indicated and live loads in accordance with BS 6399 Part 1 and BS EN
1991. Design calculations shall include all necessary factors of safety.
C. Deflection criteria shall be L/360 for items subjected to imposed loads,

unless more stringent requirements are given in the codes.
D. Drift (lateral deflection) shall be limited to that allowable by the IBC

(International Building Code).
E. Design ornamental bar gratings in accordance with ANSI/NAAMM MBG

531 or MBG 532 as required and applicable.
A. Strength: The work shall rigidly support all specified imposed load
without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the material
or the specified deflection and without distortion. Lifting points shall
withstand not less than 1.5 times the weight of the item.
B. Movement: The work shall withstand all movement and forces resulting
from temperature changes, including differential rates of movement
between components, and those imposed by sway and other
movement of the building structure.
A. Product data for mechanically connected railings and components,

grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
B. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of railing systems

including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, materials,
finishes, connection and joining methods and the relationship to
adjoining work.
C. Samples for initial selection in the form of short sections of railing or flat
sheet metal samples showing available mechanical finishes.
D. Samples for verification of each type of exposed finish required,
prepared on components indicated below that are of the same
thickness and metal indicated for final unit of Work. Where finishes involve,
normal colour and texture variations, include sample sets showing
the full range of variations expected.
1. 1500mm long sections of each distinctly different linear railing

member including handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters.
2. Fittings and brackets.
3. Assembled sample of railing system, made from full-size
components, including top rail, post, handrail, and infill.
E. Submit copies of calculations carried out and signed by a currently

registered, Professional Structural Engineer experienced (atleast 10 years)
in design of similar works and licenced locally.
F. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Where Railing systems are indicated to fit to

other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by
accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded
measurements on shop drawings for approval. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Prepare Shop Drawings under direct supervision of a Professional

Structural Engineer experienced in design of similar work. The said Engineer
shall be experienced in designing similar items for atleast 10 years.
B. Manufacturer: Company specialising in metal sections and sheet profiles

and is to have a minimum of 5 years proven and continuous experience.
C. Installer: Company specialising in fixing metal sections and sheet profiles

and is to have a minimum of 5 years proven and continuous experience.
D. Welders Certificates: Submit Documents, certifying welders employed on

the work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Components and installation are to be in accordance with local

authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Components and installation are to follow current ADA and
ICC/ANSI A117.1 guidelines.
B. Certifications:
1. Furnish certification that all components and fittings are

furnished by the same manufacturer or approved by the primary
component manufacturer.
2. Furnish certification that components were installed in
accordance to the manufacturer’s engineering data to meet the
designed loads.
C. Pre-Installation Meeting:
1. Prior to the beginning of work, conduct a pre-job conference at

the job site.
2. Provide seven calendar days advance written notice ensuring
the attendance by competent authorized representatives of the
fabricator, building owner’s representative, Engineer and
subcontractors whose work interfaces with the work of this
section.
3. Review the specifications to determine any potential problems,
changes, scheduling, unique job site conditions, installation
requirements and procedures and any other information
pertinent to the installation.
4. Record the results of the conference and furnish copies to all
participants.
D. Include all inspections and non destructive testing necessary to verify

materials and workmanship. As a minimum this shall include:
1. Paint Finishes: Industry standard testing to samples selected in

accordance with BS 6001: Part 1 General Inspection Level 2.
2. Metal Materials: Visual inspections of all edges of plate, rolled or
folded shapes for material defects.
3. Visual inspection on all bolted connections after assembly.
4. Check for fit and tightness on 5% connections, generally.
5. Check for tightness/torque on 100% of structural bolted
connections.
6. Visual inspection of all welds to BS 5289.
7. Magnetic particle testing to BS 6072, with final pass only for a
minimum of:
a. 100% of full penetration welds.
b. 100% of fillet welds in tension.
c. 20% of partial penetration welds.
d. 10% of miscellaneous fillet welds.
A. Deliver materials to the job site in good condition and properly

protected against damage to finished surfaces.
B. Storage on Site:
1. Store material in a location and in a manner to avoid damage.

Stacking shall be done in a way, which will prevent bending.
2. Store material in a clean, dry location away from uncured
concrete and masonry. Cover with waterproof paper, tarpaulin,
or polyethylene sheeting in a manner that will permit circulation
of air inside the covering.
3. Keep handling on site to a minimum. Exercise particular care to
avoid damage to finishes of material.
1.11 MOCK UP
A. Prepare a mockup for each item of this section as instructed by the

Engineer for his approval. Approved mockups subject to acceptance by
the Engineer may be incorporated in the final works.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Submit a five (5) years warranty for the repair/replacement of any

defects in the material, fabrication and installation of any item of the
works of this section from the date of substantial completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: Type 316L
1. Tubing : ASTM A269

2. Plate and Sheet : ASTM A 240
3. Bars and Shapes : ASTM A 276
4. Castings : ASTM A 743
B. Glass
1. 12mm thick laminated safety glass.
2.2 RAILING SYSTEMS
A. Materials shall conform to 2.1 above.
B. Rails and Posts: Fabricate rails and posts to the dimensions shown on
the drawing. All pipes for the fabrication of rails and posts shall be
atleast schedule 40. Custom fabricate rails and posts as per the design
and Architectural intent shown on the drawings complying with the
most stringent of the referenced standards.
C. Fittings: All fittings shall be cast alloy to best match finish of the
handrail alloy.
D. Brackets: All Brackets shall be cast alloy to best match finish of the
handrail alloy.
2.3 DIVIDER STRIPS & SS SKIRTING
A. Thickness for divider strips unless noted on drawings shall be atleast

3mm.
B. Thickness for skirting, etc, where not noted on drawings shall be

atleast 1mm.
C. All stainless steel shall be Type 316L.
2.4 WELDING MATERIALS AND FASTENERS
A. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Provide type and alloy of filler
metal and electrodes as recommended by the manufacturer and
complying to AWS standards and as required for colour match,
strength, and compatibility in fabricated items.
B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select

fasteners of the type, grade, and class required to produce connections
that are suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction
indicated and capable of withstanding design loadings.
C. For railings and fittings, use plated fasteners complying with British
Standards.
1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing

components and their attachment to other work, except where
D. For stainless steel railing use stainless steel fasteners and for brass
handrail use brass fasteners.
E. To the extent possible use concealed type fasteners.
2.5 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
A. Non-shrink, Non-metallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, non-

staining, non-corrosive, non-gaseous grout complying with British
Standards. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer
for interior and exterior applications.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. The required sizes for ornamental metalwork components and the

profile requirements shall be as shown on the drawings and/or as approved
on the shop drawings.
B. Fabricate ornamental metalwork products as shown on approved shop

drawings.
C. Co-ordinate with manufacturers of adjoining work to avoid delays to the

work. Where practical, confirm all dimensions by measurement on site,
however where necessary proceed with fabrication without field
measurements and co-ordinate installation tolerance to ensure proper
fit.
D. Fabrications shall be warp, buckle and crease free and be free from
defects that impair strength, durability or appearance. Fabrications
shall be of best commercial quality for the purpose required. All items
shall be accurate to details, clean, straight, with sharply defined profiles
and edges with no distortion and smooth finished surfaces.
E. Carefully fit and match all work with continuity of line and design.
F. Welding, where necessary shall be as recommended by the

manufacturer of the base metal - in accordance with relevant BSI
standards to avoid distortion or discoloration. Welds shall be
continuous unless otherwise specified. Grind welds flush. Base metal
shall be level cut before welding to assure true line of joints.
G. Brazing, where necessary shall be as recommended by the

manufacturer of the base metal. Use filter material in accordance with
BSI recommendations. Use blind or concealed joints. Minimise
distortion by fit-up and use of jigs and fixtures. Grind joints flush and
match with adjacent faces.
H. Reinforce the work as necessary for performance requirements, and

for support to the structure. Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous
paint or pre-formed dielectric separators which will prevent corrosion.
I. Where possible allow for concealed method of fixing.
J. Where exposed in the finished surface, use countersunk screws, finish

to match the adjacent material. Use fasteners of type and size best
suited for the purpose intended.
2.7 FINISHES
A. All metal finishes shall be ornamental grade comply with NAAMM Metal
Finishes Manual.
B. The finishes shall be as noted on approved shop drawing and/or as

selected and approved by the Engineer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Supplying items to be cast in concrete or embedded in masonry or

placed in partitions.
3.2 DISSIMILAR METALS
A. Dissimilar metal surfaces shall be kept away from direct contact by

painting the dissimilar metal with a heavy coat of a proper primer
and/or asphalt paint.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Before beginning installation in any area, examine all parts of structure

to which the applicable work is to be fixed.

B. Should any conditions be found which will prevent the proper execution
of this work, report such conditions in writing to the Engineer.
Installation work shall not proceed in that area until such conditions are
corrected by the appropriate Contractor.
C. Cut and trim component parts during installation only with approval of
the Manufacturer or Fabricator and in accordance with his
recommendations. Do not cut through reinforcing members. Restore
finish completely to protect material and remove all evidence of cutting
and trimming.
D. Do not fix members which are scratched, warped, bowed, deformed or

otherwise damaged or defaced. Remove and replace members
damaged in the process of installation.
E. Install fastenings in the manner shown on the approved shop drawings,

plumb level and in line with adjacent materials where required. Provide
fastenings as necessary for a rigid, secure and permanent installation.
F. All components of assemblies shall be carefully fitted to provide neat

hairline joints.
G. All scratches and abraded areas shall be repaired to the Engineer’s

satisfaction under this section as the products are installed.
3.4 CLEANING
A. As installation is completed, wash thoroughly using clean water and soap;

rinse with clean water.
B. Do not use acid solution, steel wool or other harsh abrasives.
C. If stain remains after washing, remove finish and restore in accordance

with NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 05800
EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform all
operations required for complete installation of Expansion Control and
related work as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
B. This Section includes the following:
1. Architectural joint systems for building interiors.

2. Architectural joint systems for building exteriors.

or Works intended.
1. Section 04300 : Concrete Masonry Units

3. Section 07620 : Sheet Metal Flashing and Trims
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Maximum Joint Width: Widest linear gap a joint system tolerates and
in which it performs its designed function without damaging its
functional capabilities.
B. Minimum Joint Width: Narrowest linear gap a joint system tolerates

and in which it performs its designed function without damaging its
functional capabilities.
C. Movement Capability: Value obtained from the difference between

widest and narrowest widths of a joint.
D. Nominal Joint Width: The width of the linear opening specified in

practice and in which the joint system is installed.
RADCARE - B01- King Fahd Road III-2/05800/ Expansion Joint Cover
20 Assemblies
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Provide the following for each joint system specified
and obtain approval prior to fabrication and shipment of materials to the
job site:
1. Placement Drawings: Include line diagrams showing plans,

elevations, sections, details, splices, blockout requirement,
entire route of each joint system, and attachments to other work.
Where joint systems change planes, provide isometric or clearly
detailed drawing depicting how components interconnect.
B. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer’s latest published

literature for materials specified herein for approval, and obtain
approval before materials are fabricated and delivered to the site. Data
to clearly indicate movement capability of cover assemblies and
suitability of material used in exterior seal for UV exposure.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of joint system indicated.
1. Include manufacturer's color charts showing the standard range

of colors and finishes available for each exposed metal and
elastomeric seal material.
D. Certificates – Material test reports from qualified independent testing

laboratory indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance
of fire-rated expansion joint assemblies with requirements indicated.
A. Installer Qualifications: Approved by manufacturer and Engineer.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain all architectural joint systems through one

source from a single manufacturer.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional

requirements of architectural joint systems and are based on the
specific systems indicated. Refer to Division 01 General
Requirements.
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by

Engineer, except with Engineer’s approval. If modifications are
proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Engineer
for review.
D. Loading Characteristics: Standard loading refers to covers that are

capable of withstanding up to 500 lb. point loads. Heavy duty refers to
covers that are capable of withstanding up to 2000 lb. point loads.
E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide

architectural joint system and fire-barrier assemblies identical to those
of assemblies tested for fire resistance per UL 2079 and/or ASTM E
21 Assemblies
1966 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction. Fire rating not less than the rating of adjacent
construction.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of exterior wall joint systems with roof expansion

assemblies to ensure that wall transitions are watertight.

A. Exercise proper care in the handling of all work so as not to injure the
finished surface, and take proper precautions to protect the work from
damage after it is in place.
B. Deliver materials to the job site ready for use, and fabricated in as large
sections and assemblies as practical. Assemblies shall be identical to
submitted and reviewed shop drawings, samples and certificates.
C. Store materials under cover in a dry and clean location off the ground.
Remove materials that are damaged or otherwise not suitable for
installation from the job site and replace with acceptable materials at
no additional cost.
1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Where necessary, check actual locations of walls and other

construction to which work must fit, by accurate field measurements before
fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings
and coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid
delay of work.
1.9 MOCK UP

1.10 WARRANTY
A. Submit a warranty of 5 years from the date of substantial completion

for any defects in the manufacture and workmanship of the products of
this section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6005A-T61, 6063-T5, 6061-T5, 6105-

T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6, 3003-H14, 5005-H34
for sheet and plate.
1. Apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum
surfaces to be placed in contact with cementitious materials.
22 Assemblies
B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304 for plates, sheet, and strips.
1. Finish: No.4, directional satin.
a. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform,

directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of
cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each
piece.
b. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse

surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave
surfaces chemically clean.
C. Brass: ASTM B 36/B 36M, UNS Alloy C26000 for half hard sheet and
coil.
D. Bronze: ASTM B 455, Alloy C38500 for extrusions; Alloy C28000

Muntz Metal for plates.
E. Elastomeric Seals: Preformed elastomeric membranes or extrusions to

be installed in metal frames.
F. Compression Seals: ASTM D2000; preformed rectangular elastomeric

extrusions having internal baffle system and designed to function under
compression.
G. Joint Sealant: Elastomeric Sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type

T, factory formed and bonded to metal framed or anchor members in
colour as selected and approved by Engineer.
H. Fire Barriers (if any): Any material or material combination, when fire
tested after cycling, designated to resist the passage of flame and hot
gases through a movement joint and to meet performance criteria for
required rating period.
I. Moisture Barrier: 7-ply laminated reinforced polyethylene.
2.2 ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. General: Provide architectural joint systems of design, basic profile,

materials, and operation indicated. Provide units with capability to
accommodate variations in adjacent surfaces.
B. Design architectural joint systems for the following size and movement
characteristics:
1. Joints up to 50mm wide. Withstand plus or minus 35 percent

movement of the joint width without failure.
2. Joints 50 to 100mm wide. Withstand plus or minus 50 percent
movement of the joint width without failure.
C. Fasteners: All fixing bolts sizes shall be hexagonal heads and nuts,
23 Assemblies
meeting the specification for low carbon steel externally and internally
threaded fastener ASTM A307.Bolts shall be of exact length required
and fitted with lock washers.
2.3 ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS FOR BUILDING INTERIORS
A. Floor-to-Floor Joint Systems:
1. Type: Surface mounted.

2. Type: Elastomeric seal.
a. Exposed Metal: Aluminum or stainless steel type 304 or
Brass or Bronze as selected and approved by Engineer.
b. Seal Material: Thermoplastic Rubber (TPR).
1) Color: As selected and approved by Engineer.
2) Gaskets to be dual durometer and have a flat
profile that is free of ridges/reveals that collect dirt.
3. Attachment Method: Mechanical anchors.
4. Load Capacity: Standard duty.
5. Fire-Resistance Rating (if any): Provide joint system and fire-
barrier assembly with a rating not less than that of adjacent
construction.
B. Floor-to-Wall Joint Systems:
1. Type: Surface mounted.

2. Type: Elastomeric seal.
b. Seal Material: Thermoplastic Rubber (TPR).
2) Gaskets to be dual durometer and have a flat
profile that is free of ridges/reveals that collect dirt.
3. Attachment Method: Mechanical anchors.
4. Load Capacity: Standard duty.
5. Fire-Resistance Rating (if any): Provide joint system and fire-
barrier assembly with a rating not less than that of adjacent
construction.
C. Ceiling-to-Ceiling Joint Systems:
1. Type: Flat seal.

b. Seal Material: Thermo plastic elastomer.
24 Assemblies
D. Wall-to-Ceiling Joint Systems:
1. Type: Flat seal.
b. Seal Material: Thermo plastic elastomer.
2.4 ARCHITECTURA L JOINT SYSTEMS FOR BUILDING EXTERIORS
A. Exterior Seals:
1. Seal Material: Santoprene rubber or exposed aluminium metal

plate or stainless steel type 304 or Brass or Bronze as selected
and approved by Engineer.
a. Colour: As selected and approved by the Engineer.
2. Secondary seal: Extruded-elastomeric seal designed to prevent
water and moisture infiltration for santoprene rubber or 7-ply
laminate reinforced polyethylene for exposed aluminium metal
plate.
3. Pantograph Mechanism: Manufacturer’s standard nylon
pantographic wind-load support mechanism with stainless-steel
fasteners for 12” joints and larger.
B. All miters and changes in direction to be factory fabricated, heat

welded transitions.
C. Fire-Resistance Rating (if any): Provide joint system and fire-barrier

assembly with a rating not less than that of adjacent construction.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and

Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating
finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by

applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are

not acceptable.
D. Aluminum Finishes
1. Clear Anodize Finish: medium matte etched finish with 0.4 mil
minimum thick anodic coating.
2. Paint Finish: Shall be inhibited thermocured primer, .02 mil

minimum dry film thickness and thermocured fluorocarbon
coating containing full 70% Kynar 500 resin, 1.0 mil minimum
dry film thickness. Provide color indicated or as selected and

25 Assemblies
approved by Engineer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Inspect surfaces and blockouts where architectural joint systems will be

installed for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of work.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions

have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to architectural joint system manufacturer's

written instructions.
B. Repair concrete slabs and blockouts using manufacturer's

recommended repair grout of compressive strength adequate for
anticipated structural loadings.
C. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions

for installing joint systems. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size
to suit type of construction indicated and to provide for secure
attachment of joint systems.
D. Cast-In Frames: Coordinate and furnish frames to be cast into

concrete.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling,

and installing architectural joint assemblies and materials unless more
stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Metal Frames: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install

joint systems.
1. Install in true alignment and proper relationship to joints and

adjoining finished surfaces measured from established lines and
levels.
2. Adjust for differences between actual structural gap and nominal
design gap due to ambient temperature at time of installation. Notify
Engineer where discrepancies occur that will affect proper joint
installation and performance.
3. Cut and fit ends to accommodate thermal expansion and
contraction of metal without buckling of frames.
4. Locate in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces.
5. Standard-Duty Systems: Shim to level where required. Support
underside of frames continuously to prevent vertical deflection
when in service.

26 Assemblies
6. Heavy-Duty Systems: Repair or grout blockout as required for
continuous frame support and to bring frame to proper level.
Shimming is not allowed.
7. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but
not less than 3 inches from each end and not more than 24
inches o.c.
C. Seals in Metal Frames: Install elastomeric seals and membranes in

frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install with
minimum number of end joints.
1. Provide in continuous lengths for straight sections.

2. Seal transitions according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Vulcanize or heat-weld field-spliced joints as recommended by
manufacturer.
3. Installation: Mechanically lock seals into frames or adhere to
frames with adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape as
recommended by manufacturer.
D. Compression Seals: Apply adhesive or lubricant adhesive as

recommended by manufacturer before installing compression seals.
E. Terminate exposed ends of joint assemblies with field- or factory-

fabricated termination devices.
F. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies (if any): Coordinate installation of

architectural joint assembly materials and associated work so complete
assemblies comply with assembly performance requirements.
1. Fire Barriers (as applicable): Install fire barriers to provide

continuous, uninterrupted fire resistance throughout length of
joint, including transitions and field splices.
G. Water Barrier: Provide water barrier at exterior joints.

3.4 PROTECTION
A. Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is

complete. When protective covering is removed, clean exposed metal
surfaces to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections. Where

necessary due to heavy construction traffic, remove and properly store
cover plates or seals and install temporary protection over joints.
Reinstall cover plates or seals prior to Substantial Completion of the
Work.
END OF SECTION

27 Assemblies
SECTION 06200
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE
A. This section establishes requirements for providing Architectural

Woodwork including millwork and all necessary fixings, anchors,
adhesives and related accessories suitable to fulfill the desired design
and architectural intent.

related sections within the Project Specifications. It is not necessary
comprehensive or complete and it is the Contractors responsibility to
of work intended.
1. Section 05500 : Metal Fabrication

2. Section 05700 : Ornamental Metal Work
3. Section 06100 : Rough Carpentry
4. Section 09632 : Stone(Interior)
1.3 REFERENCES

1. ANSI A208.2 - Standard for the performance of medium

density fiberboard.
2. AWI P-200 - Architectural Woodwork quality
standards, Architectural Woodwork
Institute.
RADCARE - B01- King Fahd Road
III-2/06650/ Solid Surfacing
28
3. AWPA U1 - Use Category System – User
Specification for Treated Wood.
4. AWPA T1 - Use Category System: Processing and
Treatment Standard.
5. WDMA1.S.4 - Water Repellant Treatment for Mill work.
6. WIC - Manual of Millwork, Woodwork Institute
of California.
7. ASTM D5751 - Standard specification for adhesive used
for laminate joints in non-structural
lumber products.
8. ASTM D2559 - Standard specification for adhesive for
structural laminated wood products for
use under exterior (wet use) exposure
conditions.
9. ASTM D 5516 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating the
Flexural Properties of Fire-Retardant
Treated Softwood Plywood Exposed to
elevated temperatures.
10. ASTM D 5664 - Standard Test Method for evaluating the
effects of Fire retardant treatments and
elevated temperatures of strength
properties of Fire retardant treatment
lumber.
11. ASTM D 3201 - Standard Test Method for Hygroscopic
properties of Fire-retardant wood and
wood based products.
12. ASTM E 84 - Standard test method for surface
burning characteristics of building
materials.
13. HPVA HP – 1 - American National Standard for
Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
14. HPVA, DFV1 - Standard for sliced decorative wood face
veneer.
15. ANSI Z 97.1 - Safety glazing materials used in building
safety.
16. CPSC16 CFR 1201 - Safety standard for Architectural Glazing
Material.
17. FS DD-G-451 - Federal standard of glass.
18. MIL Spec L-19140E - Lumber and Plywood, Fire retardant
treated.
19. NAAMM - Metal Finishes Manual.
20. Industrial Fasteners Institute (IFI) - Fasteners Standards

29
21. American Home Furnishings Alliance (AHFA) - Furniture and
upholstery Standards.
22. ANSI/BHMA A 156.9 - Standard for cabinet hardware.
23. ANSI/BHMA A 156.11 - Cabinet Locks
24. ANSI/BHMA A 156.16 - Auxiliary Hardware
25. FF-N-836 - Bolts and nuts
26. A-A-1922A - Expansion Bolts
27. FF-S-111 - Screws
28. NEMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates
National Electrical Manufacturers
Association.
29. NEMA LD 3.1 - Application, Fabrication and
Installation of High Pressure
Decorative Laminates
30. IBC - International Building Code.

Jurisdiction.
requested.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit to the Engineer manufacturer’s technical

data for each type of product and process specified in this section
incorporated with items of architectural woodwork during fabrication,
finishing, and installation.
B. Fire-retardant - treatment data for material impregnated by pressure

process to reduce combustibility. Include certification by treating plant
that treated materials comply with requirements. Include certification
for moisture content of materials meeting this specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings and specifications in

accordance with the contract documents for the Engineers approval,
before fabrication. Do not work without approved shop drawing.
Submit shop drawings for each item of this Section showing the design
and dimensions. Indicate in large scale the construction of the various
components, show all dimensions, specify method of assembly,
jointing, thickness of materials, finishes, matching and directions of
graining, hardware, reinforcements, fastenings, attachments and all
other pertinent information. Show special details in full scale. Submit
written description for all finishing processes.

30
D. Samples Verification Purpose: Submit samples of the following:
1. Timber with or for transparent finish, 150 x 250mm, for each

species and cut, finished on one side and one edge.
2. MDF including moisture resistant type with and without any
veneer (200mm x 300mm).
3. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from filches to be
used for transparent finished woodwork.
4. Wood veneer faced panel products; with transparent finish,
200mm x 300mm, for each species and cut with one half of exposed
surface finished, with separate samples of unfaced panel
product used for core.
5. Factory-finished panels for transparent finished items, consisting
of the full selection of veneer pieces cut from selected flitch
samples, laminated to panel product finishes, 400 x 400mm
minimum size for each item and including samples of typical
mouldings to be used. The submitted panel should clearly
indicate the type of wood graining (quarter-cut, flame, plume,
cross branded, etc.).
6. Samples of composite panels showing proposed connections of
gypsum freezes and inlay panels to finished architectural woodwork
and woodwork to receive specialist interior fabric or similar finishes.
7. Exposed cabinet hardware, one unit of each type and finish.
8. Product certificate signed by woodwork manufacturer certifying
that products comply with specified requirements.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Company specializing in manufacturing and fabricating materials and

products for healthcare industry particularly millwork on projects of
similar size and complexity with a minimum of ten years of documented
experience. Manufacturer and fabricator to have sufficient production
capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the works.
B. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of architectural

woodwork by a firm that can demonstrate successful experience in
installing architectural woodwork items similar in type and quality to
those required for this project for a minimum period of ten (10) years.
A. AWI Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of

“Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards” published by the
Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), except as otherwise indicated.
Keep a copy of AWI Quality Standards (latest edition) on site for the
reference of Engineer.
B. Materials, construction methods, tolerances, joining and assembly of
architectural woodwork shall conform, to the requirements of the above
31
standard except that, in case the requirements of the Drawings and
the following Specifications are more stringent and precise than
above standards, the more stringent requirements shall apply to this
work.
C. Comply with Class 1 requirements of ASTM E 84
1. Flame spread : less than 25

2. Smoke development : less than 450
1.7 MOCK-UP
A. Field-Constructed Mock-Up: Before installation of architectural

woodwork (millwork, cabinets, shelving, counters, panel work, etc.),
erect mock-ups for each type of cabinet, shelving, counters, panel work
etc. and finish required to verify selections made under sample
submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects (as well as qualities of
materials and execution). Build mock-ups to comply with the following
requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of work.
1. Locate mock-ups on site in location and size indicated or, if not

indicated, directed by the Engineer.
2. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and
workmanship including all combinations of veneer, inlay,
mouldings and surface mounted ironmongery of applied
decoration.
3. Obtain Engineer’s acceptance of mock-ups before start of final
unit of work.
4. Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in
undisturbed condition as a standard for judging completed unit
of work.
5. Where agreed and accepted by the Engineer, approved
mockups may remain as part of the finished work.
A. General: Obtain and comply with Woodwork Quality Standards as

issued by the Architectural Woodwork Institute, in addition to any other
recognized and approved material.
B. Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with Woodwork

Manufacturer’s and Installer’s coordinated advice for optimum
temperature and humidity conditions for woodwork during its storage
and installation. Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, do not
install woodwork until these conditions have been attained and
stabilized so that woodwork is within plus or minus 1.0 percent of
optimum moisture content from date of installation through remainder
of construction period.
C. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other

32
construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by
accurate field measurements before manufacturing woodwork; show
recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate
manufacturing schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of
work.
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with manufacture of
woodwork without field measurements. Coordinate with other
construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to
guaranteed dimensions.
A. Deliver fabricated units and component parts to site, completely

identified in accordance with assembly diagrams, prepared for this
work. Store in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions, above
ground, properly protected from the weather and construction activities.
B. Protect lumber and millworks from dampness, maintaining moisture

content specified both during and after delivery at site.
C. Store finishing lumber and millwork in weather tight well ventilated

place. Store at a minimum temperature of 210C for not less than 10
days before installation.
D. Pile lumber is stacks in such manner as to provide air circulation

around surfaces of each piece.
1.10 WARRANTIES
A. The Contractor shall furnish written warrantees for not less than five (5)
years from the date of substantial completion against all defects in
materials and workmanship covering all work under this Section. State
in warranties that the Contractor agrees to repair or replace all defects
in material or workmanship during the warrantee period.
B. Warranties shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities

which manufacturers and the Contractor may have by law or by other
provisions of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Materials for Architectural Woodwork shall be as specified below.
2.2 LUMBER
A. Hardwood: AWI Premium Grade complying with Section 100 and 200,
quarter sawn species as noted on the drawings and/or as selected and
approved by the Engineer Representative.
B. Softwood: The use of any softwood is prohibited.

33
C. Surfaces and Patterns: Provide lumber surfaced 4 sides (S4S) and
worked to book match patterns.
D. Moisture Content: Kiln -dry lumber to moisture content recommended

by AWI, Section 100-G-3. However for interior woodwork, flooring,
furniture and wood trim recommended moisture content shall be
between 5 to 7% and for exterior siding, wood trim sheathing,
laminated timbers the moisture content shall be between 7 to 12%.
2.3 MDF
A. MDF: Complying with ANSI A 208.2, AWI Section 200 and 500
Premium grade. Density shall be 600-800 Kg/m3 and thickness shall be
minimum 18mm. Adhesive shall be formaldehyde free.
B. For wet areas, MDF shall be moisture resistant type only.
2.4 HARDWOOD PLYWOOD
A. A or AA grade as per HPVA standards.
2.5 VENEERS
A. Provide rotary cut veneer ‘A Grade’ as per WDMA or ‘AA Grade’ as per
AWI standards. Specie and finish shall be as noted on drawings and/or
as approved by the Engineer’s Representative. Veneer match shall be
consistent and as approved by the Engineer.
2.6 LAMINATES
A. High pressure decorative laminate, 1.2mm thick complying with NEMA

LD3 and NEMA LD 3.1.
2.7 FINISHES (WOOD)
A. Factory Finish: Apply the complete finishing of Architectural woodwork

in the factory. Finishes shall match the samples approved by the
Engineer’s Representative.
B. Finishes shall be as noted on the drawings and/or as selected and
approved by the Engineers Representative complying to OSHA and
EPA regulations.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
A. Cabinet Hardware/Iron Mongery :
a. All Hardware/Iron Mongery shall be strictly complying with

ANSI/BHMA or equivalent EN Standards. Cabinet hardware
shall comply with ANSI/BHMA A 156.9, cabinet locks shall
comply with ANSI/BHMA A 156.11 and Auxiliary hardware shall
comply with ANSI/BHMA A 156.16. All exposed hardware
material and finishes shall comply with ANSI/BHMA A 156.18.
Cabinet hardware shall be complete and shall enable the
34
product to be used for the intended purpose.
B. Rough Hardware:
a. Comply with FF-N-836 for Bolts and nuts and A-A-1922A for
expansion bolts.
b. Comply with FF-S-111 for Screws. Wood screws shall be type,
size, material and finish as required for the condition of use and
as indicated on approved shop drawings.
c. Nails shall be type, size material and finish as required for the
condition of use and as indicated on approved shop drawings.
d. All exposed fasteners/fixing shall be stainless steel Type 316,
countersunk.
C. Adhesives:
a. Adhesives for wood veneer shall be melamine, phenolresin, or

resorcinal resin conforming to FS MMM-A-181, type, grade and
class best suited for the purpose.
b. Adhesives for all other uses shall be moisture resistant
conforming to FS MMM-A-125 Type II, or MMM-A-188 Type I, II
or III or BS 1204.
c. Use of formaldehyde based adhesive is prohibited.
D. Neoprene:
a. ASTM C542, 40 to 50 Shore A durometer harness, self-

adhesive on one face only.
2.9 FABRICATION - WOODWORK
A. Shop assemble architectural woodwork for delivery to site in units

easily handled and to permit passage through building openings.
B. Select adjacent lumber and panel products for colour and grain
matching to greatest extent possible.
C. Fabricate solid wood components from single piece of lumber unless

otherwise approved by Engineer.
D. Form joints using one of the following types:
1. Splined.
2. Mortise and tenon.
3. Tongue and groove.
4. Doweled.
5. Dovetailed.
6. Full length blocked, glued and screwed in two directions.

35
E. Counter top and Exposed Horizontal Surfaces: Run veneer with grain
parallel to length of fabrication.
F. Fabricate doors and drawer fronts with grain vertical, unless otherwise
specified or shown on Drawings.
G. Fit exposed plywood edges of shelves, doors, and other components

with matching hardwood or veneer banding. Use one piece for full
length only.
H. Cap exposed decorative laminate finish edges with same material with
same finish and pattern.
I. Door and Drawer Fronts:
1. Thickness: 19 mm unless otherwise specified or indicated on

Drawings.
2. Style: As specified for each component or as indicated on
Drawings.
J. Drawers:
1. Fabricate front back and sides from minimum 3/8 inch thick
lumber with dovetail joints.
2. Dado drawer box to receive plywood drawer bottom.
3. Mechanically fasten drawer fronts to drawer box.
K. Fabricate drawers with one of the following guides, unless otherwise

specified:
1. Solid hardwood drawer guides on bottom of drawer.

2. Full extension side mounted slides.
3. Under mounted self closing slides.
L. Fabricate dust panels with hardwood frames and hardboard panels.
Provide dust panels between drawers.
1. Frames: Minimum 19 x 44.5 mm.

2. Panels: 3.20 mm thick.
M. Provide reinforcing as required to ensure rigid, secure assembly.
1. Provide reinforcing required to support items built into

architectural woodwork and to prevent visually detectable
deflection under weight of built in items.
N. When necessary to cut and fit on site, fabricate materials with ample
allowance for cutting.
O. Furnish trim for scribing and site cutting.
P. Fabricate woodwork with cutouts for fixtures and fittings installed within

36
or penetrating woodwork.
1. Seal cut edges.
Q. Fit legs of free-standing fabrications with glides on each leg, unless

otherwise specified.
R. Fabricate woodwork and assemble to ensure that the work remains in

place without warping, splitting or opening of joints.
S. Shop trial fit woodwork components requiring multiple components for

shipment.
2.10 INTERIOR DOOR FRAMES FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 900B.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. Timber Species: Match species and cut indicated for other types of
transparent finished architectural woodwork located in same area of
building unless otherwise indicated and/or selected and approved by
the Engineer.
2.11 INTERIOR WOOD CABINETS (CASEWORK), COUNTERS
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400, 600 and 1600.
B. Grade: Premium
C. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: As specified and indicated on the

Drawings. Exposed surfaces fabricated of wood to receive specified
finish.
D. Wood Species for Exposed Surface: As specified and indicated on the
Drawings and/or selected and approved by the Engineer.
E. Grain Matching: Run and match grain vertically for rear fronts, doors.
F. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match or as indicated on Drawings.
G. Veneer Matching Within Panel Face: Running match.
H. Laminates: As specified complying with NEMA LD3 and NEMA LD.3.1.
I. Wood Species for Semi-exposed Surface: Match species and cut as

indicated or exposed surfaces.
J. Stiles and Rails (Frame): Complying with AWI Section 1400. Stiles
and rails (frame) or solid timber with solid moulding to conceal joint
between frame and insert panels.
K. Panels: Veneer core hardwood plywood or other approved core or as

noted on drawings and as approved by the Engineer with face veneer
37
leaves, book and balance matched in each panel, in a horizontal sequence
for adjacent panels and doors.
2.12 INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD PANELING FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section and its Division 500A.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. Wood Species: As specified and indicated on the Drawings and/or as

D. Veneer Species: As specified and indicated on the Drawings and/or as

E. Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Book match unless otherwise

indicated on the Drawings.
F. Veneer Matching Within Panel Face: Running match.
G. Panel Matching Method: Match panels to one another within each

separate area by the following method.
1. Sequence - matched panel sets.
H. Panel Core Construction: Veneer core hardwood plywood or MDF or

as noted on drawings and approved by the Engineer.
I. Moulding Profile: As indicated on the Drawing.
J. Comply with Quality Standard referenced and details shown for

fabrication and assembly of panelwork. Proof the thickness shown.
Assemble by gluing and concealed fasteners (no exposed nailing or
other fasteners), except finish nailing permitted for quirk corners or
applied mouldings).
2.13 INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD PANELLING FOR OPAQUE FINISH

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 500 and its Division 500A.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. Wood Species: As specified and indicated on the drawings and/or as
D. Moulding Profile: As indicated on the Drawings.
E. Panel Core Construction: Veneer core hardwood plywood or MDF or
as approved by the Engineer.
F. Comply with Quality Standard referenced and details shown for
fabrication and assembly of panelwork. Provide panelwork of the
thickness shown. Assemble by gluing and concealed fasteners.

38
2.14 INTERIOR FLUSH COMPOSITE PANELLING FOR APPLIED FINISHES
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 500 and its Division.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. Wood Species: As specified and indicated on the drawings and/or as
D. Moulding Profile: As indicated on the Drawings.
E. Panel Core Construction: Gypsum Board, Perforated Gypsum Board or

Medium Density Fibreboard and panel sealer as indicated on the
Drawings.
F. Comply with Quality Standard referenced and details shown for
fabrication and assembly of panel work. Coordinate all aspects of the
final assembly with the Interior installation.
2.15 INTERIOR MISCELLANEOUS ORNAMENTAL ITEMS

A. Quality Standard: comply with AWI Section 700.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. Timber Species: Match species and cut indicated for other types of
transparent finished interior architectural wood work located in same areas
of building unless otherwise indicated.
2.16 SHOP FINISHING

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1500, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.
B. General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop in a dust
proof environment as specified in this Section. Defer only final
touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
C. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for
sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and
similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable
to each unit of work.
1. Back priming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible
with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two
coats to back of paneling and to end-grain surfaces.
D. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for
grade, finish system, staining, and sheen, with sheen measured on 60-
degree gloss meter as per ASTM D 523:
1. Grade: Premium unless otherwise specified.
2. AWI Finish System TR-6: Catalyzed polyurethane.
3. Staining: Match approved sample for color.
39
E. Opaque Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade,
finish system, color, effect, and sheen, with sheen measured on 60-
degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.
1. Grade: Premium unless otherwise specified.

2. AWI Finish System OP-6: Polyester/polyurethane.
3. Color: As selected by Engineer from the full range of colors
available in finish system specified.
4. Sheen: As selected by Engineer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in

installation areas before installing.
B. Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into

substrate well in advance of time substrates are to be built.
C. Before installations of architectural woodwork, examine shop fabricated

work for completion and complete work as required, including removal
of packing.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with requirements of
AWI 1700, that refer to types of woodwork specified in this Section and
that apply to the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section.
B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions.

Shim as required with concealed shims, install to a tolerance of 3mm in
3 metre for plumb and level and with no variations in flushness of
adjoining surfaces.
C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces
or repair damaged finish at cuts.
D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to
substrate. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk,
concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete
installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk
and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where
transparent finish is indicated.
E. Standing and Running Trim and Rails: Install with minimum number of
joints possible, using full--length pieces (from maximum length of
timber available) to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in
adjacent and related members. Cope at returns and mitre at corners.

40
F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers fit
openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to
centre doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered
operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items
as indicated. Maintain veneer sequence matching (if any) of cabinets
with transparent finish.
G. Paneling: Anchor panel work to supporting substrate framing with
concealed split-batten of panel-hanger clips and by blind nailing on
backup stairs. All joining panels are to be installed with continuous
splined-connection strips. All framing, trims and moulding are to be
mitre jointed as indicated on drawings. All intended fixings are to be
clearly indicated on shop drawings. Do not face nail unless otherwise
indicated.
3.3 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING AND FINISHING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate
defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair, replace
woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi exposed surfaces, touch up
factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or spoiled areas.
C. Complete the finishing work specified in this section, to whatever extent
not completed at factory or before installation of woodwork.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner
acceptable to manufacturer and installer, to ensure that woodwork is
without damage or deterioration at the time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION

41
SECTION 07140
FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SEC TION INCLUDES
A. Provide all labour, materials, equipment, services and accessories

necessary to furnish and install the work of this Section, complete and
functional, as indicated in drawing and as specified herein.
B. The principal work of this Section includes but may not be limited to,
the following:
1. Fluid applied waterproofing to exterior walls above grade as

vapour barrier or damp proofing membrane behind insulation to
external cladding and to concrete surfaces in contact with soil which
do not form enclosures and where sheet membrane is not indicated.
2. Fluid applied waterproofing to wet areas including toilets,
kitchens, pools, fountains etc.
3. Fluid applied water proofing to water storage tanks etc.

Works intended.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data for surface conditioner, joint and crack
sealants, with temperature range for application of waterproofing membrane
together with data on any alternative products.
B. Product data on protective coating.
C. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures,

perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
D. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify that substituted products meet or
exceed those implied within product itemised in Part - 2.
RADCARE - B01- King Fahd Road III-2/07140/ Fluid Applied
42 Waterproofing
A. The minimum standards for products specified in this Section shall be

the following referenced Standards (and their latest edition and/or revision)
including but not limited to the following:
1. ASTM C309 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing

Concrete
2. ASTM D412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and
Thermoplastic Elastomers—Tension
3. ASTM D624 Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of
Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic
Elastomers
4. ASTM E96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor
Transmission of Materials
5. ASTM D 2240 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property—
Durometer Hardness
6. ASTM C 836 Standard Specification for High Solids Content,
Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing
Membrane for Use with Separate Wearing Course
7. ASTM C959 Specification for Radiant Heat Fill
8. CP 102 - Code of practice for protection of building against
water from the ground.
9. BS 1310 - Specification for coal tar pitches for building
purposes.
10. BS 4315 - Part 2 - Methods of Test for resistance to air and
water penetration. Permeable walling
constructions (water penetration).
11. BS 5284 - Sampling and testing mastic asphalt and pitch
mastic used in building.
12. BS 6515 - Specification for polyethylene damp-proof courses for
Masonry.
13. BS 6398 - Specification for bitumen damp-proof courses for
Masonry.
B. It is not the intent to herein describe all of the details for the membrane
waterproofing system. The Contractor shall assure himself that all
items and details not otherwise specified, but required to make the
area watertight shall be provided as part of the work under this Section at
no additional cost.
C. Prior to commencement of work, a job site meeting with the Contractor, the
Engineer, and representative of manufacturer of the fluid system shall
be held to verify all conditions. All drawings and specifications affecting the
work of this Section shall be examined.
D. All applicable local codes, regulations, etc of Authorities having

43 Waterproofing
Jurisdiction.
A. Products to be applied for water storage tanks shall meet the

performance criteria and specifications stated in this section and shall
have approvals of MOE & EW and NSF 61 for their suitability
particularly to potable water tanks.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Waterproofing Material Manufacturer: Company specializing in

waterproofing membrane with 15 (fifteen) years experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section

with minimum 5 (five) years documented experience within the Middle
East and approved by the Engineer.
A. Materials shall be delivered in their original, tightly sealed containers or

unopened packages, all clearly labelled with the manufacturer’s name,
brand name, and number, and batch number of the material where
appropriate. Materials and equipment shall be stored as directed in a
neat and safe manner. Storage area shall be shaded, ventilated and
shall be located away from all sources of excess heat, sparks or open
flame. Containers of liquid material shall not be left open at any time in the
storage area.
1.8 GUARANTEES
A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by the

Contractor and Installer against leaks occurring in membrane waterproofing
work. Upon notification of any leak within the warranty period, make the
necessary repairs and replacements as directed by the Engineer's
Representative including the removal and replacement of work
superimposed over the membrane waterproofing, at the convenience of the
Employer and to the complete works in accordance with Contract
Documents and approvals of the Engineer's Representative.
B. The warranty period for Membrane Waterproofing shall be Ten (10)

years effective from the date of Substantial Completion of the Works.
C. The warranty shall be supported by a bank guarantee of the same

duration obtained from a bank approved by the Employer and shall be
for the minimum amount of the value of the works established by a final
measurement of the same at the Unit Rates contained in the Bills of
Quantities.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
44 Waterproofing
A. General: All materials used in this contract shall be of the highest
quality as manufactured by nationally recognized manufacturers of the
type indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
B. Products for exterior walls above grade behind external cladding and to
concrete surfaces in contact with soil below grade and which do not
form enclosures. Minimum thickness shall be 1000 microns.
1. Product: Rubberised bitumen emulsion.

2. Properties:
a. Specific gravity : 1.00
b. Solid content : Approximately 60%
c. Rubber content : Approximately 10%
3. Product shall comply with the concrete curing requirements of

ASTM C309.
C. Products for wet areas like toilets, kitchen, pools, fountains etc.
1. Product: Liquid applied single component pitch modified

polyurethane elastomeric waterproofing membrane.
2. Properties”
a. Elongation (ASTM D412) : 620%

b. Tensile strength : 1.5N/mm2
(ASTM D412)
c. Tear Resistance : 10N/mm
(ASTM D624)
d. Water vapour transmission : 0.57g/Wm2
(ASTM E96)
e. Shore A hardness : 15 + 5
(ASTM D2240)
f. Artificial Weathering : There shall be no loss of
flexibility after 4000 hours
exposure.
g. Service temperature : -40 oC to 70 oC
(continuous ambient)
h. Chemical properties: Product shall not be affected by a
range of mild acids, alkalis and water borne salts and is
resistant to bio-deterioration.
i. Product shall be of a medium viscosity grade
(approximately 600 poise) for roller squeezer or spray
applications to horizontal and vertical surfaces.
D. Product for water storage tanks, etc.
1. Two component elastomeric urethane coating.

45 Waterproofing
2. Product shall be a tough, abrasion, corrosion and chemical
resistant waterproofing membrane specifically for use in water
and waste water applications including those which require
ANSI/NSF 61 potable water certification. Product shall have
approvals from MOE & EW for its suitability to potable water
tanks.
3. Properties:
TYPICAL PROPERTIES
Abrasion Resistance - Wt. Loss
Taber Abraser CS-17 Wheel
1000gr./ 1000 rev.
ASTM D4060 1.2mg. Loss
Adhesion to concrete (dry)
Elcometer 350 psi
Deflection Temperature
0
ASTM D648 Below-60 F
Density (Approx.)
Premix 8.0 lbs / gal
Activator 10.1 lbs/gal
Mixed & Cured 8.3 lbs/gal
Elastomeric Waterproofing
ASTM C836 Shall exceed all criteria
ASTM C957 Shall exceed all criteria
Electrical Resistivity, Volume
ASTM D257, 50% RH, 230C, 1.9 x 10E14
2” disc @ 100 mill thickness ohm-cm
Extension to Break, min
ASTM D412 300%
Hardness, Shore A, min
ASTM D2240 @770F 65

46 Waterproofing
TYPICAL PROPERTIES
Membrane Performance
Crack Bridging
10 cycles @ -150F atleast 1/8”

After heat aging atleast ¼”
Membrane Weight
(60 mils wet film thickness) 31 lbs/100 sq.ft
Mix Ratio
Weight 6.2:1
Volume 7.8:1
Mullen Burst Strength, min
ASTM D751, 50 mil 150 psi
Permeability to Water Vapour
ASTM E96 Method E, 1000F
100 mil sheet 0.03 perms
Potable Water Service
ANSI / NSF 61
Approved (UL 69Y5) to 1400F
Recovery from 100% extension:
After 5 minutes 98%
After 24 hours 100%
Service Temperature -600F to 2200F
Softening Point, Ring & Ball
ASTM D36 > 3250F
Tear Strength
ASTM D624 (Die C) 180 lbs. / in
Tensile Strength, min
ASTM D412, 100 mil sheet 1000 psi
Weathering
ASTM D822 5000 hrs
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION/INSPECTION
A. Before any waterproofing work is started, the applicator shall

thoroughly examine all surfaces for any deficiencies. Notify the

47 Waterproofing
Contractor and the Engineer in writing of any deficiencies. Deficiencies shall be
corrected prior to the commencement of any work.
B. Condition of Surfaces:
1. The surface shall be smooth, sound, free of projections and fins,

ridges, voids or air entrained holes, loose particles grease, oil or
dirt.
2. Voids, rock pockets, cold joints, shrinkage cracks and
excessively rough surfaces shall be repaired with approved non
shrink grout.
3. Surfaces at cold joints shall be on the same plane.
A. Prepare surface strictly as per manufacturers instructions.
B. The surface must be thoroughly clean, dry and free from surface
contaminants or residue that may affect the adhesion of the
waterproofing.
C. Grind all projecting fins with a carborundum stone.
D. Grout all voids, rock pockets, and cold joints. Strike smooth.
E. Do not apply in conditions of rain, fog, sandstorms or high winds.
F. Adjoining surfaces must be protected against any damage that could

result from the waterproofing installation. Particular care must be used if
spray applied.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Priming: Shall be to manufacturer’s recommendations. Use only

compatible product. Refer to data sheets for full information regarding
the use of this product.
B. Waterproofing Membrane: Apply membranes in accordance with the

manufacturers' recommendation.
C. Wet area waterproofing: Waterproofing membrane for wet areas shall

be applied on floor with an upturn of 30cms on the walls to act as one
monolithic barrier. Where bath tubs and/or countertops are located
extend upturns from floors to 30cms above the top level of the bath
tubs and countertops on the respective walls.
3.4 TESTS
A. Allow membrane to cure 24 hours minimum or as manufacturers

recommendations.

48 Waterproofing
B. Test for thickness and leakage by tanking required area as instructed
by the Engineer. Repeat the tests after rectification of leakage (if any)
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.5 MAINTENANCE
A. Upon completion of all work, leave work in perfect condition. As the

work proceeds, remove from the site, all debris resulting from the work
of this section.
B. Protect adjacent surfaces and drains from any damage caused by the
work of this section.
C. At the completion of the work, remove all accumulated containers,

brushes, debris and leave the work in a neat and tidy condition. Deposit
rubbish in containers provided.
END OF SECTION

49 Waterproofing
SECTION 07213
BATT INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work of this section, as indicated on the drawings and specified herein,

pertains to the fabricating, furnishing and installing of foil faced
Rockwool Batt insulation for use as thermal and Acoustic barrier in
partitions, liners, ceilings etc.

of work intended
1.3 REFERENCES

B. American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM E90-97 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Test

for Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of
Building Partitions and Elements.
2. ASTM C423-90a - Standard specification for testing noise
reduction coefficient.
3. ASTM C1071-05 - Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass
Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and Sound
Absorbing Material)
III-2/07213/ Batt Insulation

RADCARE - B01- King 50
Fahd Road
4. ASTM E84 - Standard test method for surface burning
characteristics of building materials.
C. British Standards :
1. BS 476 - Fire tests on Building Materials and Structures Non-

combustibility test for materials.
2. BS 2972 - Methods of Test for Inorganic thermal insulating
materials.
D. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning

Characteristics of Building Materials.
E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.
F. All applicable local codes, regulations, etc of Authorities having

Jurisdiction.
requested.
A. Comply with Class 1 requirements of ASTM E 84

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. The following submittals shall be submitted:
1. Product data and samples.

2. Method of installation.
3. Environmental conditions required for storage and installation.
4. Manufacturer's Certificates meeting the specified requirements.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the Work with other sections for installation.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Submit a warranty of five (5) years from the date of substantial

completion against defects in material, performance and installation for
Fahd Road
products in this section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
(NOT USED)
2.2 PRODUCTS AND PROPERTIES
A. Semi rigid and rigid bonded panel faced with fibre tissue - 50 kg/m3
density unless noted more elsewhere in the Contract.
B. Rockwool shall comply with the following test methods for various
properties as noted.
PROPERTIES TEST METHOD
DENSITY
LENGTH
WIDTH ASTM C 303
THICKNESS BS 2972 SECTION 3
WEIGHT
SERVICE TEMPERATURE ASTM C 447/ C 411 & DIN 52271
NON-COMBUSTIBILITY BS 476 Part 4 & ASTM E 136
FIRE RESISTANCE BS 476 Part 20 & ASTM E 119
BURNING CHARACTERISTIC ASTM E 84
THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY ASTM C 177 / C 518, ISO 8302/ISO 8301
EQUIVALENT TO BS 874 DIN 52612
ACOUSTICAL PROPERTIES BS 3638/ISO 354
ASTM C 423 – Sound Absorption ASTM E
90 -Sound Transmission Loss ASTM E
413 – Sound Transmission Class
COMPRESSION RESISTANCE ASTM C 165

CHEMICAL ANALYSIS ASTM C-871

Fahd Road
CHLORIDE BS 2972 Section 21
FLUORIDE AGIQ 135
PH
CORROSION TEST ASTM C 692 (Pre-production Corrosion

Test)
SHOT CONTENT ASTM C 1335 / BS 2972 SECTION 14
WATER ABSORPTION ASTM C 209 SECTION 14 / BS 2972
SECTION 12
WATER VAPOUR ABSORPTION ASTM C 1104 / C 1104 M
WATER VAPOUR ASTM E 96/E 96M
TRANSMISSION
ODOR EMISSION ASTM C 1304
LINEAR SHRINKAGE ASTM C 356
RIGIDITY AND FLEXIBILITY ASTM C 1101 / 1101M
CLASSIFICATION
C. Thickness of semi rigid rockwool as required on the project shall be

atleast 50mm and shall have a noise reduction coefficient (NRC) of 1
with the following technical properties.
TECHNICAL PARAMETERS – ROCKWOOL

COMPLYING WITH ASTM – C 423
FREQUENCY (H2)
Thickness 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 NCR
50mm 0.31 0.68 1.14 1.13 1.06 1.07 1.00
D. Where located as thermal barrier (external walls, roof, etc.) shall

achieve an R value of 12.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation are dry and
ready to receive insulation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install insulation without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation.
B. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and

voids.
C. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical

and electrical services within plane of insulation.

Fahd Road
D. Install with factory applied vapor retarder membrane facing warm side
of building spaces. Lap ends and side flanges of membrane over and
between (where ever required) framing members.
E. Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane.
F. Place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation. Lap and seal sheet
retarder joints over membrane face.
G. Comply with manufacturers instructions fully.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 07420
COMPOSITE METAL PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

pertains to the design, fabricating, furnishing and installing of :
1. Preformed Rout and return metal composite faced panel

system.
2. Related flashing and trim components.
B. Design
1. The cladding should be a complete system including all

stiffeners, fasteners, sealants, joints, supports and miscellaneous
pieces and material thickness as required to form a weather tight
construction.
2. The manufacturer of the cladding will be responsible for
development of all details which will accommodate for
engineering, fabrication and installation of the work with the existing
design intent.
3. All details shall be coordinated with the structural frame and
other building components. Where specific details, dimensions,
or design intent cannot be determined the Engineer’s
Representative should be consulted before processing.
4. All aluminium panels shall have a consistent uniform colour and
appearance and shall be visually flat under all lighting
conditions.

of work intended.
1. Section 07212 : Board Insulation

2. Section 07620 : Sheet Metal Flashing & Trims
III-2/07420/55 Composite Metal
RADCARE - B01- King Panels
Fahd Road
1.3 REFERENCES

B. Aluminum Association:
1. AA ASM-35 - Specifications for Aluminum Sheet Metal Work

in Building Construction, Section 5.
C. American Society of Civil Engineers:
1. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other

Structures.
D. American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Austenitic

Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and
Flat Bar.
2. ASTM A755/A755M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,
Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
and Prepainted by the Coil- Coating
Process for Exterior Exposed Building
Products.
55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by
the Hot-Dip Process.
4. ASTM A924/A924M - Standard Specification for General
Requirements for Steel Sheet,
Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip
Process.
5. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum
and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
6. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum
and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
(Metric).
7. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-
State Heat Flux Measurements and
Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate
Apparatus.
8. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-
Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Fahd Road
Frame Construction and Manufactured
Housing.
9. ASTM D1621 - Standard Test Method for
Compressive Properties of Rigid
Cellular Plastics.
10. ASTM D1622 - Standard Test Method for Apparent
Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
11. ASTM D2482 - Standard Test Method for Surface
Strength of Paper (Wax Pick Method).
12. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface
Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
13. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water
Vapor Transmission of Materials.
14. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural
Performance of Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform
Static Air Pressure Difference.
15. ASTM E413 - Standard Classification for Rating
Sound Insulation.
E. BS EN 1991 Code of practice for wind loads.

Jurisdiction.
requested
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Rout and Return panel system with attachment system which will allow
for exterior removal of any individual panel within the erected system
for damage, replacement or access to structure behind the panel,
without disturbing adjacent panels.
A. Design Wind Pressure: Design, fabricate and install component parts

so that the completed cladding will withstand the inward and outward
pressure of wind loads. Design for a wind speed of 45m/sec complying
with all requirements of BS EN 1991-1-4. Allow for impact, suction,
uplift and grating of wind and consider the building height and proximity
of adjacent buildings. Allow for pressure coefficients applicable as per
the governing building codes.
B. Thermal Movement: Design, fabricate and install cladding to withstand

Fahd Road
expansion and contraction forces resulting from an ambient
temperature range of 48oC (which may result in external wall material
temperature ranges exceeding 81oC).
C. Deflections: Base calculations for such deflections upon the

combination of maximum direct loadings, building deflections, thermal
stresses and erection tolerances. Do not permit any permanent deflections
in the cladding work.
D. Design Factor of Safety: All structural components of the cladding

including members, weldments, connections, adhesives and sealants
used as adhesives, shall be designed and fabricated with a factor of safety
not less than 2.5 i.e. failure of any structural component shall not occur at
less than 2.5 times the maximum “Design Wind Pressure” as determined
by the “Test for Structural Performance” specified hereinafter. Failure
is defined as breakage, component disengagement, or permanent
distortion.
E. Building Movement: Design, fabricate and install cladding to withstand

building movements including thermal movements, loading deflections,
shrinkage, creep and similar movements.
F. Leakage of Water and Sand/Dust: Design, fabricate and install the

cladding including joints between cladding and other work, to
effectively prevent leakage of either water or sand/dust within the
cladding cavities, both under specified test conditions and under any
combination of the foregoing performance requirements when any type
or amount of precipitation occurs. Leakage of water is defined as the
appearance of uncontrolled water, other than condensation, in any internal
part of the cladding. Leakage of sand/dust is defined as infiltration
of any such material whatsoever.
G. Heat and Ultraviolet Radiation: All cladding materials shall be designed

and manufactured so as not to lose any of their properties due to exposure
to heat and ultra violet radiation.
H. Design Modification: Make design modifications of work shown only as

may be necessary to meet performance requirements and coordinate
the work. Variations in details and materials which do not adversely
affect appearance, durability or strength shall be submitted to the
Engineer’s Representative for review. Maintain the general design concept
without altering profiles and alignments shown.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. The following submittals, as defined in Section for Submittals

Procedures are required :
1. Samples: Submit 3 sets of samples for each finish and colour
required including gaskets, tapes and sealants. Sample finishes
shall be on the specified alloy temper, and thickness of metal
required for the work; or 300mm squares of sheet or plate, shall
show maximum range or variation in colour and shade,
Fahd Road
preanodic treatment. Engineer’s Representative review and
acceptance of samples shall be for colour and texture only.
Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive
responsibility of the Contractor.
2. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit copies of the manufacturer’s
specifications and installations instructions for each item or
component part and for the complete cladding installation.
3. Test Data: Submit certified test reports by a recognized testing
laboratory showing that the cladding as shown and specified has
been tested and has met or exceeded all the specified performance
requirements.
4. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings and design calculations
for the cladding system. Show large scale typical details of all
conditions for every member, joint and anchorage. Assemble
shop drawings of the principal component parts, which may be
specified in other Sections, into this submittal and prepare
coordination and details and erection diagrams for the entire
cladding system.
5. Maintenance Manual: Submit an assembled and bound
maintenance manual, describing the materials, devices and
procedures to be followed in cleaning and maintaining the
cladding. Include manufacturer’s brochures describing the actual
materials used in the work, including metal alloys, finishes,
sealants, gaskets and all other major components.
A. Notify the Engineer’s Representative where conflicts apply between

referenced standards and existing materials, and existing methods of
construction.
B. The following are the limits of the tolerances for the aluminium
composite panels.
1. Width = + 2.0mm
2. Length = + 4.0mm
3. Thickness = + 0.2mm
4. Bow = Maximum 0.5% of the length and or
width
5. Diagonal difference = Maximum 5.0mm
6. Surface Defect = The surface shall not have any
irregularities such as roughness,
buckling and other imperfections in
accordance with visual inspection rules
7. The panels should have a cut edge, without aluminium sheet
displacement or core protrusion.

Fahd Road
C. Principal Properties :
1. Panel Thickness 4 mm
2. Skin Thickness 0.5mm on top and reverse side
3. Panel Weight 7.6 kg/m2
4. Thermal Expansion 1.2/mm/m/50 oC
5. Mechanical properties of ACM
Tensile strength (ASTM E8) 5.0kg/mm2
Yield strength (ASTM E8) 4.5kg/mm2
Elongation (ASTM E8) 5%
Flexural elasticity (ASTM C393) 4060kg/mm2
6. Mechanical properties of skin aluminium (3105-H14)
Tensile strength (ASTM E8) 15.5 kg/mm2
7. Deflection temperature 116oC (109oC in 6mm)
8. Sound transmission loss (ASTM E90) 26 STC
D. Comply with Class 1 requirements of ASTM E 84

1.8 TESTING
A. Aluminium composite panels shall comply to the requirements of the

following standards for the fire tests :
1. BS 476, Part 6 & 7

2. DIN 4102, Part 1
3. NFPA 259-93
4. ASTM D 1781-76
5. ASTM E-108
6. UBC 26-9 and NFPA 285, ISMA Test
7. ASTM E119
8. UBC 26-3
1.9 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Company specializing in manufacturing materials and products for

healthcare industry for projects of similar size and complexity with a
minimum of ten years of documented experience.
B. Applicator, with a minimum of 5 years documented experience

demonstrating previously successful work of the type specified herein,
and approved by the Engineer.

Fahd Road
1.10 MOCKUP
A. Construct mockup 3m x 3m of the whole system including metal

panels, subframing, insulation, flashing and accessory components.
B. Locate where directed by Engineer’s Representative.
C. Incorporate into works if acceptable to Engineer’s Representative.
1.11 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Convene a pre-installation meting one week prior to commencing work

of this section.
A. Do not deliver items to the site, until all specified submittals have been
submitted to, and approved by the Engineer’s Representative.
B. Deliver the panels protected with self-adhesive peel-off protective film

consisting of two polyethylene layers.
C. Deliver all materials packaged, boxed, wrapped or otherwise protected

to assure complete protection from damage during shipment.
D. Handle, store and protect materials from damage due to moisture,

direct sunlight, excessive temperatures, surface contamination,
corrosion and damage from construction operations and other causes.
E. Damaged material: Remove any damaged or contaminated materials

from job site immediately, including materials in broken packages,
packages containing water marks, or show other evidence of damage,
unless Engineer’s Representative specifically authorizes correction
thereof and usage on project.
1.13 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with placement of works with other sections.
1.14 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain manufacturers recommended substrate surface temperature

before, during, and 48 hours after installation of joint sealants.
A. Take field measurements before preparation of shop drawings and

fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of Work.
B. Allow for adjustments within specified tolerances wherever taking of

field measurements before fabrication might delay Work.
1.16 WARRANTY
A. Provide Manufacturer's written warranty covering repair or replacement

Fahd Road
of any system which leaks, or exhibits defects in materials, finish,
design, within 5 years from date of substantial completion. Failure due
to defective materials or workmanship is deemed to include, but not to
be limited to:
1. Failures in operation of operating component or components.

2. Leakage or air infiltration in excess of the specified standard.
3. Deterioration of finish to an extent visible to the unaided eye.
4. Defects which contribute to unsightly appearance, potential
safety hazard, or potential untimely failure of the work of this
Section or the Work as a whole.
B. Provide 25 year warranty for the factory applied finish coating.
1.17 EXTRA MATERIAL
A. Provide 3% of composite metal panels as extra/spare material.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
(NOT USED)
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Use galvanised sub-frames, steel tubes, steel angles, bars, rods,

anchors, inserts or other steel accessories to reinforce assembly of
aluminium components. Galvanize steel as per ASTM A 123. Where
galvanizing is not compatible use shop painted chromate primer.
B. Use aluminium angles, plates, bars and other aluminium members to

reinforce and join the aluminium panels to substructure elements. Alloy
to be recommended by manufacturer or fabricator to develop required
strength.
C. Gaskets, filling and sealing materials shall be whether-resistant and

subject to Engineer’s Representative approval.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. All panels shall be formed to specified dimension with tolerances to

accommodate expansion and contraction between panels and structure
members.
B. Accessory and trim components shall be factory fabricated and ready

for installation.

Fahd Road
2.4 FACTORY FINISHING
A. The surface shall be finished with fluorocarbon coating on the top side
and a service coating on the reverse side.
1. Solid colour. two-coat, two bake system with a dry film thickness
of minimum 35µ.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect delivered materials upon receipt to ensure that no damage has

occurred during shipment.
B. Inspect substrate where panels are to be installed and verify that

substrate tolerances, as required have been met.
C. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.3.2 PREPARATION
A. Verify that substrate layout complies with shop drawing layout.
B. Report any variations and potential problems to the engineer’s

Representative.
C. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Bracing: Provide bridging and bracing as recommended by

manufacturer, as necessary, and as indicated on approved shop drawings.
Provide kick-back bracing perpendicular to plane of framing system and
securely anchored to building structure as needed to comply with
specified performance requirements.
B. Erect panels plumb, level, and true.
C. Anchor panels securely in place in accordance with manufacturer's

approved shop drawings.
D. Conform to panel manufacturer's instructions for installation of

concealed fasteners.
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate

construction tolerances and other irregularities. Erect the aluminum
entrance and storefront systems plumb and level, free of warp or twist.
1. Install 2 mm per 3 m, non cumulative, maximum variation from

plumb.
Fahd Road
2. Install 1.5 mm maximum misalignment of two adjoining
members abutting in plane.
3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Clean all aluminum components promptly after installation, exercising

care to avoid damage. Thoroughly clean all metal surfaces free from
dirt, handling marks, packing tapes, and foreign matter; remove excess
sealant.
B. Remove protective film after installation. Touch-up all scratches,

abrasions, and other defects in the prefinished metal surfaces with
shop-coat finish material, supplied with the various items to be
furnished hereunder.
C. The manufacturer shall advise the Contractor of protective treatment

and other precautions required by him through the remainder of
construction to ensure that the work of this Section will be without
damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion of the
Contract.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 07620
SHEET METAL FLASHINGS AND TRIMS
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Sheet metal flashing to all locations in conjunction with the roofs.
B. Sealant in conjunction with sheet Metal Work specified herein.
1.2 RELATED SECTION

of work intended.
1. Section 07550 : Built up Roof System
1.3 REFERENCES

1. ASTM B209 Standard Specification for Aluminium and Alloy

sheet and plate.
2. BS 3416 Black Bitumen Coating Solution for Cold
Application.

Jurisdiction.
requested.
III-2/07620/ Sheet Metal Flashing
RADCARE - B01- King 65 and Trims
Fahd Road
A. Shop Drawings showing material profile, jointing pattern, jointing
details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation
details.
B. Schedule of flashing types and locations.
C. Samples: Sample of each metal flashing type, showing metal finish,

colour, etc.
1.5 QUALIFICATION
A. Fabricator and Installer: Specialist in sheet metal flashing work with 5

years experience.
1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A. Convene one week before starting this Work.
A. Stack pre-formed and pre-finished material to prevent twisting,

bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to
ensure drainage.
B. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or

staining.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide a warranty of twenty five (25) years for the coating.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Aluminium Sheet: BS 1470 alloy and/or ASTM B 209.
B. Aluminium flashing: Sheet Aluminium, mill finish, having a minimum

thickness as specified herein below, for the applications indicated:
1. Exposed to weather flashings and trim: 1.3mm thick
2. Apron flashing, 1.3mm
3. Base flashing, 1.3mm
4. Coping covers, cap flashings, 1.3mm thick.
5. Roof penetrations: 1.3mm
6. Gutters: 1.5mm thick
7. Etc.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Same material and finish as flashing metal; with soft

Fahd Road
neoprene washers.
B. Protective Backing Paint: Bituminous.
C. Sealant: Polyurethane type as Section 07900.
D. Bedding Compound: Butyl type.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square and free from
distortion or defects.
B. Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, minimum 150 mm wide,

inter lockable with sheet.
C. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.
D. Hem exposed edges on underside; mitre and seam corners.
E. Form material with flat lock seams.
F. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 450 mm long legs;
seam for rigidity, seal with sealant.
G. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed and hemmed to form
drip.
H. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 50 mm over roofing. Return

and brake edges.
2.4 FINISH
A. High performance powder coating as per AAMA 2604.
B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a

minimum dry finish thickness of 0.4 mm.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify roof openings, kerbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof
are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located.
B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and
secure.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.
B. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels. Seal top of
Fahd Road
reglets with sealant.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Conform to drawing details and contract requirements.
B. Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit. Wedge in place. Seal
flashings into reglets with sealant.
C. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt

flashings.
D. Fit flashings tight in place fit for the purpose. Make corners square,
surfaces true and straight in plane, and lines accurate to profiles.
E. Seal metal joints watertight.
3.4 ON-SITE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to

ascertain compliance with Specification.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 07840
FIRE STOPPING
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Provide all labour, material, plant, equipment and appliances and

perform all necessary operations required to execute the work of this
section.

of Works intended.

3. Division 15 : Mechanical & Works (as applicable)
4. Division 16 : Electrical Works (as applicable)
B. Provide electrical wiring and connections as specified in Division 16.
1.3 REFERENCES

1. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning

2. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of
RADCARE - B01- King III-2/07900/10 Joint Sealers
Fahd Road
3. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of
Through-Penetration Fire Stops.
4. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint
Systems.
5. ASTM E2307 - Standard Test Method for Determining the
Fire Resistance of Perimeter Fire Barrier
Systems Using the Intermediate Scale Multi
Story Test Apparatus.
C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and

Materials.
2. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
3. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
4. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint
Systems.
5. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.

Jurisdiction.
requested referenced standards as and when requested.
A. This section establishes requirements for the furnishing of fire

protection and fire retardant materials to all gaps, voids and surrounds
to all building components, services and materials when installed in the
works to achieve the fire resistance required between adjoining spaces
or where necessary to prevent passage of smoke and fire, including pipes,
ducts and conduits, linear joint openings, and safing gaps.
A. Provide firestopping system(s) of sufficient thickness, width and density

to provide and maintain all required fire resistance rating, in
accordance with local Fire Department and jurisdictional authorities.
B. At penetration of fire rated walls, partitions, ceilings or floor

construction, completely pack voids with 96 kg/cu m density fibreglass
material or 64 kg/cu m density rockwool material to full thickness of the
penetrated element (as required by listed system) and seal both ends
with approved fire rated sealant.
C. - B01-
RADCARE Provide
King materials which are compatible with all materials Joint
III-2/07900/11 usedSealers
in the
Fahd Road
system including materials used in or on penetrants as well as all
construction materials used in conjunction or contiguous with the
system.
D. Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to

install fill materials. Use only components specified by the firestopping
manufacturer and approved by the testing and inspections agency for
the designated fire resistance rated system.
E. Provide products that once fully dried or cured will not re-emulsify,
dissolve, leach, breakdown or otherwise deteriorate over time from
exposure to atmospheric moisture, sweating pipes, ponding water or
other forms of moisture characteristic during or after construction.
A. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance

and limitation criteria.
B. Submit samples, shop drawings, specifications, fire stopping and

smoke sealing thickness calculations, description of system and
manufacturers installation method in accordance with the Contract
Documents. Submission shall indicate all dimensions, details of
construction, details of installation, relation and connections with
adjoining work, fastenings, anchorages, and shop and site finishes.
C. Submit in accordance with the Contract Documents copies of the

following information from the manufacturer, and confirm that one copy
of each item has been distributed to the installer:
1. Certificate (in the form of standard data sheet or letter) that

fireproofing/firestopping material to be used complies with these
specifications
2. Statement that each product to be supplied is recommended for
the application shown.
A. Provide materials and components and perform work in accordance

with relevant ASTM and/or UL Standards, including but not limited to
the following:
1. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.

2. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint
Systems.
3. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of
Through-Penetration Fire Stops.
4. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire Resistive
Joint Systems.
5. ASTM E2307 - Standard Test Method for Determining the
Fahd Road
Fire Resistance of Perimeter Fire Barrier Systems Using the Intermediate Scale
Multi Story Test Apparatus.
B. All products used must conform to the requirements of Local Fire

Department.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products

specified in this section with minimum 5 years documented and proven
experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section

with minimum 2 years documented and proven experience and
approved by manufacturer and the Engineer. Preference shall be given
to an applicator certified by FM Approvals (FMG) in accordance with
FM 4991, “Standard for Approval of Firestop Contractors” or a “UL
qualified Contractor”.
1.9 MOCK-UP
A. Apply firestop material to a representative substrate surface of each

type like masonry, concrete, stud wall, substrate surface, pipes, ducts,
conduits, etc.
B. If accepted, mockup will demonstrate minimum standard for the Work.
C. Mockup may remain as part of the Work as directed by the Engineer.
A. Deliver firestopping products to project site in original, unopened

containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers’ labels
identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number,
shelf life, if applicable.
B. Store and handle firestopping materials to prevent their deterioration or

damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other
causes.
C. Do not cover up firestopping installations that will become concealed

behind other construction until checked by Engineer.
A. Do not apply materials when temperature of substrate material and

ambient temperature are not in accordance with manufacturers
instructions.
Fahd Road
B. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials.
1.12 CO-ORDINATION
A. Co-ordinate work with other Divisions, namely Mechanical and

Electrical.
1.13 FIRE STOPPING WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall furnish written warranty of Ten (10) years, agreeing to

repair or replace work which has shown any evidence of deterioration,
failed to provide an airtight seal, failed to provide a watertight seal
where required, failed in adhesion or cohesion, or failed as a result of
defects in materials of workmanship. Upon notification of such defects,
within the warranty period, make necessary repairs or replacement as
per urgency shown by the Employer.
A. Conform to applicable code for design and installation of fire stops to

Local Fire Department regulations for flame/smoke requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Manufacturers specified hereinafter are specified for the purposes of

establishing minimum quality standards. Manufacturers equal to, or
better than those specified, and which conform to the Engineer’s
design requirements and colour selections, may be acceptable subject
to the Engineer’s approval.
2.2 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
(NOT USED)
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Firestop Materials: Provide only Firestop systems, which have been

tested and listed as Firestop systems to meet every condition of the
work. Do not provide materials or systems not part of a tested and
listed Firestop system suitable for the condition.
B. Auxiliary Materials: Provide the miscellaneous accessory items

necessary to complete each Firestopping condition, including, but not
limited to, fillers, mechanical fastenings, support devices, collars,
sleeves, and other materials, as made or recommended by the
Firestop material manufacturer and tested and listed with the rated
Firestop system.

Fahd Road
C. Firestop Sealant: For small openings of 300mm diameter or less,
penetrations subject to movement, in non combustible pipes, non
combustible conduits, non combustible ducts, control joints, slab edge
and exterior wall voids, as a sealant for smoke barrier construction, fire
and smoke dampers, head of wall details and fire doors in masonry or
gypsum drywall partitions.
D. Provide one of the following:
1. Silicone Sealants: One part, low modulus moisture-activated

alkoxy-cure silicone capable of withstanding high movement in
compression and extension.
2. Intumescent Sealant: Graphite based, one part intumescent
paste unaffected by water or moisture when cured containing no
solvents, inorganic fibres, water soluble intumescent ingredients, or
silicone compounds and capable of expanding a minimum 8
times.
3. Elastomeric Spray and Coatings: Elastomeric coatings designed
for architectural joints containing dynamic movement due to
seismic, wind sway or thermal expansion conditions.
E. Firestop Mortars/Compounds:
For penetrations such as cable trays, electrical and communication

bundles and non-combustible sleeves and pipes:
Pre-packaged dry mixes of inorganic binders, portland cement, fillers

and lightweight aggregate mixed with water to form a non shrinking,
homogenous mortar shall be fire impact resistant, load bearing, non
moving.
F. Firestopping for Combustible Penetrating Items:
For use, in openings where plastic pipes insulated pipes or insulated

cables are installed. Provide one of the following:
1. Intumescent Graphite Based Sealants:

One part graphite based Intumescent sealant unaffected by
water or moisture when cured and capable of expanding a minimum
8 times.
2. Firestop Devices
Prefabricated devices unaffected by humidity, moisture and
frost.
3. Intumescent Wrap Strips:
Solvent free Intumescent wrap strips, comprised of a graphite
impregnated rubber matrix faced on both sides with
RADCARE - B01- Kingpolyethylene, unaffected
III-2/07900/15 Joint Sealers
by water, frost or ultraviolet light.
Fahd Road
G. Firestopping for Large Complex Multiple Service Penetrations:
For large vertical openings, containing multiple complex penetrations,

non combustible pipes, non combustible conduits, non combustible
ducts, control joints, slab edge and exterior wall voids, as a sealant for
smoke barrier construction, fire and smoke dampers, head of wall
details in masonry or gypsum drywall partitions.
1. Composite Sheet:
Lightweight firestop panel comprised of graphite-based
intumescent material capable of expanding a minimum 15 times
sandwiched between galvanized steel backer sheet and wire
mesh covered with aluminum foil on one side for medium to
large sized openings.
H. Firestopping for Cable Trunking Internals
For use inside cable trunking at the point of passage through

compartment wall or floor.
1. Pilllows/Bags:
Re-usable, dustless, intumescent heat expanding pillows/bags
composed of plastic jacketed blocks of mineral fibre
encapsulated on all six sides with graphite-based intumescent
material.
2. Formed Compressible Bricks:
Re-usable, dustless, gas tight, Intumescent heat expanding
bricks composed of water insoluble expansion agents and fire
retardant additives.
I. Firestopping for Diamond Cored Holes
1. Formed Compressible Plugs:

Re-usable, dustless, gas tight, Intumescent heat expanding
plugs composed of water insoluble expansion agents and fire
retardant additives.
2. Intumescent Sealant:
Graphite based, one part Intumescent paste unaffected by water
or moisture when cured containing no solvents, inorganic fibres,
or silicone compounds capable of expanding a minimum 8
times.
J. Intumescent, Non-hardening Firestop Putty:
Non-hardening intumescent putty consisting of a 100% solids butyl

rubber base for use in openings having a nominal diameter of 152 mm
Fahd Road
or less.
K. Fire Rated Pathway Product:
For all low voltage cabling, allow only fire rated cable pathway product
with built-in fire and smoke sealing system allowing for 0 to 100 percent
visual cable fill with zero maintenance required. Such device shall
incorporate integral sealing mechanism that cannot be removed during
cable changes and requires no external action to activate sealing
system.
L. Damming Material/Void Fillers:
Non combustible insulation for use as a damming material and/or void

filler for tested and rated Firestop system(s).
M. Cleaner:
As required by Firestopping manufacturer and compatible with selected

system and contiguous material.
N. Masking Tape
Size and Tape as recommended by Fire Stopping manufacturer and

compatible with selected system and contiguous materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section.

B. Before beginning installation in any area, examine all parts of the
building into which the applicable work is to be placed. Should any
conditions be found which will prevent the proper execution of this
work, do not proceed in that area until such conditions are corrected by the
Contractor.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or

other matter which may affect bond of firestopping material and
following manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Remove incompatible materials which may affect bond.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Install material at walls or partition openings which contain penetrating

sleeves, piping, ductwork, conduit and other items, requiring
firestopping.
Fahd Road
B. Apply or install firestopping strictly in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions, using recommended equipment, installing all
necessary background reinforcements, fixings, restraints, or other
accessories required to comply with the performance requirements of
this section and as indicated on the drawings.
C. Co-ordinate schedule for firestopping in conjunction with timetable for

installing materials affected by or affecting work of this section.
D. Any firestopping penetrated by fixings or other materials shall be

repaired to maintain the integrity of the firestopping.
E. Provide ventilation as required by manufacturer for installation in

enclosed areas.
F. Apply fire proofing in thicknesses required to comply with specified

periods of fire resistance.
G. Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
H. Place foamed materials in layers to ensure homogenous density, filling

cavities and spaces. Place sealant to completely seal junctions with
adjacent dissimilar materials.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent surfaces of fire stopping materials.
B. Leave all work clean following installation. The Contractor shall be

responsible for protecting the completed work from excessive dirt,
misuse and damage.
C. Any damage shall be repaired and parts replaced, including repairs to
adjacent work damaged in connection with work of this section.
D. Damaged work of this section shall be repaired in strict accordance

with manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
3.6 HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. All items for site application shall be delivered in manufacturer's original

unopened containers clearly identified and labelled as to use. Store in
accordance with manufacturers instructions off the ground, under cover
and fully protected from weather, sun and construction activities.
RADCARE - B01- King III-2/07900/18

END OF SECTION Joint Sealers
Fahd Road
SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall become familiar with other sections of the

specification affecting work of this trade.
B. The work covered by this Section as indicated on the drawings and as

specified herein, comprises of furnishing all plant, labour, equipment,
appliances and materials for performing all operations in connection
with the preparation of substrate and application of sealants.
C. Work Included:
1. Sealant work around all exterior and interior openings, joints and
spaces, as specified.
2. Provide sealant at both sides of openings which normally require
sealants, including but not limited to the following:
a. Joints around exterior door frames and louvers.
b. All joints at perimeter of interior metal frames and
adjoining masonry and concrete surfaces.
c. Expansion and control joints.
d. All joints and areas to accomplish a sealed building.
3. Sealant work will normally be performed under the work of other
Sections but shall be performed in strict accordance with the
provisions of this Section.

related sections within the Project Specifications. It is not necessary
of work intended.
1. Section 07840 : Firestopping

RADCARE - B01- King III-2/07900/ Joint Sealers

Fahd Road 19
1.3 REFERENCES

the referenced standards the most stringent of the
conditions/requirements shall be applicable.
1. ASTM C717 - Terminology of Building Seals and Sealants.

2. ASTM C719 - Standard Test Method for adhersion and
cohesion of elastomeric joint sealants under
cycle movement (Hockmen Cycle)
3. ASTM C794 - Standard Test Method for adhesion-in-peel of
elastomeric Joint Sealants.
4. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants.
5. ASTM C919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in
Acoustical Applications.
6. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint
Sealants.
7. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.
8. ASTM C1299 - Standard Guide for use in selection of liquid
applied sealants.
9. ASTM C1401 - Standard Guide for Structural Sealant
Glazing.
10. ASTM C1472 - Standard Guide for calculating Movement and
other effects when establishing sealant joint
width.
11. ASTM C1481 - Standard Guide for use of Joint Sealants with
Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems
(EIFS).
12. ASTM C1518 - Standard Specification for procured
clastomeric silicone joint sealants.
13. ASTM C1523 - Standard test method for determining
modules, tear and adhesion properties of
precured elastomeric joint sealants.
14. ASTM D1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular
Materials-Sponge or Expanded Rubber.
Materials-Vinyl Chloride Polymers and
Copolymers (Open-Cell Foam).

Fahd Road 20
Materials-Vinyl Chloride Polymers and
Copolymers (Closed-Cell Foam).
17. ASTM D2628 - Standard Specification for Preformed
Polychloroprene Elastomeric Joint Seals for
Concrete Pavements.
C. BS Standards
1. BS 3712 - Building and Construction sealants. Methods of

test for homogeneity, relative density and
penetration.
2. BS 6093 - Design of joints and jointing in building
Construction, guide.
3. BS 6213 - Selection of Construction Sealants, Guide.
D. SWRI – Sealant and Caulking Guide
Specification. E. FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS:
1. TT-S-00227 for Elastomeric sealing compound

2. TT-S-001543A for Silicone Rubber base
F. All applicable local codes, regulations etc of Authorities having

Jurisdiction.
requested.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
Type S Single component

Type M Multi-component
Grade P Pourable or self-leveling sealant for horizontal applications
Grade NS Nonsag for vertical applications
Class 25 Withstands increase and decrease of at least 25 percent of
joint width
Class 12.5 With stands increase and decrease of at lease 12.5 percent
of joint width
Use T Pedestrian and vehicular traffic areas such as walkways,
plazas, decks, and parking garages
Use NT Nontraffic areas, horizontal and vertical
surfaces Use M Meets this specification when tested on
mortar Use GMeets this specification when tested on glass
Use A Meets this specification when tested on aluminum
Fahd Road 21
Use O Meets this specification when tested on substrates other
than above
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. The following submittals, as defined in Section for Submittal.
1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications,

performance data, chemical and physical properties and
installation instructions for each item furnished hereunder.
2. Manufacturer's certification that the Products supplied meet or
exceed specified requirements.
3. Compatibility and adhesion test reports: Test reports from
sealant manufacturer indicating that sealant proposed for use
have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with actual
samples of substrates to be used on this project. Include sealant
manufacturer’s interpretation of test results, and
recommendations for primers and substrate preparation specific
to this project.
4. Selection samples: Sample card indicating Manufacturer's full
range of colors available for selection.
5. Verification samples: Install 300mm long samples of sealant for
verification of color.
A. Maintain one copy each of referenced document covering installation

requirements on site.
B. Comply with manufacturers instructions.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Applicator specializing in applying the work of this Section with a

minimum of three (3) years documented experience approved by the
Engineer's Representative.
B. Obtain joint sealers from a single manufacturer for each type specified.
Conform to SWRI requirements for installation.
A. Each container and package must bear an unbroken seal, test number
and label of the manufacturer upon delivery to the site. Failure to
comply with these requirements shall be sufficient cause for rejection of
the material in question, by the Engineer’s Representative and his
requiring its removal from the site. New material conforming to said
requirements, shall be promptly furnished at no increase in Contract
Price.

Fahd Road 22
A. Do not install single component solvent curing sealant in enclosed

building spaces.
B. Environmental Requirements: Maintain temperature and humidity

recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and 24 hours after
installation. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers under the
following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are below

40 degrees F.
2. When joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation,
or other causes.
C. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until contaminates

capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from substrates.
1.10 MOCKUP
A. Construct mockup of sealant joints in conjunction with window, wall,

partitions specified in other sections.
B. Construct mockup with specified sealant types and with other

components noted.
1. Determine preparation and priming requirements based on

manufacturers recommendations; take action necessary for
correction of failure of sealant tests on mock-up.
2. Verify sealants, primers, and other components do not stain
adjacent materials.
C. Locate where directed by Engineer’s Representative.
D. Incorporate accepted mockup as part of Work if approved by

A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by sealant

manufacturer during and after installation.
1.12 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Work with sections referencing this section.
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall provide ten (10) years warranty for all products and
their installation under this section. Warranty shall include coverage of
installed sealant and accessories which fail to achieve air tight and
watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.

Fahd Road 23
PART 2 PRODUCTS
(NOT USED)
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Hardnesses specified are intended to indicate the general range

necessary for overall performance. Consult manufacturer's technical
representative to determine the actual hardness recommended for the
conditions of installation and use. Unless otherwise recommended by
the manufacturers technical representative provide sealant within the
range of hardness (20 to 60) (Shore A, fully cured at 75 oF):
B. Modulus of Elasticity: For joints subject to either thermal expansion or

dynamic movement, provide elastomeric sealants which have the
lowest modulus of elasticity which is consistent with exposure to
abrasion or vandalism. For horizontal joints subject to traffic, provide
sealants with high modulus of elasticity, as required to withstand
indentation by stiletto heels. Comply with manufacturer's
recommendations wherever no other requirements are indicated.
C. Compatibility: Before purchase of each specified sealant, investigate its

compatibility with joint surfaces, joint fillers and other materials in the
joint system. Provide only materials (manufacturer's recommended
variation of specified materials) which are known to be fully compatible
with the actual installation condition, as shown by manufacturer's
published data or certification.
D. Sealant backer rod shall be compressible rod stock polyethylene foam,

polyethylene-jacketed polyurethane foam, butyl rubber foam, neoprene
foam or other flexible, permanent, durable nonabsorptive material as
recommended for compatibility with sealants by sealant manufacturer.
Provide size and shape of rod which will control the joint depth for
sealant placement, break bond of sealant at bottom of joint, form
optimum shape of sealant bead on back side, and provide a highly
compressible backer to minimize the possibility of sealant extrusion
when joint is compressed.
E. Joint cleaners shall be the type of joint cleaning compound

recommended by sealant manufacturer for the joint surfaces to be
cleaned.
F. Joint primer/sealer shall be the type of joint cleaning primer/sealer

recommended by sealant manufacturer for joint surfaces to be primed
or sealed.
2.3 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Joint Sealer Type AA (Acrylic acoustical): One component acrylic latex,

permanently elastic, non-staining, non-shrinking, non-migrating and
paintable.
B. Joint Sealer Type AP (Acrylic painters caulk): One component acrylic
Fahd Road 24
latex caulking/ polysulphide compound, conforming to ASTM C 834,
paintable within 24 hours after application, with a minimum movement
capability of ±12.5 percent.
C. Joint Sealer Type HL2 (Horizontal-self-Leveling, 2-component):
Pouring grade self-leveling multi-component urethane sealant,
conforming to FS TT-S-00227E, Type I, Class A, and ASTM C 920,
with a minimum movement capability of ±25 percent.
D. Joint Sealer Type HT (Horizontal-Trowel): Trowel grade multi-

component modified urethane/polysulphide sealant, conforming to FS
TT-S-00227E, Type I, Class A, and ASTM C 920, with a minimum
movement capability of ±25 percent.
E. Joint Sealer Type P1 (Silicone, general construction): One-part

medium modulus, natural cure, synthetic sealant, having a useful life
expectancy of at least 20 years, conforming to ASTM C 920, Type S,
NS, Class 25, use NT, G, A, M, O with a minimum movement capability
of ±50 percent.
F. Joint Sealer Type BP2 (Polyurethane/polysulphide, Multi-component):

Low modulus type, Multicomponent non-sagging gun-grade
polyurethane sealant, conforming to FS TT-S-00227E, TypeII, Class A,
and ASTM C 920, Type M, Class 25, Grade NS, use NT,M, A and O
G. Joint Sealer Type P2 (Polyurethane/polysulphide, Multi-component):

Low modulus type, Multi-component non-sagging gun-grade
polyurethane sealant, conforming to FS TT-S-00227E, Type II, Class
A, and ASTM C 920, Type M, Class 25, Grade NS, use NT,M, A and O
H. Joint Sealer Type SC (Silicone, general construction): One-part

medium modulus, natural cure, synthetic sealant, having a useful life
NS, Class 25, use NT, G, A, M, O with a minimum movement capability
of ±50 percent.
I. Joint Sealer Type SE (Silicone, Exterior construction): One-part low

modulus, moisture curing, synthetic rubber sealant, having a useful life
NS, Class 25, FS TT-S-001543A, Type, Class A with a minimum
movement capability of +100 percent and -50 percent.
J. Joint Sealer Type SM (Silicone, Mildew-resistant): USDA approved one

component acetoxy silicone rubber, mildew resistant, acceptable to
local health officials, conforming to U.S. Food and Drug Administration
regulation 21 CFR 177.2600, FS TT-S-001543A, Type Non-Sag, Class
A, and FS TT-S-00230C, Type II, Class A and ASTM C 920, Type S,
Class 25, Grade NS, use NT,G and A with a minimum movement
capability of ±25 percent, and a Shore A hardness of 20.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
Fahd Road 25
A. Compressible joint bead back-up: Compressible closed cell
polyethylene, extruded polyolefin foam or polyurethane foam rod, 1/3
greater in diameter than width of joint. Shape and size of compressible
back-up shall be as recommended by manufacturer for the specific
condition used (only closed cell rods will be considered).
B. Primers: Furnish and install joint primers of the types, and to the extent,
recommended by the respective sealant manufacturers for the specific
joint materials and joint function.
C. Bond-breaker tape, and temporary masking tape: Of types as

recommended by the manufacturer of the specific sealant and caulking
material used at each application, and completely free from
contaminants which would adversely affect the sealant and caulking
materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to
receive the work of this Section.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrates and site

conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C 1193.
B. Weather conditions must be dry and of the temperature, as

recommended by sealant manufacturer, during application operations.
C. Surface receiving work of this section must be absolutely dry and dust
free. All joints receiving sealant and caulking materials and be subject
to the approval of the material manufacturer for proper use of the specified
materials.
D. Thoroughly clean all joints, removing all loose mortar, oil, grease, dust,
frost, and other foreign materials that will prevent proper adhesion of
primers and sealant materials.
a. Clean ferrous metals of all rust and coatings by wire brush,

grinding or sandblasting. Remove oil, grease and protective
coatings with cleaners recommended by sealant manufacturer.
E. If so recommended and furnished by the specific sealant manufacturer,

apply primer to all joint surfaces, taking care not to stain adjacent surfaces.
F. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
3.3 INSTALLATION
Fahd Road 26
A. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193.
B. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM

C919. Seal joints on both sides of partitions to ensure Optimum Sound
Control. Apply sealant for the perimeter of all enclosures to seal sound
transmittance by flanking.
C. Install joint bead back-up in all joints in excess of 16mm depth, and
joints that have no backup therein, placing the joint bead in the joint in
a manner that will assure a constant depth 3mm greater than the
sealant and caulking material depth tolerances.
1. Set beads into joints continuously, by slightly stretching during

placement, to permit compression against sides of joint, without
surface wrinkles or buckles.
2. Do not stretch back-up material into joints.
D. Install bond breaker in joints where shown in the Drawings and

wherever recommended by the sealant manufacturer to prevent bond
of the sealant to surfaces where such bond might impair the Work.
E. Apply masking tape or other precautions to prevent migration or

spillage of materials onto adjoining surfaces.
F. Apply urethane/polysulphide sealant and latex caulking materials into

joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using mechanical
or power caulking gun equipped with nozzle of appropriate size, with
sufficient pressure to completely fill the joints.
1. The depth of sealant and caulking materials shall be in

accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for the
specific joint function, but in no case exceed 12mm in depth, nor
less than 6mm, regardless of the joint width.
2. Maintain the outer edge of the sealant and caulking materials,
where side faces of joints are in the same plane, back 3mm from
the faces.
3. Apply sealant in continuous beads without open joints, voids or
air pockets so as to provide a watertight and airtight seal for the
entire joint length.
4. After placement of the sealant and caulking materials, concave-
tool the surfaces to uniform density, using a water-wet tool. Do
not use detergents or soapy water for the tooling operations.
5. Remove the temporary masking tape immediately after tooling,
and before the sealant or caulking material has taken initial set.
G. Take care not to block-off weep tubes or any through wall opening
constructed to allow weeping of accumulated water.
H. Apply pouring self-leveling urethane/polysulphide sealant (Sealant
Fahd Road 27
designation HL) into horizontal joints in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, to a level approximately 2mm below adjacent surfaces.
1. Apply sealant without open joints, voids or air pockets so as to

provide a watertight and airtight seal for the entire joint length.
2. After placement of the sealant and caulking materials, concave-
tool the surfaces to uniform density, using a water-wet tool. Do
not use detergents or soapy water for the tooling operations.
3. Remove the temporary masking tape immediately after tooling,
and before the sealant has taken initial set.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean all surfaces of adjacent surfaces which have been marked or

soiled by the work of this Section, removing all excess sealant and
caulking materials with solvents which will not damage the surfaces in
any way.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. During the operation of sealant work, protect the work of other trades
against undue soilage and damage by the exercise of reasonable care
and precautions. Repair or replace any work so damaged and soiled.
B. Protect work from damage due to subsequent building operations until

handover to the client.
3.6 SCHEDULE
A. General: Seal joints indicated and all interior and exterior joints, seams,
and intersections between dissimilar materials.
B. Sealant Colors:
1. Colors for Sealant Types “P2” and “HL2”: Match colors furnished
by the Engineer’s Representative, or match other building materials
as directed. Should such custom colors not be available
from the approved manufacturer, except at additional charge,
provide all such colors at no change in Contract Sum.
2. Colors for Sealant Types “BP2”, P1”, “HT”, “SC”, “SE”, “SP”, and
“SM”: As selected by the Engineer’s Representative from
manufacturer’s standard colors.
3. Color for Sealant Types “AA” and “AP”: White.
4. In concealed installation and in partially or fully exposed
installation where so approved by the Engineer’s
Representative, standard gray or black sealant may be used.
C. Exterior joints (Listed by primary building material abutting sealant
joints):
1. Concrete (including precast):

Fahd Road 28
Joint Condition Sealant Type
a. Concrete to concrete, vertical control joints: P2
b. Concrete foundation walls to abutting concrete, HL2
and other non-bituminous pavements, steps,
platforms, and ends of ramp, (horizontal
joints):
c. Concrete slabs on grade to abutting non- HL2
bituminous pavements (horizontal joints,
including pedestrian traffic surfaces):
d. Concrete to concrete saw cut and tooled HL2
control and isolation joints in horizontal
surfaces including pedestrian traffic surfaces:
e. Concrete and non-bituminous sloped (5% to
12%) pavement ramps (horizontal joint) at HT
abutting concrete or masonry foundation
walls:
f. Concrete to all items which penetrate
exterior concrete walls, including, but not SE or P2
necessarily limited to, door frames, louver
frames, pipes, vents, and similar items:
g. Precast concrete to abutting materials
(vertical joints): P2

Fahd Road 29
2. Exterior Masonry:
a. Masonry to masonry, expansion and control P2
joints:
b. Masonry to abutting masonry, stone or P2
concrete:
c. Masonry to abutting non-porous materials SE
(painted metals, anodized aluminum, mill
finished aluminum, PVC, glass, and similar
materials):
d. Masonry to all items which penetrate P2
exterior masonry walls, including, but not
necessarily limited to, doorframes, louver
frames, pipes, vents, and similar items:
3. Exterior Metal:
a. Metal to metal: SE
b. Metal to glass: SE
4. Exterior Wood:
a. Wood to wood (natural or stained finishes): P1
b. Wood to wood (painted opaque finishes): P1
c. Wood to metal (painted opaque finishes): P1
D. Interior joints (Listed by primary building material abutting sealant

joints):
1. Interior Concrete:

a. Concrete to concrete (including precast), SC
vertical joints:
b. Concrete to concrete: horizontal walkable
surfaces: HL2
c. Concrete to concrete horizontal vehicular traffic
surfaces (including forklift) BP2
d. Concrete and non-bituminous pavement ramps
(5 to 12 percent) horizontal joints at abutting
vertical concrete or masonry surfaces. 12HT

Fahd Road 30
e. Concrete to all items which penetrate exterior
masonry walls, including, but not necessarily
limited to, door frames, louver frames, pipes,
vents, and similar items: SC
f. Precast concrete to abutting materials (vertical
joints): SC
2. Interior Masonry (excluding stone):

a. Masonry to masonry control joints: P2
b. Masonry to Gypsum board: Sc
c. Masonry to all items which penetrate exterior
walls, including, but not necessarily limited to,
window frames, door frames, louver frames,
pipes, vents, and similar items: SC
3. Gypsum Board:
a. Gypsum board to metal or wood trim: AP
b. Gypsum board to abutting surfaces at exposed
tops and bottoms partitions and walls: AA
c. Gypsum board to interior door & window
frames, penetrating conduits and piping, light-
fixtures, electrical cover plates, building
specialty items, ductwork, grilles, supply
diffusers, faucets, piping, escutcheon plates
and similar items: AP
d. Gypsum board to plumbing fixtures: SM
4. Plaster
a. Plaster to metal or wood trim: AP
b. Plaster to abutting surfaces at exposed tops
and bottoms partitions and walls: AA
c. Gypsum board to interior door and window
frames, penetrating conduits and piping, light-
fixtures, electrical cover plates, building
specialty items, ductwork, grilles, supply
diffusers, faucets, piping, escutcheon plates
and similar items: AP
d. Plaster to plumbing fixtures: SM
5. Architectural millwork and casework

Fahd Road 31
a. Casework to abutting materials, kitchens, toilet
rooms and similar “wet spaces”. SM
b. Casework to abutting surfaces (except in “wet”
spaces): AP
c. Countertops to abutting wall surfaces and to
abutting casework SM
d. Countertops to plumbing fixtures and fittings: SM
6. Interior metal:
a. Metal to metal: SC
7. Acoustical ceilings:
Joint Condition Sealant Typ e
a. Acoustical ceiling edge angle to irregular wall
surface AP
8. Tile:
Joint Condition Sealant Typ e
a. Tile to tile vertical, and horizontal non-traffic
joints: SM
b. Tile to tile, horizontal pedestrian traffic joints: HL2
9. Interior stone:
a. Stone to stone vertical, and horizontal non-
traffic joints: P2
b. Granite to gypsum board vertical, and
horizontal non-traffic joints: P2
c. Stone to stone horizontal pedestrian traffic
Joints: HL2
10. Interior Wood:
Wood to wood (natural or stained finishes) SC
Wood to wood (painted opaque finishes AP or SC
Wood to metal SC
Wood base to wall surfaces SC
END OF SECTION
Fahd Road 32
SECTION 08110
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish standard hollow metal doors, frames complete with internal

reinforcing hardware cutouts all as, specified and as shown on plans
and schedules.

of work intended:
1. Section 08212 : Wood Doors

2. Section 08710 : Door Hardware
1.3 REFERENCES

B. SDI standards
1. SDI-100 : Recommended specifications for standard

steel Door and Frames.
2. SDI-106-1999 : Recommended Standard Door Type
Nomenclature
3. SDI-108-1999 : Recommended Selection and Usage
Guide for Standard Steel Doors
RADCARE - B01- King III-2/08115/10 Stainless Steel Doors and Frames

Fahd Road
4. SDI-111-2000 : Recommended Details and Guidelines for
Standard Steel Doors, Frames, and
Accessories
5. SDI-112-1997 : Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed)
Standard Steel Doors and Frames
6. SDI-117-2000 : Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard
Steel Doors and Frames
7. SDI-118-2002 : Basic Fire Door Requirements
8. SDI-124-1998 : Maintenance of Standard Steel Doors and
Frames
C. ANSI standards
1. ANSI/UL 10B-1997 : Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

2. ANSI/UL 10C-1998 : Positive Pressure Fire Tests of
Door Assemblies
3. ANSI/UL 1784-2001 : Air Leakage Test of Door
Assemblies
4. ANSI/NFPA 80-1999 : Fire Doors and Fire Windows
5. ANSI/NFPA 252-1999 : Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
6. ANSI/SDI A250.3-1999 : Test Procedure and Acceptance
Criteria for Factory Applied Finish
Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel
Doors and Frames
Criteria for Physical Endurance for
Steel Doors, Frames, Frame
Anchors and Hardware Reinforcing.
8. ANSI/SDI A250.6-1997 : Recommended Practice for
Hardware Reinforcing on Standard
Steel Doors and Frames
9. ANSI/SDI A250.7-1997 : Nomenclature for Standard Steel
Doors and Steel Frames
10. ANSI/SD A250.8 : Recommended specifications for
standard steel Doors and Frames
Criteria for Prime Painted Steel
Surfaces for Steel Doors and
Frames
12. ANSI/SDI A250.11-2001 : Recommended Erection Instructions
for Steel Frames (Formerly SDI-105)
13. A115 : Hardware Preparation in Steel

Doors and Steel Frames
Fahd Road
14. A115.IG : Installation Guide for Doors and
Hardware
D. ASTM standards
1. ASTM A1008-2003 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,

Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-
Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-
Alloy with Improved Formability
Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy,
Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General
Requirements for
3. ASTM A1011-2001 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet and
Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-
Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-
Alloy with Improved Formability
Electrolytic Zinc-Coated, for Light Coating
Weight [Mass] Applications
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-
Dip Process
6. ASTM A924-1999 Standard Specification for General
Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-
Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
7. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning
E. National Fire Protection Association
1. NFPA 80 : Standard for fire Doors, fire windows.

Jurisdiction.
requested.
A. Manufacturer shall meet or exceed all standards as noted in this

Section.
B. Fire rated assemblies shall be manufactured in accordance with
Underwriters Laboratories and Local Fire Department requirements
and shall bear the appropriate labels for each application.
Fahd Road
C. No product shall be manufactured prior to receipt of approved
hardware schedule and templates.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. The following submittals, as defined in Section for submittals.
1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications,

for doors, frames and shop applied finishes.
2. Certifications: Manufacturer's written certification stating that
doors, frames and all related items to be furnished hereunder, meet
or exceed the requirements specified under this section: that
specified galvanized and shop priming has been performed and
fire- resistive requirements for the indicated Labels (KFD) have
been met.
3. Shop drawings: A complete schedule of doors and frames, to be
furnished hereunder, coordinated with the door and frame
schedule contained in the Contract Drawings. Large scale
details of each type door and frame construction. Indicating all
gages, cut outs for glazing in doors, reinforcing and anchorage.
A. Fire Rated door construction shall conform to Local Fire Department

(KFD) regulations and UL Requirements.
B. Install fire rated door assemblies in compliance with UL, NFPA 80 and
KFD requirements.
C. Doors for substations shall comply with MOE & EW requirements.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Co-ordinate the work of this section with the respective trades

responsible for furnishing hardware and installing doors and frames.
B. Ensure that the work performed hereunder is coordinated with issued
templates authorized by the hardware supplier.
C. Do not fabricate doors or frames before receiving a copy of the

approved hardware Schedule, submitted by the hardware supplier,
reviewed
RADCARE - B01- King by the Contractor and accepted
III-2/08115/13 by Steel
Stainless theDoors
Engineer's
and Frames
Fahd Road
Representative. Verify that issued templates are coordinated with the
approved schedule: immediately notify the Engineer's Representative,
in writing, of any conflicts.
1.9 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damage
may be repaired provided the refinished items are equal in respect to
new work and acceptable to the Engineer's Representative, otherwise
remove and replace damaged items.
B. Store doors and frames at the building site upright and under cover.
Place the units on wood dunnage and cover in a manner that will
prevent rust and damage.
C. Place the units atleast on 100mm high wood sills.
A. Verify field measurements before fabrication of the door units.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall provide a warranty of five (5) years against any defects
in materials and workmanship of the products of this section.
B. Ten (10) years warranty on coatings all types of coatings except high
performance powder coating. For High performance powder coating provide
twenty five (25) years warranty.
C. All warranties shall be effective from the date of substantial completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
(NOT USED)
2.2 DOORS
A. General: Refer to the Drawings for design of doors, sizes, glazing cut-
outs in doors and other details.
B. Fire rating noted on the door schedule is indicative only. Contractor

shall be fully responsible to provide all Fire rated or smoke sealed
doors (rating as required by KFD) at all locations indicated or otherwise
all as required by KFD within the Contract Price.

Fahd Road
C. Construction: Full flush commercial type 45 mm thick, unless noted
other wise, meeting or exceeding the materials, gauges, construction
and testing requirements of the referenced ANSI and SDI publications.
Construction of doors shall be as follows:-
Standard Doors shall be filled with polyurethane insulation foam with a
density of at least 40 Kg/m3 as per SDI standards.
1. Fire Rated doors shall be filled with mineral fibre wool with a
density of atleast 40 Kg/m3 as per SDI standard and KFD
requirements.
D. Interior Steel Doors: ANSI /SDI 100, grade II, heavy-duty (level 2),
Model 2 (seamless), 1.3 mm (16 Gage) Steel faces, with a minimum
STC rating of 32.
1. Fire-rated doors: Modify specified construction to meet all

construction requirements required for fire –resistive rating.
a. Affix appropriate KFD and UL labels to each rated door,

indicating applicable rating.
E. Exterior Steel Doors: ANSI /SDI 100, Grade III, extra heavy duty (Level
3), Model2 (Seamless), 1.7 mm (14 Gauge) galvanized steel faces,
with a minimum R factor of 12.
F. Hardware reinforcing: Welded in place in steel reinforcement, hot rolled

pickled and oiled steel as per ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/SDI A 250.4,
with the following minimum gauges:
1. Hinges 5.0 mm (7 gauge)
2. Kick plates, 1.2 mm (18 gauge)
3. Closers, locks and all other hardware : 2 mm (14 gauge)
4. Locations for reinforcing shall be determined from information
and templates provided under section for Hardware.
G. Cutouts ( Where indicated)
1. Manufacture doors with cutouts for required vision lites, louvres

and panels.
2. Vision lites shall be atleast 6mm clear tempered glass panel
unless noted more elsewhere in contract documents and/or
required by KFD regulations.
3. Factory install vision lites, louvres and panels. For substations
fabricate louvres as per MOE&EW requirements and standards.
H. Hardware
1. Premachine doors in accordance with templates from specified

hardware manufacturers and hardware schedule.
RADCARE - B01-
2. KingFactory install hardware.
III-2/08115/15 Stainless Steel Doors and Frames
Fahd Road
I. Provide UL Listed and KFD approved welded steel astragal at each
pair of fire doors.
J. Fabrication
1. Fabricate doors with hardware reinforcement welded in place.

2. Attach fire rated label to each door unit.
3. Close top and bottom edge of exterior doors with flush end
closure. Seal joints watertight.
2.3 SLIDING STEEL DOOR (MANUAL) – Where Indicated
A. Construction: As noted at Clause 2.2
B. Fabrication : As noted as Clause 2.2
C. Accessories: Each door shall have sliding track, wheel assemblies,

hookbolt Mortice lock, rubber stops, bottom guide wheels, pull handles,
etc. all complete. Provide fastenings and accessories for complete
installation of door including hardware.
2.4 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. General: Refer to the Door Schedule for various types of frames, sizes
and profiles KFD resistive Label frames and other characteristics of frames
and related items.
1. Frame type: shop welded frames with mitered joints arc-welded
reinforced and ground smooth, with neoprene rubber gasket
acoustical and smoke seal, inserted in built-in grove or (Silicone
Gasket).
B. Materials for frames, reinforcement, anchors, anchor clips and related

items. Commercial grade cold-rolled steel, conforming to ASTM A 1008
or commercial grade hot-rolled and pickled steel conforming to ASTM
A1011 and ASTM A568.
1. Frame gauge:
a. Steel frames: 1.3 mm (16 gauge), except as otherwise
required for specific KFD labeling.
2. Hinge , lock and strike reinforcement: 5 mm ,2mm each
3. Door closer reinforcement: 2.7 mm ( 12 gauge )
4. Floor clips: 5 mm thick.
5. Splice plates or channels: same gauge as door frame.
6. Glazing stops: 1.5 mm (16 gauge), except as otherwise required
for specific U value.
Fahd Road
7. Plaster guards: 0.45 mm (26 gauge).
8. Mortar guards; 0.45 mm (26 gauge).
C. Frame construction:
1. Fire-rated frame assemblies: Modify specified construction to

meet all construction requirements required for fire-resistive
rating.
a. Affix appropriate KFD labels to each rated frame assembly,

indicating applicable rating
2. Shop fabricate frames as whole single units per door opening,
except when frame size is too large to ship as a single unit.
Oversized frames may be shipped as Knock down units for field
assembly with concealed splice plates or channels.
3. Frame corner construction: As specified in paragraph A, above.
4. Reinforcements, stiffeners, and base angle clips: welded to
interior surfaces of frames to provide a stable base and so as
not to interfere with installation of hardware.
5. Provide plaster guards or mortar boxes, welded to frame, at
back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials may
obstruct hardware operation.
6. Appearance of finished frames: Strong, rigid, completely free
from warp and buckle, with miters well formed and in true alignment,
and with surfaces smooth and free from defects of any kind.
7. Silencer holes: Punch three holes in stop of strike jamb of door
frames for application of silencers.
8. Glazing beads: Where indicated carefully place to properly
accommodate the various thickness of glass and glazing
materials, and loosely attach to frames with flathead galvanized
steel screws through pre- drilled holes having countersunk
depressions.
D. Anchorage:
1. Anchor clips for frames in metal screw stud partitions: 1.3 mm

(16 Gauge) steel Z-shaped clips, 44 mm upturned and down
turned legs, or equivalent type standard with the manufacturer,
contained within the frames, for screw attachment to metal studs
under section for Metal Support Assemblies.
3. Anchor clips for frames in wood stud partitions: 18 - gauge steel
with 19mm high bendable straps or equivalent type standard
with the manufacturer, contained, for screw attachment to wood
studs.

Fahd Road
3. Anchors for frames in masonry walls: Adjustable T- Shaped
positively engaging the retainers on both flanges of each jamb
member, when placed. The stem of the anchors shall be 50 mm
wide by 2.7 mm (12 gauge) minimum, corrugated or perforated
for mortar bond, and extend 250 mm into the masonry, unless
4. Anchors for frames in existing masonry walls: Counter - sunk
bolts of minimum 6 mm diameter, set into masonry expansion
shields of 10 mm diameter.
5. Anchors for fire-resistive rated frames: Conform to all KFD
requirements for the specific fire - resistive ratings, and grout
accordingly.
6. Provide not less than 3 anchors, clips, or bolts per jambs upto
2200mm height, as applicable.
2.5 FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum variation for doors and frames: Maximum diagonal distortion

2 mm measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
A. Preparation: Clean all surfaces of all doors, frames, accessory items,

anchors and related items, to remove blemishes and foreign matter
and provide paint grip. Spot-fill imperfections with metallic filler, and
sand smooth. Thoroughly clean the surfaces by applying hot or cold
phosphate treatment standard with the manufacturer.
B. Following cleaning apply one dip or spray coat of rust - inhibitive

metallic oxide , zinc phosphate, epoxy primer to all surfaces, including
those which will be concealed after erection. Bake or oven dry, the
primer at time and temperature abrasion or as per manufacturers
standard.
C. Apply epoxy based intermediate coat and polyurethane based finish

coat over the primer.
D. Ensure coating thickness of minimum 200 microns.
E. Where powder coating is noted as finish on drawings, provide High

performance powder coating as per AAMA 2604.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable and in

compliance with these specifications and applicable codes.
Fahd Road
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION
A. General: Install frames and doors in accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendations. ANSI A 250.8/SDI – 100, SDI 105,
add the Door Hardware Institute recommendations. If any distortion occurs
it shall not exceed 2 mm when measured with a straight edge, corner
to corner Place in position all steel frames, in accordance with the
approved shop drawings and frame schedule.
1. Co-ordinate installation of frames with the various trades

installing abutting wall construction for anchor placement.
2. Provide rigid temporary bracing for frames as required to ensure
maintenance of positioning, and remove only after frames have
been permanently anchored.
3. Secure frames, occurring in existing masonry, with expansion
bolts and sleeves.
4. Where exposed fastener heads occur in frames, fill with
automotive body filler and sand smooth.
A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 2 mm measured with straight edge,

corner to corner.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 08212
WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

pertains to the fabricating, furnishing and installing of solid doors, flush
solid core wood doors, fire rated, non-fire rated, acoustic etc all
complete with internal reinforcing, hardware cut-outs; and provided with
openings for glazing where indicated and as required.

of work intended.
1. Section 08110 : Steel Doors and Frames

4. Division 16 : Electrical Works
1.3 REFERENCES

B. Window and Door Manufacturers Association.
1. WDMA I.S.1-A-2004 Architectural Wood Flush Doors.

III-2/08212/ Wood Doors
Fahd Road
2. WDMA I.S.6-99: Wood Stile and Rail Doors.
3. ANSI/WDMA I.S.6A-01: Architectural Wood Stile and Rail Door.
4. WDMA I.S.4-00: Water Repellent Preservative Non-Pressure
Treatment for Mill Work.
5. TM-6-88; Adhesive Bond Durability Test Method.
6. TM-7-90: Cycle Slam Test Method.
7. TM-8-90 Hinge Loading Resistance Test Method.
8. TM-10-90: Screw Holding Test Method.
C. American National Standards Institute:
1. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard.

2. ANSI A 208.2 - Standard Specification for Medium Density
Fiberboard.
1. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning

E. Architectural Woodwork Institute:
1. AWI - Quality Standards Illustrated.
F. Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association:
1. HPVA DFV1 – Standard for sliced decorative face veneer.
G. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1. NEMA LD 3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.
H. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors, Fire Windows.

2. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door
Assemblies.
I. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

2. UL - Building Materials Directory.
J. Uniform Building Code:
1. UBC Standard 7-2 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
K. All applicable Local Fire Department regulations, codes, local laws of

Authorities having jurisdiction.

Fahd Road
copy of the requested referenced standard as and when requested.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. The following submittals, as defined in Section for Submittals required.
B. Literature: Fabricator’s product data sheets, specifications, and

performance data.
C. Certification: Fabricator’s written certification stating that doors, meet or

exceed the requirements specified under this Section; that specified
shop finishing has been performed; and that all fire-resistive
requirements for the indicated Labels have been met.
1. Provide signed certification by agent of door manufacturer

stating that machining, glazing and finishing of doors shall be
performed by only the manufacturer in its facilities.
a. Door schedule: All doors specified under this Section,
shall be coordinated with the schedule contained in the
Contract Drawings.
b. Shop drawings: Elevations, and large scale sections and
details of door construction, indicating profiles, joinery
and cut-outs for hardware and glazing.
D. Samples:
1. Corner section of specified door, showing core construction and

joinery.
2. For finishes: submit two 300 mm by 300 mm mounted finished
samples of each specie of veneer specified.
3. Manufacturers range of veneers, laminates for colour, finish and
pattern.
A. All materials and workmanship shall conform in all respects to the

premium grades of the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) and
WDMA quality standards.
B. Comply with Sections 900, 1300, 1400, 1500 and 1700 of AWI as
applicable.

Fahd Road
A. Fire rated door construction shall conform to KFD, UL NFPA80

requirements.
B. Install firerated doors in compliance with KFD requirements and NFPA
publication 80 and 252 and ASTM E 2074.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the respective trades

responsible for furnishing hardware and installing wood doors.
B. Ensure that the work performed hereunder is coordinated with issued

templates authorized by the hardware supplier.
C. Do not fabricate doors before receiving a copy of the approved

hardware schedule, submitted by the hardware supplier, reviewed by
the Contractor and approved by the Engineer’s Representative. Verify
that issued templates are coordinated with the approved schedule;
immediately notify the Engineer’s Representative, in writing, of any
conflicts.
A. The Contractor is responsible to make certain that wood doors are not
delivered until the building and storage areas are sufficiently dry so that
the doors will not be damaged by excessive changes in ambient
humidity and relative moisture content.
B. Deliver wood doors in resilient non-staining moisture proof packaging,

provide protection during transit and job storage. Clearly identify doors
with door opening number, matching those indicated on the approved Door
Schedule.
C. Inspect doors upon delivery for damage. Minor damage may be

repaired provided the refinished items are equal in respects to new
work and acceptable to the Engineer’s Representative; otherwise
remove and replace damaged items.
D. Store doors flat on a level surface, in protected, elevated, dry areas;

protect from exposure from all sources of light and moisture. Seal top
and bottom edges if stored for more than one week. Break packaging
seal on-site to permit ventilation.
E. Strictly comply with Door Manufacturers instructions for delivery,

storage and handling of Doors.
1.9 QUALIFICATIONS

Fahd Road
B. Installer: Company specializing in installation of items in this section
with minimum five (5) years documented experience.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Work with door opening construction, door frame and door
hardware installation.
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall provide five (5) years of warranty for the products
including their installation, operation and debonding of veneer or
lamination, etc under this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
(NOT USED)
2.2 FLUSH FACED DOORS
A. General requirements: Conform to the requirements set forth in the

designated Sections of the Architectural Woodwork Institute Quality
Standards, and the applicable requirements of U.S. Commercial
Standard CS 171, as amended. Refer to the Drawings for sizes, finish,
locations of each type door, glazing cut-outs in doors, and other
characteristics of doors. Fire rating (if any) noted on the door schedule
is indicative only. Contractor shall be fully responsible to provide Fire
rated (rating as required) at all locations indicated and as required by
KFD within the contract price.
2.3 FIRE-RESISTANCE RATED (WHERE INDICATED)
A. General Construction: AWI Quality Standard, Section 1300, Type FD

Door thickness: 45mm, unless indicated otherwise and/or required by
KFD requirements.
B. Models: Comply with the following AWI Quality Standard construction.
C. Door facing: Veneer, Grade AA of AWI, 0.6mm minimum thick and

confirming to WDMA 1.S.1 series. Specie, cut and matching as noted
on drawings and/or as selected by the Engineer.
D. Core construction:

Fahd Road
1. Core: Non-combustible mineral sections.
2. Stiles: shall be such to suit the specified rating. Stile shall be
reinforced to receive full mortise hinges.
3. Top and bottom rails: Structural Composite Lumber (SCL) or UL
approved composite material to meet label requirements.
4. Blocking: provide composite blocking with improved screw
holding capability approved for use indoors of fire ratings
indicated as follows.
a. 5 inch top rail blocking.
b. 5 inch bottom rail blocking.
c. 5 inch midrail blockings in doors indicated to have exit
devices.
d. Blocking including stile of 4½ inch minimum net thickness
on the latch side of the door.
e. Stile of 1¼ inch minimum net thickness after trimming on
the hinge side of the door.
5. Seals: All fire/smoke seals shall be suitable for the ratings of the
door complying with the requirements of Local fire department,
BS 9999, Building Regulations Document B and the test
requirements of BS EN 1634-1.
E. Adhesives:
1. Face and core assembly: Type 1 (waterproof) complying with

ANSI A208.1 formaldehyde free.
F. Accessories: For all fire-rated doors installed in pairs with both leaves
active, provide 0.91 mm (20-guage) formed steel edges, and astragal,
to match door hardware lock sets or exit devices.
2.4 NON-RATED SOLID-CORE DOORS
A. Veneered Doors
1. Door Type: AWI Quality Standard, Section 1300, 45mm thick
unless indicated otherwise, Solid particle board core
construction.
2. Door Facing: Veneer, Grade AA of AWI, 0.6mm minimum thick
confirming to WDMA 1.S.1 series. Specie, cut and matching as
noted on drawings and/or as selected by the Engineer.
3. Door Construction Core: AWI Section 1300 Type PC-HPDL, 5
ply particle board core cross banded.
4. Adhesives: Type 1 for both face and core assembly. Resins
complying with ANSI A208.1. Shall be urea formaldehyde free.
5. Blocking: provide 5 inches wide minimum wood blocking for
installation of locksets, closers, exit devices, kick plates and
other hardware items.
6. Bonding: glue stiles and rails to core and sand core assembly
Fahd Road
prior to applying faces.
B. Laminated Doors
1. Door Type: AWI Quality standard Section 1300, 45mm thick

unless indicated otherwise, solid particle board core
construction.
2. Door Construction-Core: AWI Section 1300 Type PC-HPDL, 5
ply particle board core, cross banded.
3. Door Facing: High pressure laminate, 0.05 “Thick complying
with NEMA Standard LD-3”.
4. Adhesives: Type 1 for both face and core assembly. Resins
complying with ANSI A208.1. Shall be urea-formaldehyde free.
5. Blocking: provide 5 inches wide minimum wood blocking for
installation of locksets, closers, exit devices, kick plates and
other hardware items.
6. Bonding: glue stiles and rails to core and sand core assembly
prior to applying faces.
2.5 SOLID WOOD DOOR
A. Custom Fabricate Solid Wood Doors as per the patterns shown on the
drawing. Thickness for the doors shall be 45mm unless indicated
otherwise on the drawings. The wood specie shall be as noted on
drawing and confirm to the premium grade of AWI and/or WDMA.
Carving on wood (if any) shall be as approved on shop drawings.
2.6 SLIDING WOOD DOOR (MANUAL) – Where Indicated
A. Construction: As noted from Clause 2.3 to 2.6 and as applicable.
B. Fabrication: As noted at Clause 2.10.
C. Accessories: Each door shall have sliding track, wheel assemblies,

hookbolt Mortice lock, rubber stops, bottom guide wheels, pull handles,
etc. all complete. Provide fastenings and accessories for complete
installation of door including hardware. Sliding doors provided with
institutional recessed pulls and custom door pull handles.
2.7 DOOR FRAMES
A. Wood Frames: Comply with Section 900 of AWI. Frames shall be of

solid wood, minimum 45mm thick, width as shown on the drawings with
EPDM bubble gasket and architrave.
B. For firerated doors, frame shall be firerated, type as noted on Door

schedule.
C. Steel Frames: Refer Section 08110.

Fahd Road
2.8 GLAZING BEADS
A. Glazing beads for fire rated doors shall be complying with KFD
requirements with counter sunk mounting holes.
B. Glazing beads for other doors shall be as recommended by the door

manufacturer.
C. Inset window - double 6mm laminated safety glasses with internal manual
venetian blind controlled by means of a rotating knob.
2.9 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standard and WDMA

standards. Fabricate doors as per the performance duty levels laid
down by WDMA for Extra heavy duty doors. Fabricate rated doors in
compliance with UL requirements.
B. Laminate door facing, cross banding and assembled core in a hot

press.
C. Bond stiles and rails to cores, sand for uniform thickness. Sand
assemble door leaf in factory. Joints to be tongue and groove plus doweled
and grooved under pressure.
D. Machine doors to receive hardware from templates furnished under

section for DOOR HARDWARE in factory. Do not machine for surface
hardware.
E. Provide cut lite openings where scheduled in factory.
F. Provide inner blocks at lock edge, top of door and where necessary for
closer hardware reinforcement.
G. Fabricate doors for undercut where scheduled in factory.
H. Fabrication tolerances: Maximum diagonal distortion (warp): 6 mm

measured with straight edge from corner to corner over a maximum
1050mm by 2100mm surface area.
I. Protection metal edge in leaf.
2.10 CUTOUTS (WHERE INDICATED)
A. Manufacture doors with cutouts for required vision lites, louvers and
panels.
B. Vision lites shall be atleast 8mm clear tempered glass panels unless
noted more elsewhere in contract documents and/or required by KFD
regulations.
C. Factory installs vision lites, louvers and panels.

Fahd Road
2.11 X – RAY SHIELDING
A. With lead insert and special window as required.
2.12 CONTROL
A. Control Large optical pushbutton and/or exit push button and/or

movement sensors and/or access control system and/or card reader and/or
magnetic door lock integrated into the drive mechanism as selected and
approved by Engineer. Door handle to allow manual operation in the event
of power failure.
2.13 HARDWARE
A. Premachine doors in accordance with templates from specified

hardware manufacturers and hardware schedule.
B. Factory installs hardware.
2.14 SAFETY & SECURITY
A. Intelligent self learning movement and presence sensors to protect the

threshold and side screen areas
2.15 SOUND INSULATION
A. 32db
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect substrate and verify that it is in proper condition to receive the

work of this Section.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate.
C. Concrete work, masonry work, tile and marble setting and polishing
shall be completed and dry before installation of wood doors.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations,

AWI, WDMA, KFD, NFPA 80 and UL requirements.
B. Do not install doors until concrete, masonry, plaster, tile and other wet
work is completed and dried in the areas to receive doors.
C. Doors shall be conditioned to the average prevailing moisture

(humidity) of the locality before hanging. Doors shall not be subjected
to abnormal heat, dryness, or humidity. Avoid sudden changes such as
Fahd Road
forced heat.
D. Cutting, trimming, fitting and machining of prefinished doors will not be

permitted.
E. Install doors in required openings as shown. Install flush panels with

concealed fasteners.
F. Apply hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's instructions.

Adjust door installation to provide uniform clearance at head and
jambs, and to contact stops uniformly. Remove and replace doors which
are found to be warped, bowed or otherwise damaged and cannot be
properly fitted in frames.
G. Remove hardware before painting and refix after painting of doors is

completed. Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation at
completion.
3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Conform to AWI and WDMA requirements for fit and clearance

tolerances.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.
B. Adjust closer for full closure.
A. Cleaning: Upon completion of installation of doors, clean all exposed

surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Protection: Protect doors and hardware during construction. Replace

damaged components as directed by the Engineer’s Representative.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 08310
ACCESS DOORS AND PANEL
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

pertains to the fabricating, furnishing and installing of access doors and
panels.
B. Access doors and panels in all walls and ceilings where ever access is
required for repair and maintenance of items such as though not limited
to fan coil units, VAV units, valves, dampers, junction boxes, etc.

of work intended.
1. Section 04300 : Concrete Masonry Unit

2. Section 09100 : Metal Support Assemblies
3. Section 09260 : Gypsum Board Systems
4. Section 09510 : Acoustic Ceilings
5. Division 15 : Mechanical Works (as applicable)
1.3 REFERENCES

1. ASTM A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip

Products.
III-2/08310/ Access Doors and Panels

Fahd Road
2. ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-
Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
3. ASTM A167 - Specification for Stainless Steel and Heat-
Resisting Chromium – Nickel Steel plate Sheet
and strip.
5. ASTM F593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel
Bolts, Hexcap Screws and Studs.
6. ASTM F594 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts.

Jurisdiction.
requested.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following as per the requirements of Division 1 – General

Requirements:
1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications

and installation instructions.
2. Schedule: Submit Schedule of all access panels to be furnished
hereunder, indicating locations for each size and type of access
door.
a. Prior to submitting schedule, coordinate with the work of
Division 15, MECHANICAL and Division 16,
ELECTRICAL and meet with the Engineer’s
Representative to determine exact quantities and
locations required for the installation of access panels.
3. Shop drawings: Large scale details of access doors, indicating
all sizes, gauges and thickness; provide complete installation
details, coordinated to the specific receiving conditions.

A. Do not deliver access doors to the site, until all specified submittals
have been submitted to, and approved by the Engineer’s
Fahd Road
Representative.
B. Store access door units inside, under cover, and in manner to keep
them dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface
contamination, corrosion and damage from construction traffic and
other causes.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide a warranty of five (5) years for the products of this section
including their installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
(NOT USED)
2.2 ACCESS PANELS – GENERAL
A. General: Access panels scheduled for placement in cast in place

concrete or masonry shall be furnished with concrete or masonry
anchors, as applicable, attached to unit frames at factory.
2.3 ACCESS PANELS - FOR FIRE RESISTANCE RATED CONSTRUCTION
A. For fire-resistance rated wall and ceiling surfaces: Standard flush panel
door meeting the following requirements.
1. Panel and frame rating: UL “B” label for 90 minutes.
2. Frame type:
a. For ceramic tile walls: 1.5 mm (16 gauge) Type 304
stainless steel flanged frame, with flange exposed to view
25 mm (1 inch) or less.
b. For masonry and concrete walls: 1.5 mm (16 gauge)
galvanized bonderized steel flanged frame, with flange
exposed to view 25 mm (1 inch) or less.
c. For gypsum board walls and ceilings: 1.5 mm (16 gauge)
galvanized bonderized steel frame, with 0.68 mm (22 gauge)
galvanized steel drywall bead.
d. For plastered walls and ceilings: 1.5 mm (16 gauge)
galvanized bonderized steel frame, with 0.68 mm
(22 gauge) galvanized steel plaster bead.
3. Door: Insulated Flush panel door as follows:
a. Typical wall types: Flush door, Sandwich construction
with 2 inch thick mineral wool fiber insulation between two
layers of 20 gauge galvanized bonderized steel.
b. For ceramic tile walls only: Flush door, Sandwich
construction with 2 inch thick mineral wool fiber insulation
Fahd Road
between two layers of 20 gauge Type 304 stainless steel.
4. Hinge: Flush continuous piano hinge with stainless steel pin.
5. Closer: Spring closer.
6. Latch: Flush cam latch.
2.4 ACCESS PANELS - FOR NON- RATED CONSTRUCTION
A. For non-rated wall and ceiling surfaces (service and non-public areas):
Flush panel door type meeting the following requirements:
1. Frame type:
a. For tiled walls: 1.5 mm (16 gauge) Type 304 stainless
steel flanged frame, with flange exposed to view 25 mm
(1 inch) or less.
b. For masonry and concrete walls: 1.5 mm (16 gauge)
galvanized bonderized steel flanged frame, with flange
exposed to view 25 mm (1 inch) or less.
c. For gypsum board walls and ceilings: 1.5 mm (16 gauge)
galvanized steel drywall bead.
d. For plastered walls and ceilings: 1.5 mm (16 gauge)
galvanized steel plaster bead.
2. Door: Flush panel door as follows:
a. Typical all wall types, except tile: 1.9 mm (14 gauge)
galvanized bonderized steel.
b. For tiled walls: 1.9 mm (14 gauge) type 304 stainless
steel.
3. Hinge:
a. Typical: Concealed spring hinge enabling door to open
175 degrees and permit removal of door from frame.
b. Panels greater than 600 by 900 mm (24 by 36 inches):
Flush continuous piano hinge with stainless steel pin.
4. Latch: Flush cam latch.
B. For non-rated Gypsum board walls and ceilings (Public areas):

Recessed door type meeting the following requirements.
1. Frame type: 1.5 mm (16 gauge) galvanized bonderized steel

frame, with 0.68 mm (22 gauge) galvanized steel drywall bead.
2. Door: Recessed 1.5 mm (16 gauge) galvanized bonderized steel
door with 0.68 mm (22 gauge) galvanized steel drywall bead.
3. Hinge: Concealed pivot rod hinge.
4. Latch: Flush cam latch, with steel grommet welded to door.

Fahd Road
C. For non-rated plastered walls and ceilings (Public areas): Recessed
door type meeting the following requirements.
1. Frame type: 1.5 mm (16 gauge) galvanized bonderized steel

frame, with 0.68 mm (22 gauge) galvanized steel plaster bead
with expanded lath.
2. Door: Recessed: 1.5 mm (16 gauge) galvanized bonderized
steel door, with self furring 3.4 pound galvanized steel lath
welded to door.
3. Hinge: Concealed pivot rod hinge.
4. Latch: Flush cam latch, with steel grommet welded to door.
A. Panels fabricated from stainless steel: No. 4 satin finish.
B. Panels fabricated from cold rolled steel: Phosphate dipped with baked
on rust inhibitive gray primer finish.
C. Panels fabricated from galvanized bonderized steel: Baked on rust

inhibitive gray primer finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to
receive the work of this Section. Verify that prepared openings are
ready to receive the work of this Section and opening dimensions are
as indicated on the shop drawings. Verify that all blocking is set in
place and secure.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing project

conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install access panels in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions

and direction from authorities having jurisdiction. Install miscellaneous
specialties absolutely level and in true line, with units securely
anchored to the surrounding construction.
B. Test each door and latching device, and make adjustments required to
ensure a bind-free operation and proper latching.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 08450
ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
To be read with Division 1 - General Requirements, Conditions of Contract, all relat-

ed Technical Specifications and associated drawings of this Contract.
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior and exterior manual-swinging or manual-sliding all-glass

entrance doors as shown on drawings.
2. All-glass sidelights and transoms.
3. Interior and exterior all-glass storefronts.

of work intended.

2. Section 08460 : Automatic Entrance Swing Doors
3. Section 08461 : Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors
4. Section 08525 : Aluminum-Framed Entrances
6. Section 08900 : Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls
7. Division 16 Electrical Works
1.3 REFERENCES

RADCARE - B01- King III-2/08450/35 All-Glass Entrances and
Fahd Road Storefronts
1. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-

Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet,
Strip,Plate, and Flat Bar
2. ASTM B 36 - Standard Specification for Brass Plate, Sheet,
Strip, And Rolled Bar
3. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and
Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,
Profiles, and Tubes
4. ASTM C 1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat
Glass—Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and
Uncoated Glass

Jurisdiction.
Note: Contractor shall note that he shall keep copies of all of the refer-
enced standards on the site and shall provide the Engineer copy
of the requested referenced standard as and when requested.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation

Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and
Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings
and Facilities."
A. General Performance: All-glass systems shall withstand the effects of

the following performance requirements without exceeding
performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture,
fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
B. Structural Performance: All-glass systems shall withstand the effects

of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under
conditions indicated according to SEI/ASCE 7.
1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
a. Basic Wind Speed 45 m/s.

2. Deflection Limits: Deflection normal to glazing plane is limited to
1/175 of clear span or 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is smaller.
C. Design: Design all-glass systems, including comprehensive

engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer registered
locally, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from the
following ambient and surface temperature changes.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient;

180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction

details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and
profiles, and finishes for all-glass system.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details, including the

following:
1. Plans, elevations, and sections.

2. Details of fittings and glazing, including isometric drawings of
patch and rail fittings.
3. Door hardware locations, mounting heights, and installation
requirements.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish

indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required,

prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
1. Metal Finishes: 6-inch- (150-mm-) long sections of patch and

rail fittings, accessory fittings, and other items.
2. Glass: 6 inches (150 mm) square, showing exposed-edge
finish and tint.
3. Door Hardware: For exposed door hardware of each type, in
specified finish, full size.
E. Fabrication Sample: Of patch fitting at sill on pivot side only, of

continuous rail fitting at bottom of all-glass systems, made from 12-inch
(300-mm) lengths of full-size components and showing details of the
following:
1. Joinery.
2. Anchorage.
3. Glazing.
F. Other Action Submittals:
1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the

supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of
entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.
Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors,
sidelights, transoms, and related work to ensure proper size,
thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.
G. Design Submittal: For all-glass systems indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data
signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer registered locally

responsible for their preparation.
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of all-glass systems.
1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency.
B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests

performed by a qualified testing agency, for all-glass systems.
C. Field quality-control reports.
D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For all-glass systems to include in maintenance

manuals.
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who

is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for

testing indicated.
C. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for all-glass systems,

including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of
manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for
this Project.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain all-glass systems from single source from

single manufacturer.
E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample

submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality
standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of all-glass systems as shown on Drawings.
2. Build mockups for all-glass systems including entrance door

hardware, patch and rail fittings, and accessory fittings.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations

from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless
Engineer specifically approves such deviations in writing.
4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if

undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion and if accepted by
the Engineer.
F. Accessible All-Glass Entrance Doors: Comply with applicable

provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers
Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and
ICC/ANSI A117.1.
G. Comply with Class 1 requirements of ASTM E 84
1.10 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other

construction contiguous with all-glass systems by field measurements
before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
A. Before dispatch from the Works all exposed surfaces shall be protected
with a suitable low tack tape, or other means of protection
recommended by the manufacturer. The adhesion, resistance to
atmospheric conditions and elasticity of the tape shall be suited to the
purpose intended.
B. If during fixing or glazing any protection is removed it must be refitted

or replaced immediately afterwards.
C. Deliver all components to project site completely identified. Store in

accordance with manufacturers instructions, above grade on dunnage,
properly protected from the weather, construction activities and other
possibility of damage or loss.
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees

to repair or replace components of all-glass systems that do not comply
with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, air
infiltration, or water leakage.
b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other
materials beyond normal weathering.
c. Failure of operating components.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Glass for storefronts: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered),

Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (transparent), tested for
surface and edge compression per ASTM C 1048 and for impact
strength per 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.
1. High performance Low E insulated glasses with tint as select by

the Engineer, with the following performance requirements:
a. U Value : 1.6 W/m2 ok
b. Shading coefficient : 0.3
2. Exposed Edges: Machine ground and flat polished.
3. Butt Edges: Flat ground.
4. Corner Edges: Lap-joint corners with exposed edges polished.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, with strength and durability

characteristics of not less than Alloy 6063-T5.
1. Bronze Cladding (if any): ASTM B 36, alloy as standard with

manufacturer.
2. Brass Cladding (if any): ASTM B 36, alloy as standard with
manufacturer.
3. Stainless-Steel Cladding (if any): ASTM A 666, Type 316L.
2.2 METAL COMPONENTS
A. Fitting Configuration:
1. Manual-Swinging, All-Glass Entrance Doors Sidelights and

Transoms: Patch fittings at head and sill on pivot side only or
Patch fittings at head and sill on pivot side, and for lock at sill of
swing side or Patch fitting at top and continuous rail fitting at bottom
or Continuous rail fitting at top and bottom as shown on drawings
and as selected and approved by the Engineer.
2. Manual-Sliding, All-Glass Entrance Doors Sidelights and

Transoms: Continuous rail fitting at top and bottom.
3. All-Glass Storefronts: Recessed glazing channel at top and

continuous rail fitting at bottom or Recessed glazing channel at
top and bottom or Continuous rail fitting at top and bottom as
shown on drawings.
B. Patch Fittings: Aluminum, Bronze-clad aluminum, Brass-clad

aluminum, Stainless-steel-clad aluminum all as selected and approved
by the Engineer.
C. Rail Fittings:
1. Material: Match patch-fitting metal and finish [Aluminum]

[Bronze-clad aluminum] [Brass-clad aluminum] [Stainless-steel-
clad aluminum] as selected and approved by the Engineer.
2. Height:
a. Top Rail: As indicated.
b. Bottom Rail: As indicated.
3. Profile As indicated.
4. End Caps: Manufacturer's standard precision-fit end caps for
rail fittings.
D. Accessory Fittings: Match [patch-fitting] [rail-fitting] [patch- and rail-

fitting] metal and finish for the following:
1. Overhead doorstop.
2. Center-housing lock.
3. Glass-support-fin brackets.
E. Anchors and Fastenings: Concealed.
F. Weather Stripping: Pile type; replaceable without removing all-glass

entrance doors from pivots.
2.3 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Heavy-duty entrance door hardware units in sizes, quantities,

and types recommended by manufacturer for all-glass entrance
systems indicated. For exposed parts, match metal and finish of patch
and rail fittings.
B. Concealed Floor Closers and Top Pivots: Center hung; BHMA A156.4,
Grade 1; including cases, bottom arms, top walking beam pivots,
plates, and accessories required for complete installation.
1. Swing: Single or Double acting as shown on drawings.
a. Positive Dead Stop: Coordinated with hold-open angle if

any, or at angle selected.
2. Hold Open: Automatic, at angle selected.
3. Opening-Force Requirements:
a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the

latch and not more than 30 lbf (133 N) to set the door in
motion and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to open the door
to its minimum required width.

b. Accessible Interior [Swinging] [Sliding] Doors: Not more
than 5 lbf (22.2 N) to fully open door.
C. Concealed Overhead Holder: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1, with dead-stop
setting coordinated with concealed floor closer.
D. Push-Pull Set: As selected and approved by Engineer from

manufacturer's full range.
E. Single-Door and Active-Leaf Locksets: Center-housing deadbolt with

pulls.
1. Deadbolt operated by key outside and key inside.
F. Inactive-Leaf Locksets: Bottom-fitting or bottom-rail deadbolt.
1. Deadbolt operated by key outside and [key] [thumb turn] inside.

G. Cylinders: As specified in Section 08710 "Door Hardware” Six-pin
cylinder, BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.
H. Exit Devices: UL 305.
1. Function: Operation by push-pull when inside operator is locked

down (dogged) or inside operator is locked down (dogged);
outside operation by key as selected and approved by Engineer.
2. Latching: At threshold or floor plate and door head.
3. Style: Concealed vertical rod in housing style indicated.
4. Provide exit devices on both leaves of pairs of doors.
I. Threshold: Not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.
J. Manual-Sliding Entrance Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard for

sliding action indicated and with twin rollers.
K. Control: Large optical pushbutton and/or exit push button and/or

movement sensors and/or access control system and/or card reader
and/or magnetic door lock integrated into the drive mechanism as
selected and approved by Engineer. Door handle to allow manual
operation in the event of power failure.
L. Safety & security Intelligent self learning movement and presence

sensors to protect the threshold and side screen areas
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Provide holes and cutouts in glass to receive hardware, fittings, and

accessory fittings before tempering glass. Do not cut, drill, or make
other alterations to glass after tempering.
1. Fully temper glass using horizontal (roller-hearth) process, and

fabricate so that when glass is installed, roll-wave distortion is
parallel with bottom edge of door or lite.
B. Factory assemble components and factory install hardware and fittings
to greatest extent possible.
2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Generally: Remove die markings prior to finishing operations. Where

necessary to remove die markings from any part of the work, all
members must be finished by the same process, whether or not die
marking exists. Perform this work in addition to the finish specified.
Scratches, abrasions, dents and similar defects are unacceptable.
B. All aluminium works shall be with High performance powder coating as
per AAMA 2604 with colour as shown on drawings or as selected by
the Engineer’s Representative.
1. The powder coating shall comply with AAMA 2604. The quality
of the powder coating must be Qualicoat class 2 approved. The
powder coating shall be a continuous film with a thickness of 60-
120 microns.
2.6 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES (if any)
A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or
blend into finish.
B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish,

free of cross scratches.
1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each

piece.
2. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces.

Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces
chemically clean.
3. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
4. Mirror like Reflective, Nondirectional Polish: No. 8.
2.7 COPPER-ALLOY FINISHES (if any)

A. Buffed Finish, Lacquered: M21-O6x (Mechanical Finish: buffed,
smooth specular; Coating: clear organic, air drying, as specified
below).
1. Clear, Organic Coating: Lacquer specified for copper alloys,

applied by air spray in 2 coats per manufacturer's written
instructions, with interim drying, to a total thickness of 1 mil
(0.025 mm).
B. Hand-Rubbed Finish, Lacquered: M31-M34-O6x (Mechanical Finish:

directionally textured, fine satin; Mechanical Finish: directionally textured,
hand rubbed; Coating: clear organic, air drying, as specified below).
1. Clear, Organic Coating: Lacquer specified for copper alloys,

applied by air spray in 2 coats per manufacturer's written
instructions, with interim drying, to a total thickness of 1 mil
(0.025 mm).
C. Statuary Conversion Coating over Satin Finish: M31-C55 (Mechanical

Finish: directionally textured, fine satin; Chemical Finish: conversion
coating, sulfide).
1. Color: Match Engineer's sample.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance

with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install all-glass systems and associated components according to

manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Set units level, plumb, and true to line, with uniform joints.
C. Maintain uniform clearances between adjacent components.
D. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts according to

manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Set, seal, and grout floor closer cases as required to suit hardware and
substrate indicated.
F. Install joint sealants as specified in Section 07900 "Joint Sealants" and

to produce weathertight installation.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests

and inspections.
B. After completion of all-glass storefront installation and nominal curing

of sealant and glazing compounds, but before installation of interior
finishes, test for water leaks according to AAMA 501.2.
C. Perform test for total areas as designated by the Engineer.
D. Work will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and

inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust all-glass entrance doors and hardware to produce smooth

operation and tight fit at contact points and weather stripping.
1. For all-glass entrance doors accessible to people with

disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3-second closer sweep
period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches
(75 mm) from the latch measured to the leading door edge.
B. Remove excess sealant and glazing compounds and dirt from
surfaces.
A. Perform cleaning in accordance with AAMA 610.1.
B. In addition to specific protection and cleaning methods required for

each component part by the respective Sections of these
Specifications and recommended by the respective manufacturers,
maintain the work throughout the construction period in a clean and
properly protected condition so that it will not be damaged at the time
of completion of the Works.
C. Carefully remove protective material and clean down aluminium

entrances.
D. Cleaning and protective methods shall be carefully selected, applied

and maintained so that finishes will not become uneven or otherwise
impaired as a result of unequal exposure to light and weathering
conditions.
E. Remove deleterious materials from surfaces of aluminium immediately.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 08461
AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work Include: Furnish complete automatic aluminum sliding door

system with manual override and interlock between side lites and
sliding door panels all as specified, and as indicated on drawings that
has been manufactured, fabricated and installed to maintain specified
performance criteria without defects, damage or failure.

of work intended.
1. Section 04300 : Concrete Masonry Unit

1.3 REFERENCES

B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) 101:

Appendix Dissimilar Materials.
C. American Association Of Automatic Door Manufacturers (AAADM).
D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

III-2/08461/ Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors
Fahd Road
1. ANSI Z97.1: Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings -
Methods of Test.
2. ANSI A156.10: For Power Operated Pedestrian Doors; Sliding
Doors section.
E. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) B221: Aluminum-

Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes and Tubes.
F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 101: Code for Safety to

Life from Fire in Buildings & Structures.
G. The Aluminum Association (AA) Aluminum Finishes Manual.
H. Underwriters Laboratory, Inc.(USA & CANADA) UL 325: Electrical

Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems.
I. All applicable local codes, regulations, etc of Authorities having

Jurisdiction.
requested.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's complete product and installation

data.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing layout, profiles, product

components including anchorage, accessories, finish and glazing
details (where required).
C. Quality Assurance And Closeout Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Manufacturer's Operation and Maintenance Data.

2. Warranty document as specified herein.
3. AAADM inspection compliance form completed and signed by
certified AAADM inspector prior to doors being placed in
operation as proof of compliance with ANSI A156.10.
A. Installers Qualifications: Installer experienced to perform work of this

section who has specialized in the installation of work similar to that
required for this project and approved by the Engineer.
B. Comply with Class 1 requirements of ASTM E 84

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
Fahd Road
B. Manufacturer capable of providing field service representation during

installation, approving acceptable installer and approving application
method.
A. Ordering and Delivery: Comply with factory's ordering instructions and

lead time requirements. Delivery shall be in factory's original,
unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.
B. Storage and Protection: Provide protection from exposure to harmful

weather conditions and vandalism.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions/openings by field

measurements before fabrication and record on shop drawings.
Coordinate with fabrication and construction schedule to avoid
construction delays.
1.9 WARRANTIES
A. Warranty: Contractor shall provide warranty against defect in material

and workmanship for a period of five years from the Date of Substantial
Completion. Warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of,
other rights owner may have under Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
(NOT USED)
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Manufactured Door Units: Shall include operator, header and track,

jambs, sliding door panel(s) and side lite(s). Units may be mounted
within rough opening with sliding panel(s) sliding along side lite, also,
units may be surface mounted with sliding panel(s) sliding along wall. Units
may be single slide or bipart, telescopic all as shown on drawings.
For telescopic doors where shown on drawings, leading slide panel shall
open twice as fast as adjacent sliding panels. When unit slides in full
open position, maximum slide opening shall be approximately 70% of
overall package width.
B. Operator: The Electric Operating Mechanism shall be Belt Driven or

equivalent. The operator shall be mounted and concealed within the
header.
Fahd Road
1. Operating force shall be accomplished through a 1/8 HP DC
permanent magnet motor with worm gear transmission and
1800 RPM working with drive belt, attached door hangers, and
idler pulley. Drive belt shall be steel reinforced nylon, 3/4" (19
mm) wide. Idler pulley shall be reinforced, metallic material.
2. Microprocessor Master Control shall have dual on-board multi-
segment diagnostic display. The control shall have
programmable parameters including functions required by ANSI
A156.10. Control shall include separate day and night modes of
operation with security over-ride. Adjustable Reversing Circuit
shall reopen door unit if closing path is obstructed. Maximum
force required to prevent sliding panel from closing = 28 lbf.
3. Finger Safety: When unit slides open, strike rail of sliding panel
shall stop short of adjacent sidelite.
4. On/Off Switch shall be supplied. When switched OFF, unit shall
revert to free manual operation as in the case of electrical power
failure.
C. Safety Power Fail Function:
1. Automatic lock: automatically lock slide function of door when in

closed position.
a. Autolock Fail Safe: shall disengage lock when power
fails.
D. Header: Shall be 152 mm deep by 152 mm high aluminum construction

with removable face plate.
E. Header Track: Shall be aluminum and replaceable. Rollers shall be

non-metallic, high quality ball bearing wheels 44 mm diameter. Anti-
Derailing shall be accomplished by means of a separate adjustable
roller.
F. Sliding Panel(S) and Sidelite(S): Shall be aluminum, 44 mm deep with

narrow stile construction. Weather-stripping shall be along perimeter of
sliding panel(s) and sidelite(s). Concealed guides to stabilize bottom of
sliding panel. Standard glazing prep shall be for 6 mm glass.
1. Total weight limit per panel shall be:

a. 114 kg for slide panel (non-breakout)
2. Sliding Panel and Sidelite Options shall be:
a. Medium and wide stiles.
b. Additional and/or extra wide sidelites of size and type
indicated.
c. Recessed sidelite and track and non-threshold
application.
d. Horizontal muntins of size and type indicated.
e. Prep for glazing 5/16" (16 mm) to 1" (25 mm).
Fahd Road
G. Jambs/Frame: Shall be aluminum. Jamb dimensions to be:
1. 44 mm deep by 102 mm wide.
H. Threshold: Shall be aluminum, 25 mm tall by 102 mm wide.
I. Hardware: Provided and installed in strike rail shall be:
1. Hookbolt Lock latching into jamb or adjacent strike rail.

2. Maximum Security Lock with 31/32" (25 mm) backset.
3. Keyed Cylinder mounted on exterior side with 1 5/32" (29 mm)
standard size cylinder.
4. Thumbturn mounted on interior side.
5. Lockbolt into breakout carrier frame.
2.3 RELATED EQUIPMENT
Basic Sensor System: Shall be 24 VDC, class ll circuit and shall be adjusted
and installed in compliance with ANSI A156.10. System shall include the
following:
A. Activation sensors: Microwave or active infrared sensor shall be
header-mounted each side of door unit for detection of traffic from each
direction.
B. Threshold presence sensors:
1. Header mounted sensors shall provide active infrared presense

detection on each side of the door unit and shall remain active
throughout the entire door opening and closing cycle.
2. Hold-open beams: Two pulsed infrared photoelectric beams to

be mounted in vertical rails of sidelite or in jambs.
Sender/receiver arrangement parallels door opening.
2.4 RELATED WORK REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical: 240 VAC 50/60 cycle (operator must have 240 volt power
supply).
2.5 MATERIALS, FINISHES AND FABRICATION
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221, 6063-T5 alloy and tempered.
1. Structural Header Sections: Minimum 3/16" (5 mm) thickness.

2. Structural Frame Sections: Minimum 1/8" (3 mm) thickness.
3. Structural Panel Sections: Commercial grade.
B. Glass and Glazing:
1. Glass: Minimum 12mm thick clear float tempered glass.

2. Accessories: Glass stops, glazing vinyl and setting blocks as per
Fahd Road
safety glazing standard ANSI 2 97.1.2.
C. Finishes (for all exposed aluminum surfaces): Shall be following:
1. High performance powder coating as per AAMA 2604 with colour

as selected by the Engineer.
2. The powder coating shall comply with AAMA 2604. The quality
of the powder coating must be Qualicoat class 2 approved. The
powder coating shall be a continuous film with a thickness of 60-
120 microns.
D. Panel Construction:
1. Corner block type with 3/16” steel backup plate construction,

mechanically secured with minimum of four hardened steel
screws. Sash consists of snap-in glass stops, snap-in glazing
beads and vinyl gaskets.
2. Weatherstripping material captured in extruded aluminum door
panel. Door nosing weatherstrip to be spring-loaded adjustable
astragal type.
E. Frame Construction: Butt joints, mechanically secured by means of

screws and formed aluminum corner brackets.
F. Operator Construction: Electromechanical, modular type construction.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions: Installer must verify the base conditions

and notify the Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper
and timely completion of work. Do not starts work until all negative
conditions are corrected in a manner acceptable.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install door units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or
rack of frames or sash with manufacturer's prescribed tolerances.
Provide support and anchor in place.
B. Dissimilar Materials: Comply with AAMA 101, Appendix Dissimilar

Materials by separating aluminum materials and other corrodible
surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action contact points.
C. Weather-Tight CONSTRUCTION: Install header and framing members

in a bed of sealant or with joint filler or gaskets. Coordinate installation
with wall flashings and other components of construction.
D. Electrical: Contractor shall install all wiring to operator on a separate

circuit breaker routed into header.

Fahd Road
3.3 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION
A. Cleaning: After installation, installer to take following steps:
1. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work

areas.
2. Remove construction debris from construction site and legally
dispose of debris.
3. Repair or replace damaged installed products.
4. Clean product surfaces and lubricate operating equipment for
optimum condition and safety.
B. Adjustment: Contractor shall inspect and adjust installation to assure

compliance with ANSI A156.10.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 08520
ALUMINIUM WINDOWS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

pertains to the fabricating, furnishing and installing of Aluminium
windows.
B. The principal work of this Section includes, but may not be limited to,
the following:-
1. Fixed, sliding & hinged windows.

2. Operable hardware in conjunction with the above items.
3. Glass and glazing in conjunction with the above items.
4. Thermal breaks in conjunction with the above items.
5. Sealants, caulking, joint fillers and gaskets in conjunction with
the above items.

of work intended.

1.3 REFERENCES

III-2/08520/53 Aluminium Windows
RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
1. AA DAF-45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes.
C. American Architectural Manufacturers Association:
1. AAMA 101 - Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum,

Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass
Doors
2. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal
Transmittance and Condensation
Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed
Wall Sections.
3. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary specification, Performance
Requirements and Test Procedures for
High Performance Organic Coatings on
Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.
4. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance
Superior Performing Organic Coatings on
5. AAMA MCWM-1 - Metal Curtain Wall manual.
D. American National Standards Institute:
1. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings Safety.
E. American Society of Civil Engineers:

Structures.
F. American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip

Products.
and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet a nd Plate.
(Metric).
and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,
Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric).
6. ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and
Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Compounds.
7. ASTM D3656 - Standard Specification for Insect
Screening and Louver Cloth Woven from
Vinyl-Coated Glass Yarns.
8. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface
Materials.
9. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining
the Rate of Air Leakage Through
Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and
Doors Under Specified Pressure
Differences Across the Specimen.
Curtain Walls, and Doors By Uniform
11. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water
Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls, and Doors By Uniform Static Air
Pressure Difference.
Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls, and Doors by Cyclic Static Air
Pressure Differential.
13. ASTM E1105 - Standard Test Method for Field
Determination of Water Penetration of
Installed Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls, and Doors by Uniform or Cyclic
14. ASTM E 1886-05 - Standard Test Method for Performance
of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
Doors, and Impact Protective Systems
Impacted by Missile(s) and Exposed to
Cyclic Pressure Differentials
15. ASTM E 1996-09 - Standard Specification for Performance
of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
Doors, and Impact Protective Systems
Impacted by Windborne Debris in
Hurricanes
16. ASTM F568M - Standard Specification for Carbon and
Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Metric
Fasteners.
17. ASTM F588 - Standard Test Methods for Resistance
of Window Assemblies to Forced Entry
RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
Excluding Glazing.
G. Glass Association of North America:
1. GANA - Glazing Manual.
H. National Fenestration Rating Council Incorporated:
1. NFRC 100 - Procedures for Determining Fenestration Product

U-Factors.
I. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings:
1. SSPC Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I - Inorganic and Type

II - Organic).
2. SSPC Paint 25 - Red Iron Oxide, Zinc Oxide, Raw Linseed Oil,
and Alkyd Primer.
J. All applicable local codes, regulations, etc of Authorities having

Jurisdiction.
requested referenced standard as and when requested.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

B. Installation shall be carried out by workmen experienced in the type of

installation required.

1.6 TESTING
A. Units shall be suitable for a design wind load of 120KM/HR and shall
be tested up to severe exposure for water and air filtration as required
by ASTM E 283, ASTM E 783, ASTM E 331 and ASTM E 1105, AAMA
1503 and certification of testing shall be provided.
B. Window units shall meet or exceed the following values. Test reports
indicating compliance shall be submitted prior to approval.
1. Test sequence is optional except that air infiltration test shall

precede water resistance test.

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
2. Air Infiltration Resistance: When tested in accordance with
ASTM E 283.
a. Operable Windows: Maximum of 0.37 cfm/ft of crack
length, with pressure differential across the window unit
of 6.24 psf (50 mph).
b. Fixed Windows: Maximum of 0.06 cfm/sq.ft.
3. Water Penetration Resistance: No uncontrolled leakage when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 using a differential static
pressure of not less than 6-24 psf.
4. Uniform Load Deflection Test: No member shall deflect more
than 1/175 of its span when tested in accordance with ASTM E
330 at static air pressure of 60 psf with high pressure applied
first on one side of unit and then on the other side.
5. Uniform Load Structural Test:
a. Test unit in accordance with ASTM E 330 at static air
pressure difference of 90 PSF with high pressure applied
first on one side of the unit and then on the other side.
b. At conclusion of test there shall be no glass breakage,
permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, support
arms or actuating mechanisms, nor any other damage to
window which would cause it to be inoperable.
Permanent deformation of any frame or member shall not
exceed 0.2% of its span.
c. Condensation Resistance Test: When tested in
accordance with AAMA 1503.1, the Condensation
Resistance factor (CRF) class shall not be not less than C55"
as classified by AAMA 1504.
d. Thermal Transmittance Test: When tested in accordance
with AAMA 1503.1, The Thermal Transmittance (U-Value)
Class shall not exceed U 60 as classified by AAMA 1504.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. The following submittals, as defined in Section for Submittals are

required. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications
and installations and other data to show compliance with these
Specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of all components for review.

Include full size sections of all typical members, dimensioned
elevations, anchors and other accessories required. Show glass
thickness and glazing details for approval.
Number all windows in accordance with a plan.
C. Samples:
1. Submit sets of samples for each type, finish and colour required.
Submit sample of the specified alloy on 300 mm lengths of
extrusion; show the maximum range or variation in colour and
RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
shade. Sample Submittal and approval shall be for colour,
texture, and gloss only. Compliance with all other requirements
is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.
2. Submit sample corners of window units with hardware,
representative of fabrication techniques and workmanship of the
final products.
A. Except as otherwise indicated, comply with all applicable requirements

including air infiltration tests, water resistance tests, and applicable
load tests specified in ANSI/AAMA 302.9 classification "PA-3 HP60".
B. Design, fabricate and install aluminium windows so that the total,

installed, glazed unit will withstand the gravity loads and wind pressure
as shown on Drawing.
1.9 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Finish Colour Range: During production, maintain large size colour

range samples for use in comparing against production material. Mark
and code extremes of the colour range so that these will not be
installed adjacent to one another in any one unit.
purpose intended.


1.11 WARRANTY
A. Provide a warranty of ten years for windows against malfunctions due

to defects in thermal breaks, hardware, materials and workmanship.
B. Submit a warranty for a period of Ten (10) years for quality,
workmanship and materials of the Sash and frames to be free from defects.
Submit warranty for the structural integrity of the window and against
defects including leakages, decay, joint separations, warp, twist, cup
or bow.
C. Submit a warranty for a period of twenty five (25) years that the powder
coating will not develop fading or non uniformity of colour or shade and will
not crack, peel, chip, craze or corrode.
RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
D. Should the coating fail in any of the above respects, the Contractor will
replace these elements at no cost to the Employer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
(NOT USED)
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminium Extrusions: Comply with ASTM B221 shapes as shown and

as required to fulfill performance requirements, but not less than 1.8
mm thick and not less than 5 cm. wide, unless otherwise shown.
Suitable alloy and proper temper for extruding and fabricating with
adequate structural characteristics, and suitable controlled alloy and
temper as recommended by aluminium manufacturer type 6063-T5,
6063-T6 or 6061-T6 to provide required colour and colour matching.
Extrusion tolerances should meet ANSI H35.2.
B. Aluminium Sheets and Plates: Comply with ASTM B209 sizes

minimum 2 mm thick or as required to fulfill performance requirements.
Suitable alloy and proper temper for forming and fabricating with
adequate structural characteristics and suitable for finishing as
required.
C. Steel Angles, Plates, Bars, Rods and Other Steel Accessories

Required to Join or Reinforce Assembly of Aluminium Components: ASTM
A36 and ASTM A283, galvanized or, if galvanising is not compatible with
alloy or component parts, shop painted with zinc chromate primer after
cutting to size.
D. Aluminium Angles, Plates, Bars and Other Aluminium Members

required to Join or Reinforce Assembly of Aluminium Components:
Alloys recommended by manufacturer or fabricator to develop required
strength of assembly.
E. Fasteners: Stainless steel type 304 series, selected to prevent galvanic

action with the components fastened. Where exposed in finished surfaces,
use oval-head countersunk Phillips heads with colour to match
adjacent surfaces.
F. Anchors: 3-way adjustable anchors that accommodate fabrication and

installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining
materials and recommended by manufacturer.
1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized steel inserts

complying with ASTM A 123 requirements.
G. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
staining, non-bleeding flashing, compatible with adjacent materials and
of type recommended by manufacturer.
H. Weather Stripping: EPDM gaskets, moulded expanded neoprene

gaskets or moulded neoprene gaskets, factory applied in an integral
dovetail self-locking groove.
I. Thermal Breaks: Include thermal breaks in all members. Thermal break

material shall be polyamide. Provide thermal breaks tested as per
AAMA TR A8 and AAMA 505 for dry shrinkage and composite
performance.
J. Hardware:
1. Provide proprietary compatible standard heavy duty hardware

as specified in the Hardware Schedule and/or as required to
enable the window to function for the intended purpose.
2. All hardware shall be approved by the Engineer's
Representative
K. Glass and Glazing: See Section for Glazing, for Specifications

applicable to Glass and Glazing system.
2.3 ALUMINIUM WINDOWS:
A. Generally:
1. Construct aluminium window units to the sizes and dimensions

shown on the Drawings and as specified. Openable parts of the
window shall be complete with all necessary hardware including
bolts.
B. Unit Construction:
1. Glazed windows :
a. Provide framed members, fabricated with mitred joints,

with corner cleats, and reinforcing inserts to develop the
full strength of the metal and maximum rigidity in the
frame assembly.
b. Fabricate windows of thickness indicated on drawings
and/or as required by the performance standards and of
sections which shall allow replacement of glass from
inside without disassembly of stile and rails. Provide snap
on extruded aluminium glazing stops with exterior stops
anchored for non removal.
c. Provide sound deadening filler material on inside of stiles
and rails. Clearances for the window shall be 2.0 mm at
jambs and heads and 6 mm clearance above finish floor
except for carpet, where the clearance shall be 15 mm.
d. Mortice, reinforce, drill and tap windows to receive
hardware in accordance with hardware schedule.
2. Frames, Mullions and Transoms: Mitred, Sealed rigidly and
RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
permanently joined. Frames to be in one piece of largest size
possible. Provide intermediate support members where shown
on Drawings or as required.
2.4 ALUMINIUM FINISHES

B. All aluminium works shall be with High performance powder coating as

per AAMA 2604 with colour as shown on drawings or as selected by the
C. The powder coating shall comply with AAMA 2604. The quality of the
powder coating must be Qualicoat class 2 approved. The powder
coating shall be a continuous film with a thickness of 60-120 microns.
2.5 GLASS (EXTERNAL) COLOURS
A. Colour of Glass: As per the Glass Schedule in Section 08800.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Complete the cutting, drilling and fitting of joints prior to finishing. Use
only methods which will avoid distortion or discoloration of exposed
faces. Grind weld areas smooth before proceeding with other
treatment.
B. Conceal all fastenings unless otherwise shown or specified.
C. Fit and assemble all work in the shop insofar as practicable. Mark and
disassemble units which are too large for shipment to project site, retaining
units in sizes as large as possible for shipment and erection.
D. Carefully fit and match all work with continuity of line and design, using
rigidly secured joints with hairline contact, mitred corners, unless otherwise
shown.
E. Reinforce members and joints with steel or aluminium plates, bars,

rods or angles for rigidity and strength as needed to fulfill performance
requirements. Use concealed fasteners for jointing which cannot be
welded.
F. Separate unlike metals or alloys with a heavy coating of bituminous

paint or other suitable permanent separation as required to prevent
galvanic action.

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the substrates and adjoining construction and conditions

under which the work is to be installed. Do not proceed with the work
until unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Verify dimensions of openings by field measurements so that

aluminium windows will be accurately designed, fabricated and fitted to
the structure.
B. Co-ordinate aluminium windows with the work of other trades and

provide items to be placed during the installation of other work. Check
the location of such items and verify that they have been set accurately
in relation to the final location of windows.
C. Erect windows in accordance with the manufacturer's written

instructions and recommendations. Employ only experienced erectors.
D. Erection Tolerances: Erect aluminium windows within the following

tolerances:
1. Variation from plumb: 8 mm maximum.

2. Variation from level: 8 mm maximum.
E. Cut and trim component parts during erection only with the approval of
the manufacturer or fabricator and in accordance with his
and trimming. Remove and replace members where cutting and
trimming have impaired strength or appearance
F. Do not erect members which are observed to be warped, bowed,

deformed or otherwise damaged or defaced to such extent as to impair
strength or appearance. Remove and replace members damaged in
the process of erection, as directed.
G. Set units level, plumb, and true to line, with uniform joints. Support on
metal shims and secure in place by bolting to clip angles and similar
supports anchored to supporting structure. Use only the types of
equipment, ropes, wedges, spacers, shims and other items during erection
which will not stain or mark the finish of units.
H. Paint concealed contact surfaces of dissimilar materials with a heavy

coating of bituminous paint, or provide other separation as per
manufacturer's recommendations.
I. Weld with electrodes and by methods recommended by manufacturer

of material being welded, and in accordance with appropriate
recommendations of the AWS. Use only methods which will avoid
RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
distortion or discoloration of exposed faces. Grind exposed welds
smooth, using only clean wheels and compounds which are free of iron
or iron compounds. Restore finish of component parts after welding
and grinding.
J. Paint clip angles and other ferrous metal parts which will be concealed,
with zinc chromate paint.
K. Seal joints in concealed manner, unless exposed sealant is shown.
L. Adjust ventilators and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points

and at weather stripping. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR ALUMINIUM WINDOWS
A. Onsite Test: After completion of the installation and normal curing of

sealant and glazing compounds, test for Air and water leaks in accordance
with AAMA 502 and ASTM E1105 respectively. Conduct tests in the
presence of the Engineer’s Representative. Repair or replace any
component which leaks and retest as directed.
A. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 1.5 mm/m non-cumulative or

3 mm/3 m, whichever is less.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weather tight

closure.


windows.
D. Cleaning and protective methods shall be carefully selected, applied

conditions.
E. Remove deleterious materials from surfaces of aluminium immediately.
END OF SECTION

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
SECTION 08525
ALUMINIUM FRAMED ENTRANCES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

pertains to the fabricating, furnishing and installing of Aluminium
framed entrances.
B. The principal work of this Section includes, but may not be limited to,
the following:-
1. Hinged entrance door leafs.

2. Operable hardware in conjunction with the above items.
3. Glass and glazing in conjunction with the above items.
4. Thermal breaks in conjunction with the above items.
5. Sealants, caulking, joint fillers and gaskets in conjunction with
the above items.

of works intended:

3. Division 16 : Electrical Works
1.3 REFERENCES

III-2/08525/ Aluminium Framed Entrances
Fahd Road
1. AA DAF-45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes.
C. American Architectural Manufacturers Association:
1. AAMA 101 - Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl

(PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors.
2. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal
Transmittance and Condensation Resistance
of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall
Sections.
3. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary specification, Performance
Requirements and Test Procedures for High
Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum
Extrusions and Panels.
4. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance
Superior Performing Organic Coatings on
5. AAMA MCWM-1- Metal Curtain Wall manual.
D. American National Standards Institute:
1. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings

Safety.
E. American Society of Civil Engineers:
1. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and

Other Structures.
F. American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-

Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products.
and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
(Metric).
Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
and Aluminum-Alloy
III-2/08525/ AluminiumExtruded Bars,
Framed Entrances
Fahd Road
Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
(Metric).
6. ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly
(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds
and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Compounds.
7. ASTM D3656 - Standard Specification for Insect
Screening and Louver Cloth Woven
from Vinyl-Coated Glass Yarns.
8. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface
Materials.
9. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining
the Rate of Air Leakage Through
Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and
Doors Under Specified Pressure
Differences Across the Specimen.
Penetration of Exterior Windows,
Penetration of Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, and Doors by Cyclic
Static Air Pressure Differential.
13. ASTM E1105 - Standard Test Method for Field
Determination of Water Penetration of
Installed Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls, and Doors by Uniform or Cyclic
14. ASTM F568M - Standard Specification for Carbon and
Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Metric
Fasteners.
15. ASTM F588 - Standard Test Methods for Resistance
of Window Assemblies to Forced
Entry Excluding Glazing.
1. GANA - Glazing Manual.

H. National Fenestration Rating Council Incorporated:

Fahd Road
1. NFRC 100 - Procedures for Determining Fenestration
Product U-Factors.
I. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings:

II - Organic).
2. SSPC Paint 25 - Red Iron Oxide, Zinc Oxide, Raw Linseed Oil,
and Alkyd Primer.
J. All applicable local codes, regulations, etc of Authorities having

Jurisdiction.
requested.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

1.5 TESTING
A. Units shall be suitable for a design wind load of 120KM/HR and shall
be tested up to severe exposure for water and air filtration as required
by ASTM E 283, ASTM E 783, ASTM E 331 and ASTM E 1105, AAMA
1503 and certification of testing shall be provided.
B. Door units shall meet or exceed the following values. Test reports
indicating compliance shall be submitted prior to approval.
1. Test sequence is optional except that air infiltration test shall

precede water resistance test.
2. Air Infiltration Resistance: When tested in accordance with
ASTM E 283.
a. Doors: Maximum of 0.37 cfm/ft of crack length, with
pressure differential across the door unit of 6.24 psf (50
mph).
3. Water Penetration Resistance: No uncontrolled leakage when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 using a differential static
pressure of not less than 6-24 psf.
4. Uniform Load Deflection Test: No member shall deflect more
than 1/175 of its span when tested in accordance with ASTM E
330 at static air pressure of 60 psf with high pressure applied
first on one side of unit and then on the other side.
5. Uniform Load Structural Test:
a. Test unit in accordance with ASTM E 330 at static air
Fahd Road
pressure difference of 90 PSF with high pressure applied
first on one side of the unit and then on the other side.
b. At conclusion of test there shall be no glass breakage,
permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, support
arms or actuating mechanisms, nor any other damage to
Door leaf which would cause it to be inoperable.
Permanent deformation of any frame or member shall not
exceed 0.2% of its span.
c. Condensation Resistance Test: When tested in
accordance with AAMA 1503.1, the Condensation
Resistance factor (CRF) class shall not be not less than
C55" as classified by AAMA 1504.
d. Thermal Transmittance Test: When tested in accordance
with AAMA 1503.1, The Thermal Transmittance (U-Value)
Class shall not exceed U 60 as classified by AAMA 1504.
1.6 SUBMITTALS

required. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications
and installations and other data to show compliance with these
Specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of all components for review.

Include full size sections of all typical members, dimensioned
elevations, anchors and other accessories required. Show glass
thickness and glazing details for approval.
Number all entrance units in accordance with a plan.
C. Samples:
1. Submit sets of samples for each type, finish and colour required.
Submit sample of the specified alloy on 300 mm lengths of
extrusion; show the maximum range or variation in colour and
shade. Sample Submittal and approval shall be for colour,
texture, and gloss only. Compliance with all other requirements
is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.
2. Submit sample corners of entrance units with hardware,
representative of fabrication techniques and workmanship of the
final products.
A. Except as otherwise indicated, comply with all applicable requirements

including air infiltration tests, water resistance tests, and applicable
load tests specified in ANSI/AAMA 302.9 classification "PA-3 HP60".
B. Design, fabricate and install aluminium entrance units so that the total,
installed, glazed unit will withstand the gravity loads and wind pressure
as shown on Drawing.

Fahd Road
1.8 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Finish Colour Range: During production, maintain large size colour

range samples for use in comparing against production material. Mark
and code extremes of the colour range so that these will not be
installed adjacent to one another in any one unit.

purpose intended.


1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide a warranty of ten years for entrance units against malfunctions

due to defects in thermal breaks, hardware, materials and
workmanship.
B. Submit a warranty for a period of twenty five (25) years that the High
performance powder coating will not develop fading or non uniformity of
colour or shade and will not crack, peel, chip, craze or corrode.
C. Should the coating fail in any of the above respects, the Contractor will
replace these elements at no cost to the Employer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
(NOT USED)
1.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminium Extrusions: Comply with ASTM B221 shapes as shown and

as required to fulfill performance requirements, but not less than 1.8
mm thick and not less than 5 cm. wide, unless otherwise shown.
Suitable alloy and proper temper for extruding and fabricating with
adequate structural characteristics, and suitable controlled alloy and
Fahd Road
temper as recommended by aluminium manufacturer type 6063-T5,
6063-T6 or 6061-T6 to provide required colour and colour matching.
Extrusion tolerances should meet ANSI H35.2.
B. Aluminium Sheets and Plates: Comply with ASTM B209 sizes

minimum 2 mm thick or as required to fulfill performance requirements.
Suitable alloy and proper temper for forming and fabricating
withadequate structural characteristics and suitable for finishing
as required.
C. Steel Angles, Plates, Bars, Rods and Other Steel Accessories

Required to Join or Reinforce Assembly of Aluminium Components: ASTM
A36 and ASTM A283, galvanized or, if galvanising is not compatible with
alloy or component parts, shop painted with zinc chromate primer after
cutting to size.
D. Aluminium Angles, Plates, Bars and Other Aluminium Members

required to Join or Reinforce Assembly of Aluminium Components:
Alloys recommended by manufacturer or fabricator to develop required
strength of assembly.
E. Fasteners: Stainless steel type 304 series, selected to prevent galvanic

action with the components fastened. Where exposed in finished surfaces,
use oval-head countersunk Phillips heads with colour to match
adjacent surfaces.
F. Anchors: 3-way adjustable anchors that accommodate fabrication and

installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining
materials and recommended by manufacturer.
1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized steel inserts

complying with ASTM A 123 requirements.
G. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-

staining, non-bleeding flashing, compatible with adjacent materials and
of type recommended by manufacturer.
H. Weather Stripping: EPDM gaskets, moulded expanded neoprene

gaskets or moulded neoprene gaskets, factory applied in an integral
dovetail self-locking groove.
I. Thermal Breaks: Include thermal breaks in all members. Thermal break

AAMA TIR A8 and AAMA 505 for dry shrinkage and composite
performance.
J. Hardware:
1. Provide proprietary compatible standard heavy duty hardware

as specified in the Hardware Schedule and/or as required to
enable the entrance unit to function for the intended purpose.
2. All hardware shall be approved by the Engineer's
Fahd Road
Representative.
K. Glass and Glazing: See Section for Glazing, for Specifications

applicable to Glass and Glazing system.
L. Control: Large optical pushbutton and/or exit push button and/or

movement sensors and/or access control system and/or card reader
and/or magnetic door lock integrated into the drive mechanism as
selected and approved by Engineer. Door handle to allow manual
operation in the event of power failure.
M. Safety & security Intelligent self learning movement and presence

sensors to protect the threshold and side screen areas
1.3 ALUMINIUM ENTRANCES
A. Generally:
1. Construct aluminium Entrance units to the sizes and dimensions

shown on the Drawings and as specified. Entrance units shall be
complete with all necessary hardware including bolts.
B. Unit Construction:
1. Glazed Entrances :
a. Provide framed members, fabricated with mitred joints,

with corner cleats, and reinforcing inserts to develop the
full strength of the metal and maximum rigidity in the
frame assembly.
b. Fabricate entrance units of thickness indicated on
drawings and/or as required by the performance
standards and of sections which shall allow replacement
of glass from inside without disassembly of doorstile and
rails. Provide snap on extruded aluminium glazing stops with
exterior stops anchored for non removal.
c. Provide sound deadening filler material on inside of stiles
and rails. Clearances for door shall be 2.0 mm at jambs
and heads and 6 mm clearance above finish floor except
for carpet, where the clearance shall be 15 mm.
d. Mortice, reinforce, drill and tap door units to receive
hardware in accordance with hardware schedule.
2. Frames, Mullions and Transoms: Mitred, Sealed rigidly and
permanently joined. Frames to be in one piece of largest size
possible. Provide intermediate support members where shown
on Drawings or as required.
1.4 ALUMINIUM FINISHES :

Fahd Road
B. All aluminium works shall be High performance powder coating as per

AAMA 2604 with colour as shown on drawings or as selected by the
C. The powder coating shall comply with AAMA 2604. The quality of the
1.5 GLASS (EXTERNAL) COLOURS
A. Colour of Glass: As per the Glass Schedule in Section 08800.
1.6 FABRICATION
A. Complete the cutting, drilling and fitting of joints prior to finishing. Use
only methods which will avoid distortion or discoloration of exposed
faces. Grind weld areas smooth before proceeding with other
treatment.
B. Conceal all fastenings unless otherwise shown or specified.
C. Fit and assemble all work in the shop insofar as practicable. Mark and
disassemble units which are too large for shipment to project site, retaining
units in sizes as large as possible for shipment and erection.
D. Carefully fit and match all work with continuity of line and design, using
rigidly secured joints with hairline contact, mitred corners, unless otherwise
shown.
E. Reinforce members and joints with steel or aluminium plates, bars,

rods or angles for rigidity and strength as needed to fulfill performance
requirements. Use concealed fasteners for jointing which cannot be
welded.
F. Separate unlike metals or alloys with a heavy coating of bituminous

paint or other suitable permanent separation as required to prevent
galvanic action.
PART 3 EXECUTION
1.7 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the substrates and adjoining construction and conditions

under which the work is to be installed. Do not proceed with the work
until unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
1.8 INSTALLATION
Fahd Road
A. Verify dimensions of openings by field measurements so that
aluminium entrances will be accurately designed, fabricated and fitted
to the structure.
B. Co-ordinate aluminium entrances with the work of other trades and

provide items to be placed during the installation of other work. Check
the location of such items and verify that they have been set accurately
in relation to the final location of entrance units.
C. Erect entrance unit in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions and recommendations. Employ only experienced erectors.
D. Erection Tolerances: Erect aluminium entrance unit within the following

tolerances:
1. Variation from plumb: 8 mm maximum.

2. Variation from level: 8 mm maximum.
E. Cut and trim component parts during erection only with the approval of
the manufacturer or fabricator and in accordance with his
and trimming. Remove and replace members where cutting and
trimming have impaired strength or appearance.
F. Do not erect members which are observed to be warped, bowed, deformed

or otherwise damaged or defaced to such extent as to impair strength or
appearance. Remove and replace members damaged in the process
of erection, as directed.
G. Set units level, plumb, and true to line, with uniform joints. Support on
metal shims and secure in place by bolting to clip angles and similar
supports anchored to supporting structure. Use only the types of
equipment, ropes, wedges, spacers, shims and other items during erection
which will not stain or mark the finish of units.
H. Paint concealed contact surfaces of dissimilar materials with a heavy

coating of bituminous paint, or provide other separation as per
I. Weld with electrodes and by methods recommended by manufacturer

of material being welded, and in accordance with appropriate
recommendations of the AWS. Use only methods which will avoid
distortion or discoloration of exposed faces. Grind exposed welds
smooth, using only clean wheels and compounds which are free of iron
or iron compounds. Restore finish of component parts after welding
and grinding.
J. Paint clip angles and other ferrous metal parts which will be concealed,
with zinc chromate paint.
K. Seal joints in concealed manner, unless exposed sealant is shown.

Fahd Road
L. Adjust ventilators and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points
and at weather stripping. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.
1.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR ALUMINIUM ENTRANCES
A. Onsite Test: After completion of the installation and normal curing of

sealant and glazing compounds, test for Air and water leaks in accordance
with AAMA 502 and ASTM E1105 respectively. Conduct
tests in the presence of the Engineer’s Representative. Repair or
replace any component which leaks and retest as directed.
A. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 1.5 mm/m non-cumulative or

3 mm/3 m, whichever is less.
1.11 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weather tight

closure.


entrances.
Cleaning and protective methods shall be carefully selected, applied

conditions.
D. Remove deleterious materials from surfaces of aluminium immediately.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 08710
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes hardware for swinging doors.

ascertain all applicable sections required to understand the full scope of
work intended.
1. Section 08110 : Steel Doors and Frames

3. Section 08461 : Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors
5. Division 16 : Electrical Works (as applicable).
1.3 REFERENCES

and standards cited therein, and their latest editions, revisions, applicable
addenda and supplements. Where there is conflict between the referenced
standards the most stringent of the conditions/requirements shall be
applicable.
1. American National Standard Institute (ANSI), A156 Series

2. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows dated Feb. 4, 1999.
3. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code from Fire in Buildings and Structures
dated Feb. 11, 2000.
4. UL 305 Safety Panic Hardware dated July 3, 2000.
RADCARE - B01- King III-2/08710/75 Door Hardware

Fahd Road
5. CABO/ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable / Buildings Facilities
dated Dec. 15, 1992
6. DHI Document “Recommended Locations for Hardware” dated
year 2001.
7. DHI Document “Keying Systems and Nomenclature” dated year
1989.

Jurisdiction.
referenced standards on the site and shall provide the Engineer copy
of the requested referenced standards as and when
requested.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General Requirements:
Make all submittals in accordance with Division 1 - General

Requirements.
B. Schedules
Submit Hardware Schedule in vertical format & sequencing per Door and
Hardware Institute (DHI) standards. Indicate locations and mounting
heights of each type of hardware if installed at locations & heights other
than as specified in DHI’s ‘Recommended Location for Builder’s
Hardware’.
C. Product Data
Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts, product data, illustrations, wiring

diagram, parts lists and templates, as applicable.
D. Samples
1. Submit one sample typical of each hardware item illustrating style,

color, and finish.
2. Approved samples may be incorporated into final work subject to
agreement with Engineer.
E. Manufactures Confirmation Certificate
1. Submit a certificate from the Hardware manufacturer confirming

the grade and standards of each of the product supplied.
F. Templates
Furnish templates required for the fabrication of doors and frames or

other items related to the approved hardware schedule.

Fahd Road
G. Keying Schedule
Submit a keying schedule in a format as outlined in the DHI manual

“Keying Systems and Nomenclature”.
H. Wiring Diagrams
Provide elevation diagram and operation description.
I. Operation and Maintenance Data
Submit a manual covering all products furnished under this section with
operation and maintenance data.
A. Substitutions
Manufacturers and model numbers or ANSI/BHMA numbers listed are to

establish a standard of quality. Similar items by approved manufacturers
that are equal in design, function and quality will be accepted upon prior
approval of the Engineer and provided required data and physical
samples are submitted in accordance with Division 1 - General
Requirements.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

B. Supplier Qualifications
1. Hardware Supplier: A company specializing in supplying

commercial, institutional type finishing door hardware with
minimum ten years experience.
2. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employs a certified Architectural
Hardware Consultant (AHC) or a certified Apprentice Architectural
Hardware Consultant with minimum 5 years of experience, to
assist in the work of this section.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Marking and Packaging: Hardware should be required to be delivered to

the job site in the manufacturers’ original packages, marked to
correspond with the door opening heading numbers on the approved
hardware schedule.

Fahd Road
B. Delivery: Upon delivery, materials must be inventory. Provide
replacements for damaged or missing materials.
C. Storage: Store all items in a clean, dry and secure location.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Furnish 2 copies of the following written warranty in accordance with

Division 1 - General Requirements:
1. Warranty against mechanical failure of hinges for a “life of the

building” period.
2. Warranty against mechanical failure of closers for a 5 year period.
3. Warranty against mechanical failure of all remaining hardware for
a 5 year period.
B. Starting date for all warranty periods to be the date of substantial

performance and delivery of the work.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide five extra key lock cylinders for each master keyed group.
B. Furnish three dozen extra screws and other fasteners of each type, size
and finish used with the hardware items furnished.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
(NOT USED)
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General Hardware Requirements
Where not specifically indicated, comply with applicable ANSI A156

standard for type of hardware required. Provide each type of hardware
with accessories as required for applications indicated and for complete,
finished, operational doors.
1. Screws and Fasteners: Furnish as recommended by hardware

manufacturer and as required to secure hardware. Match finish of
hardware item being fastened.
2. Electrical Accessories: Make provisions and coordinate
requirements for electrical accessories and connections for power
supply, key switch, electric strike, door position switch, LED indicator,
motion sensor and safety sensor.

Fahd Road
B. Hinges
ANSI A156.1, full mortise type, [template type, ANSI A156.7,] complying
with following general requirements unless otherwise scheduled.
1. Size and Weight: 4-1/2 inch heavy weight typical. For doors over
3’6” wide (and extra thick doors), provide hinge per manufacturer’s
‘basic hinge selection’ guide.
2. Widths: Sufficient to clear trim projection when door swings 180
degrees.
3. Number: Provide minimum two hinges to 60 inches door height,
then one additional hinge for every 30 inches increment in door
height.
4. Material/Pins: Provide nonferrous hinges with non-removable pins
(NRP) at exterior and locked out swinging doors, non-rising pins at
interior doors. Provide Steel or Stainless Steel Hinges on fire
Rated openings.
5. Bearing: Anti-friction concealed bearing type. Except for raised
barrel hinge, ball bearing type.
6. Tips: Flat button tips with matching plug at exterior doors.
7. Continuous Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26. Should be full mortise,
edge mount. Material should be stainless steel. Hospital Tips
should be used in patient-occupied areas in psychiatric facilities.
8. Provide concealed hinges.
C. Pivots and Rescue Hardware
ANSI/BHMA A156.1, Can be used when required. As recommended by

pivot manufacturer for size and weight of door.
D. Manual Flush Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.16 Grade 1 top and bottom flush
bolts, with dust-proof floor strike, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Automatic Flush bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Type 25. Less bottom bolt as
required or as mentioned in the hardware schedule.
F. Coordinator: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Type 21. Used to coordinate the

correct closing sequence of the door leaves in a pair of door with
astragal.
G. Locks
Typical 2-3/4 inch backset. Furnish standard strikes with extended lips to
protect trim from being marred by latch bolt (verify type of cutouts
provided in metal frames).
1. Mortise Locksets: ANSI/BHMA A156.13, series 8700 Grade 1

unless otherwise indicated.
2. Auxiliary Locksets: ANSI/BHMA A156.5, series 5000 Grade 1,
bored dead locks unless otherwise indicated.
Fahd Road
H. Lock Trim
1. Provide levers with rose as indicated in Schedule as selected from

manufacturer’s full range of levers and roses. Avoid through bolts
on solid wood core doors.
2. Hospital Push/Pull latch as indicated in the hardware schedule. UL

Listed for fire doors and should meet ADA requirements.
I. Locks for Special Doors
Labeled Dutch Door: Provide bored (cylindrical) locksets. ANSI/BHMA

A156.2, Grade 1 unless otherwise indicated.
J. Exit Devices
1. ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, UL listed for Panic Exit Hardware

or Fire Exit Hardware, 3 Hour label.
2. Rim type, Concealed/surface vertical rod type, Mortise type, with
push pad, unless otherwise indicated. Furnish standard strikes
with extended lips to protect trim from being marred by latch bolt.
Verify type of cutouts provided in metal frames, with dust proof
floor strikes. Provide longer device body for doors over 3’ wide
and vertical rod extension on doors over 7’ high when applicable.
Provide fire exit device for fire-rated openings.
K. Electric Strikes
1. ANSI/BHMA A156.31 mortised, rim mounted, electric strikes.

Voltage requirement is 12VDC.
L. Door Controls
Provide with accessories as required for complete operational

installation.
1. Closers
ANSI/BHMA A156.4 modern type with cover, surface mounted;
full rack and pinion type with steel spring and non-freezing
hydraulic fluid; closers required for fire rated doors unless
Adjustability: Provide controls for regulating closing, latching,
speeds, and back checking.
Arms: Type to suit individual condition; parallel-arm closers at
reverse bevel doors and where doors can swing full 180 degrees.
Location: Mount closers on inside of exterior doors, room side of
interior doors typical; mount on pull side of other doors.
Operating Pressure: Maximum operating pressure as follows.
a. Interior Doors: Maximum 5 pounds (22.2 N).

Fahd Road
b. Exterior Doors: Maximum 8.5 pounds([44.4] [37.7] N).
c. Fire Rated Doors: As required for fire rating, maximum 15
pounds (66.6 N).
2. Overhead Stops: ANSI/BHMA A156.8, Grade 1 concealed type.
3. Closer Holder Release Devices: ANSI/BHMA A156.15 door
mounted, jamb mounted, concealed mounted, closer holder
release devices, closers with single point, multiple point, hold open
free swinging release device designed to make swing doors close
upon receiving electrical signal. Voltage requirement is 24V.
4. Electro-Magnetic Door Holder: ANSI/BHMA A156.15 wall
mounted, floor mounted type. Voltage requirement is 24V.
5. Low Energy Power Door Operators: ANSI/BHMA A156.19 power
mechanism which opens and closes door upon receipt of signal.
Voltage requirement is 120V.
6. Floor Closers: Closer to have separate, independent and
adjustable valves for closing speed, latch and backcheck.
M. Door Handle
Provide stainless steel door handles as indicated in Schedule as selected from

manufacturer’s full range of door handles.
N. Push/Pulls
ANSI/BHMA A156.6; push plates minimum 0.050 inch thick, 4 inch wide
x 16 inch height.
Provide pulls with bolts to secure from opposite door face; provide with
minimum 0.050 inch pull plates thick unless otherwise indicated. Provide
Hospital Pull where indicated.
O. Protection Plates
ANSI/BHMA A156.6, metal; minimum 0.050 inch thick stainless steel.

Height as indicated in schedule by width as follows:
1. Kick Plate and Stretcher Plate: 1-1/2 inch LDW (less door width)
for single doors or 1 inch LDW for pair doors.
2. Mop Plate: 1 inch LDW.
3. Armour Plate: 1-1/4 inch LDW for single leaf doors or 1 inch LDW
for pair doors.
All protection plates over 16 inches in height and installed on fire rated
openings to be labeled unless they are installed at the factory by the door
manufacturer in accordance with the listing of the door.

Fahd Road
P. Door Protections
Door Protections Acrovyn® in plastic, textured finish, thick, 1.5,2mm.

Location: Mount on both sides of interior doors.
Door cladding channels and angles - for full or partial height protection to
one or both sides of a door.
Kick and push plates - fabricated to customer specification from 2mm
Acrovyn® Sheet, or 1.5mm Acrovyn® 4000 Sheet, custom shapes and
sizes can be easily accommodated.
Door edge protectors - manufactured to specific height and door thickness
requirements.
Door frame protection - built up from a series of channels and angles or
thermoformed sections to fit specific frame size requirements.
Q. Door Stops / Holders
Floor Stops: ANSI/BHMA A156.16 Grade 1 dome type standard floor

type with provide with accessories as required for applications indicated.
Wall Stops: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, 2-1/2 inch diameter wall

stop, convex type.
Door Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, Plunger type with throw of

1-1/4 inch, rubber tip replaceable
R. Thresholds
Maximum 1/2 inch (12 mm) height. Saddle threshold as specified should
have minimum 57mm width.
Threshold for exterior, outswinging doors to be panic/rabbeted type with
rubber insert.
S. Weather Strips
ANSI/BHMA A156.22. Provide continuous smoke seals, self adhesive at

top and sides of doors where indicated. Provide parallel arm bracket or
soffit mounted coordinator to have continuous sealing at the head,
otherwise use snap-on cover to conceal the fasteners.
Provide also automatic door bottom where indicated. Door bottom

sweep, shoe type, as mentioned in the hardware schedule should be
surface mounted with nylon brush where required.
Overlapping Astragal should be Stainless Steel or aluminum materials,

surface mounted or through bolt mounting as mentioned in the hardware
schedule.
T. Ventilation Grilles
Provide Aluminum ventilation grilles where indicated

Fahd Road
2.3 FINISHES
ANSI/BHMA A156.18; provide following finishes except where otherwise

indicated in Schedule at end of section.
630 Satin Stainless Steel for locks and protection plates.

US32D Satin Stainless Steel for hinges and exit devices.
US26D Satin Chromium Plated for closers,deadlocks, stop/door trims,
pivots/rescue hardware.
2.4 KEYING
A. Furnish new factory keyed Grand Master Key System. System shall be
keyed by zoning as directed and approved by CLIENT representative.
B. Cylinders: ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, pin type – Mortise, Rim or

component cylinders.
1. Keying: Keyed as directed by Owner. Keyed in like-groups (KA).

Keyed differently (KD). Master keyed (MK). Grand master keyed
(GMK). Great grand master keyed (GGMK).
2. Provide Construction Keying type or Construction Interchangeable
Cores.
3. Keys: Nickel silver. Stamp keys with “DO NOT DUPLICATE”.
4. Stamp standard key symbol on keys and concealed on
interchangeable cores.
5. Supply keys in the following minimum quantities:
a. 3 each grand master keys.
b. 3 each master keys per group.
c. 3 change keys for each cylinder.
d. 1 blank key for each cylinder.
e. 10 construction keys (when specified)
f. 3 control keys.
2.5 KEY CONTROL

A. Key Cabinet
1. Cabinet Construction: Sheet steel construction, piano hinged door

with cylinder type lock master keyed to building system.
2. Cabinet Size: Size for Project keys plus sufficient room to allow
for 50 percent project expansion. Horizontal metal strips for key hook
labeling with clear plastic strip cover over labels.
Finish: Baked enamel, manufacturer’s standard finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify doors and frames are ready to receive door hardware and
dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. Do not proceed until defects
Fahd Road
are corrected.
B. Verify electric power is available to power operated devices and is of

correct characteristics.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate mounting heights with door and frame manufacturers. Use

templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. Mounting Heights
from Finished Floor to Center Line of Hardware Item: Comply with
manufacturer recommendations, applicable codes and DHI’s standards.
A. Provide services of an Architectural Hardware Consultant to check

proper installation and operation of all finish hardware.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. At final completion, hardware shall be left clean and free from

disfigurement. Make a final adjustment to all door closers and other items
of hardware. Where hardware is found defective, repair, replace or
otherwise correct as directed.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide for the proper protection of all items of hardware until the owner
accepts the project as complete.
3.6 SCHEDULES
A. Refer to Document III-7-2 Architectural Finishes, Doors and Hardware for

the schedule.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 08800
GLASS AND GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

pertains to the fabricating, furnishing and installing of:
1. Glazing materials for exterior and interior openings

2. Mirrors
3. Etc
B. Glass included in work of other Sections, but specified for continuity.

of work intended.

2. Section 08520 : Aluminium Windows
3. Section 08525 : Aluminium Framed Entrances
4. Section 08910 : Point Fixed Glazed Curtain Walls
5. Div 16 - Electrical Works (As applicable)
1.3 REFERENCES

B. American National Standards Institute:
1. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings Safety.

C. American Society of Civil Engineers:
III-2/08800/85 Glass and Glazing
RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
Structures.
1. ASTM C570 - Standard Specification for Oil- and Resin-

Base Caulking Compound for Building
Construction.
2. ASTM C669 - Standard Specification for Glazing
Compounds for Back Bedding and Face Glazing
of Metal Sash.
3. ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric
Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks,
and Spacers.
4. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint
Sealants.
5. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
6. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat
Glass-Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and
Uncoated Glass.
7. ASTM C1135 - Standard Test Method for determining Tensile
Adhesion properties of structural sealants.
8. ASTM C1184 - Standard Specification for Structural Silicone
Sealants.
9. ASTM C1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated
Architectural Flat Glass.
10. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.
11. ASTM C1401 - Standard Guide for Structural Sealant
Glazing.
12. ASTM C 1503 - Standard Specification for Silvered Flat Glass
Mirror.
13. ASTM D4802 - Standard Specification for Poly (Methyl
Methacrylate) Acrylic Plastic Sheet.
15. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory
Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and
Elements.
Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air
Pressure Difference.

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
17. ASTM E546 - Standard Test Method for Frost Point of
Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
18. ASTM E576 - Standard Test Method for Frost Point of
Sealed Insulating Glass Units in the Vertical
Position.
19. ASTM E773 - Standard Test Methods for Seal Durability of
Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
20. ASTM E774 - Standard Specification for Sealed Insulating
Glass Units.
21. ASTM E1300 - Standard Specification for Determining Load
Resistance of Glass in Buildings.
22. ASTM E1425 - Standard Practice for Determining the
Acoustical Performance of Exterior Windows
and Doors.
E. BS Standards:
1. BS 952 - Glass for glazing.

2. BS 1494 - Specification for fixing accessories for
building purposes.
3. BS 5357 - Code of practice for installation of security
glazing.
4. BS 5713 - Specification for hermetically sealed flat
double glazed units.
5. BS EN 12600 - Glass in building. Pendulum test. Impact test
method and classification for flat glass.
Pendulum test. Impact test method and
classification for flat glass
6. BS 6262 - Glazing for buildings
7. BS 6375 - Performance of windows. Specification for
operation and strength characteristics.
8. BS EN 1991 - Code of practice for wind loads.
F. National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC)
1. NFRC 100 - Procedure of Determining Fenestration

Product U-Factors.
2. NFRC 200 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration
product solar heat gain coefficients at normal
incidence.
3. NFRC 300 - Test method for Determining solar and
infrared optical properties of glazing
materials and fading resistance of systems.
1. GANA - FGMA Sealant Manual.

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
H. GANA - Glazing Manual
1. GANA - Laminated Glass Design Guide.
I. Consumer Product Safety Commission
1. CPSC 16 CFR 1201: Safety standard for Architectural Glazing

materials.
J. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors, Fire Windows.
K. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1. UL - Building Materials Directory.
L. All applicable local codes, regulations, etc of Authorities having

Jurisdiction.
Note: The Contractor shall comply with the most stringent of the
requirements in case of any conflict among the above
standards. Contractor shall keep a copy of all referenced
standards on site and shall provide the Engineer a copy
immediately upon request.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. The following submittals, as defined in Section for Submittal are

required:
1. Product Data: Submit product data for each and every type of
glass used in the Contract.
2. Submit sample (300 x 300mm) for each types of glass.
A. Thickness
The glass type and thickness shall be not less than that specified in
this section, unless accepted in writing by the Engineer where found
insufficient provide glasses of sufficient thicknesses designed as per
the referenced codes fulfilling the thermal, optical and all design and
functional requirements required by the contract all within contract
price.
Notwithstanding the limits indicated, the thickness is the be such that,

the glass is to be free from visible visual and optical distortion,
excessive bow, roller wave, warp, edge curl, and frame induced
distortion.
All glass within the same visual plane is to be of the same thickness,
unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer.
RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
The Glass thickness is to be determined in accordance with relevant
Standards, functional requirements including design wind loads,
deflections and safety, and manufacturer's recommendations. Submit
computations.
B. Edge Quality
Edge quality criteria for annealed and heat strengthened glass shall be
as follows:
All toughened glass shall have belt arrised edges.
All annealed and heat-strengthened glass shall have clean-cut edges. All
exposed edges shall be mitred and polished to remove all sharp

edges.
No cutting or edge work is permitted after heat treatment. Handling and

installation methods are too prevent the glass making direct contact
with metals or other nonresilient materials.
1. Shark teeth shall not penetrate more than half of glass

thickness.
2. Serration hackle may occur only within 150 mm of corners.
3. Flare shall not exceed 1 mm, measured perpendicular to glass
surface across the edge. Flare shall not occur at setting blocks.
4. Bevel shall not exceed 1.5 mm.
5. Flake chips may occur only within 200 mm of corners. Depth
shall not exceed 1 mm and length or diameter shall not exceed
6 mm.
6. Rough chips, which exceed any of the dimensional limits for
flake chips, are not permitted.
C. GLASS DEFLECTION LIMITS
1. Curtain Wall Support Frame Deflection Limits to be Span/180

2. Mid Span Glass Edge Deflection Limit– 4 Side Supported
 Span/125 or 25mm which ever is less – single glazing
 Span/175 or 20mm which ever is less – double glazed
units
3. Mid Span Glass Edge Deflection Limit– 2 and 3 Side Supported
 Span/125 or 20mm which ever is less – double
glazed units
4. Cantilever Glass Deflection – 1 Side Supported
RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
5. Unsupported Edge of a Double Glazed Unit is Span/240
D. GLASS STRESS LIMITS
1. The Ultimate Design Tensile Strength of Glass is to be verified

by the glass manufacturer but is not to exceed the following
stress limits for un-factored loads.
Glass Type Short Term Long Term Surface Compression
Loading Loading Limit
Float Glass 23MPa 7MPa N/A
Heat 37MPa 15MPa 24MPa to 69MPa
Strengthened
Fully Toughened 56MPa 30MPa Over 69MPa
2. Glass strength is to be determined based on the following

probabilities of failure.
1. Probability of failure to be 1/1000 for all inclined glazing

(Factor of Safety 2.5 on Ultimate Design Tensile Stress).
2. Probability of failure to be 8/1000 for vertical glazing
(Factor of Safety of 2.0 on the Ultimate Design Tensile
Stress)
3. Wind loading to be complied with BS EN 1991. Wind speed
shall be 45m/sec.
4. Load sharing for insulating glass units is to take account
of air/gas compression. Load sharing is to be reduced by 20%
(minimum) for insulating glass units with panes of the same
thickness.
5. Glass is to be designed using Code based design charts or
via non-linear finite element analysis.
6. Thermal stress calculations are to be provided for all float
glass, laminated float glass and float glass in insulating glass
units to ensure that the glass is not susceptible to thermal
breakage. The calculations are to take account of the most
onerous conditions imposed by A/C system, closed off
spaces and external shading.
A. Provide and install glass in accordance ASTM E1300 to withstand

thermal movement and wind and impact loads without breakage, loss,
failure of seals, product deterioration, and other defects.
1. Wind design loads: Determined by BS EN 1991.

2. Thermal movement design conditions:
a. Maximum sun radiation temperature in summer – 83.5
deg C.
b. Maximum ambient temperature in summer – 55 deg C.
RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
c. Average ambient temperature in summer – 40 deg C.
d. Minimum ambient temperature in winter – 0 deg C.
e. Material surfaces range – 83.5 deg C.
B. Provide and install gaskets, sealants, and other glazing accessories to

resist water and air penetration.
C. Center-of-Glass U-Values: NFRC 100 methodology using LBL-35298

WINDOW 4.1 computer program or latest version, expressed as
Btu/sq.ft. x h x deg F (W/sq.m x K).
D. Center-of-Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NRFC 200 methodology

using LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer program or latest version.
E. Solar and Infrared optical Properties: NFRC 300
1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR INSULATED GLASS
A. Glass for curtain wall and windows:
Hermetically sealed double glazed unit consisting of 6mm coated fully

tempered glass with tint +12mm air space +6mm clear glass.

B. Glass for Curtain Wall and Windows with electrically operated Venetian
blinds or Micro Louvers:

tempered glass with tint + 30mm air space accommodating electrically
operated (with manual over ride) 25mm thick venetian blinds or micro
louvers + 6mm clear glass.

C. Glass for skylight:

tempered glass with tint +12mm air space +12.76mm laminated glass
(6mm glass +0.76pvb + 6mm glass).
a. U value : 1.3 W/m2 ok

A. Glass Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturer of clear,

tinted, coated and other glass products with 10 years minimum
successful experience.

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
B. Glass Fabricator: Company specialized in fabricating, insulating, heat
strengthened, tempered, laminated, etc, glass units with 5 years
minimum successful experience.
C. Glass Installer: Company installing glass on site shall specialize in this

type of work and shall have 5 years minimum successful experience.
D. Source Quality Control: To ensure uniformity, all tinted and coated glass
used on the Contract shall be obtained from single manufacturer.
E. Allowable Tolerances: Provide glass manufactured to tolerances listed

in GANA manual.
F. Safety Glass: Product complying with ANSI A97.1 and testing

requirements of 16 CFR part 1201 for Category II materials.
Conforming products to be permanently marked with certification label
of Safety Glazing Certification Council or other agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction. Such markings to be located with the
lower 50mm of lites.
G. Component Compatibility: Contractor to confirm chemical compatibility

of all glazing components to the extent that the various sealants used
in the manufacturing and installation processes do not adversely affect
any of the following:
1. Seal of insulating glass units

2. Finish on aluminium framing specified elsewhere
3. Setting blocks, shims, and accessories
4. Coatings on glass
H. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the

following code:
1. CPSC 16 CFR 120I

2. ANSI Z97.1
I. Comply with Class 1 requirements of ASTM E 84

1.9 QUALIFICATIONS

1.10 MOCK-UP
A. Mockup: Provide Mockup 10m2 for each type of glass or as instructed

by the Engineer. Approved mockup may be incorporated into
permanent works if accepted by the Engineer.
RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
A. Protect glass and glazing materials during delivery, storage and

handling in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
B. Prevent edging, chipping and damage from condensation, temperature

changes, and exposure to sunlight.
C. Insulating glass units: Comply with fabrication instructions for venting

and sealing.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Contractor to provide guarantee of Ten (10) years for all types of Glass
and Glazing under this Section against defects of materials, fabrication
and installation. Defects include, but not limited to:
1. Edge separation, discoloration, or loss of transparency

2. Loss of seal in the insulating units
3. Loss of weather tightness in exterior glazing
4. Peeling, cracking or deterioration of coatings or films
5. Silver spoilage on mirrors
B. Defective units to be replaced by the Contractor at no increase in

Contract Price.
1.13 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Extra Materials: Provide 3% of each type of Glass unit used on the

project including associated accessories, etc., in a factory packed
package with the items listed on the package.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
(NOT USED)
2.2 GLASS
A. Conforming to ASTM C1036 and C1048, except total distortion

tolerances of ASTM C1048 do not govern over requirements in this
Section, and to ANSI Z97.1. Label all factory cut panes and do not remove
labels until directed. Do not cut unlabeled glass delivered to site as
material for field cutting until glass is approved by the Engineer.
B. General:
1. All glass to be suitable for conditions and fit for the purpose. See
QUALITY ASSURANCE in Part 1 above.
2. Transparent Flat Glass: ASTM C 1036: Type I, Class 1, 2, or 3
as required, Quality q3.

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
C. Glass Units
1. Glass for Curtain wall and windows: 6mm thick coated fully
tempered glass with tint +12mm air space +6mm clear glass.
2. Glass for Curtain Wall and Windows with electrically operated
Venetian blinds or Micro Louvers: 6mm thick coated fully
tempered glass with tint + 30mm air space accommodating
electrically operated (with manual over ride) 25mm thick
venetian blinds or micro louvers + 6mm clear glass.
3. Glass for Skylight: 8mm thick coated fully tempered glass with
tint +12mm air space +12.76mm laminated glass (6mm glass
+0.76pvb + 6mm glass).
4. Wire Glass ("W") minimum 6mm thick in steel frames shall be
used in the following areas:
a. Observation Windows in fire-rated partitions and smoke
partitions.
b. Vision panels in fire-rated doors and smoke doors.
5. Laminated Glass ("A") minimum 6mm thick shall be used as
vision panels in doors and observations windows in the following
areas:
a. Seclusion Rooms and Anterooms.
b. Isolation Rooms in Inpatient Units or Wards.
6. Tempered Glass ("T") shall be used in all other Observation
Windows and Doors with vision panels, including side lights, but
is not generally required above doors.
D. Mirrors:
1. 6mm thick clear tempered float glass (ASTM C1048) with double
coated silver back heavily electroplated with copper and a prime
coat of mirror backing paint.
2. Edges to be square, ground smooth and polished at works.
3. Backs shall be painted with an additional coat of moisture
resistant paint of type recommended by mirror manufacturer.
4. Marine ply backing.
2.3 DECORATIVE GLASS
A. Decorative glass shall be as indicated on the drawings and as selected

B. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass),

Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3, unless otherwise specified.
C. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition A (uncoated
glass), Type I (transparent flat glass), Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3,
unless otherwise indicated; Kind HS (heat strengthened) and Kind FT (fully
tempered) where indicated.
D. Fabricate decorative glass and provide other glazing products in sizes
RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face
clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with
recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing
standard.
2.4 PATTERNED GLASS
A. Patterned-Glass Units shall be Annealed float or Kind FT (fully

tempered), Type II, Form 3.
B. Pattern: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of

patterns.
2.5 LAMINATED GLASS
A. Glass Units: ASTM C 1172 and complying with other specified

requirements.
B. Laminated-Glass Interlayer: Of type and thickness indicated with a

proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and
mechanical properties after laminating glass plies and installation.
1. For PVB sheet interlayers, laminate plies in autoclave with heat

plus pressure.
C. Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated glass to produce glass free of

foreign substances and air or glass pockets.
2.6 ACID-ETCHED GLASS
A. Acid-Etched-Glass units shall be Annealed float or Kind FT (fully

tempered), and complying with other specified requirements.
B. Acid-Etching Process: Fabricate acid-etched glass with hydrofluoric

and hydrochloric acids, evenly applied, according to manufacturer's
standard process.
2.7 SANDBLASTED GLASS
A. Sandblasted-Glass units shall be annealed float or Kind FT (fully

tempered), and complying with other specified requirements.
B. Sandblasting Process: Abrade sandblasted glass evenly, with small

particles of sand forced through a high-pressure air nozzle according to
manufacturer's standard process.
C. Slam Pattern Glass: 10 mm thick, Clear Float, ‘Slam pattern’ Design
Deep carved glass with desired pattern and polished edges.
1. Process: Glass will be carved up to 1.5 mm deep through

sandblasting using proven technology.
2. Toughening: Toughened to International / British Class A

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
standards (BS 6206) as per proven document.
D. Acid-Etched Finish: Acid etch glass with hydrofluoric and hydrochloric
acids, evenly applied and maintaining detail of sandblasted pattern,
according to manufacturer's standard process.
2.8 SILKSCREEN GLASS
A. Integrated silkscreen printing on the glazing as per special design pattern

requirements.
2.9 GLAZING MATERIALS & ACCESSORIES
A. Provide the following materials for setting glass in openings as

indicated on drawings.
B. Setting Accessories:
1. Blocks: Resilient neoprene or EDPM blocks designed for setting

glass and must be compatible with the secondary seal of the IG
unit. Chemically compatible w/sealant used. Durometer hardness
as follows unless otherwise recommended by glass manufacturer
or GANA.
a. Setting Blocks: 85 +/- 5, Shore A durometer
b. Edge Blocks: 65 +/- 5, Shore A durometer
c. Spacers: Resilient accessories designed for positioning
glass in rabbets; closed cell neoprene conforming with
requirements of ASTM C509, Grade 4, chemically
compatible with sealant used.
C. Gaskets and Tape:
1. Continuous black neoprene or elastomeric glazing gasketing

compatible with framing system and suitable for exterior use.
2. Glazing tape as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Glazing Sealants: Provide the following glazing sealants. Color as

selected by Engineer’s Representative.
1. Silicone Sealant: Refer Section 07900.

2. Acrylic Sealant: DAP “One-Part Acrylic. Self-priming, one-part,
nonsag acrylic sealant, except that sealant for heel bead of
insulating glass, shall be as recommended by the glass
manufacturer.
3. Structural Glazing: One-Part Rubber silicone as recommended
by the glass manufacturer and suitable for application, including
wind loading.
a. Translucent or black as selected by Engineer’s
Representative.

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
E. Mirror and Mastic :
1. As per manufacturer’s instructions.
2.10 FABRICATION
A. Cut glass to accurate sizes and shapes as indicated on drawings; allow

edge clearance and tolerances in accordance with GANA
recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Edges: Factory-cut and factory-form edges for butt-glazed, heat

tempered, and insulating glass; provide ground edges for exposed
glass edges including unframed mirrors; provide drilled holes, notches,
and other special fabrication of finishing techniques, unless other wise
approved. Cut and form edges of other glass carefully to furnish clean
accurate edges.
1. Butt-Glazed (Structural Sealant) Systems: All work in

accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
a. Edges exposed to air: Polished finish

b. Edges receiving sealant: “Suede” finish
c. Concealed edges: Factory option.
d. Joint width: 10 mm minimum; 11 mm maximum at
staggered glass and 13 mm maximum at straight glass
C. Labels:
1. Permanent: Except as required by code for identification or fire-

rated or safety glass, no permanent labels shall occur on visible
portions of glass.
2. Temporary: Provide labels for installation and product
identification purposes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Verify glass framing is accurately sized, structurally sound, square, and

without bow.
B. Verify surfaces of glazing channels and recesses are clean, free of

obstructions, and ready to receive glazing.
C. Inspect edges of glass. Install only glass with clean-cut edges. Do not
bump, drag, or brush edges against sash or hard objects. Avoid
scratching.
D. Immediately prior to glazing, clean contact surfaces with solvent and

wipe dry.
RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
E. Prime surfaces as required for adhesion of sealants.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with GANA Glazing Manual, approved shop drawings, and

manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Damaged glass: Do not install glass with edge damage or other
imperfections. Remove from site and replace.
C. Install setting blocks and spacers as recommended by referenced

glazing standards and glass manufacturer’s recommendations. Set
blocks in sealant.
D. Provide edge blocking as required to prevent sideway movement of

glass in glazing channel.
E. Ensure glazing channels and stops provide required bite on glass,

minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thickness.
F. Tape glazing:
1. Cut glazing tape to length and set continuously against

permanent stops and projecting slightly above sightline.
2. Tape joints: Butt joints. Do not overlap tape. Seal joints with
compatible sealant.
3. Rest glass on setting blocks and push against tape for full
contact at perimeter of lite.
4. Remove tape release paper immediately prior to placing glass.
5. Dry tape glazing: Install dense compressible gasket against
glass and secure with removable glazing stop.
6. Dry/wet tape glazing:
a. Place spacers below sightline and install removable
glazing stop against spacers.
b. Fill gap between glass and removable glazing stop with
sealant to uniform line level with bite of frame.
7. Knife trim protruding edge of glazing tape.
G. Gasket glazing:
1. Fabricate two-piece compression gaskets to exactly fit openings.

2. Install soft compression gasket against permanent stops. Miter
cut and bond together corners.
3. Rest glass on setting blocks. Insert dense compression gasket
to press glass against soft gasket and lock in place against
removable stop.
4. Apply sealant to gasket joints.
5. Install gaskets to protrude slightly beyond glazing stops.

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
H. Wet sealant glazing:
1. Install spacers and sealant backing between glass and stops.

Position to control depth and width of sealant.
2. Apply sealant to glazing channels without voids. Ensure
complete bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
3. Tool exposed sealant surfaces to provide wash away from
glass.
3.3 MIRROR INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate with other trades to ensure that surfaces to receive mirrors

are not painted, coated, or otherwise treated in a manner detrimental to
mirror adhesion.
B. Ensure walls are rigid, plumb, smooth, clean, dry, and free of foreign
materials.
C. Apply one coat moisture-resistant paint to back of mirror and allow to

completely dry.
D. Set mirrors with mechanical fasteners and adhesive applied in

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
1. Apply adhesive to mirror back with 25 percent coverage. Set

mirror in place and hold firmly until adhesive sets.
2. Support bottom of mirror with L-shaped bar mechanically
fastened to wall blocking.
3. Provide 2 clips minimum at top and each side of mirror. Mirrors
greater than 6 square feet shall have 3 clips minimum at top.
E. Place plumb and level without visible distortion.
3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Glass and glazing product manufacturers to provide field surveillance

of installation.
B. Monitor and report installation procedures, and unacceptable

conditions.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B. Remove labels after Work is complete.
C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.
3.6 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape
or paste. Do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units.
RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
END OF SECTION
III-2/08800/ Glass and Glazing

Fahd Road
SECTION 08900
GLAZED ALUMINIUM CURTAIN WALLS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Design, engineering, supply, fabrication, installation and test of

Aluminum curtain wall systems, accessories, complete with reinforcing,
shims, anchors, and attachment devices, etc. as specified and as
shown on drawings.
B. Products furnished but not installed under this Section: Inserts and
anchoring devices which are to be built into structure.

ascertain all applicable sections required to understand the full cope of
Works intended.
1. Section 07840 : Fire Stopping
2. Section 08450 : All-Glass Entrances and Storefronts
3. Section 08520 : Aluminum Windows.
4. Section 08525 : Aluminum Framed Entrances.
5. Section 08710 : Door Hardware.
6. Section 08800 : Glass and Glazing.
1.3 REFERENCES

III-2/08900/15 Glazed Aluminium
RADCARE - B01- King Curtain Walls
Fahd Road
B. Aluminum Association (AA):
1. DAF-45 Designation System for Aluminum Finishes.

C. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):
1. Aluminum Curtain Wall Design Guide Manual.

2. 501.2 : Field Check of Metal Curtain Walls for Water
Leakage.
3. 2604 : Voluntary Specification for High Performance
Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and
Panels.
4. 606.1 : Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral
Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum.
5. 607.1 : Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear
Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum.
6. 608.1 : Specification and Inspection Methods for
Electrolytically Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for
Architectural Aluminum.
7. 701.2 : Specifications for Pile Weatherstripping.
8. Manual #10: Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from
Shop to Site.
D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. Z97.1 Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing

Material Used in Buildings
E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A36 Structural Steel.

2. A123 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products.
3. A525 General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process.
4. A526 Sheet Steel, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip
Process, Commercial Quality.
5. B209 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
6. B221 Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes,
and Tubes.
7. B308 Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural
Shapes, Rolled or Extruded.

Fahd Road
8. C509 Cellular Elastomeric Preformed Gasket and Sealing
Material.
9. C716 Installing Lock-Strip Gaskets and Infill Glazing
Materials.
10. C864 Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,

Setting Blocks and Spacers.
11. C920 Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
12. E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning
13. E283 Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, and Doors.
14. E330 Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure
Difference.
15. E331 Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static
Air Pressure Difference.
16. E773 Test Method for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating
Glass Units.
17. E774 Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
18. E 1886-05 Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior

Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact
Protective Systems Impacted by Missile(s) and
Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials
19. E 1996-09 Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact
Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris
in Hurricanes
F. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC):
1. 16 CFR 1201Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing

Materials.
G. Federal Specifications (FS):
1. TT-P-645A Primer, Paint, Zinc Chromate, Alkyd Type.
H. Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA):
1. Glazing Manual.
I. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC):
1. SP2 Hand Tool Cleaning

Fahd Road
2. SP3 Power Tool Cleaning
3. Paint 12 Cold-Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film)
J. BS EN 1991 Code of practice for wind loads.

K. All applicable local codes, regulations, etc of Authorities having
Jurisdiction.
requested.
1.4 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. General Standard: In addition to requirements shown or specified,

comply with applicable provisions of Aluminum Curtain Wall Design
Guide Manual for design, materials, fabrication and installation of
component parts.
B. Design Requirements:
1. Metal stick framed systems with interior and exterior exposed

metal framing.
2. System manufacturer shall provide curtain wall systems,
including necessary modifications to meet specified requirements
and maintaining visual design concepts.
3. Fabricate glazing systems for interior glazing at vision areas and
exterior glazing at spandrel areas.
4. Perimeter conditions shall allow for installation tolerances,
expansion and contraction of adjacent materials, and sealant
manufacturer's recommended joint design.
5. Drawings are diagrammatic and do not purport to identify nor
solve problems of thermal or structural movement, glazing,
anchorage or moisture disposal.
6. Requirements shown by details are intended to establish basic
dimension of unit, sight lines and profiles of members.
7. Do not assume glass, sealants, and interior finishes contribute
to framing member strength, stiffness, or lateral stability.
8. Attachment considerations are to take into account site
peculiarities and expansion and contraction movements so there
is no possibility of loosening, weakening or fracturing connection
between units and building structure or between units
themselves.
9. Anchors, fasteners and braces shall be structurally stressed not
more than 50% of allowable stress when maximum loads are
applied.
Fahd Road
10. Allow for expansion and contraction due to structural movement
without detriment to appearance or performance.
11. System shall drain to exterior face of wall, water entering joints
and condensation occurring within system by drain holes and
gutters of adequate size to evacuate water without infiltration to
interior or top of lower light of glass. No visible weep holes
allowed.
12. Provide continuous interior gutter system at sill which drains to
exterior through weep holes. Head members shall also have
gutter system which drains directly to exterior or drains internally
to sill below.
13. Provide concealed fastening.
14. Metal faces are required to be visually flat under all lighting
conditions, subject to acceptance of Engineer.
15. Provide uniform color and profile appearance at components
exposed to view.
16. Where applicable stresses placed on structural silicone sealants
shall be kept within sealant manufacturer's recommended
maximum.
17. Vibration harmonics, wind whistles, noises caused by thermal
movement, thermal movement transmitted to other building
elements, loosening, weakening, or fracturing of attachments or
components of system are not permitted.
C. Performance Requirements:
1. Air infiltration: Air leakage shall not exceed 0.017 cfm per square
foot of surface area when tested in accordance with ASTM E283
at differential static pressure of 6.24 psf.
2. Water infiltration: No uncontrolled leakage when tested in
accordance with ASTM E331 at test pressure of 15 psf, or 20%
of full positive design wind load, whichever is greater.
D. Structural Requirements:
1. Wind loading: 45m/sec. Comply with the requirements of BS EN

1991.
2. Deflection under uniform loading: When tested in accordance
with ASTM E330 at design pressure, maximum deflection of
exterior member shall not exceed L/175 of span or 3/4 inch or
L/240+1/4” for spans over 13’-6”, whichever is less.
3. Parallel to wall and corner mullion deflections: 75% of glass
edge bite or 3/8 inch, whichever is less.
4. Compression flanges of flexural members may be assumed to
receive effective lateral bracing only from:
Fahd Road
a. Anchors to building structure.
b. Horizontal glazing rails or interior trim which are in actual
contact with compression flange.
5. Do not regard points of contraflexture as lateral braces or as end

points of unbraced length; unbraced length is actual distance
between effective lateral braces as defined above.
6. Where framing member reaction is resisted by continuous
element, maximum assumed effective length of the resisting
element is 4 times bearing length, but not more than 12 inches.
E. Thermal Requirements: Framing systems shall accommodate

expansion and contraction movement due to surface temperature
differential of 180F without causing buckling, stress on glass, failure of
joint seals, excessive stress on structural elements, reduction of
performance or other detrimental effects.
F. Interface:
1. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which need to be preset

and built into structure to appropriate trade.
2. Supply on timely basis to avoid delay in Work.
3. Instruct other trades of proper location and position.
4. Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates and installation
instructions.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit in accordance with Section for submittal.
B. Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature for each

manufactured products.
2. Include information for factory finishes, accessories and other
required components.
3. Include color charts for finish indicating manufacturer's standard
colors available for selection.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit shop drawings covering fabrication, installation of

specified system.
2. Submit drawings indicating elevations, detailed design, dimensions,
member profiles, joint locations, arrangement of
units, member connections, and thickness of various

Fahd Road
components.
3. Show following items:
a. Details of special shapes.
b. Reinforcing.
c. Drainage details and flow diagrams.
d. Anchorage system.
e. Interfacing with building construction.
f. Provisions for expansion and contraction.
g. Thermal breaks.
4. Indicate glazing details, methods, locations of various types and
thickness of glass, emergency breakout locations, and internal
sealant requirements.
5. Clearly indicate locations of exposed fasteners and joints for
Engineer's acceptance.
6. Clearly show where and how manufacturer's system deviates
from Contract Drawings and these Specifications.
D. Samples:
1. Submit manufacturer sample indicating quality of finish.

2. Submit samples of sealants for color selection.
E. Certificates:
1. Submit manufacturer's certification stating that installed system

is in compliance with specified requirements.
2. Submit statement certified by Professional Engineer attesting
components, including frames and glass, will withstand design
wind loads and that maximum allowable deflections will not be
exceeded.
F. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit manufacturer's printed installation

instructions.
A. Single Source Responsibility:
1. Provide curtain wall systems that are products of a single

manufacturer.
B. Engineer Qualifications: Professional Structural Engineer registered

locally.
C. Installer Qualifications: Certified in writing by system manufacturer

having an experience of atleast 5 years locally on projects of similar
Fahd Road
scale.
D. Company specializing in manufacturing materials and products for

E. Comply with Class 1 requirements of ASTM E 84

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Conduct preinstallation conference in accordance with general

requirements.
B. Conference Purpose and Agenda:
1. Arrange with Engineer and representatives of window and

sealant manufacturer to visit Project site before beginning
glazing operations to analyze site conditions, and inspect
surfaces and joints to be sealed in order that recommendations
may be made should adverse conditions exist.
2. Discuss following items:
a. Weather conditions under which work will be done.
b. Anticipated frequency and extent of joint movement.
c. Joint design.
d. Glazing procedures.
A. Comply with the general requirements as in Division 1.
B. Protect finished surfaces to prevent damage.
C. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which become firmly

bonded when exposed to sun.
D. Do not leave coating residue on surfaces.
E. Deliver glass units with manufacturer's labels intact on interior side of

glass. Ensure labels indicate glass thickness, unit location, glass
strength and orientation of units in vertical position.
F. Protect glass edges and corners to prevent chipping, cracking, and

other similar damages.
A. Ensure ambient and surface temperatures and joint conditions are

Fahd Road
suitable for installation of materials.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranties in accordance with general requirement.

B.
B. Contractor shall provide written warranty in form acceptable to Owner
warranting work to be watertight, free from deflective materials,
defective workmanship, glass breakage due to defective design, and
agreeing to replace components which fail within ten (10) years from
date of Substantial Completion.
C. Warranty shall cover following:
1. Complete watertight and airtight system installation within

specified tolerances.
2. Glass and glazing gaskets will not break or "pop" from frames
due to design wind, expansion or contraction movement or
structural loading.
3. Glazing sealants and gaskets will remain free from abnormal
deterioration or dislocation due to sunlight, weather or oxidation.
D. Provide written warranty stating organic coating finish will be free from
fading, chalking, yellowing, peeling, cracking, pitting, corroding or non-
uniformity of color, or gloss deterioration beyond manufacturer's
descriptive standards for 25 years from date of Substantial Completion
and agreeing to promptly correct defects.
E. Provide a written warranty of 20years for gaskets to be free from

defects and to be replaced when failed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
(NOT USED)
2.2 FRAMING MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Aluminum:
1. Atleast 2.5mm thick extrusions fabricated from alloy 6063-T5

and complying with ASTM B221, ASTM B209, alloy 5005-H16
for sheets; or other alloys and temper recommended by
manufacturer appropriate for specified finish.
B. Internal Reinforcing:
1. ASTM A36 for carbon steel; or ASTM B308 for structural

Fahd Road
aluminum.
2. Shapes and sizes to suit installation.
3. Shop coat steel components after fabrication with alkyd type
zinc chromate primer complying with FS TT-P-645.
C. Inserts and Anchorage Devices:
1. Manufacturer's standard formed or fabricated assemblies, steel

or aluminum, of shapes, plates, bars or tubes.
2. Hot-dip galvanize steel assemblies after fabrication, comply with
ASTM A123, 2.0 ounce minimum coating.
D. Thermal Breaks: Include thermal breaks in all members. Thermal break
AAMA TIR A8 and AAMA 505 for dry shrinkage and composite
performance.
E. Fasteners:
1. Non-magnetic stainless steel or cadmium plated steel coated

with yellow or silver iridescence plating, compatible with
materials being fastened.
2. Series 300 stainless steel for exposed locations. Cadmium
plated steel with 0.0005 inch plating thickness and color
chromate coated for concealed locations.
3. Provide nuts or washers of design having means to prevent
disengagement; deforming of fastener threads is not acceptable.
4. Provide concealed fasteners wherever possible.
5. For exposed locations, provide countersunk flathead fasteners
with finish matching item fastened.
F. Expansion Anchor Devices: Lead-shield or toothed-steel, drilled-in,

expansion bolt anchors.
G. Shims: Non-staining, non-ferrous, type as recommended by system

manufacturer.
H. Protective Coatings: Cold applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-

Paint 12, compounded for 30 mil thickness for each coat; or alkyd type
zinc chromate primer complying with FS TT-P-645.
I. Glazing Gaskets:
1. Compression type design, replaceable, molded or extruded

neoprene, polyvinyl chloride (PVC), or ethylene propylene diene
monomer (EPDM).
2. Comply with ASTM C509 or C864.
3. Profile and hardness as necessary to maintain uniform pressure
for watertight seal.
Fahd Road
4. Manufacturer's standard black color.
J. Spandrel Panels
1. Type: Aluminum sheet, 1/8 inch thick, suitably reinforced on

concealed surface for surface flatness, or prefabricated
sandwich panels at manufacturer's option.
2. Surface flatness: 0.015 inch maximum deviation when measured
with 6 inch rule.
3. Squareness: 0.002 inch maximum for each inch of length at
panel edge.
4. Anchorage: Allow for expansion and contraction, to minimize oil
canning and distortion.
2.3 GLASS AND GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A. Refer to Section 08800.
2.4 SYSTEM FABRICATION
A. Take accurate field measurements to verify required dimensions prior

to fabrication.
B. Location of exposed joints are subject to Engineer's acceptance.
C. Fabricate components in accordance with approved shop drawings.

Remove burrs and ease edges. Shop fabricate to greatest extent
practicable to minimize field cutting, splicing, and assembly.
Disassemble only to extent necessary for shipping and handling
limitations.
D. Steel Components:
1. Clean surfaces after fabrication and immediately prior to

application of primer in accord with SSPC-SP2 or SSPC-SP3.
2. Apply specified shop coat primer in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions to provide 2.0 minimum dry film
thickness.
E. Fabricate components true to detail and free from defects impairing

appearance, strength or durability.
F. Fabricate components to allow for accurate and rigid fit of joints and
corners. Match components carefully ensuring continuity of line and
design. Ensure joints and connections will be flush and weathertight.
Ensure slip joints make full, tight contact and are weathertight.
G. Reinforce components as required at anchorage and support points, at

joints, and at attachment points for interfacing work.

Fahd Road
H. Provide structural reinforcing within framing members where required
to maintain rigidity and accommodate design loads.
I. Provide holes or slots, deflector plates, internal flashings, and sealants

to accommodate internal weep and drainage system.
J. Head and sill extrusions act as gutter and weep water to exterior; do
not penetrate sections with fasteners.
K. Allow for adequate clearance around perimeter of system to enable

proper installation and for thermal movement within system.
L. Separate dissimilar metals with protective coating or preformed

separators to prevent contact and corrosion.
M. Provide framing members to rigidly glaze spandrel panels and column

covers within framing system.
N. Provide special shapes and filler pieces with tight corners.
2.5 ALU MINIUM FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for

Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to
applying and designating finishes.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or

adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range
of approved samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not
acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are
assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
C. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established

by the Aluminium Association for designating aluminium finishes.
D. Finish: High performance powder coating as per AAMA 2604 in colour as

shown on drawing and/or as selected by the Engineer.
E. The powder coating shall comply with AAMA 2604. The quality of the
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions and proceed with Work when the substrate is

acceptable. Notify the Engineer for unsatisfactory substrate.
B. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other

Work.
Fahd Road
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable

provisions of AAMA Aluminum Curtain Wall Design Guide Manual.
B. Align assemblies plumb and level, free of warp or twist, aligning with
adjacent Work.
C. Tolerances:
1. Limit variations from plumb and level:

a. 1/8 inch in 20'-0" vertically and horizontally.
b. 1/4 inch in 40'-0" either direction.
2. Limit offsets in theoretical end-to-end and edge-to-edge
alignment:
a. 1/16 inch where surfaces are flush or less than 1/2 inch
out of flush and separated by not more than 2 inches.
b. 1/8 inch for surfaces separated by more than 2 inches.
3. Step in face: 1/16 inch maximum.
4. Jog in alignment: 1/16 inch maximum.
5. Location: 1/4 inch maximum deviation of any member at any
location.
6. Tolerances are not accumulative.
D. Provide attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to

building structure.
E. Anchor securely in place, allowing for required movement, including

expansion and contraction.
F. Separate dissimilar materials at contract points, including metal in

contact with masonry or concrete surfaces, with protective coating or
preformed separators to prevent contact and electrolytic action.
G. Set sill members in bed of sealant. Set other members with internal
sealants and baffles to provide weathertight construction.
H. Glazing:
1. Install glazing gaskets and sealants in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions without exception, including surface
preparations.
I. Fire Safing and Curtain Wall Insulation:
1. Install fire safing and curtain wall insulation specified in relevant

sections of this specification.

Fahd Road
3.3 FIE D QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection to monitor quality of installation and glazing.
B. Test to AAMA 502 or 503, ASTM E1105 and AAMA 501.
C. Perform field water test in compliance with ASTM E1105, on completed

portions of curtain wall.
D. Perform one test each at 10%, 50%, and 80% of curtain wall
completion, with repeat tests when failures occur.
E. When testing results in leakage, eliminate causes of leaks and retest

until no leaks occur.
3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Curtain wall and glass product manufacturers to provide field

surveillance of installation of their products.
B. Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable

conditions.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean surfaces in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations;

remove excess mastic, mastic smears, and other foreign materials.
B. Clean metal surfaces exercising care to avoid damage.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 09100
METAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

pertains to the design, fabricating, furnishing, and installing of:
1. Metal furring and framing where indicated on the Drawings,

including cross bracing and knee bracing.
2. Metal ceiling and soffit framing, including hanger attachments,
wire hangers, and screwable metal tee grid system.

of work intended.

1.3 REFERENCES

1. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip

Products.
Electrolytic Zinc-Coated, for Light
III-2/09100/ Metal Support Assemblies
Fahd Road
Coating Mass Applications.
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-
Dip Process.
4. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural
Steel Framing Members.
5. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of
Steel Framing Members to receive
Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel
Products.
6. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill
Screws for the Application of Gypsum
Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases.
7. ASTM E84 - Standard test method for surface
materials.
C. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers:
1. NAAMM ML/SFA 540 - Lightweight Steel Framing Systems

Manual.
D. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings:

II - Organic).
E. All applicable local codes, regulations, etc of Authorities having

Jurisdiction.
requested.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

required:
1. Literature: Manufacturer’s product data sheets, specifications,

performance data, physical properties for each item furnished
hereunder.
1.5 QUALIFICATION
A. Applicator, with a minimum of 5 years documented experience

demonstrating previously successful work of the type specified herein.

Fahd Road
A. Obtain products required for the Work of this Section from a single
manufacturer.
B. The Ceiling contractor and the contractor for Metal Support Assemblies
shall be same.

1.7 MOCK-UP
A. Provide mock-ups as directed by Engineer’s Representative.
A. Obtain certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction

indicating approval of specified products.
B. Fire resistance ratings: Where gypsum board systems with fire-

resistance ratings are indicated, provide materials and assemblies of
the rating required, tested as per ASTM E 119, which are identical to
those indicated by reference to Gypsum Association file numbers in
“Fire Resistance Design Manual” or to design designation in the
Underwriters Laboratories “Fire Resistance Directory” or in listing of
other testing agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and
to the Engineer’s Representative insurance underwriters.
A. Store materials inside under cover and in manner to keep them dry,
protected from weather, corrosion and damage from construction traffic
and other causes.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the respective trades

responsible for installing interfacing work, and ensure that the work
performed hereunder is acceptable to such trades for the installation of
their work.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall provide a warranty of 5 years from the date of

substantial Completion for any defects in material and installation of all
products pertaining to the works in this section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

Fahd Road
(NOT USED)
2.2 CEILING AND SOFFIT SUSPENSION MATERIALS
A. Hanger attachments: Galvanised steel hanger eyes, of size and

capacity to safely sustain a live load confirming to referenced
standards per hanger attachment.
B. Hangers: ASTM A641Soft temper, pre-stretched galvanized carbon
with a yield stress load of at least three times design load, but not less
than 2.7 mm (12 gauge).
C. Grid system for direct attachment of gypsum board: Confirm to the

requirements of Referenced Standards. Provide Underwriters
Laboratories Label firerated assemblies for locations requiring fire-
rated ceilings and soffits.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners:
1. Expansion-type fasteners for securing vertical concrete and

masonry surfaces.
2. Concrete stub nails for securing runners to concrete.
3. No.7 by 11 mm Pan head self-drilling screw to attach metal
framing components.
B. Asphalt felt moisture barrier: ASTM D226 No. 15 asphalt saturated

roofing felt.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify rough-in utilities are in proper location.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING
A. Install framing to height indicated, independent of walls, columns, and

above ceiling work. Erect after Work above ceiling is complete.
Coordinate the location of hangers with other work.
B. Securely anchor hangers to structural members or embed in structural

slab. Space hangers to achieve deflection limits indicated.
C. Space main carrying channels at maximum 1200 mm centers; not

more than 100 mm from wall surfaces. Lap splice securely.
D. Securely fix furring channels or metal studs to hangers to prevent

turning or twisting and to transmit full load to hangers.
1. Place furring channels perpendicular to carrying channels at 600

mm on center, not more 25 mm from perimeter walls and rigidly
Fahd Road
secure. Lap splice securely.
2. Screw fasten metal studs perpendicular to carrying channels at
600 mm on center, not more 25 mm from perimeter walls. Lap
splice securely.
E. Reinforce openings in suspension system which interrupt main carrying
channels or furring channels with lateral channel bracing. Extend
bracing minimum 600 mm past each opening.
A. Install ceiling framing and furring with a maximum variation from true
flatness of 3 mm per 3000 mm, noncumulative.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Daily clean work areas by sweeping and disposing of debris and

scraps.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 09260
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

pertains to the fabricating, furnishing and installing of gypsum board
partitions, liners, shaft walls, ceilings their framing and all support systems
and inspection hatches.

of work intended.

2. Section 07213 : Batt Insulation
1.3 REFERENCES

1. ASTM C36 - Standard Specification for Gypsum

Wallboard.
2. ASTM C79/C79M - Standard Specification for Gypsum
Sheathing Board.
3. ASTM C442 - Standard Specification for Gypsum
Backing Board and Coreboard.
III-2/09260/ Gypsum Board Systems

Fahd Road
4. ASTM C474 - Standard Test Methods for Joint
Treatment Materials for Gypsum Board
Construction.
5. ASTM C475 - Standard Specification for Joint
Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing
Gypsum Board.
6. ASTM C514 - Standard Specification for Nails for the
Application of Gypsum Board.
7. ASTM C557 - Standard Specification for Adhesives
for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to
Wood Framing.
8. ASTM C630/C630M - Standard Specification for Water-
Resistant Gypsum Backing Board.
9. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for
Nonstructural Steel Framing Members.
10. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-
Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Frame Construction and Manufactured
Housing.
11. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation
of Steel Framing Members to Receive
Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel
Products.
12. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application
and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
13. ASTM C931/C931M - Standard Specification for Exterior
Gypsum Soffit Board.
14. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill
Screws for the Application of Gypsum
Panel Products or Metal Plaster
Bases.
15. ASTM C1280 - Standard Specification for Application
of Gypsum Sheathing.
16. ASTM E 84 - Standard test method for surface
materials.
Transmission Loss of Building
Partitions and Elements.
18. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests
of Building Construction and Materials.

Fahd Road
C. Gyp sum Association:
1. GA 214 - Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish.
2. GA 216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel products.

3. GA 253 - Application of Gypsum Sheating.
4. GA 600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual.
Jurisdiction.
requested.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. The following submittals are required:
1. Shop drawings: Details of any special conditions.

2. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets,
specifications, performance data, physical properties for each
item furnished hereunder.
1.5 QUALIFICATION
A. Installer, with a minimum of 10 years documented experience

demonstrating previously successful work of the type specified herein
1.6 MOCK-UP
A. Provide mock-ups where directed by Engineer’s Representative.
A. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C840, ASTM C1280, GA-214,

GA-216 and GA-600.
B. Acoustically and fire rated Gypsum Partitions shall be in accordance

with GA-600-2003 and its latest amendment.


Fahd Road
A. Fire resistance ratings: Where gypsum board systems with fire-
resistance ratings are indicated, provide materials and assemblies of
the rating required, tested as per ASTM E 119.
A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.10 DELIVER, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing

brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside, under cover and in manner to keep them dry,
protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination,
corrosion and damage from construction traffic and other causes.
C. Neatly stack board materials flat to prevent sagging.
D. Handle board materials so to prevent damage to edges, ends and
surfaces.
E. Protect metal trim accessories and corner beads from being bent or
damaged.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Do not install gypsum board until all pipes, ducts, conduits, and other
such items which are to be enclosed thereby, have been permanently
installed, inspected and approved.
B. Coordinate the work of this Section with the respective trades
responsible for installing interfacing work, and ensure that the work
performed hereunder is acceptable to such trades for the installation of
their work.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall provide warranty for 5 years for the products and their
installation for warping, cracking, breakage or failure due to defective
workmanship under this section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
(NOT USED)
B. Aluminium reveal trim: As per manufacturer’s instructions.
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD
A. Standard gypsum board: 15 mm thick for wall and 12.5mm thick for
ceilings, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, of lengths to
Fahd Road
minimize end joints, with tapered edges.
B. Moisture resistant gypsum board (green board): Conforming to ASTM

C 630, 15mm thick for wall and 12.5mm thick for ceiling, unless
otherwise indicated on drawings and of lengths to minimize end joints,
with tapered edges.
C. Fire rated gypsum board : UL fire resistance rated ASTM C36 ‘Type X’
rated board to be installed where indicated or to comply with statutory
regulations. Thickness shall be 15mm for wall and 12.5mm for ceiling
unless statutory requirements need more. All at the cost of the
contractor.
D. Acoustically rated gypsum board: In accordance with GA-600. 15mm

thick for wall and 12.5mm thick for ceiling double layered as per GA-
600 to achieve the STC rating.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Sound-Resistant Board: Sound resistant fiberboard 1/2 inch (13 mm)

thick, Sound Choice by Temple-Inland Forest Products Corp.
B. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Rockwool with 50 Kg/m3 density and

NRC of 1.0. For Fire-rated assemblies install as required by KFD
requirements. Install where Acoustic Gypsum board is indicated on
drawings. Thickness of the blanket shall be in accordance with GA-
600.
C. Acoustical Sealant: Non-hardening, non-drying, non-skinning, non-

staining, non-bleeding, gunnable type as recommended by
manufacturer for use in conjunction with gypsum board.
D. Metal Corner Beads: ASTM C1047; formed galvanized steel angle,

minimum base steel 0.014 inch thick, sizes as required to suit
substrate.
E. Metal Casing Beads: ASTM C1047; formed galvanized steel trim,
minimum base steel 0.014 inch thick, sizes as required to suit
substrate.
F. Metal Control Joints: ASTM C1047; roll-formed zinc control joints with
perforations in flanges; center channel with removable tape strip over
channel.
G. Fastening Devices for Metal Framing: ASTM C1002.
H. Fastening Devices for Wood Framing: ASTM C514.
I. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 954.
J. Joint Compound and Tape: ASTM C 475.
2.4 METAL FRAMING

Fahd Road
A. Metal Framing Materials:
1. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel studs.

2. Deep-Leg Deflection Track: ASTM C645 top runner with
flanges.
3. Main Runner Channels: Galvanized. Complying with
ASTMC645.
4. Cross Furring Channels: Galvanized. Complying with ASTM
C645.
5. Rigid Furring Channels: Galvanized. Complying with ASTM
C645.
6. Furring Channels Z shaped channels complying with ASTM
C645.
7. Resilient Furring Channels: Galvanized, complying with ASTM
C645.
8. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C645,
direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring
members that interlock.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be
performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper
completion of Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are
corrected.
B. Examine substrates to which gypsum board construction attaches or

abuts. Verify pre-set hollow metal frames, cast-in anchors, and
structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of gypsum board
construction.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Ceiling Anchorage: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension with

installation of overhead structural systems to ensure that inserts and
other structural anchorage provisions have been installed to receive
ceiling anchors in a manner that will develop their full strength and at
spacing required to support ceiling.
1. Provide concrete inserts and steel deck devices to other trades

for installation well in advance of time needed for coordination
with other construction.
3.3 INSTALLATION

Fahd Road
A. Metal Framing - General:
1. Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C754 and with ASTM
C840 requirements that apply to framing installation.
2. Install supplementary framing, blocking, bracing at termination in

Work, and support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,
grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, and similar
construction to comply with details indicated on Drawings and
with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer.
3. Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer
of loading imposed by structural movement, at locations
indicated below to comply with details indicated on Drawings:
a. Where edges of suspended ceilings abut building
structure horizontally at ceiling perimeters or penetrations
of structural elements.
b. Where partitions and wall framing abuts overhead
structure.
c. Provide slip type joint as detailed to attain lateral support
and avoid axial loading.
4. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with steel
framing or furring members. Independently frame both sides of
joints with framing or furring members.
B. Metal Framing - Walls and Partitions:
1. Install runners (track) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and

columns where gypsum board stud system abuts other
construction.
a. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls,
install asphalt felt strips between studs and wall.
2. Metal Stud Spacing: Maximum 16 inches (406 mm) on center,
unless noted otherwise. Use gage and depth of stud required to
meet maximum deflection requirements. For Acoustical Gypsum
wall panels follow spacing in accordance with GA-600.
3. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring
member so that fastening surfaces do not vary more than 1/8
inch (3 mm) from plane of faces of adjacent framing.
4. Extend all partition framing full height to structural supports or
substrates or upto soffits above suspended ceilings even if they
are shown to terminate at ceiling level, except for partitions
indicated to terminate below suspended ceiling level. Continue
framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around
ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for
gypsum board.
5. Ensure effective plenum closing as required for optimum sound
control of partitions.
Fahd Road
6. Install steel studs in sizes and spacing indicated on Drawings,
but not less than that required by referenced steel framing
installation standards.
7. Install steel studs so that flanges point in the same direction and
gypsum boards can be installed in the direction opposite to that
of the flanges.
8. Frame door openings to comply with details indicated on
Drawings, with GA-216, and with applicable published
recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. Attach
vertical studs at jambs with screws either directly to frames or to
jamb anchor clips on door frames. Install runner track section
(for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
9. Extend vertical jamb studs through suspended ceilings and
attach to underside of floor or roof structure above.
10. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details
indicated on Drawings, or if none is indicated, in same manner
as required for door openings; and install framing below sills of
openings to match framing required above door heads.
11. Blocking: Bolt or screw steel channels to metal studs. Install
concealed wood blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet
partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, hardware, and other
related items that require backing for support.
C. Metal Framing - Suspended and Furred Ceilings:
1. Secure hangers to structural support by connecting directly to

structure.
2. Install metal ceiling framing per ASTM C635, ASTM C636 and
ASTM C754, and space main runners at 4 feet (1219 mm) on center
maximum.
3. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or
conduit.
4. Keep hangers and braces 2 inches (51 mm) clear of ducts,
pipes, or conduits.
5. Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for
support.
6. Comply with local governing code requirements where
applicable.
D. Gyp sum Wallboard - General:
1. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and

finish gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
2. Install sound attenuation insulation, specified in Section 07213,
prior to gypsum board installation unless readily installed after
board has been installed.

Fahd Road
3. Locate exposed end-butt joints as far from center of walls and
ceilings as possible, and stagger not less than 24 inches (610
mm) in alternate courses of board.
4. Install ceiling boards across framing in the manner which minimizes
the number of end-butt joints, and which will avoid end joints in
the central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints a minimum of
24 inches (610 mm).
5. Install wall and partition boards vertically unless otherwise
noted.
6. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install
imperfect, damaged, or damp boards. Butt boards together for a
light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch
(1.5 mm) open space between boards. Do not force into place.
7. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in
horizontal applications or where intermediate supports or
gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints.
Position boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against
tapered edges, and mill-cut or field-cut ends against mill-cut or field-
cut ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends.
Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of
partitions.
8. Attach gypsum board to steel studs so that leading edge or end
of each board is attached to open (unsupported) edge of stud
flange first.
9. Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking
provided for additional support at openings and cut-outs.
10. Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated
on Drawings, and as recommended by Gypsum Association,
with space between edges of boards prepared to receive trim
accessories.
a. Maximum distance between control joints: 30 linear feet
(9144 mm).
11. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum
board in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in
chase walls that are properly braced internally.
a. Fit gypsum board around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
b. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, cut
gypsum board to fit profile of coffers and allow 1/4 to 1/2
inch (6 mm to 13 mm) wide joint for sealant.
12. Isolate perimeter of non-load bearing drywall partitions at
structural abutments. Provide 1/4 to 1/2 inch (6 mm to 13 mm)
space and trim edge with "U" bead edge trim. Seal joints with
acoustical sealant. See also 07910.
13. Where sound-rated drywall construction is indicated on
Drawings, seal construction at perimeters, control and
expansion joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous
Fahd Road
bead of acoustical sealant including a bead at both faces of
partitions. Comply with ASTM C919 and manufacturer's
recommendations for location of edge trim, and close off sound-
flanking paths around or through construction, including sealing
of partitions above acoustical ceilings.
a. For double-layer partition systems, construction above
acoustical plaster ceilings may be installed with base
layer only.
14. Space fasteners in gypsum boards per referenced gypsum
board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's
recommendations.
15. Curved Gypsum Partitions and Surfaces: Install gypsum board
panels horizontally with wrapped edges perpendicular to metal
framing per manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Gypsum Sheathing: Comply with ASTM C 1280 and GA-253.
F. Accessories:
1. General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim

accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the
supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges to comply with
2. Install metal corner beads at external corners.
3. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would
otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed, except where plastic
trim is indicated on Drawings. Provide type with face flange to
receive joint compound except where "U" bead (semi-finishing
type) is indicated.
4. Install gypsum board reveals where indicated on Drawings.
5. Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings, or if not
indicated, at spacing and locations required by referenced
gypsum board application and finish standard, and approved by
the Engineer for visual effect.
3.4 JOINT TREATMENT
A. General:
1. Comply with ASTM C474 and ASTM C475.

2. Inspect areas to be joint treated, verifying that the gypsum board
fits snugly against supporting framework.
3. In areas where joint treatment and compound finishing will be
performed, maintain a temperature recommended by the
manufacturer prior to commencing the treatment and until joint
and finishing compounds have dried.
4. Apply the joint treatment and finishing compound by machine or

Fahd Road
hand tool.
5. Provide a minimum drying time of 24 hours between coats, with
additional drying time in poorly ventilated areas.
3.5 FINISH
A. Before painting Gypsum board surface, ensure that it is finished to

appropriate level as described in Gypsum Association Publication (GA-
214) “recomended levels of gypsum board finish” or in ASTM C840.
Finish gypsum board to Level 5.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 09310
TILES
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Tiles for walls, floors, bases, etc. in patterns as shown on drawings.
B. Work includes ceramic tiles, porcelain tiles, accent tiles, decorative

glass mosaic, etc, to the areas shown on the drawings to suit the
design intent.
C. Tiles shall be purpose manufactured for Healthcare industry and shall

be anti-bacterial treated.

of Works intended.

3. Section 09220 : Portland Cement Plaster
4. Section 10800 : Toilet and Bath Accessories
1.3 REFERENCES
The minimum standards for products specified in this section shall be

specified herein, perform work in accordance with specifications, codes and
standards cited therein, and their latest editions, revisions, applicable
applicable.
A. Reference Standards: Comply with following:
1. DIN Standard
a. DIN EN 14411 - Ceramic tiles - Definitions,

III-2/09310/ Tiles
Fahd Road
classification, characteristics and
marking.
b. DIN 18515-1 - Cladding for external walls - Tiles fixed
with mortar, principles of design and
application.
c. DIN 18516-1 - Cladding for external walls
- Requirements, principles of testing.
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a. ANSI A108.1A and B - Installation of Ceramic Tile

with
Portland Cement Mortar,
b. ANSI A108.4 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable
Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive,
c. ANSI A108.5 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-
Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex
Portland Cement Mortar.
d. ANSI A108.6 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Chemical Resistant, Water-
Cleanable, Tile Setting and Grouting
Epoxy.
e. ANSI A108.8 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Chemical Resistant furan resin mortar
and grout.
f. ANSI A108.9 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with
modified epoxy emulsion mortar/grout.
g. ANSI A108.10 - Installation of Grout in Tile work.
h. ANSI A108.11 - Installation of Cementitious Backer
Units.
i. ANSI A108.12 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with EGP
(exterior glue plywood) latex-portland
cement mortar.
j. ANSI A108.13 - Installation of Waterproof Membranes
for Thin-Set Tile and Stone.
k. ANSI A108.14 - Installation of Paper-Faced glass
mosaic tile.
l. ANSI A108.15 - Installation of Paper-Faced glass
mosaic tile - Alternate Method.
m. ANSI A108-16 - Proposal for installation of paper-
faced, back-mounted, edge-mounted,
or clear film face-mounted glass
mosaic tile.
n. ANSI A118.1 - Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar.
III-2/09310/ Tiles
Fahd Road
o. ANSI A118.3 - Chemical Resistant, Water-Cleanable
Tile Setting and Grouting Epoxy and
Water-Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy
Adhesive.
p. ANSI A118.4 - Latex Portland Cement Mortar.

q. ANSI A118.6 - Ceramic Tile Grouts
r. ANSI A118.7 - Polymer Modified Cement Grout.
s. ANSI A118.9 - Cementitious Backer Units
t. ANSI A118.10 - Waterproof membranes for Thin-Set
Tile and Stone.
u. ANSI A118.11 - EGP (Exterior Glue Plywood) latex-
Portland Cement mortar.
v. ANSI A118.12 - Crack Isolation Membranes.
w. ANSI A136.1 - Organic Adhesives, Type I Adhesive
and Type II Adhesive.
x. ANSI A137.1 - Standard specification for Ceramic
Tiles.
3. Certification
a. ANSI Z34.2 - Certification, self-certification by
producer or supplier.
4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
a. ASTM 1028 - Standard Test Method for Determining
the Static Coefficient of Friction of
Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by
the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter
Method
b. ASTM A 185 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded
Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete
c. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for
Masonry Mortar
d. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland
Cement
e. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated
Lime for Masonry Purposes
f. ASTM C373 - Standard Test Method for Water
Absorption, Bulk Density, Apparent
Porosity, and Apparent Specific Gravity
of Fired Whiteware Products
g. ASTM C847 - Standard Specification for Metal Lath
h. ASTM E 84 - Standard test method for surface
materials.
III-2/09310/ Tiles
Fahd Road
5. British Standards
a. BS 5385
(PART 1) Code of practice for the design and
installation of internal ceramic and natural
stone wall and mosaics in normal
conditions.
b. BS 5385
installation of external ceramic wall tiling
and mosaics (including terracotta and
faience tiles).
c. BS 5385
installation of ceramic floor tiles and
mosaics.
d. BS 5385
(PART 4) Code of practice for tiling and mosaics in
specific conditions.
e. BS 5385
PART 5) Code of practice for the design and
installation of terrazzo tile and slab, natural
stone and composition block floorings.
f. BS EN12004 Adhesives for tiles. Definitions and
specifications.
6. Tile Council of America (TCA) – Handbook for Ceramic Tile
Installation, latest edition.

Jurisdiction.
Note: Contractor shall keep a copy of all the Referenced codes and
standards on site and shall provide a copy to the Engineer
immediately upon request.
A. Tiles for floors:
1. Tiles shall be anti-slip tiles conforming to ANSI 137.1.

2. Scratch resistance: 7 Mohs or greater.
3. Breaking strength:
a. Porcelain - 385 to 625 lbs
b. Ceramic - 250 to 450 lbs
4. Abrasion Resistance – 3 to 5
5. Moisture absorption: 0.5 to 1% as per ASTM C373.
6. Static coefficient of friction: 0.5 as per ASTM 1028.
7. Sizes: as noted on the drawings.
8. Colour/finish: As selected and approved by the Engineer.
III-2/09310/ Tiles
Fahd Road
B. Tiles for Walls:
1. Tiles shall be glazed coloured, extruded.

2. Scratch resistance: 5 to 7 Mohs.
3. Breaking strength: 95-250 lbs.
4. Abrasion resistance: 3 to 5.
5. Moisture absorption: 0.5 to 1% as per ASTM C373.
6. Sizes: as noted on the drawings.
7. Colour/finish: As selected and approved by the Engineer.
C. Slip-Resistance Requirements for Floor Tiles
1. General Areas
a. Entrance Areas R9
b. Stairs R9
Social facilities (eg.

c. R10
toilets, wash rooms)
Sanitary/medical
d. R9
treatment rooms
2. Catering
Food Preparation
a. R12
Kitchens
b. Washing up rooms R12

Dining Rooms, canteens
c. including serving R9
counters
3. Cold Stores, deep freeze stores

a. For unpacked goods R12
b. For packed goods R11
4. Health Service Rooms

a. Disinfection rooms(wet) R11
b. Pathological facilities R10
Rooms for medical bath

c. R11
hydrotherapy
Washrooms of operating
d. R10
theatres
III-2/09310/ Tiles
Fahd Road
Sanitary Rooms, ward
e. R10
bathrooms
Rooms for medical
f. diagnosis and therapy, R9
massage rooms
g. Operating theaters R9
Wards with hospital

h. R9
rooms and corridors
Medical practices, day
i. R9
clinics
j. Pharmacies R9
k. Laboratories R9
5. Laundry
Rooms with washing

a. machines for washing of R11
linen and clothes
b. Ironing rooms R9
6. Outdoor areas
a. Entrance areas and stairs R11 or R10

b. Traffic routes R11 or R10
Loading platforms,
c. R11 or R10
covered
Loading platforms, not

d. R12
covered
Sloping ramps (eg. For

e. wheel-chairs, loading R12
platforms)
7. Parking areas
a. Open air parking areas R11 or R10
D. Glass Mosaic Tiles:
1. Glass Mosaic Tiles shall in general be conforming to ANSI

A137.1
2. Bond Strength : 100-150 conforming to ASTM C 482
III-2/09310/ Tiles
Fahd Road
3. Resistance to Staining: Conforming to ASTM C 1378
4. Facial Dimensions and Thickness of Flat, Rectangular Ceramic
Wall and Floor Tile: Conforming to ASTM C499
5. Water absorption : Shall be rated impervious as per ASTM C373
6. Thermal Shock Resistance: Shall show no failure as per ASTM
C484.
7. Crazing Resistance; Shall show no evidence of crazing when
tested as per ASTM C424.
8. Chemical Resistance: Shall comply with requirements of ASTM
C650 when exposed to test solutions.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit to the Engineer.
1. Include tile, setting materials, grout, and joint sealant.
B. Samples: Submit three full size samples of each type of tile to the
Engineer for approval.
1. Submit full set of samples for color selection.

2. Engineer will retain one set of approved samples.
3. Keep one set of approved samples at site throughout
construction period.
C. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit following to the

Engineer:
1. Certificates: Submit Master Grade Certificate for each type of

tile, signed by manufacturer that tile complies with ANSI A137.1
standard grade.
2. Submit test certificates for grouts and adhesives for compliance
with reference standards and their suitability for application.
A. Provide a copy of TCA handbook to the Engineer for Reference on

Site.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

III-2/09310/ Tiles
Fahd Road
A. General:
1. Tile: Deliver in unopened, grade sealed packages in accordance
with ANSI A 137.1.
2. Mortar Mixes and Grouts: Deliver in unopened containers with
labels certifying compliance with Reference Standards. Store
materials in clean, dry area.
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Do not install mortar or set and grout tile when ambient

temperature is below 10 degrees C (50 degrees F).
2. Comply with minimum temperature requirements of bonding and
grouting materials manufacturers.
B. Protection: Protect adjoining work surfaces before tile work begins.
1.10 SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING
A. Scheduling: Schedule bathtub surround work in coordination with

associated plumbing work installer.
B. Scheduling and Completion: Comply with requirements of approved

construction schedule.
1.11 MOCK UP
A. Prepare mockup of 10m2 for each type of tile for approval of colour and
installation. Approved mockups may be incorporated into works
subject to acceptance by the Engineer.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall provide warranty of 5 years against any defects in

material and installation for all products related to this Section.
B. Contractor shall provide a warranty of 10 years for the performance of

Adhesives.
A. Provide with 3 percent of each color, type and shape of tile used.
B. Provide adhesive adequate for the extra tiles and each color of grout
used.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
(NOT USED)
2.2 TYPE OF TILES
A. Tiles for walls, floors, bases, etc. in patterns as shown on drawings.

III-2/09310/ Tiles
Fahd Road
B. Ceramic, porcelain, decorative glass mosaic, accent tile etc, tiles to the
areas shown on the drawings to suit the design intent.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. General Requirements:
1. Tile shall be Standard Grade and comply with requirements of

TCA A 137.1 with modifications as specified herein.
2. Tiles are required to be furnished in “factory mounted” sheets in
patterns and colors selected. Unless otherwise specified,
mounting is optional with tile manufacturer except that back-
mounting shall comply with requirements of ANSI A137.1 governing
bond strength and mounting shall be recommended by tile
manufacturer as suitable for the intended installation.
3. Where not otherwise noted on the Drawings, colors and patterns
will be selected by the Engineer.
B. Tile Trim Shapes and Bases: Unless otherwise noted, trim units and
shapes shall be of same type as the tile with which they are used and
shall comply with TCA A137.1. Include bases, bull noses, caps, coves,
stops, angles, returns, trimmers and other shapes indicated or required
to produce a completely finished installation to produce an acceptable
overall appearance in accordance with the actual ‘setting out’ at site.
Trim shapes shall match tile in color and finish unless otherwise noted.
C. For Internal corners use cove tiles and external corners use bull nose
tiles.
D. Where Tiles are shown on steps use nonskid tiles with bull noses and
atleast three (3) grooves with corborandum inserts.
E. Cement: ASTM C 150,
F. Lime: ASTM C 207,
G. Sand: Sharp, clean, salt and silt free conforming to ASTM C 144.
H. Water: Clean and potable, suitable for use with tile materials.
I. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: Commercially formulated, latex

modified, thin-set Portland cement mortar conforming to American
National Standard Specification a 118.4 for “Latex-Portland Cement
Mortar”.
J. Tile Adhesive: Tile Adhesive conforming to the performance criteria of

both ANSI A118.4 and ANSI A136.1 or BS 5385.
K. Tile Adhesive (Where Used Over Membrane): Water resistant, thin set
tile adhesive especially recommended and approved by the
manufacturer for setting floor tile over waterproof membrane system
specified. Include primers required by Project conditions.
III-2/09310/ Tiles
Fahd Road
L. Epoxy Adhesive: Shall be heavy duty chemical resistant complying
with ANSI A118.3 and EN 12004.
M. Grout: Factory proportioned pre-blended mixture of special hydraulic

binders, graded aggregates, special polymers, water repellant
additives, organic molecules and pigments to be mixed and applied as
per manufacturer’s instructions. Product to conform to the requirements
of GEV EMICODE EC1 – extremely low emission level. Products to be
water repellant with ‘Drop Effect’ and Anti-Mould with ‘Bio Block’
technology, and conform to the requirements of GSO/ISO 13007-3
class CG2
1. Grouts Type 1
a. Description: High performance grout for: Ceramic,
Porcelain, Natural Stone, Glass, Ceramic and Marble,
Mosaic, Granite and Agglomerates.
b. The grout shall have:
i BioBlock® mould resistance
ii DropEffect® water repellency
iii Shall comply with ISO 13007-3 class CG2WAF,
iv Shall meet the requirements of GEV EMICODE
EC1 – extremely low VOC emission level
c. Grout shall have the following performance values in
accordance with ISO 13007:
i Flexural strength value of (9.0N/mm2 after 28
days to EN12803-3
ii Compressive strength value of (40.0.0N/mm2
after 28 days to EN12803-3
iii Water absorption value of 0.1g after 30' to EN
12808-5
iv Water absorption value of 0.1g after 4 hours to
EN 12808-5
v Flexural strength value of (9.0N/mm2 after 28
days after freeze/thaw cycles to EN12803-3
vi Shall have excellent resistance to solvents and
oils and alkalis
vii High performance cementitious grout; shall be
one component product, comprising special
hydraulic binders, graded aggregates, special
polymers, pigments, organic molecules and
water repellent additives
d. Applications: Interior and exterior wall and floor
installations
2. Grouts Type 2
III-2/09310/ Tiles
Fahd Road
a. Description: Ceramic and Natural Stone
b. High performance epoxy resin grout for Ceramic and
Natural Stone where excellent resistance to acids and
alkalis, and food and drinks processing where the highest
standards of hygiene is required.
c. Grout shall comply with ISO 13007-1 class RG and R2T,
d. Shall conform to the requirements of GEV EMICODE
e. Grout shall conform to the performance values in
accordance with ISO13007-1 class RT2, RG
f. Shear adhesion strength value (initial) of 25.0N/mm2 to
EN 12003
g. Shear adhesion strength value (after water immersion) of
23.0N/mm2 to EN 12003
h. Shear adhesion strength value (after thermal shock) of
25.0N/mm2 to EN 12003
i. Flexural strength value of 31.0N/mm2 to EN 12808-3
j. Compressive strength value of 58.0N/mm2 to EN 12808-3
k. Water absorption value of 0.05g to EN 12808-5
l. High performance grout, two component epoxy resin
based product, comprising silica sand and special
components with excellent resistance to acids and
excellent cleanability
m. Applications: Interior and exterior wall and floor
installations particularly food preparation areas.
N. Tile additive: For areas where conductive and anti-dissipative ceramic

tile floors are shown on drawings. (Ex: Operating theatres, intensive
care and tomography units, NMR wards, analysis laboratories, etc).
Add solvent-free, conductive additive in accordance with CEI EN
61340-5-1 to adhesives, grouting mortars, etc.
O. Reinforcing Mesh: Welded fabric, 2” x 2”/16 x 16, or 3” x 3”/13 x 13, or

1-1/2” x 2”/16 x 13, conforming to ASTM A 185.
P. Metal Lath: 3.4# galvanized diamond mesh expanded metal lath, self-
furring, conforming to ASTM C 847.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions:
1. Existing Conditions: Before beginning installation, examine

surfaces to receive tile, setting beds or accessories for defects
or conditions adversely affecting quality and execution of
III-2/09310/ Tiles
Fahd Road
installation.
a. Surfaces to Receive Mortar Bed Installation: Horizontal
surfaces level within 6mm (¼inch) in 3000mm (10 feet) in
all directions and vertical surfaces plumb within 6mm
(¼inch) in 2400mm (8 feet) in all directions.
b. Surfaces to Receive Thinset Installation: Horizontal
surfaces level within 3mm (⅛inch) in 3000mm (10 feet) in
all directions and vertical surfaces plumb within 3mm
(⅛inch) in 2400mm (8 feet) in all directions.
2. Do not proceed with installation until conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection: Protect adjacent elements from damage and disfiguration

in accordance with Division 1: General requirements.
1. Repair or replace damaged elements in accordance with

General requirements.
B. Substrate: Prepare as necessary to receive tile.
1. Floors:
a. Level major uneven concrete floor joints or other
irregularities by bush hammering or grinding and filling
with latex type underlayment.
b. Sand leveled areas to provide surface level plus/minus
6mm (¼inch) in 3000mm (10 feet).
c. Strip and thoroughly clean floors before applying tile
finish.
2. Cleaning, Patching and Priming: Thoroughly clean substrate
before tile installation. Prime as recommended by tile setting
material manufacturer.
a. Remove rough spots and foreign matter that might
telegraph through tile finish.
b. Patch minor rough areas, voids, and defects.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install ceramic tile in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations and Reference Standards for particular flooring
material, substrate, and installation conditions.
B. Layout:
1. Extend tile into recesses and under equipment and fixtures to

form complete covering without interruptions.
2. Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated.
a. Center tile fields in both directions in each space or on
III-2/09310/ Tiles
Fahd Road
each wall area.
b. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, trim, and
walls are same size.
c. Adjust to minimize tile cutting.
d. Provide uniform joint widths.
3. Terminate tile neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners,
without disruption of pattern or joint alignment.
C. Expansion Joints:
1. Comply with the recommendations specified in TCA handbook

for the expansion, control, contraction and isolation joints.
D. Ceramic Tile Wall Installation:
1. Wall Tile Thinset Installation Over Water Resistant Gypsum

Board: Install, clean, protect, and cure in conformance with one
of following as scheduled or specified:
a. TCA Handbook Method W243 and ANSI A108.5 using
latex Portland cement mortar.
b. TCA Handbook Method W242 and ANSI A 108.4 using
organic adhesive.
2. Wall Tile Mortar Bed Installation: Install, clean, protect, and cure
in conformance with TCA Handbook Method W221, W222, or W231
and ANSI A108.1A or A108.1B using Portland cement mortar.
E. Ceramic Tile Bathtub/Shower Surround (Where applicable):
1. Integrate shower surround with installation of bathtub.

2. Height of Bathtub/Shower Surround: 1500mm (60 inchs) above
bathtub ledge.
3. Where window is located over bathtub, install ceramic tile
window sill and jamb returns around entire aperture.
a. Tiling: Not interfere with easy use of and access to
window pulls, handles, screen retainers, etc.
4. Wall Tile Thinset Installation Over Water Resistant Gypsum
Board: Install, clean, protect, and cure in conformance with one
of following as scheduled or specified:
a. TCA Handbook Method B413 in conjunction with Method
W243 using latex Portland cement mortar.
b. TCA Handbook Method B413 in conjunction with Method
W242 using organic adhesive.
5. Wall Tile Mortar Bed Installation: Install, clean, protect, and cure
in conformance with TCA Handbook Method B411 in
conjunction with Method W221, W222, or W231.
III-2/09310/ Tiles
Fahd Road
F. Ceramic Tile Floor Installation:
1. For the installation of tiles at workshop strictly comply with

manufacturers recommendations apart from TCA handbook.
2. Concrete Floor Thinset Installation: Install, clean, protect, and
cure in conformance with TCA Handbook Method F113 and
ANSI A 108.5 using latex-Portland cement mortar.
a. Slab: Free of curing compound and other contaminates
before proceeding.
3. Concrete Floor Portland Cement Mortar Bed Installation: Install,
clean, protect, and cure in conformance with TCA Handbook
Method F112 and ANSI A 108.1A or A 108.1B using Portland
cement mortar.
G. Grouting: Install, clean, and cure grout in conformance with ANSI

A108.10.
1. Ceramic Tile Walls and Bathtub/Shower Surrounds (Where

applicable):
a. Thinset Latex Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Use
latex-portland cement grout.
b. Thinset Organic Adhesive Installations: Use silicone
rubber grout with pre-grouted sheets.
c. Mortar Bed Installations: Use latex-portland cement
grout.
2. Floors: Use latex-portland cement grout.
H. Tolerances of Completed Tile Surfaces:
1. Horizontal Surfaces: Maximum variations from level shall not

exceed 3mm (⅛inch) in 3000mm (10 feet) in all directions.
2. Vertical Surfaces: Maximum variations from level shall not
exceed 3mm (⅛inch) in 2400mm (8 feet) in all directions.
I. Joint Sealants: Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations.
1. Surfaces to be Sealed: Clean, dry and free of any foreign

matter that would degrade adhesion.
2. Prime cleaned surfaces in accordance with sealant
manufacturer’s recommendations.
3. Protect surfaces adjacent to joints by masking tape before
applying sealant. Remove tape upon finishing sealing work.
A. After initial cleaning, provide non-staining temporary wood guards at

corners and other surfaces subject to damage.
III-2/09310/ Tiles
Fahd Road
B. Rope off flooring to permit curing of setting bed.
C. Protect work from damage due to subsequent building operations.
3.5 CLEANING AND CURING
A. Cleaning: Comply with requirements of Division 1: General

Requirements.
B. Cleaning: Upon completion of setting and grouting, thoroughly clean

and polish tile.
1. Acid or Acid Cleaners: Not allowed.

2. Glazed Tile: Thoroughly clean and dry, polish with clean dry
cloths.
C. Curing of Mortar Bed Installations: Damp cure tile installations for 72

hours minimum. Cover with 40 pound Kraft paper. Do not use
polyethylene sheets.
END OF SECTION
III-2/09310/ Tiles
Fahd Road
SECTION 09510
ACOUSTIC CEILING
PART 1 GENERAL

All products of this section shall be purpose manufactured for health care sector. All
ceiling tiles in this section shall be anti-microbial treated.
A. Acoustic Ceiling system and perimeter trim.
B. The work includes labour, material, equipment and services required to

integrate with lighting, diffusers and ducts sprinkler, smoke detector,
heat detector and the like.
1.2 RELATED SECTION

Works intended.
1. Section 09100 : Metal Support Assemblies

2. Section 09515 : Decorative Metal Ceiling
1.3 REFERENCES

and standards cited therein, and their latest editions, revisions, applicable
addenda and supplements. Where there is conflict between the
referenced standards the most stringent of the conditions/requirements shall
be applicable.
1. ASTM A 641 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.
III-2/09510/ Acoustic Ceiling
Fahd Road
2. ASTM A 653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-
coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process.
3. ASTM A 1008 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold
Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-
Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with
Improved Formability.
4. ASTM C 423 - Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption
Coefficients by the Reverberation Room
Method.
5. ASTM C635 - Standard Specification for Metal Suspension
Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel
Ceilings.
6. ASTM C636 - Recommended Practice for Installation of
Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels.
7. ASTM C919 - Standard practice for use of sealants in
8. ASTM D 3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to
Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior
Coatings in an Environmental Chamber.
10. ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to
Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior
Coatings in an Environmental Chamber.
11. ASTM E 1111 - Standard Test Method for Measuring the
Interzone Attenuation of Ceilings Systems.
12. ASTM E 1130-08 Standard Test Method for Objective
Measurement of Speech Privacy in Open Plan
Spaces Using Articulation Index
13. ASTM E 1264 - Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.
14. ASTM E 1414 - Standard Test Method for Airborne Sound
Attenuation Between Rooms Sharing a
Common Ceiling Plenum.
15. ASTM E1477 - Standard Test Method for Luminous
Reflectance Factor of Acoustical Materials by
Use of Integrating-Sphere Reflectometers.
16. ASTM E 2638-08 Standard Test Method for Objective
Measurement of the Speech Privacy Provided
by a Closed Room
17. BS 8290 Part 1 - Suspended Ceilings, code of practice for
design.
18. BS 8290 Part 2 - Suspended Ceilings, Specification for
performance of components and
Fahd Road
assemblies.
19. BS 8290 Part 3 - Suspended Ceilings, code of practice for
installation and maintenance.
20. BS 476 Part 7 - Fire Tests on building material and
structures.
21. BS EN 10142/10147 - Hot dip zinc coatings on steel sheet
22. BS EN ISO 1461 - Hot dip galvanised coatings on
fabricated iron and steel articles.
23. CISCA - Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction
Association.

Jurisdiction.
requested.
A. Ceiling systems shall have a Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) of

0.90 and Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC) of 40.
B. Suspension system to rigidly secure ceiling system including integral

building services components.
C. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide ceilings that are identical to

those passing tests for the following fire performance characteristics,
as per BS 476 test method indicated below, by ASTM E84 or other
testing and inspecting organisations acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate
markings of applicable testing and inspecting organisation.
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows tested as per BS

476 Class 0 products or ASTM E84 Class I requirements.
a. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
b. Smoke Developed: 10 or less.
D. External ceiling systems (if any) shall be designed for corrosion

resistance and resistance to wind uplift. Comply with the requirements
of BS BS EN 1991-1-4. Design for a wind speed of 45 m/sec.
E. All ceiling panels/tiles shall be designed complying as per the

requirements of BS 8290-1. All irregular and/or large sized ceiling
panels not in manufacturers standard range shall be designed as per
the requirements of BS 8290-1 in the material approved by the
Engineer and provided within the Contract price.

Fahd Road
A. Acoustical ceiling panels manufactured in accordance with ASTM
E1264.
B. Comply with the following standards:
1. CISCA “Acoustical Ceilings: Use and practice”.

2. CISCA “Ceilings systems handbook”.
C. Contractor shall keep a copy of the above documents on the site and
shall provide the copy to the Engineer immediately upon request.
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing grid layout and

dimensions, in conjunction with ceiling assemblies, with details and
sections, around light fittings, HVAC louvres, sprinklers, smoke
detector, heat detector and like, framed openings, vertical work in
bulkheads if any, access panels, etc.
B. Product Data: Descriptions and characteristics of components, finishes

and product limitations.
C. Certification: Submit certification from IAS (International Accreditation

Service) or equivalent certified accredited third party testing agencies
for the testing and compliance of the products of this section for their
performance requirements viz a viz the referenced standards noted in
this section. Submit acoustical performance data carried out by
independent laboratory for NRC, CAC and AC.
D. Samples: Ceiling Suspension System: Submit samples of
a. Suspension members
b. Sub grid members
c. Space closures
d. Perimeter channel
e. Clips
f. Adjustable hangers and splices
g. Access doors
h. Ceiling panel
E. Submit manufacturer’s colour range for selection of the Engineer.
1.7 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
A. Submit 2 copies of manufacturers’ technical data and installation

instructions together with certified laboratory test reports where
necessary to prove compliance with this Specification.
B. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manual complying with Division 1 –
General Requirements.
Fahd Road
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS

B. Installer: Specialist in this Work with minimum five years documented

experience, approved by the Engineer.
1.9 MOCK-UP
A. Fix an area of finished work in advance for an approved location, of

size specified, and obtain approval of appearance before proceeding.
Mock-up to include light fixtures and metal linear diffusers set in ceiling
system.
B. Mock-up size: A room of atleast 3m x 3m as instructed by the Engineer

for each type of Acoustical Ceiling.
C. Approved mock-ups may remain as part of the work if accepted by the

Engineer.
1.10 SEQUENCING
A. Sequence work so that overhead work is completed, tested and

approved before installing ceiling.
1.11 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Generally:
1. Handle and store suspended ceiling materials to manufacturer’s

recommendations.
2. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages, with the
manufacturer’s name and the contents clearly indicated.
3. Store in a safe, enclosed area and protect from damage until
ready for use.
A. Do not start Work until building is enclosed, dust generating activities

are completed, and wet work has dried.
B. Comply to manufacturers recommendations for ambient temperature

for the execution of Works.
A. Furnish 3% of each type of tile, proportionate suspension systems and

accessories to the client in original manufacturers unopened cartons
and identifying the contents.

Fahd Road
1.14 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Contractor shall provide a written warranty to the Employer

for a period of 5 years warranting against warping, sagging
discolouration of surface finish from defects of materials or factory
workmanship. Upon notification of such defects, within the warranty
period, make the necessary repairs and replacements at the
convenience of the Employer.
1.15 CO-ORDINATION
A. Co-ordinate installation of ceiling system with other Contractors on site

and amend profiles suitably if required, to provide suitable hanger
spacing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
(NOT USED)
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Acoustic Materials
1. Provide acoustical materials complying with the following

performance requirements, unless otherwise specified:
a. Light Reflectance: ASTM C523, 0.75 or more.

b. Flame Spread: Class 1 requirements of ASTM E84, Flame
Spread 25 or less.
c. Sound Absorption: ASTM C423, NRC not less than 0.90.
d. Ceiling Attenuation Class: ASTM E90, not less than 40.
B. Ceiling Panel Schedule
1. Gypsum Ceiling Tiles

a. Size : 600x600x12.5
b. Suspension : S24
c. Perforation Pattern : M1
d. Acoustic Layer : Rock wool as specified.
2. Wood Ceiling: as noted herein and as selected and approved

by Engineer.
a. Properties:
i. Size 600 x 600 x 12 mm (unless noted elsewhere
on drawings)

Fahd Road
ii. Sound absorption Perforation as selected and
approved by Engineer.
iii. Sound attenuation 42 dB
iv. Light reflectance
1. Wood veneers: as selected and approved
by Engineer.
v. Fire reaction : Class 1 BS 476
vi. Humidity resistance 70% RH
vii. Thermal conductivity 0.12 W/m°K
Note: a) Ceiling panels shall have an NRC of 0.9 and articulation

class (AC) of 180.
b) Ceiling panels shall comply with the requirements of
ASHRAE standard 62.1-2004 “Ventilation for Acceptable
Indoor air quality” for formaldehyde emission requirements
which shall be less than 13.5ppb.
C. Sound Insulation: To assure sound reduction between adjacent rooms

provide minimum 50mm thick, 50kg/m3 density rockwool insulation
(Refer Section 07213) in addition to any acoustic inlays provided by the
manufacturer of the ceiling for sufficient damping of double longitudinal
sound.
D. Primary Suspension Members
1. Provide primary suspension members of suitable design and

adequate strength to support the acoustic materials, light
fixtures, diffusers and other items occurring in or on the ceiling.
E. Accessories:
1. Hanger Anchorage Devices: Screws, clips, bolts or other

devices applicable to the indicated method of structural
anchorage for ceiling hangers. Provide anchorage devices
sized for five (5) times the calculated load supported.
2. Hangers: Galvanized wire, 3.7mm.
3. Clips: Provide support clips, clamps, fasteners, and other
attachment devices as required to connect components and
transfer imposed loads of primary suspension system.
F. Metal Wall Moldings: Electro-galvanized roll formed steel with

manufacturer's standard baked-on white enamel coating to match finish
of acoustical material and that fit type of edge detail and suspension
system indicated.
1. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge
molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that
formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed
suspension member.
Fahd Road
2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings
fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly.
G. Miscellaneous Materials
1. Round Column Collar Molding: 1.3mm thick extruded aluminum

edge molding with adjustable band clamp and PVC; Finish exposed
portions with baked enamel, color to match other exposed
trim.
2. Hold-Down Clips: Concealed, spring loaded, 100% fully
accessible, easily removed without special tools; as
manufactured by the mechanical suspension system
manufacturer.
3. Impact Clips: Capable of absorbing an upward acceleration of
30 g's minimum; two per panel with release tabs; as
manufactured by the mechanical suspension system
manufacturer.
4. Concealed Acoustical Sealant: Nondrying, nonhardening,
nonskinning, nonstaining, nonbleeding, gunnable sealant.
2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEM MATERIALS
A. Primary Suspension Members
1. General: Provide ceiling support primary suspension members

and components complying with ASTM C635 Classification
"Heavy Duty", unless otherwise specified of suitable design and
adequate strength to support the acoustic materials, light
fixtures, diffusers and other items occurring in or on the ceiling.
2. Wire Hanger Inserts: No. 6 galvanized wire loop and 26 gauge
[0.55mm] galvanized shell or 14 gauge [2mm] galvanized steel
strap with 5/16 in. [8mm] hole.
3. Strap Iron Hanger Inserts: Galvanized mild steel flats, 1 in.
[25mm] x 3/16 in. [5mm] with 7/16 in. [11mm] holes punched on
center line and lower ends, designed to develop the full strength
of hangers.
4. Hanger Anchorage Devices: Screws, clips, bolts or other
devices applicable to the indicated method of structural
anchorage for ceiling hangers. Provide anchorage devices sized
for five (5) times the calculated load supported.
5. Hangers: Galvanized, one of the following:
a. 3/16 in. [5mm] x 1 in. [25mm] steel straps.
b. 1/4 in. [6mm] diameter steel rods.
c. 9 gauge [3.9mm] soft steel wire.
6. Carrying Channels: ASTM C754, cold rolled steel channels, 1-
1/2in [38mm], 414 lbs. [188kg] per 1000 linear ft [300 linear m].
7. Clips: Provide support clips, clamps, fasteners, and other
attachment devices as required to connect components and
Fahd Road
transfer imposed loads of primary suspension system.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive
the work of this Section.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of site conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Carefully examine all receiving surfaces, to which attachments will be

made hereunder, and determine the most practical way of making such
attachments. Obtain the Engineer's approval of any attachment method
which differs from that indicated on the approved shop drawings before
proceeding with installation.
B. Permit acoustical ceiling tile to reach room temperature and a stabilized

moisture content prior to installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Locate system on room axis, leaving equal sized border units of not
less than one-half tile width.
B. Install all components of the suspended grid systems in accordance

with the manufacturer's instructions, the approved shop drawings,
conforming to ASTM C-636 requirements. Ensure a deflection not to
exceed 1/360 span of 48 inches simple span.
C. Install specified edge moldings wherever ceilings intersect a wall or

partition surface, and around all items having any dimension of 4
inches or more which penetrate the ceilings. Set moldings absolutely level,
using as long lengths as practicable, and secure with fasteners
recommended by manufacturer for the type of substrate.
1. Sealant Bed: Apply continuous ribbon of acoustical sealant (type

AA specified under Section 07900), concealed on back of
vertical leg before installing moldings.
2. Screw-attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16
inches on center and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling
with ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12
feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
D. Install hanger attachments to overhead construction in accordance with

the approved shop drawings, spacing the attachments not more than
48 inches on centers over location of each main tee member.
1. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of

hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers to span the
Fahd Road
extra distance.
2. Install hanger wire to attachments with triple twists.
E. Install main tees parallel to the long dimension of each area, spacing
the tees 48 inches on centers. Secure the bottom of hanger wires
through slots in the main tee members and tie with triple twists. Level
the main tees as the work progresses.
F. Uniformly space the cross tees at 24 inches on centers, and secure the
cross tees into the main tees as recommended by the system
manufacturer.
G. Fit acoustical ceiling tile units in place, free from damaged edges or
other defects detrimental to appearance and function. Install acoustical
ceiling tile level, in an uniform plane, and free from twist, warp or dents.
1. Field cut tegular type tile with a tegular reveal at all edge
conditions.
2. Where required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction,
install retention clips, provide two clips per ceiling panel installed
on opposite sides of panel.
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum variation from flat and level surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
B. Maximum variation from plumb of grid members caused by eccentric

loads: 2 degrees.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner

acceptable to manufacturer and installer, to ensure that work is without
damage or deterioration at the time of substantial completion.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Properly clean surfaces of panels and open grids free from dirt and
handling marks. Wherever surfaces cannot be cleaned by normal
methods or have defects, remove and replace with new components at
no extra cost to the Engineer.
B. Upon completion of the work of this Section in any given area, remove
tools, equipment and all rubbish and debris from the work area; leave
area in broom-clean condition.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 09632
STONE (INTERIOR)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The work covered by this Section as indicated on the drawings and as

specified herein, comprises of furnishing all plant, labour, equipment,
appliances and materials for performing all operations in connection
with the design, supply, fabrication and installation of the following:
1. Stone Flooring and base.

2. Stone wall facing.
3. Stone treads and risers.
4. Stone Thresholds.
5. Stone countertop.
6. Anchors and other metal accessories for anchoring stone work.
7. Adhesive for fixing stone.
8. Application of stone sealers.
9. etc.

of work intended.

2. Section 09310 : Tiles
1.3 REFERENCES

III-2/09632/ Stone (Interior)
Fahd Road
B. Marble Institute Of America
1. Dimensional Stone Design Manual VII, Marble Institute of

America.
C. Gulf Standards Organization (GSO/ISO)
1. GSO/ISO I3007 Part 1

2. GSO/ISO I3007 Part 3
1. ASTM C 97 - Standard Test methods for Determining the

Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of
Dimension Stone.
2. ASTM C 99 - Standard Test Methods for Determining the
Modulus of Rupture of Dimension Stone.
3. ASTM C 119 - Standard Terminology relating to Dimension
Stone.
4. ASTM C 170 - Standard Test method for compressive
strength of Dimensional Stone.
5. ASTM C 241 - Standard Test Method for determining
Abrasion resistance of Stone Subjected to
Foot Traffic.
6. ASTM C 503 - Standard Specification for Marble Dimension
Stone.
7. ASTM C 615 - Standard Specification for Granite Dimension
Stone.
8. ASTM C 629 - Standard Specification for Slate Dimension
Stone.
9. ASTM C 1242 - Standard Guide for selection design and
installation of Dimension Stone Anchoring
System.
E. Building Stone Institute:
1. BSI – Guidelines for use of Building Stone in Construction.
F. Natural Building Granite Quarries Association:
1. Specifications for Building Granite.
G. All applicable local codes, regulations, etc of Authorities having

Jurisdiction.
Fahd Road
standards on site and shall provide the Engineer a
copy immediately upon request.
A. Stone Cladding System: Stone cladding in areas other than wet

areas (toilets, etc) shall consist of dimension stone panels together
with structural support systems, anchors, fasteners and sealants
used to secure the stone to the building structure.
B. Design wall support systems holding stonework to limit deflection

within the system and within the stone units to values which allow
the stone units to sustain imposed loads for each combination of
stone/anchor/support framing configurations and variations,
intended for use on the project, within the specified limits and
factors of safety, but not greater than 1/360 of its clear span or
3mm, which ever is less.
C. The ultimate strength of anchors shall be developed completely by

the mechanical action of the anchor. Adhesives shall not be allowed
to contribute to the structural capacity of the anchor assembly.
D. Physical Properties
Absorption Density Modules of Compressive Abrasion Flexural

(max) per (min) per Rupture (min) Strength Resistance Strength
ASTM C97 ASTM C97 ASTM C99 (min) (min) (min)
(9)(10) ASTM C 170 ASTM C ASTMC 880
241
Stone ASTM % lbs/ft3 kg/m3 lbs/in2 Mpa lbs/in2 Mpa Ha lbs/in2 Mpa
Type Standard
Granite ASTM C 0.40% 160 2,560 1,500 10.34 19,000 131 25 1,200 8.27
615
Marble ASTM C 0.20% 162 2,590 1,000 6.89 7,500 52 10 1,000 6.89
503
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. The following submittals, as defined in Section for :

Submittals required:
1. Shop drawings: Large scale details of floor patterns

and wall cladding, stair tread and risers, fixation details,
etc.
2. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets,
specifications, performance data,
3. Stone fabricator’s field erection/setting instructions.
4. Selection samples: Manufacturer's sample boards for grout for
Engineer’s Representative color
selection.
5. Verification samples: Stone units demonstrating color
range, markings, texture, and surface finish.
Fahd Road
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit recommended cleaning

methods, cleaning materials, stain removal methods, and polishes and
waxes.
B. Include list of liquids detrimental to appearance of stone finish.
A. Perform Work in accordance with the most stringent requirements of

the applicable referenced standards.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.8 QUALIFICATION

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the stone work of this

Section with minimum of 5 years documented experience. Work shall
be done by skilled workmen, fully instructed as to the requirements of
this Specification and adequately supervised during the work.
1.9 MOCK-UPS
A. Mockup: Provide mock-up for at least 10m² for each type of stone, a
mock-up for each type of floor pattern and a mock-up for atleast 3 no.
steps for each type of stone as selected by Engineer’s Representative.
As a minimum, the consistency in colour, texture, finish, etc of the
stones will be looked into for approval. Contractor shall supply stones
of a type from one quarry and one batch. Approved mock-up may be
incorporated into permanent works if accepted by the Engineer.
A. General: Store such materials in weatherproof structures, and ensure

that materials are in good condition when brought for use. Protect
stone units and manufactured products of all types from wetting by rain
or snow, and keep covered when not in use.
B. Stone: Handle all stone pieces units carefully in transit and on the site,
so as to prevent soiling or staining. Handle to avoid damage keeping
edges sharp. Store stone vertically resting weight on panel edges.
1. Store stone elevated above ground on non-staining skids.

2. Cover stored stone with waterproof paper, clean canvas or
polyethylene. Protect stone from discoloration.
C. Manufactured items: Deliver all manufactured products in their original

containers, plainly marked with product identification and
manufacturer's name.
D. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with
Fahd Road
manufacturer's instructions.
A. During temporary storage on site, at the end of working day, or during

rainy weather, cover stone work exposed to weather with non-staining
waterproof coverings, securely anchored.
1.12 COORDINATION
A. Perform drilling and cutting in stone, as required to accommodate

penetrating items of other trades, from templates and instructions
furnished by the respective trades.
A. Convene meeting minimum one week prior to commencing work of this

section.
1.14 WARRANTY
A. Provide a warranty of five years for the products and their installation of
this section.
B. Provide a warranty of 10 years for the performance of adhesive for

adhesive based installations of stones in this section.
1.15 EXTRA MATERIAL
A. Provide 3% of each type of stone with adhesives and grouts as

extra/spare material.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STONE
A. General: Stone shall be of first quality, sound, free from cracks and
defects, seams or starts which may impair its structural integrity, durability,
appearance or function and each type shall be obtained from one strata
and from one quarry. Inherent variations characteristic of the quarry
from which it is obtained will be acceptable. Color, texture and finish
shall be within the range of samples approved by Engineer.
B. Stone types: Stone types include Granite, Marble, etc., shall be of the
type, dimension, colour and finish as shown on the drawing and as per
the design intent and/or as selected and approved by the Engineer.
1. Granite / Marble
a. Locations as noted on the Drawings.

b. Sizes: As shown on Drawings.
c. Finish: As selected and approved by Engineer.
Fahd Road
d. Color: As selected and approved by Engineer.
C. Stone thickness: Thicknesses of stones where ever noted are minimum

required and shall be checked by the Contractor as per MIA or BS
8298 or BS EN 1469 standards for their suitability to the application. Where
the thickness specified is found insufficient, the contractor shall provide
stones of suitable thicknesses all with in the contract price.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Shapes and Dimensions: Accurately cut, dress, drill, fit and finish stone
work to shapes and dimensions shown on Drawings and final shop and
setting drawings. Make exposed plane surfaces true in line. Markings
or other defects on finished stone panels such as striations, swirl
marks, etc., due to machine processing shall be deemed unacceptable.
1. Thicknesses of stone where shown are minimum sizes.

Engineer shall verify and determine actual thicknesses as part of
the required engineered systems as per the referenced
standard.
B. Cutting of Joints and Edges: Cut external corners with [quirk-miter]

[gauged edge] joints where shown; cut other joints and edges square
and at right angles to face, and with backs parallel to face. Make
arises straight, sharp, true, and continuous at joints.
C. Cutting and Drilling of Stones: Cut and drill stones in shop as required
for supports, anchors, ties, grab and Lewis bolts, and other inserts.
Cut slots, kerfs, holes and other recessed cutouts leaving smooth surfaces
and eased intersections between changes of surfaces planes, free from
sharp edges and arises, to reduce stresses at anchor locations.
D. Allowance for Expansion and Contraction: Allow for expansion and

contraction within the limits of the joint material when cutting for anchorage
devices.
E. Stone Thickness: Provide greater stone thickness than indicated

where thicknesses indicated are insufficient for the sizes or where
extent of cutouts shown decreases effective strength of the remaining
material, or for proper and sufficient anchorage, suitable and adequate
bearing areas or surfaces.
F. Inspection of Finished Stone: Carefully inspect finished stones at

fabrication plant for compliance with requirements relative to qualities
of appearance, material, finishing, and fabrication; replace defective
stones with ones that do comply. Grade and mark stones for overall
uniform appearance when assembled in place. Natural variations in
appearance are acceptable if installed stones match range of colors
and other appearance characteristics represented in approved samples
and field-constructed mock-ups.
2.3 STONE PANELING AND COLUMN FACING

Fahd Road
A. Arrange panels in shop or other suitable space in proposed orientation
and sequence for examination by Engineer. Mark units with temporary
sequence numbers to indicate position in proposed layout.
1. Lay out one elevation at a time if approved by Engineer.

2. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of date and time when
layout will be available for viewing.
3. Rearrange panels as directed by Engineer until layout is
approved.
4. Do not trim nonmodular-size units to less than modular size until
after Engineer's approval of layout, unless otherwise approved
by Engineer.
5. Mark backs of units and Shop Drawings with sequence numbers
based on approved layout. Mark backs of units to indicate
orientation of units in completed Work.
B. Fab ricate paneling in nominal thickness indicated, but not less than 30
mm.
1. Gage backs of panels to provide units of identical thickness.
C. Maintain minimum clearances of 25 mm between backs of panels and

structural members, fireproofing (if any), backup walls, and other work
behind stone. Do not back check stone less than 25 mm thick.
D. Cut stone to produce uniform joint width of 1.5 mm.
E. Pattern Arrangement: Fabricate and arrange panels with veining and

other natural markings to comply with the following requirements:
1. Cut stone from one block or contiguous, matched blocks in

which natural markings occur.
2. Arrange panels with veining as indicated on Drawings.
2.4 STONE BASE, AND TRIM
A. Base:
1. Nominal Thickness: Provide thickness indicated, but not less

than 20 mm. Gage backs to provide units of identical thickness.
2. Top-Edge Detail: As indicated.
3. Ends: Return ends to depth of adjacent finish with edge detail
same as top edge, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Joints: 1.5-mm- wide grouted joints.
a. Locate joints at midpoints between adjacent paneling
joints, unless otherwise indicated.
2.5 FABRICATION – COUNTERTOPS
A. Shop fabricate in strict accordance with the details on the approved

Fahd Road
shop drawing.
B. Provide Countertops from longest possible slabs available in Market in

order to avoid joints.
C. Where joins cannot be avoided, seal them with 1/8” bead of silicone to
allow for expansion and contraction.
D. Provide an overhang of 30mm, with half bull nose edge.
E. Provide shims on the underside to ensure even seam.
F. Provide backsplash of 100mm clear height from same material even if

not indicated on any contract document.
2.6 ANCHORS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS
A. Manufacturers
(NOT USED)
B. Stone Anchors: Comply with applicable provisions of ASTM C1242;
Provide anchors embedded within stone in sizes, configurations and
profiles as shown or as required to sustain imposed loads without
exceeding allowable design stresses, and install anchorages and
supports free from rattle or displacement.
1. Stone Anchors: ASTM A666, AISI Type 302 or 304 toughened

stainless steel, 3/16 in. [4.5mm] minimum thickness. Provide
stone anchors complying with the "Performance Criteria"
specified.
2. Interior Stone Tie Wire: No. 8 brass or stainless steel wire.
3. Fasteners and Anchorage Devices: Type, grade, class and
style best suited for the respective purpose.
a. Fasteners for Steel Subframe Components: ASTM A307,
Grade A (ASTM F568, Property Class 4.6), for bolts;
ASTM A563, Grade A, for nuts; and ASTM F436 for
washers; either hot-dip or mechanically zinc coated.
b. Fasteners for Stainless Steel Stone Anchors: Fasteners
for Stainless-Steel Anchors: Annealed stainless-steel
bolts, nuts, and washers of same alloy as anchors.
ASTM F593 for bolts and ASTM F594, for nuts.
C. Anchor Inserts: Provide inserts located in masonry or concrete for the

attachment of stone anchors with capability to sustain, without failure,
load imposed within factors of safety indicated for connections and in
accordance with the following:
1. Wedge Inserts: "Wedge Inserts" hot-dipped galvanized

malleable iron with tee-shaped wedge action slots designed for
a skewed head bolts.
2. Dovetail Slots: Stainless steel, 24 ga. [0.67mm] minimum, filled
Fahd Road
with waterproof filler and with open face sealed.
3. Miscellaneous Inserts: Hot-dipped galvanized or stainless steel.
Provide units as shown or required for intended use.
2.7 MORTAR, ADHESIVE & GROUT
A. Latex Portland Cement Mortar: Factory proportioned pre-blended

mixture of cements, graded aggregates, synthetic resins and special
additives in dry blend to be mixed and applied as per manufacturer’s
instructions. Products to meet the requirements of GSO/ISO 13007-1
and conform to the requirements of GEV EMICODE EC1 – extremely
low emission level.
1. Initial bond strength of 2.6 N/mm2 after 28 days to EN1348

2. Bond strength after heat exposure of 2.5N/mm2 to EN1348
3. Bond strength after water immersion of 1.1N/mm2 to EN1348
4. Bond strength after freeze/thaw of 1.3N/mm2 to EN1348
B. Organic adhesive: Factory proportioned pre-blended mixture of

cements, graded aggregates synthetic resins and special additives, in
dry blend to be mixed and applied as per manufacturer’s instructions.
Products to meet the requirements of GSO/ISO 13007-1 and conform
to the requirements of GEV EMICODE EC1 – extremely low emission
level.
C. Grout: Factory proportioned pre-blended mixture of special hydraulic

binders, graded aggregates, special polymers, water repellant
additives, organic molecules and pigments to be mixed and applied as
per manufacturer’s instructions. Product to conform to the requirements
of GEV EMICODE EC1 – extremely low emission level. Products to be
water repellant with ‘Drop Effect’ and Anti-Mould with ‘Bio Block’
technology, and conform to the requirements of GSO/ISO 13007-3
class CG2.
1. Grouts Type 1
a. Applications: Wall and floor installations
b. Description: High performance grout for: Ceramic,

Porcelain, Natural Stone, Glass, Ceramic and Marble,
Mosaic, Granite and Agglomerates.
c. The grout shall have:
i. BioBlock® mould resistance ii.

DropEffect® water repellency
iii. Shall comply with ISO 13007-3 class CG2WAF,
iv. Shall meet the requirements of GEV EMICODE
EC1 – extremely low VOC emission level.
d. Grout shall have the following performance values in
accordance with ISO 13007:
Fahd Road
i. Flexural strength value of (9.0N/mm2 after 28 days
to EN12803-3
ii. Compressive strength value of (40.0.0N/mm2 after
28 days to EN12803-3
iii. Water absorption value of 0.1g after 30' to EN
12808-5
iv. Water absorption value of 0.1g after 4 hours to EN
12808-5
v. Flexural strength value of (9.0N/mm2 after 28 days
after freeze/thaw cycles to EN12803-3
vi. Shall have excellent resistance to solvents and oils
and alkalis
vii. High performance cementitious grout; shall be one
component product, comprising special hydraulic
binders, graded aggregates, special polymers,
pigments, organic molecules and water repellent
additives
2. Grouts Type 2
a. Applications: Wall and floor installations particularly food

preparation areas.
b. Description: Ceramic and Natural Stone
c. High performance epoxy resin grout for Ceramic and
Natural Stone where excellent resistance to acids and
alkalis, and food and drinks processing where the highest
standards of hygiene is required.
d. Grout shall comply with ISO 13007-1 class RG and R2T,
e. Shall conform to the requirements of GEV EMICODE
f. Grout shall conform to the performance values in
accordance with ISO13007-1 class RT2, RG
g. Shear adhesion strength value (initial) of 25.0N/mm2 to
EN 12003
h. Shear adhesion strength value (after water immersion) of
23.0N/mm2 to EN 12003
i. Shear adhesion strength value (after thermal shock) of
25.0N/mm2 to EN 12003
j. Flexural strength value of 31.0N/mm2 to EN 12808-3
k. Compressive strength value of 58.0N/mm2 to EN 12808-
3
l. Water absorption value of 0.05g to EN 12808-5
m. High performance grout, two component epoxy resin
based product, comprising silica sand and special
components with excellent resistance to acids and
excellent cleanability
Fahd Road
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Cleaning Solution:
1. 5 percent solution of Muriatic Acid.
2.9 STONE SEALER
A. All stone masonry including cladding, flooring, counters, etc shall be
cleaned and coated with a Teflon based sealer. The cleaning and
sealing procedure and application shall be strictly as per the printed
recommendations and instructions of the Teflon Sealer manufacturer.
B. Approved Manufacturers
(NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to installation examine surfaces to receive stone and do not

proceed until any defects detrimental to the finished work are
corrected, including moisture protection, structural supports, provisions
for expansion, or any other condition which might affect the finished
work in appearance, water tightness or integrity of the completed
installation.
B. Verify all measurements and dimensions, co-ordinate the installation of

inserts for this work and co-ordinate and schedule this work with the
work of other trades. Give particular attention to the location and size of
cutouts required to accommodate mechanical, electrical, and other
work (if any) or adjoining construction, in accordance with the approved
shop drawings for such trade.
C. Co-ordinate shop drawings of items or assemblies related to the

support or anchorage of stonework, including requirements for
clearances for proper installation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Vacuum clean substrate surfaces; damp clean stone.
B. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate

surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances.
C. Clean stone prior to installation, with edges and surfaces free of dirt or
foreign material.
D. Do not use wire brushes or implements capable of marking or

damaging exposed surfaces.
3.3 SETTING OF STONE - GENERAL
A. Do necessary field cutting as stone is set. Use power saws with

Fahd Road
diamond blades to cut stone. Cut lines straight and true, with edges
eased slightly to prevent snipping.
B. Contiguous Work: Provide reveals and openings as required to

accommodate contiguous work.
C. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and

Shop Drawings. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other
attachments indicated or necessary to secure interior stone facing in place.
Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories to set stone
accurately in locations indicated, with uniform joints of widths indicated
and with edges and faces aligned according to established
relationships and indicated tolerances.
D. Provide expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints of widths and

at locations indicated.
1. Sealing expansion and other joints is specified in Division 7
Section "Joint Sealants."
2. Keep expansion joints free of plaster, mortar, grout, and other
rigid materials.
3.4 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Installation of stones shall be as per MIA, and all other applicable

ASTM, BS and DIN Standards.
B. Flooring:
1. Tamp stone into setting bed with mallet until firmly bedded to the
proper level. Remove stone and back parge with adhesive or
sprinkle the bed with water. In the latter procedure, wet the
back of the stone. Return to position on setting bed. Use
cushions and spacers to maintain uniform jointing and setting.
2. Grout buttering the edges of the stone as they are laid.
Immediately clean surplus from face of the stone.
3. Joints: Joints shall be butt joints.
C. Wall Facing:
1. All interior cladding in wet areas shall be with Adhesive and the
fixation shall be as per the referenced standards and adhesive
manufacturer’s recommendation.
2. All interior cladding in areas other than wet areas shall be with
Mechanical fixation with stainless steel anchors all as per
approved shop drawing.
D. Countertops
1. Fix countertops as indicated on approved shop drawings.

2. Install support brackets, etc. rigid and secure.
3. Set and secure countertop in place, plumb and level.
Fahd Road
4. Use mechanical fasteners, neoprene setting pads, etc. as
required.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF STONE PANELING AND COLUMN FACING
A. Erect interior stone facing units level, plumb, and true with uniform joint
widths. Use temporary shims to maintain joint width. Remove shims before
grouting or pointing.
B. Set units firmly against setting spots located at anchors and spaced a
maximum of 450 mm apart over back of unit, but not less than 1 spot
per 0.18 sq. m, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Moisture Exposure: Use portland cement mortar for setting

spots where stone is applied to inside face of exterior walls and
at other locations where stone or cavity will be exposed to
moisture.
C. Minimum Anchors: Provide a minimum of 4 anchors per panel up to 1.1

sq. m in face area, plus a minimum of 2 additional anchors for each
additional 0.7 sq. m.
D. Grout joints after setting. Tool joints uniformly and smoothly with plastic
tool.
3.6 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 3
mm in 2400 mm or 6 mm maximum.
B. Variation from Level: For lintels, sills, chair rails, horizontal bands,
horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 3 mm
in 3 m, 6 mm in 6 m, or 10 mm maximum.
C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related
portion of walls and partitions, do not exceed 3 mm in 2400 mm, 6 mm
in 6 m, or 10 mm maximum.
D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For thickness of walls from

dimensions indicated, do not exceed plus or minus 3 mm.
E. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1.5 mm
or 1/4 of nominal joint width, whichever is less.
F. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stone Units (Lipping): Do not

exceed 0.8-mm difference between planes of adjacent units.
3.7 APPLICATION OF SEALER
A. Application of sealers shall be strictly as per the sealer manufacturers

recommendations for multi-coat applications, allow specified curing
time between subsequent coats.

Fahd Road
B. Addition of materials to sealer is prohibited, except as recommended
by manufacturer.
A. After initial cleaning, provide non-staining temporary wood guards at

corners and other surfaces subject to damage.
B. Rope off flooring to permit curing of setting bed.
C. Protect work from damage due to subsequent building operations.

3.9 CLEANING
A. Immediately prior to completion of the Work clean stone by washing

with water and bristle brushes; removing all stains, dirt and other
discolorations. Do not use acids, cleaning compounds or wire brushes.
B. On completion of construction, remove all temporary protection.
3.10 ENGINEER'S APPROVAL
A. Installed units which are chipped, cracked, or otherwise damaged or

which, in the opinion of the Engineer, do not conform to the
Specification requirements shall be removed and replaced such that
the completed work meets the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
III-2/09650/ Resilient Flooring
Fahd Road
SECTION 09650
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION

pertains to the furnishing and installing of resilient flooring tiles,
sheeting and base.

of works intended:
1. Section 10270 : Access Flooring
1.3 REFERENCES

1. ASTM F1913 - Standard specification for sheet vinyl floor

covering without backing.
2. ASTM F1700 - Standard specification for solid vinyl floor
tiles.
3. ASTM F150 - Standard Test Method for Electrical
Resistance of conductive and static
dissipative resilient flooring.
5. ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant
Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a
Radiant Heat Energy Source.

Fahd Road
6. ASTM E662 - Standard Test Method for Specific Optical
Density of Smoke Generated by Solid
Materials.
7. ASTM F1066 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition
Floor Tile.
8. ASTM F1303 - Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor
Covering with Backing.
9. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall
Base.
C. Federal Specification Unit:
1. FS L-F-475 - Floor Covering Vinyl, Surface (Tile and Roll), with

Backing.
2. FS RR-T-650 - Treads, Metallic and Nonmetallic, Skid Resistant.
D. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux

for Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy
Source.
E. BS Standards
1. BS EN 649 - Resilient floor coverings. Homogeneous and

heterogeneous polyvinyl chloride floor
coverings specification.
2. BS EN 1081 - Resilient floor coverings, determination of
the electrical resistance.
3. BS EN 20105-B02- Textiles. Tests for colour fastness. Colour
fastness artificial light (xenon arc fading lamp
test)
4. BS EN 13501-1- Fire classification of construction products
and building elements. Classification using
data from reaction to fire test.
5. BS EN ISO 717-2- Acoustics. Rating of sound insulation in
buildings and of building elements. Impact
sound insulation
6. BS 2050 - Specification for electrical resistance of
conducting and antistatic products made
from flexible polymeric material.

Jurisdiction.
requested.
Fahd Road
1.4 SUBMITTALS

required.
B. Samples: submit following listed samples of thickness etc. as shown on

the drawings or as noted in the specifications.
1. Resilient Flooring: At least three sample of each type and colour

selected.
C. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and

installation instructions for the work.
D. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's printed maintenance

instructions and recommendations for the work.
E. Where these standards conflict with the other specified requirements,

the most restrictive requirement shall govern.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance procedures,

recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for
cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.
A. General: Maintain manufacturers recommended temperature in spaces

receiving resilient flooring, at least 48 hours before, during, and after
installation.
A. The electrostatic conductive properties shall be present throughout the

full product thickness.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS

B. Installer shall be of minimum ten (10) years in experience of works of

this trade.
A. Provide different types of resilient tile and accessories supplied by one

manufacturer, including leveling and patching compounds, and
adhesives.
B. Avoid color and pattern differential; provide flooring from one

production run in any single room or contiguous areas.
Fahd Road
1.10 MOCKUP
A. Provide mock-ups of 10m2 as directed by Engineer’s Representative.

Approved mock-up may become part of final work subject to
acceptance by the Engineer.
A. Delivery and Storage: Deliver materials to job site in manufacturer's

unopened containers clearly marked with manufacturer's name, brand,
size, thickness, grade, colour and design. Store materials as per
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall provide five years warranty to repair and replace

flooring which fails in material or workmanship within the warranty
period.
A. Provide 3% of each type of flooring material and skirting as extra/spare

material including necessary accessories and adhesives.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
(NOT USED)
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Resilient Flooring: As selected and approved by the Engineer.

B. Resilient Tile Flooring:
1. High performing homogeneous multipurpose flooring.
2. Surface treatment shall be treated with polyurethane surface
treatment for fungus and bacteria with treatments.
3. Shall be Antistatic.
4. Shall have densely compacted surface for improved wear and
ease of maintenance.
Description
1. Total Thickness EN 428 mm 2
2
2. Weight EN 430 g/m 3000
3. Tile size EN 427 mm 608 x 608

Fahd Road
Classification
1. Norm/Product - - EN 649
specification
2. European EN 685 class 34-43
Classification
3. K rating - class K5
4. Fire Rating EN 13501-1 class Bfl-s1
5. Static electrical EN 1815 kV <2
propensity
Performances
1. Wear Resistance EN 660.2 mm3 ≤4.0
2. Wear group EN 649 group P
3. Dimensional stability EN 434 % Sheet ≤0.40
Tile ≤0.25
4. Residual indentation EN 433 mm ≈0.03
5. Thermal conductivity EN 12 524 W/(m.k) 0.25
6. Colour fastness EN 20 105 – degree ≥6

B02
7. Chemical product EN 423 class Shall
resistance Comply
8. Fungistatic & - - Shall
bacteriostatic Comply
treatment
9. Surface treatment - - Shall
Comply
C. Resilient Sheet Flooring:
Description
1. Total Thickness EN 428 mm 2.00
2. Thickness of wear EN 429 mm ≥ 1.00
layer
3. Weight EN 430 g/m2 2550 - 2780
4. Width of sheet EN 426 cm 200
5. Length of sheet EN 426 lm 20
Classification
1. Norm/Product - - EN 649
specification
2. European EN 685 class 34-43
Classification
3. Fire Rating EN 13501-1 class Bfl-s1

Fahd Road
4. Static electrical EN 1815 kV <2
propensity
5. Slip Resistance Wet DIN 51 130 class R10
Performances
1. Wear Resistance EN 660.2 mm3 ≤2.0
2. Wear group EN 649 / EN group T
651
3. Dimensional stability EN 434 % ≤0.40
4. Residual indentation EN 433 mm ≤0.10
(Requirement)
5. Residual indentation - mm ≈0.03
(Value)
6. Impact sound EN ISO 717- dB -
insulation 2
7. Thermal conductivity EN 12 524 W/(m.k) 0.25
8. Colour fastness EN 20 105 – degree ≥6
B02
9. Chemical product EN 423 - Shall

resistance Comply
10. Fungistatic & - - Shall
bacteriostatic Comply
treatment
11. Surface treatment - - Shall
Comply
D. Adhesive/s: Type recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer only.
E. Resilient Base: To match flooring and as selected and approved by the

Engineer.
F. Refer to Finishes Schedule for locations.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, adjoining construction, and the conditions under

which the work is to be installed. Do not proceed with the work until
unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate to remove deleterious substances which would impair

the work.
B. Surface shall be smooth, level and at proper elevation. Surface shall

not vary more than 1:900 in any direction from level, plumb or slopes
Fahd Road
shown. Remove roughness and protrusions from concrete surfaces by
grinding. Use compounds for filling complying with resilient flooring
C. Prime, seal or cover substrate if it is of a kind or in a condition which

the manufacturer of the flooring recommends to be primed, sealed or
covered. Use materials complying with manufacturer's
recommendations.
D. Test concrete floors to ensure that they are dry before installation of
resilient flooring.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install flooring in accordance with the manufacturer's printed

instructions and recommendations.
2. Install resilient tiles with manufacturers recommended adhesive
only.
3. Install resilient sheet flooring with heat welded rods as per
B. Prime Coat: apply primer to concrete surfaces; work well into surface;
use minimum quantity that will assure complete surface coverage with
a non-absorptive base. Allow primer to dry before applying adhesive.
Prime coat may be omitted only if recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
C. Adhesive: Apply to substrate with properly notched steel trowels; allow

adhesive to become tacky before applying flooring.
D. Extend flooring into closets and offsets, and under movable equipment
of the rooms and spaces shown or scheduled to receive resilient
flooring, including recessed covers within those spaces. Extend
unexposed edges of flooring under set-on bases and similar trim work.
Scribe, cut and fit exposed edges of flooring and base adjoining other
work accurately and neatly with a tight joint.
E. Bases: Of height as shown on the drawings. Secure bases to surfaces

with waterproof adhesive; make joints tight; keep top and bottom edges
in firm contact with adjacent surfaces. Use longest lengths possible.
Miter or cope at angles and corners.
A. Cleaning: Just prior to Substantial Completion of the Works, clean the

resilient flooring. Wash, seal and wax thoroughly with products
recommended by the flooring manufacturer, in accordance with his
recommendations.
B. Prohibit traffic from floor finish for at least 48 hours after installation.
Fahd Road
C. Protection: Protect work from damage and from normal wear and tear
throughout construction period so that it will be without any indication of
use or damage at the time of completion of the works.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 09680
CARPETING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies carpeting and installation, showing minimum

requirements.
B. Carpets shall be anti-microbial treated as specified in this section.

of work intended.
1. Section 03335 : Architectural Screed

2. Section 03543 : Self Leveling Underlayment
1.3 REFERENCES
The minimum standards for products specified in this section shall be

specified herein, perform work in accordance with specifications, codes and
standards cited therein, and their latest editions, revisions, applicable
applicable.
A. American Society of Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM D2859 - Standard Test Method for Flammability of

Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials.
Characteristics of Building Materials - Class
1 requirements.
3. ASTM D1335 - Standard Method of Test for Tuft bind of
Pile Floor Coverings.
RADCARE - B01- King III-2/09680/ Carpeting
Fahd Road 179
4. ASTM F1869 - Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor
Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor using
Calcium Chloride.
5. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete to
Receive Resilient Flooring.
6. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sand Insulation.
7. ASTM E2471 - Standard Test Method for Using Seeded-
Agar for Screening Assessment of
Antimicrobial Activity in Carpets.
B. American National Standards Institute
1. ANSI/ESD S20.20 - Standard for development of Electro-

static discharge control programme.
C. Carpet and Rug Institute.
1. CR1 104 – Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet.

2. Commercial carpet specification guidelines.
3. CR1 105 – Standard Industry Reference Guide for Installation
of Residential Textile Floor Covering Materials.
4. The Carpet Primer.
5. Carpet Specifiers Handbook.
6. Characteristics of Patterned Carpet Technical Bulletin.
D. AATCC Test Method 174 Antimicrobial Activity Assessment of Carpets.
E. IICRC S100 – Standard and Reference Guide for Professional

Carpet Cleaning. Institute of Inspection, Cleaning
and Restoration Certification (IICRC).
F. BS Standards
1. BS EN 985 - Textile floor coverings. Castor chair test.

2. BS EN 986 - Textile floor coverings Tiles.
Determination of dimensional changes due
to the effects of varied water and heat
conditions and distortion out of plane.
3. BS EN 1307 - Textile Floor Coverings. Classification of
Pile Carpets.
4. BS EN 1815 - Resilient and textile floor coverings.
Assessment of static electrical propensity.
5. BS 4223 - Methods for determination of
constructional details of textile floor
coverings with yarn pile.
Fahd Road 180
6. BS 4682 (Part 2, 3, 4)- Methods of test for dimensional
stability of textile floor coverings.
7. BS EN 12524 - Building materials and products.
Hygrothermal properties. Tabulated
design values.
G. Local Codes:
1. All applicable local codes, regulations, etc of Authorities having

Jurisdiction.
requested.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit samples of manufacturers’ range of colours for approval.

Submit 300mm x 300mm samples of proposed carpets of each type.
B. Submit layout diagram indicating directions and location of weave,

seams, edging, and moldings. Indicate method of joining seams, edges
and other conditions where joined or butted to adjacent materials.
C. Manufacturers product data sheets, specifications, performance data,

maintenance data, etc.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Comply with CRI recommendations provide a copy of CR1 104 to the

Engineer.
B. Comply with ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) regulations.
C. Comply with requirements of AATCC Test Method 174 or ASTM E2471

for the antimicrobial treatment of carpets of this section.

1.7 MOCK-UP
A. Contractor shall provide Mock-ups for all types and patterns of

Fahd Road 181
carpet/tiles. Each Mock-up shall be for atleast 10m2.
B. Approved Mock-ups may become part of main works subject to

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Carpet must be installed when the indoor temperature is between 65-

950F (18-350C) with a maximum relative humidity of 65%. If ambient
temperatures are outside these parameters, the installation must not
begin until the HVAC system is operational and these conditions are
maintained at least 48 hours before, during and 72 hours after
completion.
A. Deliver carpet to job site in weather protective wrapping clearly labeled

with manufacturer’s name, brand name, size, and related information.
Store in a safe, dry, clean, well ventilated area.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall provide a warranty for defects in the product (15 years)
and its installation (5 years) and shall at his own expense and upon written
notice from the Owner or his representative, promptly correct/replace any
and all improper work and material that may become apparent within
the above noted periods after the date of Substantial Completion.
A. Provide 3% of each type of carpet/tiles/etc, including all associated

accessories, adhesives well packed as acceptable to the Engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS

(NOT USED)
2.2 CARPET TYPES
A. Carpet Tiles:
Construction tufted
Surface Texture patterned textured loop
Gauge 1/12 (47.00 rows per 10 cm)
Density 5,514
Weight Density 93,738
Stitches Per Inch 7.4 (29.13 per 10 cm)
Finished Pile Thickness 0.111" (2.82 mm)
Fahd Road 182
Dye Method solution dyed
Antimicrobial treated As per AATCC Test Method
174 or ASTM E2471
Face Weight 17 oz/yd2 (576.47 gm/m2)
Size/Width 24" x 24" (60.9 cm x 60.9 cm)
CRI Rating Heavy Traffic
PERFORMANCE
Static 3.0 kv when tested under the Standard
Shuffle Test 70 degrees Fahrenheit (21
degrees Celsius) - 20% R.H.
Flammability Shall Pass DOC-FF-1-70 Pill Test
Flooring Radiant Panel
Test
Shall meet NFPA Class 1 when tested under ASTM E-648 glue down
Smoke Density NBS Smoke Chamber NFPA-258 - Less
than 450 Flaming Mode
Note: Carpet tiles to be used on raised floors shall have a permanent
conductive fibre and shall comply with AATCC 134 requirements for
static electricity which shall be less than 3.5kv.
B. Carpet Type for Prayer Areas (heavy duty)
Machine tufted loop pile carpet sheets.
Pile Yarn Weight 440g/m2

Soil Protectant Confirm to reference Standards
Anti-microbial Confirm to reference Standards
Total Carpet Weight 3100g/m2
Tufts 185.6/m2
Surface Pile Thickness 2.5mm
Total Thickness 8.7mm
Surface Pile Density 0.115g/cm3
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive type shall be NFPA class A or UBC Class 1 types as

determined by class 1 requirements of ASTM E84 and as
recommended for the application and expected service by carpet
manufacturer only and as approved by the Engineer.
B. Stainless Steel transition strips, carpet reducers, edgings, cushions

Fahd Road 183
and accessories shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Remove oil and grease spots from substrate. Fill joints, cracks wider
than 1/16 inch, and holes to a smooth surface. Do not nail holes.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with CR1 104 and ADA requirements.
B. Install carpet strictly as per manufacturer's instructions. Lay carpet

smooth, flat, and fit to walls, projections, and contours. No small
pieces will be allowed around door jambs or other penetrations.
C. Install anti-static carpets (if any) strictly as per anti-static carpet

manufacturers recommendations.
D. Provide carpet edge guard at exposed edges, anchor guard to

substrate.
E. Install transition strips wherever carpet edge meets other floor finishes.
F. Make all butt joints tight. Roll carpet lightly to remove air pockets and
ensure uniform bond. Promptly remove any adhesive from exposed
face of carpet.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet:
1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface

blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer.
2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface.
3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater

element.
B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting
Indoor Installations."
C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and

placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of
construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
Fahd Road 184
SECTION 09720
WALL COVERINGS
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Wall coverings for areas as shown on the drawings and as specified.
B. Wall Coverings shall be anti-microbial treated.
C. Wall Decorative Wall Paper

of work intended.
1. Section 09240 : Portland Cement Plaster
1.3 REFERENCES
B. The minimum standards for products specified in this section shall be


2. ASTM F 793 - Standard Classification of Wall Covering by
Use Characteristics.
3. Federal Specification CCC-W-408D-Vinyl Wall Covering.
4. NF PA 286 - Standard methods of Fire Tests for
Evaluating contribution of wall and ceiling
interior finish to room fire grouth.
5. NFPA 5000 - Building Construction and Safety Code.
III-2/09720/ Wall Coverings

Fahd Road
6. CFFA - Quality Standard for Vinyl Coated Fabric
Wall Covering.
Jurisdiction.
A. Performance Requirements
1. Fire Performance Characteristics:

a. Flame Spread: 25 or less
b. Smoke Developed: 100 or less
2. Colour Fastness Characteristics:
a. Colour fastness to Wet and Dry Crocking: Shall pass
AATCC 8, Grade 3, Minimum
b. Colour fastness to light: Shall pass AATCC 16, option 1
or 3, Grade 4, minimum , at 40 hours.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Division 1 – General

Requirements.
1. Product Data: Manufacturer's product specifications, installation

and maintenance instructions.
2. Samples for Selection Purposes
a. Actual 6 inch (150mm) square pieces of vinyl wall
covering showing full range of colors and textures
available.
3. Samples for Verification Purposes
a. Not less than 6 inch (150mm) square piece of vinyl wall
covering in selected colors and textures.
4. Maintenance Instructions: Manufacturer’s instructions for
maintenance of installed work.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

1.7 MOCKUP
A. Provide mock-up of 10m2 as directed by the Engineer’s

Fahd Road
Representative.
A. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish all wall covering from a single

source.
B. Manufacturer: A firm regularly engaged in the manufacture of wall

covering similar to those specified for atleast 10 years.
C. Installer: A firm with at least 5 years of successful experience in the

installation of wall coverings similar to those specified and approved by
the manufacturer of wall covering and the Engineer.

A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened packages properly

labeled for identification and for location in the Project. Comply with
manufacturer's instructions for storage and handling. Damaged and
otherwise unsuitable material, when so determined, shall be
immediately removed from the Project site.
A. Environmental Conditions
1. Do NOT install wall covering until the installation area is

enclosed and weatherproof, and until the ambient temperature
within the building as recommended by the Manufacturer of wall
coverings for not less than 72 hours prior to installation.
2. Shield wall covering from direct sunlight during and after
installation.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall provide a warranty for 5 years against any defects in

the manufacturer application, and the performance of the products of
this section.
A. Furnish Owner at least 3 percent of each color and texture of wall

covering used on the Project, over and above the quantity installed.

Fahd Road
B. Deliver to Owner at time of final inspection of work under this Section
and store where directed in the building.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRIC AND PAPER BACKED VINYL WALL COVERINGS
A. Fabric and Paper Backed Vinyl Wall Coverings including Wall Papers:
1. Compliance: Fed. Spec. CCC-W-408D for Type II

wallcoverings.
2. Wallcovering type: Type II, vinyl coated nonwoven fabric
backed wallcovering
3. Finished width: approx. 54 inches.
4. Inks:
a. Water based.
5. Physical Test Requirements:
Type II
1. Total Weight Minimum 13 oz/yd2 (0.442
2
Kg/m )
2. Coating Weight 7 oz/yd2 (0.237 kg/m2)
3. Breaking Strength 50lbs x 55 lbs (222N x 245N)
4. Tear Strength Minium 25 x 25 scale reading
Coating adhesion for 1”
5. 3lbs (13.35N)
(2.5cm) width
6. Abrasion Resistance 300 cycles/mm
7. Colour Fastness to Light 200
8. Stain Resistance 1-12
9. Washability 100 cycles
10. Scubbability 300 cycles
6. Design:
a. Pattern/color: As selected and approved by the
Engineer
. B. Accessories
1. Primer:
a. Shall contain mold inhibitor.
b. Compatible with wall coverings.
2. Adhesive:
a. Heavy-duty, wall covering
Fahd Road
adhesive. b. Shall contain mold inhibitor.
c. Shall be compatible with wall coverings.
d. Use undiluted.
e. Direct glue wall coverings shall be installed directly as per
wall covering manufacturer instructions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive wall coverings.
B. Notify Engineer of conditions that would adversely affect installation or

subsequent use.
C. Do not begin surface preparation or installation until unacceptable

conditions are corrected.
A. Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Ensure walls are structurally sound, smooth, clean, and dry.
C. Remove mold, mildew, dirt, oil, grease, stains, and marks.
D. Repair wall irregularities.
E. Test for and eliminate sources of moisture accumulation into wall or

wall cavity.
F. Apply primer to wall surfaces to receive wall coverings.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall coverings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Test Installation:
1. Install test installation 3 days in advance of main installation.

2. Install a minimum of 3 strips of wall coverings for test.
3. Inspect wall coverings and evaluate appearance for color
uniformity and pattern match.
4. Notify Engineer and manufacturer if appearance is
unacceptable.
5. Do not begin main installation until unacceptable appearance is
corrected.
C. Install wall coverings under adequate lighting conditions.

Fahd Road
D. Install wall covering strips plumb.
E. Apply adhesive to back of wall coverings in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions
F. Ensure wall coverings have made good contact to wall, with no

bubbles.
G. Seams:
1. Install wall covering seams vertical, with tight fit.

2. Install wall covering seams free from air and paste bubbles.
3. Do not locate seams closer than 6 inches to corners.
4. Obtain uniform color match associated with patterns across
seams.
H. Remove paste residue from wall coverings, ceilings, and baseboards.
I. Do not install wall coverings over existing wall coverings.
J. Install wall coverings to obtain uniform color and pattern match across
seams.
K. Install wall coverings with no objectionable variations in color and

pattern match, as determined by Engineer.
L. Remove and replace damaged wall coverings that cannot be

successfully repaired, as determined by Engineer.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean wall coverings promptly after installation, if necessary, in

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials, solvents, steel wool abrasive

cleaners or methods that could damage wall coverings.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed wall coverings from damage during construction.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL

All paints shall be water based and/or with Low VOC content as specified and
purpose manufactured for health care industry.
1.1 SEC TION INCLUDES
A. Surface preparation and field painting of exposed interior items and

surfaces.
B. Surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior items and

surfaces.
C. Painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts, hangers,

exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical
equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish.
D. For any discrepancies between the schedule in the specification and

on the drawings, Engineers decision shall be final and the Contractor
shall comply with it within the contract price.

ascertain all applicable sections required to understand the full scope of
work intended.
1. Section 03300 : Cast in place Concrete.

3. Section 08110 : Metal Doors and Frames
1.3 REFERENCES

III-2/09960/ High Performance Coatings

Fahd Road
1. ASTM D 16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related

Coatings, Materials, and Applications.
3. SSPC – SP1 - Solvent Cleaning: Society for Protective
Coatings.
4. SSPC – SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning: Society for Protective
Coatings.
5. SSPC – SP3 - Power Tool Cleaning: Society for Protective
Coatings.
6. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) SP6 - Commercial
Blast Cleaning Procedures.
7. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) SP10 - Near White
Blast Cleaning Procedure.
8. PDCA Manual - Architectural Painting Specification Manual
– Painting and Decorative Contractors of America.

Jurisdiction.
standards on site and shall provide the Engineer a copy immediately
upon request.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16.
1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range

below 15 when measured at an 85-degree meter.
2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between
20 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter.
3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range
between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter.
4. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more
than 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1 – General Requirements.

B. Product Data: For each paint system indicated, including:

Fahd Road
1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials.
Indicate each material and cross–reference specific coating,
finish system, and application. Identify each material by
manufacturer's catalogue number and general classification.
2. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
3. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical
information, including label analysis and instructions for handling,
storing, and applying each coating material.
C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete

sets of colour chips representing manufacturer's full range of available
colours and patterns.
D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples,

minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product,
colour, and patterns.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer Qualifications: A firm with an experience of at least 5 years in

applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to
those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with
a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same
manufacturer as the finish coats.
C. Paint exposed surfaces. If an item or a surface is not specifically

mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar to adjacent
materials or surfaces. If a colour of finish is not indicated, Engineer will select
from standard colours and finishes available.
D. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal

surfaces, operating parts, and labels.
E. For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, paints
and coatings shall comply with the following VOC content limits:
1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 50g/L.

2. Non-flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 50 g/L.
3. Dry-Fog Coatings: VOC not more than 150g/L.
4. Primers, Sealers and Undercoat: VOC not more than 100g/L.
5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals:
VOC not more than 100g/L.
Fahd Road
6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC not more than
100 g/L.
7. Pre-treatment Wash Primers: VOC not more than 420 g/L.
8. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 275g/L.
9. Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: VOC not more than 275 g/L.
10. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 50g/L.
11. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.
12. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550g/L.
13. Stains: VOC not more than 100 g/L.
F. All paints and coatings shall in general be Green Seal certified.
G. Comply with Class 1 requirements of ASTM E 84

1.8 MOCK-UP
A. Provide a mock-up for wall or column as directed by Engineer for

evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship.
1. Finish areas designated by the Engineer. Mockup area for each

type of paint shall be 10m2.
2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, colour,
and sheen are approved by the Engineer.
3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
4. Approved mock-up may become part of final work subject to
A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened

packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-

ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature as recommend by the
Engineer. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and

ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results.
Do not install products under environmental conditions outside
manufacturer's absolute limits.
B. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be

Fahd Road
painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32
deg C).
C. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be

painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F (7 and 35
deg C).
D. Do not apply paint in rain, fog or when relative humidity exceeds 85

percent; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and

areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature
limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying
periods.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall provide a warranty of 5 (five) years from the date of

Substantial Completion for the quality of the product and defects in the
Application of the Product.
A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the
materials applied and in the quantities described below. Package with
protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents.
Deliver extra materials to Owner.
B. Quantity: Furnish Owner with an additional three percent, but not less
than 1 gal (3.8 l) or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and colour
applied.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PAINT MATERIALS - GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat

materials from the same manufacturer and that are compatible with
one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of
service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing
and field experience.
B. Colour: As per the finish schedule and/or as selected and approved by the
Engineer.
C. Application Rate: Coating thickness for primer intermediate, barrier and

finish coats shall be measured as Dry Film Thickness (DFT) and shall
comply with manufacturers published recommendations.
PART 3 EXECUTION

Fahd Road
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify surfaces and substrate conditions are ready to receive work as

instructed by product manufacturer.
B. Examine surfaces to be finished prior to commencement of work.

Report any condition that may affect proper application.
C. Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover

materials. Report any incompatibility.
D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture

meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below
the following:
1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12%.

2. Concrete and Masonry: 12%.
3. Interior Wood: 10-12%, measured in accordance with ASTM
D2016.
4. Exterior Wood: 12 -15%, measured in accordance with ASTM
D2016.
5. Concrete Floors: 8%
6. For masonry and concrete surfaces pH should be between 8
and 9.
Beginning of Work of this Section means acceptance of existing

substrate surface and site conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. SURFACES
1. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,

escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
2. Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work.
3. Seal timber marks which may bleed through surface finishes,
with an insulator.
4. Impervious Surfaces: Scrub with solution of tri-sodium
phosphate and bleach to remove mildew. Rinse with clean water and
allow surface to dry.
5. Aluminium Surfaces: Remove contamination by steam or high
pressure water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent
washing. Apply etching primer immediately after cleaning.
6. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces: Remove foreign
particles to allow adhesion of finishing materials. Apply compatible
primer or sealer.
7. Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease and oil from canvas
and cotton.
8. Concrete Floors: Remove contamination by acid etch, and rinse
with clean water. Verify required acid-alkali balance is achieved.
Fahd Road
Allow to dry.
9. Copper Surfaces, Paint Finish: Remove contamination by
steam, high pressure water, or solvent washing. Apply vinyl
etch primer immediately after cleaning.
10. Copper Surfaces, Natural Oxidized Finish: Remove contamination
by applying oxidizing solution of copper acetate and ammonium
chloride in acetic acid. Rub on repeatedly for required effect. Once
attained, rinse with clean water and allow to dry.
11. Gypsum Board: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot
prime defects after repair.
12. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove contamination and oils and wash
with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.
13. Concrete and Masonry Surfaces: Remove dirt, loose mortar,
scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and
grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and
allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding
metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting
with water. Allow to dry.
14. Plaster Surfaces: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections
with latex patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent
surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces.
15. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, mill scale,
weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Remove heavy coatings of scale by
wire brushing or sandblasting; wash with solvent. Apply a
treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts
and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs.
16. Shop-Primed Steel: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer
and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches
inconspicuous. Clean with solvent. Prime bare steel.
17. Interior Wood: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming/sealing.
Seal knots, pitch streaks and sappy sections. Fill nail holes and
cracks with recommended wood fillers after primer/sealer has
dried; sand lightly between coats.
18. Exterior Wood: Remove dirt, grit and foreign matter. Seal knots,
pitch streaks and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted
exterior wood fillers after primer/sealer has been applied.
19. Wood and Metal Doors: Finish the top and bottom edges with the
same coating system as recommended for the doors.
B. COATINGS
1. Thoroughly stir liquid paints so that all solids are fully and evenly
incorporated.
2. Thoroughly snake clear varnish containers; do not stir contents.
3. Do not thin paints or varnishes unless so directed by the
manufacturer.
4. Take particular care and observe manufacturers pot life, timing

Fahd Road
and curing directions when preparing multi coat finishes. Do not
use coatings beyond pot life.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Apply coatings at spreading rate required to achieve the manufacturers

recommended film thickness.
C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.
D. Ensure that none of the works is carried out during dust storms.
E. Apply each coat to uniform finish.
F. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless
otherwise approved.
G. Apply coatings without runs, drips or sags, without brush marks and
with consistent sheen.
H. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
I. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. Use tack cloth just prior to
applying next coat.
J. Allow applied coat to dry before applying next coat.
K. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers
into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface.
L. For dark colours and deep clear colours, regardless of number of coats
specified, apply as many coats as necessary for complete hide to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
M. Prime concealed surfaces of woodwork with primer paint. Concealed
surfaces should also be finished in the same manner as specified for
woodwork.
3.4 FINISHING BUILDING SERVICES EQUIPMENT
A. Refer related Electrical and Mechanical divisions for schedule of colour

coding and identification banding of equipment, ductwork, piping, and
conduit.
B. Paint shop primed equipment.
C. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on

building services components and paint separately.
D. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated
and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, and the
like, except where items are pre-finished.

Fahd Road
E. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and the like that are visible through
grilles and louvers with one coat of matt black paint. Paint dampers exposed
behind grilles, louvers and the like to match face panels.
F. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished

areas.
G. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and
telephone equipment before installing equipment.
H. Colour code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed ductwork in

accordance with colour schedule. Colour band and identify with flow arrows,
names and numbering.
I. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim,

escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing.
J. Do not paint any moving parts of operating units, valve and damper
operators, linkages, sinkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts, or
the like, unless otherwise shown.
A. Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any
time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when
paint is being applied:
1. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to

sample paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to
Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence
of Contractor.
2. Owner may direct Contractor to stop painting if test results show
material being used does not comply with specified requirements.
Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from Project site, pay
for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the
noncomplying paint. If necessary, Contractor may be required to
remove noncomplying paint from previously painted surfaces if, on
repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are incompatible.
3.6 CLEANING
A. As work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or

spattered.
B. During progress of Work keep main premises free of unnecessary

accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris.
C. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire
hazard. Place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades whether being painted or not, against

damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing,
Fahd Road
and repainting, as approved by the Engineer.
B. Provide “Wet Paint” signs to protect newly painted finishes. After

completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings
provided by others to protect their work.
C. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces.
3.8 SCHEDULE
A. Exterior Paint Systems:
1. Concrete, Render and Masonry: Provide the following finish

systems over exterior concrete, render and masonry substrates:
TEXTURE COATING SYSTEM
Description: Pure acrylic water based, breathable, anti-
carbonation system with long lasting colours.
Surface(s) : Cement Plaster/Concrete
Preparation : Refer Technical Data Sheet of manufacturer
Application: Roller/Spray /Brush
Initial
Coat/Primer: One coat of Alkali Resistant Primer, water
based alkali resistant primer / sealer, vol. Solids >35% as per ISO
3233 : 1998 (E).
Finish Coat 2 full coats Medium texture Single Pack,
pure acrylic, flexible, water based with rock hard
aggregates, breathable anti- carbonation
system, volume solids >47% as per ISO
3233:1998 (E), Semi Gloss Finish.
Independently Tested by accredited third
party laboratories for following properties.
Crack bridging ability 0.8mm
Carbon Dioxide Diffusion
Resistance
Equivalent Air layer
Thickness R Value
Moisture Vapour Diffusion coefficient
Equivalent Air layer
Thickness Sd Vale 2.62 x 10 -7 cm2 s-1253
m1.27 x 10-4cm2s -1 0.9 m
Chloride Ion Diffusion No noticeable diffusion
even after 700 days of chloride test
Reduction in water absorption
2. EXTERIOR WOOD FINISHING SYSTEM
a. Wax based impregnant color as the finish 99.9%

1. Apply 1 coat of ready to use wax based
Fahd Road
impregnant color by brush / spray with weight
solids of 22%. Coating weight should not exceed
80 Gms/ sq. meter.
2. Allow to dry for 3-4 hours.
3. Light sand with grit 320. Remove the dust after
sanding
4. Apply 2nd coat Wax based impregnant color by
brush / spray. Coating weight should not exceed
80 Gms/ sq. meter.
b. Wax based impregnant with Water Based (WB) Clear
top coat
1. Apply 1st coat of ready to use wax based
impregnant color by brush / spray. Wax based
impregnant should have weight solids of 22%. Coating
weight should not exceed 80 Gms/ liter.
2. Allow to dry for 3-4 hours.
3. Light sand with grit 320
4. Apply 2nd coat of wax based impregnant color.
Coating weight should not exceed 80 Gms / Liter
5. Allow 3-4 hours drying. Light sand with grit 320
to ensure the surface is well abraded prior
to application of water based clear top coat. Do not
rupture the surface while sanding.
6. Apply 1st coat of water based clear top coat by
brush or spray. water Based Top Coat should have
weight solids of 35%. Application should not
exceed 130 Gms / Sq. Meter. Allow overnight
drying
7. Light Sand the coated substrate with grit 320.
8. Apply 2nd coat of water based Clear top coat by
brush or spray. Application weight should not
exceed 130 Gms / Sq. Meter.
Water Based Wood Coating System for Exteriors
Total
Solids
Product % Solids in No of grams
deposited /
description mix Coats deposited /
M2
M2
Water Based Insulator
Water based
39 1 80 31
Insulator
Wax based impregnant as finish
Waxed based
22 2 100 22
impregnant

Fahd Road
Wax based impregnant with clear top coat
Waxed based
22 2 100 22
impregnant
Water based
33 2 260 87
Clear top
Gloss level of water based clear top coat shall be as approved by the
Engineer.
3. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over
exterior ferrous-metal surfaces.
Paint System: (For Mild & Galvanized Steel)
Description: Epoxy - Polyurethane
System
Surface(s) : Mild & Galvanized Steel
Initial Coats : Stripe coating and, One full coat of two pack
epoxy primer @ 100 microns as a primer
( Solids % by volume : >48, Mixing ratio: 4 : 1)
Finishing Coats : Two coats of polyurethane topcoat each @ 50
microns
( Solids % by volume : >48, Mixing ratio: 4 : 1)
B. Interior Paint Systems:
1. Concrete, Masonry and Gypsum board: Provide the following
paint systems over interior concrete and masonry substrates:
a. EMULSION PAINT– WALLS/CEILING/GYPSUM BOARD
Description: Pure acrylic high crack tolerance up to
1mm, anti fungal & anti microbial
(bacteria) highly washable for internal
walls.
Surface(s) : Cement Plaster/Concrete
Preparation : Refer manufacturer Technical Data
Sheets
Application: Roller/Spray /Brush
Initial Coat/Primer: One coat alkali resistant Primer, vol.
solids> 23 % as per ISO 3233 : 1998 (E)
Smoothening Coat 2 coats , a PVA Co-polymer based filler,
vol. solids >50% as per ISO 3233 : 1998
(E)
Finishing Coats : 2 coats emulsion finish, vol.solids >36
% as per ISO 3233: 1998 (E)
Independently tested by accredited third
party laboratories for the following
Fahd Road
properties.
Crack Bridging Ability: Up to 1 mm.
Washability criteria tested as per DIN
53778  10000 scrubs.
Flame spread: Class 1Y as per BS-476-7
2. Ferrous metal: Provide the following finish systems over interior
ferrous-metal surfaces
Paint System (For Mild Steel)
Description: Epoxy - Polyurethane System
Surface(s) : Mild Steel
Initial Coats : Stripe coating and, One full coat of two
pack epoxy primer @ 100 microns as a
primer ( Solids % by volume : >48, Mixing
ratio: 4 : 1)
Intermediate One full coat of two pack epoxy primer
@125 microns as an intermediate coat.
(Solids % by volume >48 Mixing ratio 4:1)
Finishing Coats : Two coats of polyurethane topcoat each
@ 50 microns ( Solids % by volume : >48,
Mixing ratio: 4 : 1)
Paint Systems (G.I Surfaces)
Description: Epoxy – Polyurethane System
Type Epoxy primer / Polyurethane topcoat
Surface(s): Galvanized Steel
Preparation: Blast cleaning to Sa 2.5
Initial Coats: Stripe coating and, one full coat of two
pack epoxy primer @125 microns as a
primer (Solids % by volume: >48, Mixing
ratio 4:1)
Finishing Coats: Two coats of polyurethane topcoat each
@50 microns (Solids % by volume: >48,
Mixing ratio 4:1)
3. INTERIOR WOOD FINISHING SYSTEMS
a. Open Grain Clear Finish (Water Based Sealer and
Topcoat)
i) Apply 1st coat of water based Clear sealer by
spray. Water Based Sealer should have weight
solids of 34%. Application should not exceed 120
Gms / Sq. Meter. Allow 2-3 hours drying.
ii) Light sand with grit 240 / 320
iii) Apply 2nd coat of water based Clear sealer by
spray. Application weight should not exeed120
Gms / Sq. Meter. Allow overnight drying
Fahd Road
iv) Sand the coated surface with grit 240 / 320
v) Apply 1st coat of water based Clear top coat by
spray. Topcoat used should have weight solids of
32%. Application should not exceed 120 Gms / Sq.
Meter.
vi) The coated substrate is ready to pack after
overnight drying
b. Closed Grain Clear Finish (Water Based Insulator,
Sealer and Topcoat)
i) Pre-treat the surface with a water based insulator.
Water based insulator should have weight solids of
38%. Application weight should not exceed 80
Gms / Sq. Meter. Allow overnight drying. ii)
Light sand with grit 240 / 320
iii) Apply 1st coat of water based Clear sealer by
spray. Water Based Sealer should have weight
solids of 34%. Application weight should not
exceed 120 Gms / Sq. Meter. Allow 2-3 hours
drying.
iv) Apply 2nd coat of water based Clear sealer by
spray. Application weight should not exceed120
Gms / Sq. Meter. Allow overnight drying
v) Sand the coated surface with grit 240 / 320
vi) Apply 1 coat of water based Clear top coat by
spray. Water Based Topcoat should have weight
exceed 120 Gms / Sq. Meter.
vii) The coated substrate is ready to pack after
overnight drying
c. Pigmented Finish (Water Based White Primer and
Pigmented Topcoat (White)/ (Colors))
i) Apply 1st coat of water based White Primer by
spray. Water Based White Primer should have weight
exceed 150 Gms / Sq. Meter. Allow 2-3 hours
drying.
ii) Light sand with grit 240 / 320
iii) Apply 2nd coat of water based White Primer.
Application weight should not exceed 150 Gms /
Sq. Meter. Allow overnight drying.
iv) Sand with grit 240 followed by grit 320.
v) Apply Water Based Pigmented Topcoat of choice.
Water Based Topcoat should have weight solids of
45%. Application weight should not exceed 140
Gms / Sq. Meter.
vi) The coated substrate is ready to pack after
overnight drying
Water Based Wood Coating System for Interiors
Fahd Road
Total
Solids
% Solids in No of grams
Product description deposited /
mix Coats deposited /
M2
M2
Water Based Insulator
Water Based Insulator 39 1 80 31
Open Grain Clear Finish
Water Based Clear
35 2 240 85
Sealer
Water Based Clear Top
31 1 120 32
Coat
Closed Grain Clear Finish
Water Based Insulator 39 1 80 31
Water Based Clear 35 2 240 85.00
Sealer
Water Based Clear Top
31 1 120 32
Coat
Floor Coating Clear Finish
Water Based Clear floor
37 3 300 111
coating
Pigmented Finish
Water Based White

55 2 300 165.99
Primer
Water Based White top

44 1 140 62.30
coat
Gloss level of water based clear top coat shall be as approved by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 10260
CORNER GUARD
PART 1 GENERAL

- Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care Facilities..
All products of this section shall be purpose manufactured for health care sector.
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following types of wall protection systems:
1. Corner Guards

of work intended.

2. Section 10265 : Wall Guards
1.3 REFERENCES

1. National codes (IBC, UBC, SBCCI, BOCA and Life Safety)

3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
4. California 01350 specification
Jurisdiction.
III-2/10260/ Corner Guard
Fahd Road
requested.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of contract

and Division 1 – General Requirements.
B. Product data and detailed specifications for each system component

and installation accessory required, including installation methods for
each type of substrate.
C. Shop drawings showing locations, extent and installation details of

corner guards. Show methods of attachment to adjoining construction.
D. Samples for verification purposes: Submit the following samples, as

proposed for this work, for verification of color, texture and pattern.
1. 12" (304.8mm) long sample of each model specified including

mounting hardware.
E. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing laboratory

showing compliance of each component with requirements indicated.
F. Maintenance data for wall protection system components for inclusion

in the operating and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Installer qualifications: Engage an installer who has no less than 3

years experience in installation of systems similar in complexity to
those required for this project.
B. Manufacturer’s qualifications: Not less than 5 years experience in the

production of specified products and a record of successful in-service
performance.
C. Code compliance: Assemblies should conform to all applicable codes

including IBC, UBC, SBCCI, BOCA, Life Safety and CA 01350.
D. Fire performance characteristics: Provide engineered PETG wall

protection system components with UL label indicating that they are
identical to those tested in accordance with ASTM E84 for Class 1
characteristics listed below:
1. Flame spread: 25 or less

2. Smoke developed: 450 or less
E. Impact Strength: Provide assembled wall protection units that have

been tested in accordance with the applicable provisions of ASTM
F476.
F. Chemical and stain resistance: Provide wall protection system

components with chemical and stain resistance in accordance with
ASTM D543.
Fahd Road
G. Single source responsibility: Provide all components of the wall
protection system manufactured by the same company to ensure
compatibility of color, texture and physical properties.
A. Deliver materials to the project site in unopened original factory

packaging clearly labeled to show manufacturer.
B. Material must be stored flat.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installation areas must be enclosed and weatherproofed before

installation commences.
1.9 MOCK UP

1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranties for 5 years from the date of Substantial Completion.
A. Furnish Owner at least 3 percent of each type corner guard used on

the Project, over and above the quantity installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
(NOT USED)

Fahd Road
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Engineered PETG: Extruded material should be Acrylic Polymer free of

PVC and PBT with shadowgrain texture, nominal .078" (1.98mm)
thickness. Chemical and stain resistance should be per ASTM D543
standards. Colors to be as selected and approved by Engineer.
B. Stainless steel corner guard shall be surface mounted 16 guage with

90mm legs mounted with special adhesive or stainless steel screws as
selected and approved by Engineer.
C. Aluminum: Extruded aluminum retainers should be 6063-T6 alloy,

nominal .070" (1.78mm) thickness. Minimum strength and durability
properties as specified in ASTM B221.
D. Stainless Steel: Type 304 #4 satin finish.
E. Fasteners: All fasteners to be non-corrosive and compatible with

aluminum retainers.
2.3 CO RNER GUARDS
A. Engineered PETG Corner Guards to be Acrylic polymer. Flush

mounted guards consisting of continuous aluminum retainer with snap-
on Acrylic polymer cover. Retainer to be taped and spackled into
adjacent drywall.
Extruded aluminum base and closure gasket where indicated.

Attachment hardware shall be appropriate for wall construction.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate wall protection systems to comply with

requirements indicated for design, dimensions, detail, finish and
member sizes.
B. Preassemble components in shop as much as possible to minimize

field assembly.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which

work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or
timely completion.
1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface preparation: Prior to installation, clean substrate to remove dirt,

Fahd Road
debris and loose particles. Perform additional preparation procedures
as required by manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Protection: Take all necessary steps to prevent damage to material

during installation as required in manufacturer’s installation
instructions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install the work of this section in strict accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendations, using only approved mounting
hardware, and locating all components firmly into position, level and
plumb.
3.4 CLEANING
A. General: Immediately upon completion of installation, clean guards and

accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended cleaning
method.
B. Remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from

installation as work progresses and upon completion of work.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed materials to prevent damage by other trades. Use

materials that may be easily removed without leaving residue or
permanent stains.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 10265
WALL GUARD
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following types of wall protection systems:
1. Crash Rails

of work intended.

2. Section 10260 : Corner Guards
1.3 REFERENCES



Jurisdiction.
III-2/10265/ Wall Guard
Fahd Road
requested.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

and Division 1 – General Requirements.


crash rails. Show methods of attachment to adjoining construction.

proposed for this work, for verification of color, texture, pattern and end
cap attachment and alignment.

end cap and mounting hardware.


1.5 QUALIFICATIONS



performance.

including IBC, UBC, SBCCI, BOCA, Life Safety and CA 01350.


Fahd Road
F476.

ASTM D543.
G. Single source responsibility: Provide all components of the wall

compatibility of color, texture and physical properties.

B. Material must be stored flat.
A. Installation areas must be enclosed and weatherproofed before

1.9 MOCK UP
A. Prepare a mockup for one full length of wall including corners as

instructed by the Engineer for his approval. Approved mockups subject
to acceptance by the Engineer may be incorporated in the final works.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Furnish Owner at least 3 percent of each type wall guard used on the
Project, over and above the quantity installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Subject to compliance with the requirements of the specifications, the

following manufacturers are acceptable.
A. Construction Specialties Inc. (C/S Architectural Products)
Tel: 9714 331 2167, Fax: 9714 331 5023
Website: Website: www.c-sgroup.com
B. Korogard
Tel: 800-628-0449, Fax: (330) 668-7703
Website: www.korogard.com
C. InPro Corporation, USA

Fahd Road
Tel: 800.222.5556, Fax: 888.715.8407
Website: www.inprocorp.com
D. Approved Equal.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Engineered PETG: Extruded material should be high impact Acrylic

Polymer free of PVC and PBT with shadowgrain texture, nominal .078"
(1.98mm) thickness. Chemical and stain resistance should be per
ASTM D543 standards. Colors to be as selected and approved by
Engineer.
B. Recycled PETG: PVC-free regrind absorption cushion.
C. Aluminum: Extruded aluminum should be 6063-T6 alloy, nominal .062"

(1.57mm) thick retainer. Minimum strength and durability properties as
specified in ASTM B221.
D. Solid Wood Components: Shall be Plain Sawn, FAS grade hardwood,

kiln dried to a moisture content of 6 to 10%. All wood components shall
be factory finished coated with catalyzed high solids, clear conversion
varnish in accordance with AWI finish system. Specie as selected and
approved by the Engineer

aluminum retainers. All necessary fasteners to be supplied by the
manufacturer.
2.3 CRASH RAILS
A. Engineered PETG Crash Rails to be Acrylic polymer. Surface mounted

assembly consisting of aluminum clips with snap-on Acrylic polymer
cover and integral shock absorbing cushions. End caps shall be
mechanically fastened with concealed fasteners. Color matched end
caps and corners shall be removable for ease of replacement.
Attachment hardware shall be appropriate wall conditions.
B. Surface mounted solid wood crash rail. Ends to be factory or field

mitered. Attachment hardware shall be appropriate for the wall.
2.4 FABRICATION

member sizes.
B. Preassemble components in shop as much as possible to minimize
field assembly.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Fahd Road
timely completion.

corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION

as required by manufacturer's instructions.

instructions.
3.3 INSTALLATION

manufacturer's recommendations, using only approved mounting
hardware, and locating all components firmly into position, level and
plumb.
B. Where splices occur in horizontal runs, splice retainer and rail at

different locations along the run.
3.4 CLEANING
A. General: Immediately upon completion of installation, clean rails and

method.

3.5 PROTECTION

permanent stains.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 10268
PROTECTIVE CORRIDOR HANDRAILS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes Protective Corridor Handrails as specified and to

be installed as shown on approved drawings.

of work intended.
1. Section 10260 : Corner Guard

2. Section 10265 : Wall Guard
1.3 REFERENCES



Jurisdiction.
III-2/10268/ Protective Corridor

RADCARE - B01- King 216 Handrails
Fahd Road
requested.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

and Division 1, General Requirements.


handrails. Show methods of attachment to adjoining construction.

proposed for this work, for verification of color, texture, pattern and end
cap attachment and alignment.

end cap and mounting hardware.


1.5 QUALIFICATIONS



performance.

including IBC, UBC, SBCCI, BOCA, OSHA, OSHPD, ADA and CA
01350.

Fahd Road

F476.

ASTM D543.
G. Color match: Provide wall protection components that are color

matched in accordance with the following:
1. Delta Ecmc of no greater than 1.0 using CIELab color space.
H. Single source responsibility: Provide all components of the wall

compatibility of color, texture and physical properties

B. Store materials in original, undamaged packaging in a cool, dry place

out of direct sunlight and exposure to the elements. A minimum room
temperature of 40°F (4°C) and a maximum of 100°F (38°C) should be
maintained.
C. Material must be stored flat.
A. Materials must be acclimated in an environment of 65°-75°F (18°-24°C)

for at least 24 hours prior to beginning the installation.
B. Installation areas must be enclosed and weatherproofed before

1.9 MOCK UP
A. Prepare a mockup for one full length of wall including corners as

instructed by the Engineer for his approval. Approved mockups subject
to acceptance by the Engineer may be incorporated in the final works.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Furnish Owner at least 3 percent of each type corridor handrail used on

the Project, over and above the quantity installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Fahd Road
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
(NOT USED)
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Engineered PETG: Extruded material should be high impact Acrylic

Polymer free of PVC and PBT with shadow grain texture, nominal .078"
(1.98mm) thickness. Chemical and stain resistance should be per
ASTM D543 standards. Colors to be as selected and approved by
Engineer.
B. Aluminum: Extruded aluminum should be 6063-T6 alloy, nominal .090"

(2.29mm) thick handrail retainer and nominal .062" (1.57mm) thick
crash rail retainer. Minimum strength and durability properties as
specified in ASTM B221.
C. Stainless Steel: Cast brackets to be type 304 alloy with #4 satin finish.
D. Solid Wood: Shall be Plain Sawn, FAS grade hardwood, kiln dried to a
moisture content of 6 to 10%. All wood components shall be factory
finished coated with catalyzed high solids, clear conversion varnish in
accordance with AWI finish system.

aluminum retainers. All necessary fasteners to be supplied by the
manufacturer.
2.3 HANDRAILS
A. Engineered PETG Handrails shall be high impact Acrylic polymer free

of PVC and PBT. Surface mounted handrail and crash rail
configuration with color matched end caps returning to the wall and
mounting brackets to be spaced as indicated on manufacturer’s installation
instructions. Attachment hardware shall be appropriate for wall
construction.
B. 6 3/8" h (161.9mm) Handrail/crash rail configuration consisting of a
round handrail, crash rail and matching end caps returning to the wall.
Dual cantilevered mounting brackets shall be stainless steel.
C. Solid Wood Handrail: 1 ½ “round (38.1mm) singular rail configuration

with radiused end caps. Specie as selected and approved by the
Engineer.
D Stainless Steel to be type 304 alloy with #4 satin finish.
2.4 FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” for

recommendations relative to applications and designations of finishes.
2.5 FABRICATION
Fahd Road
member sizes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

timely completion.

corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION

as required by manufacturer’s instructions.

instructions.
3.3 INSTALLATION

manufacturer’s recommendations using only approved mounting
hardware and locating all components firmly into position, level and plumb.
B. Temperature at the time of installation must be between 65°-75°F (18°-

24°C) and be maintained for at least 48 hours after the installation.
C. Adjust installed end caps as necessary to ensure tight seams.
D. Where splices occur in horizontal runs, splice retainer and rails at

different locations along the run.
3.4 CLEANING
A. General: Immediately upon completion of installation, clean rails and

method.

3.5 PROTECTION

permanent stains.

Fahd Road
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 10270
ACCESS FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Access floor system consisting of floor panels and pedestals and

designed to accommodate static, rolling and impact loading.

of work intended.
1. Section 09650 : Resilient Flooring

1.3 REFERENCES

1. CISCA A/2003 - Recommended Test Procedures for

Access Floors.
2. ASTM F 150 - Electrical Resistance of Conductive and
Static Resilient Flooring.
3. ASTM E 648 - Critical Radiant Flex of floor covering
systems using a radiant heat energy
source.
4. ASTM E 84 - Surface Burning characteristics of Building
Materials.
III-2/10270/ Access Flooring

Fahd Road
5. NFPA 75 - Protection of Information Technology
Equipment.
6. UL 779 - Electrically Conductive Flooring.

7. AATCC - Electrostatic propensity of carpets.
8. BS EN 12825 - Raised Access Floors

Jurisdiction.
A. Access flooring shall be installed at the location and elevation and in

the arrangement shown on the approved shop drawings. The floor
system shall be of stringer less type upto 400mm depth for static loads.
For more than 400mm depth for static loads the system shall be
stringer type, complete with all items, and shall be the standard product
of a manufacturer specializing in the manufacture of access flooring
systems. Access flooring shall have a provision for self alignment of
floor panels, adjustable pedestals and readily removable floor panels
covered as specified. Lateral stability of floor system shall be independent
of panels. Finished assembly shall be rigid and free of vibration, noises
and rocking panels. Access flooring system shall be provided with
grounding. The Access flooring system shall comply with CISCA.
Recommended test procedures for access floors, NFPA 75
requirements and ASTM E84 class 1 requirements or BS EN 12825
requirements.
A. Concentrated load: 5000N on 25mm2 at any point on the panel with

deflection no greater than 2.54mm.
B. Clearance or pedestal height: 150mm to 200mm.
C. Grounding: The access flooring system shall be grounded for safety

hazard and static suppression. Provide positive contact between
components for safe, continuous electrical grounding of entire floor
system.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
Submit as per requirements of Division 1 – General Requirements.
A. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing details at floor perimeter,

installation height above structural floor and other details.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s descriptive data, catalogue cuts and

Fahd Road
installation instructions.
C. Samples: Submit samples of floor panels and understructure
components to be used in system.
D. Design Data: Design calculations which demonstrate that the proposed

floor system meets design requirements specified.
E. Certification: Submit certificates, independent test reports and data to

substantiate that the proposed floor system components meet the
performance requirements specified.
F. Closeout Submittal: Provide manuals with cleaning and maintenance

instructions.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

1.8 DELIVERY
A. Deliver materials to site in undamaged condition, in original containers

or packages, complete with accessories and instructions. Label
packages with manufacturer’s name and brand designations.
1.9 STORAGE
A. Materials shall be stored in original protective packaging in a safe, dry

and clean location. Panels shall be stored in conditions recommended
by the manufacturer. Replace defective or damaged materials.
1.10 HANDLING
A. Materials shall be handled and protected in a manner to prevent

damage during the entire construction period.
1.11 MOCK UP
A. Provide a mockup for one complete room of size 3mx3m as directed by

the Engineer for his approval. Approved Mockup, subject to
acceptance from the Engineer may become part of final work.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Provide a warranty of 5 years against any defects for

repair/replacement for any part/panel of the products for this section.
A. Provide four spare floor panels, spare complete pedestal assemblies,

for each 100sqm of area or less.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Fahd Road
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
(NOT USED)
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Panel Construction: Base access floor system on a 600 by 600mm 24

by 24inch square module. Fabricate so that accurate job cutting and
fitting may be done using standard sizes for perimeters and around
columns. Do not expose metal on finished top surface of panels.
Provide cutouts and cutout closures to accommodate utility systems
and equipment intercabling. Reinforce cutouts to meet design load
requirements. Provide extra support pedestals at each corner of cutout
for cutout panels to meet specified design load requirements. Use
panels of uniform dimensions within specified tolerances. Panels shall
be permanently marked to indicate load rating and model number.
B. Wood core panels shall have cores of wood particleboard conforming

to ANSI A208.1, Grade 1-M-3, or of plywood conforming to APA PS1,
EXT-DFPA-C-C. The core shall be not less than 25mm 1 inch thick,
and shall be faced on both sides with structurally bonded zinc-coated steel
sheets not lighter than 0.70mm 24 gauge. All edges and corners shall
be sealed with zinc-coated steel. The completed panels shall have a
flame spread rating of 25 or less when tested in accordance with class
1 requirements of ASTM E84 or equivalent standard. Provide zinc-coated
steel or other fire resistant edging to protect shop and field edge cuts
and cutouts through the face of panels in a manner to meet specified
flame spread requirements.
C. Allowable Tolerances
a. Floor Panel Flatness: Plus or minus 0.5mm 0.02 inches on

diagonal on top of panel or underneath edge.
b. Floor Panel Length: Plus or minus 0.4mm 0.015 inch.
c. Floor Panel Squareness: Plus or minus 0.5mm 0.02inch in panel
length.
d. Finish Floor: Level within plus or minus 1.6mm in 2 meters 0.062
inch in 10 feet, and plus or minus 2.5mm 0.10inch for entire
floor.
D. Pedestals: Pedestals shall be of steel or aluminum or a combination

thereof. Ferrous materials shall have a factory-applied corrosion-
resistant finish. Pedestal base plates shall provide a minimum of 10,
300 square mm 16 square inches of bearing surface and shall be a
minimum of 3mm thick. Pedestal shafts shall be threaded to permit
height adjustment within a range of approximately 50mm, to permit
overall floor adjustment within plus or minus 2.5mm or the required
elevation, and to permit leveling of the finished floor surface within
1.56mm in 3000mm in all directions.
E. Panel Finish: As per the finishes schedule. Confirm to manufacturers
Fahd Road
instructions for finishes to be bonded to the panels. All finishes shall be
factory bonded to the panel.
F. Perimeter Panels: Perimeter panels shall be supported on flat top
pedestals. Cut panel edges shall be sealed suitably.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: The floor system shall be installed in accordance with the

manufacturer’s instructions and as per the approved shop drawings.
Open ends of the floor, where the floor system does not abut wall or
other construction, shall have positive anchorage and rigid support.
Areas to receive access flooring shall maintain temperature and
humidity as recommended by the manufacturer for 24 hours prior to
and during installation.
B. Preparation for Installation: The area in which the floor system is to be

installed shall be cleared of all debris. Structural floor surfaces shall be
thoroughly cleaned and all dust shall be removed. Floor coatings
required for dust or vapor control shall be installed prior to installation
of pedestals only if the pedestal adhesive will not damage the coating.
If the coating and adhesive are not compatible, the coating shall be applied
after the pedestals have been installed and the adhesive has cured.
C. Pedestals: Pedestals shall be accurately spaced, and shall be set

plumb and in true alignment. Base plates shall be in full and firm
contact with the structural floor and shall be secured to the structural
floor with steel expansion anchors.
D. Auxiliary Framing: Auxiliary framing or pedestals shall be provided

around columns and other permanent construction, at open ends of the
floor, and beneath panels that are substantially cut to accommodate
utility systems. Special framing for additional lateral support shall be as
shown on the approved shop drawings. Provide additional pedestals
designed to specific heights and lengths to meet structural irregularities
and design loads. Connect auxiliary framing to main framing.
E. Panels: The panels shall be placed with supports in a manner that will
preclude lateral movement. Perimeter panels, cutout panels, and
panels adjoining columns, must be fastened to the supporting
components to form a rigid boundary for the interior panels. Floors
shall be level within the specified tolerances. Cut edges of composite
panels shall be coated with a silicone rubber sealant or with an
adhesive recommended by the panel manufacturer. Extruded vinyl
edging shall be secured in place at all cut edges of all panel cut-outs to
prevent abrasion of cables. Where the space below the floor is a
cutouts for conduit and similar penetrations shall be closed using self-
extinguishing sponge rubber.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 10436
EXTERIOR CLINIC SIGNS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide exterior hospital identification signs, building identification

signs, directional signs, directories, and information etc as directed by
the Engineer.
B. The Engineer will select exterior signs from manufacturer’s submitted

samples, literature and shop drawings.
C. Interior signs shall be as specified in Section 10446.
1.2 MANUFACTURER’S QUALIFICATIONS
A. Sign manufacturer shall be regularly and presently manufacture

exterior signs similar to those specified as one of their principal
products.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Submit 2 sets. One set of samples will be retained by the

Engineer, other returned to Contractor.
1. Sign Panel, 200 mm x 250 mm, with letters.

2. Color samples of each color, 150 mm x 150 mm. Show
anticipated range of color and texture.
3. Sample of typeface, arrow and symbols in a typical full size
layout.
B. Manufacturer’s Literature: Submit manufacturer’s printed specifications,

anchorage details, and installation and maintenance instructions.
C. Design and Shop Drawings: Submit scaled for manufacture and

fabrication of sign types. Identify materials, show joints, welds,
anchorage, accessory items, mounting and finishes.
D. Submit full size layout patterns for dimensional letters.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
III-2/10436/ Exterior Hospital Signs

Fahd Road
1.5 MOCK-UP
A. Prepare a mockup for each type of sign of this section as instructed by

the Engineer for his approval. Approved mockups subject to
acceptance by the Engineer may be incorporated in the final works.
1.6 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Pack safely to prevent damage or deterioration during shipment,

handling, storage and installation. Maintain protective covering in place
and in good repair until removal is necessary.
B. Deliver signs only when the site and mounting services are ready for
installation work to proceed.
C. Store products in dry condition inside enclosed facilities.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Furnish a warranty against defects in materials or workmanship for five

years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide one (1) sign of each type for every 25pieces or less in packed
and sealed cartons.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EXTERIOR SIGNS
A. (NOT USED)
B. Aluminum:
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209
2. Extrusions and Tubing: ASTM B221
C. Cast Acrylic Sheet: MIL-P-8184E; Type II, class 1, Water white non-
glare optically clear.
D. Matt finish water white clear acrylic shall not be acceptable.
E. Vinyl: 0.1 mm thick machine cut, having pressure sensitive adhesive

and integral colors.
F. Electrical Signs:
Fahd Road
1. General: Furnish and install all lighting, electrical components,
fixtures and lamps ready for use in accordance with the sign
type drawings, details and specifications.
2. Refer to Electrical Specifications Section, Division 16, to verify
line voltages for sign locations that require electrical signs.
3. Quality Control: Installed electrical components and sign
installations are to bear the label and certification of
Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc., and is to comply with National
Electrical Code as well as applicable federal, state and local
codes for installation techniques, fabrication methods and
general product safety.
4. Ballast and Lighting Fixtures: See Electrical Specifications.
G. Concrete Post Footings: See Section 03300, Cast-in-place Concrete.
H. Steel: See Section 05120, Structural Steel. Steel shall however be

hotdip galvanized as per ASTM A123.
I. Type Style: As approved by the Engineer.
J. Illuminated Signs:
1. UL approved cabinet to be constructed from aluminum extrusion

system with internal fluorescent lamps 230 mm on center
maximum.
2. Energy saver fluorescent lamps which shall be turned on or and

off by photocell.
3. Energy shut off switch shall be mounted on bottom or side away

from traffic thoroughfare.
4. The sign face strips are to be 2 mm minimum to 3 mm thick

aluminum. Aluminum faces and changeable strips shall be mounted
into framed extruded cabinet face to allow for removal from top
or side, so that faces can be changed without affecting extruded
sign structure.
5. Changeable strip sign text modules are to be extruded

aluminum sliding panels which are retained by a horizontal
aluminum channel mounted behind the insert panel joints.
6. Contractor shall make the sign operable by making the

necessary electrical connections to adjacent junction box
located in the general area of sign. Electrical connection is to
run under grade and up through base. No exposed electrical
conduit runs shall be allowed. Coordinate line voltages with site
electrical circuit.

Fahd Road
K. Design Intent Specifications: Also shown in the design book provided
by the Engineer, which area as follows:
1. Text & Characters: Edgelit (push through) perspex letters.

2. Fascia of the arrows: 1.5mm thick Stainless steel (#8 finish)
3. Fascia of the letters: 3M die cut translucent vinyl film – black
colour
4. Recessed gap: Aluminium painted to black colour with cut-out
featuring white perspex/acrylic and concealed neon lighting
(blue colour).
5. Structure: Aluminium fascia painted to silver colour
6. Decorative Panel: Stainless Steel Panel - # 8 finish with silk
screen printed pattern. This unique pattern blends the entire
exterior and interior signage as a family.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Design components to allow for expansion and contraction for a

minimum material temperature range of 56 degree C, without causing
buckling, excessive opening of joints or over stressing of adhesives, welds
and fasteners.
B. Form work to required shapes and sizes, with true curve lines and
angles. Provide necessary rebates, lugs and brackets for assembly of
units. Use concealed fasteners whenever and wherever possible.
C. Shop fabricate so far as practicable. Joints fastened flush to conceal

reinforcement, or welded where thickness or section permits.
D. Contact surfaces of connected members be true. Assembled so joints

will be tight and practically unnoticeable, without use of filling
compound.
E. Signs shall have fine, even texture and be flat and sound. Lines and
miters sharp, arises unbroken, profiles accurate and ornament true to
pattern. Plane surfaces be smooth flat and without oil-canning, free of
rack and twist. Maximum variation from plane of surface plus or minus
0.4 mm. Restore texture to filed or cut areas.
F. Level or straighten wrought work. Members shall have sharp lines and
angles and smooth surfaces.
G. Extruded members to be free from extrusion marks. Square turns and

corners sharp, curves true.
H. Drill holes for bolts and screws. Conceal fastenings where possible.
Exposed ends and edges mill smooth, with corners slightly rounded.
Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water.
I. Finish hollow signs with matching material on all faces, tops, bottoms
Fahd Road
and ends. Edge joints tightly mitered to give appearance of solid
material.
J. All painted surfaces properly primed. Finish coating of paint to have

complete coverage with no light or thin applications allowing substrate
or primer to show. Finished surface smooth, free of scratches, gouges,
drips, bubbles, thickness variations, foreign matter and other
imperfections.
K. Movable parts, including hardware, are be cleaned and adjusted to

operate as designed without binding of deformation of members. Doors
and covers centered in opening or frame. All contact surfaces fit tight
and even without forcing or warping components.
L. Pre-assemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize
field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for
shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for re-assembly
and coordinated installation.
M. No signs are be manufactured until final sign message schedule &

location review has been completed by the Engineer and forwarded to
Contractor.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Protect products against damage during field handling and installation.

Protect adjacent existing and newly placed construction, landscaping
and finishes as necessary to prevent damage during installation. Paint
and touch up any exposed fasteners and connecting hardware to
match color and finish of surrounding surface.
B. Mount signs in proper alignment, level and plumb according to the sign
location plan and the dimensions given on elevation and sign location
drawings. Where otherwise not dimensioned, signs shall be installed
where best suited to provide a consistent appearance throughout the
project. When exact position, angle, height or location is in doubt,
contact the Engineer for clarification.
C. Contractor shall own and be responsible for all signs that are damaged,
lost or stolen while materials are on the job site and up until the completion
and final acceptance of the job.
D. Remove or correct signs or installation work the Engineer determines

as unsafe or as an unsafe condition.
E. At completion of sign installation, clean exposed sign surfaces. Clean

and repair any adjoining surfaces and landscaping that became soiled
or damaged as a result of installation of signs.
F. Locate signs as shown on the Sign Location Plans.

Fahd Road
G. Certain signs may be installed on glass. A blank glass back up is
required to be placed on opposite side of glass exactly behind sign
being installed. This blank glass back up is to be the same size as sign
being installed.
H. Contractor will be responsible for verifying that behind each sign

location there are no utility lines that will be effected by installation of
signs. Any damage during installation of signs to utilities will be the sole
responsibility of the Contractor to correct and repair.
I. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete or
other material for installation of signs. Provide setting drawings, templates,
instructions and directions for installation of anchorage devices which
may involve other trades.
J. At completion of installation turn over to the Employer additional stock

of signs and sign components listed in Sign Message Schedule:
Individually box or crate by Sign Type or Part Number and labeled
accordingly.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 10446
INTERIOR CLINIC SIGNS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide interior hospital signage for room numbers, directional signs,

and directories, code required signs, telephone identification signs and
temporary interior signs as directed by the Engineer.
B. The Engineer will select interior signs from the manufacturer’s

submitted samples.
C. Exterior signs shall be as specified in Section 10436, Exterior Hospital

Signs.
1.2 MANUFACTURER'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. Sign manufacturer shall provide evidence that they regularly and

presently manufacture signs similar to those specified in this section as
one of their principal products.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Sign panels and frames, with letters and symbols, each type.
B. Manufacturer's Literature: Submit information showing the methods

and procedures proposed for the concealed anchorage of the signage
system to each surface type.
C. Submit sign location plan, showing location, type and total number of
signs required.
1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver materials to job in manufacturer's original sealed containers

with brand name marked thereon. Protect materials from damage.
1.5 SIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Room Signage, Overhead signage, Directional signage:
1. All the characters will be tactile letters and will hold the following
ADA requirement:
III-2/10446/ Interior Hospital Signs
Fahd Road
a. All letters and numbers must be raised 1/32”. Engraved
and vinyl lettering are no longer acceptable for
compliance purposes.
b. Letters must be uppercase only.
c. Signs must include Grade 2 Braille messages in addition
to tactile visual messages. (Pictograms)
d. The minimum copy height for wall mounted signs will be
5/8” and no higher than 2”.
e. Typefaces will be “sans serif or simple serif”. This would
be typestyles such as Helvetica Medium and Optima.
f. The width-to-height ratio for letters and numbers will be
between 3:55 and 1:1. Stroke widthto-height ratio will be
between 1:55 and 1:10.
g. Mounting shall be 60” above the finished floor to the
centerline of the sign on the latch side of the door.
Changes can be made to this directive as per the site
requirements.
h. The color of characters and symbols shall contrast with
their backgrounds, either light characters on a dark
background or dark characters on a light background.
(70% minimum contrast).
i. The border dimension of the pictogram shall be 6”
minimum in height.
j. Overhead or projected signage shall have 80" minimum
clear headroom and the character height must be a minimum
of 3". Changes can be made to this directive as per the site
requirements.
k. Amendments can be made to the above mentioned
directives as per the site requirements.
1) Finish and Contrast: Characters and background
shall be eggshell, matte or other non-glare finish
with adequate contrast with background.
2) Materials: The materials for the sign types will be
as shown in the design intent.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

1.7 MOCK-UP
A. Prepare a mockup for each type of sign of this section as instructed by

the Engineer for his approval. Approved mockups subject to
acceptance by the Engineer may be incorporated in the final works.
Fahd Road
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Furnish a warranty against defects in materials or workmanship for five

years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide one (1) sign of each type for every 25pieces or less in packed
and sealed cartons.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 INTERIOR HOSPITAL SIGNS
A. (NOT USED)
B. Signs of type size and design shown on the drawings and as selected
by the Engineer.
C. Signs complete with lettering, framing and related components for a

complete installation.
D. Aluminum:
E. Provide aluminum sheet of alloy and temper recommended by the sign

manufacturer for the type of use and finish indicated, and with not less
than the strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B902 for
5005-H15.
F. Stainless Steel:
G. Provide stainless steel plate, sheet, or strip complying with requirements

of ASTM A666 .The material will be Grade 304 - # 8
Finish.
H. Vinyl: 0.1 mm thick machine cut, having pressure sensitive adhesive

and integral colors.
I. Anchors and Inserts:
J. Nonferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for

Exterior Installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion
resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-
in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or
masonry work. Use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that
are not corrosive to the sign material and mounting surface.
K. Concrete for Footings:
L. Refer to section 03300.

Fahd Road
M. Design Intent Specifications: Also shown in the design book provided
by the Engineer, which area as follows:
1. Text Panels: 3mm thick aluminium panels painted

to silver/dark grey colour.
2. Letters/Pictograms: 1/32” raised letters/characters and
fixed to the text panel in accordance
with ADA standards. The hot
stamped raised letters shall be black
in colour.
3. Decorative Panel: 3mm thick stainless steel panel - # 8
Finish with silk screen printed
pattern. This unique pattern shall
blend the entire exterior and interior
signage as a family.
4. Accent Panel: 3mm thick aluminium panels painted

to colour of the zone.
5. Arrows: 2mm thick cut out stainless steel – #8
finish and applied to the text panels.
6. Map: Silk screen printed map – black
Colour.
7. Grid: 1.2mm thick steel perforated steel

panel.
8. Changeable panels: Extruded aluminium profile with a
polycarbonate front for paper insert.
9. Fasteners: Injection Moulded Polyamide
members.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Design components to allow for expansion and contraction for a

minimum material temperature range of 56 degrees C, without causing
buckling, excessive opening of joints or over stressing of adhesives, welds
and fasteners.
B. Form work to required shapes and sizes, with true curve lines and
angles. Provide necessary rebates, lugs and brackets for assembly of
units. Use concealed fasteners whenever and wherever possible.
C. Shop fabricate so far as practicable. Joints fastened flush to conceal

reinforcement, or welded where thickness or section permits.
D. Contact surfaces of connected members are true. Assembled so joints

will be tight and practically unnoticeable, without use of filling
Fahd Road
compound.
E. Signs shall have fine, even texture and be flat and sound. Lines and
miters sharp, arises unbroken, profiles accurate and ornament true to
pattern. Plane surfaces shall be smooth flat and without oil-canning,
free of rack and twist. Maximum variation from plane of surface plus or
minus 0.3 mm. Restore texture to filed or cut areas.
F. Level or straighten wrought work. Members shall have sharp lines and
angles and smooth surfaces.
G. Extruded members to be free from extrusion marks. Square turns and

corners sharp, curves true.
H. Drill holes for bolts and screws. Conceal fastenings where possible.
Exposed ends and edges mill smooth, with corners slightly rounded.
Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water.
I. Finish hollow signs with matching material on all faces, tops, bottoms
and ends. Edge joints tightly mitered to give appearance of solid
material.
J. All painted surfaces properly primed. Finish coating of paint to have

complete coverage with no light or thin applications allowing substrate
or primer to show. Finished surface smooth, free of scratches, gouges,
drips, bubbles, thickness variations, foreign matter and other
imperfections.
K. Movable parts, including hardware, are be cleaned and adjusted to

operate as designed without binding of deformation of members. Doors
and covers centered in opening or frame. All contact surfaces fit tight
and even without forcing or warping components.
L. Pre-assemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize

field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for
shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for re-assembly
and coordinated installation.
M. No signs shall be manufactured until final sign message schedule and

location review have been completed by the Engineer and forwarded to
Contractor.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Protect products against damage during field handling and installation.

Protect adjacent existing and newly placed construction, landscaping
and finishes as necessary to prevent damage during installation. Paint
and touch up any exposed fasteners and connecting hardware to
match color and finish of surrounding surface.
Fahd Road
B. Mount signs in proper alignment, level and plumb according to the sign
location plan and the dimensions given on elevation and sign location
drawings. Where otherwise not dimensioned, signs shall be installed
where best suited to provide a consistent appearance throughout the
project. When exact position, angle, height or location is in doubt,
contact the Engineer for clarification.
C. Contractor shall be responsible for all signs that are damaged, lost or
stolen while materials are on the job site and up until the completion
and final acceptance of the job.
D. Remove or correct signs or installation work the Engineer determines

as unsafe or as an unsafe condition.
E. At completion of sign installation, clean exposed sign surfaces. Clean
and repair any adjoining surfaces and landscaping that became soiled
or damaged as a result of installation of signs.
F. Locate signs as shown on the Sign Location Plans.
G. Certain signs may be installed on glass. A blank glass back up is

required to be placed on opposite side of glass exactly behind sign
being installed. This blank glass back up is to be the same size as sign
being installed.
H. Contractor will be responsible for verifying that behind each sign

location there are no utility lines that will be affected by installation of
signs. Any damage during installation of signs to utilities will be the sole
responsibility of the Contractor to correct and repair.
I. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete or

other material for installation of signs. Provide setting drawings, templates,
instructions and directions for installation of anchorage devices which
may involve other trades.
A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the

manufacturer's instructions. Protect units from damage until
acceptance by the Engineer/Employer.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 10615
DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Partition panels
B. Framing system
C. Acoustic Insulation
D. Doors, Frames and Glazing
E. Door Hardware
F. Base Trim, as directed
G. Bulkhead for Plenum Closure

of Works intended.

2. Section 09510 : Acoustic Ceiling
1.3 REFERENCES

1. ASTM E72 - Standard Test Methods of Conducting

Strength Tests of panels for Building
III-2/10615/ Demountable Partitions
Fahd Road
construction.
2. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for surface Burning
Characteristics of building materials.
Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission
Loss of Building partitions and elements.
4. ASTM C919 - Standard practice for use of sealants in
5. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Test of
6. ASTM E336 - Standard Test method for measurements of
Airborne Sound insulation in Buildings.
7. ASTM E413 - Standard Classification for Determination of
sound Transmission Class.
8. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling
Products.
9. BS 476-2 - Fire Tests on Building Materials and
Structures.
10. BS 2750-3 - Acoustic Measurement of Sound Insulation in
Buildings and of Building Elements.
11. BS 5234-2 - Partitions (including matching lines)
Specification for performance requirements
for strength and robustness including
methods of test.
12. BS 6262 - Glazing for buildings. General methodology
for selection of glazing.
13. BS 8000-7 - Workmanship on Building Sites. Code of
Practice for Glazing.
14. BS 8000-8 - Workmanship on Building Sites. Code of
Practice for Plasterboard Partitions and Dry
Linings.
15. BIFMA X 5.6 - Panel Systems
16. UL 1286 - Office Furnishings

Jurisdiction.
requested.
A. Module: Demountable, non-progressive, capable of four directions

Fahd Road
lateral expansion with reusable components.
B. Panelled Wood and/or glazed, dry jointed frameless partition as shown

on drawings with base and head tracks all as specified.
C. Bulkhead for plenum closure as required for effective and optimum

sound control.
D. Joint: Concealed type.
E. Utility Raceways: As required.
A. Shop Drawings indicating plans and elevations of partitions, track

layouts, details of track and required supports, static and dynamic,
loads, location and details of pass door and frame, adjacent
construction and finish trim, finish of miscellaneous components and
accessories and type of partition finish and stacking sizes. Drawings
shall include dimensions verifying conformance to life safety code and
electrical switch, outlet, infeed and jumper placements.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s product and installation specifications

which provide technical data for panel system and components.
Literature shall include adequate information to verify that the proposed
product meets the specification. Product data shall include data on
partition operation, hardware and accessories, electrical operating
components, finishes and colours available.
C. Samples: Two, 1000x1000 mm, demountable partitions with surface

finish, showing quality, colours selected, texture.
1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
A. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Show special procedures,

perimeter conditions requiring special attention, installation sequence
and other relevant data.
B. Manufacturer’s Certification that system meets or exceeds

Specification.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate as required with contractors of all related trades and

particularly with Acoustic ceiling contractor for effective sound control
of cubicles.
1.8 MOCKUP
A. After the approval of samples, prior to installation of panels, a mockup

shall be provided for a full length partition of atleast 10m2 for each type
and colour which shall include a door all as instructed and approved by
the Engineer. Once approved, the mockup shall be used as a standard
Fahd Road
of workmanship for the rest of the partitions. Approved mockups may
become part of the completed work if accepted by the Engineer.
A. Fire Resistance Rating and Burning Characteristics.
Fire-resistance rating for demountable partitions shall be in

conformance with ASTM E119 or equivalent. Partition system shall
have a Class A (under 25) Flame Spread Rating in conformance with
ASTM E84 or equivalent.
B. Acoustical Performance
Sound-rated partition assemblies shall have a minimum Sound

Transmission Coefficient (STC) of 42. STC range shall be determined
in accordance with Sound Transmission Test by Two-Room Method
and reported in accordance with ASTM E90 or ASTM E413 or
equivalent for frequency data. Tested assembly shall have been
assembled in the same manner that the demountable partitions will be
installed on the project.
C. Structural Performance
Transverse Load Capacity: Demountable partitions shall be able to sustain

a 1200Pa 5 psf minimum transverse loading with panel deflection
no greater than 1/120th of the vertical span when tested in accordance with
ASTM E72 or equivalent.
D. Electrical and Communication Capability: Electrical components,

devices and accessories shall meet requirements of UL 1286 and NF
PA 70.
1.10 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer shall specialize in designing and manufacturing the type

of demountable partition specified in this section, and shall have a
minimum of ten (10) years of documented successful experience.
Manufacturer shall have the facilities capable of meeting contract
requirements, single-source responsibilities, and warranty. Partition
installer shall have a minimum of five (5) years of documented
successful experience in the installation of demountable partitions
similar to the requirements of this section.
B. Company specializing in manufacturing materials and products for
healthcare industry and for projects of similar size and complexity with
a minimum of ten years of documented experience.

Fahd Road
A. Materials shall be delivered to project site in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions in original unopened and damaged
packages and stored in a clean, dry, and secure place free from
damage during construction activities. Packages shall contain labels which
indicate manufacturer's name, brand name, size, finish and, placement
location.
1.13 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Before fabrication of demountable partitions, field dimensions shall be

verified and recorded on shop drawings. Fabrication schedule shall be
coordinated with construction schedule and progress to avoid delay in
the work. Temperature and humidity conditions within the area to
receive partitions shall be maintained as close as possible to the final
occupancy standards. Installation shall not begin until the building
envelope provides complete protection from the weather.
1.14 MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Recommended maintenance methods, cleaning materials and stain

removal methods.
B. Describe cleaning materials detrimental to surfaces and hardware

finish.
1.15 WARRANTY
A. Provide a warranty of 5 years for the material, installation and

performance of the partition assembly from the date of substantial
completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
(NOT USED)
2.2 PARTITION TYPES
A. The partition system shall consist of a series of individual, self-

supported, floor-to ceiling factory constructed/pre-fabricated panels.
The structure shall consist of top and base channel, posts, base and
top crosspiece with floor levelers. Top channel shall hold panels in
place and shall accommodate a floor-to-ceiling variation. The partition
system shall be complete with accessories to meet performance
requirements. PVC gaskets shall be provided in horizontal and vertical
Fahd Road
direction to improve acoustic performance. Partition system shall
provide accommodations for electrical switches and outlets at multiple
heights in the panel. Panels shall include light switches, receptacles,
and double gang outlet boxes for data/voice jacks at mounting heights
and locations if indicated on the electrical drawings. Building electrical
power shall be as specified and shown on other contract documents.
2.3 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. Panels
Panels shall be of veneered or laminated MDF (18mm thick), double

glazed in combinations as shown on drawing. Glazing shall be 6mm
tempered glass for each pane. Panels shall be complete with tongue-
and-groove/panel clips/panel connectors at joints to align panels.
Panels shall be complete with concealed slots for hang-on brackets
and accessories. Maximum total load for bracket supports on one or
both wall surfaces shall not exceed 5500 N 1240 lb. Panels shall be
manufacturer's standard construction with fillers and bracing as
required.
B. Framing System
Framing system shall consist of stainless steel or extruded high

performance powder coating as per AAMA 2604 aluminum which
includes ceiling runners, floor track, studs or posts, bracing, and suitable
treated fasteners to prevent corrosion. Post covers shall be provided
where required. When assembled, framing system with panels shall
form a rigid, stable partition.
C. Doors and Frames
Demountable partitions shall be complete with doors and frames as shown

which are fully contained with the panels. Door frames shall provide a
compatible appearance with other trim components and shall allow for
variations in floor level. Fire-Protection rating of rated door assemblies
shall be as required by KFD along with the partition system.
D. Door Hardware
Hardware for doors shall be in accordance with Section for DOOR

HARDWARE. Hardware cutouts and reinforcement shall be provided
as required in doors and frames for hardware furnished.
E. Base Trim
Base trim shall be nominal 100mm 4 inch high without exposed

fasteners. Base shall be recessed/projected/flush as selected and
F. Silkscreen
Fahd Road
Integrated silkscreen printing on the glazed partition as per special design pattern
requirements.
2.4 PLENUM CLOSURE
A. Gypsum board, bulkhead with batt insulation (Refer Section 07213)

and joint sealers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Locations scheduled to receive demountable partitions shall be

inspected for compliance with manufacturer's requirements. Floor and
ceiling dimensions shall be verified in accordance with approved shop
drawings prior to starting the work. Floor under partitions shall be level
to within 3mm in 3m, non-accumulative. Conditions which may
adversely affect the partition installation shall be corrected before installing
partitions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Demountable partitions shall be installed in accordance with approved

shop drawings and manufacturer's published instructions. The system
shall be assembled and erected with the least possible drilling and
cutting of existing construction and shall be capable of disassembly by
means of ordinary tools. The partition installation shall be complete
with accessories to meet specified requirements. Installation shall
include concealed fastening devices and pressure fit components that
will not mar the floor, wall and ceiling surfaces and shall be free of exposed
screws, nuts, rivets and bolts. Panels shall be installed in a rigid
manner, straight and plumb with horizontal lines level. Seals shall be
installed to prevent light and sound transmission at connections to
ceilings, floors fixed walls and abutting surfaces.
B. Doors:
Doors shall be hung to swing or slide freely and hardware shall be carefully
fitted. Glass for glazed openings shall be installed on shims in a vinyl or
polyurethane foam gasket. Glass stops shall be installed without
exposed fastenings.
C. Wall Base:
Wall base shall be installed in the longest lengths possible. Joints shall
be fitted tight. Internal corners shall be mitered. Base shall be scribed
to fit to door fames and other obstructions. Base shall tightly adhere to
wall surfaces.

Fahd Road
D. Plenum Closure:
Plenum closure as required with gypsum board, batt insulation, joint

sealers, etc for effective sound insulation of bulkhead. Plenum closure
shall not hinder in the passage of return air. Provide additional ducts as
required within the contract price to ensure unhindered passage of
return air. Line such ducts with acoustic damping material as required.
3.3 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Damaged partition finish and components and damaged floor and

ceiling finishes shall be repaired to the original conditions or replace.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of installation, partition components and finishes shall

be cleaned in accordance with partition manufacturer's
recommendations. Alkaline or abrasive agents shall not be used.
Precautions to avoid scratching or marring partition finish surfaces shall
be exercised.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Demountable partitions shall be protected from damage through the

duration of construction activities.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 10800
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL

A. This section includes toilet and bath accessories. This section includes
all necessary fixings, anchors, adhesives and related accessories.
B. Contractor shall provide all accessories listed here in each category of

toilets, etc.

of work intended.

1.3 REFERENCES

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A167-99 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-

Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.
2. A176-99 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium
Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.
III-2/10800/ Toilet and Bath Accessories
Fahd Road
3. A269-02 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic
Stainless Steel Tubing for General
Service.
4. A312-A312M-02 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic
Stainless Steel Pipes.
5. A653/A653M-02 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
6. B221-02 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded
Bars, Roads, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes.
7. B456-95 - Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper
Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel
Plus Chromium.
8. C1036-01 - Flat Glass
9. C1048-97 - Heat-Treated Flat Glass-Kind HS, Kind
FT Coated and Uncoated Glass.
10. D635-98 - Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time
of Burning of Self Supporting Plastics in
a Horizontal Position.
11. E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface
Materials.
12. F446-85(R1999) - Consumer Safety Specification for Grab
Bars and Accessories Installed in the
Bathing Area.
C. The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers

(NAMM):
1. AMP 500 Series - Metal Finishes Manual.
D. American Welding Society (AWS):
1. D10.4-86(R2000) - Welding Austenitic Chromium-Nickel

Stainless Steel Piping and Tubing.
E. Federal Specifications (Fed. Specs.):
1. A-A-3002 - Mirrors, Glass

2. FF-S-107C(2) - Screw, Tapping and Drive

Jurisdiction.
requested.
Fahd Road
1.4 SUBMITTAL
A. Submit in accordance with Division 1 – General Requirements,

Samples and Shop Drawings.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Showing the layout of all toilet accessories for approval.
C. Samples:
1. One of each type of accessory specified.

2. After approval, samples may be used in the work as agreed and
directed by the Engineer.
D. Manufacturer’s Literature and Data:
1. All accessories specified.

2. Show type of material, gages or metal thickness in inches,
finishes, and when required, capacity of accessories.
3. Show working operations of spindle for toilet tissue dispensers.
4. Submit manufacturers recommended method of installation.
5. Submit descriptive data on fasteners proposed for each type of
wall construction, recommended mounting locations and
mounting instructions.
E. Manufacturer’s Certificates:
1. Attesting that soap dispensers are fabricated of material that will

not be affected by liquid soap or aseptic detergents, phisohex
and solutions containing hexachlorophene.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Each product shall meet, as a minimum, the requirements specified,

and shall be a standard commercial product of a manufacturer
regularly presently manufacturing items of type specified.
B. Each accessory type shall be the same and be made by the same
manufacturer.
C. Each accessory shall be assembled to the greatest extent possible
before delivery to the site.
D. Include additional features, which are not specifically prohibited by this

specification, but which are a part of the manufacturer's standard
Fahd Road
commercial product.
E. Comply with Class 1 requirements of ASTM E 84

1.7 PACKAGING AND DELIVERY
A. Pack accessories individually to protect finish.
B. Deliver accessories to the project only when installation work in rooms

is ready to receive them.
C. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site at appropriate time for

building-in.
1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENT
A. Conform to the Ministry of Energy, Electricity & Water Code for Utility
requirements and codes of other Authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Products requiring electrical connection – listed and classified by

testing firm, acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction as suitable
for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.9 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent or adjoining finished surfaces and work from damage

during installation of work in this Section.
1.10 MOCK UP
A. Install each item of this section as mockup, complete in all respects for
the approval of the Engineer. Approved mockup may become part of
final works subject to acceptance by the Engineer.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Provide five years warranty for any defects in the fabrication or

manufacture of the products of this section and their installation.
A. Supply 1 number piece of each type of toilet accessory (for every 50 or

less pieces) in manufacturer packed container.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS
(NOT USED)
2.2 MATERIALS

Fahd Road
A. Aluminum: ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5 and alloy 6463-T5.
B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, Type 302, 304, or 304L, and ASTM A176,
Type 430, 0.0299-inch thick unless otherwise specified.
C. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, Grade 304 or 304L, seamless or
welded.
D. Stainless Steel Pipe: ASTM A312; Grade TP 304 or TP 304L.
E. Steel Sheet: ASTM A653, zinc-coated (galvanized) coating designation
G90.
F. Glass.
1. ASTM C1036, Type 1, Class 1, Quality q2, for mirrors.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. Anchors and fasteners shall be capable of retaining the accessory to

be mounted and suitable for the supporting construction.
B. All Anchors and fasteners shall be rust corrosion resistant.
C. Exposed Fasteners: Stainless steel or chromium plated brass, finish to
match accessory and adjacent surface.
D. Concealed Fasteners: Steel, hot-dip galvanized (except in high
moisture areas such as showers or bath tubs use stainless steel).
E. Toggle Bolts: For use in hollow masonry or frame construction.
F. Hex bolts: For through bolting on thin panels.
G. Expansion Shields: Lead or plastic as recommended by accessory
manufacturer for component and substrate for use in solid masonry or
concrete.
2.4 FINISH
A. In accordance with NAAMM AMP 500 series and as approved by the

Engineer.
B. Anodized Aluminum:
1. AA-C22A4: Chemically etched medium matte, with clear anodic

coating, Class I Architectural, 0.7-mil thick.
2. AA-C22A44: Chemically etched medium matte with
electrolytically deposited metallic compound, integrally colored
coating Class I Architectural, 0.7-mil thick finish. Dyes will not be
accepted.
C. AA-M32: Mechanical finish, medium satin.
1. Chromium Plating: ASTM B456, satin.

2. Stainless Steel: NAAMM AMP 503, finish number 4.
3. Ferrous Metal:
a. Shop Prime: Clean, pretreat and apply one coat of primer
Fahd Road
and bake.
b. Finish: Over primer apply two coats of alkyd or phenolic
resin enamel, and bake.
4. Nylon Coated Steel: Nylon coating powder formulated for a
fluidized bonding process to steel to provide a hard smooth,
medium gloss finish, not less than 0.3 mm (0.012-inch) thick,
rated as self-extinguishing when tested in accordance with
ASTM D635.
2.5 FABRICATION – GENERAL
A. Welding, AWS D10.4.
B. Grind dress, and finish welded joints to match finish of adjacent

surface.
C. Form exposed surfaces from one sheet of stock, free of joints.
D. Provide steel anchors and components required for secure installation.
E. Form flat surfaces without distortion. Keep exposed surfaces free from
scratches and dents. Reinforce doors to prevent warp or twist.
F. Isolate dissimilar metals from one another and from contact with
building materials as required to prevent electrolysis and corrosion.
G. Hot-dip galvanized steel, except stainless steel, anchors and fastening

devices.
H. Shop assemble accessories and package with all components,

anchors, fittings, fasteners and keys.
I. Key items alike.
J. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Commencement of installation of items of this Section of work will

signify acceptance of conditions prepared by work of other Sections, to
ensure a complete, rigid and adequate installation. Report any
inadequate conditions to the Engineer.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to jobsite at appropriate time for

building-in. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as require.
B. Before starting work, notify Engineer in writing of any conflicts

Fahd Road
detrimental to installation or operation of units.
C. Verify with Engineer exact location of accessories.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES
A. Install accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's printed

instructions and ASTM F446.
B. Install accessories plumb and level and securely anchor to substrate.
C. Install accessories in a manner that will permit the accessory to

function as designed and allow for servicing as required without hampering
or hindering the performance of other devices.
D. Position and install dispensers, and other devices in countertops, clear
of drawers, permitting ample clearance below countertop between
devices, and ready access for maintenance as needed.
E. Align mirrors, dispensers and other accessories even and level, when
installed in battery.
F. Install accessories to prevent striking by other moving, items or

interference with accessibility.
G. Install and secure all fixtures rigidly in place using the following
methods as applicable:
1. For stud walls, install steel back plate (where recommended by

manufacturer for specific items) to stud prior to plaster or drywall
finish. Plate to have threaded studs or plugs provided.
2. In solid masonry or concrete, use bolt with lead expansion

sleeve set into drilled hole.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 12350
KITCHEN CASEWORK
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

pertains to the fabricating, furnishing and installing of stainless steel
kitchen wall and base units.

of work intended.
1.3 REFERENCES

1. ASTM A167 - Specification for stainless steel and heat

resisting chromium - Nickel steel plate, sheet
and strip
2. ASTM A568 - Specification for steel, sheet, carbon and high
strength, low alloy, hot rolled and cold rolled.
3. ASTM A269 - Specification for seamless and welded
austenitic stainless steel tubing for general
services.
4. ASTM A666 - Specification for austenitic stainless steel
sheet, strip, plate and flat bar.
III-2/12350/ Kitchen Casework

Fahd Road
Jurisdiction.
required.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. The following submittals, as defined in Section for Submittal are required:
1. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings with detailed layout

plans, elevations. Indicate inter faces with services.
2. Product Data: Submit data for sheets and welding.
3. Samples: Submit metal chips with actual finish.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

1.6 MOCK-UP
A. Provide mock-ups of 3m length for each type as directed by Engineer’s

Representative. Approved mock-up may become part of final work
subject to acceptance by the Engineer

1.8 QUALITY CONTROL
A. The manufacturer proposed should have been successfully

manufacturing the shelving for the last five years.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Furnish five (5) years warranty from the date of substantial

completion. Warranty shall apply to defects in product, workmanship
and materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS

Fahd Road
A. 1mm thick stainless steel (type 316L) base unit with full work-top, with
sink, divider shelves, back panel, shutters, with all fixing accessories
including hardware all complete all as shown on the drawing.
B. 1mm thick stainless steel (type 316L) wall hung unit with divided shelves,
back panel, shutters with all fixing accessories including hardware all
complete all as shown on the drawing.
C. Backsplash: 30mm thick and minimum 150mm high granite with half bull
nose edge unless noted otherwise on the drawing.
D. Hardware
1. Hinges: All metal with integrated self closing function in the final
closing action. Concealed installation and finish to match units, all
as approved.
2. Shelf support: All metal, adjustable type and designed to lock shelf
into position; finish to match unit, all as approved.
3. Knobs/Handle: Metal construction, finish to match unit all as
approved.
E. Accessory Items
1. Filler Panels: Matching construction of units.

2. Anchors, supports, stiffeners, etc., as required to provide a rigid
installation.
3. Sealant: As specified in Section “SEALANT”.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate all units to precise sizes and dimensions established

by actual site measurements. All component parts shall be assembled in
jigs for accurate alignment. Finish all edges with smooth uniform rounded
corners with no sharp edges. Avoid joints in sheet lamination on surfaces
exposed to view.
B. Cabinet Base Units
1. Fabricate all units in proper modular form. Provide worktops in

one piece or in as long pieces as practicable with minimum joints.
Neatly and accurately form recesses and cutouts in worktops to
receive items to be inset. Fabricate corner units to shapes shown.
2. Provide necessary cutouts in back panels of sink units for service
connections.
C. Cabinet Wall Units: Fabricate units in modular form as approved.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION
Fahd Road
A. Stainless steel shelving shall be erected plumb and level.
B. Anchoring: Stainless Steel shelving shall be anchored to floor and

walls:
1. Floor: Free standing shall be anchored to floor at each exposed

end and at intermediate uprights.
2. Walls: Anchor shelving to walls through rear shelf flange at each
end and alternate sections, at top shelf, and at second shelf
from bottom. Omit floor anchoring.
3. Fasteners: For concrete, 8mm diameter, 38mm minimum
penetration, self-drilling concrete anchors for floor, dryvits for
walls.
3.2 CLEANING AND COMPLETION
A. Clean up and remove debris and waste resulting from Work of this
Section. Securely tighten fasteners.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 12482
ENTRANCE MATS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following types of entrance flooring systems:
1. Floor Grids & Frame Assemblies.

comprehensive or complete and it is the Contractor's responsibility to
of Works intended.

2. Section 09632 : Stone (Interior)
1.3 REFERENCES


2. The Aluminum Association
3. The Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI)
4. The National Floor Safety Institute (NFSI)

Jurisdiction.
RADCARE - B01- King III-2/12482/ Entrance Mats
Fahd Road 258
requested.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance Division 1: General

Requirements.
B. Product data for each type of floor grid and frame specified, including
manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions.
C. Shop drawings in sufficient detail showing layout of grid and frame

specified including details indicating construction relative to materials,
direction of traffic, spline locations, profiles, anchors and accessories.
D. Samples for verification purposes: Submit an assembled section of

floor grid and frame members with selected tread insert showing each
type of color for exposed floor grid, frame and accessories required.
E. Maintenance data in the form of manufacturer's printed instructions for

cleaning and maintaining floor grids.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Flammability in accordance with ASTM E648, Class 1, Critical Radiant

Flux, minimum 0.45 watts/m2.
B. Slip resistance in accordance with ASTM D-2047-96, Coefficient of

Friction, minimum 0.60 when tested in wet conditions for accessible
routes.
C. Standard rolling load performance: 400 lb./wheel.
D. Single Source Responsibility: Floor grids and frames shall be obtained

from one source of a single manufacturer.
E. Structural aluminum alloys 6105-T5 & 6016-T6 for rail components.
F. Comply with Class 1 requirements of ASTM E 84

A. Deliver materials to the project site ready for use and fabricated in as
large sections and assemblies as practical, in unopened original factory
packaging clearly labeled to identify manufacturer.

Fahd Road 259
A. Field measurements: Check actual openings for grids by accurate field

measurements before fabrication. Record actual measurements on
final shop drawings for approval. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delay of work.
B. Coordinate frame installation with concrete construction to ensure

recess and frame anchorage are accurate and that the base is level
and flat. Defer frame installation until building enclosure is complete
and related interior finish work is in progress.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with all Contractors related to this work and avoid any
conflict.
1.10 MOCK UP
A. Erect a mockup of under one door, all complete, as instructed by the

Engineer for his approval. Approved mockup if acceptable to the
Engineer may become part of final work.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Provide a warranty of five (5) years against any defects for this
products of this section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
(NOT USED)
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum - ASTM B 221, alloy 6105-T5 for rail extrusions and 6061-T6
for key lock bars.
B. Tread insert – refer clause for Tread Inserts below.
2.3 FLOOR GRIDS
A. Shall be extruded 6105-T5 aluminum alloy tread rails joined

mechanically by extruded 6106-T6 aluminum alloy key lock bars.
(welding or bolting shall not be permitted.) Rail finish shall be of
finish/colour as selected and approved by the Engineer.
2.4 GRID FRAMES
A. Level Base Frame shall be 6063-T5 aluminum alloy with 1/2"(12.7mm)

exposed surface and a depth of 1-13/16" (46.0mm). These assemblies
Fahd Road 260
receive 1/4"(6.4mm) thick heavy gauge support cushions 1" (25.4mm)
long mounted to each continuous foot at 20" (0.51m) on center. Frame
finish/colour shall be as selected and approved by the Engineer.
2.5 TREAD INSERT
A. Carpet shall meet the Carpet and Rug Institute’s standard for indoor air
quality. Fibers shall include a minimum of 100, 12 mil monofilament
fibers per square inch and colorfast, solution-dyed nylon. Each carpet
fiber and monofilament shall be fusion-bonded to a rigid two-ply
backing to prevent fraying and supplied in continuous splice-free
lengths. Anti-static carpet fiber shall contain antimicrobial additive and
be treated to reduce soiling. Carpet weight shall be 33-oz./yd².
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

timely completion.
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Manufacturer shall offer assistance and guidance to provide a template

of irregular shaped grid assemblies to ensure a proper installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION

B. Set grid at height recommended by manufacturer for most effective

cleaning action.
C. Coordinate top of grid surfaces with bottom of doors that swing across
to provide ample clearance between door and grid.
3.4 CLEANING
A. It is important to the life cycle of the entrance mat that a maintenance

schedule be developed which includes regular vacuuming and
extraction that correctly matches the amount of traffic the mat incurs.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. After completing required frame installation and concrete work, provide

temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in recess, and cover frames
with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction
Fahd Road 261
traffic has ended and project is near time of substantial completion.
B. Defer installation of floor grids until time of substantial completion of

project.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road 262
SECTION 12492
HORIZONTAL BLINDS
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Work of this Section consists of furnishing all labour, materials,

equipment and services necessary furnish and install
1. Manually operated Aluminium horizontal blinds as specified and

as shown on drawings.
2. Manually operated Aluminum horizontal blinds inside the glass
panels of Demountable partitions.
3. Electrically operated Aluminium horizontal blinds with manual
override in the Vision panels of exterior glazing.

of works intended.
1.3 REFERENCES

1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 701 –

Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of
Textiles and Films.

III-2/12492/ Horizontal Blinds

Fahd Road
Jurisdiction.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal under provisions of Division 1 – General Requirements.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used,

including:
1. Description of materials, finishes, and construction.

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
4. Cleaning and maintenance methods.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each blind type to be used,
showing anchorage methods and attachment devices.
D. Selection Samples: For each blind specified, submit one complete

blind with required components, mounting and associated hardware,
operating instructions, and warranty.
E. Verification Samples: For each blind specified, two slats, representing

actual product and color.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

1.6 MOCK-UP
A. Provide mock-ups of for each type of unit as directed by Engineer’s

Representative. Approved mock-up may become part of final work
subject to acceptance by the Engineer
A. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall provide documentation of prior

experience in the installation of blinds, demonstrated performance, and
acceptance of requirements of manufacturer, subsidiary, or licensed
agent.


Fahd Road
A. Store blinds in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.
B. Store blinds in manufacturer's unopened packaging with labels intact

until ready for installation.
C. Schedule delivery of blinds so that spaces are sufficiently complete that

blinds can be installed immediately upon delivery.
A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain environmental conditions

(temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by
manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
B. Existing Conditions: Field measure to verify dimensions before

fabrication.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranty for 10 years against material, manufacturing defects.
B. Provide warranty for 5 years against defects emerging in operation

and/or installation from the date of substantial completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
(NOT USED)
2.2 HORIZONTAL BLINDS
A. Mini Blind: Aluminum louvers, with a passing flame-resistance rating

when tested in compliance with NFPA 701; Hunter Douglas CD80 1-
Inch Mini Aluminum Blind.
B. Slats: 1 inch (25 mm) wide, 0.008 inch (0.20 mm) thick prior to painting.
Aluminum alloy 6011, heat-treated and spring tempered with eased
corners and manufacturing burrs removed. Not less than nominal 15.2
slats per foot (304 mm) nominal to ensure tight closure and light
control. Fabricate slat length to not less than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) of
dimension recommended in writing by manufacturer.
a. Slat Support: Braided ladders of polyester yarn color compatible

with slats; spacing of ladder no more than 20 mm (0.79 inch).
b. Slat Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-on finish with Dust
Shield™ and colour as selected and approved by the Engineer.
C. Headrail: Corrosion resistant steel, 1-3/8 inches (35 mm) by 1-3/8

inches (35 mm), 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) thick with U-shaped profile with
rolled edges. Smooth, quiet, operation. Ends fitted with 0.024 inch
(0.61 mm) steel end lock with adjustable tab for centering blinds;
Fahd Road
manufacturer's standard baked-on polyester finish to match slats.
D. Bottom Rail: Steel with corrosion-resistant finish formed with double-

lock seam into closed oval shape for optimum beam and torsional strength.
Ends fitted with color-coordinated engineered polymer caps. Color-
coordinated engineered polymer tape buttons secure the ladder and
cord; manufacturer's standard baked-on polyester color coordinated to
slats.
E. Lifting Mechanism: Crashproof steel cordlocks with corrosion-resistant

finish, two-ply polyester cord filler in braided polyester jacket lift cords,
cord equalizers, cordlock adapter, and Break-Thru® safety tassel.
a. Location: Left side or right side as selected by the Engineer.
F. Tilting Mechanism: Permanently lubricated die-cast worm and gear

type tilter gear mechanism in fully enclosed housing with clutch action
to protect ladder tapes from over rotation of the solid steel, corrosion
resistant tilt rod.
G. Tilt Control Wand: Tubular shaped 7/16 inch (11 mm) diameter
extruded clear plastic, ribbed for positive grip and detachable without tools.
a. Location: Left side or right side as selected by the Engineer.
H. Mounting Hardware: Manufacturer’s standard 0.042 inch (1mm) steel

box brackets with baked-on polyester finish to match headrail with
additional support brackets for blinds over 60 inches (1524 mm) wide.
I. Motorization System: Electrical blinds in the vision panels shall utilize

standard AC motor with appropriate capabilities to operate blinds
properly. Control components shall be supplied to achieve projects
desired operational objectives.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify field measurements and

installation tolerances of openings to receive horizontal blinds.
C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify

Engineer of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as approved

on shop drawings.
B. Provide adequate clearance to permit unencumbered operation of blind

and hardware.
Fahd Road
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust blinds to operate smoothly and quietly.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean finish installation of dirt and finger marks as recommended in

writing by the manufacturer.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate operation method and instruct owner’s personnel in the

proper operation and maintenance of the blinds.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial

Completion.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure blinds are

without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
D. Replace damaged blinds that cannot be repaired.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 12494
ROLLER SHADES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work of this section consists of furnishing all labour, materials,

equipment and services to furnish and install:
1. Manually operated sun control shades.
2. Electrically operated Sun control shades including all
accessories, fittings and fasteners.

of works intended.

2. Section 09260 : Gypsum Board Assemblies.
3. Section 09510 : Acoustical Ceilings.
1.3 REFERENCES
B. The minimum standards for products specified in this section shall be

1. ASTM G 21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance

of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi.
III-2/12494/ Roller Shades

Fahd Road
3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
4. NFPA 701 - Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant Textiles and
Films.

Jurisdiction.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1 – General Requirements.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used,

including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Styles, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components, profiles, features, finishes and operating
instructions.
3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
4. Mounting details and installation methods.
5. Typical wiring diagrams including integration of motor controllers
with building management system, audiovisual and lighting
control systems as applicable.
C. Shop Drawings: Plans, elevations, sections, product details,

installation details, operational clearances, wiring diagrams and
relationship to adjacent work.
D. Window Treatment Schedule: For all roller shades. Use same room
designations as indicated on the Drawings and include opening sizes
and key to typical mounting details.
E. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, one set of shade
cloth options and aluminum finish color samples representing
manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
F. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, one complete

set of shade components, unassembled, demonstrating compliance
with specified requirements. Shadecloth sample and aluminum finish
sample as selected. Mark face of material to indicate interior faces.
G. Maintenance Data: Methods for maintaining roller shades, precautions

regarding cleaning materials and methods, instructions for operating
hardware and controls.

Fahd Road
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

1.6 MOCK-UP
A. Provide a mock-up (manual shades only) of one roller shade assembly

for evaluation of mounting, appearance and accessories.
1. Locate mock-up in window designated by Engineer.
2. Do not proceed with remaining work until, mock-up is accepted

by Engineer.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain roller shades through one source

from a single manufacturer with a minimum of ten years experience in
manufacturing products comparable to those specified in this section.
B. Installer Qualifications: Installer trained and certified by the

manufacturer with a minimum of five years experience in installing
products comparable to those specified in this section.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Passes NFPA 701 small and

large-scale vertical burn. Materials tested shall be identical to products
proposed for use.
D. Electrical Components: NFPA Article 100 listed and labeled by either

UL or ETL or other testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, marked for intended use, and tested as a system.
Individual testing of components will not be acceptable in lieu of system
testing.
E. Anti-Microbial Characteristics: 'No Growth' per ASTM G 21 results for

fungi ATCC9642, ATCC 9644, ATCC9645.
F. Comply with Class 1 requirements of ASTM E 84

A. Deliver shades in factory-labeled packages, marked with manufacturer

and product name, fire-test-response characteristics, and location of
installation using same room designations indicated on Drawings and
in the Window Treatment Schedule.

Fahd Road
A. Environmental Limitations: Install roller shades after finish work

including painting is complete and ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied
for its intended use.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Roller Shade Hardware and Chain Warranty: Manufacturer's standard

non-depreciating twenty-five year limited warranty.
B. Standard Shadecloth: Manufacturer's standard twenty-five year

warranty.
C. Roller Shade Motors and Motor Control Systems: Manufacturer's

standard non-depreciating five year warranty.
D. Roller Shade Installation: Five years from date of Substantial

Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
(NOT USED)
2.2 ROLLER SHADE TYPES
A. Manually Operated Shades:
1. Mounting: Surface mounted with fascia.

2. Configuration: Single solar shadecloth.
3. Solar Shadecloths:
a. 3 percent open, dense linear-weave pattern.
b. Colour: As selected and approved by the Engineer.
4. Blackout Shadecloths:
a. Fabric: Laminated and embossed vinyl coated fabric
blackout material.
b. Color: As selected and approved by the Engineer.
B. Motorized Shades:
1. Mounting: Surface mounted with fascia.

2. Configuration: Single blackout shadecloth.
3. Solar Shadecloths:
a. 3 percent open, dense linear-weave pattern.
b. Colour: As selected and approved by the Engineer.
Fahd Road
4. Blackout Shadecloths:
a. Fabric: Laminated and embossed vinyl coated fabric
blackout material.
b. Color: As selected and approved by the Engineer.
5. Controls: Electrically operated, IQ/MLC low voltage control
system.
2.3 SHADE CLOTH
A. Visually Transparent Shadecloth: Single thickness non-raveling 0.030-

inch (0.762 mm) thick vinyl fabric flame retardant, fade and stain
resistant, inherently antistatic, antimicrobial, woven from 0.018-inch (0.457
mm) diameter extruded vinyl yarn comprising of 21 percent polyester and
79 percent reinforced vinyl.
B. Room Darkening Shadecloth: Blackout material, flame retardant,

fade and stain resistant, inherently antistatic, antimicrobial, washable
and colorfast laminated and embossed vinyl coated fabric, 0.012
inches thick (0.30 mm) blackout material and weighing 0.81 lbs. per square
yard, with a minimum of 62 threads per square inch.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Prior to fabrication, verify actual opening dimensions by accurate site

measurements. Adjust shade sizes for proper fit at each window.
B. Cut shadecloth to suit window size by means of edge sealing hot knife
system. Top of shadecloth to be attached to SnapLoc spline. Bottom
of shadecloth to include smooth, concealed hembar; heatsealed on all
four sides.
C. Furnish shadecloth in lengths not less than 12 inches longer than

actual window dimensions to permit shade to be operated full length
without tearing from roller.
2.5 MANUAL SHADES
A. Type: Manual pre-engineered, smooth operating chain and sprocket

driven roller shade system which incorporates a clutch permitting
shade operation to be set in static mode. In static mode, shade shall
stop in any position. Upper and lower limits shall prevent over-winding
and unrolling.
B. Components:
1. Drive Bracket/Brake Assembly:

a. Drive Bracket shall be fully integrated with all accessories
and brackets, including but not limited to SnapLoc Fascia.
b. Bracket shall use the standard 1/8 inch (3.175mm) steel
plate for mounting and support of the assembly. The
drive sprocket and brake assembly shall rotate and be
Fahd Road
supported on a welded 3/8 inch steel pin (9.525mm).
c. The brake means shall be an over running clutch design
which shall disengage to 90% during the raising and lowering
of a shade. The brake shall withstand a pull force of 50
lbs. (22kg) in the stopped position.
d. The braking means shall be applied to a oil impregnated
hub on to which the break system is mounted. The oil
impregnated hub design includes an articulated brake
assembly which assures smooth, non-jerky operation in
raising and lowering the shades.
e. The entire assembly shall be fully mounted on the steel
support bracket, and fully independent of the shade tube
assembly, which may be removed and reinstalled with out
effecting the roller shade limit adjustments.
f. Wall or ceiling mounted as indicated.
g. Raise shade by means of stainless steel bead chain (not
coated steel) which shall run through and engage clutch
assembly in drive-end bracket. Chain shall have a
breaking strength of not less than 100 lbs.
2. Shade mounting system: Shade to be mounted to extruded
aluminum roller tube. Roller tube to be minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter
extruded aluminum, 6063-T5 alloy and minimum wall thickness of
0.065 inch, with asymmetrical shaped channels running along two
sides to which matching SnapLoc vinyl spline at top of shadecloth
snaps into. Shade with SnapLoc spline at top shall be removable
and replaceable without disassembling hardware.
3. Roller tube shall geometrically fit onto drive-end bracket. Roller
tube shall fit into idle-end bracket by means of a plug and pin
assembly.
4. Accessories
a. Provide extruded aluminum pocket with exposed tile
support and removeable closure with baked enamel finish
where indicated on drawings. Accessibility by removing
closure. No exposed screws or mounting means. Pocket
shall be sized for specific project conditions.
b. Provide SnapLoc extruded aluminum fascia in conditions
where shades are mounted outside of pocket. Fascia
shall continuously fit on side and center brackets with no
visible means of support or notching.
c. Concealed Hembar: Provide concealed hembar. Hembar
shall be heat sealed on top and sides with straight seams
so that hembar is fully enclosed on all sides. Sewn hems
will not be acceptable.
2.6 ELECTROSHADES
Fahd Road
A. Motorized 'ElectroShades': Shades of different weights and sizes shall
be capable of accurate mid window alignment at any of 3 intermediate
window positions as well as full up and full down. Where possible,
slave shadebands to minimize number of motors required.
1. The motor shall be tubular asynchronous and concealed inside

an extruded aluminum tube with asymmetrical channels to which
the shade and the mounting spline are affixed. All motors shall
be wired per manufacturer's published electrical details to
IQ/MLC units which in turn will be wired to local and master
switches.
B. Intelligent Motor Controller: Microprocessor units shall be installed in

readily accessible locations so that they can be programmed to fit
building use at any time. Motorized shades shall have the capability of
aligning at the following positions: full up, full down, standard
intermediate stop positions at 25%,50%,75% of window height; or any
3 custom user defined positions.
1. Switches: Provide local and master switches where indicated on

drawings. Each local switch shall control each motor. Master
switches shall control all shades assigned to them and may
override local switches.
2.7 MOUNTING
A. Wall mounted: Provide heavy duty stainless steel angle mounted on

wall above window opening to which drive end bracket and idle end bracket
can be mounted.
B. Pocket Mounted: Provide extruded aluminum pocket with removeable

extruded aluminum closure strip in size recommended by manufacturer
for the project condition.
C. Window Mounted: Mount Electroshades or within window mullion.
Provide extruded aluminum SnapLoc fascia to conceal operating
components.
D. Provide manufacturer's double bracket in size and type recommended

where drawings indicate a double shade condition - one sunscreen
shade and one room darkening shade per opening.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify

Engineer of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
Fahd Road
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the

manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the
project conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install roller shades level, plumb, square, and true according to

manufacturer’s written instructions, and located so shade band is not
closer than 2 inches (50mm) to interior face of glass. Allow proper
clearances for window operation hardware.
B. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely,

and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational
range.
C. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to

manufacturer’s written instructions.
D. Engage Installer to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust,

operate and maintain roller shade systems.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before substantial

completion.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 12500
LOOSE FURNITURE – GENERAL
SPECIFICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL
To be read with Division 1 - General Requirements, Conditions of Contract,

all related Technical Specifications and associated drawings of this Contract.
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Perform procurement, handling, installation, and protection of loose

furniture as specified in the tender / contract documents. However,
the contractor shall prepare and submit detailed particular specifications
for loose Furniture during design and construction document phase.
1.2 GENERALLY
A. All items shall be new, of first quality, and conform to the approved
drawings and Specifications. Installation shall be where shown on
the approved drawings and as per manufacturer’s manual/catalogues.
All items shall be provided according to specifications. Each item
must have a sticker identifying the Manufacturers. It must be fixed in an
inconspicuous location.
B. All work relating to furniture and furnishing is to be fully co-ordinated

with all other Construction work including scheduling, dimensional
compatibility, co-ordination with Telephone, data and electrical
systems, consistent dye lots and finish colours for the like Items which
may be procured at various times during the contract period.
C. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install

all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices
incidental to or necessary for a Sound, secure and complete
installation.
D. All items in the bills of quantities shall be read as being inclusive of

all other Information contained in the contract agreement, the
conditions of contract, Specifications and the drawings.
E. Generally the descriptions of work shall be read as including a fixing

system, if needed. Fixing system include :-
1. Fasteners (e.g. Nails, screws, bolts, adhesives) :

2. Holding devices (e.g. Plugs, anchors):
3. Associated labours (e.g. Drilling, tapping, boring, casting
in, countersinking, Stopping):
III-2/12530/ Manufactured Casework
Fahd Road
4. Submitting particulars of fixing systems not specified in detail
to the Engineer and obtaining approval before putting the work
in hand.
1.3 SAMPLES, SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Samples Definition: The terms “samples” as used herein includes

natural materials, fabricated items, equipment, devices, appliances or
other samples as may be required by the Engineer to determine
whether the kind, quality, finish, color and other characteristics of the
materials, etc., proposed by the Construction conform to the
requirements of the Contract Documents. Samples shall establish the
kind, quality and other required characteristics of the various parts
of the work, and all worked shall be in accordance with the accepted
samples. Samples shall not be less than 150mm x 150mm.
B. Sample Submission Procedure: In case considerable range of color,

graining, texture or other characteristics may be anticipated in finished
products, a sufficient number of samples of the specified materials
shall be furnished to indicate the full range of such characteristics
which will be present in the finished products; any such products
delivered or erected without submittal and acceptance of full range
samples shall be subject to rejection. Except for range samples and
unless otherwise called for in the various sections of the Specifications,
four (4) samples shall be submitted. All samples shall be marked,
tagged or otherwise properly identified.
C. Prepare and submit a single comprehensive submittal package

in accordance with the requirements set forth below. Prepare three (3)
copies of all submittal requirements. The submittal package is to be
submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer’s Representative within
a period of 45 days after the Date of Enterprise. Submit for Engineer’s
approval the following samples :-
1. Product Data and Shop Drawings: Submit three (3) copies

of product data including brochures, catalogues etc. for standard
items, shop drawings for custom items. Shop drawings and
product data are to show all dimensions, construction details,
finishes, fabrics, hardware and other pertinent information.
Product data or shop drawings are to be labelled with item code
number, manufacturer dimensions, and finishes.
2. Fabric Samples: Submit three (3) Fabric cuttings 400 x 400mm
for all fabrics to be used for the Contract.
3. Finish Samples: Submit three (3) samples of all wood, metal and
plastic finishes used on furniture. Samples to be a minimum
of
300 x 300 mm.
4. Wood veneer for exposed and semi-exposed furniture. Submit
four (4) samples of each identifying finish, specified space and
cut, size 150mm.
Fahd Road
5. Plastic laminate for work surfaces. Submit four (4) samples
of each.
6. Paint colors. Submit four (4) samples of each.
D. Submit shop drawings for all non-standard and custom items showing
dimensioned plans and isometric drawings.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS


1.6 QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall provide, during progress of work, a competent

Project Coordinator and Manager who is experienced and skilled in
construction management, acquisition and planning the installation of
furniture, fixtures and equipment. The Project Coordinator and
Manager shall be designated by name and title at time of Contract
Award.
B. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that all items delivered and

installed for the Contract reflect the highest possible quality levels
available in the Industry. Procedures and/or management tools which
the Contractor is expected to employ in undertaking work are
as follows :-
1. Order Acknowledgments: Order acknowledgments from the

Vendor to be reviewed and approved by the Contractor. Copies
shall be provided to the Engineer’s Representative.
2. Production Finishes Samples: Production finish samples
of custom finishes shall be obtained from Vendors during the
production process. Samples shall be verified against control
samples maintained by the Contractor.
C. Testing and Samples: The Contractor shall allow for the supply
of samples of all materials for the approval of the Engineer.
Initial samples, once approved, shall form the standard for reviewing
subsequent samples of materials taken at frequent and regular
intervals during the course of the work. Work and materials from which
samples are taken which, in the opinion of the Engineer, fail to match

Fahd Road
the standard of the approved samples shall be rejected.
D. The cost of providing such samples together with the cost of mailing
or transporting the samples to and from the Engineer shall be borne
by the Contractor.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. The Contractor shall make arrangements for all necessary cartage,

moving, and materials handling services, including elevator service,
and see that necessary utilities are in-place, and on the job without
additional cost to the Employer.
B. The phased installation of Furniture and Furnishings requires careful

coordination to ensure the correctness of items supplied, consistency
of finishes and fabrics and proper fit or placement within the designated
spaces. Special attention is drawn to the following issues :-
1. The Contractor is responsible for the consistency of finishes

for all wood, metal and plastic finishes as well as fabrics
and leathers regardless of when items are purchased.
2. The Contractor is responsible for the verification of dimensions
of as-built spaces and ensure that Furniture and Furnishings can
be installed as specified.
3. The Contractor is responsible for the verification of dimensions
of al-built spaces and ensure that Furniture and Furnishings can
be installed as specified.
4. The Contractor is responsible for the coordination of Furniture
and Furnishings placement with the building electrical,
telephone, and data/communication and HVAC systems.
C. Procedures and/or management tools which the Contractor is expected

to employ in undertaking the work are as follows :-
1. Schedules: The Contractor is required to incorporate all major

phases of work related to the Furniture and Furnishings in the
schedule.
2. Critical milestones are to be identified and the schedule is to
be up-dated as necessary.
3. Tracking Report: Tracking by item or manufacturer of the
progress of orders from order entry, acknowledgment, quality
control inspection, warehousing, consolidation, shipment,
receipt at site, and installation shall be carried out continuously
as well as reported to the Engineer’s Representative on a
periodic basis as instructed by him.
1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect all furniture during transit, delivery, storage and handling

to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration.
Fahd Road
B. Do not deliver furniture until painting, wet work and similar operations,
which could damage, soil or deteriorate components have been
completed in storage or installations areas. If, due to unforeseen
circumstances, furniture must be stored in other than installation areas,
store only in areas, which meet the requirements specified for
installation areas. When material is stored off the job site, provide
adequate insurance to protect the Employer from all loss.
C. Contractor shall provide for up to 60 days of storage for all loose

furniture in the event that the building is not in a appropriate condition
to receive the items at the time of delivery.
1.9 SHIPPING / RECEIVING
A. A Comprehensive Transportation Plan is to be presented with the

Management
Plan.
B. The Contractor is to make arrangements directly with the transporter

or through a supplier to have orders transported to the Contractor's
consolidation warehouse.
C. Upon receipt of orders at an air conditioned warehouse, items are to

be inspected for correct tagging, visual damage to cartons and random
inspection for correct items, finish and fabrics of furniture. Receiving
reports are to be prepared and kept on file. As necessary, make
arrangements for the replacement of damaged items.
D. The Contractor is responsible for the preparation of all export and

import documentation in compliance with individual countries and
manufacturer's regulations.
E. Upon arrival of the shipments at the project site or interim local

air conditioned warehouse, the Contractor is to provide an inventory
of all items as they are off loaded from the container. Any
discrepancies are to be reported immediately. If items are not
immediately installed the original packing material should be retained
to provide maximum protection.
1.10 WAREHOUSING / CONSOLIDATION
A. Items are to be stored in air conditioned warehouse facilities which

are clean and with consistent and moderate temperatures and
humidity. Items are to be stored or stacked so that damage is
prevented.
B. Items are to be staged (i.e. organised) and containerised according

to the staging plan for installation – see installation.
C. A detailed packing list with items identified by item code number,

manufacturer and model number is to be produced during the container
packing process. A copy of the packing list to be placed inside each
Fahd Road
container as well.
D. Items are to be safely braced and packed into the containers
to minimise movement during transit. Care is to be taken not to
stack heavy items on top of lightweight or fragile items. When
necessary cardboard cartons are to be reinforced with wood frames
or skidded to avoid damage and ease of handling.
1.11 DISCREPANCIES
A. In case of discrepancies between product number and description,

or quantity, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer for interpretation.
1.12 GUARANTEE
A. Furnish five (5) years manufacturer warranty for all
items. B. Furnish the following information to the
Employer.
1. A list of all items covered by a guarantee with make and

model numbers.
2. A copy of the manufacturer's or Vendor's guarantee documents.
3. The date and period during which the guarantee is in effect.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
(NOT USED)
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall carefully check all dimensions and other conditions,

as necessary, affecting his work in the field, and shall be responsible
for proper installation of furnishing in the required areas.
B. The Contractor shall order all materials required promptly after receipt
of signed Contractor or letter of intent.
C. The Contractor shall keep in touch with manufacturers regarding

progress of the orders and compliance with required delivery date. The
Engineer shall be kept abreast of the aforesaid ordering progress by
means of a report from the Contractor each month prior to receipt of all
merchandise.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Woods shall be uniform grain and colour. Unless specified, tech-grain,

or reconstituted veneers shall not be substituted for solid wood
Fahd Road
veneers. Wood veneers on Furniture and Furnishings items in the
same space are to match in grain and colour. Seasonal solid wood
to be used where specified.
B. Fabrics and leathers shall be free of defects, streaking and

discoloration. Fabrics to be treated to resist stains. All fabrics and
upholstery shall be to the approval of Local Fire Department.
C. All Stainless steel finishes, plated finishes and painted metal finishes
shall be free of any flaws or defects.
2.4 PROCUREMENT
A. The Contractor shall issue purchase orders and/or delivery orders on

a timely basis, consistent with the overall construction schedule.
Purchase documents as well as the special instruction notes below
shall be provided.
B. Tagging Instructions: Tag or mark each crate, carton and package

of furnishings on the exterior with an identification of the items
according to the code and location as given on specification on sheets.
C. Special Packing Instructions: The vendor/s should be instructed

to pack all items to withstand potential damage from ocean shipment
and handling at the premises. Special care is also to be taken to avoid
adhesive and packing materials which may melt at high temperatures.
D. Environmental Concern: The Contractor is to ensure that all adhesives,

finish materials, etc. used in the fabrication of items are compatible with
environmental conditions at the Contract site. Failure to verify such
materials may lead to problems such as separation of veneers and
peeling/cracked finishes.
E. Orders for upholstered furniture should have special instructions

regarding application of the correct side of the fabric and fabric
direction. Dye lot samples of fabrics should be obtained and approved
prior to shipment to the furniture manufacture. A sample of the fabric
should accompany all orders to ensure that the correct fabric is used.
F. Throughout the procurement process, the Contractor is to maintain

written files documenting all telephone discussions with the Vendors
as well as copies of all written correspondence.
G. Prior to placing orders, the Contractor shall ensure that hardware,

accessories and fixings are being supplied from the Vendor or third
party source. In addition, the Contractor shall verify that items can fit
through doorways and elevators as necessary.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION

Fahd Road
A. The Contractor shall examine the Contract Documents, the areas
where furnishings are to be installed, and the conditions under which
the work will be executed, including moisture and humidity conditions
detrimental to the timely and proper completion of the work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected and are acceptable.
B. Coordinate the work with that of other trades affected by the
installation, an pay particular attention to timely furnishing of supporting
and attachment accessories.
C. The Contractor shall thoroughly investigate and resolve all access

installation considerations, including elevator car size, load capacity
and availability.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. All installation work shall be supervised by the Contractor’s staff who

have experience in handling and installing systems furniture and
Furniture and Furnishings items.
B. Prepare and submit a detailed staging plan indicating the personnel

and Sub-Contractors to be used, proposed schedule, sequencing of
materials, and coordination arrangements.
C. Schedule and conduct a pre-installation conference at the site of

the Works to explain the installation process and schedule and
coordinate with installation personnel. This conference shall be held
approximately
15 days before installation and shall include the personnel designated
by the
Engineer.
D. Responsibilities include the uncrating and the complete assembly of

all Furniture and Furnishings items. Each item shall be inspected,
cleaned and adjusted as necessary to assure readiness for operation
or use. All items shall be free from scratches, marks, dust, dirt, tape.
labels and adhesive residue.
E. The installation of furniture shall begin only after all construction,

electrical, painting, carpeting and any other finish work has been
completed in the space to be furnished. In addition, the HVAC system
is to be fully operational, before the furniture is installed.
F. All items shall be placed and located as shown on the Drawings.

Furniture shall be set level, drawers and doors with locks and keys
shall operate smoothly and not bend or roll. Installed work shall be free
from marrying, scratches, dirt, etc. Damaged items will be rejected and
it will be the Contractor's responsibility to replace within a schedule
agreed with the Engineer’s Representative.
G. All work shall be erected by skilled workmen especially trained in

Fahd Road
this type of work by the manufacturer or his authorized representatives.
H. Special care shall be taken in the handling of the furnishings to avoid

their being scratched or otherwise defaced during the course of
installation. Any materials showing evidence of such mishandling shall
be replaced at the expense of the Contractor.
I. Do not install units, which have members that are warped, bowed,
deformed or otherwise damaged or defaced. Remove or replace such
members as directed.
J. The method of leveling all floor-supported units must be of

a concealed, adjustable type, acceptable to the Engineer.
Exposed shims will not be allowed.
K. Maintain the true, plumb and level alignment of all panels throughout
each respective installation. Maintain all reveals and exposed panel-
terminating edges in constant line and width.
L. Touch up and restore finishes after installation to eliminate any

unsatisfactory appearance as determined by the Engineer.
3.3 TOOLS AND PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall provide all tools, rigging and other appurtenances
for the proper execution of this contract, and also erect and properly
maintain at all time all necessary warning and danger signs, and take
all necessary precautions for the protection of all persons, property and
the work.
B. The Contractor will be held responsible for and must make good,
without expense to the Employer, any and all damage, injury or loss
due to the performance work.
3.4 INSPECTION
A. The Contractor shall supply two copies of updated Project Record

Books to record the following items.
1. Fabric test reports.

2. As-installed room list/inventory of all Furniture and Furnishings
3. Furniture maintenance manual.
B. The Engineer’s Representative must approve/accept the final

inventory and update Project Record Books prior to final acceptance.
C. The Contractor shall provide sufficient, safe and proper facilities at

all times for the inspection of the work by the Employer, Engineer or it’s
authorized representatives at Contractor’s warehouse facilities. Within
twenty-four (24) hours after receiving written notice from the Engineer,
the Contractor shall proceed to remove from the premises and the
Building all materials rejected by the Engineer, installed or not, and
Fahd Road
to Remove all portions of the work which the Engineer shall, by
like Written notice, reject, or as in any way failing to conform to the
Specifications, and shall make good all work damaged or destroyed.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Keep work areas clean and tidy and dispose daily of packaging,
wrappings, and other debris as the work progresses.
B. Clean surfaces, complying with the manufacturer's Instructions, upon

completion of the installation.
C. Preliminary Inventory Inspection: Arrange for a joint

inventory/Inspection between the Contractor and the Engineer after
the Furniture and Furnishings have been assembled and placed
in designated locations. The purpose of this preliminary
inspection/inventory is as follows:
1. Verify that total quantities are provided in the proper locations.

2. Confirm that the items meet the Specifications.
3. Identify any other discrepancy that may require the item to
be repaired or replaced. If the inspection shows any item to be
unacceptable due to damage or shortage, the Contractor shall
be fully responsible for its replacement or to provide additional
items as specified in the Contract Documents.
D. Prepare a punchlist of items that must be completed and/or corrected
prior to final acceptance.
E. After all discrepancies noted in the preliminary inspection have been
corrected, schedule a final inspection with the Engineer’s
Representative.
F. Upon completion of each day’s installation, remove all debris from

the building and from the job site created by work provided under
this Section, and leave all areas clean. No trash is to be left on site.
Dumpsters provided by others working on the project are not to
be used unless written authorization is given by the Engineer.
G. Upon completion of the installation, remove any soiled spots from

the face of the carpet or other finished surfaces using processes
recommended by the manufacturer, and in a manner acceptable to
the Engineer. Replace any areas of carpet or other finished surfaces
where cleaning has failed to restore appearance and quality.
3.6 ELECTRICAL
A. All electrical hoop-up of furniture systems shall be in compliance with

Local regulations governing this project.
3.7 MAINTENANCE

Fahd Road
A. Be responsible to repair and replace all that could be attributed to faulty
material and workmanship.
B. The Contractor is to be responsible for the instruction and training
of the Employer’s facilities maintenance personnel in the operation and
maintenance of the Furniture and Furnishings. Facilities maintenance
personnel should, after the training, be able to adjust mechanical
components of furniture for example: drawer slides and locks;
disassemble, relocate and reassemble all Systems furniture.
C. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer four (4) copies of

all manufacturers’ recommendations for a maintenance schedule and
program, including reference to the type of equipment. Included should
be information needed for the removal of common stains from each
type of fabric used.
D. The instructions shall cover such data as cleaning solutions

or products, special waxes or other protective finishes, methods of
application and methods, which should be avoided, etc.
3.8 PROPERTY DAMAGE
A. The Contractor shall protect all finished building surfaces from damage
and shall repair any damage to the building or property caused
by delivery or installation of furnishings.
END OF
SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 12530
MANUFACTURED
CASEWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Providing and installing all fixed furniture, as shown

on the approved shop drawings, schedules or inferable there from and
/ or specified in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents. Work includes but it is not limited to the following:
1. Bench
2. Balance table
3. Sink
4. Fume hood cabinet
5. Work bench
6. Work station
7. Peripheral bench with base cabinets/drawers
8. Pegboard
9. Storage cabinet
10. Shelving unit
11. Storage rack
12. Technician bench
13. Wall storage cabinet
14. Wall mounted pulleys
15. Etc.

of work intended.

2. Division 15 : Mechanical Works (as applicable).

Fahd Road

1.3 REFERENCES

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM A366 – 1985: Specification for Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled

Sheet, Commercial Quality.
2. ASTM C 709-81 : Definitions of Terms Relating to Manufactured
Carbon and Graphite.
3. ASTM-E-84 : Standard Test Modified for Surface Burning
Characteristics for Building Materials
4. ASTM B221 : Standard Specification for Aluminium and
Aluminium – Alloy Extruded Bars, Wires, Profiles and Tubes
C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. ANSI/AHA. A 135.4 – 1982 : Hardboard.

2. ANSI/VOL.PROD.STD. PSI-74: Construction and Industrial
Plywood.
3. ANSI A208.1-1979 : Particle Board, Mat-Formed Wood.
4. ANSI/HPMA HP-83 : American National Standard for Hardwood
and Decorative Plywood.
D. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning

Engineers (ASHRAE):
1. ASHRAE Hand Book.
E. British Standards (BS):
1. BS 3202: Recommendations on Laboratory Furniture and

Fittings.
2. BS 5295: Environmental Cleanliness in Enclosed Spaces.
3. BS 5726: Specification for Microbiological Safety Cabinets.
4. BS 6540: Air Filters used in Air Conditioning and General
Ventilation.

Fahd Road
F. Deutches Institute For Normung (DIN):
1. DIN 4818 : Safety Colour Coding

2. DIN 4819 : Safety Signs and Safety Plates
3. DIN 4844 : Safety Markings
4. DIN 31001 : Protective Gear
5. DIN 12893 : Legs of Suppots
6. DIN 12898 : Hose Nozzles
7. DIN 12920 : Colour Coding of Laboratory Fittings
8. DIN 12924 : Requirements for Fume Cupboards
9. DIN 12925 : Safety Cabinets for Laboratories
10. DIN 12926 : Requirements for Laboratory Work Tops
11. DIN 57789 : Part 100, Regulations for Equipment in Teaching
Rooms and Laboratories
12. DIN 1259 : Glass
13. DIN 68856 : Terms of Furniture Fittings
G. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1. NEMA LD-3-19 : High Pressure Decorative Laminates.
H. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 45 : Standard on Fire Protection Laboratories using

Chemicals
I. Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (SEFA):
1. SEFA 8-1998 : Standard for Laboratory Furniture/Casework,

Shelving and Tables/Recommended Practices
J. In addition to requirements shown and specified, and except as

modified by governing Codes, conform to applicable provisions and
recommendations of the following standards:
1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)

2. American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists
(AATCC)
3. Aluminium Association (AA)
4. Architectural Woodwork Institute. (AWI)
5. International Standards Organization. (ISO)
6. The Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturers
Association (BIFMA)
7. U.S. Commercial Standard (CS)
Fahd Road
8. National Association of Furniture Manufacturers (NAFM)
K. All applicable local codes, regulations, etc of Authorities having

Jurisdiction.
copy of the requested referenced standard as and when requested.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Where more than one standard applies, the most stringent shall be the
acceptable standard.
B. Standards shall apply but not be limited to the following:
1. Design/Dimensions
2. Safety and Performance
i. Manufacturer
ii. Installation
iii. Final Inspection and Testing
3. Health and Safety
A. Design requirements:
1. Flush Construction: Surfaces of doors, drawers and panel faces

shall align with cabinet fronts without overlap of case ends, top
or bottom rails. Horizontal and vertical case shell members (panels,
top rails and bottoms) shall meet in the same plane without overlap,
cracks or crevices.
2. Self Supporting Units: Completely welded shell assembly
without applied panels at ends, backs or bottoms, so that cases
can be used interchangeably or as a single, stand-alone unit.
3. Interior of Laboratory Casework Units: Easily cleanable, flush
interior. Base cabinets, 760mm and wider, with double swinging
doors shall provide full access to complete interior without
center vertical post.
4. Drawers: Sized on a modular basis for interchange to meet
varying storage needs, and designed to be easily removable in
field without the use of special tools.
5. Case Openings: Rabbeted-like joints all four sides of case
opening for hinged doors and two sides for sliding doors in order
to provide dust resistant case.
6. Framed Glazed Doors: Identical in construction, hardware and
installation to solid panel doors. Design frame glazed doors to
Fahd Road
be removable for glass replacement.
7. Make design modifications of the work as required to meet the
performance requirements and coordinate the work. Variations
in details and materials which do not affect appearance,
durability or strength shall be submitted to the Engineer’s
Representative for review. Maintain the design concept without
increasing or decreasing size of members or altering profiles
and alignments required.
8. Furniture shall be fully coordinated with other trades like
plumbing, gas, electricity and HVAC for service connections and
points wherever required.
9. All joints are to be visually clean. Welds shall be preferably
concealed, but if exposed shall be of a carefully controlled and
standardised profile.
10. All components are to be visually related in terms of detailing
materials, scale and colour.
11. Any linear features shall coincide horizontally when furniture
items are grouped together. Additionally the size and position of
small scale features, e.g. handles, shall be arranged so that an
orderly visual rhythm is created.
12. Each furniture component is to be viewed as a three
dimensional item and therefore the tops, sides, backs and fronts
are to be finished to be same standard as each other.
B. Performance Requirements:
1. The method of manufacturing, and fabrication of all furniture and

their structural components defined in the Contract Documents
are representative and indicate design intent and quality of
workmanship. If the materials, details or dimensional properties
are at variance with the Contractor’s or manufacturer’s
recommendations, alternative details will be considered for
review by the Engineer’s Representative when submitted in
accordance with the Contract Documents. It shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor and manufacturer to guarantee
that the furniture will have proper support, stability and fault free
performance and maintain the design intent.
2. Manufacturer’s name plates, logos, or stamped or printed
markings, shall not be exposed to view on any item of furniture
provided under this Contract when the item of furniture is
installed or placed in position.
3. The Tenderer is advised that the products of the first listed
approved manufacturer/supplier within Document III-2: Particular
Specifications must in all cases be considered as the required
standard for quality and appearance. Deviations from quality
and design intent will not be permitted and will be at the
discretion of the Engineer’s Representative.

Fahd Road
4. Where the Tenderer proposes to base his tender on the
products of the second or third listed approved
manufacturers/suppliers, then full technical details and
catalogues of the products of such manufacturers/suppliers shall
be submitted with the Tender Documents.
5. Where the Tenderer wishes to propose the products of
substitute manufacturers/suppliers not listed within the Tender
Documents, full technical details and catalogues of such
substitute items shall be submitted with the Tender Documents
clearly indicating for which items within the Specifications the
substitute products are proposed. This provision is to be made
without exception.
6. Laboratory Structural casework components shall withstand the
following minimum loads without damage to the component or to
the casework operation:
i. Steel base unit load capacity : 700 Kg per meter.

ii. Suspended units : 135 Kg.
iii. Drawers in a cabinet : 60 Kg.
iv. Utility tables (4 legged) : 135 Kg.
v. Load capacity for shelves of base units : 45 Kg.
vi. Top of support framing system : 80 Kg
vii. Reagent shelf : 80 Kg
viii. Wall cabinets : 135 Kg
ix. Island unit :1270 Kg
7. Metal Finish:
i. Abrasion Resistance: Maximum weight loss of 5.5 mg.
per 100 cycles when tested on a Taber Abrasion Tester
#E40101 with 1000 gm. wheel pressure and Calibrase
#CS10 wheel.
ii. Hardness: Surface hardness equivalent to 4H or 5H
pencil.
iii. Humidity Resistance: Withstand 1000 hour exposure in
saturated humidity at 100ºF.
iv. Moisture Resistance:
1. No visible effect to surface finish after boiling water
trickled over test panel inclined at 45º for five minutes.
2. No visible effect to surface finish following 100
hour continuous application of a water soaked
cellulose sponge, maintained in a wet condition
throughout the test period.
v. Adhesion: Score finish surface of test panel with razor
blade into 100 squares, 1/16” x 1/16”, cutting completely
through the finish but with minimum penetration of the
Fahd Road
substrate, and brush away particles with soft brush.
Minimum 95 squares shall maintain their finish.
vi. Salt Spray: Withstand minimum 200 hour salt spray test.
8. Laboratory Work Surface:
i. Material: Chemical and abrasion resistant, durable top for
all work surfaces.
ii. Back splash curb: 19mm thick of same material as top,
100mm high, butt jointed and secured to top using an
approved adhesive. Provide where applicable, as
indicated on the intended contract drawings, wherever
worksurface abut wall surfaces. Include end curb where
top abuts end wall.
iii. Box curb: 150mm high box curb construction of same
material as top (where applicable, as indicated on
drawings, wherever worksurface abuts wall surfaces).
9. Laboratory furniture items to be of high chemical resistant
surfaces without any change or slight detectable change in
colour or gloss or no significant impairment to function or life.
10. Laboratory Fume Hood:
i. Fume hoods shall function as ventilated, enclosed
workspaces designed to capture confine and exhaust
fumes, vapors and particulate matter produced or
generated within the enclosure.
ii. Design fume hoods for consistent and safe air flows
through the hood face.
iii. Fume hoods shall be designed to minimize static
pressure loss.
11. Lining
i. Interior surfaces shall be lined with corrosion resistant
and flame resistant materials wherever applicable.
ii. Base cabinets shall be lined with chemical resistant
materials wherever applicable.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit to the Engineer’s Representative for information

only in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents
copies of manufacturer’s specifications, catalogues and installation
instructions for each type of furniture required.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit to the Engineer’s Representative, in

accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, shop
drawings showing the design layout, dimensions, locations of cut outs,
etc. Provide large scale details showing the construction of the various
components, methods of assembly, thickness of materials, finishes,
Fahd Road
reinforcements and all other pertinent data and information. Submit
shop drawings with jointing and special details in full scale. Show complete
information concerning fabrication, materials, finish, attachment

hardware and other information, including the following details:
1. Indicate locations of blocking and reinforcements required for

installing casework.
2. Indicate locations and types of service fittings, together with
associated service supply connection required.
3. Include details of utility spaces showing supports for conduits
and piping.
4. Include details of support framing system.
5. Include details of exposed conduits, if required, for service
fittings.
6. Indicate locations of and clearances from adjacent walls, doors,
windows, other building components, and other laboratory
equipment.
C. Samples: Submit to the Engineer’s Representative, in accordance with

the requirements of the Contract Documents, samples of furniture and
materials as may be requested by the Engineer’s Representative.
1. Control Samples: Provide control sample for each item of

furniture requested by the Engineer’s Representative.
2. Material Samples to be submitted as follows:
a. Work top construction, each top specified (300 x 300mm)
showing front edge and backsplash construction where
applicable.
b. Support frame construction, each type specified.
c. One full size, finished base cabinet complete with
hardware, doors and adjustable shelves.
d. One full size, finished wall cabinet complete with
hardware, doors and adjustable shelves.
e. One sample each of hinged and sliding door.
f. One of each service fitting specified, complete with
accessories and specified finish for air compressor,
electrical, plumbing and other accessories.
g. All materials and fabric finishes to be exposed after
installation.
h. Hardware and accessory samples.
i. Samples shall be minimum 300 x 300mm, and shall
indicate colour, pattern, texture and finish.
j. All samples shall comply with Engineer’s
Fahd Road
Representative’s samples which may be reviewed on
site.
D. Proof of Compliance: Whenever the contract documents require that a

product complies with British standards the contractor shall present an
affidavit for the manufacturer certifying that the product complies
therewith. When requested by the Engineer’s Representative submit
supporting test data performed by an independent qualified testing
agency, to substantiate compliance with performance requirements
including chemical and physical resistance of material.
E. Key Schedule: The Contractor shall submit a key schedule for all
lockable furnishings to the Engineer’s Representative. Keys must be
submitted in duplicate; one key should stay with the furniture item, the
other should be submitted to the Engineer’s Representative with the
key schedule. Two master keys for furniture from each manufacturer
shall be provided.
F. Certification: Submit certificates signed by the manufacturer certifying

that materials furnished comply with specified requirements. Include
independent certified laboratory testing data indicating that material meets
specified test requirements.

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm that can demonstrate at least five years

relevant experience in the installation of furniture of equal or larger size
and to the same standard specified.
C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of furniture from single

manufacturer including accessories and mounting on other installation
components. All laboratory furniture shall be from a single
manufacturer/supplier that specializes in the production of laboratory
furniture to the same standard specified.
D. Regulatory Requirements: Furniture items shall comply with local

authorities.
E. Product Standard: All laboratory furniture, casework, shelving and

tables to comply with Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association
(SEFA). Recommended practices - SEFA 8-1998.
F. Flammable Liquid Storage: Cabinets indicated for solvent or flammable

liquid storage, provide units that are listed and labeled as complying
with requirements of NFPA 30 by UL or another testing and inspecting
agency accepted to authorities having jurisdiction.

Fahd Road
G. Mock-Up:
1. Install mock-up of each type of repetitive furniture item required

using materials and workmanship expected to be used in the
finished work. Approved mock-ups may be incorporated in the
final work if acceptable to the Engineer’s Representative.
H. Comply with Class 1 requirements of ASTM E 84

1.8 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Provide all electrical wiring between supply points and electrical

equipment included with the furniture.
B. Install all electrical interconnecting wiring in accordance with the latest

edition of the Regulations for Electrical Installation issued by Local
Institution of Electrical Engineers, and Ministry of Electricity and Water.
C. Sockets shall be 240V, three pin, 13A switched type to BS1363. Safety
shutters shall cover pin holes to prevent accidental contact. Contact
arrangement shall be such that contact is made on two sides of the
rectangular pins of plugs.
D. Sockets shall be fixed inside galvanized, stamped steel boxes which

shall be flush/surface mounted and it shall be single or duplex as indicated
on the drawings.
E. Sockets shall be provided with matt chrome (MCO) face plates in

workshops, for all benches where gas or water services does not exist.
F. Watertight switched socket outlets shall comply to degree of protection

IP67 for all benches where gas or water services exist.
G. Refer to Division 16 for Conductors and Cables, Raceways and Boxes,

Wiring Devices, Earthing, Communication Raceways for full
compliance etc.
H. Computer outlet boxes shall be provided with cover plates for future
connection.
I. Explosion proof plugs, sockets, junction boxes and coupling shall be

according to IEC 309 – 1 and 2. Suitable for explosion category for
zones 1 and 2. Laboratories and flammable liquid storage and all
explosion category zones.
1.9 PLUMBING SERVICES
A. General
1. Perform all plumbing and drainage installation required for the

Fahd Road
work.
2. Provide a complete tap water system, drainage system and
L.P.G gas system from the termination points to the fittings.
3. The complete gas system installation shall be installed strictly in
accordance with the requirements of the MEW supervision and
testing.
4. Install all work in full accordance with the requirements of all
ministry departments having jurisdiction over these matters, as
well as with any requirements of applicable codes.
5. All materials shall comply in all respects with the relevant British
Standard Specifications as a minimum including dimensional
standards, where these exist, except so far as this specification
is at variance therewith, notably in respect to ambient
temperatures and raised temperatures. Other international
standard specifications, such as European Standards or
American Standards are acceptable, provided they comply with
the following conditions:
a. Materials used shall be equivalent in technical
characteristics and thickness to those in B.S.S.
b. Materials used shall pass all tests prescribed in B.S.S.
6. All materials including pipework, fittings and pipe brackets shall
be approved by the Engineer’s Representative before use. All
samples requested by the Engineer’s Representative shall be
properly tagged and submitted to him for approval.
7. The highest standards of workmanship shall be employed. The
installation, including routing of pipework, service support, etc. shall
meet with the approval of the Engineer’s Representative. Any
defective pipework shall be removed and reinstated to the
approval of the Engineer’s Representative. Exposed pipework
shall be colour coded in accordance with the requirement of the
Contract. Any painting shall be carried out with great care to
avoid splashing and running of paint.
8. Materials of Piping Systems:
a. Waste pipes and fittings shall be high density
polyethylene (H.D.P.E) to DIN 8074 and DIN 8075 and
19537.
b. The cold water supply tap water system pipe work shall
be polybutylene (Pb- 16).
c. Gas Systems: Pipe work shall be seamless black steel
Schedule 80.
9. Pipework Sizing: Waste cold water supply/tap water and gas
systems pipe work shall be installed at the same nominal
diameter or larger than the termination points pipework
connection. The pipe work connecting from the pipework header
shall be the same diameter as the connected fittings or larger.
10. Colour Coded Index: All fittings handles shall be colour coded in
Fahd Road
accordance with DIN 12926 and shall be corrosion resistant
finish with colour to correspond to the following chart:
a. Description
b. Index
c. Colour Code
d. Cold water supply/tap water
e. Gas
f. C.W.S
g. GS
h. Blue
i. Yellow
11. Service Fittings Specifications:
a. The fitting to be in accordance to B.S. 5750 or equal and
approved, long life easy operation, easy cleaning and of a
high degree of flexibility and tested quality.
b. The fitting shall be fabricated in one piece construction
from brass sand casting or brass foregoing.
c. The surface to be polyester powder lacquer resistant to
chemicals, heat and U.V. fade. All valves shall have isolating
ball valve for flow regulation, localized shut off, presetting
and safety lock.
d. The fitting handles shall be metal handles in a colour
according to DIN 12920 and a colour ring and disc, or text
button to identify the media.
e. The bases and flanges to be of best quality brass and to
be surface treated with the same coating and the same
colour as the valve body.
f. The valves shall be constructed to working pressure of 10
bar/147 psi and to be tested before leaving the factory.
g. Cold Water Supply/Tap Water Fittings: Deck mounted
brass construction with coating for resistance to
chemicals, heat and U.V. fading swing goose neck
spread with threaded detachable nozzle. The valve shall
have ceramic head with 180º opening/closing function.
h. Compressed air oxygen and non-burning gases fittings:
1) Deck mounted turret with one valve (G1, A1, O1),
turret with two valves (G2, A2. O2) at 90º and turret
with four valves (G4, A4, O4).
2) Brass construction with coating for resistance to
chemicals, heat and U.V. fading.
3) The valves shall be leak tested by atmospheric air
with leak rater better than 10-3m bar L/S.
Fahd Road
4) The nozzle shall be permanently threaded with
locktile.
5) Isolating ball valve provides flow regulation and
localized shut off.
1.10 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Materials, products and equipment shall be properly packaged and

protected to prevent damage during transportation and handling.
B. Deliver furniture to site in manufacturer’s unopened protective

wrapping.
C. Provide any necessary heating, air conditioning and humidification

during transportation and storage to simulate the design conditions of
the project premises, and thus prevent damage to products.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible to make certain that items of

woodwork are not delivered until the building and/or storage areas are
sufficiently dry so that the woodwork will not be damaged by excessive
changes in moisture content.
E. Store and handle furniture on site in accordance with the

manufacturer’s instructions and to the approval of the Engineer’s
Representative.
F. Units shall be protected during shipment and installation. After

installation of units in their proper location, all protection shall be
removed and all surfaces thoroughly cleaned to the complete
satisfaction of the Engineer’s Representative.
A. Environmental Requirements: Do not install fixed furniture and

accessories until temperature and humidity conditions are closely
approximate to the interior conditions which will exist when the building
is occupied.
B. Maintain temperature and humidity conditions before, during and after

installation. All Concrete filing work (including grinding) shall be completed
and dry.
C. Existing conditions: Verify all dimensions and installation conditions on

site.
1.12 SEQUENCING
A. Sequence furniture installation with other work to minimize possibility of

damage and soiling during remainder of construction period.
B. Coordinate layout and installation of framing and reinforcements of

laboratory casework.

Fahd Road
C. Coordinate installation of laboratory casework with fume hoods
installation.
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the

Contractor, Installer and Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace
components or entire units which fail in materials or workmanship
within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not
necessarily limited to, structural failure including excessive deflection,
failure of hardware, deterioration of upholstery, finishes, and other
materials beyond normal weathering.
B. Warranty period for furniture and accessories items shall be five (5)
years after the date of Substantial Completion.
1.14 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Instruction & Manuals: At the conclusion of the work

submit to the Engineer’s Representative maintenance and instruction
manuals in accordance with closeout procedures Division 1 for the
Employers use covering the following:
1. Operating instructions.
2. Frequency and details of routine maintenance requirements.
3. Manufacturer’s name, address, fax and telephone numbers
together with catalogue list numbers.
B. Extra Stock:
1. Furnish complete touch up kits for each type of casework

provided. Include fillers, primers, paints and other materials
necessary to perform permanent repairs to damaged casework
finish.
2. Upon completion of work deliver 3% extra stock for each item
installed on this job to the Employer for use in future
maintenance work. Furnish original package, properly marked
and store as directed by the Engineer’s Representative.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
(NOT USED)
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Provide standard manufacturer’s components which comply with

the contract documents as shown on the approved shop
Fahd Road
drawings.
2. Multiplicity of Use: Except where indicated otherwise, all
components shall be fit for use in any space for the full range of
scientific work specified.
3. System of Components: Each furniture component shall be
designed and constructed as part of a system of components for
use in a variety of work layouts.
4. Materials must be resistant to corrosion, acids and alkaline
liquids, solvents, organics and salts.
5. Provide components which comply, or are treated to comply with
fire resistance qualifications specified.
B. Steel Casework:
1. Sheet Steel: Mild cold rolled sheet steel.

2. Thickness:
a. 20 gauge: Solid door interior panels, drawer fronts,
scribing strips, filler panels, enclosures, drawer bodies,
shelves, security panels and sloping tops.
b. 18 gauge: Case tops, ends, bottoms, bases, backs,
vertical posts, uprights, glazed doors and access panels.
c. 16 gauge: Top front rails, top rear gussets, intermediate
horizontal rails, table legs and frames, leg rails and
stretchers.
d. 14 gauge: Drawer suspensions, door and case hinge
reinforcements and front corner reinforcements.
e. 11 gauge: Table leg corner brackets and gussets for
levelling screws.
3. Glass: 6mm thick clear, laminated safety glass for swinging and
sliding doors, wherever applicable.
C. Laboratory Fume Hoods: As approved by the Engineer.
D. Sinks:
1. Epoxy Resin End Sinks/Cupsinks: Integrally molded from

modified thermosetting black epoxy resin especially
compounded and oven cured. Coved inside corners and pitch
bottom to threaded drain outlet.
2. Stainless Steel End Sinks: Made from stainless steel sheet,
ASTM A 666, Type (304/316) with not less than (1.3mm) thickness.
Rounded corners and coved to at least (16mm) radius. Slope
sink bottoms to outlet.
3. Supports: Use casework manufacturer’s recommended
adjustable support system.
a. Cabinet Sinks: Support sinks on 11 gauge, adjustable
Fahd Road
25mmx50mmx25mm channel with reagent resistant
finish. Provide two channels across width of cabinets
attached to 10mm diameter threaded hanger rods.
E. Work Surface:
1. Epoxy resin:
a. Chemical and abrasion resistant epoxy resin durable top
of 25mm thick cast material of epoxy resins and inert
products, cast flat with a uniform lowsheen black surface.
b. Physical Properties:
1) Flexural Strength: Not less than 10,000 psi (70
MPa)
2) Modulus of Elasticity: Not less than 2,000,000 psi
(1400 MPa)
3) Hardness (Rockwell M): Not less than 100.
4) Water Absorption (24 Hours): Not more than 0.02
percent.
5) Heat Distortion Point: Not less than 260 deg F (127
deg C).
c. Chemical Resistance: Epoxy-resin material has the
following ratings when tested with indicated reagents
according to NEMA LD 3, Test Procedure 3.4.5:
1) No Effect: Acetic acid (98 percent), acetone,
ammonium hydroxide (28 percent), benzene,
carbon tetrachloride, dimethyl formamide, ethyl
acetate, ethyl alcohol, ethyl ether, methyl alcohol,
nitric acid (70 percent), phenol, sulfuric acid (60
percent), and toluene.
2) Slight Effect: Chromic acid (60 percent) and sodium
hydroxide (50 percent).
2. Wood: 50mm thick maple top. Constructed of the finest grade
hard maple wood, seasoned and then kiln dried to a moisture
content of 6% to 8%.
3. Stainless Steel: Made from stainless steel sheet, ASTM A 666,
Type 304/316 with not less than (1.6mm) thickness.
F. Workshops and Laboratories:
1. As approved by the Engineer.

Fahd Road
G. Wall mounted pulleys:
1. Provide wall mounted pulleys with veneer plywood surface as

required and as selected and approved by the Engineer.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General
1. Fabricate furniture to dimensions, profiles and details as shown

on the approved shop drawings..
2. Assemble units in as large components as practicable for
minimize field jointing.
B. Steel Cabinet Construction
1. General:
a. Provide Casework Manufacturer’s standard integrated
system that includes support framing, modular cabinets,
filler and closure panels, worksurfaces and fittings
needed to assemble system.
b. Assemble and finish units at point of manufacture. Use
precision dies for interchangeability of like size drawers,
doors and similar parts. Perform assembly on precision
jigs to provide units that are square. Reinforce units with
angles, gussets and channels. Integrally frame and weld
to form a dirt and vermin-resistant enclosure. Where
applicable, reinforce base cabinets for sink support.
Maintain uniform clearance around door and drawer
fronts.
c. Provide casework manufacturer’s standard system
consisting of vertical supports and connecting braces and
rails. Support framing to have provision for fastening pipe
supports at utility space in not more than 25mm
increments.
d. All members die-formed, notched, assembled in fixtures;
exposed welds polished smooth; face corner intersections
of vertical and horizontal members in same plane, with
joints welded and polished; doors and drawers heads
in same plane.
e. Provide space, cutouts and holes for pipes, conduits and
fittings in cabinet bodies to accommodate services and
their support-strut assemblies.

Fahd Road
2. Base Cabinets:
a. Base cabinets, three and four foot with cupboards to
open full width; center support posts are not permitted.
1) End panels and back, formed of one piece, wrap
around design or spot welded, rear internal reinforcing
channel with shelf-clip adjustment holes; front post to
provide for rails, runs, hinges, and shelf clips; toe
base structurally integral to cabinet body.
2) Top front rail to interlock and overlap end panels with

rabbeted offset for dust resistance.
3) Horizontal intermediate cross rails required for locks,
recessed and concealed.
4) All floor-mounted cabinets supported on four
adjustable leveling screws easily accessible.
Cupboard back access panels shall be removable
with simple tools.
5) Doors: Solid panel doors, double wall steel
construction with interior prepainted and sound
deadened with noncombustible material, all outer
corners welded and ground smooth. Reinforce interior
of front panel with 20 gauge welded steel hat channels.
Door shall close against rubber bumpers.
6) Shelves:
- Adjustable on 13mm increments. Edges turned
down on all four sides and returned back under on
front and back edges.
- Reinforce shelves over 914 mm long with welded
hat channel reinforcement the full width of shelf.
- Pull out Shelves: Same suspension as specified
7) Drawer bodies of welded construction with cove at
bottom sides and flanged at top sides for hand grip;
suspension with rounded raceways and radiused,
nylon-tired, ball-bearing rollers for self-centering
operation; suspension to lock open, with automatic
close last five inches; cushioned stop, in and out;
drawer heads finished on all surfaces before assembly;
sound deadening material in head; friction centering
springs not acceptable.
8) Bottoms of solid panel, one piece construction, front
formed for door and drawer dust resistance.
b. Cabinets can be removed and reinstalled without use of

special tools for relocation within system.

Fahd Road
c. Base cabinets can be removed without removing or
providing temporary support for top.
d. Sinks to be supported independent of base cabinets.
3. Tall cases with solid backs, welded, recessed 19mm for
mounting purposes.
a. Bottoms, one piece, turned up back and sides; front to fit
door configuration and type.
b. Doors, solid panel, with inner and outer heads protected
from corrosion, structurally rigid with hat channel
reinforcement and sound deadening.
c. Framed glazed doors with 6mm thick laminated safety

glass set in plastic molding; solid exterior frame with all
corners welded; interior frame members screwed in
place.
4. Table frames:
a. Table frames, 114mm high, formed into C-channel shape;
drawers, where specified, to be same as standard unit
drawer and operate in drawer suspensions mounted in
table frame.
b. Leg corner bracket to be welded construction with bolted
attachment of leg to apron, using two bolts per leg corner;
table legs, 50mm square, with recessed leveling bolt with
bottom flange and coved rubber or vinyl leg shoe; leg
rails and stretchers, channel formed and supplied only
where specified.
5. Wall cases formed of one-piece, wrap around design, with rear
internal reinforcing channels containing shelf clip adjustment
holes.
a. Case: Constructed of mild cold rolled sheet steel. Case to
be constructed of the following:
1) End and Back Panels: 18 gauge ends and back,
formed of one piece wrap around construction or spot
welded into a modular case construction. Back to
have fixed hanger rails.
2) Uprights: 18 gauge uprights at all four-corners with
holes for attaching shelf clips. Shelf adjustment holes
in front and rear uprights to be perfectly aligned for level
setting.
3) Bottom: 18 gauge one piece solid panel, die formed
construction with return flanges turned up on both
sides and back edge. Front edge formed into front rail
with 18 gauge soffit bottom. Flush design for sliding
doors.
4) Top: 18 gauge one piece solid panel with front edge
Fahd Road
formed into front rail.
5) Reinforcement Gussets: Provide 14 gauge steel L-
shaped front corner gussets for reinforcement.
b. Doors: Framed glazed sliding doors to be constructed of
18 gauge interior and exterior perimeter frame with
continuous vinyl glazing retainer and (6mm) thick
laminated safety glass. Outer head to be one piece
welded construction. Inner head to consist of top, bottom
and side framing members, removable for installation or
replacement of glass. Top of sliding doors to have zinc
plated door hangers with nylon wheel bronze bearing.
Doors to be top hung by 18 gauge steel door track

welded to top front of sliding door and guided by rigid
PVC translucent lower door guide. Doors to close against
polypropylene door stops on cabinet sides.
c. Shelves: 20 gauge steel shelf adjustable on (13mm)

increments. Edges to be turned down on all four sides
and returned back under on front and back edges.
6. Hardware:
a. Base molding: 100mm high, black rubber or vinyl.
b. Leg shoes: black rubber or vinyl with provisions for floor
clip.
c. Hinges: 64mm, 5-knuckle, stainless steel, Grade 1, with
anti-friction bearings and rounded tips, screw attachment;
welded hinges not acceptable. Provide 2 for doors
(1200mm) or less in height and 3 for doors more than
(1200mm) in height.
d. Friction catches: nylon-roller type, adjustable, with strike.
e. Elbow catch: spring-type, with strike.
f. Locks: 5-disc tumbler, heavy-duty cylinder type; dull
nickel (satin) plated, stamped with identifying number and
g. Label holders: 25 x 64mm steel, satin chrome-plated; to
receive standard label cards (25 x 50mm) attached with
screws; stick-on holders not acceptable.
h. Number plates: Anodized aluminium, black numerals.
i. Grills: expanded metal, black finish.
j. Shelf Clips: Die-formed steel, zinc plated.
k. Pulls: Flush stainless steel pulls.
l. File drawers: Full extension suspension, self closing
heavy duty drawer slides with nylon-tired, ball-bearing
rollers.
m. Rubber bumpers: Two rubber bumpers screwed to
Fahd Road
cabinet top and bottom front channel.
n. Sliding door hardware set: Laboratory casework
manufacturer’s standard, to suit type and size of sliding door
units.
7. Filler panel and scribes: Filler panel and scribes to be provided
as needed to close spaces between support framing, cabinets
and walls, floors and ceilings and indicated equipment.
Fabricate panels from same material and with same finish to
match case cabinets and with hemmed or flanged edges.
8. Work Surface: Provide in modular lengths indicated, without
seams, smooth surface in uniform plane free of defects the
following tops:
a. 25mm thick solid epoxy resin counter top with 100mm
high butt back splash curb or with 150mm high box curb
construction of same material as top as indicated on the
drawings. Top to be molded from a modified epoxy resin,
especially compounded and oven cured to give optimum
physical and chemical resistance properties as well as
high resistance to mechanical and thermal shock. Drip
groove to be provided on underside of all exposed edges.
Back splash to be 19mm thick modified epoxy resin
secured to the back edge of the work surface using an
approved adhesive. Provide all necessary cutouts for
sinks, service fixtures and fittings installation where
applicable.
b. Continuous 50mm thick maple top over the bench length.
Constructed of the finest grade maplewood, seasoned
and then kiln dried to a moisture content of 6% to 8%. Maple
strips to be electronically laminated with a special tight
bonding glue to create a smooth crack and warp resistant
surface. Corners to be rounded and sanded. Coated for
moisture and acid resistance.
c. Continuous stainless steel sheet with not less than
1.6mm thickness as follows:
1) Extend top down 1 inch (25 mm) at edges with a (13
mm) return flange under frame. Apply heavy coating
of heat-resistant, sound-deadening mastic to
undersurface.
2) Form backsplash coved to and integral with top
surface.
3) Provide raised edge around perimeter of
countertops at sinks, where indicated; pitch two
ways to sink to provide drainage without channeling
or grooving.
4) Reinforce underside of countertop with channels or
use thicker metal sheet where necessary to insure
rigidity without deflection.
Fahd Road
5) Weld shop-made joints, and grind and polish
surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured
finish, free of cross scratches. When polishing is
completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove
embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces
chemically clean.
6) Where field-made joints are required, provide
hairline butt-joints mechanically bolted through
continuous channels welded to underside at edges
of joined ends. Keep field jointing to a minimum.
7) Where stainless steel sinks or cup sinks occur in
stainless steel countertops, factory weld into one
integral unit, grind welds smooth, polish, passivate,
and rinse.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Wood Finish:
1. Preparation: Sand surfaces smooth, free from dirt, defects, and

mill marks resulting from machining.
2. Application: Apply stain of colour selected and finish coats
evenly, under proper room temperatures, and allow surfaces to
completely dry under controlled conditions before applying
subsequent coats. Force dry in dust-free atmosphere, sand and
wipe clean surfaces between coats.
3. Stain: Apply stain to all exterior and interior casework surfaces.
Apply and wipe dry in a manner to achieve a match with the
selected colour sample upon completion of application of the
finish coats.
4. Finish surfaces: Smooth, satin luster finish. Finish on exterior
and interior surfaces exposed to view shall be water clear and
bright. Cloudly, muddly finishes or finishes carrying tinting
pigments will not be acceptable.
5. Finish coats: Apply multiple coats of chemical resistant urethane
finish in the following number of coats:
a. 3 coats: Areas of casework exposed after installation and
with doors and drawers closed and interior of cases
where exposed to view.
b. 3 coats without sanding between coats: Toe space.
c. 2 coats: Drawer sides and interior surfaces, interior of
cupboard compartments.
B. Metal Finish
1. Preparation: Spray clean metal with a heated cleaner/phosphate

solution, pretreat with iron phosphate spray, water rinse, and
Fahd Road
neutral final seal. Immediately dry in heated ovens, gradually
cooled, prior to application of finish.
2. Application: Electrostatically apply powder coat of selected
colour and bake in controlled high temperature oven to assure a
smooth, hard satin finish. Surfaces shall have a chemical
resistant, high grade laboratory furniture quality finish of the
following thicknesses:
a. Exterior and interior surfaces exposed to view: 1.5 mil
average and 1.2 mil minimum.
b. Backs of cabinets and other surfaces not exposed to
view: 1.0 mil average.
3. Finish drawer bodies in matching or harmonizing colour and

apply corrosionresistant treatment to selected, concealed
interior parts.
C. Sink:
1. Fabricate and mould sink units as required and approved by the

D. Work Surface:
1. Epoxy Resin: Low sheen black finish.

2. Other Work Surfaces: As approved by the Engineer’s
Representative..
E. All Other Materials
1. Manufacturer’s standard for the items approved by the Engineer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONDITIONS OF SURFACES
A. Examine substrates and adjoining construction, and conditions under

which work will be installed for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, location of reinforcements and other conditions
affecting performance of the furniture installed. Do not proceed with
work until unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to proper and timely
completion of work have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install furniture in the positions indicated on the fixed furniture

and equipment layout drawings.
2. Verify dimensions before proceeding and obtain measurements
Fahd Road
at job site for work required to be accurately fitted to other
construction. The Contractor shall be responsible for accuracy of
such measurements and precise fitting and assembly of finished
products.
3. Coordinate work with that of other trades affected by this
installation, specially electrical, mechanical and plumbing
services.
4. Install work plumb, level, true and straight with no distortion.
5. Cutting, trimming, fitting and matching of prefinished work will
not be permitted.
6. Special care shall be taken in the handling of the furniture to
avoid its being scratched or otherwise defaced during the course
of installation. Any material showing evidence of such
mishandling shall be replaced at the expense of the Contractor.
7. Do not install units which have members that are warped,
bowed, deformed or otherwise damaged or defaced. Remove
and replace such members as directed.
B. Laboratory Fume Hood
1. Install fume hoods and equipment in accordance with

2. Install equipment plumb, square and straight with no distortion
and securely anchored as required.
3. Secure work surfaces to casework and equipments with material
and procedures recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Laboratory Casework
1. Install plumb, level, true and straight with no distortion and

securely anchored to building structure.
2. Where laboratory furniture abutts other finished work, scribe and
apply filler strips for accurate fit with fasteners concealed where
practicable.
3. Where required assemble units into one integral unit with joints
flush, tight and uniform. Align similar adjoining doors and
drawers to a tolerances 1.50mm.
4. Adjust casework and hardware so that doors and drawers
operate smoothly without warp and bind. Lubricate operating
hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
5. Secure utility space framing to floor with two fasteners at each
frame. Fasten to partition framing, wood blocking or metal
reinforcements in partitions and to base cabinets.
6. Install hardware uniformly and precisely. Set hinges snug and
flat in mortises.

Fahd Road
D. Work Surface
1. Where applicable, make in same manner as factory jointing

using dowels, splines, adhesives and fasteners recommended
by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in factory.
2. Locate field joints as per approved shop drawings.
3. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane with flush hairline
joints and with internal supports placed to prevent deflection.
4. Secure worksurface to cabinet with epoxy cement, applied at
each corner and along perimeter edges at not more than
1200mm o.c.
5. After installation carefully dress joints smooth, remove any
surface scratches, clean and polish entire surface.
6. Provide holes and cutouts as required for mechanical and
electrical service fixtures.
E. Sinks
1. Use manufacturer’s recommended adjustable support system.

2. Set top edge of sink unit firmly pressed to counter top, set in
manufacturer’s recommended chemical resistant sealing
compound to produce a tight and fully leakproof joint.
3. Adjust sink and securely support to prevent movement.
4. Remove excess sealant while still wet and finish joint for heat
appearance.
F. Accessories
1. Install in a precise manner in accordance with manufacturer’s

direction.
2. Screws shall be screwed with proper tools and not to be driven.
3. Adjust moving parts to operate freely without excessive bind.
A. Laboratory Fume Hoods
1. Field testing requirements:

a. Perform tests in field to verify proper operation of the
fume hoods before they are put in use, using only
qualified personnel. Perform tests after installation is
complete, the building ventilation system has been
balanced, all connections have been made, and written
verification has been submitted that the above conditions
have been met.
b. Verify that the building make-up air system is in
Fahd Road
operation, the doors and windows are in normal operating
position, and that all other hoods and exhaust devices are
operating at designed conditions.
c. Correct any unsafe conditions disclosed by these tests
before request of test procedures.
2. Testing equipment:
a. Properly calibrated hot wire thermal anomometer as
selected and approved by Engineer.
b. Supply of 30 second smoke bombs.
c. Supply of Titanium tetrachloride.
3. Test procedure – SEFA-1-1992:
a. Check room conditions in front of fume hood using a
thermal anemometer and a smoke source to verify that
the velocity of cross drafts does not exceed 20% of the
specified average fume hood face velocity. Eliminate any
cross drafts that exceed these values before proceeding.
1) Caution: Titanium tetrachloride fumes are toxic and
corrosive. Use sparingly; avoid inhalation and
exposure to body, clothing and equipment that might
be affected by corrosive fumes.
2) Note: No fume hood can operate properly if
excessive cross drafts are present.
b. Perform the following test to verify conformance of actual
fume hood face velocities to those specified. Turn on the
exhaust blower with the sash in full open position. Determine
the face velocity by averaging the velocity of six readings
taken at the fume hood face: at the centers of a grid made
up of three sections of equal area across the top half of
the fume hood face and three sections of equal area
across the bottom half of the fume hood face
1) If not in accordance with specifications, refer to
manufacturer’s troubleshooting Guide for aid in
determining cause of variation in air flow.
c. Check sash operation by moving sash through its full
travel. Verify that sash operation is smooth and easy, and
that vertical rising sash shall hold at any height without
creeping up or down.
4. Field testing of air flow in fume hoods:
a. Calculate exhaust volume from face velocity data as
determined above. Determine face velocity and exhaust
volume with the auxiliary air blower off, in accordance
with SAMA-LF10.
b. With sash in the open position check air flow into the
Fahd Road
fume hood using a cotton swab dipped in titanium
tetrachloride or other smoke source. Verify that air flow is
into the fume hood over the entire face area by a
complete traverse of the fume hood 150mm inside the
face. Reverse flow is evidence of unsafe conditions. Take
necessary corrective actions and retest.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 13090
LEAD SHIELDING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide the following lead shielding as required by the local authorities

complete and Ready for use.

of Works intended.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's Product Data describing product.
B. Shop Drawings: Show arrangement, description of installation, and

weights of lead.
C. Report: Submit physicist's report of tests on completed installation.
1.4 REFERENCES

1. National Council on Radiation Protection (NCRP) Report No. 34

and No. 49.
2. National Bureau of Standards (NBS) "Handbook, 76 Medical X-

III-2/13090/ Lead Shielding
Fahd Road
ray Protection".
Jurisdiction.
requested.
1.5 QUALIFICATION

B. Installer, with a minimum of 10 years documented experience

demonstrating previously successful work of the type specified herein
1.6 MOCK-UP
A. Provide mock-ups for an area of 10m2 including a door where directed

by Engineer’s Representative. Approved mockups may become part of
final works subject to acceptance by the Engineer.
A. Deliver materials in original packages bearing brand name and

identification of manufacturer or supplier.
C. Neatly stack materials flat to prevent sagging.
D. Handle materials so to prevent damage to edges, ends and surfaces.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall provide warranty for 5 years from the date of

substantial completion for the products and their installation under this
section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
(NOT USED)
2.2 LEAD SHIELDING

Fahd Road
A. Sheet Lead: Federal Specification (FS) QQ-L-201E Grade C, radiation
protection type, rolled from 99.9 percent pure virgin lead free from
dross, scales, inclusion, blisters, and cracks.
1. Thickness: As per manufacturer’s recommendations or

requirements of local authorities, whichever is greater.
B. Lead-Bonded Gypsum Board: Factory laminated meeting ASTM C36

with unpierced sheet lead in thickness and height as shown on the
Drawings.
C. Lead-Backed Furring Channels: 25 gage zinc-coated steel, "hat

shaped" 22 mm deep with lead weight equivalent to wall wrapped
around back.
D. Polyethylene: 5 percent boron content. Manufactured for radiation

protection.
E. Steel Framing: ASTM A36, structural steel shapes as required at

interlocking brick walls, provide tubes, angles, and channels as shown
or as required.
F. Radio Isotope Shielding: Provide lead shielding as required.
G. Fasteners: Of type and size to secure components in manner required

to provide complete lead shielding equivalent to wall.
H. Adhesive: 3M No. 871, roller applied.
I. Lead Lined Metal Doors: Provide 18 gage, 45 mm thick of sizes

specified, bearing manufacturer's label.
1. Construction:
a. Lead: One piece lead, of thickness as specified in

Physicist Report, fastened with poured lead fasteners.
b. Design: Comply with ANSI/SDI 100.
c. Hardware: Furnish as specified in Section 08710 for

installation under this Section. Completely line mortises
with sheet lead, forced into place. Cut mortises carefully
for spindles, cylinders. Where necessary, cut lead patch
in manner to not break continuity of lead.
J. Lead Lining For Door Frames: Provide sheet lead in metal door frames
as shown. Lead of same thickness as in doors.
K. Lead Lined Wood Doors (if any): Comply with the requirements in
Section 08212 for Wood Doors. For lead lining, comply with the
requirements specified for lead lined metal doors and frames in this
Section.
L. Lead Glass: High content polished float glass of uniform thickness.

Fahd Road
Lead equivalent in glass: not less than wall in which installed. Other
requirements per NCRP Report No. 49 and ASTM C1036.
M. Clear Lead Acrylic: Nuclear Association "Clear-Pb", Radiation

Protection Products "Clear-Pb Lead-Acrylic", or equal.
N. Lead Lining Behind Electrical Boxes: Provide sheet lead behind any
electrical boxes penetrating radiation protection Work.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Verify thickness and location of lead protection conforms to

requirements of the local authority.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install radiation protection in accordance with requirements of NBS

Handbook No. 76.
3.3 DESIGNATION PLAQUE
A. At each radiation room or space, provide in the location as directed,

laminated plastic plaque bearing words in incised letters: LEAD
EQUIVALENTS, and thereunder lead equivalent rating in millimeters of
each wall, leaded surface of room, space in which placed. Secure
plaque to wall 1.5 m above floor and not to impair protective characteristics
of wall.
A. Lead Shielding Tests: After X-ray equipment is installed in operating

condition, test radiation protection Work by registered X-ray physicist
as approved, certified by the American Board of Radiology, American
Board of Medical Physics, or American Board of Health Physics, in
accordance with provisions for inspection, testing in National Council
on Radiation Protection (NCPR) and Measurements Report No. 49.
B. Replace defective Work including other work affected thereby at no
increase in the Contract Sum. The Employer will retain physicist, bear
all costs in connection with above testing. Contractor shall bear all
costs of retesting of Work which does not pass shielding test.
END OF SECTION

Fahd Road
SECTION 13095
RF SHIELDING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide the RF shielded enclosure as specified herein, complete and

ready for use.
1. RF = radio frequency.
2. Enclosure = RF shielding.
B. Work Included:
1. All Work under this Section is subject to the Contract

Documents and the Contractor shall be responsible for and
governed by all the requirements there under.
2. Structurally engineer, design, provide, and test the radio
frequency shielded enclosure, with shielding constructed of fully
annealed copper.
3. Coordinate Work with MRI drawings.
C. Related work not specified in this Section:
1. Provide - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls:

Heating of installation area to minimum of 20 degrees C for a period
of 24 hours prior to, and during enclosure installation.
2. Provide - Concrete slab substrata, level within 6.35 mm in any
3.0 meter section, cured for minimum 7 days prior to start of
enclosure installation. Maximum allowable water vapor
transmission through substrate determined to receive epoxy
coatings is 1.36 kg per ASTM F1869.
3. Properly weatherproof entire area in which shielded enclosure
will be installed. Protect MRI Exam Room from moisture,
standing water, and running water prior to, during, and following
enclosure installation to ensure enclosure integrity and specified
earth ground isolation.
4. Painting: Field painting or other architectural finishes, either
internal or external to enclosure.
III-2/13095/ RF Shielding
Fahd Road
5. Finish Work enveloping the shielded enclosure, or preparing
surfaces to receive the shielded enclosure.
6. Provide structural steel elements, Unistrut or other suitable RF
shield ceiling supports placed on minimum 1.22 m centers, in plane,
and secured directly to the structure a maximum of 600 mm
above the ceiling area of the shielded enclosure.
7. Division 15:
a. Connections of ductwork to or from the installed wave-

guide shielded air vents.
b. Dielectric connection to the exterior side of each
mechanical pipe penetration of a suitable material to
maintain a minimum of 1,000 ohms DC resistance to
earth ground, construct of material suitable to conditions
of service on which it Is installed.
c. Pipe connections to or from the installed wage guide
beyond cutoff pipe penetration.
8. Divisions 15 and 16: Special filtering, other than that specified

within this Section, either mechanical or electrical, related
specifically to the installation of the MRI imaging system.
9. Division 16: Electrical connection to the installed RF power and
signal filters, either internally or externally to the enclosure.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. MIL-STD-285 (as modified for MRI testing) Methods of

Attenuation Measurements for Electromagnetic Shielding
Enclosures for Electrical Test Purposes.
2. MIL-STD-220-A - Methods of Insertion Loss Measurements for
Radio Frequency Power Line Filters.
3. ASTM STC (Sound Transmission Class) Rating
4. ASTM F1869 : Standard Test Method for Measuring
Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete
Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride
5. ASTM E84-01 : Surface burning characteristics.
6. ASTM E90/E413 : Standard Test Method for Laboratory
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions
Fahd Road
and Elements

Jurisdiction.
requested.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings. Include typical floor

plan of the space, enclosure elevations, typical construction, sections,
and locations of RF shielded penetrations.
B. Test Data: Door system life cycle test. Submit a separate test report to
the Engineer when requested for review.
C. Test Reports (Upon Completion):
1. RF Qualification Test.
2. RF Acceptance Test.
3. Ground Isolation monitoring Test (Before any utility
connections).
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. Company specializing in manufacturing materials and products

for healthcare industry for projects of similar size and complexity
with a minimum of ten years of documented experience.
2. Shall have within its direct employ experienced and properly
equipped engineering, drafting, and project management
departments.
B. Use of Dissimilar Metals:
1. The use of dissimilar metals shall not be allowed.
a. RF shielding medium shall display an anodic voltage

differential index of less than 0.40 volts and a cathodic group
number of 1 (0.00 volts) to 9 (0.40 volts).
b. Construct shielding system with proper materials so that
ionic conduction across joints and RF seams shall be less
than 0.10 volts.
2. Use of the following in manufacture and installation of shielded
enclosure will be permitted.
Fahd Road
a. Bronze or brass flame sprayed treatment of steel or
aluminum RF contact surfaces.
1.5 MOCK-UP
A. Provide mock-ups for each item where directed by Engineer’s

Representative. Approved mockups may become part of final works
subject to acceptance by the Engineer.
A. Deliver materials in original packages bearing brand name and

identification of manufacturer or supplier.
C. Neatly stack materials flat to prevent sagging.
D. Handle materials so to prevent damage to edges, ends and surfaces.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Warrant system to be free of defects in materials and workmanship as

evidenced by retention of specified RF shielding characteristics for
periods as follows and in accordance with Shielding Manufacturer's
standard warranty for this product.
B. Basic Enclosure - Five (5) years.
C. EMI Electrical Fitters, RF Shielded Doors, RF Shielded Windows, Pipe

Penetrations, and Air Vent RF Filters - One (1) year.
D. Pass-through warranties provided by Subcontractors to manufacturer

will not be allowed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) SHIELDING
(NOT USED)
C. Preferences:
1. Copper is the preferred shielding medium. Therefore.

Acceptable manufacturers must provide a copper RF enclosure
unless otherwise stipulated by the magnet vendor's performance
specifications or by the Engineer in the form of an addendum issued
five days prior to bid due date.
2. The shield system wall panels shall be vertically self-supported.
Fahd Road
Under no circumstances will trades other than the shield vendor
be responsible for installing wall supports to accept the shield
system into the parent room structure.
3. A water resistant RF flooring system Is preferred, however
based on product line capabilities of each bidder an industry
standard copper laminate wood core RF flooring system may be
considered provided that the flooring system meets the
applicable performance standards. The bidder shall indicate on
its proposal whether the flooring system is "water resistant" or "non-
water resistant".
a. For definition purpose, "Water resistant" Is defined as the
absence of porous products within the design of the
complete flooring system.
b. Porous products would include, but would not be limited
to: wood particleboards, plywoods, wafer boards,
Masonite, or other pressed paper products.
c. RF floor assembly must resist fluid ingestion from any
fluid source within the RF enclosure and any fluid source
originating outside of the RF enclosure.
4. If the RF shield flooring system requires a protective,

cementitious, underlayment; the RF shield vendor shall be
responsible for providing and installing the grout underlayment
and RF floor systems that require the use of structural concrete
topping slabs.
5. The method of RF testing must be in accordance with Mil-Std-

285, and as specified.
D. Alternates:
1. RF Floor Assembly Alternate: The RF shield vendor shall

provide an alternate line item price for a water resistant RF shielded
flooring system within the entire area of the RF enclosure
(inclusive of any depicted cable trenching designed flush with
the finished floor). Note: if the bidder is not capable of providing
the required alternate floor assembly state "not available" in
the line item.
a. Provide all copper monolithic RF floor membrane; RF

solder weld all copper membrane seams.
b. Provide electrical isolation of enclosure and RF floor
system by use of a two-part thermosetting resin applied
directly to concrete floor substrate. Use of Masonite,
other pressed wood materials, plastic sheet, or other
sheet goods for electrical isolation or as a moisture
barrier is forbidden.
c. Substrates in contact with soil must have a properly
engineered and installed effective vapor barrier system
Fahd Road
that prohibits hydrostatic, capillary, or moisture vapor
pressure. Concrete must contain less than 1.36 kg
moisture per 93 m2 per 24 hours when tested per ASTM
F1869.
d. Membrane Adhesive: Bond monolithic copper membrane
to dielectric barrier with a two part adhesive resin compatible
with both the copper and dielectric barrier.
e. Epoxy Grout Coating: Over-coat copper membrane with

an epoxy grout chemically cured to a minimum 34.47
meganewtons/m2 bearing. Install grout underlayment to a
minimum 13 mm thickness over the entire exam room
surface. Grout coating shall not delaminate and must
withstand direct loading of the magnet cryostat and
patient table.
2. RF Door Assembly Alternate RF Shield vendor shall provide a

line item alternate price for an RF door assembly that
incorporates a retractable RF sealing system as follows:
Note: if the bidder is not capable of providing the required

alternate door assembly state "not available" in the line item.
a. Door system shall be visually similar to standard, hospital

grade interior doors and shall utilize conventional hospital
quality hardware.
b. RF Performance: Provide proven easily maintained and
serviced RF seal design. The RF door leaf, frame, and
seal assembly shall maintain a shielding effectiveness
equal to that of the shielded enclosure.
c. The RF door system shall have a demonstrated life cycle
test rating of at least 10,000 operational cycles without
loss of specified RF attenuation. The door system shall
demonstrate a life cycle test rating of 50,000 cycles with
planned maintenance without loss of specified RF
attenuation.
d. The RF sealing mechanism shall consist of a continuous
monolithic strip running the full length of each edge of the
RF door leaf. No spring type RF contact fingers, or flaps,
or woven expansion bladders shall be employed. Each
monolithic strip shall automatically retract entirely into the
door teat edge presenting a smooth unbroken surface
upon opening the door. The door shall be automatically
activated to a RF sealed condition when placed in the closed
position by an electronic detector.
e. Door shall employ fail-safe unlatching. Upon loss of any
one power service the door shall revert to an unsealed
condition.
f. The door shall have optional remote
Fahd Road
activation/deactivation capabilities.
g. The use of beryllium/copper or other spring contact
fingers that contain beryllium alloy is expressly forbidden
due to the carcinogenic nature of beryllium alloy.
h. Latch Handles and Trim: Forged brass; finish US26D.
i. Door Latch: Adjustable integral roller cam latching
mechanism, incapable of being mechanically disabled in
closed position. Door latching mechanisms containing
ferromagnetic parts or items on either inside or outside of
door are forbidden.
j. Door Leaf Hinges: Minimum 114 mm brass or stainless
steel, fully mortised, with minimum of two ball-bearing
swing joints per hinge. Provide a minimum of three
hinges per leaf.
k. RF Door Finish: Plastic laminate, as specified by the
Engineer.
l. Provide a RF door interlock switch.
m. Provide a low noise, reciprocating piston, 120vac electric
air compressor capable of 827 KPa output pressure with
an on-board receiver tank. Provide a coalescent air filter
and automatic drain system for condensate water.
E. Shielding Material: Annealed pure copper with conductivity rating of 1
or greater, and conforming to the galvanic requirements of Quality
Assurance paragraph.
F. RF Shielded Floor System: Construct floor panels of pure copper RF

medium laminated to interior side, and 28 gauge steel laminated to exterior
side of a 19 mm structural core of either plywood or hardboard.
G. Primary Enclosure: Walls and ceiling, made Integral with RF floor

system.
1. Fire retardant treated wood frame construction wrapped on

three sides of each individual frame with pure copper RF
medium. The face of the shielding material shall comprise the
exterior surface of the enclosure.
2. Bolt RF panels together to provide continuous, constant, and

uniform RF seams.
a. Fasteners: Non-oxidizing spaced on minimum 203 mm

centers or of a distance equal to or loss then the quarter
wavelength of the highest frequency specified for
installed MRI system.
b. RF seams constructed by the use of mechanical
fasteners such as conductive tape, nails, staples, or other
penetrating devices are forbidden.
Fahd Road
3. Wood frames for support of the enclosure shall be 45 mm thick
LVL or Microlam engineered wood members.
4. Support Frame Fire Treatment:
a. Treat RF support frames with a fire treatment process

that meets: ASTM Standards D1413, D3201, D3345,
D5516, D5664, E84, and E162; NFPA standards 255,
258, and 259.
b. All wood product used within the RF shield shall exhibit a
visible stamp of compliance, to the standards listed in
2.02-E.4.a, issued by a recognized testing laboratory
(RTL).
H. RF Shielded Patient Entry Door: Door system shall be visually similar

to standard hospital grade interior doors.
1. RF Performance: Provide a proven RF seal design that is easily

maintained and serviced. The RF door leaf, frame, and seal
assembly shall maintain a shielding effectiveness equal to that
of shielded enclosure.
2. RF door system shall have a demonstrated life cycle test rating

of at least 10,000 operational cycles without loss of specified RF
attenuation. Door system shall demonstrate a 50,000 life cycle
test rating of with planned maintenance without loss of specified
RF attenuation.
3. Door Latch: Adjustable integral roller cam latching mechanism

incapable of being mechanically disabled in closed position.
Door latching mechanisms containing ferromagnetic parts or
items on either inside or outside of the door are forbidden.
4. Door Lock: Best Grade, Night Latch; conforming to ANSI A156.5

suitable for intended use.
5. RF Door Finish: Plastic laminate or wood veneer, as specified

by the Engineer.
a. Provide a RF door interlock switch (electrical

interconnections and mounting by others).
I. RF Shielded Patient View Window: Construct RF shielded view window

assembly using aluminum extrusion of an engineered shape to affix the
RF attenuating screens and provide a means of securing double-sided
glazing. Treat contact surface of extrusion with brass flame spray.
1. RF Performance: Provide a proven RF seal design that is easily

maintained and serviced. RF window frame and seal assembly
shall maintain a shielding effectiveness equal to that of the shielded
enclosure.
Fahd Road
2. Construct RF screen of a double layer of 304 stainless steel and
place layers in horizontal orientation to each other so that
resultant distortion of viewed image through RF shielded window
approaches zero.
3. Stain, not paint, the visible area of RF screens black in color for
optimum image visibility.
4. Attachment of RF screens material to wood frames by the use of
staples, nails, or screws is forbidden.
J. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning:
1. Vent Type: Wave-guide below cutoff type, 4.8 mm brass hex

cell, and 25 mm in thickness.
2. Design RF shielded air vents to maintain a shielding
effectiveness equal to that of shielded enclosure.
3. Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning services entering the
RF enclosure shall be installed by the Contractor using RF suppliers
and magnet manufacturers approved techniques.
K. Ac oustical Issues: The RF enclosure manufacturer shall demonstrate

the knowledge and ability to effectively reduce sound transmissions
produced from MRI system to ancillary areas around the magnet suite.
In addition. the following criterion shall be met:
1. Furnish documentation of acoustical testing performed in

accordance with ASTM E90/E413 by a third party testing
laboratory.
2. The Contractor-provided exterior parent wall system (by Division
9) shall provide a minimum STC 53 without openings. RF wall
and ceiling panel system shall be capable of providing an additional
7 dB to 10 dB of ancillary sound reduction dependent upon the
type of interior wall construction provided by the Contractor. The
combined performance of the parent shell wall, the RF shield panel
system. and the interior finished wall and ceiling shall provide at a
minimum STC 60 sound transmission loss.
3. The RF door system shall provide a minimum ASTM - STC 37

rating.
4. The RF window system shall provide a minimum ASTM - STC
40 rating.
L. Cr yogenic Gas Exhaust Wave Guide Vent: Wave-guide below cutoff

typ e, size required by the MRI system manufacturer. Construct
cryogenic wave-guide vent of suitable material to maintain shielding
effectiveness equal to that of shielded enclosure, and to resist
structural failure during a magnet quench event.
1. The Mechanical Subcontractor shall provide dielectric

Fahd Road
connections to both the interior and exterior side of the
cryogenic RF vent of a suitable material to maintain a minimum
of 1,000 ohms DC resistance to earth ground and resist
structural failure during a magnet quench event.
2. Cryogenic Gas Exhaust piping system within the RF enclosure
and exiting the RF enclosure shall be installed by the Contractor
using the RF suppliers/magnet manufacturers approved
techniques.
M. EMI Rated Power Line and Signal Electrical Filters: RF shielded

electrical filters shall provide an insertion loss as specified in MIL-STD-
220A and maintain the shielding effectiveness equal to that of the
shielded enclosure. Provide an EMI filter for each electrical conductor
that penetrates enclosure including neutral conductors. UL certification
is required for all power line filters.
1. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish to the RF

enclosure subcontractor the specific electrical characteristics of and
the total number of conductors required for all: lighting and power
circuits, communication devices, environmental control devices,
data transmission devices, and fire alarm devices that will be
utilized within the RF enclosure.
2. All electrical services entering and routing within the RF
enclosure shall be installed by the Contractor using RF
suppliers/magnet manufacturer's approved techniques.
N. Mechanical Pipe Penetrations: Wave-guide below cutoff type.

Construct the pipe penetrations of material suitable to conditions of service
on which it is installed, and to maintain shielding effectiveness equal to
that of the shielded enclosure.
1. All Mechanical Pipe Penetration services entering and routing

within the RF enclosure shall be installed by Contractor using
RF suppliers/magnet manufacturer's approved techniques.
O. Grounding Conductor Terminal: Provide a single point ground

conductor terminal using a brass stud and copper bus bar, common to
both interior and exterior of enclosure. Locate terminal as close as
possible to MRI penetration panel and to EMI power line filters.
1. All ground conductors entering and routing within the RF

enclosure shall be installed by the Contractor using RF
suppliers/magnet manufacturer's approved techniques.
2. RF shall be grounded prior to connection of electrical services to

the EMI power and/or signal filters
P. Magnetic Shielding (When Required):
1. Identify the Magnetic shield design as proposed by the magnet

manufacturer.
Fahd Road
2. Use only magnetic materials as specified by the magnet
manufacturer.
3. Configure magnetic shield as defined by the magnet
manufacturer.
4. Use accepted installation methods and procedures.
2.2 PERFORMANCE
A. The installed RF shielding enclosure shall, as a minimum, provide

functional EMI attenuation to decibel ratings as follows:
1. Magnetic Field - modify for specific magnet type:

a. Frequency range: 10MHz - 100MHz.
b. Decibel rating: 90 dB.
2. Electric Field - modify for specific magnet type:
b. Decibel rating: 100 dB.
3. Plane Wave - modify for specific magnet type:

b. Decibel rating: 100 dB
B. Construct installed enclosure so that, without connections to earthing

terminal, the ohmic value of enclosure relative to earth ground shall be
equal to or greater than 1,000 ohms.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for reconciliation of general

arrangement or shop drawings provided by the RF enclosure
subcontractor with that of actual site dimensions and conditions.
B. When required to make dimensional verification and conditional

acceptance of the installation site, RF enclosure subcontractor shall be
afforded a minimum of 4 weeks after such on site verification to deliver
the manufactured RF enclosure to the job site.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Assemble the enclosure wall and ceiling RF panels into straight, level
and plumb surfaces. Align and secure RF joints.
B. Perform installation as recommended by the manufacturer of the

shielding system, and by system manufacturer, or under the direct
supervision of the manufacturer.
Fahd Road
3.3 TESTING
A. Test the complete enclosure in accordance with MIL-STD-285, as

modified for MRI system installation. Demonstrate that the required
attenuation has been achieved and is maintainable.
B. Qualification Testing: Perform demonstration and training immediately

after completion of the enclosure and prior to the installation of
architectural surfaces within or outside the enclosure. Make no HVAC
trade connections to the enclosure until successful completion of the
test process.
1. An observer of the Engineer, the Contractor, and the MRI

manufacturer shall witness the test procedure. At least 3 days in
advance, notify the Engineer and the observing parties that the
RF test is to occur. If an observer fails to appear, the RF
enclosure subcontractor shall commence the RF test and furnish
the certified test reports.
2. Furnish a certification of compliance to the Engineer.
C. Acceptance Testing: Perform immediately after installation of the
selected MRI assembly and closure of the RF entrance panel.
1. An observer of the Engineer, the Contractor, and the MRI

manufacturer will witness the test procedure. If an observer fails
to appear, the RF enclosure subcontractor shall commence the
RF test and furnish the certified test report as specified.
2. Furnish a written test report to the Engineer.
D. Ground Isolation Monitoring: Monitor ground isolation during entire

phase of construction for a minimum of 1,000 ohms above earth
potential. Immediately correct deficiencies found that are the result of a
fault condition caused by the enclosure supplier. Immediately report
deficiencies found to be caused by other trades.
1. Provide an adjustable audio and visual ground isolation device

for continuous monitoring of the RF enclosures ground isolation.
Device shall remain with the enclosure for follow up monitoring
by the Contractor.
2. Furnish certification of compliance to the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
Fahd Road
SECTION 14200
ELEVATORS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Provide all elevator systems in accordance with the requirements of the

Contract Documents. B.
Scope of Works
This specification covers the functional and technical requirements for supply and
installing all elevator systems complete in accordance with the requirements
of the Contract Documents for:
1. Computer controlled Passenger elevators

2. Microprocessor controllers
3. Structural members including dividers/separator beams in shafts, angled steel
beam supports, hoist beam in machine room, etc.
C. Related Works by Others
1. Concrete work required for fire rated and plumb hoist-ways machine rooms
and pits. Floor slab or other building construction shall not project
100mm inside general line of hoist way.
2. Waterproofing to keep pits dry and marble cladding at elevator entrances.
3. Permanent Ventilation, Air Conditioning necessary to keep machine room

temperature below 32C.
4. Permanent power for each lift, to a disconnect switch or circuit breaker in panel
board.
5. Ring earthing system to a panel board or disconnect switches.
6. Two single-phase circuits per machine room. Connected to emergency power

sources and switch located adjacent to motor room access door, for car
lighting, blower and duplex receptacle.
7. Normal/emergency circuit for each machine room. Signals will warn of impending
transfer from normal to emergency power and from emergency power
back to normal power. Signal delay time will be approximately 20 seconds.
8. Emergency power sufficient to operate elevators as specified herein.
9. Elevator machine rooms, hoistway lighting controlled by a switch adjacent

to the access door.
10. Receptacles in machine rooms only.
III-2/16805/6 Audio Visual System

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
11. Fire and smoke detector in each machine room. Fire alarm signals to initiate
fire emergency operation in each machine room.
12. Conduits for appropriate sizes between each lift well and building management
room for elevator management system and interphone system excluding wiring
for the complete system.
C. Related works included in this Contract
1. Pit ladders, equipment hoist beams, and shaft divider beams including making
holes/making good and sealant work etc. required for completion of work and
all other miscellaneous metal works etc. related to lift installations.
2. Grouting of elevator hoistways frames and sills, etc.
3. Feeder cables to each lift from disconnect switch or circuit breaker in panel
board to lift control panel including feeder cable/connection to each machine.
4. Wiring for elevator/escalator monitoring system and interphone system.
5. Ring earthing to all elevators equipment from disconnect switch/panel board

in machine room as per MEW regulation.
6. Provide elevator numbering system as shown on the drawings.
7. Elevator communication system as specified.
8. It is the responsibility of the Lift Contractor to ensure all related work to be

provided by others is correctly shown and co-ordinated. All rearrangement
to suit the lift not identified in writing and accepted by the Lift Contractor, will
be at his own expense. Protective padding for each elevator to be installed
after cabs are assembled.
A. CLIMATIC/ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
1. All equipment and materials used in the elevator installation work shall be so
designed and constructed that they shall provide satisfactory service without
any harmful effects for prolonged and continuous periods in the climatic
conditions of maximum room temperature of 35C dry bulb.
2. The temperature quoted above makes no allowance for heat generated from
the equipment itself.
3. The capacity and rating of all electrical equipment and materials given are,
unless otherwise indicated, Local rating i.e. rating when equipment are
operating under Local Climatic Conditions. Provide the basis of the normal
rating and the derating factors applied in each case.
4. Where specific sizes are indicated e.g. cable sizes, due allowances have been
made in the design for the climatic conditions of Local and derating has been
applied.
5. Special attention shall be given to high dust content in the atmosphere from
RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
time to time and special steps to prevent the ingress of dust shall be provided.
6. The Contractor shall state the environmental conditions which apply to the
reliable working of the system offered, especially for the transistors, integrated
circuits, etc.
B. CUTTING AND PATCHING
Supply for installation by others, inserts for brackets and ropes and sleeves for pipes,
conduits, wire troughs and ducts. If the programme of the Works is such that inserts
cannot be cast in the concrete, then approved expansion bolts shall be used for fixing
the brackets provided and installed by the Lift Contractor, at no additional cost to this
Contract.
C. IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING
1. The components of the Elevator systems shall be clearly identified by means

of labels secured to the external surfaces of the units designating the function of
these units.
2. The labels shall be 2mm "Traffolite" of minimum size 50 x 20mm with

5mm black lettering on white background fixed securely to front plates of any
equipment.
2. Each end of each cable shall be provided with identification labels lettered
with feeder or circuit designation to the Architect's instructions. The labels
shall be permanently fixed in distribution boards, control panels, etc.
3.
4. Manufacturers' nameplates shall include manufacturer's name, model or type
number, serial number and all applicable ratings clearly marked thereon. The
nameplates shall be placed in a conspicuous location on the equipment.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. SUBMITTALS GENERALLY
1. MANUFACTURER’S DATA
Prior to the submission of shop drawings, submit to the Architect full details,
specifications, installation instructions, etc., for each item or component part of
elevator system proposed for use but in all cases no such item or component
part shall be ordered, delivered or installed without the prior written approval
of the Architect to the Contractor's shop drawings incorporating the said
items/components. Any material or equipment which is not approved but
installed shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
2. The details of items and component parts shall include the following:
a) Full technical specifications of equipment including construction, materials,

degree of protection, characteristic curves, diagrams, capacities, rating,
dimensions, fixing details, etc.
b) Relevant sheets of manufacturers’ catalog specifications, technical data,

etc.

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
c) The estimated current consumption and heat dissipation of any
equipment proposed.
d) Time car speed and power consumption characteristic curves for each
elevator.
e) Certifications and other data as may be required to show

compliance with this specification.
f) Maintenance and supervisory statistics as approved by others for similar

system of this work.
3. At the time of providing the above details, submit a statement to the effect that
the proposed items and components and systems' performance and functions
comply fully with the relevant Clauses of the Specification and, in case of
deviation from the Specification, submit a schedule of deviations listing
all points not conforming to the Specification.
4. At the same time submit a preliminary time schedule to indicate all

logistical elements (i.e. design, submission for approval, ordering,
shipping, delivery, installation, etc.).
5. Submit at the request of the Architect, a sample of all exposed materials and
finishes for further study before approval.
B. SHOP DRAWINGS
1. Submit detailed shop drawings drawn to a 1:20 scale for car enclosure, landing
entrance and signal fixture work showing construction, finish,
fastening details and all special equipment for review and approval prior to
ordering. Composite shop drawings shall be submitted for areas which require
close coordination.
2. At the time of submitting shop drawing's of car finishes provide the
Architect with car finish samples of each type of material proposed.
3. Submit layout shop drawings to scale of not less than 1/20 which shall show,
but not be limited to the following:
a) Exact routing of traveling cables, guides and guide rails and ropes
including sizes, and details of installation.
b) General arrangement drawings showing detailed layout of lift wells, shafts,

pits, fire rated materials and include all dimensions and exact positions of
wall/slab openings.
c) Details of counterweight.
d) Details of holes required for all devices including landing buttons,

position indicators and hall lanterns.
e) Section through lift wells and machine rooms showing positions of built
in fixing devices.
f) General arrangement drawings of all machines and equipment,

switchboards and distribution boards, controllers, etc., showing the
RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
positions of the equipment and of associated ancillaries, trunking, racking
and cable connections, etc.
g) Full size details of the fire rated lift door framing sections as required by
the Architect and fire rated test certificate of same provided by an
independent testing laboratory to be approved by the Architect.
4. Drawings shall show top clearances above the crosshead, Machine Room
layout with power and heat release data, location of all equipment on top of
car, and structural reactions which will be transmitted to the building structure.
5 Comprehensive diagrams or sets of diagrams shall show:
a) All main and control circuits including size, type of conductor and
terminal point of each control, protection device, etc.
b) The principles of operation of each control system.

6. Provide complete composite shop drawings showing the interrelationship of all
systems and services with each other and with the surrounding civil and
architectural work. Composite drawings shall be to scales approved by the
Architect.
C. STAFF QUALIFICATIONS
Prior to commencing the Elevator Works, submit for the Architect's approval a staff
organization chart with details of experience and qualifications of all engineers,
foremen and welders proposed for such work with substantiating documents.
1.4 PROGRESS RECORD DRAWING
A. Furnish and keep on the job site at all times one complete and separate set of
blackline prints of the elevator work on which shall be clearly, neatly and accurately
noted, promptly as the work progresses, all changes, revisions and additions to work
as actually installed. Wherever work is installed other than as shown on the Drawings,
such changes shall be noted.
B. Indicate daily progress on progress prints by colouring in the various parts of the
Works as they are erected.
C. No approval for payment of work installed will be given unless supported by coloured-
up record prints as required above.
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of 01720. B.
Record actual locations.
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION MANUALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01730.
B. At the time of submitting "as-built" drawings, provide the Architect with four
properly printed and bound copies of operation and maintenance instruction manuals
for Elevators to describe the systems in the fullest detail to facilitate the proper

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
operation, maintenance, replacement of parts and awareness of system
characteristics.
Such manuals shall include but not limited to following:
1. Index to as-built drawings.
2. General description of systems to include a detailed step-by-step

narrative of the sequences of operation of all elevator equipment.
3. Manufacturer's technical catalogues, dimensional drawings and wiring

diagrams. Specifications for normal and special operations.
4. Operating instructions (user's manual) to include:

i. Independent Service Operation
ii. Inspection Service Operation iii.
Standby Power Operation
iv. Fireman's Operation
5. Maintenance recommandations, lubricating charts, etc.
6. Spare parts list with part numbers of various components.
7. As-built, field modified, wiring diagrams and single line diagrams showing the
electrical connections and functions.
C. Bind the manuals in A4 size plastic covered loose-leaf ring binders with hard covers.
Fold drawings larger than A4 and accommodate in the binder so that they may be
unfolded without being in any way detached from the rings.
D. In addition to providing the Operation and Maintenance Instruction Manuals, all the
contents thereof shall be entered as database for the Maintenance Management
Program to be provided under Building Automation System.
A. Regulatory Requirements: The elevator equipment, material and installation shall

be in compliance with the relevant BS, European Standards-81, ANSI and JIS Code
and FGI Guideline for Healthcare facilities.
B. Quality of Materials
1. It is not the intention of this Specification to provide all details of design and
fabrication. The Contractor shall ensure that the equipment has been designed
and fabricated to good and prevailing commercial practice in accordance with
applicable Engineering Codes and Standards. When specific requirements are
stated in the Specification that exceed and/or overlap requirements of the
codes and standards the Specification shall govern.
2. Design, material, fabrication, examination, testing, inspection, certification,

documentation, and operation shall conform to the codes, regulations,
standards, specifications, and addenda, as specified and applicable.
a) The American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Code A 17.1

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
Safety Code for Elevators, Dumb Waiters, Escalators and Moving
Walks.
b) The relevant parts of latest British Standard BS 5655.
c) The relevant parts of latest European Standards EN 81. d)
British Standard Code of Practice BSCP 407.
e) Regulations issued by Local Fire Brigade, latest edition.
f) Regulations for Electrical Installations 4th Edition, 1983 (MEW/R-1),
issued by MEW.
g) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
h) In the event of conflicting requirements between the authorities cited
above or between authorities cited and those specified, such
conflicts will be resolved by the Architect under the terms of the Contract.
C. Quality of Workmanship
1. Equipment of any system of the Elevator Works shall be installed in such a

manner that equipment, operating and control devices, etc., are readily
accessible for service and that adequate access spaces are maintained.
2. Obtain detailed information from the manufacturers of the equipment as to the

proper method of installation and connection of their equipment.
3. Should any portion of the works which should reasonably be inferred as

necessary for the complete, safe and satisfactory operation of any system of the
Elevator Work as a whole, be not expressly described or specified, provide and
execute such works as a part of this work at no extra cost to the Employer.
D. Approval by Public Authorities
4. Ensure that, where applicable, the work and any materials used in the
execution of the work in accordance with the Contract, comply with the
requirements of the particular Authority having jurisdiction.
5. Where necessary to comply with regulations, inform the Authority of the

proposed work and obtain from them any written approval that may be required.
6. Submit to the Authority any materials for testing that the Authority may require.
Provide the Architect with a copy of all correspondence, test certificates, etc., in
connection with the works.
7. Provide third party (Lloyd’s or approved agent by KFD) acceptance

inspection certificate.
A. During transportation or storage, all equipment and materials must not be subject
to damage even from temperatures ranging from -10C to 60C, relative humidity
from 10% to 95% and high dust content in the atmosphere.
1.9 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTIES
A. Contractor shall provide two-year warranties for all parts against defects.

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
1.10 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD
A. Provide maintenance service for all elevators to include making good, repairing,
replacing all defective works and equipment and leaving the elevators in perfect
working order as per the main conditions of Contract.
B. All maintenance works shall be performed by competent personnel under the

supervision and in the direct employ of the manufacturer or his authorized agent
and shall not be assigned or transferred to any non-affiliated agent. Service and
repair work shall be done during the regular working hours of regular working
days of the Contractor at no expense to the Employer. Emergency call-back service
shall be provided twenty four (24) hours a day, seven (7) days a week, at no
expense to the Employer unless caused by misuse or abuse of the elevator
equipment. The response time should not exceed one hour during working hours.
Perform emergency repairs within 4 hours to restore the equipment to operating
order.
C. Keep all records, log books, log sheets, maintenance job cards, etc., in neat order
to the satisfaction of the Architect. All records, log books, and log sheets, charts,
maintenance job cards, etc., shall become the property of the Employer.
D. During the defects liability period, replace and repair any part of equipment or
material within the systems which may prove defective due to Contractor's design,
erection, operation, performance or workmanship, or prove defective from any act
or omission that may develop from use in the Works or any section thereof.
E. Allow for maintaining adequate stocks of all manufacturer's recommended spare

parts as necessary to guarantee that all equipment and systems can be immediately
repaired and properly maintained in satisfactory operating condition at all times.
F. Prior to Taking Over Certificate prepare a programme for and be responsible for
training the Employer's personnel in the correct operation, control and maintenance
of the installations specified herein. Training shall be carried out by qualified
commissioning and operating staff of the Contractor. Such training shall be carried
out during the first month of the Maintenance Period.
G. The aforegoing Clauses are in addition to and in no way relieve the Contractor of his
liabilities and obligations under the Contract.
1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE CONTRACT
A. Maintenance to be provided under the Maintenance Contract shall include

systematic examinations, adjustments and lubrication of all elevator equipment.
Electrical and mechanical parts shall be repaired or replaced whenever
required, using only parts produced by the original manufacturer of the
equipment concerned. Provide for the Architect’s approval a programme of the routine
operational maintenance and preventive maintenance procedures which the
Contractor propose to execute during the two-year Maintenance Contract Period.
B. Submit a proposed Maintenance Service Contract (for signing by the approved
manufacturer or his authorized representative and the Employer).
The Service Contract shall itemize costs covering a comprehensive maintenance

service for a period of two (2) years commencing from the date of agreed Maintenance
Contract with the Employer with an option for renewal thereafter.

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
C. The proposed Service Contract shall provide, for the following:
1. The service and repair work shall be performed and supervised by

competent and trained employees of the manufacturer or his authorized agent
during regular working hours of regular working days.
2. Provide all routine operational maintenance and full preventive

maintenance as recommended by the equipment manufacturers to keep
equipment and systems in proper operating condition.
3. Provide attendance on site for eight hours daily during the period of the
Maintenance Contract.
4. The routine operational maintenance activities and full preventive

maintenance procedures relating to the systems specified herein shall be
incorporated in the Maintenance Management Programme of the Building
Automation System.
5. An emergency round-the-clock minor-adjustment call-back service shall be

provided seven (7) days per week, without additional expense to the Employer
unless caused by misuse or abuse of the systems and equipment.
6. The manufacturer shall maintain locally an inventory of all wearing parts of the
elevators, consisting of, but not limited to, sheaves, motors, pumps, brushes,
controllers, selectors, thrusts, bearings, brake magnet coils or brake motors,
brake shoes, electronic valve, armature and field windings, rotating elements,
contacts, coils, star delta starter, variable voltage variable frequency
(VVVF),drive and resistance for operating and motor circuits, magnet frames,
leveling devices, cams, car and hoistway door hangers, tracks and guides, door
operating devices, car lights, car fans, pushbuttons, indicators, lanterns and all
other elevator signals and accessory equipment provided under this Contract.
7. The maintenance work shall consist of the following:

a. Examining regularly and systematically on a weekly basis, and
performing necessary adjustment, cleaning and lubrication. All lubricants,
cleaning materials, paint, cotton rags, etc. shall be provided. All
lubricants shall be of the proper grade for the purpose required.
b. Supplying, repairing and replacing of all parts of every description

made necessary by normal wear and tear without expense to the Employer.
Only parts that are correctly designed, manufactured by the original
manufacturer, and suitable in all respects shall be used. A supply of spare
parts sufficient for the normal maintenance and repair of the elevators shall
be stored in the building.
c. Examining and equalizing tension of all hoist and governor ropes.

Renewing of all ropes, whenever necessary to insure maintenance of
adequate safety factor. A test of governors and safeties shall be made
annually at the Employer's convenience.
Repairing and/or replacing all electrical wiring and conductors extending to

all parts of the elevator from the main line switch, or other terminals in
the Machine Room.

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
d. Keeping the guide rails clean and properly aligned. When
necessary, the guides and the car guide rails shall be renewed, readjusted,
or realigned as required to ensure smooth and quiet operation in
accordance with the finally accepted Test conditions. The pits shall be
thoroughly cleaned at least once every twelve (12) months.
e. Keeping the exterior of the machinery and any other parts of the
equipment subject to rust properly painted and presentable at all times.
Motor windings and controller coils shall be periodically treated
with a proper insulating compound.
f. Cleaning of hoistways.
8. Renewals or repairs necessitated by reason of negligence or misuse of the

equipment by the Employer shall be executed by the manufacturer (or his
authorized agent) and the cost thereof shall be reimbursed to him. Under this
Contract, new attachments as may be recommended or directed by
insurance companies or governmental authorities, shall not be required unless
by separate agreement and at extra costs.
9. The Maintenance Service Contract shall not be assigned or transferred.
D. When submitting the Maintenance Service Contract, provide details of

manufacturer's existing maintenance organization locally. This proposal shall
state the number of elevator repair mechanics and maintenance supervisors
resident locally, the amount of spare parts carried in local inventory, the nearest
location of a major parts warehouse, and the number of similar installations on full
maintenance service by local personnel.
E. The cost of providing and executing the Maintenance Service Contract shall not be
included in the Contract Price for the Works, although the cost, together with the terms
and conditions of the Service Contract, will be given due consideration by
the Architect and may influence his decision regarding contractor approval.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
(NOT USED)
2.2 EQUIPMENT LOCATION
A. The traffic analysis study of concept stage issued as part of Document III-3
Conceptual Indicative drawings shall be the base guidelines and needs to be
developed by the contractor during the next stages and finalise the Elevator sizes.
Contractor is required to submit the sizing of elevators with supporting documents.
B. Location of Elevators identified in Concept drawings are indicative and the
contractor is required to carry further analysis and find the final locations.
C. Provide any additional structural members, including divider/separator beams in

shaft, channel such as shelf angles, steel separator beams, steel beam supports etc.
required for the installation of the equipment. Provide car and counterweight rope
guards and tape or chain guards for selectors.
D. Provide all required inserts, signal boxes and sleeves in walls, floors or beams and
RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
confirm their location prior to casting of concrete work.
E. Clearance around equipment located in each Machine Room shall comply with the
applicable provisions of international and local Codes.
F. Equipment in each Elevator Machine Room shall be so arranged that rotating

elements, sheaves, etc., can be removed for repairs or replacement, either by hoist
beam or other conventional means, without dismantling or removing other equipment
components in the same Machine Room.
G. Machines shall be right or left hand as may be required to provide necessary work
space around the elevator equipment in Machine Room and to insure clear
passage to the Machine Room access.
H. Where practical, elevator controllers shall be located near the driving machines that
they control. The driving machine shall be visible from its controller.
I. Hoist beams shall not be utilized as the permanent support of elevator

equipment.
2.3 GEARLESS HOIST MACHINE
A. Provide a gearless traction machine of approved design with low-speed motor,

electro-mechanical brake, sheave shaft and traction sheave, all in proper alignment,
compactly grouped on a single shaft that is supported by two bearings, rigidly
mounted on a structural steel bed-plate.
B. Provide equipment fully capable of handling the specified duty, and

delivering specified performance. Machine bed plates shall be sound
isolated from the building structure by means of elastomer pads properly loaded
for machine developed static and dynamic forces.
Provide between the beams steel filler pieces and acoustical baffling
material designed to prohibit machine room noise from filtering through machine
room floor slab holes. Seat all parts securely on bed-plate, without using brackets
(or extensions) as principal supports.
C. Use a multi-pole reversible motor having high starting torque and low starting
current, designed especially for lift service, of sufficient size to run continuously at
rated speed and rated load, in both travel directions, with winding temperature rise
under 50C.
D. Use a shaft of forged steel, electric furnace cast steel. Provide a traction
sheave, having de-mountable rim made of hard alloy cast iron or cast steel,
grooved for proper traction, with sufficiently excess thickness to ensure reasonable
rate of groove wear. Provide rim markings to indicate the direction of car
travel.
E. Machine bearings and structures shall be designed to accommodate

equipment reactions
F. Electrically balance the armature, and dynamically balance all rotating

elements.
G. Provide guards to prevent wire rope from leaving the sheave under any
RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
condition with clearance between guard and sheave to be less than rope diameter.
H. Provide a noiseless mechanical brake, spring applied and electrically

released, designed to act instantly and automatically upon interruption of motor
power supply. Use two brake shoes to hold a lift at any landing with
125 percent of rated load and normal counterbalance. The brake drum
wearing surface and the edge of flange shall be turned true and smooth, with
wearing surface eccentricity at less than 0.125 mm. Line brake shoes with
suitable fireproof material, shaped to the shoe so that the drum can run free with
minimal clearance.
I. Stop a lift by electrical means before the mechanical brake is applied.
Systems where slowdown and normal stopping is achieved by brake use shall
be rejected. A system of controlled emergency stops with delayed brake
application shall be rejected.
J. Securely mount and guard all related monitoring devices. Fix all parts in place
with finish bolts and nuts.
2.4 GEARED HOIST MACHINE
A. Provide a geared traction machine comprising a motor, worm and gear, electro-
mechanical brake, sheave shaft and traction sheave, all in proper alignment,
capable of delivering the specified duty and performance. Mount the machine
rigidly, on a suitable steel bed-plate.
B. Provide equipment fully capable of handling the specified duty, and

delivering specified performance. Machine bed plates shall be sound
isolated from the building structure by means of elastomer pads properly loaded for
machine developed static and dynamic forces.
Provide between the beams steel filler pieces and acoustical baffling
material designed to prohibit machine room noise from filtering through machine
room floor slab holes. Seat all parts securely on bed-plate, without using brackets
(or extensions) as principal supports.
C. Use a multi-pole reversible motor having high starting torque and low starting
current, designed especially for lift service, of sufficient size to run continuously at
rated speed and rated load, in both travel directions without raising winding
temperature over 50C. Use only copper wire for the armature, all windings
and coils.
D. Exceed the calculated requirement (for specified duty application) by at least

5 hp.
E. Machine the gear from heavy casting gear bronze, to give accurately
hobbled teeth. Secure the gear to spider with bolts in reamed holes for a snug
fit.
F. Machine the worm and its shaft from one piece of forged steel. Mount the worm
shaft on two bearings, one of which is an oversized double-acting pre- loaded ball
bearing or self-aligning thrust bearing, and the other a bronze sleeve bearing.
Provide an adjustable gland packing at motor end of the shaft. Design for thrust
bearing removal without dismantling the machine. Install the machine to permit

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
worm removal without moving or dismantling the machine.
G. Provide a noiseless mechanical brake, spring applied and electrically

released, designed to act instantly and automatically upon interruption ofmotor
power supply. Use two brake shoes to hold a lift at any landing with
125 percent of rated load and counterbalanced at 45 percent.
H. Stop a lift by electrical means before the brake is applied. Systems where
slowdown and normal stopping achieved by brake use shall be rejected. A system
of controlled emergency stops with delayed brake application shall be rejected.
I. Provide a traction sheave, mounted on rigid shaft with heavy anti-friction bearings.
Do not exceed a pitch diameter of 1.75 times the pitch diameter of the gear.
Fabricate the traction sheave of best grade cast iron (minimum
220 Brinell) with a heavy web and rim, properly grooved for wire rope.
Provide a sheave shaft with a seal design to prevent oil leakage.
J. Design to limit machine vibration, at rated speed, to less than 0.025 mm at motor
end of bed-plate, and backlash to less than 0.125 mm at gear circumference, when
at 100 kg. of the balanced load.
K. Securely mount and guard all related monitoring devices. Fix all parts in place
using finish bolts and nuts.
2.5 MOTORS
A. Provide reversible motor especially designed for elevator services. Motor shall
be provided with the high starting torque and low starting current. Motor shall
have sufficient horsepower to drive elevator, under full load condition, and operate
at minimum 240 starts per hour, for a minimum period of twelve (12)
consecutive hours, without over stressing or overheating hoist motor.
B. Certify that hoist motors/machine as selected can meet full load running test
consisting of operating elevator at 100% of contract load, running at 100% of
contract load, running at 100% contract speed, starting and stopping 240 times,
during a one hour period with a temperature rise, measured at motor housing, not
in excess of the manufacturer specified motor rating, starting at ambient
temperature.
C. Provide closed loop motor control feedback system which automatically

regulates motor by comparing actual car acceleration, deceleration and
velocity profiles with pre-set optimized values.
2.6 SHEAVES & SUPPORTING BASES
A. Provide beams or channels to secure and support sheaves and machine.

Provide all sheaves required to obtain a proper lead of rope to car and
counterweight. Machine and groove the sheave for the specific diameter of rope
used.
B. Position sheaves for easy servicing and removal. Align and space the
sheaves to minimize vibration of hoist rope.
C. Provide guards for deflector and secondary sheaves, to prevent rope leaving the
sheave under any condition, with clearance between guard and sheave to be less
than rope diameter.

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
2.7 BUFFERS
A. Provide buffers for car and counterweight as per the requirements of Codes
mentioned elsewhere in the specification and provide test certificate from
independent testing agency.
B. Use a metal plaque to indicate manufacturer, type, stroke length and range of
speeds and loads for which the buffer is certified.
C. Provide pipe struts and steadiers, buffer extension, working platforms and
working platforms ladders as required to suit actual pit depth noted on the drawings.
Provide buffers stands with lateral stiffeners and reinforcing. Provide an
inspection platform and ladder, where pit dimensions allow.
D. Arrange car and counterweight run-by to maximize available hoist rope stretch
allowance.
2.8 CONTROLLERS
A. Micro computer based control units shall be provided to control the operation, the
starting, the stopping, accelerating, decelerating and the speed of the elevator
motor and also to apply the brake if any of the safety devices operate or the power
fails.
B. All controllers shall be enclosed in ventilated sheet metal cabinets finished in air-
dried enamel. Doors and removable panels shall be provided for easy access
to both front and rear.
C. Elevator controller shall be of the vertical, totally enclosed,cubicle type
constructed of sheet steel with hinged doors with door lock on the front and screwed
panels on the back, giving easy access to all components inside the controller. The
cubicle enclosure shall be such as not to pose danger of shock or injury to persons.
The cubicles shall be well filtered ventilated by means of louvers or other approved
method, such that the temperature inside never exceeds the safe temperature limit of
the equipment.
D. The controller shall house all necessary contactors, relays, switches, cards, micro
processors, interface modules, power amplifiers, solid state devices, timing
devices, transformers and all apparatus associated with the control of the elevator
in the machine room. The circuit breakers panel or isolator of the elevator may be
wall mounted outside the cubicle, next to the main supply busbars. In any case,
opening of the cubicle door shall cause a switch to trip the circuit breaker and cut off
the power supply. Floor selector mechanism may be housed separately if so
designed.
E. The controller shall provide protection against the following:
1. Sustained under-voltage.
2. Over-current in any component.
3. Phase reversal of the power supply.
4. Overload.
5. Single phase preventors.
F. The controller shall be arranged to cut off the power supply, apply the brake and
bring the car to rest in the event of the above failures occurring and it will be indicated
on the Supervisory Indicator Panel by giving an alarm signal.
RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
G. The associated control equipment shall provide smooth acceleration and
deceleration. In conjunction with the controller, selector, and machine, the system
shall consistently provide the performance times specified.
H. The control system shall provide a smooth acceleration and deceleration with the
leveling accuracy at all landings from no load to full rated load in the elevator.
This smooth operation shall be obtained for all elevators under stable conditions which
provide for maximum "car start to car stop" times for a floor-to- floor run with a balanced
load at the midpoint of the hoistway ("start" of a door closing at one floor to the "fully
opened door" position at the next local floor). Prior to completion of the Works and
prior to the expiry of the defects liability period, the elevators shall be re-adjusted as
required to meet the approved performance requirements.
I. The equipment shall be designed to operate at plus 10% or minus 6% of normal

feeder voltage and plus or minus 4% of normal feeder frequency without damage
or interruption of elevator service. Protective devices shall be included to prevent
damage on conditions of excessive over- or under-voltage.
J. Certify that the control system shall be designed to operate the hoist motor
continuously at contract speed and contract load and for a ten (10) minute period
at 110% of contract load at 100% of contract speed in both directions without
overheating. Standby power operation will be tested under similar conditions, and the
elevator system shall not adversely affect the stability of the voltage and frequency
controls of the standby generator set or the loads connected to the standby power bus
during standby power system operation.
K. Each elevator except those for material handling, shall be equipped with an
independent keyed switch for staff use bypassing all landing button calls and
responding to car button calls only.
2.9 DRIVE CONTROL
A. Variable Voltage Variable Frequency Control.
1. Converts A.C line current to D.C using diode converters and then
reconverts to A.C at the voltage and frequency required to move a
given load at the desired speed. The resulting precise motor control shall
provide precision speed regulation and smooth acceleration and deceleration
regardless of the load on the car. Latest power device switching shall be
employed to allow switching the high frequencies involved in the speed
control. Latest microprocessor and semiconductor technology shall be
employed to provide an energy efficient drive system without an annoying
hum.
2. High-quality performance maintained by self-diagnostic functions with a dual

microcomputer system shall be provided to ensure optimum safety.
3. Digital Pulse Width Modulation control shall be employed to keep the

inverter’s output voltage as close as possible to a sine wave form.
4. Relative harmonic content shall be kept minimum in order to have no effect

on the building power system.
5. A regenerative power feed back function shall be employed

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
6. Govern the starting, stopping and direction of travel. Deliver an
average acceleration (over total accelerating period) of at least 0.9 m/s2,
without exceeding 1.8 m/s2 on acceleration peaks. Do not exceed a
jerk rate of 2.5 m/s3.
7. Provide an isolation transformer (copper winding only) to eliminate

mechanical vibration due to ripple voltage transients, and to limit
transient notching of power source main lines to less than 100 s pulse width
and less than three percent total harmonic distortion, both measured
at electrical main line disconnect in motor room. Limit overall main line
noise pollution to less than what will be caused by an equivalent motor-
generator drive system.
8. Dual microprocessor units (Master unit and Slave unit) shall be

provided to ensure switching over the control to slave unit in the event of
malfunctioning of the main unit. A digital encoder shall detect accurately the
position of floor and feed back to the control circuit.
9. The elevator, if stopped due to reasons other than actuation of safeties or

power failure, shall go to the nearest floor in slow speed and shall open the
door.
10. An anti-nuisance/mischief prevention feature shall be employed to prevent

unnecessary/accidental registration of car calls.
B. Solid State DC Control
1. Converts A.C line current to D.C using diode converters and fed to the D.C
motor to move a given load at the desired speed. Microprocessor based
auto tuning shall be employed to evaluate the actual
manufactured and installed condition of the D.C. powered rotating equipment
to establish optimum performance parameters. The resulting precise motor
control shall provide precision speed regulation and smooth acceleration and
deceleration regardless of the load on the car. Latest microprocessor and
semiconductor technology shall be employed to provide an energy efficient
and smooth drive system.
2. The tuning parameters shall be stored digitally, and shall assure quality interface
between the Drive and the inherent characteristics of the rotating
equipment as installed. The control shall monitor the variations in the system
caused by heat, wear, change in inductance etc. to assure optimum
interface between equipment and the system as adjusted.
3. Conventional Ward Leonard system using D.C. generator as D. C. supply

source will not be accepted.
4. Govern the starting, stopping and direction of travel. Deliver an

average acceleration (over total accelerating period) of at least 0.9 m/s2,
without exceeding 1.8 m/s2 on acceleration peaks. Do not exceed a
jerk rate of 2.5 m/s3.
5. An anti-nuisance/mischief prevention feature shall be employed to prevent

unnecessary/accidental registration of car calls.

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
2.10 FEEDBACK SPEED CONTROL
A. Provide closed-loop negative feedback control incorporating:
1. A pattern-generator to give a velocity input signal, modified by car

position, with constant peak acceleration and constant change of acceleration.
2. A digital or analogue tachometer-generator to provide a velocity

feedback signal.
3. A digital transducer to provide a position feedback signal.
4. A current transformer to provide a current feedback signal.
B. Design the system to immediately remove power from the drive motor and
apply the brake if:
1. The error exceeds five percent of the signal.
2. Actual acceleration exceeds pre-set pattern by over 15 percent.
3. Excessive transistor switching time or overheating of solid state

components.
4. Car positions that are derived from: (a) the digital transducer and (b)
the integrating velocity feedback signal, differ by over 12 mm.
5. Arrange system responses, so that elapsed time between detection of a fault

and removal of electrical power does not exceed 0.1 second.
6. Provide protective devices to ensure that any single fault will not cause injury
risk to passengers. Ensure that, if any fault occurs such that a subsequent
fault can cause an unsafe condition, the initial fault will be detected and the
elevator shut down.
2.11 AUTOMATIC LEVELLING DEVICE
A. Each elevator shall be provided with a self levelling feature that will
automatically bring the elevator to the floor landings within a tolerance of +/-
3 mm. maximum.
Self levelling shall, within its zone, be entirely automatic and independent of the
operating device and shall correct for over-travel and rope stretch. The elevator
shall be maintained approximately level with the landing, irrespective of
distance, travel or load and while loading and unloading without hunting.
2.12 COUNTERWEIGHTS
A. Each elevator shall be suitably counterbalanced for smooth and economical

operation. Cast iron, cast steel or flame-cut steel plate sub-weights shall be contained
in a guided structural steel frame. The counterweight shall be equal to the weight of

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
complete elevator car plus at least 45 percent of the contract loads. The weights
in the counterweight frame shall be balanced with the weight equally distributed
across the width of the frame to equalize guide pressures. The sub-weights shall be
fillet welded to each adjacent sub-weight, as necessary, to prevent rattling with two
vertical beads on the car side of the counterweight.
B. Blocking between the counterweight and the buffer striker plate shall be
provided equal to 25mm per 5 metres of hoist rope between car and
counterweight.
2.13 CAR AND COUNTERWEIGHT GUIDES
A. Provide similar type guides for both the counterweight and car, mounted at top
and bottom of their frames. Provide sliding guides to EN81.
B. Provide guide tyres of durable neoprene (resilient material), able to give a smooth
ride and ensure that flat spots do not develop after standing idle for
24 hours under average environmental condition.
C. Balance car and counterweight so maximum roller guide pressure on any guide
member does not exceed 11.5 kg when measured at half way point of travel in the
hoistway and car door are in their fully closed position.
D. Use metal guards to protect guides on top. Use noiseless sealed ball
bearings.
2.14 GUIDE RAIL
A. Verify dimensions and plumb of all elevator hoistways, prior to preparing shop
drawings, and submit a written report to Engineer detailing any proposed
modification to suit the site conditions.
B. Review drawings to verify adequacy of rail support structures and their

locations throughout pit, hoistway and overhead spaces. Lift Contractor shall
advise of any deficiency, at bid submission, or take full responsibility for installing
additional support, as required.
C. Provide standard T-section rail of hot rolled structural steel, having guide
surfaces accurately planed or ground, with sufficiently precise tolerance for Class
A rating. Overall length of each pair of rail stacks (for car or counterweight) shall
be equal. Total thickness variation of the running surfaces shall not exceed
0.25 mm (measured from base). Properly align all the rails to provide ride
characteristic as specified in elevators schedules
D. Securely fasten with suitable, approved slip clips and brackets. Place and
support guide rail to prevent distortion due to eccentric loading or by
application of safety devices. Affix rail brackets to building structure so that no
movement can occur. Through-bolt the rail brackets. Pin all adjustable brackets
after the final alignment, with bolts and nuts.
E. Where the distance between rail supports exceeds 3750 mm, provide suitable
rail backing. Arrange for car guide rail to align with car frame, so the entire
assembly hangs in true balance within the guides.
F. Erect rail stacks aligned and plumb, using metallic shim. Allow 5-10 mm for shim
between rail bracket and rail back. Shim the rail to remain in position even if
RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
fastening bolts loosen.
G. Join rail sections with steel splice plates, at least 20 mm thick. Machine splice
plate contact surface and rail back, to provide matched joints at the rail face, for
riding surfaces to be in the same plane, and all joints to be closed. Provide
no fewer than four through-bolts per rail end (at least eight per fish-plate). Locate
rail joint to not interfere with support bracket or divider beam. Do not cut, grind,
or otherwise modify dividers or structural beams, to suit fish-plates.
H. Provide all guide rail necessary bracket, angles, plates, fasteners and seats to
attach guide rail brackets to building steel, steel support and steel divider beams.
Provide all necessary anchoring devices to fasten guide rail bracket
supports into concrete wall.
I. Protect machined surfaces with factory applied coat of suitable corrosion

protection that can be readily removed after rail installation. Protect non- machined
surfaces with factory applied paint. Protect rail from adverse weather conditions
throughout the entire construction period.
Remove corrosion, and re-paint non-machined surfaces prior to Final
Acceptance. Corroded or damaged rail will not be accepted.
J. Arrange rail stack lengths to compensate for building compression (6 mm per

3750 mm), with 150-300 mm top and bottom clearances. Provide anti- snag
guards to prevent fouling the rope or traveling cable.
K. Cause the rails to rest, and be attached to steel rail bases. Align and plumb the
car and counterweight rails so that:
1. Arrows on an alignment gauge indicate zero tolerance at brackets, and
under 1.5 mm at any intermediate location.
2. Measured distance (using thumb gauge) between any rail face and its
respective work line varies by under 0.75 mm at any point on the X or Z planes,
and total cumulative variation is below 1.5 mm over any 30 metre length.
3. After rail installation and alignment are complete, provide written

notification to Engineer so that alignment check can take place prior to
installing the car or counterweight frames.
2.15 CHAIN COMPENSATION
A. Provide chain compensation for travel less than 80 m and speed below
210m/min.
B. Compensate for the weight of hoist rope and the unbalanced portion of
traveling cable:
1. Provide Whisper Flex or equivalent chain compensation.
2. Securely attach the chain to counterweight frame and car safety plank, so
the chain will not become disconnected during a high speed stop.
3. Guide the chain in the pit using resilient guide rollers, mounted in a frame
connected to the pit floor. Ensure noiseless operation.
4. Provide sufficient numbers of chain to compensate for the weight of hoist

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
rope and unbalance portion of traveling cable, so that balance will not vary
over 50 kg for the entire range of lift travel.
2.16 HOISTING ROPE
A. Use rope designed specifically for lift service. Provide each lift with rope
from a single factory production run, sized for proper traction, minimal rope
bounce, and for at least 10 years service.
B. Secure dead ends to car and counterweight cross-heads (dead end hitch plate
if roped 2:1), with shackle rods having screw adjustment to equalise tension in all
ropes.
C. Use compression springs to equalize tension when lifts are running. Locate
shackle rods to facilitate adjustment and to minimize sheave groove or rope wear.
Use dampers to prevent any shackle noise. Tie shackles together, at each end, to
prevent rotation.
D. Terminate all stationary rope ends in tapered, babbitted rope sockets.
E. Tests shall be carried out at the manufacturer's works to ascertain that the ropes
comply with the appropriate code or standard, and test certificate shall be submitted
to the Engineer for approval prior to shipment.
2.17 GOVERNOR ROPE
A. Provide rope with manila or sisal core, meeting governor manufacturer’s

specifications.
B. Fasten both ends together at safety actuators, passing the rope over a
governor sheave at top, and over an adjustable tension device in the pit. Provide
restraint at anti-nodal points for fundamental vibration frequency.
C. Use retainers to prevent a swaying rope from contacting a moving lift,

anywhere in the lift well.
D. Tests shall be carried out at the manufacturer's works to ascertain that the ropes
comply with the appropriate code or standard, and test certificate shall be submitted
to the Engineer for approval prior to shipment.
2.18 ELEVATOR LANDING ENTRANCES
A. General
1. Each hoist way landing entrance assembly consisting of unit frame, door
panels, sill, hanger, closer, interlock, and their installation shall comply with
applicable Code requirements and shall carry the Underwriters Laboratories
Label Rating 1 1/2 hr. (B) or an equivalent test rating as approved. The
appropriate hardware shall carry the Underwriters Label Elevator Door
Hardware or equivalent.
2. The shop drawings shall detail the wall and unit frame connection for the
specific wall system. A certificate shall be provided from an approved testing
laboratory indicating that the specific wall and entrance assembly, consisting of
frame-door-panel-sill, has been tested in accordance with the latest version
of BS 5656, or equivalent test procedure as approved, in the wall system to be
used.

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
B. Unit Frames
1. Openings with Metal Jambs: Standard small profile frame, without
transom unless specified otherwise in the schedule of specifications or drawings.
The unit frames for service entrances to elevator shall be constructed of steel
sub frame having 1.9mm thick stainless steel with finishes as per Architectural
drawings. The head and side jambs shall be mitered, and smooth. The side
jambs shall be constructed of one continuous piece to extend from sill to head.
Frame shall be extended to align head soffit. An effective and fireproof sound
deadening material shall be applied to the inside of the frame from sill to head.
C. Door Panels
1. Lobby door panel finish at all levels shall be stainless steel with pattern both
internally as well as externally or as shown in architectural plans and as per
Engineer’s approval.
2. The hoistway landing entrances shall have door panels of the centre-
opening type or side opening with clear opening sizes as shown or as per
schedule.
3. The door panels for all floor openings shall be metal flush door
construction and shall be as manufactured as per BS Codes of Practice with
a minimum fire rating of 1 1/2 hrs. Provide continuous stiffener channels at top,
bottom and edges, welded to faceplates. The bottom of each door panel shall
be provided with a minimum of two (2) removable laminated phenolic guides
which run in the sill slots. Guides shall be designed to be replaced without
removing door panels. All doors shall be suitably reinforced and sound-
deadened and provided with keyways as required for door hangers and
operating mechanisms. All mitres, junctions or other joints shall be securely
welded, ground smooth and filed. The panels shall be lined on exposed side
with satin stainless steel facings.
4. Sight guards shall be provided for each leading landing door panel and shall
be formed of not less than 1.9 mm metal of the same type and with the same
finish as the door facing.
D. Sills: The landing sills for all openings shall be heavy duty Aluminium or equal
approved. Grooves in all sills for the door guides shall be machine planed with
minimum clearance for the guides. The sills shall be supported on steel
channels which are in turn supported on steel angles securely fastened to building
construction.
Door sill shall be constructed from stainless steel – Titanium coated with anti- slip
grooving and guiding slots, and shall be supported on steel anchors securely
fastened to the floor.
E. Struts and Closer Support Angles
1. Steel angles of adequate size shall be provided to rigidly support the hanger
housing and the door closers. The angles shall be continuous
between the sill and the building beams and securely bolted to the
header. Strut angles fastened to the guide rails will not be accepted.
2. Structural steel angles shall be provided of sufficient size to
accommodate the door closers. Angles shall be continuous and securely bolted

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
to the sills and building structure above.
F. Hanger Supports
Hanger supports shall be minimum 5mm thick, formed sections securely bolted to
strut angles or closer support angles.
G. Hanger Cover Plates
Hanger cover plates shall be steel and shall extend the full travel of the doors. Covers
shall be made in sections for convenient access when servicing the hangers. The
sections above the door opening shall be removable from within the elevator car.
H. Fascias: Fascia plates shall be 1.5 mm galvanized steel, reinforced as

necessary to ensure a flat even surface throughout and shall be securely fastened to
hanger housings and sills above. They shall extend at least the full width of the door
opening on each side. Blind fascias shall be provided as required to comply with the
Code to meet the actual space conditions. Fascias shall be reinforced or fastened
to minimize deflection to no more than plus or minus 10 mm.
I. Toe Guards: Toe guards shall be of 1.5 mm galvanized steel and shall be
installed at the lowest landing. They shall extend the full width of the door opening
on each side and be gradually bevelled to the wall. The straight portion of the
guards shall equal the distance from the bottom landing to the top of the fully
compressed buffer.
J. Dust Covers: Dust covers shall be 1.5 mm galvanized steel, shall be fastened to the
topmost header and gradually bevelled to the wall. Dust covers shall extend the full
width of travel of the doors.
K. Bumpers: Rubber bumpers mounted on top and bottom brackets shall be

provided at the extreme limit of travel of each door panel.
L. Protection:
1. Work damaged in transit shall not be installed, but shall be replaced with
undamaged material without additional compensation.
2. With the exception of stainless steel finishes, all exposed parts shall be
thoroughly cleaned of oil, grease and other foreign substances in preparation for
finishing. Materials shall then receive a rust preventing treatment followed by
a baked on primer coat and a coat colour as selected by the Engineer
enamel paint colour as selected by Engineer. All exposed surfaces of the doors
and frames shall have a factory applied temporary protective material applied
which must not be removed until
final commissioning is completed.
All structural members shall receive a shop coat of black paint.
2.19 EMERGENCY EXITS
A. Each car enclosure shall have emergency exits that conform with local Code
requirements.
B. All emergency exits shall be provided with electric contacts to prevent the
operation of the elevator with the exit doors open. The top emergency exit shall
RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
be operable without tools from the top of the car enclosure.
C. The top exit shall be guarded by a metal unistrut frame attached to the top of the
crosshead and enclosing the perimeter of the car top that contains the exit.
2.20 ELEVATOR CAR AND LANDING DOOR OPERATOR
A. Provide heavy-duty door VVVF operator with amply sized motor, which drives both
doors. Operator shall be top of the selection for application.
B. The doors on the car and at each landing opening shall be opened and closed quietly
and smoothly by an electric AC thyristor type or DC operator.
C. A protective leading-edge shall extend the full height and project beyond the front
edges of each leading car door panel. Should this device touch a person or object
while the car doors are closing, the car and hoistway doors shall return to their
open position. The leading edge shall retract when the doors are in the full open
position. Manual reversal of the doors while the elevator is on automatic operation
shall be accomplished by pressing a DOOR OPEN button in a car return access or
operating panel.
D. Door times shall be set to the following:
Door open time of 1.7 seconds

Door close time of 2.7 seconds
. Car dwell time of 1.5 seconds
Hall landing dwell time shall initially be set at 3.0 seconds. Dwell times for each
elevator should be independent adjustable at all floors
Door protective device interrupt time set at 20 seconds. All
timing devices shall be independently adjustable.
E. Each landing door system shall be equipped with an electro-mechanical

interlock so that the elevator can operate only when the interlock circuit is established.
F. Each landing door panel shall be closed at the reduced speed by an

independent, auxiliary closing device except door open button whenever the door
is prevented from closing for an adjustable period of time (initially set at 20 seconds)
by operation of protective devices. Under these conditions, loud
warning buzzer located on car shall sound.
G. Activation of door open button, under interrupt operation shall cause doors to
immediately stop their reduced speed closing and return to their fully open
position.Operation of door open button shall not override or cancel interrupt buzzer
annunciation.
H. An electric contact for the car door shall be provided which shall prevent
elevator movement away from the landing, unless the car door is in the closed position.
In case of power interruption, or failure of the operator, it shall be possible to operate
the car and landing doors manually from within the car enclosure.
I. Door operator and components shall be specifically designed to minimize noise.
2.21 ELEVATOR ELECTRONIC DOOR CONTROL
A. Provide a door protection device consisting of multiple infra red light beams.
RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
Detector shall be impervious to environmental condition such as temperature,
humidity, light and shall not be affected by cleaning compounds.
B. A switch shall be provided in the service cabinet, situated in the access panel of the
elevator cab, to cut out the electronic devices.
C. Detector device shall be capable of sensing any object in its path. Detector device
shall be mounted on car doors using a continuous beam and be provided with
a formed sight guard, designed to minimize gap between car door and hall landing
door sight guard. The device shall be capable to operate without requiring contact for
an obstruction passing through the opening at heights of 125mm and 735mm above
finish floor.
D Acceptable proximity detector manufacturer’s include:
1. Memco Panaforty
2. T.L. Jones Microscan II
3. Otis Lambda II
4. Or equal approved
E. If the car and landing doors fail to open within an adjustable time period present initially
at 20 seconds after the car is stopped at a landing for which a car call is registered,
the door opening signal shall be cancelled and the elevator shall answer other car
calls. If there are no other car calls registered, the elevator shall return to the main
landing without stopping for landing calls.
2.22 LANDING CALL ACKNOWLEDGING LIGHTS
A. Car and landing buttons shall be of call acknowledging type. The touch on a micro
touch button shall illuminate the button to acknowledge that a call has been
registered and extinguish when call is answered.
2.23 HALL CALL BUTTONS
A. Terminal floors shall contain a single button station and intermediate floors shall
contain both UP and DOWN buttons. Provide hall buttons on either side of elevator
with opposite doors.
B. Call buttons in elevator lobbies and halls shall be centered at 1065mm above the
floor. Such call buttons shall have visual signals to indicate when each call is
registered and when each call is answered. Call buttons shall be 19mm in the
smallest dimension. The button designated as the UP direction shall be on the top.
Button shall be mounted flush with and into face plate of stainless steel-Titanium
coated at all landings.
C. Provide hall fixture faceplates finished in stainless steel-Titanium coated at all levels.
Faceplates and buttons shall have temper-proof fastenings at all floors.
D. Engrave crossover floor fixture faceplates with phrases identifying floor served as
directed by the Engineer at shop drawing review stage.
2.24 HALL LANTERNS
A. Provide two directional triangular indication lanterns at ground floor landings and
a single directional indication lantern at terminal landings. Provide combination

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
fixtures housing for both up and down direction. Each lantern fixture shall contain
a single and double stroke gong completely concealed. Gongs shall sound once to
indicate UP direction travel and twice to annunciate a DOWN bound elevator or shall
have verbal annunciators that says “UP or DOWN”.
B. Visible signals shall have the following features:
 Hall lantern fixtures shall be mounted so that their centerline is at least

1830mm above the floor lobby.
 Visual element shall be at least 64mm in the smallest dimension.
 Signals shall be visible from the vicinity of the hall call buttons (refer to
architectural plans). In-car lanterns located in car, visible from the vicinity of hall
call buttons and conforming to the above requirements shall be acceptable.
C. The indicators for elevators shall be as approved by the Engineer. Faceplate to be

stainless steel and to be flush mounted on wall finish. Down and up lanterns
indicator shall be provided with colour illumination. The colour of the indicator shall
be agreed with Engineer. Provide digital hall position indicator with up and down
arrows creating a single cohesive lobby fixture.
D. As soon as an elevator has reached a predetermined distance from the floor and
is going to stop at the floor, the corresponding lantern will be illuminated
and the gong will sound sufficiently in advance whether a landing call has been
registered or not. The lantern shall remain illuminated until the elevator leaves the
landing. Should an elevator, in making a floor stop, over travel a short distance, the
waiting passenger lantern for that floor shall remain illuminated. The minimum
advance time shall be 4.0 seconds before the elevator stops at a landing.
2.25 CAR FRAME, SAFETY AND GOVERNOR
A. The car frame shall consist of structural steel members of size as approved by the
Engineer, securely riveted or bolted together and the frame shall be so reinforced and
braced as to relieve the car enclosure from undue strains. The safety shall be
mounted on the bottom members of the car frame and shall be operated by a speed
governor located over the hoist way. The safety shall be arranged to stop the
elevator whenever excessive descending speed is attained and means shall be
provided to cut off power from the motor and apply the brake prior to application of the
safety. The safety shall be released by moving the elevator in the UP direction.
B. The governor rope system, including the governor and tension sheave, shall be
arranged so that the carrier will not release due to system dynamics when the elevator
is subjected to an emergency stop in the UP direction.
C. The safety shall be provided with a switch to cut off power from the motor and apply
the brake if the safety applies without tripping of the governor.
D. Rope guards shall be provided on governor tension sheaves.
2.26 CAR PLATFORMS
A. Design car platform and frames to the loading category as specified in

schedules

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
B. The car platform of each elevator shall be rigid all steel construction consisting of a
galvanized steel sheet or pan mounted on structural framing. Alternatively, platform
construction shall be structural steel frame filled with two layers of wood flooring
and a top wood flooring of 19 mm marine plywood. The underside of the car
platform shall be covered with sheet steel.
C. The platform shall be mounted on rubber pads supported on an auxiliary steel frame
fastened to the car frame. This arrangement shall form an isolating cushion between
the car and steel car frame.
D. The car platform with enclosure shall be balanced to equalize the guide
pressure front to back and side to side at a level not to exceed 18 Kg. with no load in
the car.
2.27 CAR OPERATING DEVICES
A. Provide car operating panel in the side panel containing a set of flush mounted car
operating devices. Design of panels shall be as per drawings. Provide
panels with hidden piano type hinges, designed to allow access to car
operating controls for servicing. Height of the panels shall be from above kick plate
to cab entrance header.
B. Car operating buttons, key switches and service cabinet shall be flush mounted in
operating panels.
C. Provide car calls buttons and registration lights, corresponding to each level served
in letters character combination (English and Arabic). Car button controls shall
match hall landing buttons, with a stainless steel –Titanium coated finish and
illuminating halo for all car operating fixtures.
D. Registration of car call shall cause corresponding light to illuminate. When call is
answered, call shall cancel and light extinguish. In addition to car call buttons provide
the following control item:
1. Emergency alarm button

2. Door open button
3. Door close button
4. Emergency operation key switch engraved in red
5. Where an accessible emergency is provided, it should be a key switch
type.
E. Provide a lockable, flush-mounted auxiliary car station’s operating buttons.

Cabinet face plate finish shall match operating panel finish and be equipped with
concealed hinge. Cabinet shall contain the following switches:
1. Independent key switch with key removable in “OFF” position only. Use of
toggle switch is not acceptable.
2. Car fan switch.
3. Car battery power emergency lighting test switch (momentary position

type).
4. Cab light switch.

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
5. Any other key switch required to operate or service elevator. When
maintenance switch is provided, it shall be a keyed switch.
6. Permanent identify “ON” and “OFF” positions of all key switches either by
engraving or collar ring.
2.28 CAR POSITION AND DIRECTION INDICATORS
A. Provide in car enclosure, digital position indicators and direction arrows above the
panels of the car and on ground floor landings mounted above the landing doors.
Locate indicators so that the distance from the fixture centre-line to the finished cab
floor is not less than 2 metres. The indicator shall be mounted flush with the
surface of the panel and flush mounted on the wall finish. Numerals to be a
minimum of 35 mm high. As the elevator travels through
hoist-way, its position shall be indicated by the illumination of the numeral
corresponding to the landing at which the elevator is stopped or passing and the
audible signal shall sound. The audible signal shall not be less than 20 dB with a
frequency no higher than 1500 Hz. An automatic verbal announcement of the floor
number at which a car stops or which a car passes may be substituted for audible
signal.
B. As the elevator travels through hoist-way, its position shall be indicated by the
illumination of the numeral corresponding to the landing at which the elevator is
stopped or passing. Indicators shall be sufficiently bright to be readily
understood under cab lighting condition.
2.29 SAFETY DEVICES
A. Pit Safety Switch: Provide pits with safety switches accessible from the
entrances to the pits. Safety switches shall interrupt the power supply and hold the
car(s) to permit safe access to the pits for servicing.
B. Hoistway Door Unlocking Devices: Provide hoistway door unlocking devices
conforming to the requirements of ANSI or EN 81 Code for all elevators to permit
authorised persons to gain access to hoistway when each elevator is away from
the landing. Provide in locations as directed by the Engineer at all floors, and in
accordance with all governing Codes.
C. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards for all openings, installed in a manner to reduce
to a minimum the clearance between the hoistway doors and the car doors so as
to conceal the hoistway and car beyond the door opening. Sight guards to have
same finish as hoistway doors.
D. Alarm Bell: A push button shall be fitted on the control panel in each car
arranged to ring a battery operated bell sited at the Security area, the final and precise
position of which shall be approved by the Engineer. Bell, batteries, charger and all
interconnecting wiring shall be supplied and installed as a part of this Work.
2.30 CAR ENCLOSURES
A. Provide panoramic car enclosure as arranged and as shown on the

architectural drawings. The method of fixing and backing support structures as well
as adherence to appropriate health and safety standards will be subject to specific
manufacturers recommendations and proposals as set out in shop drawings for
approval by the Engineer.

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
B. All cab interior finishes shall be as shown in architectural drawings and shall be
provided by the Lift Contractor.
C. Car Walls: Walls shall be in sheet steel, minimum 2 mm thick, of sufficient

mechanical strength that the performance requirements of BS. 5655, Part 1/EN
81, Part 1 are satisfied. Car structure shall be fireproof, enclosed with metal,
suitably braced or reinforced and securely riveted or bolted together, or as approved
by the Engineer to resist any undue strain.
D. Car Roof: Roof shall be constructed in sheet steel, minimum 2.5 mm thick, of
sufficient mechanical strength that the performance requirements of BS. 5655, Part
1/EN 81, Part 1 are satisfied. Emergency top exit with electrical contacts shall be
provided. Exit details, including hinging and locking arrangement of top exit, shall
be shown on shop drawings.
E. Wall Finishes:
a) As shown on the architectural drawings and as shown in schedules and shall

be provided by the lift contractor.
Wall finishes shall be minimum 2mm thick of sufficient mechanical strength that the
performance requirements of BS 5655 Part 1 EN 81, Part 1 are satisfied. The
panels shall be equally divided removable panels spread vertically and shall be
fixed on 12mm plywood backing bolted on a system of steel angles forming a frame
bolted to the structure of the cabin.
F. Car Wall Skirtings: Refer to Architectural drawings. G.
Car Landing Door and Frame: Refer to Section 2.17. H.
Ceiling:
1. Passenger Polished: Stainless steel – As architectural drawings to match with

low voltage downlights with high frequency electronic ballast. Arrange for
easy replacement of ballast and lamps. Provide minimum of
200 lux, measured 1000mm above car floor.
2. Provide low voltage lighting fixtures for passenger and fluorescent fixture for
service elevator with high frequency electronic ballast and controlled switch.
3. Ceiling to incorporate an openable accessible panel to reach car roof.
I. Handrails: The handrails and protective railing shall be stainless steel –

Titanium coated finish. Both handrail and the protective railing shall be firmly fixed
on stainless steel – Titanium coated backing with fixing to brackets passing
through finish. The system of fixation should be firm to take the heavy- duty population
and accidental hits caused by goods trolleys. The location of handrail and protective
railing shall be restricted to side walls in opposite opening and to all walls in the
cabin in lone doors.
J. Car Operating Panel: Refer to Section 2.27.
K. Floor Plan of Elevator Car: The floor area of the elevator cars shall provide space
for wheel chair users to enter the car, manoeuvre within reach of controls and

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
exit from the car. The clearance between the car platform sill and the edge of any
hoistway landing shall be no greater than 25-32mm.
L. Floor Finish:
1. Subfloor:
(a) 6mm thick galvanized steel plate through bolt to platform with counter
sunk bolts or weld directly to platform.
2. Finish:
(a) Refer to architectural drawings and schedules. Recess and weight for
finishes to exclude from specified capacity of elevator.
M. Ventilation: Provide two speed exhaust fan (250cfm for low speed and 350cfm for
high speed) mounted above suspended ceiling, sized to give a minimum of
15 air changes per hour. Fan shall have sealed, self-lubricating bearing.
Provide fan unit with steel cage and reinforced top plate. Noise level should not exceed
55 dB measured on “A” scale, when fan is operating on high speed. Sound
measurement shall be taken at approximately 600mm above the car floor. Cab fan
shall operate on independent circuit.
N. Intercom: Provide an intercom station within car operating panel. The intercom station
shall provide car alarm emergency call facility registered visually and audibly at the
elevator monitoring panel at Control Room/Security Room. Provide also intercom
facility between each car and lift installation contractor maintenance office via
telephone/PC network for remote elevator monitoring. The main station shall then
be capable of having two way voice contact with the car station (without the car station
having any further action to take to maintain speech contact). All intercom station
controls shall be clearly labelled in Arabic and English lettering and raised symbol
located adjacent to device. If the system uses hand set then the length of the cord
from the panel to the hand set shall be 735mm. The intercom system shall be
powered from a common line charged battery located in the machine room. The
highest operable part of two way communication shall be a maximum 1220mm from
the floor of the car.
O. Emergency Lights, Fans and Signals:
1. Emergency battery operated lighting units mounted on top of each car

enclosure. Cabinets shall be constructed of not less than 0.7mm steel and
shall be adequately ventilated. A lock shall be provided for the door. The door
shall be provided with concealed hinges. Cabinet shall be painted.
2. A fully automatic solid state controlled dual-rate battery charger with a dry type
full wave rectifier shall be provided.
3. Part of the normal low voltage downlights/fluorescent shall be connected to the

battery pack to light only when normal power fails.
4. A voltmeter shall indicate the state of charge with a red pilot light to
indicate when the high rate charger is in operation.
5. Batteries shall be nickel-cadmium with ten cells per battery, each cell
nominally rated at 1.2 volts operation for a total of 12 volts. Batteries shall have
a capacity of not less than 70 watts load for a minimum of four (4) hours of
operation to an end voltage of not less than 91% of total nominal battery voltage.

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
6. The charger shall be so designed as to maintain the batteries fully
charged on the trickle rate without the addition of water to the battery for a period
of 4 to 5 years.
2.31 ELEVATOR MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
A. Provide computerized elevator management system for monitoring, managing and

analyzing all the elevators. The elevator management system equipment shall be
located in the Security Room at Basement.
1. High resolution colour video monitor.

2. Key Board.
3. Personal Computer with mass storage.
4. Printer.
5. Interconnecting cables between various machine rooms to the central
system.
B. Central processing unit shall be tied into all elevators so as to allow for
interactive communication between elevator management central unit processing
and each elevator controller. System shall be arranged to display real time elevator
operating information on monitor unit. Information shall be displayed in a graphic and
tabular or typed graphics format.
C. Monitoring system shall be provided with a master menu of various system

information and interactive control functions including, but not limited to:
1. Status display which shall detail:

a. Location of elevators b.
Location of hall calls c.
Registered car calls d.
Direction of car travel
e. Door operating status
f. Car loading information
g. Individual car operating mode
2. Performance details including:

a. Dwell times
b. Car flight time c.
Interrupt time d. Door
times
3. Event and Error Record displaying:

a. Date of error or event
b. Location of error or event c.
Type of event or error
d. Number of occurrences
4. Performance Display detailing:
a. Individual car statistics such as door operations and door
reversals.
b. Hall call activity reports
c. Hall call waiting time summaries
D. System shall be provided with a minimum 17” high definition LCD monitor,
complete with brightness and tint controls

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
E. Computer unit shall be of latest technology compact design Pentium 4, 3.2
GHz (min) complete with minimum 160 GB hard disk drive storage, 1 GB RAM,
upgradable upto 2GB, DVD& CD ROM drive, with 32bit sound video card ,colour
graphic adapter, network adapter, printer . Provide all necessary software and
interface functions to allow for initial set up and interconnection with Building’s
standard printer and external communication devices.
F. Provide IBM “Enhanced” type keyboard unit complete with alphanumeric keys,
number pad and function keys. Keyboard unit shall allow for building
personnel to input keystroke commands allowing the modification and
alteration of existing car and group operating parameters. Provide system with
necessary control logic to allow, as a minimum, for the implementation of the
following remote control sequences:
1. Car “Return to Lobby”. When appropriate keyboard commands are issued,

car shall respond to no further hall calls, complete all registered car calls then
express non stop to the level. Upon arrival car shall park with its doors open
for a minimum period of 30 seconds. At the expiration of this extended dwell
time, if the in car independent services switch or other car control switches
have not been activated, car shall automatically return to normal group operation.
2. Car “Shut Down”. Keyboard commands, once activated, shall cause the
respective elevator to complete all registered car calls, then express to
predetermined level. Upon arrival at this landing, elevator shall open its doors
for the minimum lobby dwell interval. Upon expiration of this dwell time, doors
shall close and car shall shut down. If the elevator is already at this Level when
the “Shut Down” feature is activated the elevator shall close its doors and shut
down. Car door open button shall operate as long as “Shut Down” operation
is in effect. “Shut Down” operation shall be cancelled from keyboard by a
specified, unique command. The hall button riser shall be de-activated when
all cars within a group are “Shut Down”. Special emergency services operation
shall automatically override the “Shut Down” sequence.
3. System software shall allow for unique password designations to protect

against unwarranted access to system modification and control functions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 DUPLEX SELECTIVE – COLLECTIVE AUTOMATIC OPERATION
A. The operation of all elevators shall be Duplex Up and Down Automatic

Operation and shall be arranged as defined by the BS 5656 Safety Code or
European Standard EN/81 Safety Code, and as described below.
B. The operation of the elevators shall be from the landing buttons, and from the car
buttons in the car operating device.
C. The operation shall be such that momentary pressure of one or more car buttons
or landing buttons, other than those for the landing at which the elevator is
standing, shall start the elevator, provided the interlock circuits are established and
cause the elevator to stop at the first landing for which a car or landing call is registered
corresponding to the direction in which the elevator is traveling. The elevator shall
stop at all landings for which calls are registered and these stops shall be made in

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
the order in which the calls are reached, irrespective of the sequence in which the
calls are registered, provided the call for a given landing is registered sufficiently in
advance of the arrival of the elevator at that landing to permit the stop to be made.
D. If there are no car calls and the elevator starts UP in response to several DOWN
calls, the elevator shall proceed first to the highest DOWN call and then reverse to
collect.
E. If DOWN landing button is pressed while the elevator is traveling UP, the
elevator shall not stop at these landings, but these calls shall remain
registered. After the last car and landing calls have been answered and the door
interlock circuit is established, the elevator shall reverse automatically and respond to
DOWN car and landing calls. When traveling DOWN, the elevator shall not respond
to UP landing calls, but these call shall remain registered and be answered on the
next UP trip.
3.2 SIMPLEX COLLECTIVE SELECTIVE OPERATION
A. Provide car with simplex selective collective control, complete with independent
service operation.
B. The operation of the elevator shall be from the landing buttons and the car buttons
in the car operating devices.
C. The operation shall be such that momentary pressure on one or more car buttons
or landing buttons, other than those for the landing at which the elevator is
standing, shall start the elevator, provided in the interlock circuits are established
and cause the elevator to stop at the first landing for which a car or landing call is
registered corresponding to the direction in which the elevator is traveling. The
elevator shall stop at all landings for which calls are registered and these stops shall
be made in order in which the landings are reached, irrespective of the sequence
in which the calls are registered, provided the call for a given landing is registered
sufficiently in advance of the
arrival of the elevator at that landing to permit the stop to be made.
D. If there are no car calls and the elevator starts UP in response to several DOWN
calls, the elevator shall proceed first to the highest DOWN call and then reverse to
collect the other DOWN calls. UP calls shall be collected similarly when the elevator
starts DOWN in response to such calls. If the elevator without car calls stops
for a landing call and a car call is registered within a predetermined interval after
the stop for a landing corresponding to the direction the elevator was traveling,
the elevator shall proceed in the same direction regardless of other landing calls
registered.
E. If DOWN landing buttons are pressed while the elevator is traveling UP, the
elevator shall not stop at these landings, but these calls shall remain
registered. After the highest car and landing calls have been answered and the door
interlock circuit is established, the elevator shall reverse automatically and respond to
DOWN car and landing calls. When traveling DOWN, the elevator shall not respond
to UP landing calls, but these calls shall remain registered and be answered on the
next UP trip.
3.3 OPERATION AND CONTROL FEATURES
A. Provide elevator control system with the operation and control features as
RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
specified herein:
1. Provide load weighting to dispatch car ahead of prevailing operating

intervals once it is filled to approximately 60% of rated capacity. Load weighting
shall be provided to by-pass hall calls in event car becomes and/or remains filled
at 50% rated capacity. Both settings shall be independently adjustable.
2. Provide anti-nuisance service which automatically cancels registered car calls

when number of registered car calls exceeds proportional load in car.
Where anti nuisance operates in combination with door detector, protect
against cancellation of car calls in the event the detector is shut off or
malfunctioning.
3. Provide independent service feature which will allow individual car to be

withdrawn from group operation and operate in response to car calls only.
Independent service to be controlled by two position key switch mounted in
each car’s service cabinet. Registered car calls shall be capable of cancellation
by turning key switch to “Off” position. Independent service switch shall only
take car out of group operation when switch is turned to “On” position.
Independent service key switch shall only allow key to be removed when switch
is in the “OFF” position. When car is operating under independent service,
automatic door closing operation shall be not be allowed. Doors shall close
by constant pressure on either car call button or Door Close button. Under
independent service hall lantern signals shall be de-activated for the
respective elevator. In the case where there is only one car in group service,
hall landing call buttons shall be de-activated when this car is operating under
independent service.
Automatic shut down of motor generators shall not be allowed as long as car
is operating under independent operation.
3.4 INSPECTION SERVICE OPERATION
A. A two-position key switch shall be permanently provided to operate each

elevator from the top of the car enclosure during adjustment, inspection,
maintenance and repair. The operating means shall be of the continuous pressure
type and the speed of the cars shall not exceed maintenance speed as per code. It
shall operate the car only when the car doors and all hoistway doors are closed. The
switch shall be located in a car service cabinet.
B. Hoistway access switches shall be provided at the top and bottom terminal
landings to access the top of the car enclosure and the pit. The bottom
terminal device shall be omitted when pit access is by other means.
3.5 EMERGENCY POWER AUTOMATIC SEQUENCING
A. When transfer switch transfers to emergency power, there will be sufficient

emergency power available to run elevators.
B. Operation of elevators shall be controlled to allow the following sequence of

operation:
1. Single elevator shall start up and automatically return non-stop to the

emergency power recall level. Upon arrival at emergency power recall level,
elevator shall fully open its doors and then shut down. Once car has either been
returned to emergency power recall level or alternatively have been by-passed,
RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
the controller shall automatically allow elevator, depending upon selection
to commence normal operation under standby power. The car shall respond
to hall and car calls as if operating under normal power.
C. Under automatic emergency power recall operation, the following shall occur:
1. A car on independent service shall sound a buzzer, automatically close its doors
and return to emergency power recall Lobby.
2. A car parked at emergency power recall lobby with its doors closed, shall open
its doors, and then shut down.
3. Flight times and other car operating performance times shall comply with the
specified settings.
4. A car which is on “independent service” shall not be selected to operate as

the designated emergency power elevator. Instead, this elevator shall return to
the main recall lobby, open its doors, then shut down. At that time, another
elevator shall be automatically selected to operate under standby power.
5. A car with its doors blocked open shall sound continuous buzzer until the
obstruction is removed or the car has been bypassed.
6. Should an elevator fail to start up and commence its return to emergency power
recall lobby, after an adjustable period of time, initially set at 20 seconds, it shall
be automatically by-passed and the next car within that group shall be signalled
to start up. Should the last elevator within a group fail to start up and
commence its return to emergency power recall lobby, after an adjustable
period of time, initially set at 20 seconds, its group or triplex controller shall
automatically signal the next group or triplex controller in the sequencing chain
as described above.
D. Upon receipt of signal from transfer switch, indicating imminent transfer of power
supplies from normal to emergency (i.e. under a test or simulation condition), bring all
elevators to a safe stop at their next available floor landing. Upon arrival, elevators
shall open their doors and shut down, leaving their doors open. Elevators
shall start up and commence sequence return operations after transfer to
emergency power has been completed. Once cars are operating under emergency
power, and transfer switch signals return to normal power, bring cars which are in
operation to their next safe stopping, available floor landing and park cars with their
doors open. Restart elevators once normal power has resumed.
E. Provide necessary sequencing and logic circuits, plus all interconnecting wiring, to
permit sequence operations within and between elevator groups as required.
3.6 FIREMAN’S OPERATION
A. The automatic elevators designated for Firemen Service Operation in

compliance with KFD standards and shall be equipped as follows:
1. A two-position key switch shall be provided adjacent to the main landing push
button station for the group elevators. The key switch shall have the following
positions: OFF and ON.
2. Keys for Firemen Service landing and car key switches shall be keyed to the
standard selected by the local authorities for use by the Fire Department. The
RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
key shall be removable from the landing station in the OFF and ON positions,
and from the car station in only the OFF position.
3. The positions of key switches and the identification of Firemen Service

controls shall be in red lettering. The fixture faceplates for the car and landing
controls shall bear the red lettering FOR FIRE DEPARTMENT USE, and its
equivalent translation in Arabic, in letters no less than 3.5 mm high.
B. Elevator shall operate from the main landing key switch when it is changed from
the OFF to the ON position as follows:
1. The elevator shall close its doors if open and return nonstop to the main landing
without responding to registered car or landing calls. An elevator traveling away
from the main landing shall stop and reverse its next possible landing
without opening its doors. In the event of fire at the main landing floor, the
elevator shall return non-stop to the floor above or below the main landing floor.
2. The door reopening devices which may be affected by the products of combustion
shall be rendered inoperative.
3. Car and landing call buttons shall be rendered inoperative and all call
acknowledging lights and waiting passenger lanterns shall be extinguished
until the Firemen Service switch at the main landing or supervisory panel is turned
to the BYPASS or OFF position.
4. Elevator shall park at its main landing. The car and landing doors shall open
and remain open until the Firemen Service switch is turned to the BYPASS
or OFF position.
C. Elevator for Firemen Service shall be operable only from their car call buttons by
actuation of the two-position key switch in each main car operating panel from the
OFF position to the ON position.
1. Each elevator may be controlled from the normal car buttons for the
landings served, from the normal DOOR OPEN button, and from the special
DOOR CLOSE button. This operation shall override other key switch controls
and the landing call buttons but shall be operational only when the Firemen
Service switch at the landing is in the ON position.
2. When the elevator reaches the selected floor, the car and hoistway doors shall
be opened only by constant pressure of the DOOR OPEN button. Once the
doors are completely open the button may be released. If the DOOR OPEN
button is released during the opening process, the doors shall close and
remain closed. The doors, once open, shall remain open until they are closed
by pressure of the DOOR CLOSE button.
4. The emergency stop switch shall be restored to operation. Landing door

interlocks shall remain operative.
D. Elevator when on INDEPENDENT or INSPECTION operation shall be signaled to

return to the main landing when the landing key switch is in the ON position or when
the elevators are recalled by automatic detection means.
RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
1. The emergency signal shall sound a distinctive tone, bell or gong located on
the top of the car enclosure.
E. Elevator shall operate as follows and when getting a signal from the main fire
alarm and detection system.
1. Elevator shall return nonstop to their main landing without responding to

registered car or landing calls. An elevator traveling away from its main landing
shall stop and reverse its direction at its next possible landing without opening
its doors.
2. The emergency stop switch shall be rendered inoperative. All other safety
circuits shall remain operative.
4. Car and landing call buttons shall be rendered inoperative and all call
acknowledging lights and waiting passenger lanterns shall be extinguished.
5. Elevator shall park at its main landing with doors open. If the main landing
detector operates, the elevators shall park at the landing above.
3.7 EXAMINATION
A. Take critical site dimensions to ensure tolerances and clearance to other

building site work. Ensure that anchors, inserts, pockets, bearings, services and
similar provisions, installed are adequate. Advise Engineer immediately of any
variances of conflicts with related work provisions as installed.
3.8 CO-ORDINATION
A. Ensure that all construction and services requirements related to the elevator
installation but not performed by the Contractor are explicitly communicated to the
Engineer by the following:
1. Drawings.
2. Diagrams.
3. Engineering data sheets.
4. Other forms of special instruction.
B. Instructions shall be issued before the installation of all related work

commences.
C. Construction requirements shall include, but are not restricted to the following:
1. Location of machines.
2. Location of operating devices.
3. Framing.
4. Loadings.
5. Hoistway and pit dimensions.
6. Guide rail supports.
7. Cutting and patching.

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
8. Access for installation of elevator equipment.
9. Holes and sleeving requirements in floor slabs, pits, walls and other
constructions.
10. Temporary protection.
D. Assist in the location, means of construction and installations as provided by other

Contractors specifically for the installation of the elevator equipment. Provide all
necessary templates.
A. Package and crate elevator fabrications to prevent damage during handling and
storage.
1. Brace entrance door frames, doors, and car components to prevent

distortion in handling and storage.
2. Protect finished surfaces with protective wrappings.
3. Protect finished surfaces of entrance frames, doors, cars, controls and

accessories with removable covering that will not damage finish.
4. Leave all protective coverings in place until its removal is directed at time of
final cleaning.
B. Store elevator materials in locations and areas as designated by Contractor.
3.10 HOISTING
A. All required hoisting and movement of elevator equipment, required in addition to

that provided by others (refer to Section 01500), for the purposes of installation,
warranty and maintenance work shall be the complete responsibility of the
Contractor.
3.11 INSTALLATION
A. Arrange equipment in machine room space so that equipment can be removed for
repairs or replacement without dismantling other equipment components.
B. Coordinate with mechanical equipment contractor regarding installation of

machine room ventilation and cooling equipment in machine room space.
C. Erect guide rails plumb and parallel in accordance with the requirements and to the
tolerances specified in BS 6560.
D. Provide fastening devices for rail brackets to attach to either steel or concrete support
surfaces. Weld brackets steel beam sections where provided.
E. In concrete structures, supply all necessary inserts for installation by others, and
coordinate. Alternatively, provide self-drilling expansion shall bolt anchors
for support of rail brackets. Where Engineer considers a concrete fastener improperly
installed, either replace fastening or demonstrate stability of fastener by
performing on-site test under which fastener is subjected to four times manufacturer’s
rated safe pullout or working load.

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
F. Provide all necessary steel anchor plates, flanges, grits and angles, as
required to fasten rail brackets to steel support beams.
G. Use metal shims only to a maximum of 25 mm and provide lock washers under all
nuts and tap bolts.
H. Compensate for expansion and contraction of guide rails and building

movement.
I. Anchor guide rails in pit so as not to reduce effectiveness of waterproofing.

Any fittings in pit to be installed before waterproofing are applied.
J. Include steel reinforcement and backing for car guide rails where necessary.
Use splice plates and guide rails with contact surfaces accurately machined to form
a smooth joint.
K. Set entrance frames in alignment with elevator cab platform. Fasten frames and
feeders to building walls by substantial ties.
L. Set entrance frames in alignment with car openings and true and plumb hoist way
lines. Maximum variation from plumb for each entrance shall be 1.5mm, measured
vertically for entrance frames and horizontally for landing sills.
M. Arrange hall lantern and fixture signal boxes to accommodate fire stop backing.
Coordinate with other Contractors regarding the installation of fire stops. N.
Install all machine room controller wiring in a neat fashion.
1. All wiring shall be laced and wrapped.

2. All spare wires shall be tagged or otherwise clearly marked.
3. All wire connections shall be fastened to studs or terminal strips using solder
or mechanical fasteners.
4. All connection points, components, relays, fuses and printed circuit boards
shall be clearly and permanently marked. Use designations corresponding to
those used on electrical prints and wiring diagrams.
5. All use ratings shall be marked and all fuses shall be installed so that their fuse
ratings are clearly visible.
3.12 ERECTION
A. Erect elevator closures in accordance with Code requirements.
B. Exposed work in cars and at entrances shall be fabricated in true planes, flat and
straight, free of buckles, waves and other visible imperfections.
1. Joints shall be accurately fitted and properly aligned.

2. All fasteners shall be concealed unless permitted by Engineer to be
exposed.
3. All welds shall be undetectable in finished work.
C. Set fixture boxes in vertical alignment and install coverplates so they are plumb,
parallel and square with entrance frames and lobby finish grid.
3.13 TOUCH-UP

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
A. Touching up of factory finished surfaces will not be allowed. Any damaged or
defective items shall be replaced.
B. Remove protective coverings and clean exposed surfaces after completion and leave
in first class condition.
C. Clean running faces of all guide rails before final acceptance of elevator
installation.
3.14 CO-ORDINATION
A. Comply with co-ordination requirements as specified.
3.15 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
A. On completion of the entire elevators installation work notify the Engineer, in writing,
that the completed elevator work is ready for inspection. Before doing so, perform
initial trial tests and correct, adjust, calibrate, balance, regulate, etc., the installation
as necessary until the specified and required performance conditions are obtained.
B. Submit test and approval certificates issued by jurisdictional authorities

including Local Fire Department.
C. Notify Engineer, in writing, one (1) week prior to all safety inspections.
D. Comply with requirements as specified in Division 1 General Requirements.
E. Provide for a minimum period of 15 working days, one technically competent person
thoroughly conversant with the specified control systems, to carry out performance
and acceptance inspections.
F. Provide a minimum of twenty working days notice to Engineer to arrange for

scheduling acceptance and performance inspections.
G. Performance and acceptance inspections shall be carried out in the presence of the
Engineer and/or Employer’s authorized representative. These tests shall only be
undertaken after successful completion of manufacturer’s, local authority’s and third
party (Lloyd’s) acceptance inspections. Acceptance inspections shall be scheduled
to allow complete group operational checks.
H. Supply instruments, including test weights and carry out Engineer’s
performance and acceptance inspections on all equipment as noted above. Make
available for the following performance checks, test weights equal to at least 125%
of each car’s full rated capacity. Checks shall be done, but not limited to the
following:
1. Car flight times under full load and speed condition in both direction of travel.
2. Car door operating times.
3. Door dwell times.
4. Rated speed performance with full rated load in car.
5. Car riding quality.
6. Control operation including performance of all control features.
7. Operation of load weighing dispatch and bypass shall be undertaken with test
weights as supplied by the Contractor for the purpose of acceptance testing.
I. After the connection of the permanent power supply, commission all parts of the
RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
elevator installations covered by this Specification and demonstrate to the Engineer
that the entire elevator installations are in perfect working order and perform as
specified. Repeat the test on power connection from generator as directed by
Engineer.
J. Provide the services of a specialist from the manufacturer and or approved

technical representative who shall be present at the time of testing and commissioning
of the Elevator Systems. Include for all expenses incurred in this respect as no
claim for additional payment will be entertained.
K. Submit to the Engineer test reports, which shall include all records of test
procedures, readings and results obtained.
L. Include all expenses incurred for third party inspection (Lloyd’s inspection) for the
elevators and related systems.
M. Provide training for persons nominated by the Employer in the operation and
maintenance of the complete conveying system.
N. The Contractor shall be responsible for correcting all noted deficiencies
3.16 SCHEDULE OF REQUIREMENTS
A. Identification:
1 - No. of lifts
2 - Type
3 - Load/No. of passengers.
4 - Speed (m/sec) / Machine type.
5 - No. of floors served.
6 - No. of landing entrances.
7 - Type of control.
8 - Rated starts / hr.
B. Structural Dimensions:
1 - Location of machine room.

2 - Travel.
3 - Well enclosure Width =
Depth =
Pit (depth) =
Headroom (*) =
Construction =
4 - Machine room Width =

Depth =
Height (**) =
5 - Cabin / Net
platform size (m2) Width =

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
Depth =
Area =
Height =
6 - Door Width =
Height =
Number =
Note:
(*) - Measured from last landing served to, top of machine slab. (**)
- Measured from machine slab to underside of roof.
C. Technical details for lifts
1 - Manufacturers Name :
Address : Country
:
2 - Type
3 - Standard of manufacturer
4 - Lift capacity (Kg)
5 - Speed (m/sec)
6 - Approx. weight of :
- Complete car (Kg)
- Counterweight (Kg)
- Motor, Gear drive, sheave & Frame (Kg)
7 - Driving Motor details:

- Manufacturer
- Model No.
- Type of driving motor & method of control
- Winding system & levelling
- Motor speed
- Motor H.P
- Power consumption
- Full load current
- Starting current
- Normal operating current
- Power factor at full load
- Motor insulation
- Motor protection
a - Phase failure
b - Phase reversal c
- Overload
- Total heat dissipation (Kal/Hr)

- Max. motor operating temperature
8 - Driving Machine Gearless /Gearing:

- Type
- Manufacturer
RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
- Reduction ratio(geared)
- Driving sheave diameter
- Diverting sheave diameter
- Supporting bearing
9 - Brake System
10 - Rope Details:
Suspension Ropes Safety Ropes

- No.
- Diameter
- Construction
- Safety factor
11 - Guide shoes
12 - Cabin guide rails
13 - Counterweight guide rails
14 - Speed governor & tripping speed
15 - Safety gear
16 - Limit switch
- Type
- Fixation
17 - Counterweight
18 - Buffers
19 - Emergency escape & operation
20 - Fireman control
21 - Control & operation system
22 - Controller:
- Enclosure
- Low rectified voltage for control system
23 - Car construction & finishes:

- Material
- Acoustic treatment
- Handrails
- Lighting fixture
- Emergency lighting & alarm
- Fan
24 - Control facilities in car:

- Floor buttons
- Stop button
- Emergency alarm
- By-pass
- Lighting switch
- Overload
- Fan switch
- Attendant Switch
- Fireman control
- Telephone
- Door open
- Door close
25 - Type of indications in landing floors (in detail)

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road
26 - Car doors:
- Number
- Type
- Construction
- Finish
- Safety edge
- Electronic door control
- Emergency operation
27 - Landing doors:
- Number
- Type
- Construction
- Finish
- Emergency operation
28 - General Finishing:
- Car walls
- Car ceiling
- Handrails
- Car flooring
- Car door & type
- Landing door & Type
- Hall indicators
- Car position indicators
- Landing position indicators
D. Technical detail of Elevator Management system & Intercom system
END OF SECTION

RADCARE - B01- King
Fahd Road

Radcare R Package

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Radcare R Package

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RADCARE - SPECIALZED RADIOLOGY CENTRE

B01- King Fahd Road

RIYADH - KINGDOM SAUDI ARABIA

ARCHITECTURAL AND INTERIOR DESIGN

ARCHITECTURAL AND INTERIOR DESIGN LIST OF DELIVERABLES

Architectural and Interior Design List of Deliverables

1 2 0 2 3 0 3 6DDAR 0 0 0 0 0 0 Architectural and Interior Design List of Deliverables - 3 A4

16 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 0 1 0 0 0 0 Floor Layout Ground Floor 1:100 1 A1

35 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 1 0 0 0 0 Millworks Reception Desk - MI1010 - 06200 Architectural Woodwork 1:50_1:20 4 A1

51 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 2 0 0 0 0 Typical Toilet 1_4 - Public&Internal Ground Floor 1:50_1:20 1 A1

72 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A R 1 4 0 0 0 0 Door&Windows Schedule 1:30 1 A1

81 2 0 2 3 0 3 6 D D A D 1 9 0 0 0 0 Ground Floor Arch. Detail Tagging 1:100 1 A1

B01- King Fahd Road

RIYADH - KINGDOM SAUDI ARABIA

2023036DD AR0001_00_Technical Description Pag. 1

2023036DD AR0001_00_Technical Description Pag. 2

The area dedicated to the Radiology measure 2,064.00 square meters,

1.1. LAY OUT and INTERNAL FLOWS

2023036DD AR0001_00_Technical Description Pag. 3

2023036DD AR0001_00_Technical Description Pag. 4

At the GROUND floor we can find:

2023036DD AR0001_00_Technical Description Pag. 5

The yellow color includes Lab’s functions and Sample area.

At the MEZZANINE Floor we can find:

The green color includes Staff and medical spaces.

In the end, the blue color shows Administration’s area.

2023036DD AR0001_00_Technical Description Pag. 6

2023036DD AR0001_00_Technical Description Pag. 7

2023036DD AR0001_00_Technical Description Pag. 8

1.4. Staff area

2023036DD AR0001_00_Technical Description Pag. 9

Atrium_ view from the entrance

2023036DD AR0001_00_Technical Description Pag. 10

2023036DD AR0001_00_Technical Description Pag. 11

Corridor_ Ground Floor

2023036DD AR0001_00_Technical Description Pag. 12

2023036DD AR0001_00_Technical Description Pag. 13

2023036DD AR0001_00_Technical Description Pag. 14

2023036DD AR0001_00_Technical Description Pag. 15

B01- King Fahd Road

RIYADH - KINGDOM SAUDI ARABIA

INTERIOR DESIGN RENDERS

INTERIOR DESIGN RENDERS

MAIN PATIEN’S CORRIDOR LAYOUT

B01- King Fahd Road

RIYADH - KINGDOM SAUDI ARABIA

-10436 EXTERIOR CLINIC SIGNS &

-104446 INTERIOR CLINIC SIGNS

ARTEMIDE : ALPHABET OF LIGHT _H40 cm

2023036DD AR0003_00_Signage Pag. 1

CUSTOMIZED BACKLIGTED LETTERS H 40 cm

Same selected typology as Type 1 _H 20 cm.

2023036DD AR0003_00_Signage Pag. 2

2023036DD AR0003_00_Signage Pag. 3

PANEL DIMENSION: 200 x 200 x 10

2023036DD AR0003_00_Signage Pag. 5

FLEX_ SIGN LINE PANEL

2023036DD AR0003_00_Signage Pag. 6

2023036DD AR0003_00_Signage Pag. 7

TAILORED Led box backlighted, made by CNC cutting and welded.

Refer to the selected examples:

2023036DD AR0003_00_Signage Pag. 8

2023036DD AR0003_00_Signage Pag. 9